Dazuna Nsep Pyq

NSEP Questions and Solutions
2007 – 2021
IOQP Physics Olympiad
Useful for APhO KVPY SA SX IIT-JEE
PHYSICS NSEP 2007-2008 EXAMINATION CAREER POINT
INDIAN ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICS TEACHERS

NATIONAL STANDARD EXAMINATION IN PHYSICS 2007-2008
Total time : 120 minutes (A-1, A-2 & B)
PART - A (Total Marks : 180)
SUB-PART A-1
(A) (B)
Q.1 The distance traveled by an object is given by
x = at + bt2/ (c + a) where t is time and a, b, c,
are constants. The dimensions of b and c
respectively are :
(A) [L2T–3], [L T–1] (B) [L T–2], [L T–1]
(C) [LT–1], [L2 T–1] (D) [L T –1], [L T–2]
Sol. [A] m m F = 2mg
Use the dimensional analysis. Note that the 2m
dimensions of a and c are the same as those of (A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 3 (D) 2 : 1
[length/time] and those of b are [length ×
(length/time) (time)2]. Sol. [C]
For arrangement (A), the acceleration of mass
Q.2 A person throws vertically up n balls per m is obviously [(2m – m)g/(2m + m)] = g/3.
second with the same velocity. He throws a ball For arrangement (B), the net force acting on
whenever the previous one is at its highest mass m is mg upwards so that the acceleration
point. The height to which the balls rise is : is g only and hence the result.
(A) g/n2 (B) 2gn (C) g/2n2 (D) 2gn2
Sol. [C] Q.5 A particle of mass m is made to move with
The time required for a ball to reach highest uniform speed v along the perimeter of a
point is (1/n) second giving initial velocity to regular hexagon. Magnitude of impulse
be (g/n). Use this in v2 = u2 – 2 gh to find h. applied at each corner is :
(A) mv (B) mv 3
Q.3 A particle moves at a constant speed v from
(C) mv/2 (D) mv / 3
point A to point B along a circle of radius r. If
points A and B have an angular separation of θ, Sol. [A]
the magnitude of change in velocity in moving The impulse is nothing but change in
from A to B is : momentum. For taking the difference of two
momenta, note that the angle between vectors
(A) zero (B) 2v sin (θ /2)
at the corner is 120º.
(C) 2v sin θ (D) 2v cos (θ/2)
Sol. [B]
Q.6 The maximum tension in the string of a
The change in velocity is [vB – vA] = [vB = + (–vA)].
pendulum is three times the minimum tension.
Find the magnitude nothing that the angle
If θ0 be the angular amplitude, cos θ0 is
between vB and vA is (180º – θ ).
(A) 1/2 (B) 3/4
(C) 3/5 (D) 2/3
Q.4 Two pulley arrangements (A) and (B) are as
Sol. [C]
shown in the figure. Neglect the masses of the
Tension in the string is maximum [mg(3 – 2
ropes and pulleys and the friction at the axle of
cosθ )] when it is in the vertical position
the pulleys. The ratio of the acceleration of
whereas tension is minimum [mg cosθ ] when
mass m in arrangement (A) to that in
arrangement (B) is the string is in the extreme position.
CAREER POINT, CP Tower, Road No.1, IPIA, Kota (Raj.) Ph.: 0744-3040000
Website : www.careerpointgroup.com, Email: info@careerpointgroup.com
1 / 10
Q.7 A body of mass 4m at rest explodes into three Q.10 A ball floats on mercury in a container with
fragments. Two of the fragments, each of mass volume V1 inside mercury. If the container is
m move with speed v in mutually perpendicular now covered and the air inside is pumped out,
directions. Total kinetic energy released in the volume V2 is found to be under mercury.
process is : Then,
(A) V1 = V2 (B) V1 > V2
(A) mv2 (B) 3mv2/2
2 (C) V2 > V1 (D) V2 = 0
(C) 2mv (D) 3mv2 Sol. [C]
Sol. [B] Since air is pumped out, upthrust due to air
Consider the conservation of linear momentum becomes zero and the ball sinks slightly more
along two perpendicular directions X and Y than before.
axes, to get the velocity of the largest particle
[(v/2)(– i – j)]. Then calculate the kinetic Q.11 Pressure of one litre of nitrogen (γ = 1.4) is
energy. 500 cm of mercury. It is compressed
adiabatically to 990 cc. The final pressure of
Q.8 Two masses m and M are attached to strings as the gas (in cm of mercury) is :
(A) 507 (B) 505
shown in the figure. In equilibrium tan θ is
(C) 495 (D) 502
Sol. [A]
Use the expression for adiabatic change to get
θ
(dp/p) + y (dV/V). After substintution dp = 7.
Note that there is an increase of pressure.
M
45° 45° Q.12 Two identical rings A and B are acted upon by
m torques τA and τB respectively. A is rotating
(A) 1 + (2M /m) (B) 1 + (2m /M) about an axis passing through the centre of
(C) 1 + (M/2m) (D) 1 + (m/2M) mass and perpendicular to the plane of the
Sol. [A] ring. B is rotating about a chord at a distance
Use the concept of balancing components of ( 1 2 ) times the radius of the ring. If the
forces and tensions along horizontal and angular acceleration of the rings is the same,
vertical directions at the two points where the then
masses m and M are attached. (A) τA = τB
(B) τA > τB
Q.9 Two bodies of masses 2 kg and 3 kg are (C) τA < τB
connected by a metal wire of cross section 0.04 (D) Nothing can be said about τA and τB as
mm2. Breaking stress of metal wire is 2.5 GPa. data are insufficient
The maximum force F that can be applied to 3 Sol. [A]
kg block so that wire does not break is : Using perpendicular and parallel axes
3 kg theorems it is found that the moments of
2 kg
F inertia in both the cases are the same.
Q.13 Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve around a

(A) 100 N (B) 150 N (C) 200 N (D) 250 N planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same
Sol. [D] sense. Their periods of revolution are 1 hour
If T is the tension in the string connecting the and 8 hour respectively. The radius of the orbit
two bodies, (T/A) ≤ the breaking stress, where of S1 is 104km. When S1 is closest to S2, the
A is the area of cross section. Deduce the angular speed of S2 as observed by an
relation T = (2/5) F and then the result. astronaut in S1 is
(A) π rad/hr (B) π/3 rad/hr
(C) 2π rad/hr (D) π/2 rad/hr
2 / 10
Sol. [B] Q.18 A long thin rod AB is charged uniformly. The

Use Kepler's law to get the radius of orbit of S2 electric field at a point C is directed
to be 4 × 104 km. The linear speeds of S1 and S2 C
happen to be 2π × 104 km/hr and π × 104 km/hr.
Then, the angular speed of S2 as seen from S1 is
A + + + + + + + + + + + + + + B
(∆v/∆r).
(A) parallel to the rod
(B) perpendicular to the rod
Q.14 If a section of a soap bubble of radius r by a (C) along the bisector of the angle ACB
plane through its centre is considered, the force (D) along a line dividing the angle ACB in the
on the half due to surface tension is : ratio BC : AC
(A) 2π rT (B) 4π rT Sol. [C]
(C) π r T
2
(D) 2r T Check it by considering two elements at the
Sol. [B] two ends then two symmetrically situated
Note that force = 2 (2π r) T. elements of the rod.
Q.19 An electric field is given by E = yî + xĵ
Q.15 Volume of a gas (Cp/CV = γ) expands from a volt/m. The work done in moving a charge of
volume V to 2V at constant pressure p. The
10µC from a point r1 = 3î + 4 ĵ to another
change in internal energy is :
(A) R / (γ – 1) (B) pV r2 = 2î + 6 ĵ is :
(C) pV / (γ – 1) (D) γ pV (γ – 1)
(A) 10 5 J (B) – 10 5 J
Sol. [C]
–6
Use the expression for the change in internal (C) 10 2 × 10 J (D) zero
energy = nCV dT. Also use the substitution Sol. [D]
CV = R / (γ – 1) and pV/T = constant. Use the relation : work done = charge ×
potential difference. Then, the potential
Q.16 A satellite is revolving round the earth with difference (-∫ E· dr) comes out to be negative
orbital speed v0. If it imagined to stop integral of (y dx + x dy), that is, of [d (xy)] to
suddenly, the speed with which it will strike the
be evaluated between(3,4) and (2, 6).
surface of the earth would be (ve – escape
velocity of a body from earth's surface)
(A) ve2 /v0 (B) v0 Q.20 When the switch S is closed in the circuit
(C) (ve2 – v02)1/2 (D) (ve2 – 2 v02)1/2 shown below, the current that flows through it
Sol. [D] is
Use the concept of conservation of energy and 10 Ω 15 Ω
the expressions for escape velocity and orbital + 15 V + 15 V
velocity.
20 Ω
Q.17 A car moves with a speed of 60 km /hr from
point A to point B and then with the speed of S
40 km / hr from point B to point C. Further it
moves to a point D with a speed equal to its
average speed between A and C. Points A, B, C (A) zero (B) 15/26 A
and D are collinear and equidistant. The (C) 15/13 A (D) 5/26 A
average speed of the car between A and D is : Sol. [B]
(A) 30 km/ hr (B) 50 km / hr Take the potential at the junction of resistors to
(C) 48 km / hr (D) 60 km / hr be V and then use Kirchhoff' s current law at
Sol. [C]
this junction. Obtain V and then the current
Noting that AB = BC, average speed between
A and C is 48 km/hr and that between A and D through 20 ohm resistor, that is, the switch.
is also 48 km/hr.
3 / 10
Q.21 In a standing wave formed as a result of Q.25 In case of an adiabatic process the correct
reflection from a surface, the ratio of the relation in terms of pressure p and density ρ of
amplitude at an antinode to that at node is x.
a gas is
The fraction of energy that is reflected is :
(A) [(x – 1) / x]2 (B) [x / (x + 1)]2 (A) p ργ = constant (B) pγ ργ – 1 constant
(C) p ργ – 1 = constant (D) p ρ– γ = constant
2
(C) [(x – 1)/(x + 1)] (D) [1/x]2
Sol. [C] Sol. [D]
If ai and ar denote the amplitudes of the incident
Note that pVγ = constant and that ρ is inversely
and the reflected waves then the net amplitude
at the antinode is (ai + ar) and that at the node proportional to V.
is (ai – ar). From this we get (ar / ai) Q.26 Three rods of the same cross section and made
= [(x – 1)/(x + 1)]. Note that the energy is of the same material form the sides of a
proportional to square of the amplitude. triangle ABC as shown. The points A and B
are maintained at temperatures T and 2T
Q.22 The fundamental frequency of a sonometer respectively in the steady state. Assuming that
wire of length l is n0. A bridge is now only heat conduction takes place, the temperature
introduced at a distance of ∆l (<< l) from the at point C is :
centre of the wire. The lengths of wire on the A
two sides of the bridge are now vibrated in
60°
their fundamental modes. Then, the beat
frequency nearly is :
(A) n0 ∆l / l (B) 8 n0 ∆l / l
(C) 2 n0 ∆l / l (D) n0 ∆l / 2l B C
Sol. [B] (A) [(2 2 + 3 ) /(2 + 3 )]T
Note that the beat frequency is (n1 = n2) and the
(B) [3 2 /(2 + 3 )]T
corresponding vibrating lengths are (l/2 – ∆)
and (l/2 + ∆l). (C) [2 / 3 ]T
(D) [ 5 / 2]T
Q.23 Two open organ pipes of fundamental
frequencies n1 and n2 are joined in series. The Sol. [A]
fundamental frequency of the new pipe so In s steady state, the heat conducted from B to
obtained will be : C is the same as from C to A.
(A) n1 + n2 (B) n1n2/ (n1 + n2)
(C) n1n2/(n1 – n2) (D) n12 + n 2 2 Q.27 A soap bubble filled with helium floats in air.
Sol. [C] Let mw and mHe be the mass of the wall of the
Lengths of the organ pipes are (v/2n1) and bubble and that of the helium gas inside,
(v/2n2) where v is the speed of sound in air. respectively. If density of helium is 0.1384
The fundamental frequency of the new organ
times that of air, then :
pipe (after the two are joined) will be [v/2(n1 +
n2)]. (A) mw > mHe
(B) mw < mHe
Q.24 The specific heat of a solid at low temperature (C) mw = mHe
varies according to the relation c = k T3 where (D) nothing can be said about mw and mHe as
k is a constant. The heat required to raise the data are insufficient
temperature of a mass m of such a solid from
Sol. [A]
T = 0 K to T = 20 K is Density of helium is less than half the density
(A) 2 × 104 mk (B) 4 × 104 mk of air and hence the mass of helium is less than
(C) 8 × 104 mk (D) 16 × 104 mk half the mass of air. Note that (mw + mHe) ≤
Sol. [B] mair.
Integrate (mCdT) between 0 K and 20 K.
4 / 10
Q.28 A ball A moving with certain velocity in Q.31 A charge + 6µC is situated inside a closed
positive X axis direction collides with a surface. The flux, in volt-m, through a portion
of the surface subtending a solid angle of (π/2)
stationary ball B. After collision their
at the point where the charge is situated is
directions of motion make angles α and β with (A) + (1.5/ε0) × 10–6 (B) + (6/ε0) × 10–6
the X axis. The possible values of α and β are (C) – (1.5/ε0) × 10–6 (D) + (0.75/ε0) × 10–6
Sol. [A]
(A) α = 30° and β = – 45°
Note that the flux will be [(π/2)/4π] (q/ε0)
(B) α = 90° and β = – 120°
(C) α = 0° and β = – 30° Q.32 A metal sheet 14 cm × 2cm of uniform
thickness is cut into two pieces of width two
(D) α = 45° and β = 0° cm. The two pieces are joined and laid along
Sol. [A] XY plane as shown. The centre of mass has
This is the only possibility where the condition the coordinates
for conservation of momentum can be satisfied. Y
Q.29 Two identical thin planoconvex lenses of

refractive index n are silvered, one on the plane
side and the other on the convex side. The ratio
of their focal lengths is :
X
(A) n / (n – 1) (B) (n – 1) / n O
(C) (n + 1) / n (D) n (A) (1, 1) (B) (19/7, 19/7)
Sol. [A] (C) (8/7, 8/7) (D) (12/7, 12/7)
When the plane face of a planoconvex lens is Sol. [B]
coated, the focal length is given by R/[2(n – 1)] Note that the centres of mass of the vertical
and it is R/2n when the convex face is coated. and the horizontal pieces are (1, 4) and (5, 1)
respectively and their masses are in the ratio
Q.30 Two plane mirrors subtend angle θ between 4 : 3.
them. A ray of light incident parallel to one of
Q.33 In a double slit experiment, the wavelength of
them retraces its path after n reflections. The monochromatic light used is λ and the distance
graph of θ (Y axis) versus n (X axis) is : between the slits is d. The screen is at a
(A) a straight line through origin distance D from the slits. If a bright fringe is
(B) a parabola formed opposite to a slit on the screen, the
order of the fringe is :
(C) a rectangular hyperbola
(A) d/2D (B) d2/λ D
(D) a straight line with a intercept on Y axis 2
(C) d /2λ D (D) λ D /d2
Sol. [C] Sol. [C]
Refer to the ray diagram and note that for four The distance from the centre of the screen is
reflections from the two mirrors, we have d/2 = nX where X is the fringe width and n is
90°– 3θ = θ, so that θ = 90° /4 = 90°/(number the order of the fringe.
of reflections n). Therefore, the product of θ
and n is a constant so that the graph is a Q.34 A lens formed by two watch glasses, as shown,
rectangular hyperbola. behaves like a
90–3θ
3θ
3θ
2θ 2θ
θ θθ (A) convex lens (B) concave lens
(C) glass plate (D) mirror
5 / 10
Sol. [C] Sol. [C]

Note that for each of the watch glasses, the two Note that the emf induced in the inductor is [L
radii of curvature happen to be the same so that (di/dt)] and energy stored per unit time is the
their focal lengths happen to be infinite. power, that is, [emf × current]
Q.39 According to Bohr theory, for the stability of
Q.35 Six resistors each of 10 ohm are connected as
an atom, angular momentum of an electron in
shown. The equivalent resistance between
points X and Y is : an orbit is quantized. This is a necessary
X condition according to :
(A) Pauli's exclusion principle
(B) the concept of wave associated with an
electron
(C) correspondence principle
Y (D) none of the above
Sol. [B]
(A) 20 ohm (B) 5 ohm
(C) 25/3 ohm (D) 10 ohm Note that angular momentum mvr = n(h/2 π)
giving n [h/(mv)] = 2 π r. Note that [h/(mv)] is
Sol. [B] the de Broglie wavelength.
Redrawing the circuit reveals that five of the
resistors form a balanced Wheatstone's network Q.40 A radioactive substance with decay constant of
between points X and Y with the remaining 0.5/s is being produced at a constant rate of 50
resistor in parallel appearing across X and Y. nuclei per second. If there are no nuclei
present initially, the time (in second) after
Q.36 Two long parallel straight conductors carry which 25 nuclei will be present is :
currents i1 and i2 (i1 > i2).When the currents are (A) 1 (B) 2 ln (4/3)
in the same direction, the magnetic field at a (C) ln 2 (D) ln (4/3)
point midway between the wires is 20 µT. If Sol. [B]
the direction of i2 is reversed, the field becomes Use the relation di/dt = 50 – λN and integrate
50 µT. The ratio of the currents i1/i2 is : to get N = 50/λ [1 – e–λt]. Then use λ = 0.5/s
(A) 5/2 (B) 7/3 (C) 4/3 (D) 5/3 and N = 25.
Sol. [B]
Note that when the currents are in the sense the
Sub-Part A-2
magnetic fields due the two wires subtract and
when the currents are in opposite sense they
add.
Q.41 Two particles having the same specific charge
Q.37 Magnetic field at the centre of a circular loop enter a uniform magnetic field with the same
of area A is B. The magnetic moment of the speed but at angles of 30° and 60° with the
loop is : field. Let a, b, and c be the ratios of their
(A) BA2/(µ0π) (B) BA A / µ 0 periods, radii and pitches of their helical paths
respectively, then
(C) BA A /(µ 0 π) (D) 2BA A /(µ 0 π )
Sol. [D] (A) abc > 1 (B) a + b = 2 C
2
Use the expression for the magnetic field at the (C) a = C (D) a b = C
centre of a circular coil [B = (µ0 i) / 2r]and that Sol. [A,B,C,D]
for the magnetic moment [M = iA]. Note that Use the expression for periodic time T = (2π m)
area A = π r2. /(Bq sin θ), for radius of the circular path
Q.38 A current of 1A through a coil of inductance of r = (mv)/(Bq sin θ) and for the pitch of the
200 mH is increasing at a rate of 0.5 A/s. The helical path p = T (v cos θ) where the symbols
energy stored in the inductor per second is : their usual meanings. With this we get, a = b = 3
(A) 0.5 J/s (B) 5.0 J/s
(C) 0.1 J/s (D) 2.0 J/s and c = 3.
6 / 10
Q.42 Let v and a bet he instantaneous velocity and Q.46 A ball A moving with a velocity 5 m/s collides
the acceleration respectively of a particle elastically with another identical ball at rest
moving in a plane. The rate of change of speed such that the velocity of A makes an angle of
(dv/dt) of the particle is : 30° with the line joining the centres of the
(A) | a | balls. Then,
(B) (v ⋅ a)/ | v |
(A) speed of A after collision is (5/2) m/s
(C) the component of a in the direction of v
(D) the component of a perpendicular to v (B) speed of B after collision is (5 3 / 2) m/s
(C) balls A and B move at right angles after
Sol. [B,C] collision
Use v2 = vX2 + vy2, differentiate to get (dv/dt) (D) Kinetic energy is not conserved as the
= (vx ax + vy ay)/ v = (v ⋅ a)/ v. Also note that collision is not head-on
(v/v) is the unit vector along v.
Sol. [A,B,C]
Consider the conservation of kinetic energy
Q.43 A piece of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in
water and 120 g in a liquid. Then, specific and the fact that the momentum must be
gravity of : conserved along two directions, namely (i) line
(A) metal is 3 (B) metal is 7 joining their centres and, (ii) perpendicular to
(C) liquid is 3 (D) liquid is 1/3 that line.
Sol. [B,C]
Use relation : relative density of metal = Wair/ Q.47 For any monoatomic gas the quantity/quantities
(Wair – Wwater) and loss of weight in liquid = independent of the nature of the gas at the
upthrust in liquid. same temperature is /are
(A) the number of molecules is one mole
Q.44 Two sphere A and B have the same radii but
(B) the number of molecules in equal volume
the heat capacity of A is greater than that of B.
The surfaces of both are painted black. They (C) the translational kinetic energy of one
are heated to the same temperature and allowed mole
to cool in vacuum. Then, (D) the kinetic energy of unit mass
(A) A cools faster than B Sol. [A,C]
(B) both A and B cool at the same rate Consider the properties of one mole of any gas
(C) at any temperature the ratio of their rates of at a given temperature.
cooling is a constant
(D) B cools faster than A Q.48 A square coil OLMN of side 5 cm is placed in
Sol. [C,D]
a magnetic field B = 3kt2 (as shown in the
At any temperature θ, both the spheres lose
figure) where k is a constant, B is in tesla and t
heat at the same rate which is C (dθ/dt) in
is in second. At time t = 5 second
general.
X
O N
Q.45 Two different coils have self inductance
L1 = 10 mH and L2 = 12 mH. the currents in
both the coils are increased at the same rate and r
the power in the two coils is also the same at X X X B
some instant of time. At that instant of time let
i1, V1 and W1 be the current, the induced emf
and the energy stored respectively in the first L M
X
coil. Let i2, V2 and W2 be the corresponding (A) induced current flows from O to L
quantities for the second coil. Then, (B) induced current flows from L to O
(A) i1/i2 = 6/5 (B) i1/i2 = 5/6
(C) induced emf is 75k mV
(C) W2/W1 = 5/6 (D) V2/V1 = 6/5
(D) induced emf is 1.875 k V
Sol. [A,C,D]
Use the relation power P = Vi = L(di/dt) i. Sol. [A,C]
Since P and (di/dt) are the same, L1i1 = L2i2. Use the expression : emf induced = dφ/dt = l2
Note that the energy stored in an inductor is (dB/dt) and consider the sense in which the
(1/2 Li2). induced emf sends the current.
7 / 10
Q.49 Two card A and B are moving in the same m

direction with speeds 36 km/hr and 54 km/hr
respectively. Car B is ahead of A. If A sounds l1 l0
horn of frequency 1000 Hz and the speed of Sol. The length of the stretched spring
sound in air is 340 m/s, the frequency of sound
l = (l02 + x2)1/2 ≈ l0 + x2 (2l0) so that the
received by the driver of car B is
extension of the spring is (l – l0) = x2 / (2l0).
(A) 928.57 Hz (B) 984.84 Hz
(C) 946.37 Hz (D) 938.47 Hz Now the tension in the spring will be T = k
Sol. [B] [x2/(2l0)]. The restoring force will be 2 T sin
Noting that speed of the observer is 15 m/s and θ = kx3 / l02where sin θ ≈ θ = x/l. This gives
that of the source is 10 m/s apply Doppler's the acceleration proportional to x3. The motion
relation for the apparent frequency. is obviously not simple harmonic.
m
Q.50 A glass prism is immersed in a hypothetical
liquid. The curves showing the refractive index x
n as a function of wavelength λ for glass and
l0 l0
liquid are as shown in the figure. When a ray of
white light is incident on the prism parallel to
the base –
n Q.52 A body of mass m is projected inside a liquid
liquid at an angle θ0 with horizontal at an initial
velocity v0. If the liquid develops a velocity
dependent force F = – kv where k is a positive
constant, determine the x and the y
components of the velocity at any instant. Also
glass determine its range.
Sol. To determine the component of velocity in the
O λyellow λ horizontal direction, consider the equation
(A) yellow ray travels without deviation Fx = – k vx and integrate to get ln v = – (kt/m)
(B) blue ray is deviated towards the vertex + ln C where the constant of integration C can
(C) red ray is deviated towards the base be determined by using the initial condition
(D) there is no dispersion that at t = 0, vx = v0 cos θ0. This gives after
Sol. [A,B,C]
substitution vx = v0 cos θ0 (e–kt/m). Similarly
Note that the refractive indices of both the glass
and the liquid are the same for yellow and the vertical component of velocity can be
hence no deviation. However, red ray enters determined by considering the equation
from a rarer to a relatively denser medium Fy = – kvy – mg. While integrating we use the
while blue ray enters from a denser medium to condition that at t = 0, vy = v0 sin θ0. This
a relatively rarer medium and hence the gives vy = (m/k) {[k/m) v0 sin θ0 + g] e–kt/m –
corresponding deviations. g}. The range can then be determined by
writing Fx = – k vx as m (dvxdt) = – k vx and
PART B Marks : 60 further as mvx(dvxdx) = – k vx. this given the
* All questions are compulsory. range xmax = (m v0 cos θ0)/k.
* All questions carry equal marks
Q.53 Identical thin rods of length 2l carry equal
Q.51 A small bob joins two light unstretched
charges + q, uniformly distributed along their
identical springs fixed at their far ends and
arranged along a straight line, as shown in the lengths. The rods lie along X axis with their
figure. The bob is displaced in a direction centres separated by a distance of a > 2l. Show
perpendicular to the line of the springs by x that the magnitude of the force exerted by one
(<<I0) and then released. Obtain an expression rod on the other is given by
for the acceleration of the bob in terms of the F = (1/4πε0) (q2/4l2) ln [a2/(a2 – 4 l2)]
displacement x. Is the motion simple harmonic ?
8 / 10
Sol. Referring to the figure, write the electric field Q.55 A container of volume 0.02 m3 contains a
at a point distance d from one end of the rod. mixture of neon and argon gases at a
This comes out to be [(1/4πε0)q/ {d(d + l)}]. temperature of 27°C and pressure of 1 × 105
Using this write the electric field dE at a point N/m2. The total mass of the mixture is 28g. If
the molecular weights of neon and argon are
distance x from the origin where the centre of
20 and 40 respectively, determine the masses
one of the rods is situated. This is given by dE of the individual gases in the mixture,
= (1/4πε0) q/[(x – l) (x + l)]. From this, the assuming them to be ideal. (R = 8.314 J/mole
force dF on a small element of charge λdx of K)
the other rod can be written as (dE × dq). Sol. Let m1 and m2 be the masses of neon and
integrating this relation between (a – l) and argon respectively. Then, (m1 + m2) = 28. The
(a + l) we get the result. number of moles of the two gases are (m1/M1)
 1 q  and (m2/M2) where M1 and M2 are the
E=  ⋅ 
q  4πε 0 d(d + 2)  corresponding molecular weights. Using
pV = nRT where n represents the total number
2L d
of moles, we get m1 = 4 g and m2 = 24g
Y Q.56 A metal rod of length 1 m is clamped at two

dx points as shown in the figure. Find the
x minimum frequency of natural longitudinal
q q X oscillation of the rod. (Young's modulus
–L O (a + l) Y = 1.6 × 1011 N/m2, density of metal
+L a–L
a ρ = 2500 kg/m3 )
P Q
R S
Q.54 A liquid is kept in a cylindrical vessel which is
rotating about its axis, as a result of which the
liquid rises at the sides. Show that the section 5 cm 15 cm
of the surface of the liquid by a vertical plane Sol. Using the relation v = (Y/ρ)1/2 the speed of
containing the axis is a parabola. Determine the longitudinal wave is 8000 m/s. Nodes will be
difference in height of the liquid at the centre formed at the clamped positions and there
of the vessel and its sides.
should be integral number of loops between
Sol. Referring to the figure, consider a particle at a
the nodes. If a denotes the number of loops
point P on the surface. We have N cos θ = m g
and N sin θ = m x ω2, giving tan θ = (x ω2) / g. between P and Q, then a(λ/2) = 80 or aλ =
The Slope of the curve (dy/dx) is itself tan θ. 160. Now, since R and S are free ends, the
With this we get the differential equation number of loops between P-R and Q-S must be
(dy/dx) = (x ω2) / g. Solve this differential odd multiples of (λ/4) say, b and c
equation using the conditions that at x = 0, respectively. This gives (2b – 1) (λ/4) = 5 and
y = 0 and at x = r, y = h. This gives h = (ω2 r2) / (2c – 1) (λ/4) = 15. For frequency to be
(2g). minimum, a, b and c must be smallest integers.
Y With this a = 8, b = 1 and c = 3, and then,
frequency comes to be 40 kHz.
r
section Q.57 The mercury thread in a glass thermometer
by a appears to be half as thick as the cylindrical
N θ
vertical h stem. Calculate the actual diameter o the
plane P (x, y) mercury thread if the actual diameter of the
mg stem is 3mm. Refractive index of glass is 1.5.
X How does the answer depend upon the
O
external diameter ? Draw a next ray diagram.
9 / 10
Sol. Refer to the ray diagram and write sin i1 = r/R

and sin i2 = r'/R. This gives the refractive index
n = sin i2 / sin i1 = r' / r = (apparent radius) / S1
(actual radius) giving actual radius as 1 mm. * O
S S2
the answer is obviously independent of the Screen
external diameter R.
r → actual radius Sol. Let the central maximum be formed at P at a
i2 r′ → apparent radius distance x from O. Then, the path difference
i1 O → Point from where {S2P + [(µg/µm) – 1] t} – S1P = 0, where t is
R a ray starts the thickness of the glass plate and µg, µm are
r′ O the refractive indices of the glass of the plate
i2 r
and the medium respectively. This gives x =
4.33 mm. The path difference for waves
reaching at point O is [(µg / µm) – 1] t which
corresponds to a phase difference of (13π/3). If
I0 denotes the intensity at point O and Imax the
maximum intensity, then the ratio I0/Imax = ¾.
Q.58 A glass prism in the shape of a quarter cylinder Note that the net intensity I at any point due to
lies on a horizontal table. A horizontal beam of two waves with intensities I1 and I2 is [I1 + I2 +
light falls on its vertical plane surface, as 2 (I1I2)1/2 cos δ], where δ is the phase
shown. If the radius R of they cylinder is 3 cm difference.
and the refractive index n of the glass is 1.5,
where on the table beyond the cylinder will a Q.60 It is proposed to use the nuclear reaction
patch of light be formed ? 84Po
210
→ 82Pb206 + 2He4 to produce 2kW of
electric power in a generator. The half life of
polonium (84Po210) is 138.6 days. Assuming
efficiency of the generator to be 10%,
calculate how many grams of polonium are
Sol. Referring to the ray diagram, we have, sin required per day.
θc = 1/n and cos θc = R/(R + x) giving x = 1.03 [Masses of nuclei : Po210 – 209.98264 amu,
cm. Now consider the lower part of the Pb206 – 205.97440 amu, He4 – 4.00260 amu
cylinder as a planoconvex lens to get f = 2R = and 1 amu = 931 MeV]
6. cm. Thus the path of light will be found Sol. The mass difference (∆m) between the two
between 1.03 cm and 3 cm beyond the cylinder. isotopes is 0.00564 amu which is equivalent to
5.25 MeV. The decay constant λ turns out to
be (0.693/138.6) = 0.005 /day. If M grams of
θC Po210 are required per day, the number of
nuclei in M grams is about (6 × 1023/210) M =
R N, say. Then, λN should be the number of
θC nuclei present. The energy produced per day
R x will then be λN (5.25 MeV × 1.6 × 10–19) J.
This energy is expected to be (2kW × 24 × 60
Q.59 The Young's double slit experiment is done in × 60) J. Equating the two we get M = 14.4
water of refractive index 4/3. A light source of gram. Since the efficiency is 10%, the amount
wavelength 6000Å is used and the slits are 0.45 required is 144 gram.
mm apart. One of the slits is covered by a glass
plate of thickness 10.4 µm and refractive index
3/2. The interference pattern is observed on a
screen placed 1.5 m from the slits. Determine
(1) the location of the central maximum, and
(2) the intensity of light at point O relative to
the maximum intensity.
10 / 10

SUB-PART A-1
Q.1 The quantity [(nh)/2πqB]1/2 where n is a Q.4 A small bob attached to a string of length l is
positive integer, h is Plank's constant, q is suspended from a rigid support and rotates
charge and B is magnetic field, has the with uniform speed along a circle in a
dimensions of - horizontal plane. Let θ be the angle made by
(A) area (B) speed the string with the vertical. Then the length of
(C) length (D) acceleration a simple pendulum having the same period is -
Sol. [C] (A) l/cos θ (B) l sin θ
Consider the expression for the energy of a
(C) l/sin θ (D) l cos θ
quantum E = hv to get the dimensions of h as
those of (energy X time). Again the expression for Sol. [D]
the force F acting on a charge q moving with The period of revolution of conical pendulum is
velocity v in a magnetic field B is qvB sin θ. This l cos θ
gives the dimensions of qB as those of T = 2π . This can be compared with the
(force/velocity). Use these to determine the g
dimensions of the quantity under consideration, expression of period of a simple pendulum.
nothing that n is a dimensionless quantity.
Q.5 Acceleration – time graph of a particle moving
Q.2 In vernier calipers, m divisions of main scale along X axis is as shown. The particle will
coincide with (m + 1) divisions of vernier have the velocity same as its initial velocity at –
scale, If each division of main scale is d units, a
the least count of instrument is - m/s2
(A) d/ (m – 1) (B) d / (m +1)
(C) d /m (D) md / (m + 1)
Sol. [B] t
Since m divisions of main scale are equivalent to O 5 10 S
(m + 1) divisions of vernier scale, one division of
vernier scale is equivalent to [m/(m+1)] divisions (A) 10 s (B) (10 + 3 ) s
of main scale. Now, use the definition : least (C) (10 + 5 3 ) s (D) (10 + 2 3 ) s
count of vernier = one division of main scale –
Sol. [C]
one division of vernier scale.
Let A be the acceleration at t = 0. Change in
velocity in first 10 second will be 5A + (1/2) 5A
Q.3 Vectors a and b include an angle θ between = 15A/2 which is equal to the area under the
them. If (a + b) and (a – b) respectively subtend curve. To have velocity same as the initial
angles α and β with a, then (tan α + tan β) is velocity, the net change in velocity should be
(A) (ab sin θ) / (a2 + b2 cos2θ) zero. For this the area under the curve has to be
(B) (2ab sin θ)/ (a2 – b2cos2θ)  15A 
(C) (a2 sin2 θ) / (a2 + b2cos2 θ) –  . Note that the area below the X axis is
 2 
(D) (b2 sin2 θ) / (a2 – b2cos2 θ) negative. Slope of straight line after t = 5s is
Sol. [B] (– A/5). If point (10, 0) is used as origin,
b sin θ equation of the line will be given by
Use the relation : tan α = where α is
a + b cos θ y = (– A/5)x. At x = t1, y = (– A/5)t1. Now, area
the angle made by the vector (a + b) with a. between x = 10 and x = t1 will be [(1/2)t1 X
b sin θ (– A/5)t1] = (– t12A)/10. This can be equated to
Similarly, tan β = where β is the (– 15A/2) so as to get t12 = 75 or t1 = 5"3s. this is
a – b cos θ
the time from 10 s and hence the total time is
angle made by the vector (a – b) with a. Note that
(10 + 5"3) second.
angle between a and (– b) is (180° – θ).
1 / 11
Q.6 A block of mass m is placed on a inclined plane cylinder

with angle of inclination θ. Let N, fL and F
respectively represents the normal reaction,
limiting force of friction and the net force down
the inclined plane. Let µ be the coefficient of
friction. The dependence of N, fL and F on θ is
indicated by plotting graphs as shown below.
Then, curves (1), (2) and (3) respectively
represent (A) 2 ms–2 (B) 4 ms–2
(C) 8 ms–2 (D) 6 ms–2
Sol. [B]
(2) Consider the cart moving to the right with
(1) acceleration a. Then, a pseudo force ma acts on
(3) the cylinder (of mass m) to the left. In the
limiting case, taking the moments about a point
of contact of the cylinder with the cart on the
O π/2 θ
left, clockwise moment (ma X h/2) =
anticlockwise moment (ma X d/2) where h and d
(A) N, F and fL (B) F, fL and N are the height and diameter of the cylinder
(C) F, N and fL (D) fL, N and F respectively.
Sol. [C]
The normal reaction N (= mg cos θ) and the
Q.9 Water flows out of the hole on the side of a
frictional force fL(= µ mg cos θ) vary as cosine of
bucket and follows a parabolic path. If the
the angle of inclination θ. The net downward
force is given by [mg sin θ – µ mg cos θ]. Note bucket falls freely under gravity, ignoring air
that the downward force is zero up to the angle of resistance, the water flow -
repose, that is, till the frictional force has not (A) follows a straight line path relative the
attained its limiting value. falling bucket
(B) follows a parabolic path relative the falling
Q.7 When a solid sphere rolls without slipping bucket
down an inclined plane making an angle θ with (C) decreases but continues to flow
the horizontal, the acceleration of its centre of (D) stops
mass is a. If the same sphere slides without
Sol. [D]
friction its acceleration a′ is
Under a free fall the water head above the hole
(A) (7/2) a (B) (5/7) a
does not exert any pressure. Then, the pressures
(C) (7/5) a (D) (5/2) a
on the two sides of the hole become equal and
Sol. [C]
hence the flow stops.
The acceleration of the sphere when it slides
without friction is (g sin θ). When the sphere rolls
without slipping, the acceleration is (5/7) (g sin θ) Q.10 A spring has length l and spring constant k. It
and hence the answer. is cut into two pieces of lengths l1 and l2 such
that l1 = nl2. such that l1 = nl2. The force
Q.8 A 2 kg cylinder rests on a cart as shown in the constant of spring of length l1 is
figure. The coefficient of static friction (A) k (l + n) (B) k (l + n) / n
between the cylinder and the cart is 0.5. The (C) k (D) k/(l + n)
cylinder is 4 cm in diameter and 10 cm in Sol. [B]
height. Taking g = 10 m/s2, the minimum The length l1 = [n/(n + 1)]l. Noting that the
acceleration of the cart needed to make the elongation is proportional to the length, the force
cylinder tip over is about
constant becomes [k (n + 1)/n].
2 / 11
Q.11 Consider two hollow glass spheres, one Q.13 A disc of radius R = 10 cm oscillates as a
containing water and the other containing physical pendulum about an axis perpendicular
mercury. Each liquid fills about one tenth of to the pane of the disc at a distance r from its
the volume of the sphere. In zero gravity center. If r = R/4, the approximate period of
environment - oscillation is -
(A) 0.84 s (B) 0.94 s
(A) water and mercury float freely inside the
(C) 1.26 s (D) 1.42 s
spheres
Sol. [B]
(B) water forms a layer on the glass while Use the expression for the periodic time of a
mercury floats
I
(C) mercury forms a layer on the glass while physical pendulum : T = 2 π where I is
mgh
water floats
the moment of inertia of the disc about the axis
(D) water and mercury both form a layer on the
under consideration. In this case it is (mR2/2 +
glass mR2/16) = 9mR2/16. The distance of the centre
Sol. [B] of mass from the point of suspension is h = R/4.
Note that cohesive force among mercury
molecules is greater than adhesive force between Q.14 Sachin (55 kg) and Kapil (65 kg) are sitting at
glass and mercury molecules, Also, adhesive the two ends of a boat at rest in still water. The
force between water and glass molecules is boat weighs 100 kg and is 3.0 m long. Sachin
greater than cohesive force among water walks down to Kapil and shakes hand. the boat
molecules. gets displaced by -
(A) zero m (B) 0.75 m
Q.12 A uniformly thick plate in the shape of an (C) 3.0 m (D) 2.3 m
arrowhead has dimensions as shown. The Sol. [B]
Kapil and the boat can be considered as one body
centre of mass lies at a point
of mass mb = (65 +100) = 165 kg. Note that the
centre of mass of the system remains unchanged
since no external force acts on the system. Let
O mS be the mass of Sachin and ∆xs,∆xb be the
6 cm
displacements of the combined body of mass mb
and Sachin respectively with reference to the
centre of mass. Then use the equation ms∆xs +
3 6 mb∆xb = 0, to get the answer.
cm cm
(A) 1.5 cm to the right of O
Q.15 A uniform solid disc of radius R and mass m is
(B) 3 cm to the right of O free to rotate on a frictionless pivot through a
(C) O itself point on its rim. The disc is released from rest
(D) 1 cm to the right of O in the position where the diameter through the
Sol. [D] pivot is along horizontal. The speed of its
Note that the centre of mass of a uniform thick centre of mass when the diameter through the
triangular sheet is at the centroid which divides a pivot is vertical is
median in a ratio 2 : 1. The required center of (A) (2/3)(gR)1/2 (B) (gR)1/2
1/2
mass must be on the line of symmetry passing (C) (2gR) (D) 2(gR/3)1/2
through O and the vertex to the right. Consider Sol. [D]
the shape of arrowhead to be obtained by cutting Moment of inertia about the axis through the
the triangular part to the left (with base 6 cm and pivot on the rim of the disc is (mR2/2 + mR2) =
height 3 cm) from the uncut triangular sheet with 3mR2/2. using the principle that change in
potential energy (mgR) is equal to the gain of
base 6 cm and height 9 cm. The ratio of masses of
kinetic energy (Iω2/2) gives the answer. Also use
these two is 27 : 9, the thickness being uniform.
v = Rω.
3 / 11
Q.16 A 40.0 kg boy is standing on a plank of mass Q.19 A metal wire of length L1 and area of cross
160 kg. The plank originally at rest, is free to section A is attached to a rigid support.
slide on a smooth frozen lake. The boy walks Another metal wire of length L2 and of the
along the plank at a constant speed of 1.5 m/s same cross sectional area is attached to the free
relative to the plank. The speed of the boy end of the first wire. A body of mass M is then
relative to the ice surface is - suspended from the free end of the second
(A) + 1.8 m/s (B) – 1.2 m/s wire. If Y1 and Y2 are the Yong's moduli of the
(C) + 1.2 m/s (D) + 1.5 m/s wires respectively, the effective force constant
Sol. [C]
of the system of two wires is -
The system is not subjected to any external force
(A) [(Y1 Y2)A] / [2(Y1L2 + Y2L1)]
and hence conservation of momentum can be
used. Let mb and mp represent the masses of the (B) [(Y1 Y2)A] / (L1 L2)]1/2
boy and the plank. Let vbi, vpi and vbp be the (C) [(Y1 Y2)A] / (Y1L2 + Y2L1)
velocity of the boy with respect to ice, that of the (D) (Y1 Y2)1/2 A / (L1 L2)1/2
plank with respect to ice and that of the boy with Sol. [C]
respect to the plank respectively. Then, mb vbi + Using the usual expression for the Young's
mp vpi = 0, also vbi = vbp + vpi. modulus, the force constant for the wire can be
written as k = F/∆l = YA/L where the symbols
Q.17 When a soap bubble is given an electric charge, have their usual meanings. Now, the two wires
(A) it contracts together will have an effective force constant
(B) it expands (k1k2/(k1 + k2)]. Substituting the corresponding
(C) its size remains the same lengths and the Young's moduli we get the
(D) it expands or contracts depending upon answer.
whether the charge is positive or negative
Sol. [B] Q.20 Four moles of carbon monoxide are mixed
For an unelectrified soap bubble force due to with four moles of carbon dioxide. Assuming
excess pressure from inside is balanced by the the gases to be ideal, the ratio of specific heats
force due to surface tension. When it is given an
is
electric charge, there is an outward normal force
(A) 15/11 (B) 41/30 (C) 4/3 (D) 7/4
(σ2/2ε0 per unit area, where σ is the surface
Sol. [A]
charge density) that expands the bubble.
Use the expression for the ratio of specific heats
Q.18 A wooden block floats in a liquid with 40% of n1C pl + n 2 C p 2
of a mixture : γ = . Also note
its volume inside the liquid. When the vessel n1C v l + n 2 C v 2
containing the liquid starts rising upwards with that Cp and Cv for diatomic gas are 5R/2 and
acceleration a = g/2, the percentage of volume 7R/2 respectively, whereas those for a
inside the liquid is polyatomic gas are 3R and 4R.
(A) 20% (B) 60% (C) 30 % (D) 40%
Sol. [D]
Q.21 The equations of two sound waves propagating
When the vessel is stationary, the weight of the
wooden block is balanced by the upthrust, that is in a medium are given by y1 = 2 sin (200πt)
Vρwood g = Vliqρliqg, where V is the volume of the and y2 = 5 sin (150πt). The ratio of intensities
block and Vliq is the volume of the liquid of sound produced is -
displaced, ρwood and ρliq are the densities of wood (A) 4 : 25 (B) 9 : 100
and liquid respectively. This gives (Vliq/V) =
(C) 8 : 15 (D) 64 : 225
(ρwood/ρliq). When the vessel moves up, the net
upward force is (upthrust – weight). The upthrust Sol. [D]
is [(Vliq)' ρliqg] where (Vliq)' is the volume of the The intensity of a wave is proportional to square
liquid displaced in this case. The net upward force of amplitude as well as square of frequency. The
is [V ρwoodg/2]. This gives [(Vliq)'/V] = (ρwood/ρliq). amplitudes are in the ratio 2 : 5 whereas the
From this we see that the same volume of the frequencies are in the ratio 4 : 3.
wooden block remains inside the liquid.
4 / 11
Q.22 String A has a length l, radius of cross section Q.26 An ideal gas confined to an insulated chamber
r, density of material ρ and is under tension T. is allowed to enter into an evacuated insulated
String B has all these quantities double those of chamber. If Q, W and ∆Eint have the usual
string A. If fA and fB are the corresponding meanings, then
fundamental frequencies of the vibrating
(A) Q = 0, W ≠ 0 (B) W = 0, Q ≠ 0
strings, then
(C) ∆Eint = 0, Q ≠ 0 (D) Q = W = ∆Eint = 0
(A) fA = 2 fB (B) fA = 4 fB
(C) fB = 4 fA (D) fA = fB Sol. [D]
This is a case of free expansion of a gas. Note
Sol. [B] that due to insulation, Q = 0. Since the gas
Note that the frequency of the vibrating string expands against no counteracting pressure (that
1 T is in vacuum), W = 0. This gives no change in
f∝ where the symbols have their usual the internal energy.
l A× ρ
meanings.
Q.27 Read the two statements – (1) When a solid
Q.23 The temperature of n moles of an ideal gas is melts an changes to liquid state, its volume
increased from T to 4T through a process for may increase or decrease. (II) As a result of
which pressure p = aT–1 where a is a constant. increase in pressure, the melting point of a
Then, the work done by the gas is solid may be raised or lowered.
(A) nRT (B) 4 nRT With reference to these statements, the only
(C) 2 nRT (D) 6 nRT correct statements out of the following is
Sol. [D] (A) (I) is true but (II) cannot be true
Use the relation pV = nRT with p = a/T (given). (B) (I) cannot be true but (II) is true
This gives V = nRT2 / a, so that dV = (2nRT / a)dT.
(C) (I) and (II) both are true and (I) is the
Now integrate pdV between T and 4T to get the
result. cause of (II)
(D) (I) and (II) both are true and they are
Q.24 For a monatomic ideal gas undergoing an independent of each other
adiabatic change, the relation between Sol. [C]
temperature and volume is TVx = constant An increase in pressure tends to compress the
where x is - substance. On melting if volume of a substance
(A) 7/5 (B) 2/5 decreases, an increase in pressure will help the
(C) 2/3 (D) 1/3 process of melting, so that melting point will be
Sol. [C] lower. On the other hand if volume of a
For an adiabatic change in case of a monatomic substance increases on melting, then an increase
gas, TVγ–1 = constant. In this case x itself is (γ –1) in pressure will oppose the process of melting.
and γ = 5/3 giving the value of x. hence, melting point will increase. Thus, the two
statements are true and (I) is the cause of (II).
Q.25 A system is taken from a given initial state to a
given final state along various paths
Q.28 A magnetic field directed along Z axis varies
represented on a p-V diagram. The quantity
that is independent of the path is as B = B0x/a, where a is a positive constant. A
(A) amount of heat transferred Q square loop of side l and made of copper is
(B) amount of work done W placed with its edges parallel to X and Y axes.
(C) Q but not W if the loop is made to move with a constant
(D) (Q – W) velocity v0 directed along X axis, the emf
Sol. [D] induced is
The only quantity (Q – W) which itself is the (A) (B0v0l2)/a (B) (B0v0l)
internal energy of the system is independent of
(C) (B0v0l2)/2a (D) (B0v0l3)/a2
the path.
5 / 11
Sol. [A] Q.32 A sounding body emitting a frequency of 200

Note that change in flux in one second is equal to Hz is released from a height. One second after
the emf induced. Use dφ = B.dA. Since its release, it crosses a balloon rising with a
B || dA. dφ = BdA with dA = l dx. Integrae dφ constant velocity of 2m/s. Let the speed of
between 0 and l to obtain the initial flux which
sound be 300 m/s and acceleration due to
comes out to be (B0l3/2a). In one second the lop
gravity 10 m/s2. The change in frequency
covers a distance of v0, so that the final flux can
be found by integrating – dφ between v0 and noted by an observer in the balloon at the
(v0 + l). This flux comes out to be [(B0v0l2/a) + moment of crossing is -
(B0l3/2a)] and hence the change in flux per second (A) 10 Hz (B) 8 Hz (C) 16 Hz (D) 4 Hz
can be determined. Sol. [C]
Use the relation : the apparent frequency
Q.29 An object is placed in front of a spherical  v + v0 
mirror of focal length f. If x and x ′ respectively n2 = n   where v is the speed of sound,
 v – vs 
represent the distances of the object and the
image from the focus, then - v0 is the speed of the observer and vs is the speed
of the source of sound. The speed v0 is to be
(A) f = x + x ′
considered positive or negative depending on
(B) f2 = x x ′
whether the observer is moving towards or away
(C) f = | x – x ′|
from the source. Similarly, vs is to be considered
(D) f = x ± x ′ depending upon whether image
positive or negative depending on whether the
is real or virtual
source is moving towards or away from the
Sol. [B]
observer. Using this convention, determine the
Note that the object distance can be written as (f + x)
whereas the image distance can be written as apparent frequencies before and after the
(f + x2). Use the mirror formula to get the answer. crossing and then the difference between them.
Q.30 Different objects at different distance are seen Q.33 Refer to the figure. The number reflections
by the eye. The parameter that remains constant is - from mirrors M1 and M2 are –
(A) the focal length of the eye lens M1 M2
(B) the object distance from the eye lens 1m
(C) the radii of curvature of the eye lens
(D) the image distance from the eye lens
Sol. [D] 1m
The image formed by the eye lens is always one
the retina and the image distance is fixed.
Q.31 A body in the form of a right circular cone of

dielectric material with base radius R and 5°
height h is placed with its base on a horizontal (A) 5 and 5 (B) 6 and 5
table. A horizontal uniform electric field of
(C) 10 and 10 (D) 6 and 6
magnitude E penetrates the cone. The electric
Sol. [B]
flux that enters the body is
Consider the point at which the incident ray
(A) ERh/3 (B) ERh (C) ERh/6 (D) 2ERh
strikes M1 for the first time. let its distance from
Sol. [B]
the lower end of the mirror be x, so that tan 5° =
Note that the flux through an area is (E ⋅ dA).
Here the flux through the cone is the same as that (x/1) giving x = 0.087 (approximately). If n is the
through the triangular section of the cone by a number of spacings accommodated in the mirror
vertical plane passing through the vertex. The length of 1 meter, then nx = 1, giving n = 11.49.
area of this triangular section is [1/2(2R X h)] and Thus, n is greater than 11 but less than 12. This
is perpendicular to the direction of the field E. gives 6 reflections from M1 but 5 from M2.
6 / 11
Q.34 A ray of light is incident at angle α on the Q.37 A conductor is bent in the form of concentric
boundary separating two transparent media. It semicircles as shown in the figure. The
is transmitted. If the angle of incidence is magnetic field at the point O is :
increased very slightly, the ray gets reflected in
the same medium. The difference between
angles of deviation in the two cases will be i
close to -
(A) 2 α (B) 90° – α
(C) 180° – α (D) 180° – 2α upto ∞
Sol. [B] 0 a 4a
When the ray is incident at the critical angle α, 2a 8a
the angle of deviation is (90° – α) whereas just (A) zero (B) µ0i /6a
after this (that is at an angle slightly greater than (C) µ0i/a (D) µ0i / 4a
the critical angle) the angle of deviation is (180° –
Sol. [B]
2α) Magnetic field at the centre of a semicircular
current carrying conductor is given by the
Q.35 Two particles A and B having equal charged µ i(πa ) µ 0i
after being accelerated through the same expression B = 0 = where a is the
potential difference, enter a region of uniform 4π a 2 4a
magnetic field and describe circular paths of radius of the first semicircle. Note that the
radii R1 and R2 respectively. The ratio of mass current in all the turns is the same but its sense is
alternately opposite and the radii are in the
of A to that of B is
proportion 1 : 2 : 4 : 8…… Then, the net
(A) (R1/R2)2 (B) (R1/R2)1/2
2 µ i 1 1 1 1 
(C) (R2/R1) (D) (R2/R1) magnetic field = 0 1 – + – + ..... .
Sol. [A] 4a  2 4 8 16 
The work done by the electric field on both the The terms in the bracket form a geometric
particles is the same and hence the gain in kinetic progression which adds to (2/3) and then the
energy for both is the same. This gives answer follows.
v2 m1
= . Note that the centripetal force Q.38 A capacitor and a coil in series are connected
v1 m2
to a 6 volt ac source. By varying the frequency
necessary for the circular motion in the magnetic of the source, maximum current of 600 mA is
field is qvB. Using this for both the particles, we observed. If the same coil is now connected to
mv m v
get 1 1 = 2 2 . From these two relations, we a cell of emf 6 volt and internal resistance of
R1 R2 2 ohm, the current through it will be
get the answer. (A) 0.5 A (B) 0.6 A
(C) 1.0 A (D) 2.0 A
Q.36 A Sound wave traveling through a medium of Sol. [A]
bulk modulus B is represented as y(x, t) = A sin The maximum current is obtained at resonance
(kx – ωt) where symbols have their usual where the net impedance is only resistive which
meanings. Then, the corresponding pressure is the resistance of the coil only. This gives the
amplitude is resistance of the coil as 10 ohm. Now, this coil
(A) BAk (B) B (A/K)1/2 along with the internal resistance of the cell gives
a current of 0.5 A.
(C) B (D) B(AK)1/2
Sol. [A] Q.39 Two radioactive substances X and Y emit α
∂y and β particles respectively. Their disintegration
From the equation of the sound wave, we get
∂x constants are in the ratio 2 : 3. To have equal
= kAcos (kx –ϖt). Now use the expression ∆p = – probabilities of getting emission of α and β
∂y
B where B is the bulk modulus. This gives an particles, the ratio of number of atoms of X to
∂x
that of Y at any time instant is :
expression for the pressure change ∆ p = – BAk
sin [(kx – ωt) – π/2], also indicating a phase lag
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 3 : 2
of π/2 with respect to displacement. (C) e : 1 (D) (e – 1) : 1
Sol. [B]
7 / 11
Note that (λX/λY) = 2/3. To have equal Sol. [A,B ,C]

probabilities the rates of decay must be equal, that Use the lens maker formula :
is, λXNX = λYNY at any instant. The gives the 1  µ1  1 1 
=  – 1 –  where µL
ratio (NX/NY) 3/2. f  µm  R 1 R 2 
and µm represent the refractive indices of the
Q.40 In a certain particle accelerator, electrons liquid filled and the surrounding medium
emerge in pulses at the rate of 250 pulses per respectively. Note that for a double concave lens
second. Each pulse is of duration of 200 ns and  1 1 
the electrons in the pulse constitute a current of  –  is negative. Now, for the lens to act
250 mA. The number of electrons delivered by  R1 R 2 
as a diverging lens, that is, for f to be negative,
the accelerator per pulse is :
the first bracket on the right hand side of the
(A) 8.00 × 1010 (B) 5.00 × 108 relation must be positive. This requires µL to be
(C) 3.13 × 1011 (D) 9.60 × 1010 greater than µm.
Sol. [C]
The charge in a pulse dq = I dt = 5.00 X 10–8C. Q.43 Referring to the circuit diagram, the tap key is
Divide this by 1.6 X 10–19 to determine the pressed at time t = 0. After sufficiently long
number of electrons per pulse. time
R C
SUB PART – A-2
VR VC
Q.41 Let v(t) be the velocity of a particle at time t.
Then, K V
(A) |dv(t)/dt| and d| v(t)|/dt are always equal
(A) VC = 0 (B) VR = 0
(B) |dv(t)/dt| and d| v(t)|/dt may be equal (C) VC = V (D) VR = V
(C) d|v(t)|/dt| can be zero while |dv(t)|/dt| is not Sol. [B, C]
zero After sufficiently long time the charging current
(D) d| v(t)|/dt ≠ 0 implies |dv(t)/dt| ≠ 0 reduces to zero. Then all the voltage appears
Sol. [B, C, D] across the capacitor and no drop across the
Note that |dv(t)/dt| is the magnitude of resistor.
acceleration, while d|v(t)|/dt is the time rate of
change of speed. These two may not be always Q.44 As shown in the figure, a front coated mirror
equal, hence (a) is not correct. In fact, the two are M produces an image S2 of a source S1 of
equal when the motion is along a straight line. In monochromatic light. Then,
case of uniform circular motion, speed remains
S1 P
constant but not the velocity. Again if speed is not
constant the velocity cannot be constant.
M
S2 Screen
Q.42 A hollow double concave lens is made of a
very thin transparent material. It can be filled (A) Point P will be a point of maximum
with water (refractive index µw) or either of intensity if the path difference ∆ = (2n)λ/2
two liquids L1 or L2 with refractive indices µ1 for n = 0, 1, 2, 3….
and µ2 respectively (µ2 > µw > µ1). The lens (B) Point P will be a point of maximum
will diverge a parallel beam of light incident on intensity if the path difference ∆ = (2n + 1)
it, if it is filed with - λ/2 for n = 0, 1, 2, 3…..
(A) L2 and immerses in L1 (C) Point P will be a point of minimum
(B) L2 and immersed in water intensity if the path difference ∆ = (2n)λ/2
(C) water and immersed in L1 for n = 0, 1, 2, 3….
(D) air and immersed in either water or L1 or L2 (D) there is no such condition for the path
difference as there is no interference
8 / 11
Sol. [B, C] Q.47 A concave lens is placed in the path of a

Note that there is an additional phase change of π uniform parallel beam of light falling on a
red or a path difference of (λ/2) when a ray gets screen as shown. Then,
reflected from the mirror.
C
Q.45 Two point charges (Q each) are placed at (0, y) A
and (0, –y). A point charge q of the same O
polarity can move along X axis. Then, B
(A) the force on q is maximum at x = ± y / 2 D
Screen
(B) the charge q is in equilibrium at the origin
(A) intensity of light will be the same every
(C) the charge q performs an oscillatory
motion about the origin where on the screen
(D) The equilibrium is not a stable equilibrium (B) intensity in region AB will be smaller than
Sol. [A, B, D] what is would be in the absence of the lens
At a point with coordinates (x, 0) the force is (C) in the region AC and BD, the intensity will
2Qq x be smaller than what it would be in the
F= . For F to be maximum,
4πε0 ( x + y 2 ) 3 / 2
2
absence of the lens
dF (D) in the region AC and BD, the intensity will
equating to zero gives x = ± y/ "2. The
dx be greater than what is would be in the
charge is obviously in equilibrium at the origin. absence of the lens
However, the equilibrium is not stable since the Sol. [B, D]
force is repulsive and hence will not be able to Note that the intensity of light in the region AB
restore the charge at the origin. The charge
(when the lens is absent) now gets distributed
therefore cannot perform oscillatory motion.
over the region CD. In the regions AC and BD
Q.46 The network of identical resistors as shown light intensity is due to both the direct beam and
between points A and B is connected to a dc the diverged light from the lens.
source of emf V. Then,
C F Q.48 A hydrogen atom and a doubly ionized lithium
B
atom are both in the second excited state. If LH
and LLi respectively represent their electronic
A angular momenta and EH and ELi their
D E
energies, then -
(A) potential at point D is V/2
(B) current between points A and C is the same (A) LH > LLi and | EH | > | ELi |
as that between F and B (B) LH = LLi and | EH | < | ELi |
(C) current between C and D is half that (C) LH = LLi and | EH | > | ELi |
between points C and F (D) LH < LLi and | EH | < | ELi |
(D) current between points E and F is one third Sol. [B]
that between F and B For both the atoms the second excited state
Sol. [A, B, C, D] corresponds to n = 3. Therefore, the angular
Note that points D and E are coincident and the
momentum for each of them is 3(h/2π). The
circuit is symmetric about this point. Consider a
current i entering the circuit at point A and energy, however, is proportional to Z2 where Z is
leaving it at point B. If current i1 flows between A the atomic number and hence numerical value of
and D, a current (i – i1) flows between A and C. energy for hydrogen is less than that for lithium.
By symmetry current between D and B is i1 and
that between F and B is (i – i1). The current (i – Q.49 Refer to the circuit diagram and the
i1) gets branched at C and (1/3) (i – i1) flows
between C and D and continues upto F. This is corresponding graph. The current rises when
because there is no branching of current at D. key K is pressed. With R = R1 and L = L1 the
Obviously (2/3) (i – i1) flows between C and F. rise of current is shown by curve (1), while
Note that total resistance between C and F is half curve (2) shows the rise of current when R =
of that along the path ADF.
R2 and L = L2. Then,
9 / 11
i
L R
Sol. Let ω be the angular velocity of the cube
i0 (just after the bullet strikes) about an axis passing
(1) through D. Conservation of angular momentum
K V
(2) about this axis gives mv(2l/3) = Iω where I is
O time t the moment of inertia about the axis through D.
(A) R1 = R2 (B) R1 > R2 This is [(M l2/6) + (M l2 /2)] = (2M l2/3) From
(C) L1 < L2 (D) L1> L2 the above equation ω = (mv/M l). The cube will
Sol. [A, C] topple if the centre of mass is just able to rise
Consider the expression for the current rising from (l/2) to (l/"2). In such a case, the rotational
exponentially in the LR circuit. The time constant energy must be equated to the change of
is (L/R). In this case the curve (1) is rising faster  l
1 2 l
than curve (2) indicating that (L1/R1) < (L2/R2). potential energy. Thus, Iϖ = Mg –  .
However, in both the cases the maximum current 2  2 2 
is the same and equal to (V/R1) or (V/R2). Using the values of I and ω, we get the
Q.50 Let the energy, magnitude of linear momentum expression for v that will just topple the cube :
and angular frequency of an electron in 1/ 2
M   2 – 1 
hydrogen atom be E, p and ω respectively. If n v = 3gl   .
be the corresponding quantum number, then - m   2 
(A) (E/ω) varies as n
(B) (E p) / ω is independent of n Q.52 Consider flow of heat from an inner sphere of
(C) (p ω) varies as n1/2 radius a at temperature T2 to an outer
(D) (E p ω) is independent of n
Sol. [A, B]
concentric sphere of radius b at temperature T1
1 through an insulating material filled in
Note the proportionalities : energy E ∝ 2 , between the two spheres. Obtain expressions
n
angular momentum L ∝ n, radius of orbit for the total heat current H and the temperature
r ∝ n2, periodic time T ∝ n3, angular T at a distance r from the centre, when a
1 steady state is reached.
frequency ϖ ∝ 3 and speed of electron in
n Sol. Consider a concentric spherical shell of radius r
1 and thickness dr where a < r < b. Let k be the
an orbit v ∝ and get the result.
n  dT 
coefficient of thermal conductivity and   be
 dr 
PART B Marks : 60 the temperature gradient at this shell. Then, the
* All questions are compulsory. heat current (that is the amount of heat flowing
* All questions carry equal marks per unit time) is given by
H = – 4πr2k ()
Q.51 A solid wooden cube of side l and mass M is
where the negative sign indicated a
resting on a horizontal table, as shown in the
figure. The cube is constrained to rotate about fall of temperature with increase of radius. From
an axis through D and perpendicular to the face this we get. Integrate this between limits a and b
ABCD. A bullet of mass m moving with speed for r and between T2 and T1 for T. This gives an
v strikes the block at a height 2l/3 as shown. expression for the heat current. Now, use to find
Let the line along which the bullet moves be in the indefinite integral with a constant of
the plane passing through the centre of mass of integration c. The constant of integration c comes
the block and parallel to the face ABCD.
out to be where temperature T2 corresponds to
Determine the minimum value of v that topples
the block. radius a. Using this we write an expression in
B C terms of temperature T at a radius r in general.
m Solving this we get an expression for the
2l v M temperature T at a distance r from the centre :
3 A D
10 / 11
Q.53 A double convex lens of radii of curvature 10 Sol. Refer to the figure in the question paper. Let the
cm (µ = 1.5) and a double concave lens of radii front lower edge of the wedge to be along X axis
of curvature 12 cm (µ = 1.6) are separated by a so that left extreme of the edge can be taken to
liquid of refractive index 1.2, as shown. Find be at x = 0 and the other extreme to the right to
the effective focal length of the combination. be at x = L. Choose an element of the wedge
perpendicular to this edge at a distance x and of
width dx. This section will have a height, so that
the area of cross section of this element will be
WX. Now, the resistance of this element can be
written as dR. Integrate this between x = 0 and x
4.8 cm
= L. The expression for the resistance of the
Sol. The convex lens with a plano-concave liquid lens
wedge comes out to be R.
on left can be taken to form one group of lenses.
Similarly, a plano-convex liquid lens with the
concave lens can be taken to form another group Q.55 Show that the capacitance of parallel plate
of lenses. The liquid layer of width 4.8 cm in capacitor filled with a dielectric whose
between will then be equivalent to an air slab of dielectric constant increases linearly from one
thickness (4.8 × 1.2) = 5.76 cm. Note that this plate to the other, is
distance (d) is the distance of separation between C = [ε0A(K2 – K1)] / [d ln (K2/K1)]
the two lens combinations described above. The
where A is the area of each of the plates, d is
focal length of the given convex lens can be
determined using lens maker's formula and it the separation between them, K1 and K2 are he
comes out to be 10.0 cm. Similarly the focal dielectric constants near plate 2 respectively.
length of the adjacent plano-concave liquid lens
turns out to be (– 50.0) cm. The focal length of Sol. Let the relation for variation of dielectric
this combination 12.5 cm. Use the relation. in this constant be K = mx + K1 where x is the distance
case the distance of separation d is zero.
from plate l. At x = 0, that is, at plate l, K = K1
Similarly, the focal lengths of the plano-convex
liquid lens and the concave lens on right come out while at x = d, K = K2. With this we get m = (K2
to be 60.0 cm and (– 10.0) cm respectively. The – K1)/d. Now, we use E =. The potential
focal of their combination turns out to be (– 12.0) difference V between the plates of the capacitor
cm. Now, the two lens combinations are of focal can be determined by writing
lengths 12.5 cm and (– 12.0) cm separated by a V = + "dV where dV = E dx. Note that E is a
distance of 5.76 cm. The relation written above
function of x. Limits of integration for x are 0
can again be used to get the effective focal length
as 28.49 cm and acts as a converging lens. and d. Then use C = Q/V where Q = σA. The
final relation for the capacitance is C.
Q.54 A material with uniform resistivity ρ is formed
in the shape of a wedge as shown. Determine
the resistance between face A and face B of
this wedge.
face B
face A
y2
y1
W
L
11 / 11

SUB-PART A-1
Q.1 The Schrodinger equation for a free electron of Sol. [B]

mass m and energy E written in terms of the If l is the length of the hanging part of the rope,
d 2 ψ 8π 2 mE M
wavefunction ψ is + = 0. The its weight is   l × g and hence the weight of
dx 2 h2 L
dimensions of the coefficient of ψ in the second M
term must be - the rope on the table is   (L – l)g which is
L
(A) [M1 L1] (B) [L2]
also equal to the normal reaction N. Then, the
(C) [L2] (D) [M1 L–1T1]
M
Sol. [C] force of friction is µN = µ   (L – l) g.
By dimensional analysis the dimensions of each L
term in an equation must be the same. In the first Equating this to the weight of the hanging part of
term the second derivative with respect to the rope, we get the answer.
distance x indicates the dimensions of the
Q.4 A thin uniform rod XY of length 2l is hinged
coefficient of φ to be [L–2] and hence the answer.
at one end X to the floor and stands vertical.
When allowed to fall, the angular speed with
Q.2 In an experiment to verify poiseullie's law which the rod strikes the floor is -
 πΛpa 4  3g 3g
η =  where the symbols have their (A) (B)
 8lV  4l 2l
usual meanings, the maximum error that enters 3g g
(C) (D)
in calculating the coefficient of η is due to l 2l
measurement of -
(A) pressure difference ∆p Sol. [B]
(B) length of the tube l The moment of inertia of the rod about a
(C) volume rate of flow V horizontal axis passing through point X is
(D) radius of the tube a. 1 4 2
Ix = m(2l)2 + ml2 = ml where m is the
Sol. [D] 12 3
Since a is raised to the power 4, it has the largest mass of the rod. Now, since centre of gravity
contribution to the total error. falls through a height l, the change in
gravitational potential energy (mgl) of the rod
can be equated to the rotational energy
Q.3 A uniform rope of length L and mass M partly
1 2
lies on a horizontal table and partly hangs from  I x ϖ  where ϖ is the angular speed.
the edge of the table. If µ is the coefficient of 2 
friction between the rope and the surface of the
table (neglecting the friction at the edge), the Q.5 A 60 cm metal rod M1 is joined to another 100
maximum fraction of the length of the rope that cm metal rod M2 to form an L shaped single
overhangs from the edge of the table without piece. This piece is hung on a peg at the joint.
sliding down is : The two rods are observed to be equally
1–µ µ inclined to the vertical. If the two rods are
(A) (B) equally thick, the ratio of density of M1 to that
µ µ +1
of M2 is
1
(C) 1 – µ (D) (A) 5/3 (B) 3/5
µ +1 (C) 25/9 (D) 9/25
1 / 12
Sol. [C] Sol. [B]

The angle made by each rod with the vertical is The change in potential energy can be equated to
45°. Applying the law of moments, we get the the gain of total kinetic energy :
ratio of weights and hence that of masses to be Gmm  Gmm  1 2
– – –  = 2 mv 
5 r  2R  2 
. Then, using mass = volume ×density, we get
3
the ratio of densities as 25 : 9. Q.8 A nonviscous liquid of density ρ is filled in a
tube with A as the area of cross section, as
Q.6 The string of a simple pendulum is replaced by shown in the figure. If the liquid is slightly
a thin uniform rod of mass M and length l. The depressed in one of the arms, the liquid
mass of the bob is m. If it is allowed to oscillate column oscillates with a frequency
with small amplitude, the period of oscillation
is
2(M + 3m)L 3(M + 2m)L θ1
(A) 2π (B) 2π θ2
3(M + 2m)g 2(M + 3m)g
( M + 2m ) L 2(M + m)L  θ + θ2 
(C) 2π (D) 2π ρgA sin  1 
(M + 3m)g 3(M + 2m)g 1  2 
(A)
Sol. [A] 2π m
The restoring torque can be written as 1 ρgA (sin θ1 – sin θ 2 )
(B)
 L  2π m
– Mg  sin θ + mgL sin θ which reduces to
 2  1 ρgA (sin θ1 – sin θ 2 )
(C)
L 2π m
– (M + 2m)g   θ if θ is small. This is equated
2  θ – θ2 
ρgA sin  1 
to Iα where the moment of inertia
(D)
1  2 
1 L2 2π m
I = ML2 + mL2 = (M + 3m). After
3 3 Sol. [C]
The force that is responsible for restoring the
 3(M + 2m)g 
substitution, we get α = –   θ. liquid levels in the two arms of the tube is
 2(M + 3m)L  – ∆pA = – (h1 + h2) ρgA where ∆p is the pressure
Comparing with a = – (ϖ2)θ, expression for difference and A is the area of cross section of
angular frequency and hence period can be the tube, h1 and h2 being the rise and fall of
liquid levels in the two arms in vertical direction
obtained.
respectively. Note that the change in length of
the liquid thread along the tube will be the same,
Q.7 Two stars each of mass m and radius R say x. Using this the force can further be written
approach each other to collide head-on. as {– (x sin θ1 + x sin θ2)ρgA}.
Initially the stars are at a distance r (>> R). Writing force as mass times acceleration, we get
expression for period and then for frequency.
Assuming their speeds to be negligible at this
distance of separation, the speed with which the Q.9 A wax candle floats vertically in a liquid of
stars collide is density twice that of wax. The candle burns at
the rate of 4 cm/hr. Then, with respect to the
 1 1  1 1
(A) Gm –  (B) Gm –  surface of the liquid the upper end of the
R r  2R r  candle will
(A) fall at the rate of 4 cm/hr
 1 1  1 1
(C) Gm +  (D) Gm +  (B) fall at the rate of 2 cm/hr
R r  2R r  (C) rise at the rate of 2 cm/hr
(D) remain at the same height
2 / 12
Sol. [B] Q.12 A metal ball B1 (density 3.2 g / cc) is dropped

Let the decrease in the height of the candle in water, while another metal ball B2 (density
outside the liquid be x. Now, if d denotes the 6.0 g / cc) is dropped in a liquid of density 1.6
diameter and L the length of the candle g / cc. If both the balls have the same diameter
respectively, after one hour applying thelaw of and attain the same terminal velocity, the ratio
floatation gives of viscosity of water to that of the liquid is :
2 2
d  d  L  (A) 2.0
π  ( L – 4)ρ wax = π   – x ρliq . Note (B) 0.5
2 2 2 
(C) 4.0
1
that ρwax = ρliq makes only half of the candle of (D) indeterminate due to insufficient data
2 Sol. [B]
stand outside the liquid. Solving the equation one Use the expression for terminal velocity of a body
gets the answer. 2 r 2 (ρ – σ)g
falling in a viscous liquid v =
Q.10 A mass hangs at the end of a massless spring 9 η
and oscillates up and down at its natural where symbols have their usual meanings.
frequency f. If the spring is cut at the midpoint
and the mass reattached at the end, the Q.13 A thin copper rod rotates about an axis passing
frequency of oscillation is : through its end and perpendicular to its length
with an angular speed ω0. The temperature of
(A) 2f (B) 2f (C) f/2 (D) f/ 2
the copper rod is increased by 100°C. If the
Sol. [A]
If k is the spring constant for the original spring
coefficient of linear expansion of copper is
2 × 10–5 / °C, the percentage change in the
and k ′ that for the half-cut spring, we have
angular speed of the rod is
k ′ = 2k. Use the expression for frequency
(A) – 2% (B) – 4%
1 k (C) – 0.2 % (D) – 0.4 %
f= to get the answer.
2π m Sol. [D]
ml 2
The moment of inertial of the rod is . Let
Q.11 The density of a solid at normal pressure is ρ. 3
When the solid is subjected to an excess I0, ϖ0 denote the initial moment of inertia and
pressure ρ. The density changed to ρ′. If the initial angular velocity respectively and I, ϖ be
ρ′ the corresponding quantities after heating the rod.
bulk modulus of the solid is k, then the ratio
ρ Applying conservation of angular momentum, we
is  mI 02 
 ϖ0 
p k I ϖ
(A) 1 + (B) 1 + get ϖ = 0 0 =  3 
k p I  ml0 (1 + αθ) 2 
2
p k  
(C) (D)  3 
p+k p+k
= ϖ0 (1 – 2αθ) = 0.996 ϖ0.
Sol. [A]
Thus the change is 0.4% and is negative.
m
We use expression for density ρ = so as to get Q.14 The internal energy of one gram of helium at
V
100 K and one atmospheric pressure is
dρ dV
=– . Substituting this in the expression for (A) 100 J (B) 1200 J (C) 300 J (D) 500 J
ρ V Sol. [C]
p The helium molecule is monatomic and hence
bulk modulus, we get k = – . Since 3
 dV  internal energy per molecule is kT . The
  2
 V 
3
increase of pressure increases the density, energy per mole is therefore is RT . One gram
ρ′ – ρ p 2
dρ = ρ′ – ρ. Using this we get = and of helium is one fourth mole and hence its
ρ k 1 3
hence the answer energy is × R × 100 = 300 J, taking the
4 2
value of R to be approximately 8 J/mole-K.
3 / 12
Q.15 Volume of a monatomic gas varies with its Sol. [B]

temperature as shown. The ratio of work done The speed with which a sphere rolling down an
inclined plane reaches the bottom is
by the gas to the heat absorbed by it when it 1/ 2
 
undergoes a process from A to B is  2gh   10 
1/ 2
V v=  =  gh 
1 + I  7 
 mr 2 
B where symbols have their usual meanings. The
5 
A acceleration is  g sin θ  . With this, the time
7 
O taken by the glass bead to roll down turns out to
T
14h 1
be . Similarly the time to go up the
(A) 2/3 (B) 2/5 (C) 2/7 (D) 1/3 5g sin θ1
Sol. [B]
14h 1
Since the curve passes through the origin, other inclined plane is . Twice the
5g sin θ 2
V ∝ T, the pressure being constant. Then, heat
sum of these two times is the required time of
absorbed at constant pressure is dQ = n Cp dT oscillation.
whereas the change in internal energy is
dU = n Cv dT where the symbols have their usual Q.17 Water at 20°C (coefficient of viscosity = 0.01
poise) flowing in a tube of diameter 1 cm with
meanings. The work done dW = dQ – dU = n (Cp –
an average velocity of 10 cm/s has the
Cv)dT. This gives the ratio of work done to the Reynold number
 1 (A) 500
heat absorbed as 1 –  and hence the result.
 γ  (B) 1000
(C) 2000
(D) indeterminate due to insufficient data
Q.16 A small glass bead of mass m initially at rest Sol. [B]
ρvD
starts from a point at height h above the Reynold number is given by N = where ρ
η
horizontal and rolls down the inclined plane
is the density, v is the velocity and D is the
AB as shown. Then it rises along the inclined diameter of the tube. Use this to get the answer.
plane BC. Assuming no loss of energy, the time
period of oscillation of the glass bead is Q.18 A billiard ball is hit by a cue at a point
distance h above the centre. It acquires a linear
C
A velocity v0. Let m be the mass and r be the
radius of the ball. The angular velocity
h acquired by the ball is
θ1 θ2
5v 0 h 2v 0 h 2v 0 h 2v 0 h
B (A) 2
(B) (C) (D)
2r 3 r 2
5 r 2
r2
8h Sol. [A]
(A) (sin θ1 + sin θ2) Equating the angular momentum (mv0h) about
g
the center of mass to lω one gets the answer.
14h  1 1 
(B) 2  + 
5g  sin θ1 sin θ 2  Q.19 Two pipes are each 50 cm in length. One of
them is closed at one end while the other is
8h  1 1  open at both ends. The speed of sound in air is
(C)  + 
g  sin θ1 sin θ 2 
340 m /s. The frequency at which both the
pipes can resonate is
(A) 680 Hz (B) 510 Hz
8h  1 1 
(D)  +  (C) 85 Hz (D) None of these
5g  sin θ1 sin θ 2 
4 / 12
Sol. [D] Q.22 A convex lens forms a real image with

A pipe open only at one end and another one of magnification m1 on a screen. Now, the screen
equal length but open at both the ends have their is moved by a distance x and the object is also
moved so as to obtain a real image with
fundamental frequencies n and 2n respectively.
magnification m2 on the screen. The, the focal
Again only odd harmonics are possible for a pipe length of the lens is
open at one end whereas all harmonics are m  m 
possible for a pipe open at both ends. Thus, it is (A)  1  x (B)  2  x
 m2   m1 
impossible to have a common frequency at which
x
they can resonate. (C) x (m1 – m2) (D)
(m 2 – m1 )
Sol. [D]
Q.20 The work involved in breaking a bigger size
Use the usual lens formula. In the first case if v is
spherical oil drop into n smaller size identical the image distance, (v + x) is the image distance
droplets is proportional to after the movement. The magnifications m1 and m2
3
n2 –1 3 v 
(A) (B) n in the two cases turn out to be  – 1 and
f 
(C) 3 n – 1 (D) 3 n – 1
v+x 
Sol. [D]  – 1 respectively. This can be simplified
 f 
Note that the work involved in the process of
to get the expression for f.
breaking a bigger drop into smaller drops is the
change in surface area times the surface tension.
Q.23 Two metal wires of identical dimensions are
If r is the radius of smaller drop and R that of the
connected in series. If σ1 and σ2 are the
4 3 4 
bigger one, then πR = n  πr 3  where n is conductivities of the metals respectively, the
3 3  effective conductivity of the combination is
the number of smaller drops. This gives σ + σ2
(A) σ1 + σ2 (B) 1
R 2
r= . If T is the surface tension, then the work
3
n 2σ1σ 2
(C) σ1σ 2 (D)
done will be W = (n4πr2 – 4πR2) T. Substituting σ1 + σ 2
for r gives the expected proportionality. Sol. [D]
Use the expression for resistance in terms of
Q.21 A train moving towards a hill at a speed of 72 l
conductivity R = and note that the total
km/hr sounds a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. A σA
wind is blowing from the hill at a speed of 36 resistance is (R1 + R2) and total length of the
wires is 2l.
km/hr. If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s,
the frequency heard by a man on the hill is
Q.24 An alternating supply of 220 volt is applied
(A) 532.5 Hz (B) 565.0 Hz
across a circuit with resistance 22 ohm and
(C) 516.5 Hz (D) None of the above
impedance of 44 ohm. The power dissipated in
Sol. [A]
the circuit is
If n ′ represents the apparent frequency and n the (A) 1100 watt. (B) 550 watt.
actual one, then use the relation (C) 2200 watt. (D) (2200/3) watt
 (v ± w )  Sol. [B]
n ′ –n   where v is the velocity of
 (v ± w ) – vs  The current in the circuit is
V
= 5 A and hence
sound, w is the velocity of wind and vs that of the Z
source. Note that in this case the observer at rest. the power consumed is (I2R) equal to 550 watt.
5 / 12
Q.25 If T denotes the temperature of the gas, the Q.28 Two identical thin rings, each of radius a are
volume thermal coefficient of expansion of an placed coaxially at a distance a apart. Let
ideal gas at constant pressure is
charges Q1 and Q2 be placed uniformly on the
1 1
(A) T (B) (C) T2 (D) 2 two rings. The work done in moving a charge
T T
Sol. [B] q from the centre of one ring to that of the
The volume coefficient of expansion is given by other is
dV (A) zero
. For an ideal gas at constant pressure, we
vdT
q 2
write pdV = nRdT and substitute for p from the (B) (Q1 – Q2)
usual relation pV = nRT to get the required 4πε0 a
expression for the coefficient.
q ( 2 – 1)
(C) (Q1 – Q2)
Q.26 A coil having N turns is wound in the form of a 4πε 0 a 2
spiral with inner radius a and outer radius b
respectively. When a current I passes through q ( 2 – 1)
(D) (Q1 – Q2)
the coil, the magnetic field at the centre is : 4πε 0 a
2µ 0 NI µ NI
(A) (B) 0 Sol. [C]
(a + b ) ab The electrostatic potential at the centre of the
µ 0 NI  b  µ 0 NI b first ring with charge Q1 is due to charge Q1 itself
(C) ln  (D) ln 
(b – a )  a  2( b – a )  a  as well as due to charge Q2 on the other ring. This
Sol. [D] 1 Q1 1 Q2
Consider dN to be the number of turns in between turns out to be + . Similarly
4πε0 a 4πε 0 2a
N
radii r and (r + dr) so that we get dN = dr. the electrostatic potential at the centre of the
(b – a )
The magnetic induction dB due to these many centre of the other ring is
µ I(dN) 1 Q1 1 Q2
turns at the centre is 0 . After substituting + . The difference between
2r 4πε 0 2a 4πε0 a
for dN and integrating between a and b, we get these potentials time the charge q is the required
the result.
word done.
Q.27 A circuit is arranged as shown. Then, the
current from A to B is : Q.29 An equilateral triangular loop of wire of side l
A carries a current i. The magnetic field
10 Ω 15 Ω produced at the circumcentre of the loop is
+ – µ 0 3 3i µ 0 9i
10 V – 10 Ω 5V
(A) (B)
+
4π l 4π l
µ 0 18i µ 0 6i
B (C) (D)
4π l 4π l
(A) + 500 mA (B) + 250 mA
(C) – 250 mA (D) – 500 mA Sol. [C]
Sol. [B] If l is the side of the triangle, the distance of the
Use superposition theorem. We get the potential circumcentre from each of the side of the triangle
difference between A and B to be + 3.75 volt µ0 i
when source of 5 volt is shorted, whereas – 1.25 carrying a current i is (sin 60° + sin 60°) =
4π r
volt when source of 10 volt is shorted. Therefore,
when both the sources are working the net µ 0 6i
. Since the direction of magnetic field in
potential difference is + 2.5 volt so that current is 4π l
250 mA from A to B. each case in the same, three times this would be
the total magnetic induction.
6 / 12
Q.30 Consider a double slit interference experiment. Q.33 Four identical mirrors are made to stand
Let E0 be the amplitude of the electric field of vertically to form a square arrangements as
shown in a top view. A ray starts from the
the waves starting from the slits. If φ is the midpoint M of mirror AD and after two
phase difference between the two waves reflections reaches corner D. Then angle θ
reaching the screen, the amplitude of resultant must be
B C
electric field at a point on the screen is
(A) E0 cos φ (B) E0 cos (φ/2)
(C) 2 E0 cos (φ/2) (D) 2 E0 cos φ
Sol. [C]
Consider the magnitudes of the electric fields θ M
reaching the screen to be E0 sin ϖt and E0 sin (ϖt A D
–1
+ φ). Then, the resultant electric field at the (A) tan (0.75) (B) cot–1 (0.75)
–1
screen would be sum of the two, that is, (C) sin (0.75) (D) cos–1 (0.75)
Sol. [B]
  φ   φ
2E 0 cos  sin  ϖt +  . Note that the
Note that the ray starting from point M at
  2   2 an angle θ reaches the corner D at the right
amplitude of the resultant electric field is the along a parallel path. Refer to the figure. Let
coefficient of the sine function. a be the length of the side, so that tan
x a–x a
θ= = = . Solving these equations
(a / 2) y a–y
Q.31 In a double slit experiment, the coherent
2a 3
sources are spaced 2d apart and the screen is one gets x = and hence cot θ = .
3 4
placed a distance D from the slits. If n th bright
y a–y C
fringe is formed on the screen exactly opposite B θ θ
to a slit, the value of n must be a–x
θ
d2 2d 2 d2 d2
(A) (B) (C) (D) θ
2λ D λD λD 4λ D
Sol. [B] x
λD
The fringe width in this case is and the nth
2d θ θ
bright fringe is formed at a distance d away from A D
M
λD
the centre. Therefore, d = n giving the value Q.34 The reflecting surfaces of two mirrors M1 and
2d M2 are at an angle θ (angle θ between 0° and
of n. 90°) as shown in the figure. A ray of light is
incident on M1. The emerging ray intersects
Q.32 When two sound sources of the same amplitude the incident ray at an angle φ. Then,
but of slightly different frequencies n1 and n2
are sounded simultaneously, the sound one M2
hears has a frequency equal to
n + n2  φ
(A) | n1 – n2 | (B)  1 
 2  θ
(C) n1n 2 (D) [n1 + n2] (A) φ = θ (B) φ = 180° – θ
Sol. [B] (C) φ = 90° – θ (D) φ = 180° – 2θ
The resulting sound wave has a frequency equal Sol. [D]
If x is the angle of incidence when the ray strikes
to half the sum of the individual frequencies. Note
the mirror M1 and y be that for mirror M2, then ,
that the resulting intensity varies at the beat
using simple properties of triangle one gets φ =
frequency equal to difference of the individual 180° – 2(x + y) and (Students are expected to
frequencies. draw the ray diagram and check.)
7 / 12
Q.35 An unpolarized light beam is incident on a Sol. [D]

surface at an angle of incidence equal to When the switch is closed, 5 ohm resistance gets
Brewster's angle. Then, shorted. Thus a current of 1 A flows from b to a.
(A) the reflected and the refracted beams are
both partially polarized Q.38 Two radioactive materials A and B have decay
(B) the reflected beam is partially polarized and
the refracted beam is completely polarized constants 5λ and λ respectively. Initially both
and are at right angles to each other A and B have the same number of nuclei. The
(C) the reflected beam is completely polarized ratio of the number of nuclei of A to that of B
and the refracted beam is partially 1
polarized and are at right angles to each will be after a time
e
other
1 1
(D) both the reflected and the refracted beams (A) (B)
are completely polarized and are at right 5λ 4λ
angles to each other 5 4
(C) (D)
Sol. [C] 4λ 5λ
Refer to the article on polarization by reflection Sol. [B]
when the ray is incident at Brewster's angle from Using the law of radioactive decay, one can write
any standard book. N A ( t ) N 0 exp(–5λt ) 1
= = . Solving this one
N B ( t ) N 0 exp(–λt ) e
Q.36 Switch S is closed at t =0. After sufficiently
gets the result.
long time an iron rod is inserted into the
inductor L. Then, the light bulb
L Q.39 The radius of the hydrogen atom in its ground
B
state is a0. The radius of a 'muonic hydrogen'
atom in which the electron is replaced by an
identically charged muon with mass 207 times
R that of an electron. is aµ equal to
a
(A) 207 a0 (B) 0
S 207
(A) glows more brightly a0
(C) (D) a 0 207
(B) gets dimmer 207
(C) glows with the same brightness Sol. [B]
(D) gets momentarily dimmer and then glows Use the expression for the first Bohr radius for
more brightly hydrogen atom This expression indicates that the
Sol. [B] radius is inversely proportional to the mass and
As the rod is inserted, inductance increases and hence the result.
hence the voltage across inductor increases. This
caused a drop in the voltage across the bulb and Q.40 The instantaneous magnitudes of the electric
hence it gets dimmer.
field (E) and the magnetic field (B) vectors in
an electromagnetic wave propagating in
Q.37 In the circuit shown below, the current that
flows from a to b when the switch S is closed is : vacuum are related as
a 10 Ω (A) E =
B
(B) E = c B
C
B
– (C) E = 2 (D) E = c2 B
5Ω 10 V 20 Ω c
+
Sol. [B]
At every instant the ratio of the magnitude of the
b
electric field to that of the magnetic field in an
(A) – 1.5 A (B) + 1.5 A
(C) + 1.0 A (D) – 1.0 A electromagnetic wave equals the speed of light.
8 / 12
Sol. [A,B,CD]
SUB-PART A-2
Use the given expression for force to get an
Q.41 A monkey holds a light rope that passes over a expression for acceleration. Integrate this to get
smooth pulley. A bunch of bananas of equal an expression for velocity. Unless otherwise
mass as that of the monkey is attached to the stated about the initial conditions, the velocity
other end of the rope. The monkey starts
climbing the rope to get to the bananas. Then,
turns out to be v =
f0
3mT 2
[ ]
3t 2 T – t 3 . Use this to
(A) the bananas also move up get the required results.
(B) the bananas move downwards
(C) the distance between the monkey and the
bananas decreases Q.44 A sound wave of angular frequency ϖ travels
(D) the distance between the monkey and the with a speed v in a medium of density ρ and
bananas remains constant. bulk modulus B. Let k be the propagation
Sol. [A, D] constant. If p and A are the pressure amplitude
Note that the masses of the monkey and the bunch and displacement amplitude respectively, then
of bananas are equal and the pulley is smooth. the intensity of sound wave is
Q.42 Consider the curve representing the Maxwell- 1 vp 2
Boltzmann speed distribution of gas molecules (A) ϖBkA 2 (B)
2 2B
at some temperature. Let vrms, vavg and vmp be
the rms, the average and the most probable p2 p2
(C) (D)
speeds respectively. Then, 2ρv 2 ρB
(A) the curve has a maximum at vmp Sol. [A, B, C, D]
(B) the area under the curve gives the total Intensity, by definition, is the energy flowing per
number of molecules of the gaseous unit area per unit time. The displacement
system.
P  ϖ
(C) vrms > vavg > vmp amplitude is given by A = where k  = 
(D) vvg < vmp < vrms Bk  v
Sol. [A, B, C] B
kT kT is the propagation constant. The speed v = .
Note that vrms = 1.73 , vavg = 1.60 , ρ
m m
Use these relations to get the required
kT expressions.
vmp = 1.41 where the symbols have their
m
usual meanings. The most probable speed vmp is Q.45 Two conducting plates A and B are placed
the speed at which the curve reaches the peak. parallel to each other at a small distance
The area under the curve is obviously the total between them. Plate A is given a charge q1 and
number of molecules.
plate B is given a charge q2. Then,
Q.43 A particle of mass m moves along a straight
(A) the outer surfaces of A and B (not facing
line under the action of a force f varying with
each other) get no charge
  t – T 2 
time as f = f 0 1 –    where f0 and T are (B) the inner surfaces of A and B (facing each
  T   other) get all the charge
positive constants. Then (C) the inner surfaces of A and B (facing each
(A) the speed of the particle after a time 2T is other) get equal and opposite charge of
4f 0 T q – q2
magnitude 1
3m 2
(B) after time interval of 3T, the particle starts (D) the outer surfaces of A and B (not facing
moving backwards
each other) get charge of the same polarity
(C) between time instants 0 and 2T, the
acceleration first increases and then decreases. q + q2
and of magnitude 1
(D) the particle stops at t = 3T 2
9 / 12
Sol. [C, D] Q.48 In cyclotron (particle accelerator) an ion is

Let a charge q ′ be present on the inner surface of made to travel successively along semicircles
plate A so that on its outer surface the charge is of increasing radii under the action of a
(q1 – q ′). Obviously a charge – q ′ will get induced magnetic field. The angular velocity of the ion
on the inner surface of the plate B and a charge
is independent of
(q2 + q′) will move to its outer surface. With these
(A) speed of the ion (B) radius of the circle
charges, write the net electric field at a point
inside the plate and equate it to zero. This relation (C) mass of the ion (D) charge of the ion
can be simplified to get the value of q ′ and hence Sol. [A, B]
the conclusions. Use the expression qvB = mrϖ2 where v = rϖ.
The symbols carry their usual meanings. This
Q.46 A man with normal vision uses a magnifying indicated that angular velocity is independent of
lens focal length 10 cm. Then, the radius of the circular path and the speed of
(A) magnification of any value is possible the ion.
(B) maximum magnification possible is 3.5
Q.49 Physical quantities A and B have the same
(C) minimum magnification possible is 2.5
(D) magnification depends upon the distance of dimensions. Then.
the lens from the eye (A) A ± B must be a meaningful physical
Sol. [B, C, D] quantity.
In case of a microscope the magnification is (B) A ± B may not be a meaningful physical
 D quantity
1 +  when the image is formed at the
 f  (C) A/B must be a dimensionless quantity
distance of distinct vision D. However if the (D) both must be either scalar or vector
image is formed at infinity, the magnification is quantities.
D Sol. [B, C]
simply .
f The ratio of two quantities having the same
dimensions must necessarily be a dimensionless
Q.47 An electromagnetic wave is traveling through a quantity. However, two quantities having the
medium of refractive index n1 and is incident at same dimensions may not add to necessarily give
the boundary of a medium of refractive index a meaningful quantity; for example, work and
n2. If the wave reflects at the boundary, torque have the same dimensions but their
(A) the wave undergoes a phase change of addition is meaningless.
180°, if n1 < n2
Q.50 A step voltage V0 is applied to a series
(B) the wave undergoes a phase change of
combination of R and C as shown. Then,
180°, if n1 > n2
V0 VR
(C) the wave undergoes no phase change, if
n1 < n2 10 V R 1 KΩ
C VC
(D) the wave undergoes no phase change, if 1µF
n1 > n2
t
Sol. [A, D] t=0
Note that an electromagnetic wave undergoes a (A) after sufficiently long time VR = 0
phase change of 180° upon reflection from a (B) as time passes VR decrease as (1/t)
medium that has a higher index of refraction than (C) after 1 ms, VC = 6.3 volt (approximately)
the one in which it is traveling. However, there is (D) initially current through R is 10 mA
no phase reversal if the case is opposite.
10 / 12
Sol. [A, C, D] 2L
After sufficiently long time since the charging
current drops to zero, the drop across the
resistance is zero. The time constant is 1 kΩ × 1 µ
F = 1ms. hence according to the definition of
time constant, the voltage across the capacitor
would be about 63% of the maximum, that is, 6.3 Sol. For the semicircular plate of radius l, the center
volt after 1 ms. Initial current is obviously (10 4l
of mass lies at a distance of from the centre.
volt/1KΩ) = 10 mA. 3π
Taking σ to be the mass per unit area, the
PART B Marks : 60 position of centre of mass of the remaining piece
* All questions are compulsory. of the square would be at a distance of
* All questions carry equal marks l (3π – 4)
from the centre of the original square
Q.51 A cube of side 10 cm is rigidly joined to a thin 3 (8 – π)
rod of length 40 cm. The rod is pivoted at the plate. Now, taking the centre of the original
other end so that the rod along with the cube is square to the origin, the centre of mass of the
able to rotate freely about the pivot in a vertical new structure can be determined. This turns out
plane. A bullet of mass 50 g, moving l
horizontally hits a point of the cube 5 cm from to be at a distance of to the right of the origin.
3
the lower end and gets embedded into it.
Determine the speed of the bullet so that the Q.53 Consider two long parallel and oppositely
system just rises to a horizontal position. (mass charged thick wires of radius d with their
of the rod = 100 g, mass of the cube = 750 g) central axes separated by a distance D apart.
Sol. Note that the collision between the bullet and the
Obtain an expression for the capacitance per
cube is inelastic. Hence the kinetic energy is not
unit length of this pair of wires.
conserved but the momentum is conserved.
Sol. Note that when the two wires form a capacitor,
Equating the angular momentum of the bullet to
the charges reside only on the inner side; positive
that of the rod together with the cube about the
on one and negative on the other. Let us consider
pivot gives a relation angular frequency ϖ = a point P distance r from the axis of one wire.
v Using Gauss flux theorem, the electric field E1 at
, where v is the speed of the bullet. Note
7.49 P due to the positive charge (of surface charge
that, in general, the moment of inertia of the rod density σ) on this wire of unit length is E1(2πr) =
1 σ(πd ) σd
of length l and mass m about the pivot is ml2 ⇒ E1 = . The point P is at a
3 ε0 ε 0 ( 2r )
and that of the cube of mass m about an axis distance (D – r) from the axis of the other wire
1 carrying negative charge. Again using Gauss
through its centre of mass is ma2 where a sit
6 theorem, the electric field E2 can be written as E2
he side of the cube. The total moment of inertia of σd
= . Obviously the two fields are in
the bullet, the rod and the cube about the pivot ε 0 2(D – r )
comes out to be 0.168 kg-m2 . After the collision the same direction so that net electric field is E =
the system rises through a height (0.40 + 0.05) m.
σd  1 1 
The gain in gravitational potential energy can + . Integrate this between the
then be equated to the loss of rotational kinetic

2ε 0  r D – r 
energy. This gives ϖ = 6.646 s–1. From this the limits d and (D – d) to get the potential
speed of the bullet can be calculated to be 49.78 σ D–d
m/s. difference d ln . Then, the
ε0  d 
Q.52 Consider a uniform square plate of side 2l capacitance per unit length turns out to be
made of wood. A semicircular portion is cut πε 0
.
and attached to the right as shown. Determine D–d
ln 
the centre of mass of the redesigned plate.  d 
11 / 12
Q.54 Fermat's principle states that 'when light ray Q.55 Two sample X and Y of a gas have equal
travels between two points, the path is the one volumes and pressure. The gas in X is allowed
that required the least time'. Use this principle to expand isothermally to 1.5 times its initial
to derive law of reflection regarding angle of volume, while that in Y is allowed to expand
incidence and angle of reflection. You may adiabatically to an equal volume. if the work
refer to the following figure. done in the first expansion is 1.5 times that in
the second, show that the ratio of specific
heats γ satisfies a relation
3 3  2 
γ –1
( γ – 1) ln  = 1 –   
 2  2   3  
Sol. Let n1 and n2 be the number of moles of samples
h
X and Y of the gas, the initial temperatures of T1
θ1
θ2 and T2 respectively and p0 and V0 be their initial
pressure and volume. Then, p0V0 = n1RT1 =
n2RT2. Now, the work done in isothermal
d
3
Sol. Consider the total distance d to be made up of x to expansion is W1 = n1RT1 ln   whereas that in
the left of the point of incidence and (d – x) to its 2
right. If n is the refractive index of the medium n RT – n 2 RT2 ′
adiabatic expansion is W2 = 2 2 .
and c the speed of light in vacuum, then the speed γ –1
c Note that during adiabatic expansion the
in the medium under consideration is   . The
n temperature falls to T ′. Also in case of adiabatic
total time of travel can be written as process, TVγ–1 = constant. Applying this, we get
1– γ
x +h
2
(d – x ) + h
2 2 2 3 3
t= + . According to T2′ = T2   . Using the fact that W1 = W2 ,
c c  
2 2
  we get the required expression.
n n
Fermat principle, for the least time, calculate
 dt 
  and equate it to zero. Using simple
 dx 
x
geometry, we write = sinθ1 and
x2 + h2
(d – x )
= sin θ2, we get the law of
(d – x ) 2 + h 2
reflection that the angle of incidence is equal to
the angle of reflection.
12 / 12

SUB-PART A-1
Q.1 Displacement of an oscillating particle is given spring balance and distance of hook from the
by y = A sin (Bx + Ct + D). The dimensional hinge point of the inclined plane. The graph
formula for [ABCD] is - that correctly represents this variation is :
(A) [M0 L–1 T0] (B) [M0L0T–1]
0 –1 –1
(C) [M L T ] (D) [M0L0T0] Spring
Sol. [B]
balance
Apply the rules of dimensional analysis. The
quantity A must have the dimensions of
4 5
3
displacement. The bracketed quantity must be 1 2
dimensionless and hence, B must have the
dimensions of reciprocal of displacement, C must
have the dimensions of reciprocal of time and D
must be dimensionless. f f
Q.2 Two small spheres of equal masses start
moving in opposite directions from a point A in (A) (B)
a horizontal circular orbit with tangential
velocities v and 2v respectively. Between o d o d
collisions, the spheres move with constant
speeds. The number of elastic collisions the f f
spheres will make before they reach point A
again is - (C) (D)
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
Sol. [C] o d o d
Refer to the figure. The first collision will take
Sol. [A]
place at point B. Due to elastic collision, the
spheres will exchange their velocities and collide The reading on the spring balance is the force
at point C, again there will be an exchange of required to lift the plane. Since the angular
velocities and the bodies will come to point A to displacement is the same every time, the work
collide for the next time. done is fixed and hence the torque. In other
v A 2v words the product of force and distance of point
of application of force from the hinge must be
constant.
120° 120° Q.4 Identical point masses are placed at (n – 1)

120° vertices of a regular polygon of n sides. The
B C r
vacant vertex has a position vector a with
respect to the centre of the polygon. Therefore,
Q.3 On one arm of an inclined plane 5 hooks are the position vector of the centre of mass of the
fixed (at the same separation) to lift the upper system is -
r
arm relative to the other arm kept horizontal as r –a
shown. The hook fixed on the inclined plane is (A) (n – 1) a (B)
(n – 1)
lifted through the same angle with the help of a r
spring balance, using hook 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in order. r –a
(C) na (D)
A graph is plotted between the reading of n
1 / 11
Sol. [B] Sol. [D]

Note that the centre of mass will get shifted in the L L
opposite direction with reference to the position Extension ∆l ∝ ⇒ ∆l ∝ 2 . The extension
A d
vector of the vacant vertex
is obviously maximum in case of option (d).
Q.8 Consider an expression F = Ax sin–1(Bt) where
Q.5 Three identical balls moving together along a
F represents force, x represents distance and t
horizontal line with velocity v collide with two
represents time. Dimensionally the quantity
similar balls at rest along the same line. The
collision is elastic. After the collision - AB represents -
(A) two balls move with velocity v. (A) energy (B) surface tension
3v (C) intensity of light (D) pressure
(B) two balls move with velocity Sol. [C]
2
Dimensional analysis suggests that the quantity
(C) three balls move with velocity v
Ax on RHS must have the dimensions of force
2v
(D) three balls move with velocity whereas B must have the dimensions of
3 reciprocal of time. Then, the product AB will
Sol. [C] have the dimensions of energy per unit area per
As per the law of conservation of linear
unit time, the same as those of intensity of light.
momentum, the two balls originally at rest along
with one form those already in motion will move
with velocity v. Two of the three balls originally
Q.9 Velocity – displacement curve of a particle
moving will naturally come to rest. moving in a straight line is as shown. Line PB
is normal to the curve and line PA is normal to
Q.6 A block is placed on a surface with vertical the X axis. The instantaneous acceleration of
x2 the particle at P is –
cross section given by the equation y = . If v
20
m/s
the coefficient of friction is 0.5, the maximum P
(0, 4)
height above the ground at which a block can
be placed without slipping is -
(A) 1.00 m (B) 1.25 m
(C) 1.50 m (D) 1.90 m O A(1, 0) B(2, 0) S m
Sol. [B] 2
(A) 2 m/s (B) 1.5 m/s2
By drawing the usual free body diagram, we can
(C) 1 m/s2 (D) zero
write, in equilibrium mg sin θ = µsN and mg cos
Sol. [C]
θ = N giving tan θ = µs. But tan
dv
dy x x Acceleration can be written as v = v tan θ
θ= = . This gives 0.5 = ⇒ x = 5. ds
dx 10 10
where (tan θ) is the slope of the given curve and
x2
Use this value in the equation y = to get other symbols have their usual meanings. Since
20 the slope of PB is –4. The slope of the curve tan
maximum height y = 1.25 m
θ = 4. Putting these values, we get the
acceleration as 1 m/s2.
Q.7 Let L be the length and d be the diameter of
cross section of a wire. Different lengths of
Q.10 Suppose that the gravitational force varies
wire of the same material are subjected to the
inversely as the nth power of the distance.
same tension. In which of the following cases
will the extension be maximum ? Then, the period of a planet in circular orbit of
(A) L = 300 cm, d = 1.0 mm radius R around the sun will be proportional to -
n +1 n –1
(B) L = 200 cm, d = 0.5 mm 2
(A) R (B) R 2
(C) L = 100 cm, d = 0.2 mm
(C) Rn (D) R–n/2
(D) L = 50 cm, d = 0.05 mm
2 / 11
Sol. [A] Q.13 In the circuit shown, the potential differences

In this case we can write, across C1 and C2 are respectively
4π 2 R n +1
2
GMm  2π  400 Ω
= mRω 2
= mr   ⇒ T2
= . C2 = 5 µF
Rn  T  GM
This gives the desired result. G 100 Ω
Q.11 A planet of mass m moves around the sun of C1 500 Ω

= 4 µF
mass M in an elliptical orbit. The maximum
and minimum distances of the planet from the
sun are r1 and r2 respectively. Therefore, the 2.0 V
(A) 1 volt, 1 volt (B) 1 volt, 1.2 volt
time period of the planet is proportional to -
(C) 2 volt, 1 volt (D) 1 volt, 2 volt
(A) (r1 + r2)3 (B) (r1 + r2)3/2 Sol. [B]
(C) (r1 + r2)2/3 (D) (r1 + r2)4 The total current in the circuit flows through the
Sol. [B] two resistors and the galvanometer only and it is
equal to 2 mA. This produces a drop of 1 volt
The semi-major axis of the elliptical orbit of
across C1 and a drop of 1.2 volt across C2.
r +r 
planet around the sun is  1 2  . With the sun
 2  Q.14 A ball is dropped from a height h above a
at the focus, Kepler's law then gives the horizontal concrete surface. The coefficient of
restitution for the collision involved is e. The
proportionality.
time after which the ball stops bouncing is -
Q.12 One mole of an ideal is taken from an initial
2h  1  2h  1 
state A (P0, V0) to a final state B (2P0, 2V0) by (A)   (B)  
g e g 1 – e 
two different processes. – (1) Gas expands
isothermally to double its volume and then 2h  1 + e  2h  1 
(C)   (D)  
pressure is doubled at constant volume to the g 1 – e  g  1 – e2 
final state. (2) Gas is compressed isothermally Sol. [C]
until its pressure is doubled and then its volume The time required for the free fall of the ball is
is doubled at constant pressure to the final 2h
. Then the time taken for rise and next fall
state. The p-V diagram that correctly represent g
the two processes is : 2h
will be 2 (e) . The time taken for one more
P P g
2p0 2 2p0 2 B
B 2h 2
2 2 1 rise and fall will be 2 (e ) etc. Therefore,
(A) p0 (B) p0 g
A 1 1 A 1 the total time for which the ball will be in
O v0 2v0 V O v0 2v0 V motion, will be
P P 2h 2h
2 B +2 e(1 + e + e2 +….) =
2p0 2 2p0 g g
B 2 1
2
(C) p0 1 (D) p0 2h 2h 1 2h  2e 
A 1 + 2e × = 1 + 
1 g g 1– e g  1– e
O v0 2v0 V O v0 2v0 V This on simplification gives the result.
Sol. [C]
Since the first step in both the processes is Q.15 A metal block is resting on a rough wooden
isothermal, we have pV = constant giving the pV surface. A horizontal force applied to the block
is increased uniformly. Which of the following
diagram the shape of a rectangular hyperbola. This
curves correctly represents velocity of the
is observed in option (C) only and hence the answer. block ?
3 / 11
Sol. [B]
v v
Vector relation between linear velocity and
r r r
angular velocity is v = ω × r , so that option (b)
(A) (B) is incorrect.
o t o t Q.18 Three energy levels A, B and C in an atomic
system are such that EA < EB < EC. If the
v v wavelengths corresponding to the transitions
C → B, B → A and C → A are λ1, λ2 and λ3
(C) (D) respectively, then
(A) λ1 + λ2 + λ3 = 0 (B) λ32 = λ12 + λ22
o o
t t λ1λ 2
(C) λ3 = λ1 + λ2 (D) λ3 =
λ1 + λ 2
Sol. [C]
Sol. [D]
Let f = µsN at t = t1. Therefore, v = 0 for t < t1.
For t > t1 net force on the block = kt – b where In terms of energy differences, we can write ECA
dv = ECB + EBA. This can further be written as
b = µkN. Therefore, m = kt – b
dt hc hc hc
= + and hence the result.
k 2 b λ 3 λ1 λ 2
⇒v= t – t + A . Now, A = 0 since v = 0
m m
at t = 0. Thus, graph of v against t is a parabolic
Q.19 The refracting angle of a prism is A and
curve as in (c).
refractive index is cot (A/2). The angle of
Q.16 The earth has mass M1 and radius R1. Similarly minimum deviation is -
the sun has mass M2 and radius R2. Distance (A) (180° – A) (B) (180° – 2A)
between their centres is r. It is known that the (C) (90° – A) (D) (90° – 2A)
centre of mass of the earth-sun system lies well
Sol. [B]
within the sun. Therefore.
Use the prism formula
M1 R M1 R
(A) > 2 (B) < 2
M1 + M 2 r M1 + M 2 r  A + δm    A + δm 
sin    sin  
(C) M1R2 < M2R1 (D) M1R2 > M2R1 µ=  2  ⇒ cot A =   2 
Sol. [B] A 2  A 
sin    sin   
Distance of centre of mass from centre of the sun 2  2 
M1 r
will be . Since the centre of mass lies A  A + δm 
M1 + M 2 cos  sin  
⇒  2
=  2 
M1 r
within the sun < R2 and hence the A A
M1 + M 2 sin   sin  
 
2 2
result.
A  A + δm 
⇒ cos   = sin  . This suggest that
Q.17 Consider a particle of a rigid body. Its motion 2  2 
r r r r r
can be described by vectors r , ω, a r , a t , and α the angles on the two sides are complementary,
(symbols have their usual meanings). Then,  A   A + δm 
which of the following equations is incorrect ? that is,  +  = 90°. This can be
r 2  2 
r dθ r r r
(A) ω = (B) v = r × ω simplified to get the result.
dt
r r r r r r r
(C) a r = ω × (ω × r ) (D) a t = α × r
4 / 11
Q.20 Refer to the arrangement of logic gates. For Q.23 A cylindrical vessel contains a liquid of
A = 0, B = 0 and A = 1, B = 0, the values of density p filled upto a height h. The upper
surface of the liquid is in contact with a piston
output Y are, respectively - of mass m and area of cross section A. A small
A hole is drilled at the bottom of the vessel.
B (Neglect the viscous effects). The speed with
Y which the liquid comes out of the hole is -
 m 
(A) 2gh (B) 2g h + 
(A) 0 and 1 (B) 1 and 0  pA 
(C) 1 and 1 (D) 0 and 0  m   2m 
(C) g h +  (D) g h + 
Sol. [B]  pA   pA 
Refer to the truth tables of AND, OR and NOR
gates from any standard book. Sol. [B]
Use Bernoulli's theorem at the upper surface and
Q.21 A plastic ring of radius R has a charge + 3Q at the small hole. We get an equation
distributed uniformly along one quarter of its mg 1 2
circumference and a charge – Q uniformly pgh + = ρv where v is the speed of
A 2
distributed along the rest of the circumference. efflux. Solving this we get the expression for
The potential on its axis at a distance of 3R 2mg  m 
speed v = 2gh + = 2g h + .
is - ρA  ρA 
 1  2Q  1  4Q
(A)  
 (B)  

 4πε0  R  4πε 0  R Q.24 A charged capacitor discharges through a
resistance R. Let U be the energy stored by the
 1 Q  1  Q
(C)  
 (D)  

capacitor and let P be the rate at which energy
 4πε0  R  4πε 0  2R gets dissipated. Then, the time constant is :
Sol. [C] 4U U 2U U
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Using standard relation, the potential P P P 2P
1  3Q Q  Sol. [C]
=  –  Take the ratio of the energy stored in the
4πε0  R + 3R
2 2
R + 3R 
2 2
capacitor to the power dissipated. that is,
which on simplification gives the answer. 1 2
 CV 
U 2  = RC ⇒ RC = 2U .
=
Q.22 The figure shows four orientations, at angle θ P V 
2 2 P
r  
with a magnetic field B , of a magnetic dipole  R 
r  
with moment M . The magnitude of torque (τ)
and potential energy (U) is best represented by Q.25 The following figure shows different
1 2 arrangements of two identical pieces of plano-
convex lenses. The refractive index of the
θ θ r liquid used is equal to that of the glass. Then,
B the effective focal lengths in the three cases
θ θ
are related as –
4 3
(A) τ1 = τ2, τ3 = τ4 and U1 = U2 = U3 = U4
(B) τ1 = τ2 = τ3 = τ4 and U1 = U4, U2 = U3
(C) τ1 = τ4, τ2 = τ3 and U1 = U2 = U3 = U4
(D) τ1 = τ2 = τ3 = τ4 and U1 = U2 = U3 = U4 f1 f2 f3
Sol. [B]
Note that the magnitude of the torque acting on liquid
the dipole is τ = MB sin θ and potential energy is (A) f1 = f2, f3 = 0 (B) f1 ≠ f2 ≠ f3
U = – MB cos θ. (C) f1 = f2 > f3 (D) None of the above
5 / 11
Sol. [D] Q.29 A photon of wavelength λ (less than threshold

The focal lengths f1 and f2 are equal. The wavelength λ0) is incident on a metal surface
arrangement in the third case is effectively a plate
of work function W0. The de Broglie
and hence has an infinite focal length.
wavelength of the ejected electron of mass m
Q.26 A long wire carrying a current 1 A is placed is :
along the axis of a long hollow tube of radius 5   hc  h
cm also carrying a current of 1 A in the same (A) h 2m – W0  (B)
 λ   hc
2m – W0 

direction. The magnetic field at a distance of
 λ 
2.5 cm from the axis is :
(A) 8 × 10–6T (B) 16 × 10–6 T (C)
h
(D)
1
–6
(C) 4 × 10 T (D) Zero  hc   hc 
2m – W0  h 2m – W0 
 λ   λ 
Sol. [A] Sol. []
Note that the current through the wire only will hc
contribute to the magnetic field at a point inside With usual notation, Ek = – W0 . Also if p is
λ
the hollow tube.
p2
the momentum of the photoelectron, Ek =
Q.27 A Uniform solid sphere of mass m has a radius 2m
R. The gravitational potential at a distance ⇒ p = 2mEk . Thus, the de Broglie
r (< R) from he centre of the sphere is : wavelength of the ejected electron
Gm Gm 2 2 h h
(A) – 3 (3R 2 – r 2 ) (B) – (R – r ) λ′ = = which one substitution gives
R 2R 3 p 2mE k
Gm Gm
(C) – 3
(3R 2 – r 2 ) (D) – 3 (R 2 – r 2 ) the answer.
2R R
Sol. [C] Q.30 In the following V-T diagram for a perfect gas,
The gravitational potential at a distance r < R, is the relation between p1 and p2 is :
made up of two parts – one due to the mass of
V p2
sphere of radius r, say V1 and that due to the
remaining mass, say V2. One finds that
GMr 2 3Gm 2 p1
V1 = – 3
and V2 = – 3
(R – r2), and
R 2R
then by adding one gets the result. Refer to any T
standard book. O
(A) p2 = p1 (B) p2 < p1
Q.28 The focal length of a concave mirror is f. An (C) p2 > p1 (D) uncertain
object is placed at a distance x from the focus Sol. [B]
Note that the slope of the V-T diagram is
and forms a real image. Therefore, the
inversely proportional to pressure p.
magnification (numerically) is :
2 2
f f  x x Q.31 A photographic plate placed at a distance of 10
(A) (B)   (C) (D)  
x x f f  cm from a point source is exposed for a 4
Sol. [A] second. If the plate is moved farther away by 10
Since the image formed is real the object must be cm, the time required to have the same exposure
beyond the focus. Therefore, taking the object (A) 4 second (B) 16 second
distance to be (f + x) and using mirror formula, (C) 8 second (D) 64 second
f (f + x )
we get the image distance as and then Sol. [B]
x According to the inverse square law, illuminance
v f is inversely proportional to square of the
the magnification = .
u x distance.
6 / 11
Q.32 The voltage over a cycle varies as Sol. [B]

π Using the law of floatation, we equate the weight
v = V0 sin ωt for 0 ≤ t ≤
ω of the body to the upthrust and get
π 2π 4 4 3
= – V0 sin ωt for ≤ t ≤ π(R3 – r3)ρmg = πR ρ1g ⇒
ω ω 3 3
The average value of the voltage for one cycle r3 ρ
= 1 – 1 and the result follows.
is : R 3
ρm
V V 2V0 Q.35 A metal strip 6 cm long, 0.6 cm wide and 0.7
(A) 0 (B) 0 (C) zero (D)
2 2 π mm thick moves with constant velocity v
Sol. [D] through a uniform magnetic field of induction
The voltage represents the output of a full wave 0.9 T directed perpendicular to the strip as
rectifier whose de component or the average shown. A potential difference of 1.62 µV is
2V0 induced across points M and N of the strip.
value is .
π Therefore, the speed v is :
Q.33 Young's double slit experiment is first × × v × ×

performed in air and then by immersing the
whole setup in a liquid. The 10th bright fringe × × × ×
when in liquid is formed at the point where 8th
× × M N× ×
dark fringe is located when in air. The
refractive index of the liquid is :
× × × ×
(A) 1.25 (B) 1.33 (C) 1.40 (D) 1.20
Sol. [B]
× × × ×
λD
Fringe width w = where symbols have their (A) 0.1 m/s (B) 0.2 m/s
d
(C) 0.3 m/s (D) 0.4 m/s
usual meanings. Note that wavelength λ in air
Sol. []
λ Error in wording, question deleted.
changes to in a liquid of refractive index µ.
µ
Now, we can write 10 × wliq = 7.5 × wair Q.36 The ratio of magnetic field at the centre of a
λ liq D λ air D λ current carrying circular coil to its magnetic
⇒ 10 = 7.5 ⇒ 10 air = 7.5 λair.
d d µ moment is x. If the current and the radius both
10 are doubled, the value of this ratio would be
This then gives µ = = 1.33. (A) 2x (B) 4x (C) x/4 (D) x/8
7.5
Sol. [D]
Q.34 A spherical shell made of a metal of density ρm Note that magnetic field at the centre of a current
remains just below the surface of a liquid of µ nI
carrying coil is 0 and its magnetic moment
density ρl. If r and R are respectively the inner 2r
and the outer radii of the shell, then, the ratio is πr2nl. Therefore their ratio varies inversely as r3.
r
is :
R Q.37 A conducting ring of radius r is placed in a
ρl ρl varying magnetic field perpendicular to the
(A) 1 – (B) 3 1 – plane of the ring. If the rate at which the
ρm ρm
magnetic field varies is x, the electric field
ρm ρl intensity at any point of the ring is -
(C) –1 (D) 2 1 –
ρl ρm (A) r x (B) r x/2 (C) 2 r x (D) 4 r/x
7 / 11
Sol. [B] r Sol. []

Let E be the electric field intensity at a point on Error in wording, question deleted.
the circumference of the ring. Then, the emf
r
∫
induced ε = E ⋅ dl where dl is a length element SUB - PART - A -2
r r
of the ring. Since | E | is constant and E || dl , the
Q.41 A hoop rolls down an inclined plane without
integral works out to be E (2πr). Also the induced
slipping. Then,
dφ dB
emf is ε = = πr2 = πr2x. Equating the (A) the inclined plane is smooth
dt dt
(B) the inclined plane is rough and still there is
two, we get the result.
no loss of mechanical energy
Q.38 Unpolarized light intensity of 32 W/m2 passes (C) the point of contact of the hoop with the
through three polarizers. The transmission axis inclined plane is always at rest
of the last polarizer is crossed with that of the (D) the linear speeds of different points on the
first. If the intensity of light emerging out of rim of the hoop are different
the third polarizer is 3 W/m2, then the angle Sol. [C, D]
between the transmission axis of the first two refer to any standard book.
polarizers is Q.42 Which of the following phenomena is / are
(A) 10° (B) 30° related to the variation in density of
(C) 45° (D) 60° atmospheric air ?
Sol. [B] (A) mirage
Let the angle between the axes of the first two (B) in winter sound of a whistle of a railway
polarizers be θ. The intensity after the first engine is heard at much longer distances
polarizer is half of that incident on it, that is 16 (C) twinkling of a star
W/m2. The intensity after the second polarizer (D) visibility of sun for some time after the
will be 16 cos2θ W/m2. The intensity after the sunset
third polarizer can be written as 3 = (16 cos2 θ) Sol. [A,B,C,D]
cos2 (90 – θ) since the angle between the axes of All the phenomena re due to formation of layers
the second and the third polarizers is (90 – θ). This of atomospheric air with different densities and
gives on simplification, hence refractive indices.
3
sin (2θ) = ⇒ 2q = 60° ⇒ θ = 30°. Q.43 The graph shows the displacement of a body
2
as a function of time. Which of the following
Q.39 Two soap bubbles of radii 2r and 3r are in is / are the conclusion ?
contact with each other. The radius of curvature
of the interface between the bubbles is -
(A) 2 r (B) 6 r (C) 3 r (D) r x
Sol. [B]
Excess pressure difference across the interface is
4T 4T 4T 4T
– = which must be where R is
2r 3r 6r R
o t
the radius of curvature at the interface. This gives
R = 6r.
(A) The graph represents motion with constant
velocity
Q.40 A radioactive element X converts into another
(B) The graph represents accelerated motion
stable element Y. Half life of X is 3 hrs.
(C) The body comes to rest after a long time
Initially only nuclei of X are present. After
(D) The graph represents a retarded motion
time t, the ratio of number of nuclei of X to that Sol. [C, D]
of Y is found to be 1 : 8. Therefore, Slope of the curve at a point is the velocity which
(A) t = 9 hrs is decreasing in this case and hence the body is
(B) t = 6hrs decelerating. The graph is rising exponentially
(C) t = 7.5 hrs and therefore the body will take a long time to
(D) t is between 6 hrs and 9 hrs come to rest.
8 / 11
Q.44 A transistor is connected in common emitter Sol. [A, B, C]

mode. The collector supply is 10 volt and Since in case of a resistor the voltage and the
voltage drop across resistor of 1 kΩ in the current are in phase, option (d) is not possible.
collector circuit is 0.5 volt. If the current gain is Due to reactive component – capacitor other
β is 49, then options given are possible.
(A) the base current is 50 µA
Q.47 A person is sitting in a moving train and is
(B) current gain α is 0.98.
facing the engine. He tosses up a coin which
(C) the emitter current is about 510 µA
(D) the base current is 10 µA falls behind him. He concludes that the train is
Sol. [B, C] moving -
0.5 (A) forward with increasing speed
The collector current is obviously = 0.5 (B) forward with decreasing speed
1000
mA. use the standard relations for the current (C) backward with increasing speed
gains α, β and the relation between them (D) backward with decreasing speed
α Sol. [A, D]
β= . Also note that IE = IB + IC.
1– α Only in case of forward acceleration and
Q.45 The variation of gravitational field intensity backward deceleration is the given observation
with distance from the centre of a body is possible.
shown in the graph from which one can
conclude that Q.48 For an LCR circuit
A
B
Eg
D
Eg
O ω′ ω
4
(A) A and B represent R and Z respectively
r
O R1 R R2 (B) A and B represent Z and R respectively
(C) A, B, C and D represent Z, X1, R and XC
respectively
(A) variation of gravitational field intensity is (D) for ω = ω′, the phase difference between
due to the spherical mass body of radius R current and voltage becomes zero
(B) Eg ∝ r for r < R Sol. [C, D]
(C) the separation of two points R1 and R2 is
Note that R is independent of ω, XL directly
9R/4
(D) the separation of two points R1 and R2 is proportional to ω and XC inversely proportional
R/4 to ω. Again Z has a maximum or a minimum
Sol. [A, B] value at ω = ω′ at which the voltage and the
Refer to any standard book. current are in phase.
Q.49 A furnace has a two layered wall as shown
Q.46 When an alternating current flows through a
circuit consisting of a resistor in series with a schematically. Each layer has the same area of
capacitor, during the cycle at some instant it is cross section. The temperature θ at the
possible to have - interface of two layers can be reduced by
(A) voltage across the circuit zero but current li l0
through it not zero inner outer
(B) current through the circuit zero but the layer layer
voltage across it not zero
(C) current through the capacitor not zero but 800°C 80°C
ki k0
the voltage across it zero
(D) current through the resistor not zero but the
voltage across it zero θ°C
9 / 11
(A) increasing the thermal conductivity of outer PART B Marks : 60

layer * All questions are compulsory.
(B) decreasing the thermal conductivity of * All questions carry equal marks
inner layer Q.51 Assume that a constant power P is supplied to
(C) by increasing the thickness of inner layer an electric train and it is fully used in
(D) by decreasing the thickness of outer layer accelerating the train. Obtain relation giving
Sol. [A, B, C, D] the velocity of the train and distance traveled
800 – 80 by it as functions of time.
Rate of heat flow H = which
 l1   l0  P
 
 +   Sol. Power P = constant, therefore P = Fv ⇒ F =
 v
 K 1A   K 0 A 
800 – θ ⇒ m
dv
=
P
. Integrating this we get
is also equal to . Using these two dt v
 l1 
 
 K 1A  2P dx
v= t . Writing the velocity v as and
720 m dt
relations we get, θ = 800 – . Thus further integrating, we get the expression for the
 K1  l0 
1 +   
2 2P 2 3
 K 0  l1  distance x = t .
one can reduce the temperature at the interface by 3 m
any of the four options given.
Q.52 A block of mass 1.5 kg rests on a rough
Q.50 Simple pendulums P1 and P2 have lengths horizontal surface. A horizontal force applied
l1 = 80 cm and l2 = 100 cm respectively. The to the block increases uniformly from 0 to 15
bobs are of masses m1 and m2. Initially both are N in 5 second. Determine velocity and
at rest in equilibrium position. If each of the displacement of the block after 5 second. Use
bobs is given a displacement of 2 cm, the work µs = 0.6 and µk = 0.5 and g = 10 m/s2.
done is W1 and W2 respectively. Then Sol. With usual notation, Fs = µsN = 9N and
(A) W1 > W2 if m1 = m2 Fk = µkN = 7.5 N. Applied force rises to Fs = 9 N
(B) W1 < W2 if m1 = m2 at t = 3s. Therefore, for t ≤ 3 s, v = 0 and s = 0.
m 5 For t ≥ 3 s, net force on the block is (3 t – 7.5),
(C) W1 = W2 if 1 = dv dv
m2 4 that is m = 3t – 7.5 ⇒ = 2t – 5 ⇒
dt dt
m1 4
(D) W1 = W2 if = v = t2 – 5t + A. Here m = 1.5 kg. Now, at t = 3 s, v
m2 5 = 0 , gives A = 6. With this we get for t ≥ 3 s, v =
Sol. [A, D] t2 – 5t + 6. Therefore, at t = 5 s, v = 6 m/s. From
With usual notation, the height through which the ds
the equation for v, we get = t2 – 5t + 6 ⇒ s =
 θ dt
bob falls is h = l(1 – cosθ) = l  2 sin 2  =
 2 t 3 5t 2
– + 6t + B. Again at t = 3 s, s = 0, giving
 θ2  3 2
2l   since θ is small. Therefore, we can write

 4  9
B = – . With this we get,
2 2
lθ 2 l  a  a2
h= =   = . Thus, the work done W t 3 5t 2 9
2 2 l  2l s = – + 6t – . Hence at t = 5 s,
3 2 2
mga 2 1
= P.E. = mgh = ⇒W∝ s=
14
= 4.67 m.
2l l 3
10 / 11
Q.53 A tower used for power transmission leaks a Sol. Refer to the figure. With usual notation, we have
current 1 into the ground. Assume that the 1 2qV mv 2
mv 2 = qV ⇒ v = . Again, =
current spreads uniformly (hemispherically) 2 m R
into the ground. Let p be the resistivity of the mv
qvB ⇒ R = . Eliminating v from the two
ground and r be the distance from the centre of qB
the tower (assumed to be rod). The lower end
1 2mV
of the rod is spherical with radius b. Determine relations, we get R = . Now, sin θ =
B q
(1) current density as a function of r, (2)
magnitude of electric field at a distance r. and l q
= lB . Substituting the values gives
(3) potential difference between the lower end R 2mV
of the rod and a point distance r. 1
sinθ = ⇒ θ = 30°
2
tower O
θ× ×
R
b r inside
× ×
ground R
l θ
r r × ×
Sol. Use I = ∫ J ⋅ dA where current density vector J
v
is parallel to the area element dA of the q × ×
hemispherical surface. When integrated, the area
comes out to be 2πr2. This gives the current
Q.55 A thin planoconvex lens of focal length f is cut
I
density directed radially outward at any along the axis into two halves. The two halves
2πr 2 are placed at a distance d from each other as
point. Using microscopic form of Ohm's law J = σ E shown. The images formed by the two halves
where s is the conductivity, we get the magnitude of lie in the same plane. The distance between the
J I object plane and the image plane is 1.8 m. The
electric field E = = ρ where we have used magnification produced by one of the halves is
σ 2πr 2 2. Determine f, d and the magnification
J produced by the other half.
ρ = . Now, to determine the potential
σ Sol. Obviously L1 forms an image with magnification
dV v
difference we use the relation Er = – ⇒ dV 2 = 1 so that v1 = 2u1. Again u1 + v1 = 1.8 m
dr u1
∫ Edr .
giving u1 = 0.6 m and v1 = 1.2 m. Using lens
= – Substituting the value of E and
formula we get f = 0.4 m. Now, for lens L2, u2 =
integrating between the limits b and r, we get the d + 0.6 and v2 = 1.2 – d. Using these values and
also f = 0.4, we get d (d – 0.6) = 0 or d = 0.6 m.
Iρ  1 1  Further the magnification produced by L2 is
potential difference = –
2π  r b  0.6 1
= .
1.2 2
Q.54 An alpha particle is accelerated through a
potential difference of 10 kV. Then it enters object d image
into a region of transverse magnetic field of plane plane
induction 0.10 T extended upto a distance of
0.10 m. Determine the angle through which the L1 L2
alpha particle deviates. (mass of the alpha
particle = 6.4 × 10–27 kg)
11 / 11
NSEP 2011 Paper with Solution
Kalyan’s Physics Challenge
1. A piece of n type semiconductor is subjected to an electric field Ex. The left end of the
semiconductor is exposed to a radiation so that electron – hole pairs are generated continuously.
Let n be the number density of electrons. The electron current density Je is given by
𝑑𝑛
Je = eneEx + eDe 𝑑𝑥 . The dimensions of electron drift mobility e and electron diffusion
coefficient De are respectively
a) [M1 T2 I1] and [L2 T1] b) [M1 T2 I1] and [M1 L2 T-1]
c) [M-1 T2 I1] and [L2 T-1] d) [M-1 T2 I2] and [L1 T-2 I1]
Sol. Principle of dimensional homogeneity : eneEx is current density

Je : [IL-2] = eneEx : [ITL-3e MLT-3I-1]  e = [M-1 T2 I1]
Principle of dimensional homogeneity : eneEx is current density
𝑑𝑛
Je : [IL-2] = eDe 𝑑𝑥 : [ITDe L-4]  De = [L2 T-1]
2. A metal sample carrying a current along X axis with density Jx is subjected to a magnetic field Bz
(along Z axis). The electric field Ey (Hall field) developed along Y axis is directly proportional to
Jx as well as Bz. The constant of proportionality (Hall coefficient) has SI unit
a) C / m2 b) m 2s / C c) m2 / C d) m3 / C
Sol. The Hall coefficient is defined as the ratio of the induced electric field to the product of the current
density and the applied magnetic field. Its value depends on the type, number, and properties of the
charge carriers that constitute the current.
𝐼𝑥 𝐵𝑧
Hall voltage: VH = Vx Bzw = 𝑛𝑒𝑡
𝐸𝑦 𝑉𝐻 𝑡 1
Hall coefficient: RH = 𝑗 = = 𝑛𝑒
𝑥 𝐵𝑧 𝐼𝑥 𝐵𝑧
n – charge carrier concentration (m-3)

e – charge on electron (C)
t – thickness of the metal sample
w – width of the metal sample
3. A vibratory motion is represented by

𝜋 𝐴 3𝜋
x = 2A cos t + A cos (𝜔𝑡 + ) + A cos (𝜔𝑡 + 𝜋) + cos (𝜔𝑡 + )
2 2 2
the resultant amplitude of the motion is
a) 9𝐴 b) √𝟓𝑨 c) 5𝐴 d) 2A
2 𝟐 2
National Standard Exam in Physics – 2011 Page 1

Sol. Amplitudes of individual components :

𝐴
A1 = 2A / A2 = A / A3 = A / A4 = 2
𝜋
The phase difference between each component : 2
𝐴 2 √𝟓𝑨
Resultant amplitude: AR = √𝐴2 + ( 2 ) = 𝟐
4. A force F acting on a body is dependent on its displacement s as F ∝ 𝑠 −1/3 . Therefore, the power
delivered by the force varies with its displacement as
a) s2/3 b) s1/2 c) s5/3 d) s0
Sol. Force acting on the body : F = k𝑠 −1/3

𝐹 𝑘
Acceleration of the body : a = 𝑚 =
𝑚
𝑠 −1/3
𝑑𝑣 𝑘 𝑑𝑣 𝑑𝑠 𝑘 𝑘
Velocity of the body : 𝑑𝑡 = 𝑚 𝑠 −1/3  𝑑𝑠 𝑑𝑡 = 𝑚 𝑠 −1/3  𝑣 𝑑𝑣 = 𝑚 𝑠 −1/3 ds
𝑘 𝑣2 𝑘 3 3 𝑘 2/3 1/2
∫ 𝑣 𝑑𝑣 = ∫ 𝑚 𝑠 −1/3 ds  2
= 𝑚 [4 s2/3]  𝑣 = (2
𝑚
𝑠 )  𝑣 = 𝑘 s1/3
Power delivered to the body: p = Fv = k 𝑠 −1/3 {𝑘 s1/3} = s0
5. Bamboo strips are hinged to form three rhombi as shown. Point A0

is fixed to a rigid support. The lengths of the side of the rhombi are
in the ratio 3 : 2 : 1. Point A3 is pulled with a speed v. Let vA1 and
vA2 be the speeds with which points A1 and A2 move. Then, the
ratio vA1 : vA2 is
a) 2:3 b) 3:5 c) 3:2 d) 5:2
Sol. From the properties of the rhombus:

A0A1 : A1A2 : A2A3 = 3a : 2a : a = 3 : 2 : 1
The hinge A1 will pull the segment A0A1
The hinge A2 will pull the segment A0A2 = A0A1 + A1A2
The hinge A3 will pull the segment A0A3 = A0A1 + A1A2 + A2A3
Speed of the hinge A3 : v
The speeds of the hinges A1 and A2 will be in the ratio of their lengths.
VA1 : VA2 = A0A1 : A0A2 = A0A1 : A0A1 + A1A2 = 3 : (3 + 2) = 3 : 5
6. A particle of mass m is made to move with uniform speed v along the perimeter of a regular
hexagon. Magnitude of impulse applied at each corner of the hexagon is
𝑚𝑣
a) mv b) mv√3 c) d) zero
2

Sol. Initial momentum of the particle : pi = mv

Final momentum of the particle : pf = mv
Change in momentum of the particle :
p = pf – pi = √(𝑚𝑣)2 + (𝑚𝑣)2 + 2 𝑚𝑣 𝑚𝑣 cos 120
p = √(𝑚𝑣)2 + (𝑚𝑣)2 − (𝑚𝑣)2 = mv
7. Two chambers of different volumes, one containing m1 g of a gas at pressure p1 and other
containing m2 g of the same gas at pressure p2 are joined to each other. If the temperature of the gas
remains constant, the common pressure reached is
a) 𝑚1 𝑝1 + 𝑚2 𝑝2 b) 𝑚1 𝑝2 + 𝑚2 𝑝1 c) 𝑚1 𝑝2 (𝑝1 + 𝑝2 ) d) (𝒎𝟏 + 𝒎𝟐 )𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟐

𝑚1 + 𝑚2 𝑚1 + 𝑚2 𝑚1 2 + 𝑚2 2 𝒎𝟏 𝒑𝟐 + 𝒎𝟐 𝒑𝟏
Sol. Number of moles of the gas remains constant : n1 + n2 = n

𝑝1 𝑣1 𝑝2 𝑣2 𝑝𝑣1 𝑝𝑣2 1 𝑝 𝑝1 𝑣1 +𝑝2 𝑣2
𝑅𝑇
+ 𝑅𝑇
= 𝑅𝑇
+ 𝑅𝑇
 𝑅𝑇 (𝑝1 𝑣1 +𝑝2 𝑣2 ) = 𝑅𝑇 (𝑣1 +𝑣2 )  p = 𝑣1 +𝑣2
𝑚1 𝑚1 𝑅𝑇 𝑚2 𝑚2 𝑅𝑇
Ideal gas equation : p1v1 = 𝑀
RT  v1 = 𝑀 p1
/ p2v2 = 𝑀
RT  v2 = 𝑀 p2
𝑚 𝑅𝑇 𝑚 𝑅𝑇
𝑝1 𝑣1 +𝑝2 𝑣2 𝑝1 1 +𝑝2 2 (𝒎𝟏 +𝒎𝟐 )𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟐
𝑀 p1 𝑀 p2
p= 𝑣1 +𝑣2
= 𝑚1 𝑅𝑇 𝑚2 𝑅𝑇 = 𝒎𝟏 𝒑𝟐 +𝒎𝟐 𝒑𝟏
+
𝑀 p1 𝑀 p2
8. Two liquid drops of equal radii are falling through air with the terminal velocity v. If these two
drops coalesce to form a single drop, its terminal velocity will be
𝟑 3
a) √2 v b) 2v c) √𝟒 v d) √2 v
Sol. 2 𝑟 2 𝑔(𝜌𝑜 −𝜌𝑚 )

Terminal velocity of spherical object : v = 9 
 v ∝ r2
Radius of each drop : r

4 4
Radius of the bigger drop : R : 3 𝜋𝑅 3 = 2 𝜋𝑟 3  R = 21/3r
3
𝑣 𝑟 2 𝑣 𝑟 2
Terminal velocity of bigger drop : 𝑉 = (𝑅)  𝑉 = (21/3 r) = 2−2/3
𝟑
V = v22/3 = √𝟒 v
9. An elevator of mass M is accelerated upwards by applying a force F. A mass m is initially situated

at a height of 1 m above the floor of the elevator is falling freely. It will hit the floor of the elevator
after a time equal to
a) 2𝑀 b) c) d)
√𝐹+𝑚𝑔 2𝑀 2𝑀 𝟐𝑴
√ √ √
𝐹 − 𝑚𝑔 𝐹 𝑭 + 𝑴𝒈

Sol. Acceleration of the freely falling body: g m/s2

𝐹
Acceleration of the elevator : a = 𝑀
𝐹 𝐹 + 𝑀𝑔
Acceleration of the body relative to lift : ar = a + g = +g =
𝑀 𝑀
1 1
Distance travelled by the stone : s = ut + 2 art2 = 0 + 2
art2
1 𝐹 + 𝑀𝑔 2 𝟐𝑴
1=2 𝑀
t  t =√𝑭+𝑴𝒈
10. The formation of solid argon is due to vander Waals bonding. In this case the potential energy as a
function of interatomic separation can be written as (Lenard Jones 6 – 12 potential energy) E (r) = -
Ar-6 + Br-12 where A and B are constants. Given that A = 8.0 x 10-77 Jm6 and B = 1.12 x 10-133 Jm12,
the bond length for solid argon is
a) 3.75 nm b) 0.0375 nm c) 0.750 nm d) 0.375 nm
Sol. Potential energy of the material : E (r) = - Ar-6 + Br-12

𝑑𝐸 𝑑
Interatomic attractive force: F = − =− (− A𝑟 −6 + B𝑟 −12 ) = 6Ar-7 – 12 Br-13
𝑑𝑟 𝑑𝑟
2𝐵
For equilibrium : F = 0  6Ar-7 – 12 Br-13 = 0  6Ar-7 = 12 Br-13  r6 = 𝐴
2 𝑥1.12 x 10−133
r6 = 8.0 x 10−77
= 0.28 x 10-56 = 0.0028 x 10-54
(0.0028 −54 )1/6
r= x 10 = 0.375 x 10-9 = 0.375 nm
11. Let A and B be the points respectively above and below the earth’s surface each at a distance equal
to half the radius of the earth. If the acceleration due to gravity at these points be gA and gB
respectively, then gB : gA
a) 1:1 b) 9:8 c) 8:9 d) zero
Sol. 𝑅 2 𝑅 2 𝑅 2 4𝑔
Acceleration due to gravity at a height h: gh = g (𝑅+ℎ) = g (𝑅+ℎ) = g (𝑅+𝑅/2) = 9
𝑑 𝑅 𝑔
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d : gd = g (1 − ) = g (1 − ) =
𝑅 2𝑅 2
𝑔 4𝑔 1 4
gB : gA = 2 : 9
=2:9=9:8
12. Let vrms, vmp and vavg represent the root mean square, the most probable and the average velocities
respectively, in case of a gaseous system in equilibrium at certain temperature. Then vrms : vmp : vavg
a) 8 : 3 : 2 b) 8 : 2 : 3 c) 3 : 2 : 8 d) 3:2:8
Sol. 3𝑅𝑇
Root mean square velocity of the gas molecule : vrms = √
𝑀
2𝑅𝑇
Most probable velocity of the gas molecule : vmp = √ 𝑀
8𝑅𝑇
Average velocity of the gas molecule : vavg = √ 𝑀
3𝑅𝑇 2𝑅𝑇 8𝑅𝑇 𝟖
Ratio of velocities : vrms : vmp : vavg = √ 𝑀
:√ 𝑀
: √ 𝑀 = √𝟑 : √𝟐 : √𝝅

13. In the arrangement of resistance shown below, the effective resistance between points A and B is
a) 23.5  b) 38.0  c) 19.0  d) 25.0 
Sol. Due to symmetry in the circuit, we can remove the joint at O. After this, we have two balanced
Wheatstone’s bridges as shown. The circuit can be redrawn as shown.
Effective resistance between A&B : 19 
One part of the circuit is shown in second figure
14. A block of material of specific gravity 0.4 is held submerged at a depth of 1 m in a vessel filled
with water. The vessel is accelerated upwards with acceleration of a0 = g/5. If the block is released
at t = 0 sec, neglecting viscous effects, it will reach the water surface at t equal to (g = 10 m/s2)
a) 0.60 s b) 0.33 s c) 3.3 s d) 1.2 s
Sol. Net force acting on the block : Fnet = ma

FB – Fg = ma  m1 (g+a0) – m(g+a0) = ma
(𝑔+𝑎0 )(𝜌𝑙 −𝜌𝑠 )
vl (g+a0) – vs (g+a0) = vsa  a = 𝜌𝑠
𝜌 𝑔 1
a = (g+a0) (𝜌𝑙 − 1) = g + 5 (𝑅𝐷 − 1) = (10 + 2) (1.5) = 18
𝑠
1 1 1 𝟏
Time taken by the block to travel 1 m: s = ut + 2 at2  1 = 0 + (18)t2  t2 =  t = sec
2 9 𝟑
15. The maximum tension in the string of a simple pendulum is 1.2 times the minimum tension. If o is
the angular amplitude, then o is
a) 4 b) 3 c) 𝟏𝟓 d) 7
cos-1 5 cos-1 4 cos-1 𝟏𝟔 cos-1 8
Sol. 𝑚𝑣 2
Maximum tension in the string: Tmax = mg +
𝑙
1 𝑣2
Apply conservation of energy: 2mv2 = mgl (1 – cos o)  𝑙
= 2g (1 – cos o)
Tmax = mg + 2mg(1 – cos o) = mg (3 – 2 cos o)
Minimum tension in the string: Tmin = mg cos o
Given: Tmax = 1.2 Tmin → mg (3 – 2 cos o) = (1.2) mg cos o
15 𝟏𝟓
3 = 3.2 cos o  cos o = 16  o = cos-1 𝟏𝟔

16. A uniform line charge with density  = 50 C / m lies along X axis. The electric flux per unit
length crossing the portion of the plane z = - 3 m bounded by y = ± 3 m is
a) 4.68 C / m b) 9.36 C / m c) 50 C / m d) 18.7 C / m
Sol. DELETED
Linear charge density :  = 50 C/m

1  1 2
Electric field intensity : E = 2𝜋𝜀 = 4𝜋𝜀
𝑜𝑟 𝑜 𝑟
The units given in the options do not match the

physical quantity to be calculated (weber/m)
17. A plane mirror perpendicular to XY plane makes an angle of 300 with the X axis. An object placed
at (-20, 0) forms an image in the mirror. The point of incidence is (0,0) and the plane of incidence
is the XY plane. The co-ordinates of the image are
a) 10√3, 10 b) -10√3, 10 c) -10, -10√𝟑 d) -10√3, -10
Sol. From the diagram: object distance = image distance = 10

Y co-ordinate of the image: 20 sin 60 = 10 √𝟑
X co-ordinate of the image: 20 – 20 cos 60 = 20 – 10 = 10
Both the co-ordinates are on negative sides.
18. Magnetic flux through a stationary loop with a resistance R varies during the time interval  as
 = at ( - t) where a is a constant. The amount of heat generated in loop during time interval  is
a) 𝑎2 3 b) 𝑎2 3 c) 𝒂𝟐 𝟑 d) 𝑎2 3
6𝑅 4𝑅 𝟑𝑹 2𝑅
Sol. Flux through the stationary loop :  = at ( - t) = at - at2

𝑑𝜑
Emf induced in the loop : e =𝑑𝑡
= a - 2at
𝑑𝐻 𝑒 2 (a−at)2
Rate of heat generated : = =
𝑑𝑡 𝑅 𝑅
𝜏
𝜏 (a−at)2 (𝑎𝜏−2𝑎𝑡)3 𝒂𝟐 𝝉𝟑
Heat generated : H = ∫ 𝑑𝐻 = ∫0 𝑅
𝑑𝑡 = [ ]
3𝑅 (−2𝑎) 0
=
𝟑𝑹
19. Four functions given below describe motion of a particle.

3𝜋
I. y = sin t – cos t II. y = sin3 t III. y = 5 cos ( 4 − 3𝜔𝑡) IV. y = 1 + t + 2t2
Therefore, simple harmonic motion is represented by
a) only I b) I, II and III c) I and III d) I and II

1 1
Sol. y = sin t – cos t = √2 ( sin 𝜔𝑡 − cos 𝜔𝑡) = √𝟐 sin (t + 45)
√2 √2
SHM with amplitude: √2 and initial phase:  = 450

3𝜋 𝟑𝝅
y = 5 cos ( − 3𝜔𝑡) = 5 cos (𝟑𝝎𝒕 − )
4 𝟒
3𝜋
SHM with amplitude: 5 and initial phase:  = − 4
20. A magnetic field is established with the help of a pair of north and south poles as shown. A small
bar magnet placed freely in the field will undergo
a) pure translation motion
b) pure rotational motion
c) rotational motion superimposed on translational motion
d) oscillatory motion
Sol. From the configuration of the magnetic poles we can conclude that they create a non-uniform
magnetic field.
When a bar magnet is placed on non-uniform field, it will experience a force (translational motion)
and torque (rotational motion)
So, the bar magnet will undergo rotational motion superimposed on translational motion.
21. In a hydrogen atom, the magnetic field at the centre of the atom produced by an electron in the nth
orbit is proportional to
a) 1 b) 1 c) 1 d) 𝟏
𝑛2 𝑛3 𝑛4 𝒏𝟓
Sol. 𝜇𝑜 𝐼
Magnetic field at the centre of the circle: B = 2𝑅
𝑒 𝑒𝑣
Current in the circular orbit: I = =
𝑇 2𝜋𝑅
Radius of nth orbit: R = 0.529 n2
2.2 𝑥 106
Speed of the electron in nth orbit: v = 𝑛
𝑒𝑣
𝜇𝑜 𝐼 𝜇𝑜 ( ) 𝜇 𝑒𝑣 𝑘 𝟏
2 = 𝑛5  B ∝ 𝒏𝟓
2𝜋𝑅 𝑜
Magnetic field: B = 2𝑅
= = 4𝜋𝑅
2𝑅
22. A particle of mass m carries a charge +q. It enters into a region of uniform magnetic field 𝐵̅
existing below the line 𝑙𝑙1 as shown. The time spent by the particle in the magnetic field is
𝑚
a) ( - 2)
𝑞𝐵
b) infinite as the particle gets trapped
𝑚
c) 2 𝑞𝐵
𝒎
d) ( + 2)
𝒒𝑩

Sol. The angle covered by the particle inside the field: 2 - ( - 2) =  + 2
𝐵𝑄𝑟 𝐵𝑄𝑟 𝐵𝑄
Speed of the charged particle: v = 𝑚
 r = 𝑚
= 𝑚
𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 + 𝒎
Time spent by the particle in the field: t = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦
= 𝐵𝑄 = ( + 2) 𝒒𝑩
𝑚
23. A 2 F capacitor is charged as shown in the figure.

The change in its stored energy after the switch S is turned to
position 2 is
a) 96 % b) 20 % c) 4% d) 80 %
Sol. 1 1
Initial energy stored in the 2 F capacitor: U1 = Cv2 = x 2v2 = v2
2 2
Common potential acquired by the system, after the switch is thrown to 2.
𝐶1 𝑣1 +𝐶2 𝑣2 2𝑣+8(0) 2𝑣 𝑣
vcom = = = =
𝐶1 + 𝐶2 2+8 10 5
1 1 𝑣 2 𝑣2
Final energy stored in the 2 F capacitor: U2 = 2 Cvcom2 = 2 x 2 x (5) = 25
𝑣2
𝑈1 −𝑈2 𝑣2−
25
Change in stored energy: x 100 = x 100 = 96%
𝑈1 𝑣2
24. An infinite number of charges each equal to 0.2 C are arranged in a line at distances 1, 2, 4, 8...m
from a fixed point. The potential at the fixed point is
a) 1800 V b) 2000 V c) 3600 V d) 2250 V
Sol. 𝑘𝑞
Potential due to a point charge: v = 𝑟
𝑘𝑞 𝑘𝑞
Potential due to infinite no. of charges: V = 𝑟1
+ 𝑟 + …….
2
1 1 -6 1 1 1 1
V = kq ( + + ⋯ ) = 9 x 109 x 0.2 x 10 ( + + 2 + ⋯ ) = 1.8 x 103 ( ) = 3600 volt
𝑟1 𝑟2 1 2 2 1−1⁄2
25. A ball of mass m moving with a speed u along a direction making an

angle  with the vertical strikes a horizontal steel plate. The collision lasts
for a time interval t. If e is the coefficient of restitution between the ball
and the plate, the average force exerted by the plate on the ball is
a) 𝑒𝑚𝑢 b) 𝑒𝑚𝑢 cos 𝜃 c) 2(𝑒 + 1)𝑚𝑢 cos 𝜃 d) (𝒆 + 𝟏)𝒎𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒔 𝜽

𝑡 𝑡 𝑡 𝒕
Sol. There is no change in momentum along the surface: mu sin  = mv sin   u sin  = v sin 
𝑟𝑒𝑙. 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
Coefficient of restitution : e = 𝑟𝑒𝑙. 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑎𝑐ℎ
along normal
𝑣 cos 𝜑
e= 𝑢 cos 𝜃
 v cos  = e u cos 
∆𝑃 𝑚(v cos j −(−u cos q) 𝑚(𝑒𝑢𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃+𝑢𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃) (𝒆+𝟏)𝒎𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒔 𝜽
Avg. force by plate on the ball : Favg = ∆𝑡
= 𝑡
= 𝑡
= 𝒕

26. In YDSE, sources of equal intensities are used. Distance between slits is d and wavelength of light
used is  ( << d). Angular separation of the nearest points on either side of central maximum
where intensities becomes half of the maximum value is
a)  b)  c)  d) 
𝟒𝒅
𝑑 2𝑑 6𝑑
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Sol. Intensity at a point on the screen: I = Imax cos2 (/2)  = Imax
2
2
cos (/2)
1
= cos (/2)  /2 = 45   = 900
√2
 𝜋 
Relation between path diff. and phase diff: x = 2𝑝  = =4
2 𝑥 2𝜋
   
Path difference: x = 2d sin  = 4  2d  = 4   = 8𝑑 → 2 = 𝟒𝒅
27. The variation of magnetic field along the axis of a solenoid is graphically represented by (O is the
centre with 𝑙, 𝑙1 as the extremities of the solenoid along the axis)
𝜇 𝑖𝑛
Sol. Magnetic field along the axis of solenoid: B = 𝑜 (cos 𝜃2 − cos 𝜃1 )
2
If the length of the solenoid is very much greater than its radius:
1 = 1800 and 2 = 00 → B = 𝜇𝑜 𝑖𝑛
So, the correct answer is (d)
28. A wooden cube is placed on a rough horizontal table. A force is applied to the cube. Gradually the
force is increased. Whether the cube slides before toppling or topples before sliding is independent
a) the position of point of application of force

b) the length of the edge of the cube
c) mass of the cube
d) coefficient of friction between the cube and the table

Sol. Condition for sliding: F > f (mg)

𝑎 𝑎 𝑚𝑔𝑎
Condition for toppling:  > N (a/2)   > mg 2  Fh > mg 2  F > 2ℎ
𝑚𝑔𝑎 𝑎
The block will slide before toppling if mg < 2ℎ
  < 2ℎ
𝑎
The block will topple before sliding if  > 2ℎ
Whether the cube slides before toppling or topples before sliding is independent of mass of block
29. There are two organ pipes of same length and material but of different radii. When they are
emitting fundamental notes
a) broader pipe gives note of smaller frequency

b) both the pipes give notes of same frequency
c) narrow pipe gives note of smaller frequency
d) either of them gives note of smaller or larger frequency depending on wavelength
Sol. Let the organ pipes be closed.

𝑣
Fundamental frequency of the note: f = 4(𝑙+𝑒)
Here ‘e’ is end correction: e = 0.6 r (radius of the pipe)
Broader pipe has larger radius thus smaller frequency.
The answer will not change even for an open organ pipe for which we have to apply end correction
for both ends.
30. The wavelength of sodium line observed in the spectrum of a star is found to be 598 nm, whereas
that from the sodium lamp in the laboratory is found to be 589 nm. Therefore, the star is moving
with a speed of about
a) 2.7 x 106 away from the earth b) 5.4 x 106 m/s towards the earth
c) 1.6 x 106 away from the earth d) 4.6 x 106 m/s away from the earth
Sol. Wavelength of sodium line in laboratory:  = 589 nm (actual)

Wavelength of sodium line from the star: 1 = 598 nm (apparent)
As the apparent wavelength is more than actual wavelength, the star is moving away from earth.
 𝑣 598 −589 𝑣
Doppler effect in light: =  =  v = 4.58 x 106 m/s
 𝑐 589 3 𝑥 108
31. In a series LCR circuit, impedance Z is the same at two frequencies f1 and f2. Therefore, the
resonant frequency of the circuit is
a) 𝑓1 +𝑓2 b) 2𝑓1 𝑓2 c) d) √𝒇𝟏 𝒇𝟐

2 √𝑓1 2 + 𝑓2 2
𝑓1 + 𝑓2
2

Sol. Impedance of LCR series circuit: z = √𝑅 2 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝑐 )2

Resistance R is independent of frequency.
Given: zf1 = zf2  Xf1 = Xf2  (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 )f1 = (𝑋𝐶 − 𝑋𝐿 )f2
(𝑋𝐿 )f1 + (𝑋𝐿 )f2 = (𝑋𝐿 )f1 + (𝑋𝐿 )f2
1 1 1 1 𝑓 +𝑓
2L(𝑓1 + 𝑓2 ) = 2𝜋𝐶 (𝑓 + 𝑓 )  2L(𝑓1 + 𝑓2 ) = 2𝜋𝐶 ( 𝑓1 𝑓 2 )
1 2 1 2
1 1 𝟏
42LC = 𝑓1 𝑓2
 2√𝐿𝐶 =  √𝒇𝟏 𝒇𝟐 = 𝟐√𝑳𝑪
√𝑓1 𝑓2
32. Two particles are moving along X and Y axes towards the origin with constant speeds u and v
respectively. At time t = 0, their respective distances from the origin are x and y. the time instant at
which the particles will be closest to each other is
a) √𝑥 2 +𝑦 2 b) 𝑣𝑥 + 𝑢𝑦 c) 𝒖𝒙 + 𝒗𝒚 d) 2√𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2
√𝑢2 +𝑣 2 𝑢2 + 𝑣 2 𝒖𝟐 + 𝒗𝟐 𝑢+𝑣
Sol. From the diagram: z2 = (x – ut)2 + (y – vt)2

𝑑𝑧
Differentiate w.r.to time: 2z = 2 (x – ut) (-u) + 2 (y – vt) (-v)
𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑧
For the distance to be minimum: 𝑑𝑡 = 0
-2u (x – ut) – 2v (y –vt) = 0
-2ux +2u2t – 2vy + 2v2t = 0
ux + vy
2t (u2+v2) = 2(ux + vy)  t = u2+v2
33. A container of volume 0.1 m3 is filled with nitrogen at a temperature of 47 0C and a gauge pressure
of 4.0 x 105 Pa. After some time, due to leakage, the gauge pressure drops to 3.0 x 105 Pa and the
temperature to 27 0C. The mass of nitrogen that has leaked out is about
a) 128 g b) 84 g c) 154 g d) 226 g
Sol. Absolute pressure = gauge pressure + atmospheric pressure

𝑚
Ideal gas equation: pv = nRT  pv = 𝑀 RT
𝑝1 𝑚 𝑇 5.0 x 105 𝑚 320 𝑚 75
𝑝2
= 𝑚1 𝑇1 → 4.0 x 105 = 𝑚1 300  𝑚1 = 64
2 2 2 2
𝑝𝑣𝑀 5 𝑥 105 𝑥 0.1 𝑥 28 𝑥 10−3
Initial mass of the nitrogen gas : m1 = = = 0.53 kg
𝑅𝑇 8.314 𝑥 320
0.53 75
=  m2 = 0.45 kg
𝑚2 64
Mass of nitrogen gas that has leaked out: m1 – m2 = 0.53 – 0.45 = 0.08 kg = 80 g
34. Ninety percent of a radioactive sample is left over after a time interval t. The percentage of initial
sample that will disintegrate in an interval 2t is
a) 38 % b) 19 % c) 9% d) 62 %

Sol. 𝑡⁄
𝑁 1 𝑇
Percentage radioactive material remaining: 𝑁 x 100 = (2) x 100
𝑜
𝑡⁄ 𝑡⁄
1 𝑇 1 𝑇
90 = ( ) x 100  0.9 = ( )
2 2
2𝑡⁄ 𝑡 2
1 𝑇 1 ⁄𝑇
X= (2) x 100  X = ((2) ) x 100  X = (0.9)2 x 100 = 81%
Percentage radioactive sample that has disintegrated: 100 – 81 = 19%
35. A circuit is arranged as shown. At time t = 0 sec, switch S is

placed in position 1. At t = 5 sec, contact is changed from 1 to
2. The voltage across the capacitor is measured at t = 5 sec and
at t = 6 sec. Let these voltages be V1 and V2 respectively. Then,
V1 and V2 respectively are
a) 10 V & 0 V b) 9.18 V & 3.67 V c) 9.18 V & 3.37 V d) 10 V & 3.687 V
Sol. Charge on a capacitor being charged: q = q0 (1 − 𝑒 −𝑡/𝑅𝐶 ) divide with C: vc = v0 (1 − 𝑒 −𝑡/𝑅𝐶 )

R = 20 k and C = 100 F
vc = 10 (1 − 𝑒 −5/2 ) = 9.18 volt
Voltage across a discharging capacitor: R = 10 k and C = 100 F
9.18
vc = v0 e-t/RC = 9.18 x e-1/1 = 𝑒
= 3.37 volt
36. There are two thermocouples A and B made of the same pair of metals. In A each wire is 50 cm
long and in B each wire is 150 cm long. Both the thermocouples are maintained between the same
lower temperature 1 and higher temperature 2. Each of the two thermocouples is connected to the
same micro ammeter successively. Let 𝜀 be the thermo emf and I be the thermoelectric current.
Then which of the following statements is true?
a) both 𝜀 and I are equal for A and B

b) both 𝜀 and I are greater for B than those for A
c) 𝜺 is the same for both but I is greater for A
d) 𝜀 is the same for both but I is greater for B
Sol. Resistance of a wire is proportional to length.

So, thermocouple B has more resistance.
Thermo emf of a thermocouple: = a + b2 where a, b are constants ( : temperature diff.: 2 - 1 )

37. Two identical particles move at right angles to each other, possessing de Broglie wavelengths 1
and 2. The de Broglie wavelength of each of the particles in their centre of mass frame will be
a) 1 2 + 2 2 b) 1 + 2 c) 21 2 d) 𝟐𝟏 𝟐
√
2 2 1 +2 √𝟏 𝟐 + 𝟐 𝟐
Sol. The two particles are identical: m1 = m2 = m

ℎ ℎ
de Broglie’s wave lengths of the particles: 1 = and 2 =
𝑚𝑣1 𝑚𝑣2
𝑣 2 𝑣 2
Since the particles are moving at right angles, velocity in CM frame: v = √( 21 ) + ( 22 )
ℎ ℎ 𝟐𝟏 𝟐
de Broglie’s wavelength of the particle in centre of mass frame:  = = =
𝑚𝑣 𝑣 2 𝑣 2
𝑚√( 1 ) +( 2 ) √𝟏 𝟐 +𝟐 𝟐
2 2
38. The stopping potential for photoelectrons emitted from a surface illuminated by light of
wavelength 400 nm is 500 mV. When the incident wavelength is changed to a new value, the
stopping potential is found to be 800 mV. New wavelength is about
a) 365 nm b) 250 nm c) 640 nm d) 340 nm
ℎ𝑐
Sol. Einstein’s photo electric equation: E =  + eV  =  + eV

1240 1240
400
=  + e (500 mV)  
=  + e (800 mV)
1240 1240 1240
- 3.1 = 0.3  = 3.4 →  = = 364.7 nm = 365 nm
  3.4
39. For the logic circuit given below, the output y for A = 0, B = 0 and A = 1, B = 1 are
a) 0 and 1 b) 0 and 0 c) 1 and 0 d) 1 and 1
Sol. X = 𝐵̅ and Y = 𝐴̅
P = XA = 𝐵̅A; Z = YB = 𝐴̅B
y = P + Z = 𝐴̅B + 𝐵̅A (exclusive OR gate)
40. In hydrogen like atom electron makes transition from an energy level with quantum number n to
another with quantum number (n -1). If n >> 1, frequency of radiation emitted is proportional to
a) 1 b) 𝟏 c) n2 d) 1
𝑛2 𝒏𝟑 𝑛4
Sol. 1 1 1
Rydberg formula:  = R (𝑛 2 − 𝑛 2 ) z2 for hydrogen like atom
𝑖 𝑓
Multiply throughout with c (speed of light)

𝑐 1 1 1 1 𝑛2 −(𝑛−1)2 2𝑛−1 𝟏

= f = Rc (𝑛 2 − 𝑛 2 ) z2 = Rc ((𝑛−1)2 − 𝑛2 ) = Rc ( (𝑛−1)2 𝑛2 )  f ∝ 1 2  f ∝ 𝒏𝟑
𝑖 𝑓 𝑛4 (1− )
𝑛

41. Consider an electron orbiting the nucleus with speed v and in an orbit of radius r. The ratio of the
magnetic moment to the orbital angular momentum of the electron is independent of
a) radius r b) speed v c) charge e d) mass me

𝑞 𝑞 1
Sol. Magnetic moment of orbiting electron: M = iA = 𝑇 r2 = 2𝜋𝑟 r2 = 2qvr
𝑣
Angular momentum of the orbiting electron: L = mvr
𝑀 𝑞
Ratio of magnetic moment to orbital angular momentum: 𝐿
= 2𝑚
42. A current Io enters into a parallel combination of resistors R1 and R2. Current I1 flows through R1
and I2 through R2. The current Io distributes in such a way that
a) power consumed in R1 and in R2 is the same

b) total power consumed in R1 and R2 is minimum
c) I1 is proportional to R2 and I2 is proportional to R1
d) the power consumed in each of R1 and R2 is minimum
Sol. The two resistors are in parallel. Potential drop is same and Io = I1 + I2
I1R1 = I2R2  I1R1 = (Io – I1) R2
𝑹𝟐
I1R1 = IoR2 – I1R2  I1 (R1 + R2) = IoR2  I1 = 𝑹 Io
𝟏 +𝑹𝟐
𝑹𝟏
On similar lines: I2 = 𝑹 Io
𝟏 +𝑹𝟐
43. Weight of a body on the surface of the earth depends on
a) distance of the body from the centre of the earth

b) the latitude of the place on the earth surface where the body is placed
c) the longitude of the place on the earth surface where the body is placed
d) the angular speed of the rotation of the earth about its own axis
Sol. Weight of a body: w = mg (m: mass (constant); g: acceleration due to gravity (variable))
𝟐𝒉
Variation in g: With altitude (height): gh = g (𝟏 − 𝑹
)
𝒅
With depth: gd = g (𝟏 − 𝑹)
With latitude and rotation: g = g – R2 cos2 
Here  : angular speed of rotation and  : latitude
44. Which of the following is/are involved in the formation of rain drops in a cloud?
a) saturation of vapor pressure b) temperature

c) viscosity d) surface tension

Sol. Surface tension: This property helps the rain drops to attain spherical shape.
Temperature: High temperature helps in faster evaporation process and low temperature helps in
condensation of the water vapor.
Saturation of vapor pressure: This factor decides the rate of evaporation of water from different
sources like lakes, rivers and oceans.
45. A cyclic process on PV diagram is as shown below. The same process can be shown on PT and VT
diagrams. Choose the correct alternative (s).
a) b)
c) d)
Sol. 1 – 2 : isobaric process (constant pressure)

2 – 3 : isothermal process (constant temperature)
3 – 4 : isochoric process (constant volume)
4 – 1 : isothermal process (constant temperature)
Options (a) and (b) are correct.
46. When a bright light source is placed 30 cm in front of a thin lens, an erect image is formed at 7.5
cm from the lens. A faint inverted image is also formed at 6 cm in front of the lens due to
reflection from the front surface of the lens. When the lens is turned around, this weaker inverted
image is now formed at 10 cm in front of the lens. Therefore
a) the lens is diverging biconcave

b) the refractive index of the glass of the lens is 1.6
c) radii of curvature of surfaces of the lens are 10 cm and 15 cm respectively
d) the lens behaves as a converging lens of focal length 30 cm when immersed in a liquid of
refractive index 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Sol. Lens formula: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓  − 7.5 + 30 = 𝑓  − 10 = 𝑓  f = - 10 cm
Inverted image is formed by concave mirror. The second surface acts as mirror.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror formula : 𝑣 + 𝑢 = 𝑓  6 + 30 = 𝑓  5 = 𝑓  f = 5 cm
Radius of curvature of the surface : R1 = 2f = 2 x 5 = 10 cm
When the lens is turned around, the second inverted image is formed at 10 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 30
Mirror formula : 𝑣 + 𝑢 = 𝑓  10 + 30 = 𝑓  30 = 𝑓  f = 4
cm
30
Radius of curvature of the surface: R2 = 2f = 2 x = 15 cm
4
1 1 1
Lens maker’s formula: 𝑓 = (n – 1) (𝑅 − 𝑅 )
1 2
1 1 1 1
− 10 = (n – 1) (− 10 − 15
) = (n – 1) (− 6)
6
n–1=  n = 1 + 0.6 = 1.6
10
1 𝑛 1 1
Lens maker’s formula: 𝑓 = (𝑛 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 − 1) (𝑅 − 𝑅 )
𝑙 𝑙𝑖𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑑 1 2
1 1.6 1 0.4 1 0.4
= (2 − 1) (− 6) = (− 2 ) (− 6) =
𝑓𝑙 12
𝒇𝒍 = 30 cm
47. Let n1 and n2 moles of the two different ideal gases be mixed. If ratio of specific heats of the two
gases are 1 and 2 respectively, then the ratio of specific heats  of the mixture is given through the
relation
𝒏𝟏 +𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐
a) (n1+n2)  = n11 + n22 b) = +
฀𝟏 𝟏 −𝟏 𝟐 −𝟏
 𝟏 𝟐
c) (n1+n2) = n1 + n2 d) (n1+n2) ( - 1) = n1 (1 − 1) + n1 (1 − 1)
฀𝟏 𝟏 −𝟏 𝟐 −𝟏
Sol. 𝑛1 𝑐𝑣1 +𝑛2 𝑐𝑣2

Resultant cv = 𝑛1 +𝑛2
(𝑛1 + 𝑛2 ) cv = 𝑛1 𝑐𝑣1 + 𝑛2 𝑐𝑣2
𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝒏𝟏 +𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐
(𝑛1 + 𝑛2 ) 𝛾−1 = 𝑛1 𝛾 + 𝑛2 𝛾  𝟏
= +
1 −1 2 −1 𝟏 −𝟏 𝟐 −𝟏
𝑛1 𝑐𝑝1 +𝑛2 𝑐𝑝2
Resultant cp = 𝑛1 +𝑛2
(𝑛1 + 𝑛2 ) cp = 𝑛1 𝑐𝑝1 + 𝑛2 𝑐𝑝2
𝑅 𝛾 𝑅 𝛾 𝑅  𝟏 𝟐
(𝑛1 + 𝑛2 ) 𝛾−1 = 𝑛1 𝛾 1−1 + 𝑛2 𝛾 2−1  (n1+n2) 𝟏 = n1  + n2 
1 2 𝟏 −𝟏 𝟐 −𝟏
48. A resistance of 4  is connected across a cell. Then it is replaced by another resistance of 1 . It is

found that power dissipated in resistance in both the cases is 16 W. Then
a) internal resistance of the cell is 2 

b) emf of the cell is 12 V
c) maximum power that can be dissipated in the external resistance is 18 W
d) short circuit current from the cell is infinite

Sol. 𝐸 𝐸
Current through the circuit: i1 = 𝑅+𝑟 = 4+𝑟
𝐸 𝐸
Current through the circuit: i2 = 𝑅+𝑟 = 1+𝑟
𝐸 2 𝐸 2
Given: power dissipated in both cases is same: (4+𝑟) x 4 = (1+𝑟) x 1  r = 2 
𝐸 2 𝐸 2
Given: (4+𝑟) x 4 = 16  (4+2) x 4 = 16  E = 12 volt
𝐸 2 𝐸2 144
Maximum power is transferred when r = R: Pmax = (2𝑅) R = 4𝑟 = 4 𝑥 2 = 18 W
49. Two solid spheres A and B of equal volumes but of different densities dA and dB respectively, are
connected by a string. They are fully immersed in a fluid of density dF. They get arranged in an
equilibrium state as shown in the figure with non-zero tension in the string. The arrangement is
possible only if
a) dA < dF b) dB > dF c) dA > dF d) dA + dB = 2dF
Sol. For equilibrium of the system : 2vdFg = vdAg + vdBg  2dF = dA + dB

For non-zero tension in the string : vdFg > vdAg  dA < dF  vdBg > vdFg  dB > dF
50. A particle Q is moving along +Y axis. Another particle P is moving in XY plane along a straight
line x = - d (d > 0) with a uniform speed v parallel to that of Q. At time t = 0, particles P and Q
happen to be along X axis where a third particle R situated at x = +d starts moving opposite to P
with a constant acceleration a. At all further instants the three particles happen to be collinear.
Then Q
𝒗 𝒗
a) has an initial speed 𝟐 b) will come to rest after a time interval 𝒂
𝒂 𝟐𝒗
c) has an acceleration − 𝟐 d) will return to its initial position after a time interval 𝒂
Sol. Since the particles are always collinear, the slopes are equal
1
𝑦 −𝑦 − 𝑎𝑡 2 −𝑣𝑡
yQ – yp = 𝑥 𝑅−𝑥 𝑝 (x + d); yQ – vt = 2
2𝑑
(x + d)
𝑅 𝑄
−𝑎𝑡−𝑣 −𝑎𝑡−𝑣
Put x = 0 and differentiate: vQ – v = 2𝑑
d= 2
------ (1)
𝑣 𝒗
For initial velocity of Q, put t = 0, vQ = v - =
2 𝟐
−𝑎−0 𝒂
Differentiate eqn. (1) w.r.to time: aQ – 0 = =−
2 𝟐
−𝑎𝑡−𝑣 𝐯
Put vQ = 0 in eqn. (1), 0 – v = 2
t =𝐚
𝟐𝒗
Since the acceleration is constant, the particle Q will return to its starting point in a time: 2t = 𝒂

51. a) A 40 W, 120 V incandescent bulb has a tungsten filament 0.381 m long. The diameter of the
filament is 33 m. Tungsten has a resistivity 5.51 x 10-8 m at room temperature 20 0C. Given that
the resistivity of the tungsten filament varies as T6/5, estimate the temperature of the filament when
it is operated as its rated voltage
b) Assume that the electrical power dissipated in the filament is radiated from the surface of the
filament. If emissivity of the filament surface is 0.35, determine the temperature of the filament
and compare it with that obtained in part (a)
Sol. 𝜌𝑙 𝜌𝑙 5.51 𝑥 10−8 𝑥 0.381 𝑥 4

a) Resistance of the wire at room temperature: R1 = 𝐴
= 𝑑2
=  (33 𝑥 10−6 )2
= 24.5 
4
𝑉2 120 𝑥 120
Resistance of the wire at full power consumption: R2 = 𝑃
= 40
= 360 
Resistivity of the wire at full power consumption:
𝑑2 2
𝑅2 𝐴 𝑅2  360 𝑥 𝜋 𝑥 (33 𝑥 10−6 )
= 𝑙
= 𝑙
4
= 4 𝑥 0.381
= 8.08 x 10-7 m
6⁄
Relation between resistivity and temperature:  ∝ 𝑇 5
𝜌 𝑇 6/5 8.08 x 10−7 𝑇 6/5

𝜌𝑜
= (𝑇 )  5.51 x 10−8 = (293)  T1 = 2746.3 K
0
b) Power radiated by a body : P = AeT4 = 𝜎(2𝜋𝑟)𝑙𝑒 (𝑇 4 − 𝑇𝑜 4 )

40 = 5.67 x 10-8 x 2 x 3.14 x 16.5 x 10-6 x 0.381 x 0.35 x (T4 – 7.4 x 109) = 2672.3 K
52. A parallel plate capacitor with a separation d = 1 cm is subjected to a potential difference of 20 kV

with air as a dielectric. Assume that air behaves as a dielectric (insulator) up to a maximum electric
field (called di electric strength) of 30 kV/cm (after which it breaks down). Now, a thin plate of
glass (dielectric constant 6.5 and dielectric strength 290 kV/cm) is inserted. Determine the
maximum thickness of glass plate to avoid breakdown in the capacitor
Sol. 𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 𝜀0 𝐴
capacitance with dielectric: C1 = ; Capacitance without dielectric: C2 =
𝑡 𝑑−𝑡
Potential across the air capacitor:
𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 𝐾
𝐶1 𝐾 (𝑑−𝑡)𝑡
V2 = (𝐶 )𝑣 = ( 𝐾𝜀0𝐴 𝑡 𝜀0 𝐴 ) 𝑣 = ( 𝐾
𝑡
1 )𝑣 = 𝑣
1 +𝐶2 + + 𝑡 𝑡+𝐾(𝑑−𝑡)
𝑡 𝑑−𝑡 𝑡 𝑑−𝑡
𝑉2 𝐾𝑣 20 𝑥 6.5 2.17
𝑑−𝑡
= 𝑡+𝐾(𝑑−𝑡)
 30 = 𝑡+6.5(1−𝑡)
→t= 5.5
= 0.394 cm
𝐵
53. a) Cauchy’s empirical formula for refractive index of a transparent medium is n – 1 = A (1 + )
2
Hence obtain the condition for achromatic combination of two lenses made from different glasses.
Refractive indices of flint and crown glasses are given below.
Flint glass : 1.644 (R = 640 nm) / 1.664 (B = 480 nm)
crown glass : 1.514 (R = 640 nm) / 1.524 (B = 480 nm)
b) Determine the focal length of the two lenses (one of flint glass and the other of crown glass)
such that their combination has focal length of +40 cm for all colors.

𝜇 −𝜇 1.664−1.644 0.02 𝟐
Sol. Dispersive power of flint glass : 1 = 𝜇𝐵𝐵+𝜇𝑅 𝑅 = 1.664+1.644 = 0.654 = 𝟔𝟓.𝟒
−1 −1
2 2
𝜇𝐵 −𝜇𝑅 1.524−1.514 0.01 𝟏
Dispersive power of crown glass : 2 = 𝜇𝐵 +𝜇𝑅 = 1.524+1.514 = =
−1 −1 0.519 𝟓𝟏.𝟗
2 2
𝜔1 𝜔2 𝜔 𝜔 𝝎 𝒇
b) Condition for achromatism : 𝑓1
+ 𝑓2
=0  𝑓1 = − 𝑓2  𝝎𝟏 = − 𝒇𝟏
1 2 𝟐 𝟐
2
𝑓
− 𝑓1 = 65.4
1  f1 = −1.6 f2
2
51.9
1 1 1 1 1 1
Effective focal length of the combination : = +  = +
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2 40 𝑓1 𝑓2
1 1 1 1 1 1
=− +  = (1 − )  f2 = 15 cm (convex lens)
40 1.6𝑓2 𝑓2 40 𝑓2 1.6
Focal length of the concave lens: f1 = −1.6𝑓2 = −1.6 𝑥 15 = −24 cm
𝐵
a) Cauchy’s empirical formula for refractive index : n – 1 = A (1 + )
2
1 1
1
lens maker’s formula : 𝑓 = (n - 1) ( −𝑅 )
𝑅1 2
1 1 1
Differentiate : − 𝑓2 𝑑𝑓 = dn (𝑅 − 𝑅 )
1 2
𝑑𝑓 𝑑𝑛
Divide with lens maker’s formula : − = =
𝑓 𝑛−1
1 1 1
Effective focal length of the combination : = +
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2
1 1 1
Differentiate : − 𝐹2 𝑑𝐹 = − 𝑓 2 𝑑𝑓2 − 𝑓 2 𝑑𝑓2
1 2
1 1 𝝎𝟏 𝝎𝟐
Condition for achromatism : dF = 0  − 2 𝑑𝑓2 − 2 𝑑𝑓2 =0 + =0
𝑓1 𝑓2 𝒇𝟏 𝒇𝟐
54. Obtain an expression for the magnetic moment associated with a

solenoid of length L and number of turns N carrying current I. The
inner and outer radii of the solenoid are r1 and r2.
Sol. 𝑁
Number of turns per unit length : n =
𝐿
Consider the cross-sectional view of the solenoid.
Take an element of radius r, thickness dr.
𝑑𝑟
Number of turns per unit length in this element : dn = 𝑛
𝑟2 −𝑟1
Magnetic moment of the elemental solenoid : dM = iAdn
𝑑𝑟 𝑖𝜋𝑛
dM = i r2 𝑟 𝑛=𝑟 r2 dr
2 −𝑟1 2 −𝑟1
𝑖𝜋𝑛 𝑟 𝑖𝜋𝑛 𝑟 3 𝑟2 𝑖𝜋𝑛 𝒊𝝅𝑵
M = ∫ 𝑑𝑀 = 𝑟 ∫ 2 𝑟 2 𝑑𝑟 =𝑟 [ ] = 3(𝑟 −𝑟 ) [𝑟2 3 − 𝑟1 3 ] = 𝟑𝑳(𝒓 [𝒓𝟐 𝟑 − 𝒓𝟏 𝟑 ]
2 −𝑟1 𝑟1 2 −𝑟1 3 𝑟1 2 1 𝟐 −𝒓𝟏 )

55. One end of a string is attached to a rigid wall at a point O, passes over a smooth pulley and carries
a hanger S of mass M at its other end. Another object P of mass M is suspended from a light ring
that can slide without friction along the string as shown in figure. OA is horizontal. Find the
additional mass to be attached to the hanger S so as to raise the object P by 10 cm
Sol. For equilibrium of the system : 2T cos  = Mg  2 Mg cos  = Mg   = 600

20√3
tan 60 =  h = 20 cm
ℎ
The block P is to be raised by 10 cm. Now the angle 𝜑
20√3 1
tan  = = 2√3  cos  =
10 √13
1
For equilibrium of the system : 2T cos  = Mg  2(M + m)g = Mg
√13
√𝟏𝟑−𝟐
m=( 𝟐
)M


Date of Examination : 24th November 2012
Time 09.30 to 11.30 hrs
[Q.P. CODE NO. : 1-1-6]
PART-A (Total Marks : 180)
SUB-PART A-1 : ONLY ONE OUT OF FOUR OPTIONS IS CORRECT
N.B. Physical constants are given at the end

SUB-PART A-1
1. Two thermally insulated compartments 1 and 2 are filled with a perfect gas and are connected by a short tube
having a valve which is closed. The pressures, volumes and absolute temperatures of the two compartments
are respectively (p1, V1, T1) and (p2, V2, T2). After opening the valve, the temperature and the pressure of
both the compartments respectively are -
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 ) p1V1 + p 2 V2 p1V1 + p 2 V2
(a) , (b) T1T2 ,
(p1V1T1 + p 2 V2 T2 ) V1 + V2 V1 + V2
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 ) p1V1T1 + p 2 V2T2 T1 + T2 p1V1 + p 2 V2

(c) , (d) ,
(p1V1T1 + p 2 V2 T2 ) V1T1 + V2T2 2 V1 + V2
Ans. [Bonus]
Sol. *Internal energy before connection
C V p1V1 C V p 2 V2 C V p'
+ = [V1 + V2]
R R R
p1V1 + p 2 V2
p' =
V1 + V2
n1 + n2 = n1' + n '2
*Law of mole conservation
p1V1 p 2 V2 p' V1 + p' V2
+ =
RT1 RT2 RT '+ RT'
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 )
∴T'=
(p1V1T2 + p 2 V2 T1 )
Comment : No option is matching so question is bonus.
1 / 33
2. An inductance coil is connected to an ac source through a 60 ohm resistance in series. The source voltage,
voltage across the coil and voltage across the resistance are found to be 33 V, 27 V and 12 respectively.
Therefore, the resistance of the coil is -
(a) 30 ohm (b) 45 ohm (c) 105 ohm (d) 75 ohm
Ans. [b]
Sol.
L,R 60Ω
27V 12V
~
VS = 33
12 1
I= =
60 5
VS2 = VL2 + (VR + V60 ) 2
VS2 = VL2 + VR2 + 2VR V60 + V60

2
(33)2 = (27)2 + 2VR(12) + (12)2

1089 = 729 + 24VR + 144
24VR = 216
216
VR = =9
24
IR = 9
9 9
R= = = 45Ω
I 1/ 5
3. An ideal inductance coil is connected to a parallel plate capacitor. Electrical oscillation with energy W are set
up in this circuit. The capacitor plates are slowly drawn apart till the frequency of oscillations is doubled. The
work done in this process will be -
(a) W (b) 2W (c) 3W (d) 4W
Ans. [c]
1
Sol. f=
2π LC
1
frequency is doubled when capacitance is th
4
Q2
energy ⇒ U1 = =W
2C
2 / 33
Q2
energy after shifting U2 = = 4W
C
2
4
Work done = U2 – U1 = 4W – W = 3W
4. Two equal masses are connected by a spring satisfying Hooke's law and are placed on a frictionless table.
The spring is elongated a little and allowed to go. Let the angular frequency of oscillations be ω. Now one of
the masses is stopped. The square of the new angular frequency is -
ω2 ω2
(a) ω2 (b) (c) (d) 2ω2
2 3
Ans. [b]
Sol.
m M
m
µ=
2
k 2k
ω2 = =
µ m
When one block is stopped
k ω2
ω12 = =
m 2
5. When a particle oscillates in simple harmonic motion, both its potential energy and kinetic energy vary
sinusoidally with time. If ν be the frequency of the motion of the particle, the frequency associated with the
kinetic energy is -
ν
(a) 4ν (b) 2ν (c) ν (d)
2
Ans. [b]
Sol. x = A sin ωt
frequency is ν
v = ωA cos ωt
1 1 1 1  1 + cos 2ωt  1
KE = mv2 = mω2A2cos2ωt = KA2 cos2 ωt = KA2   = KA (1 + cos 2ωt)
2
2 2 2 2  2  4
so, the frequency of energy is doubled → 2ν
3 / 33
6. A gas expands from i to f along the three paths indicated. The work done along the three paths denoted by
W1, W2 and W3 have the relationship -
P
4 i
3 2 3
1
2
1 f
V
1 2 3 4 5 6
(a) W1 < W2 < W3 (b) W2 < W1 = W3 (c) W2 < W1 < W3 (d) W1 > W2 > W3
Ans. [a]
Sol. We know W = ∫ P.dV = area under PV curve

(Area)3 > (Area)2 > (Area)1
∴ W3 > W2 > W1
7. An ideal gas at 30ºC enclosed in cylinder with perfectly non conducting side and a piston moving without
friction in it. The base of the cylinder is perfectly conducting. Cylinder is first placed on a heat source till the
gas is heated to 100ºC and the piston raised by 20 cm and the atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa. The piston is
then held in final position and cylinder is placed on the heat sink to cool the gas to 30ºC. Denoting ∆Q1 as the
heat supplied during heating and ∆Q2 as the heat lost during the cooling then [∆Q1 ~ ∆Q2] would be equal to
(a) 436 J (b) 336 J (c) 236 J (d) 136 J
Ans. [Bonus]
Sol. Comment : Either cross sectional area should be given or number of moles of gas should be given in this
questions ∴ question is bonus.
∆Q1 = nCp∆T – nCv∆T
⇒ n(Cp – Cv)∆T
⇒ nR∆T = PdV = P(Adx)
↑ ↑
Not given Not given
8. Equal amount liquid helium and water at their respective boiling points are boiled by supplying the heat from
identical heaters in time tHe and tw. The latent heats of vaporization of He and Water are 2.09 × 104 J /kg and
540 kcal/kg, then tHe is -
(a) about 0.1 tw (b) about 0.05 tw
(c) just greater than 0.01 tw (d) just less than 0.01 tw
Ans. [d]
4 / 33
Sol. PHe = Pwater

m He .L He m w .L water
=
t He t water
2.09 × 10 4 540 × 103 × 4.2

=
t He t water
t water 54 × 4.2
⇒ = = 108.51
t He 2.09
t He 1
or =
t water 108
∴ tHe = just less than (0.01) tw
9. A 5 litre vessel contains 2 mole of oxygen gas at a pressure of 8 atm. The average translational kinetic energy
of an oxygen molecule under this condition is -
(a) 8.4 × 10–14 J (b) 4.98 × 10–21 J
(c) 7.4 × 10–16 J (d) 4.2 × 10–21 J
Ans. [b]
f 3
Sol. E= KT = KT
2 2
PV 8 × 105 × 5 × 10−3
QT= =
µR 2 × 8.31
3 4 × 10 2 × 5
= × 1.38 × 10–23 ×
2 8.31
6 × 1.38 × 10 −23 × 102 × 5

= ≈ 5.06 × 10–21 J
8.31
10. Six identical conducting rods are joined as shown. The ends A and D are maintained at 200ºC and 20ºC
respectively. No heat is lost to surroundings. The temperature of the junction C will be -
A B C D
200ºC 20ºC
(a) 60ºC (b) 80ºC (c) 100ºC (d) 120ºC

Ans. [b]
5 / 33
Sol.
R R
A R B C R D
200ºC 20ºC
R R
A R D
200ºC
•
B R •
C R 20ºC
(R + R )20 + R.200
θC =
3R
40 + 200
= = 80ºC
3
11. Three corners of an equilateral triangle of side 'a' are occupied by three charges of magnitudes q. If the
1
charges are transferred to infinity, their kinetic energy will be times -
4πε0
2q 3q 2 q2 3q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
a a 3a a
Ans. [b]
Sol.
q
a a
q q
a
Kqq Kqq Kqq
Potential energy = + +
a a a
3Kq 2 1  3q 2 
= =  
a 4πε0  a 
= kinetic energy
12. An LDR (light dependent resistance) is connected to an appropriate voltage source and a current measuring
meter in series (Assuming that the LDR current is proportional to the intensity of the incident light). The
LDR is illuminated with light from a distant metal filament bulb. The filament voltage V, the distance d of
LDR from the bulb and the LDR current I are noted. If both V and d are doubled, the LDR current is -
(a) 16 I (b) 4 I (c) I (d) less than I
6 / 33
Ans. [c]
Sol. Current is directly proportional to intensity
Power V 2 / R
Intensity = =
Area 4πd 2
V2
Intensity ∝
d2
13. A point source is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a convex lens of focal length f on its axis and the image
is formed on a screen at a distance of 60 cm from the lens. Now the lens is split into two halves. One half is
moved perpendicular to the lens axis through a distance of 5 cm. It is found that the two halves of the lens
form two images on the screen and the images are separated by a distance d. The values of f and d
respectively, are -
(a) 20 cm, 15 cm (b) 20 cm, 10 cm (c) 30 cm, 10 cm (d) 30 cm, 5 cm
Ans. [a]
Sol.
f
O
•
30cm 60cm
1 1 1
= −
f v u
1 1 1
= −
f 60 − 30
f = 20 cm
(2) I2
10
5cm 5
O • I1
(1)
30cm
I2 = m × O
v 60
⇒ ×O⇒ ×5
u 30
⇒ 10
Separation between I1 and I2 = 10 + 5
= 15
7 / 33
14. The angle of refraction of a very thin prism is 1º. A light ray is incident normally on one of the refracting
surfaces. The ray that ultimately emerges from the first surface, after suffering reflection from the second
surface, makes an angle of 3.32º with the normal. The deviation of the ray emerging from the second surface
and the refractive index of the material of the prism respectively, are -
(a) 0.66º, 1.66 (b) 1.66º, 1.5 (c) 1.5º, 1.66 (d) 0.66º, 1.5
Ans. [a]
Sol. r1 + r2 = A
here r1 = 0
so r2 = A = i
r1= 0 i
r1= 0
90º
r2= i
r2= i
P 88º
3.32º r3
µ
so angle of incidence of the light at first surface when emerging from it will be
r3 = 2º
bring snells law at point P.
µ sin2º = sin 3.32º
for small angle sin θ ≈ θ so
µ × 2º = 3.32
3.32
µ= = 1.66
2
The deviation of the ray emerging from the second surface
∆ = A (µ –1) = 1º(1.66 – 1) = 0.66º
15. A beam of light from a distant axial point source is incident on the plane surface of a thin plano-convex lens;
a real image is formed at a distance of 40 cm. Now if the curved surface is silvered, the real image is formed
at a distance of 7.5 cm. The radius of curvature of the curved surface of the lens and the refractive index of
the material of the lens respectively, are -
(a) 40 cm, 1.5 (b) 24 cm, 1.6 (c) 20 cm, 1.6 (d) 7.5 cm, 1.5
Ans. [b]
Sol.
f = 40 cm
8 / 33
µ −1 1
= (less maker formula)
R f
µ −1 1
= ....(i)
R 40
1
⇒
2
Now system behave as a mirror

1 2 1
= +
f eq f1 f2
2 1
= + ×2
40 R
1 1 2
= +
f eq 20 R
I
feq
feq = 7.5
1 1 2
= +
7.5 20 R
2
0.08 = ; R = 24
R
µ −1 1
=
R 40
R
µ–1=
40
R
µ=1+ ⇒ 1.6
40
16. A convex lens forms the image of an axial point on a screen. A second lens with focal length f cm is placed
between the screen and the first lens at a distance of 10 cm from the screen. To view the image the screen has
to be shifted away from the lens by 5 cm. A third lens having focal length of the same magnitude f cm is used
to replace the second lens at the same position. But this time to view the image the screen has to be shifted
towards the lens by d cm. The values of f and d respectively, are -
(a) 30 cm, 2.5 cm (b) 30 cm, 5 cm (c) 7.5 cm, 2.5 cm (d) 7.5 cm, 5 cm
9 / 33
Ans. [a]
Sol.
O I
1 2
O – + I1 I2
f
10 cm 5 cm
1 1 1
= –
f v u
1 1 1
= –
f 15 10
1 −5
=
f 150
f = – 30 lens is diverging lens
lens of f ⇒ 30
O – + I1
Portion of I2 f
10 cm
1 1 1
= –
30 v 10
1 1 1
= +
v 30 10
30
v= ⇒ 7.5 cm
4
Screen is to shift by ⇒ 10 – 7.5 cm ⇒ 2.5 cm
10 / 33
17. Cerenkov effect : If the speed of an electron in a medium is greater than the speed of light in that medium
then the electron emits light. An electron beam in a medium is accelerated by a voltage V. The light that is
emitted just suffers total internal reflection at the boundary of the medium placed in air when the angle of
incidence is 45º. The value of the voltage is -
(a) 63.91 kV (b) 255.64 kV (c) 200.34 kV (d) 127.82 kV
Ans. [d]
Sol. For just total internal reflection
i = θC
45 = θC ....(i)
Κ.E. of e ⇒ e × V
–
1
eV = mv2
2
2eV
ν=
m
c
v>
µ
2eV c
>
m µ
2
c m
V >   × ....(ii)
µ 2e
From (i); sin 45 = sin θC

1 1
=
2 µ
1 1
= …(iii)
µ 2
2
from (ii) and (iii)

(3.0 × 108 ) 2 9.1 × 10 −31
V> ×
2 2 × 1.6 × 10 −19
12.81 × 10000 V
⇒ 127.8 kV approx
18. In an electrolytic process certain amount of charge liberates 0.8 gram of oxygen. Then the amount of silver
liberated by same amount of charge is -
(a) 10.8 gram (b) 1.08 gram (c) 0.9 gram (d) 9.0 gram
Ans. [a]
11 / 33
Sol. According to Faraday's second law

Q Q1 = Q2
M1 E1
∴ =
M2 E2
0.8 8
=
M 2 108
M2 = 10.8 gm
19. The energy state of doubly ionized lithium having the same energy as that of the first excited state of
hydrogen is -
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 3 (d) 2
Ans. [b]
Sol. Li++ have Z = 3
13.6Z 2 13.6
– 2
=– 2
n 2
13.6 × 32 13.6
2
= 2
n 2
n2 = 9 × 4
n=6
20. The logic circuit shown below is equivalent to -
Z
X
Y
X X
(a) Z (b) Z
Y Y
(c) X Z (d) X Z
Ans. [d]
Sol.
x
x
x+y x + xy
x
y = x (1 + y) = x
x .y
y
so it is equivalent to
X Z
12 / 33
21. In the circuit shown below, the potential of A with respect to B of the capacitor C is -
1.0V 20Ω
0.5V A B
C
2.5V 10Ω
(a) 2.00 volt (b) – 2.00 volt (c) – 1.50 volt (d) + 1.50 volt
Ans. [c]
Sol.
1.0V 20Ω
i
0.5V +Q –Q
A B
2.5V 10Ω i
Q
VA – VB =
C
Using Kirchoff
–1 + 20 × i + 10 × i + 2.5 = 0
30i = –1.5
1.5 1
i= ⇒ − Amp.
300 20
Q
–0.5 + –20i + 1 = 0
C
Q
–0.5 + +1+1=0
C
Q
= –1.5
C
22. Two pendulums differ in lengths by 22 cm. They oscillate at the same place so that one of them makes
30 oscillations and the other makes 36 oscillations during the same time. The lengths (in cm) of the
pendulums are -
(a) 72 and 50 (b) 60 and 38 (c) 50 and 28 (d) 80 and 58
Ans. [a]
T0 l
Sol. T1 = = 2π 1
30 g
13 / 33
T0 l
T2 = = 2π 2
36 g
T1 36 l1
= =
T2 30 l2
6 l1
⇒ =
5 l2
36 l
= 1
25 l2
11 l 1 − l 2 22cm
= =
25 l2 l2
l2 = 50 cm
l1 = 72 cm
23. The voltage drop across a forward biased diode is 0.7 volt. In the following circuit, the voltages across the
10 ohm resistance in series with the diode and 20 ohm resistance are -
10Ω
20Ω
+ – 10Ω
10V
(a) 0.70 V, 4.28 V (b) 3.58 V, 4.28 V (c) 5.35 V, 2.14 V (d) 3.58 V, 9.3 V
Ans. [b]
Sol.
0.7V
10Ω
i–x
(1)
x 20Ω
(2)
i 10V 10Ω
Kirchoff in loop (1)

0.7 + 10(i – x) – x × 20 = 0
0.7 + 10i – 30x = 0 ….(1)
x × 20 + 10 × i – 10 = 0
10i + 20x – 10 = 0 ….(2)
–10 – 0.7 + 50x = 0
x = 0.214 Amp
14 / 33
Voltage across 20 Ω = 4.28 V

10 i + 20 × 0.214 – 10 = 0
i = 0.572
i – x = 0.358 Amp
voltage across 10 Ω = (i – x) × 10 ⇒ 3.58 volt
24. The magnetic flux φ through a stationary loop of wire having a resistance R varies with time as φ = at2 + bt
(a and b are positive constants). The average emf and the total charge flowing in the loop in the time interval
t = 0 to t = τ respectively are -
aτ 2 + bτ aτ 2 + bτ aτ + b aτ 2 + bτ aτ 2 + bτ
(a) a τ + b, (b) a τ + b, (c) , (d) 2(a τ + b),
R 2R 2 R 2R
Ans. [a]
change in flux
Sol. Average emf =
time
φ ⇒ at2 + bt
At t = 0, φ = 0
At t=τ
φ = aτ2 + bτ
∆φ = aτ2 + bτ
aτ 2 + bτ
Average emf = = aτ + b
τ
dφ
e= ⇒ 2at + b
dt
2at + b
i=
R
dq 2at + b
=
dt R
τ
(2at + b) aτ 2 + bτ
q= ∫
0
R
dt ⇒
R
25. Three waves of the same amplitude have frequencies (n – 1), n and (n + 1) Hz. They superpose on one
another to produce beats. The number of beats produced per second is -
(a) n (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 3n
Ans. [b]
Sol. Beats produced is max difference between two wave frequency.
(1) and (2) (n) – n – 1 = 1
(2) and (3) (n + 1) – n = 1
(1) and (3) (n + 1) – (n – 1) = 2
15 / 33
26. A spherical ball of mass m1 collides head on with another ball of mass m2 at rest. The collision is elastic. The
fraction of kinetic energy lost by m1 is -
4m1m 2 m1 m2 m1m 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(m1 + m 2 ) 2 m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 (m1 + m 2 ) 2
Ans. [a]
Sol.
m1 u m2 ⇒ m1 v1 m2 v2
u2 = 0
by linear momentum
m1u + 0 = m1v1 + m2v2
For head on elastic collision
 m − m2  2m 2 u 2
v1 =  1  u1 + …(i)
 m1 + m 2  (m1 + m 2 )
(K.E) f − (K.E) I
For fractional K.E. =
(K.E) I
1
(K.E)i of m1 = m1u2 …(ii)
2
2
1 1  m − m2  2
(K.E)f = m1u12 = m1  1  u
2 2  m1 + m 2 
 m − m2 
Q Put (u2 = 0) in equation (i), v1 =  1  u
 m1 + m 2 
2
1 1  m − m2  2
m1u 2 − m1  1  .u
∆K.E 2 2  m1 + m 2 
=
K.E 1
m1u 2
2
∆K.E 4m1m 2
=
K.E ( m1 + m 2 ) 2
27. In the circuit shown below, the switch is in position 1 for a long time. At some moment after that the switch
is thrown in position 2. The quantity of heat generated in the resistance of 375 ohm after the switch is
changed to position 2 is
8 µF 250Ω
2
1
375Ω
250V
(a) 0.15 J (b) 0.25 J (c) 0.50 J (d) 0.10 J
16 / 33
Ans. [a]
1
Sol. Ustored = × 8 × (250)2
2
When switch is thrown to 2
capacitor start discharging
∴ whole stored energy get discharged in form of heat in two resistances which are connected in series
8 µF
i H2 250Ω
H1
375Ω
Heat ⇒ H = Ustored
H1 + H2 = H
H1 375
=
H 2 250
375
H1 = × Ustored ⇒ 0.15 Joule
625
28. A conducting square frame of side a and a long straight wire carrying current I and located in the same plane
as shown in the figure. The frame moves to the right with a constant velocity v. The emf induced in the frame
will be proportional to
x
I
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
x 2
(2 x − a ) 2
(2 x + a ) 2 (2 x − a )(2x + a )
Ans. [d]
Sol.
x
I A E
e1 ⊗ v
B
D F
a
17 / 33
a × µ 0iv
emf in AD ⇒ e1 ⇒
 a
2π x − 
 2
a × µ 0i × v
emf in EF ⇒ e2 ⇒
 a
2π x + 
 2
Net emf = e1 – e2
 
aµ 0iv  1 1 
⇒  − 
2π  x − a x + a 
 2 2
k×a
e=
(2 x − a )(2x + a )
29. In the circuit shown below, the switch S is closed at the moment t = 0. As a result the voltage across the
capacitor C will change with time as -
S
+
100V R C
–
R
VC VC
100 100
(a) 50 (b) 50
0 t 0 t
VC VC
100 100
(c) 50 (d) 50
0 t 0 t
Ans. [c]
Sol.
S
R C
100V
R
Find potential across C is VC
18 / 33
i
V1 VC
i
V1 = VC
100
V1 = × R ⇒ 50
2R
∴ VC = 50 volt
∴ Initially C is neutral so graph should start from origin and finally reach upto 50V.
30. The ratio of the rotational kinetic energy to the total kinetic energy of one mole of a gas of rigid diatomic
molecules is
2 2 3 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 5 5 2
Ans. [b]
2
Sol. R.K.E. = nRT = nRT = RT
2
Rotational DOF = 2
∴ Total DOF is = 5
5
Total K.E. = RT
2
R.K.E. RT 2
= =
Total K.E. 5
RT 5
2
31. A metal cylinder of length L is subjected to a uniform compressive force F as shown in the figure. The
material of the cylinder has Young's modulus Y and Poisson's ratio µ. The change in volume of the cylinder
is -
F
µFL (1 − µ)FL (1 + 2µ)FL (1 − 2µ)FL

(a) (b) (c) (d)
Y Y Y Y
Ans. [d]
19 / 33
Sol. V = πr2L
dV 2dr dL
= +
V r L
∆L − ∆d
µ =
L d
∆d ∆L
= −µ
d L
dV  2dr ∆L 
= + 
V  r L 
 µ∆L ∆L 
= − 2 + 
 L L 
∆L
= (–2µ + 1)
L
F.AL
dV = (–2µ + 1)
AY
(1 − 2µ)FL
=
Y
32. Three persons A, B and C note the time taken by their train to cover the distance between two successive
stations by observing the digital clocks on the platforms of two stations. The clocks display time in hours and
minutes. The three persons find the intervals 3, 5 and 4 minutes respectively. Assume the maximum
discrepancy of 2 seconds in actual starting and stopping of the train and the observations by A, B and C.
Then,
(a) All A, B and C can be correct.
(b) Only A and B or B and C can be correct
(c) Only one of A, B and C can be correct
(d) C is correct since it is equal to the average of the three observations
Ans. [c]
33. When two drops of water coalesce – (I) Total surface area decreases. (II) There is some rise in temperature.
Which of the following is correct ?
(a) Both (I) and (II) are wrong statements
(b) Statement (I) is true but (II) is not true
(c) Both (I) and (II) are true and the two statements are independent of each other
(d) Both (I) and (II) are true and (I) is the cause of (II)
Ans. [d]
Sol. Q when coalesce then
surface area decreases and due to which internal energy increases that's why temperature increases
So, (I) is the cause of (II) that's why correct option is (d).
20 / 33
34. Two capacitors 0.5 µF and 1.0 µF in series are connected to a dc source of 30 V. The voltages across the
capacitors respectively are -
(a) 10 V, 20 volt (b) 15 V, 15 volt (c) 20 V, 10 volt (d) 30 V, 30 volt
Ans. [c]
Sol.
0.5 1
V1 V2
30V
1
V1 = × 30
0.5 + 1
30
= = 20 volt
1.5
0.5
V2 = × 30
1.5
= 10 volt
232 208
35. The Th 90 atom has successive alpha and beta decays to the end product Pb 82 . The numbers of alpha and
beta particles emitted in the process respectively are -
(a) 4, 6 (b) 4, 4 (c) 6, 2 (d) 6, 4
Ans. [d]
Sol. Mass number get charge by ⇒ 4 × n
because atomic number charge occur only in α decay
4n = 232 – 208
4n = 24
n=6
α⇒4
Mass number get charge by ⇒ 24
New atomic number ⇒ 90 – 6 × 2 + P
90 – 12 + P = 82
P = 94 – 90 = 4
β⇒4
36. If the breakdown field of air is 2.0 × 106 V / m, the maximum charge that can be given to a sphere of
diameter 10 cm is
(a) 2.0 × 10–4 C (b) 5.6 × 10–7 C (c) 5.6 × 10–5 C (d) 2.0 × 102 C
Ans. [b]
21 / 33
Q
Sol. E=
4πε0 R 2
Q max × 4
2.0 × 106 =
4πε0 (0.1) 2
9 × 109 Q max × 4
2 × 106 =
0.01
1 106
= × = Qmax
18 1011
= 0.0555 × 10–5
= 5.6 × 10–7
37. Density of ocean water varies with depth. This is due to -

(a) elasticity (b) viscosity (c) surface tension (d) all of three
Ans. [a]
Sol. ∴ density vary with property of elasticity.
38. A spring of certain length and having spring constant k is cut two pieces of lengths in a ratio 1 : 2. The spring
constants of the two pieces are in a ratio -
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1. : 4 (c) 1 : 2 (d) none of the above
Ans. [d]
Sol.
⇒
l0 l0 2l 0
3 3
l0  2l 
kl0 = k1 = k2  0 
3  3 
3
k1 = 3k ⇒ k2 = k
2
k1 2
=
k2 1
39. When a metal surface is illuminated with light of wavelength λ, the stopping potential is V0. When the same
V0
surface is illuminated with light of wavelength 2λ, the stopping potential is . If the velocity of light in air
4
is c, the threshold frequency of photoelectric emission is -
c c 2c 4c
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6λ 3λ 3λ 3λ
22 / 33
Ans. [b]
hc
Sol. eV0 = –φ …..(1)
λ
eV0 hc
= –φ ….(2)
4 2λ
1  hc  hc
 − φ = –φ
4 λ  2λ
hc 2hc
−φ= − 4φ
λ λ
hc
3φ =
λ
hc
3 × hfth =
λ
c
fth =
3λ
40. Two elastic wave move along the same direction in the same medium. The pressure amplitudes of both the
waves are equal, but the wavelength of the first wave is three times that of the second. If the average power
transmitted through unit area by the first wave is W1 and that by the second is W2, then -
(a) W1 = W2 (b) W1 = 3W2 (c) W2 = 3W1 (d) W1 = 9W2
Ans. [a]
Sol. we know
P02
I=
2ρV
in a given medium
V = constant
ρ = constant
P0 = constant (given)
P
⇒ ∴ I=
A
∴ W1 = W2
23 / 33
SUB-PART A-2
In question 41 to 50 any number of options (1 or 2 or 3 or all 4) may be correct. You are to identify all of them
correctly to get 6 marks. Even if one answer identified is incorrect or one correct answer is missed, you get
zero score.
41. A cube floats both in water and in a liquid of specific gravity 0.8. Therefore,
(a) apparent weight of the cube is the same in water and in the liquid
(b) the cube has displaced equal volume of water and the liquid while floating
(c) the cube has displaced equal weight of water and the liquid while floating
(d) if some weights are placed on the top surface of the cube to make it just sink, the load in case of water
will be 0.8 times of that to be used in case of the liquid.
Ans. [a, c ]
Sol. (a) cube is floating in water and in liquid so apparent weight of cube in both will be zero.
(c) both liquid and water will apply same thrust on the cube is equal to its weight.
42. On the basis of the kinetic theory of gases one compares 1 gram of hydrogen with 1 gram of argon both at
0ºC. Then,
(a) the same temperature implies that the average kinetic energy of the molecules is the same in both the
cases
(b) the same temperature implies that the average potential energy of the molecules is the same in both the
cases.
(c) internal energies in both the cases are equal.
(d) when both the samples are heated through 1ºC, the total energy added to both of them is not the same.
Ans. [b,d]
Sol. Q P.E. of ideal gas is zero
for all type of gases → option (b) is correct
m
Q n= which is different for different gases
M
option (d) is also correct.
So choice b & d are correct.
43. While explaining the action of heat engine, one can say that
(a) heat cannot be fully converted into mechanical work.
(b) the first law of thermodynamics is necessary but not sufficient.
(c) heat under no circumstances can flow from lower to higher temperature.
(d) A body can not be cooled to absolute zero
Ans. [a,b,d]
24 / 33
Sol. Option (a) is correct Q 100 % efficiency not possible.

Option (b) is correct : Q first law thermodynamics is used and second law is also used.
TL
Option (d) is correct η = 1 –
TH
if TL = 0K
∴ η = 1 or 100 % not possible.
44. The rate of change of angular momentum of a system of particles about the centre of mass is equal to the sum
of external torques about the centre of mass when the centre of mass is
(a) fixed with respect to an inertial frame (b) in linear acceleration
(c) in rotational motion (d) is in a translational motion
Ans. [a,b,c,d]
45. Light is traveling in vacuum along the Z-axis. The sets of possible electric and magnetic fields could be
r r r r r r
(a) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 sin(ωt – kz) (b) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 cos(ωt – kz)
r r r r r r
(c) E = ˆjE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = − îB 0 sin (ωt – kz) (d) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 sin (ωt – kz + δ)
Ans. [a,c]
r r
Sol. * Direction of EM wave is in E × B
r r
∴ E × B should be in k̂ direction.
* E & B oscillate in same phase.
∴ Correct option are a & c.
46. In case of photoelectric effect,

(a) since photons are absorbed as a single unit, there is no significant time delay in the emission of
photoelectrons.
eφ
(b) Einstein's analysis gives a critical frequency ν0 = , where φ is the work function and the light of this
h
frequency ejects electrons with maximum kinetic energy.
(c) only a small fraction of the incident photons succeed in ejecting photoelectrons while most of them are
absorbed by the system as a whole and generate thermal energy.
(d) the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons is dependent on the intensity of radiation.
Ans. [a, c]
25 / 33
47. A parallel combination of an inductor coil and a resistance of 60 ohm is connected to an ac source. The
current in the coil, current in the resistance and the source current are respectively 3A, 2.5 A and 4.5 A.
Therefore,
(a) Kirchhoff's current law is NOT applicable to ac circuits
(b) impedance of the coil is 50 ohm
(c) electric power dissipated in the coil is 150 watt
(d) impedance of the circuit is 33.3 ohm
Ans. [b, d]
Sol.
3A L
2.5A R
4.5A
~
Vrms
2.5
VR rms ⇒ 60 × = 150 volt
10
Vrms = VR rms = 150 V
Vrms 150 150 100

Z= ⇒ ⇒ × 10 = = 33.3 Ω ∴ Ans (d)
i rms 4.5 4.5 3
VL rms = 150 = irms × XL
150
XL = = 50 Ω ∴ Ans. (b)
3
So correct option are (b) & (d)
48. The nuclear forces

(a) are stronger being roughly hundred times that of electromagnetic forces
(b) have a short range dominant over a distance of about a few fermi
(c) are central forces independent of the spin of the nucleons.
(d) are independent of the nuclear charge.
Ans. [a, b, d]
26 / 33
49. Consider a mole of a sample of hydrogen gas at NTP.

(a) The volume of the gas is exactly 2.24 × 10–2 m3.
(b) The volume of the gas is approximately 2.24 × 10–2 m3.
(c) The gas will be in thermal equilibrium with 1 mole of oxygen gas at NTP.
(d) The gas will be in thermodynamic equilibrium with 1 mole of oxygen at NTP.
Ans. [b,c,d]
Sol. At NTP for 1 mole of gas
Volume contain is 22.4 litre
or 22.4 × 10–3 m3
or 2.24 × 10–2 m3
choice (a) is correct.
→ in thermal equilibrium
PV
PV = nRT ⇒ n = n,V & P = constant, then (T = constant)
RT
So choices a & c are correct and it is same valid therefore choice (b).is also correct.
50. A particle moves in one dimension in a conservative force field. The potential energy is depicted in the graph
below.
V(x)
Potential
energy
x
A B C D E
If the particle starts to move from rest from the point A, then
(a) the speed is zero at the points A and E. (b) the acceleration vanishes at the points A, B, C, D, E
(c) the acceleration vanishes at the points B, C, D (d) the speed is maximum at the point D
Ans. [a, c]
dV
Sol. F=
dx
dV
= 0 at B, C, D
dx
∴ F = 0 at B, C, D
so a = 0 at B, C, D
speed is maximum at B as potential energy at B is minimum.
∴ (Ans. a, c)
27 / 33
PART B MARKS : 60
All questions are compulsory. All questions carry equal marks.
1. (a) A conductor having resistance R (independent of temperature) and thermal capacity C is initially at
temperature T0 same as that of the surrounding. At time t = 0 it is connected to a source with constant
voltage V. The thermal power dissipated by the conductor to the surrounding varies as q = k(T – T0).
C
Determine the temperature T of the conductor at any time t and at the time t = .
k
(b) A particle moves rectilinearly in an electric field E = E0 – ax where a is a positive constant and x is the
q
distance from the point where the particle is initially at rest. Let the particle have a specific charge .
m
Find (I) the distance covered by the particle till the moment at which it once again comes to rest, and
(II) acceleration of the particle at this moment.
Sol. At time t temperature of conductor is T.
Rate of heat loss to surrounding = k(T – T0)
V2
Rate of heat generation =
R
dQ V2
⇒ Rate of heat gain by conductor = – k(T – T0)
dt R
dQ dT
= ms
dt dt
dT
=C
dt
V2 dT
– k(T – T0) = C
R dt
V2 – kR(T – T0) = RCdT
t T
1 dT
∫
0
RC
dt = ∫V
T0
2
− kR (T − T0 )
t 1 V 2 − kR (T − T0 )
=– ln
RC kR V2
kt V 2 − kR (T − T0 )
= –ln
C V2
kt
−
V2 – kR(T – T0) = V2 e C
kt
−
2 C
kR(T – T0) = V [1 – e ]
28 / 33
kt
V2 −
(T – T0) = [1 – e C ]
kR
kt
V2 −
T = T0 + [1 – e C ]
kR
C
At t =
k
V2
T = T0 + [1 – e–1]
kR
V2
T = T0 + × 0.63
kR
(b) F = q(E0 – ax)
q
a= (E0 – ax)
m
x =0
qE 0
at x = 0 a=
m
Particle will start moving in the x direction
dv
v =a
dx
dv q
v = (E0 – ax)
dx m
0 x0
q
∫
0
vdv = ∫ m (E
0
0 − ax ) dx
q  x 02 

0= E x − a
m  2 
0 0
x 02
E0x0 = a
2
2E 0
x0 =
a
2E 0
Distance covered ⇒
a
before coming at rest
q 2E 
a=  E0 − a × 0 
m a 
qE 0
⇒ – toward negative x-axis.
m
29 / 33
2. One mole of an ideal gas (γ = 1.4) with initial pressure of 2 atm and temperature of 57ºC is taken to twice its
volume through different processes that include isothermal, isobaric and adiabatic processes. Determine the
process where maximum work is done and the amount of work in this case. By what percentage is this work
larger than the work done in a process in which it is the least ?
Sol.
Isobaric
•
P↑ Isothermal
Adiabatic
V V→ 2V
Area under isobaric process is
maximum & minimum in adiabatic process.
 8.31 × 330 
→ (W)isobaric = P ∆V = 2 × 105  
 2 × 105 
= 2742.3 J
nR∆T nR[T1 − T2 ] R[T1 − T2 ] 8.31[330 − 250]
⇒ (W)adiabatic = = = = = 1659 J
( γ − 1) γ −1 (1.4 − 1) 0.4
(1.4 −1) 0.4
(γ – 1) (γ – 1) V  1
[Q T1V1 = T 2 V2 ⇒ T2 = T1 .  1  = 330 ×   = 250.14ºC]
 V2  2
( W ) isobaric − ( W ) adibatic
⇒ So the % is 100 × = 65.29%
( W ) adiabatic
3. A railway carriage of mass MC filled with sand of mass Ms moves along the rails. The carriage is given an
impulse and it starts with a velocity v0. At the same time it is observed that the sand starts leaking through a
hole at the bottom of the carriage at a constant mass rate λ. Find the distance at which the carriage becomes
empty and the velocity attained by the carriage at that time. (Neglect the friction along the rails.)
Sol. From the law of conservation of linear momentum, linear speed of carriage will not change with time
because sand's momentum does not change after leaking through the hole so final velocity of the carriage
MS
will be 'v0' and constant with time. Time taken by the carriage to become empty =
λ
v0MS
So distance covered by the carriage in this time = speed × time =
λ
30 / 33
4. Show that, for any angle of incidence on a prism

1 1
sin (A + δ) cos (r1 − r2 )
2 =µ 2
1 1
sin (A ) cos (i − e)
2 2
(symbols have usual meanings)
and that the right-hand side reduces to at minimum deviation.
Sol.
i
µ1 = 1 e
r1 r2
µ3 = 1
µ2 = µ
r1 + r2 = A .....(1)
1 sin i = µ sin r1 .....(2)
µ sin r2 = 1 sin e .....(3)
Qδ=i+e–A
dδ de
=1+ –0=0
di di
de
= 0 ⇒ |e| = |i|
di
* sin i = sin e = µ sin r1 = µ sin r2
r1 = r2
* r1 = r2 = A/2
δ min + A
* δmin = 2i – A = 2e – A ⇒ i =
2
δ +A
sin  min 
* µ=
sin i
=  2 
sin r1 sin(A / 2)
* In a given expression
 A + δ min   1 
sin    cos (r1 − r2 ) 
 2  =µ  2 
sin(A / 2)  cos 1 (i − e) 
 
 2 
R.H.S Side : - Put r1 = r2 and i = e then it becomes µ.
 A + δ min 
sin  
Hence : -  2  =µ
sin(A / 2)
31 / 33
5. (a) A small amount of solution containing Na24 nuclides with activity 20500 disintegrations per second was
injected in the blood stream of a person. The activity of 1 ml of blood sample taken after 5 hours later,
was found to be 20 disintegration per minute. The half life of the radioactive nuclides is 15 hours. Find
the total volume of the blood of this person.
(b) The wire loop shown in the figure lies in uniform magnetic induction B = B0cos ωt perpendicular to its
plane. (Given r1 = 10 cm and r2 = 20 cm, B0 = 20mT and ω = 100 π). Find the amplitude of the current
induced in the loop if its resistance is 0.1 Ω/m.
r1 r2
Sol. (a) Volume of blood of person = V

Na24 is uniformly mixed in V volume of blood.
Activity of Na24 ∝ total no. of nuclei
20500 20500
A ⇒ Activity of Na24 of 1 ml sample = × 1 ml =
V ml V
A
After 5 hr activity =
2n
1
Q n= as half live is 15 hrs.
3
A
=
21/ 3
20 A
= 1/ 3
60 2
21/ 3
A=
3
20500 21/ 3
=
V 3
V = 48812.58 ml
(b)
r1 r2
B = B0 cos ωt
32 / 33
dB
= – B0ω sin ωt
dt
 dB 
  = B0ω
 dt  max
dφ dB  dB 
e1 = – = –A1 = πr12   = πr12 B0ω
dt dt  dt  max
dφ dB  dB 
e2 = – = –A2 = – πr22   = πr22 B0ω
induced emf is opposite to each other
enet = e2 – e1 = πB0ω (r22 − r12 )
Res = 2π(r1 + r2)λ
e net πB0 ω(r22 − r12 ) B ω(r − r )

I= = = 0 2 1
R es 2π(r1 + r2 )λ 2λ
20 × 10 −3 × 100π(0.2 − 0.1)
I= = π ampere
2 × 0.1
= 3.14 ampere
*****
Physical constant you may need ....
1. Charge on electron e = 1.6 × 10–19C
2. Mass of electron me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
3. Universal gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10–11 Nm2/kg2
4. Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2
5. Gas constant R = 8.31 J/K mol
6. Planck constant h = 6.62 × 10–34 Js
7. Stefan constant σ = 5.67 × 10–8 W/m2 K4
8. Boltzman constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K
33 / 33

Date of Examination : 24th November 2012
Time 09.30 to 11.30 hrs
[Q.P. CODE NO. : 1-1-6]
PART-A (Total Marks : 180)
SUB-PART A-1 : ONLY ONE OUT OF FOUR OPTIONS IS CORRECT
N.B. Physical constants are given at the end

SUB-PART A-1
1. Two thermally insulated compartments 1 and 2 are filled with a perfect gas and are connected by a short tube
having a valve which is closed. The pressures, volumes and absolute temperatures of the two compartments
are respectively (p1, V1, T1) and (p2, V2, T2). After opening the valve, the temperature and the pressure of
both the compartments respectively are -
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 ) p1V1 + p 2 V2 p1V1 + p 2 V2
(a) , (b) T1T2 ,
(p1V1T1 + p 2 V2 T2 ) V1 + V2 V1 + V2
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 ) p1V1T1 + p 2 V2T2 T1 + T2 p1V1 + p 2 V2

(c) , (d) ,
(p1V1T1 + p 2 V2 T2 ) V1T1 + V2T2 2 V1 + V2
Ans. [Bonus]
Sol. *Internal energy before connection
C V p1V1 C V p 2 V2 C V p'
+ = [V1 + V2]
R R R
p1V1 + p 2 V2
p' =
V1 + V2
n1 + n2 = n1' + n '2
*Law of mole conservation
p1V1 p 2 V2 p' V1 + p' V2
+ =
RT1 RT2 RT '+ RT'
T1T2 (p1V1 + p 2 V2 )
∴T'=
(p1V1T2 + p 2 V2 T1 )
Comment : No option is matching so question is bonus.
1 / 33
2. An inductance coil is connected to an ac source through a 60 ohm resistance in series. The source voltage,
voltage across the coil and voltage across the resistance are found to be 33 V, 27 V and 12 respectively.
Therefore, the resistance of the coil is -
(a) 30 ohm (b) 45 ohm (c) 105 ohm (d) 75 ohm
Ans. [b]
Sol.
L,R 60Ω
27V 12V
~
VS = 33
12 1
I= =
60 5
VS2 = VL2 + (VR + V60 ) 2
VS2 = VL2 + VR2 + 2VR V60 + V60

2
(33)2 = (27)2 + 2VR(12) + (12)2

1089 = 729 + 24VR + 144
24VR = 216
216
VR = =9
24
IR = 9
9 9
R= = = 45Ω
I 1/ 5
3. An ideal inductance coil is connected to a parallel plate capacitor. Electrical oscillation with energy W are set
up in this circuit. The capacitor plates are slowly drawn apart till the frequency of oscillations is doubled. The
work done in this process will be -
(a) W (b) 2W (c) 3W (d) 4W
Ans. [c]
1
Sol. f=
2π LC
1
frequency is doubled when capacitance is th
4
Q2
energy ⇒ U1 = =W
2C
2 / 33
Q2
energy after shifting U2 = = 4W
C
2
4
Work done = U2 – U1 = 4W – W = 3W
4. Two equal masses are connected by a spring satisfying Hooke's law and are placed on a frictionless table.
The spring is elongated a little and allowed to go. Let the angular frequency of oscillations be ω. Now one of
the masses is stopped. The square of the new angular frequency is -
ω2 ω2
(a) ω2 (b) (c) (d) 2ω2
2 3
Ans. [b]
Sol.
m M
m
µ=
2
k 2k
ω2 = =
µ m
When one block is stopped
k ω2
ω12 = =
m 2
5. When a particle oscillates in simple harmonic motion, both its potential energy and kinetic energy vary
sinusoidally with time. If ν be the frequency of the motion of the particle, the frequency associated with the
kinetic energy is -
ν
(a) 4ν (b) 2ν (c) ν (d)
2
Ans. [b]
Sol. x = A sin ωt
frequency is ν
v = ωA cos ωt
1 1 1 1  1 + cos 2ωt  1
KE = mv2 = mω2A2cos2ωt = KA2 cos2 ωt = KA2   = KA (1 + cos 2ωt)
2
2 2 2 2  2  4
so, the frequency of energy is doubled → 2ν
3 / 33
6. A gas expands from i to f along the three paths indicated. The work done along the three paths denoted by
W1, W2 and W3 have the relationship -
P
4 i
3 2 3
1
2
1 f
V
1 2 3 4 5 6
(a) W1 < W2 < W3 (b) W2 < W1 = W3 (c) W2 < W1 < W3 (d) W1 > W2 > W3
Ans. [a]
Sol. We know W = ∫ P.dV = area under PV curve

(Area)3 > (Area)2 > (Area)1
∴ W3 > W2 > W1
7. An ideal gas at 30ºC enclosed in cylinder with perfectly non conducting side and a piston moving without
friction in it. The base of the cylinder is perfectly conducting. Cylinder is first placed on a heat source till the
gas is heated to 100ºC and the piston raised by 20 cm and the atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa. The piston is
then held in final position and cylinder is placed on the heat sink to cool the gas to 30ºC. Denoting ∆Q1 as the
heat supplied during heating and ∆Q2 as the heat lost during the cooling then [∆Q1 ~ ∆Q2] would be equal to
(a) 436 J (b) 336 J (c) 236 J (d) 136 J
Ans. [Bonus]
Sol. Comment : Either cross sectional area should be given or number of moles of gas should be given in this
questions ∴ question is bonus.
∆Q1 = nCp∆T – nCv∆T
⇒ n(Cp – Cv)∆T
⇒ nR∆T = PdV = P(Adx)
↑ ↑
Not given Not given
8. Equal amount liquid helium and water at their respective boiling points are boiled by supplying the heat from
identical heaters in time tHe and tw. The latent heats of vaporization of He and Water are 2.09 × 104 J /kg and
540 kcal/kg, then tHe is -
(a) about 0.1 tw (b) about 0.05 tw
(c) just greater than 0.01 tw (d) just less than 0.01 tw
Ans. [d]
4 / 33
Sol. PHe = Pwater

m He .L He m w .L water
=
t He t water
2.09 × 10 4 540 × 103 × 4.2

=
t He t water
t water 54 × 4.2
⇒ = = 108.51
t He 2.09
t He 1
or =
t water 108
∴ tHe = just less than (0.01) tw
9. A 5 litre vessel contains 2 mole of oxygen gas at a pressure of 8 atm. The average translational kinetic energy
of an oxygen molecule under this condition is -
(a) 8.4 × 10–14 J (b) 4.98 × 10–21 J
(c) 7.4 × 10–16 J (d) 4.2 × 10–21 J
Ans. [b]
f 3
Sol. E= KT = KT
2 2
PV 8 × 105 × 5 × 10−3
QT= =
µR 2 × 8.31
3 4 × 10 2 × 5
= × 1.38 × 10–23 ×
2 8.31
6 × 1.38 × 10 −23 × 102 × 5

= ≈ 5.06 × 10–21 J
8.31
10. Six identical conducting rods are joined as shown. The ends A and D are maintained at 200ºC and 20ºC
respectively. No heat is lost to surroundings. The temperature of the junction C will be -
A B C D
200ºC 20ºC
(a) 60ºC (b) 80ºC (c) 100ºC (d) 120ºC

Ans. [b]
5 / 33
Sol.
R R
A R B C R D
200ºC 20ºC
R R
A R D
200ºC
•
B R •
C R 20ºC
(R + R )20 + R.200
θC =
3R
40 + 200
= = 80ºC
3
11. Three corners of an equilateral triangle of side 'a' are occupied by three charges of magnitudes q. If the
1
charges are transferred to infinity, their kinetic energy will be times -
4πε0
2q 3q 2 q2 3q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
a a 3a a
Ans. [b]
Sol.
q
a a
q q
a
Kqq Kqq Kqq
Potential energy = + +
a a a
3Kq 2 1  3q 2 
= =  
a 4πε0  a 
= kinetic energy
12. An LDR (light dependent resistance) is connected to an appropriate voltage source and a current measuring
meter in series (Assuming that the LDR current is proportional to the intensity of the incident light). The
LDR is illuminated with light from a distant metal filament bulb. The filament voltage V, the distance d of
LDR from the bulb and the LDR current I are noted. If both V and d are doubled, the LDR current is -
(a) 16 I (b) 4 I (c) I (d) less than I
6 / 33
Ans. [c]
Sol. Current is directly proportional to intensity
Power V 2 / R
Intensity = =
Area 4πd 2
V2
Intensity ∝
d2
13. A point source is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a convex lens of focal length f on its axis and the image
is formed on a screen at a distance of 60 cm from the lens. Now the lens is split into two halves. One half is
moved perpendicular to the lens axis through a distance of 5 cm. It is found that the two halves of the lens
form two images on the screen and the images are separated by a distance d. The values of f and d
respectively, are -
(a) 20 cm, 15 cm (b) 20 cm, 10 cm (c) 30 cm, 10 cm (d) 30 cm, 5 cm
Ans. [a]
Sol.
f
O
•
30cm 60cm
1 1 1
= −
f v u
1 1 1
= −
f 60 − 30
f = 20 cm
(2) I2
10
5cm 5
O • I1
(1)
30cm
I2 = m × O
v 60
⇒ ×O⇒ ×5
u 30
⇒ 10
Separation between I1 and I2 = 10 + 5
= 15
7 / 33
14. The angle of refraction of a very thin prism is 1º. A light ray is incident normally on one of the refracting
surfaces. The ray that ultimately emerges from the first surface, after suffering reflection from the second
surface, makes an angle of 3.32º with the normal. The deviation of the ray emerging from the second surface
and the refractive index of the material of the prism respectively, are -
(a) 0.66º, 1.66 (b) 1.66º, 1.5 (c) 1.5º, 1.66 (d) 0.66º, 1.5
Ans. [a]
Sol. r1 + r2 = A
here r1 = 0
so r2 = A = i
r1= 0 i
r1= 0
90º
r2= i
r2= i
P 88º
3.32º r3
µ
so angle of incidence of the light at first surface when emerging from it will be
r3 = 2º
bring snells law at point P.
µ sin2º = sin 3.32º
for small angle sin θ ≈ θ so
µ × 2º = 3.32
3.32
µ= = 1.66
2
The deviation of the ray emerging from the second surface
∆ = A (µ –1) = 1º(1.66 – 1) = 0.66º
15. A beam of light from a distant axial point source is incident on the plane surface of a thin plano-convex lens;
a real image is formed at a distance of 40 cm. Now if the curved surface is silvered, the real image is formed
at a distance of 7.5 cm. The radius of curvature of the curved surface of the lens and the refractive index of
the material of the lens respectively, are -
(a) 40 cm, 1.5 (b) 24 cm, 1.6 (c) 20 cm, 1.6 (d) 7.5 cm, 1.5
Ans. [b]
Sol.
f = 40 cm
8 / 33
µ −1 1
= (less maker formula)
R f
µ −1 1
= ....(i)
R 40
1
⇒
2
Now system behave as a mirror

1 2 1
= +
f eq f1 f2
2 1
= + ×2
40 R
1 1 2
= +
f eq 20 R
I
feq
feq = 7.5
1 1 2
= +
7.5 20 R
2
0.08 = ; R = 24
R
µ −1 1
=
R 40
R
µ–1=
40
R
µ=1+ ⇒ 1.6
40
16. A convex lens forms the image of an axial point on a screen. A second lens with focal length f cm is placed
between the screen and the first lens at a distance of 10 cm from the screen. To view the image the screen has
to be shifted away from the lens by 5 cm. A third lens having focal length of the same magnitude f cm is used
to replace the second lens at the same position. But this time to view the image the screen has to be shifted
towards the lens by d cm. The values of f and d respectively, are -
(a) 30 cm, 2.5 cm (b) 30 cm, 5 cm (c) 7.5 cm, 2.5 cm (d) 7.5 cm, 5 cm
9 / 33
Ans. [a]
Sol.
O I
1 2
O – + I1 I2
f
10 cm 5 cm
1 1 1
= –
f v u
1 1 1
= –
f 15 10
1 −5
=
f 150
f = – 30 lens is diverging lens
lens of f ⇒ 30
O – + I1
Portion of I2 f
10 cm
1 1 1
= –
30 v 10
1 1 1
= +
v 30 10
30
v= ⇒ 7.5 cm
4
Screen is to shift by ⇒ 10 – 7.5 cm ⇒ 2.5 cm
10 / 33
17. Cerenkov effect : If the speed of an electron in a medium is greater than the speed of light in that medium
then the electron emits light. An electron beam in a medium is accelerated by a voltage V. The light that is
emitted just suffers total internal reflection at the boundary of the medium placed in air when the angle of
incidence is 45º. The value of the voltage is -
(a) 63.91 kV (b) 255.64 kV (c) 200.34 kV (d) 127.82 kV
Ans. [d]
Sol. For just total internal reflection
i = θC
45 = θC ....(i)
Κ.E. of e ⇒ e × V
–
1
eV = mv2
2
2eV
ν=
m
c
v>
µ
2eV c
>
m µ
2
c m
V >   × ....(ii)
µ 2e
From (i); sin 45 = sin θC

1 1
=
2 µ
1 1
= …(iii)
µ 2
2
from (ii) and (iii)

(3.0 × 108 ) 2 9.1 × 10 −31
V> ×
2 2 × 1.6 × 10 −19
12.81 × 10000 V
⇒ 127.8 kV approx
18. In an electrolytic process certain amount of charge liberates 0.8 gram of oxygen. Then the amount of silver
liberated by same amount of charge is -
(a) 10.8 gram (b) 1.08 gram (c) 0.9 gram (d) 9.0 gram
Ans. [a]
11 / 33
Sol. According to Faraday's second law

Q Q1 = Q2
M1 E1
∴ =
M2 E2
0.8 8
=
M 2 108
M2 = 10.8 gm
19. The energy state of doubly ionized lithium having the same energy as that of the first excited state of
hydrogen is -
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 3 (d) 2
Ans. [b]
Sol. Li++ have Z = 3
13.6Z 2 13.6
– 2
=– 2
n 2
13.6 × 32 13.6
2
= 2
n 2
n2 = 9 × 4
n=6
20. The logic circuit shown below is equivalent to -
Z
X
Y
X X
(a) Z (b) Z
Y Y
(c) X Z (d) X Z
Ans. [d]
Sol.
x
x
x+y x + xy
x
y = x (1 + y) = x
x .y
y
so it is equivalent to
X Z
12 / 33
21. In the circuit shown below, the potential of A with respect to B of the capacitor C is -
1.0V 20Ω
0.5V A B
C
2.5V 10Ω
(a) 2.00 volt (b) – 2.00 volt (c) – 1.50 volt (d) + 1.50 volt
Ans. [c]
Sol.
1.0V 20Ω
i
0.5V +Q –Q
A B
2.5V 10Ω i
Q
VA – VB =
C
Using Kirchoff
–1 + 20 × i + 10 × i + 2.5 = 0
30i = –1.5
1.5 1
i= ⇒ − Amp.
300 20
Q
–0.5 + –20i + 1 = 0
C
Q
–0.5 + +1+1=0
C
Q
= –1.5
C
22. Two pendulums differ in lengths by 22 cm. They oscillate at the same place so that one of them makes
30 oscillations and the other makes 36 oscillations during the same time. The lengths (in cm) of the
pendulums are -
(a) 72 and 50 (b) 60 and 38 (c) 50 and 28 (d) 80 and 58
Ans. [a]
T0 l
Sol. T1 = = 2π 1
30 g
13 / 33
T0 l
T2 = = 2π 2
36 g
T1 36 l1
= =
T2 30 l2
6 l1
⇒ =
5 l2
36 l
= 1
25 l2
11 l 1 − l 2 22cm
= =
25 l2 l2
l2 = 50 cm
l1 = 72 cm
23. The voltage drop across a forward biased diode is 0.7 volt. In the following circuit, the voltages across the
10 ohm resistance in series with the diode and 20 ohm resistance are -
10Ω
20Ω
+ – 10Ω
10V
(a) 0.70 V, 4.28 V (b) 3.58 V, 4.28 V (c) 5.35 V, 2.14 V (d) 3.58 V, 9.3 V
Ans. [b]
Sol.
0.7V
10Ω
i–x
(1)
x 20Ω
(2)
i 10V 10Ω

0.7 + 10(i – x) – x × 20 = 0
0.7 + 10i – 30x = 0 ….(1)
x × 20 + 10 × i – 10 = 0
10i + 20x – 10 = 0 ….(2)
–10 – 0.7 + 50x = 0
x = 0.214 Amp
14 / 33
Voltage across 20 Ω = 4.28 V

10 i + 20 × 0.214 – 10 = 0
i = 0.572
i – x = 0.358 Amp
voltage across 10 Ω = (i – x) × 10 ⇒ 3.58 volt
24. The magnetic flux φ through a stationary loop of wire having a resistance R varies with time as φ = at2 + bt
(a and b are positive constants). The average emf and the total charge flowing in the loop in the time interval
t = 0 to t = τ respectively are -
aτ 2 + bτ aτ 2 + bτ aτ + b aτ 2 + bτ aτ 2 + bτ
(a) a τ + b, (b) a τ + b, (c) , (d) 2(a τ + b),
R 2R 2 R 2R
Ans. [a]
change in flux
Sol. Average emf =
time
φ ⇒ at2 + bt
At t = 0, φ = 0
At t=τ
φ = aτ2 + bτ
∆φ = aτ2 + bτ
aτ 2 + bτ
Average emf = = aτ + b
τ
dφ
e= ⇒ 2at + b
dt
2at + b
i=
R
dq 2at + b
=
dt R
τ
(2at + b) aτ 2 + bτ
q= ∫
0
R
dt ⇒
R
25. Three waves of the same amplitude have frequencies (n – 1), n and (n + 1) Hz. They superpose on one
another to produce beats. The number of beats produced per second is -
(a) n (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 3n
Ans. [b]
Sol. Beats produced is max difference between two wave frequency.
(1) and (2) (n) – n – 1 = 1
(2) and (3) (n + 1) – n = 1
(1) and (3) (n + 1) – (n – 1) = 2
15 / 33
26. A spherical ball of mass m1 collides head on with another ball of mass m2 at rest. The collision is elastic. The
fraction of kinetic energy lost by m1 is -
4m1m 2 m1 m2 m1m 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(m1 + m 2 ) 2 m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 (m1 + m 2 ) 2
Ans. [a]
Sol.
m1 u m2 ⇒ m1 v1 m2 v2
u2 = 0
by linear momentum
m1u + 0 = m1v1 + m2v2
For head on elastic collision
 m − m2  2m 2 u 2
v1 =  1  u1 + …(i)
 m1 + m 2  (m1 + m 2 )
(K.E) f − (K.E) I
For fractional K.E. =
(K.E) I
1
(K.E)i of m1 = m1u2 …(ii)
2
2
1 1  m − m2  2
(K.E)f = m1u12 = m1  1  u
2 2  m1 + m 2 
 m − m2 
Q Put (u2 = 0) in equation (i), v1 =  1  u
 m1 + m 2 
2
1 1  m − m2  2
m1u 2 − m1  1  .u
∆K.E 2 2  m1 + m 2 
=
K.E 1
m1u 2
2
∆K.E 4m1m 2
=
K.E ( m1 + m 2 ) 2
27. In the circuit shown below, the switch is in position 1 for a long time. At some moment after that the switch
is thrown in position 2. The quantity of heat generated in the resistance of 375 ohm after the switch is
changed to position 2 is
8 µF 250Ω
2
1
375Ω
250V
(a) 0.15 J (b) 0.25 J (c) 0.50 J (d) 0.10 J
16 / 33
Ans. [a]
1
Sol. Ustored = × 8 × (250)2
2
When switch is thrown to 2
capacitor start discharging
∴ whole stored energy get discharged in form of heat in two resistances which are connected in series
8 µF
i H2 250Ω
H1
375Ω
Heat ⇒ H = Ustored
H1 + H2 = H
H1 375
=
H 2 250
375
H1 = × Ustored ⇒ 0.15 Joule
625
28. A conducting square frame of side a and a long straight wire carrying current I and located in the same plane
as shown in the figure. The frame moves to the right with a constant velocity v. The emf induced in the frame
will be proportional to
x
I
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
x 2
(2 x − a ) 2
(2 x + a ) 2 (2 x − a )(2x + a )
Ans. [d]
Sol.
x
I A E
e1 ⊗ v
B
D F
a
17 / 33
a × µ 0iv
emf in AD ⇒ e1 ⇒
 a
2π x − 
 2
a × µ 0i × v
emf in EF ⇒ e2 ⇒
 a
2π x + 
 2
Net emf = e1 – e2
 
aµ 0iv  1 1 
⇒  − 
2π  x − a x + a 
 2 2
k×a
e=
(2 x − a )(2x + a )
29. In the circuit shown below, the switch S is closed at the moment t = 0. As a result the voltage across the
capacitor C will change with time as -
S
+
100V R C
–
R
VC VC
100 100
(a) 50 (b) 50
0 t 0 t
VC VC
100 100
(c) 50 (d) 50
0 t 0 t
Ans. [c]
Sol.
S
R C
100V
R
Find potential across C is VC
18 / 33
i
V1 VC
i
V1 = VC
100
V1 = × R ⇒ 50
2R
∴ VC = 50 volt
∴ Initially C is neutral so graph should start from origin and finally reach upto 50V.
30. The ratio of the rotational kinetic energy to the total kinetic energy of one mole of a gas of rigid diatomic
molecules is
2 2 3 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 5 5 2
Ans. [b]
2
Sol. R.K.E. = nRT = nRT = RT
2
Rotational DOF = 2
∴ Total DOF is = 5
5
Total K.E. = RT
2
R.K.E. RT 2
= =
Total K.E. 5
RT 5
2
31. A metal cylinder of length L is subjected to a uniform compressive force F as shown in the figure. The
material of the cylinder has Young's modulus Y and Poisson's ratio µ. The change in volume of the cylinder
is -
F
µFL (1 − µ)FL (1 + 2µ)FL (1 − 2µ)FL

(a) (b) (c) (d)
Y Y Y Y
Ans. [d]
19 / 33
Sol. V = πr2L
dV 2dr dL
= +
V r L
∆L − ∆d
µ =
L d
∆d ∆L
= −µ
d L
dV  2dr ∆L 
= + 
V  r L 
 µ∆L ∆L 
= − 2 + 
 L L 
∆L
= (–2µ + 1)
L
F.AL
dV = (–2µ + 1)
AY
(1 − 2µ)FL
=
Y
32. Three persons A, B and C note the time taken by their train to cover the distance between two successive
stations by observing the digital clocks on the platforms of two stations. The clocks display time in hours and
minutes. The three persons find the intervals 3, 5 and 4 minutes respectively. Assume the maximum
discrepancy of 2 seconds in actual starting and stopping of the train and the observations by A, B and C.
Then,
(a) All A, B and C can be correct.
(b) Only A and B or B and C can be correct
(c) Only one of A, B and C can be correct
(d) C is correct since it is equal to the average of the three observations
Ans. [c]
33. When two drops of water coalesce – (I) Total surface area decreases. (II) There is some rise in temperature.
Which of the following is correct ?
(a) Both (I) and (II) are wrong statements
(b) Statement (I) is true but (II) is not true
(c) Both (I) and (II) are true and the two statements are independent of each other
(d) Both (I) and (II) are true and (I) is the cause of (II)
Ans. [d]
Sol. Q when coalesce then
surface area decreases and due to which internal energy increases that's why temperature increases
So, (I) is the cause of (II) that's why correct option is (d).
20 / 33
34. Two capacitors 0.5 µF and 1.0 µF in series are connected to a dc source of 30 V. The voltages across the
capacitors respectively are -
(a) 10 V, 20 volt (b) 15 V, 15 volt (c) 20 V, 10 volt (d) 30 V, 30 volt
Ans. [c]
Sol.
0.5 1
V1 V2
30V
1
V1 = × 30
0.5 + 1
30
= = 20 volt
1.5
0.5
V2 = × 30
1.5
= 10 volt
232 208
35. The Th 90 atom has successive alpha and beta decays to the end product Pb 82 . The numbers of alpha and
beta particles emitted in the process respectively are -
(a) 4, 6 (b) 4, 4 (c) 6, 2 (d) 6, 4
Ans. [d]
Sol. Mass number get charge by ⇒ 4 × n
because atomic number charge occur only in α decay
4n = 232 – 208
4n = 24
n=6
α⇒4
Mass number get charge by ⇒ 24
New atomic number ⇒ 90 – 6 × 2 + P
90 – 12 + P = 82
P = 94 – 90 = 4
β⇒4
36. If the breakdown field of air is 2.0 × 106 V / m, the maximum charge that can be given to a sphere of
diameter 10 cm is
(a) 2.0 × 10–4 C (b) 5.6 × 10–7 C (c) 5.6 × 10–5 C (d) 2.0 × 102 C
Ans. [b]
21 / 33
Q
Sol. E=
4πε0 R 2
Q max × 4
2.0 × 106 =
4πε0 (0.1) 2
9 × 109 Q max × 4
2 × 106 =
0.01
1 106
= × = Qmax
18 1011
= 0.0555 × 10–5
= 5.6 × 10–7
37. Density of ocean water varies with depth. This is due to -

(a) elasticity (b) viscosity (c) surface tension (d) all of three
Ans. [a]
Sol. ∴ density vary with property of elasticity.
38. A spring of certain length and having spring constant k is cut two pieces of lengths in a ratio 1 : 2. The spring
constants of the two pieces are in a ratio -
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1. : 4 (c) 1 : 2 (d) none of the above
Ans. [d]
Sol.
⇒
l0 l0 2l 0
3 3
l0  2l 
kl0 = k1 = k2  0 
3  3 
3
k1 = 3k ⇒ k2 = k
2
k1 2
=
k2 1
39. When a metal surface is illuminated with light of wavelength λ, the stopping potential is V0. When the same
V0
surface is illuminated with light of wavelength 2λ, the stopping potential is . If the velocity of light in air
4
is c, the threshold frequency of photoelectric emission is -
c c 2c 4c
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6λ 3λ 3λ 3λ
22 / 33
Ans. [b]
hc
Sol. eV0 = –φ …..(1)
λ
eV0 hc
= –φ ….(2)
4 2λ
1  hc  hc
 − φ = –φ
4 λ  2λ
hc 2hc
−φ= − 4φ
λ λ
hc
3φ =
λ
hc
3 × hfth =
λ
c
fth =
3λ
40. Two elastic wave move along the same direction in the same medium. The pressure amplitudes of both the
waves are equal, but the wavelength of the first wave is three times that of the second. If the average power
transmitted through unit area by the first wave is W1 and that by the second is W2, then -
(a) W1 = W2 (b) W1 = 3W2 (c) W2 = 3W1 (d) W1 = 9W2
Ans. [a]
Sol. we know
P02
I=
2ρV
in a given medium
V = constant
ρ = constant
P0 = constant (given)
P
⇒ ∴ I=
A
∴ W1 = W2
23 / 33
SUB-PART A-2
In question 41 to 50 any number of options (1 or 2 or 3 or all 4) may be correct. You are to identify all of them
correctly to get 6 marks. Even if one answer identified is incorrect or one correct answer is missed, you get
zero score.
41. A cube floats both in water and in a liquid of specific gravity 0.8. Therefore,
(a) apparent weight of the cube is the same in water and in the liquid
(b) the cube has displaced equal volume of water and the liquid while floating
(c) the cube has displaced equal weight of water and the liquid while floating
(d) if some weights are placed on the top surface of the cube to make it just sink, the load in case of water
will be 0.8 times of that to be used in case of the liquid.
Ans. [a, c ]
Sol. (a) cube is floating in water and in liquid so apparent weight of cube in both will be zero.
(c) both liquid and water will apply same thrust on the cube is equal to its weight.
42. On the basis of the kinetic theory of gases one compares 1 gram of hydrogen with 1 gram of argon both at
0ºC. Then,
(a) the same temperature implies that the average kinetic energy of the molecules is the same in both the
cases
(b) the same temperature implies that the average potential energy of the molecules is the same in both the
cases.
(c) internal energies in both the cases are equal.
(d) when both the samples are heated through 1ºC, the total energy added to both of them is not the same.
Ans. [b,d]
Sol. Q P.E. of ideal gas is zero
for all type of gases → option (b) is correct
m
Q n= which is different for different gases
M
option (d) is also correct.
So choice b & d are correct.
43. While explaining the action of heat engine, one can say that
(a) heat cannot be fully converted into mechanical work.
(b) the first law of thermodynamics is necessary but not sufficient.
(c) heat under no circumstances can flow from lower to higher temperature.
(d) A body can not be cooled to absolute zero
Ans. [a,b,d]
24 / 33
Sol. Option (a) is correct Q 100 % efficiency not possible.

Option (b) is correct : Q first law thermodynamics is used and second law is also used.
TL
Option (d) is correct η = 1 –
TH
if TL = 0K
∴ η = 1 or 100 % not possible.
44. The rate of change of angular momentum of a system of particles about the centre of mass is equal to the sum
of external torques about the centre of mass when the centre of mass is
(a) fixed with respect to an inertial frame (b) in linear acceleration
(c) in rotational motion (d) is in a translational motion
Ans. [a,b,c,d]
45. Light is traveling in vacuum along the Z-axis. The sets of possible electric and magnetic fields could be
r r r r r r
(a) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 sin(ωt – kz) (b) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 cos(ωt – kz)
r r r r r r
(c) E = ˆjE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = − îB 0 sin (ωt – kz) (d) E = îE 0 sin(ωt – kz), B = ĵB0 sin (ωt – kz + δ)
Ans. [a,c]
r r
Sol. * Direction of EM wave is in E × B
r r
∴ E × B should be in k̂ direction.
* E & B oscillate in same phase.
∴ Correct option are a & c.
46. In case of photoelectric effect,

(a) since photons are absorbed as a single unit, there is no significant time delay in the emission of
photoelectrons.
eφ
(b) Einstein's analysis gives a critical frequency ν0 = , where φ is the work function and the light of this
h
frequency ejects electrons with maximum kinetic energy.
(c) only a small fraction of the incident photons succeed in ejecting photoelectrons while most of them are
absorbed by the system as a whole and generate thermal energy.
(d) the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons is dependent on the intensity of radiation.
Ans. [a, c]
25 / 33
47. A parallel combination of an inductor coil and a resistance of 60 ohm is connected to an ac source. The
current in the coil, current in the resistance and the source current are respectively 3A, 2.5 A and 4.5 A.
Therefore,
(a) Kirchhoff's current law is NOT applicable to ac circuits
(b) impedance of the coil is 50 ohm
(c) electric power dissipated in the coil is 150 watt
(d) impedance of the circuit is 33.3 ohm
Ans. [b, d]
Sol.
3A L
2.5A R
4.5A
~
Vrms
2.5
VR rms ⇒ 60 × = 150 volt
10
Vrms = VR rms = 150 V
Vrms 150 150 100

Z= ⇒ ⇒ × 10 = = 33.3 Ω ∴ Ans (d)
i rms 4.5 4.5 3
VL rms = 150 = irms × XL
150
XL = = 50 Ω ∴ Ans. (b)
3
So correct option are (b) & (d)
48. The nuclear forces

(a) are stronger being roughly hundred times that of electromagnetic forces
(b) have a short range dominant over a distance of about a few fermi
(c) are central forces independent of the spin of the nucleons.
(d) are independent of the nuclear charge.
Ans. [a, b, d]
26 / 33
49. Consider a mole of a sample of hydrogen gas at NTP.

(a) The volume of the gas is exactly 2.24 × 10–2 m3.
(b) The volume of the gas is approximately 2.24 × 10–2 m3.
(c) The gas will be in thermal equilibrium with 1 mole of oxygen gas at NTP.
(d) The gas will be in thermodynamic equilibrium with 1 mole of oxygen at NTP.
Ans. [b,c,d]
Sol. At NTP for 1 mole of gas
Volume contain is 22.4 litre
or 22.4 × 10–3 m3
or 2.24 × 10–2 m3
choice (a) is correct.
→ in thermal equilibrium
PV
PV = nRT ⇒ n = n,V & P = constant, then (T = constant)
RT
So choices a & c are correct and it is same valid therefore choice (b).is also correct.
50. A particle moves in one dimension in a conservative force field. The potential energy is depicted in the graph
below.
V(x)
Potential
energy
x
A B C D E
If the particle starts to move from rest from the point A, then
(a) the speed is zero at the points A and E. (b) the acceleration vanishes at the points A, B, C, D, E
(c) the acceleration vanishes at the points B, C, D (d) the speed is maximum at the point D
Ans. [a, c]
dV
Sol. F=
dx
dV
= 0 at B, C, D
dx
∴ F = 0 at B, C, D
so a = 0 at B, C, D
speed is maximum at B as potential energy at B is minimum.
∴ (Ans. a, c)
27 / 33
PART B MARKS : 60
All questions are compulsory. All questions carry equal marks.
1. (a) A conductor having resistance R (independent of temperature) and thermal capacity C is initially at
temperature T0 same as that of the surrounding. At time t = 0 it is connected to a source with constant
voltage V. The thermal power dissipated by the conductor to the surrounding varies as q = k(T – T0).
C
Determine the temperature T of the conductor at any time t and at the time t = .
k
(b) A particle moves rectilinearly in an electric field E = E0 – ax where a is a positive constant and x is the
q
distance from the point where the particle is initially at rest. Let the particle have a specific charge .
m
Find (I) the distance covered by the particle till the moment at which it once again comes to rest, and
(II) acceleration of the particle at this moment.
Sol. At time t temperature of conductor is T.
Rate of heat loss to surrounding = k(T – T0)
V2
Rate of heat generation =
R
dQ V2
⇒ Rate of heat gain by conductor = – k(T – T0)
dt R
dQ dT
= ms
dt dt
dT
=C
dt
V2 dT
– k(T – T0) = C
R dt
V2 – kR(T – T0) = RCdT
t T
1 dT
∫
0
RC
dt = ∫V
T0
2
− kR (T − T0 )
t 1 V 2 − kR (T − T0 )
=– ln
RC kR V2
kt V 2 − kR (T − T0 )
= –ln
C V2
kt
−
V2 – kR(T – T0) = V2 e C
kt
−
2 C
kR(T – T0) = V [1 – e ]
28 / 33
kt
V2 −
(T – T0) = [1 – e C ]
kR
kt
V2 −
T = T0 + [1 – e C ]
kR
C
At t =
k
V2
T = T0 + [1 – e–1]
kR
V2
T = T0 + × 0.63
kR
(b) F = q(E0 – ax)
q
a= (E0 – ax)
m
x =0
qE 0
at x = 0 a=
m
Particle will start moving in the x direction
dv
v =a
dx
dv q
v = (E0 – ax)
dx m
0 x0
q
∫
0
vdv = ∫ m (E
0
0 − ax ) dx
q  x 02 

0= E x − a
m  2 
0 0
x 02
E0x0 = a
2
2E 0
x0 =
a
2E 0
Distance covered ⇒
a
before coming at rest
q 2E 
a=  E0 − a × 0 
m a 
qE 0
⇒ – toward negative x-axis.
m
29 / 33
2. One mole of an ideal gas (γ = 1.4) with initial pressure of 2 atm and temperature of 57ºC is taken to twice its
volume through different processes that include isothermal, isobaric and adiabatic processes. Determine the
process where maximum work is done and the amount of work in this case. By what percentage is this work
larger than the work done in a process in which it is the least ?
Sol.
Isobaric
•
P↑ Isothermal
Adiabatic
V V→ 2V
Area under isobaric process is
maximum & minimum in adiabatic process.
 8.31 × 330 
→ (W)isobaric = P ∆V = 2 × 105  
 2 × 105 
= 2742.3 J
nR∆T nR[T1 − T2 ] R[T1 − T2 ] 8.31[330 − 250]
⇒ (W)adiabatic = = = = = 1659 J
( γ − 1) γ −1 (1.4 − 1) 0.4
(1.4 −1) 0.4
(γ – 1) (γ – 1) V  1
[Q T1V1 = T 2 V2 ⇒ T2 = T1 .  1  = 330 ×   = 250.14ºC]
 V2  2
( W ) isobaric − ( W ) adibatic
⇒ So the % is 100 × = 65.29%
( W ) adiabatic
3. A railway carriage of mass MC filled with sand of mass Ms moves along the rails. The carriage is given an
impulse and it starts with a velocity v0. At the same time it is observed that the sand starts leaking through a
hole at the bottom of the carriage at a constant mass rate λ. Find the distance at which the carriage becomes
empty and the velocity attained by the carriage at that time. (Neglect the friction along the rails.)
Sol. From the law of conservation of linear momentum, linear speed of carriage will not change with time
because sand's momentum does not change after leaking through the hole so final velocity of the carriage
MS
will be 'v0' and constant with time. Time taken by the carriage to become empty =
λ
v0MS
So distance covered by the carriage in this time = speed × time =
λ
30 / 33
4. Show that, for any angle of incidence on a prism

1 1
sin (A + δ) cos (r1 − r2 )
2 =µ 2
1 1
sin (A ) cos (i − e)
2 2
(symbols have usual meanings)
and that the right-hand side reduces to at minimum deviation.
Sol.
i
µ1 = 1 e
r1 r2
µ3 = 1
µ2 = µ
r1 + r2 = A .....(1)
1 sin i = µ sin r1 .....(2)
µ sin r2 = 1 sin e .....(3)
Qδ=i+e–A
dδ de
=1+ –0=0
di di
de
= 0 ⇒ |e| = |i|
di
* sin i = sin e = µ sin r1 = µ sin r2
r1 = r2
* r1 = r2 = A/2
δ min + A
* δmin = 2i – A = 2e – A ⇒ i =
2
δ +A
sin  min 
* µ=
sin i
=  2 
sin r1 sin(A / 2)
* In a given expression
 A + δ min   1 
sin    cos (r1 − r2 ) 
 2  =µ  2 
sin(A / 2)  cos 1 (i − e) 
 
 2 
R.H.S Side : - Put r1 = r2 and i = e then it becomes µ.
 A + δ min 
sin  
Hence : -  2  =µ
sin(A / 2)
31 / 33
5. (a) A small amount of solution containing Na24 nuclides with activity 20500 disintegrations per second was
injected in the blood stream of a person. The activity of 1 ml of blood sample taken after 5 hours later,
was found to be 20 disintegration per minute. The half life of the radioactive nuclides is 15 hours. Find
the total volume of the blood of this person.
(b) The wire loop shown in the figure lies in uniform magnetic induction B = B0cos ωt perpendicular to its
plane. (Given r1 = 10 cm and r2 = 20 cm, B0 = 20mT and ω = 100 π). Find the amplitude of the current
induced in the loop if its resistance is 0.1 Ω/m.
r1 r2
Sol. (a) Volume of blood of person = V

Na24 is uniformly mixed in V volume of blood.
Activity of Na24 ∝ total no. of nuclei
20500 20500
A ⇒ Activity of Na24 of 1 ml sample = × 1 ml =
V ml V
A
After 5 hr activity =
2n
1
Q n= as half live is 15 hrs.
3
A
=
21/ 3
20 A
= 1/ 3
60 2
21/ 3
A=
3
20500 21/ 3
=
V 3
V = 48812.58 ml
(b)
r1 r2
B = B0 cos ωt
32 / 33
dB
= – B0ω sin ωt
dt
 dB 
  = B0ω
 dt  max
dφ dB  dB 
e1 = – = –A1 = πr12   = πr12 B0ω
dφ dB  dB 
e2 = – = –A2 = – πr22   = πr22 B0ω
induced emf is opposite to each other
enet = e2 – e1 = πB0ω (r22 − r12 )
Res = 2π(r1 + r2)λ
e net πB0 ω(r22 − r12 ) B ω(r − r )

I= = = 0 2 1
R es 2π(r1 + r2 )λ 2λ
20 × 10 −3 × 100π(0.2 − 0.1)
I= = π ampere
2 × 0.1
= 3.14 ampere
*****
Physical constant you may need ....
1. Charge on electron e = 1.6 × 10–19C
2. Mass of electron me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
3. Universal gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10–11 Nm2/kg2
4. Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2
5. Gas constant R = 8.31 J/K mol
6. Planck constant h = 6.62 × 10–34 Js
7. Stefan constant σ = 5.67 × 10–8 W/m2 K4
8. Boltzman constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K
33 / 33
NSEP 2013 Solution
1. 7
A certain quantity of oxygen (𝛾 = ) initially at a pressure P1 is compressed isothermally until its
5
pressure is doubled (P2). The gas is then allowed to expand adiabatically until its original volume is
restored. Then the final pressure P3 in terms of initial pressure P1 is
a) P3 = 0.55 P1 b) P3 = 0.76 P1 c) P3 = 0.68 P1 d) P3 = 2.55 P1
Sol. 𝑣1
For isothermal compression : p1v1 = p2v2  p1v1= 2p1 v2  v2 =
2
𝑣 𝛾
For adiabatic expansion : p2v2 = p3v3  2p1 ( 21 ) = p3 v1
7
𝑝 𝑝
p3 = 21-p1 = (2)1−5 p1 = 5 1 = 1.32
1
= 0.76 P
√4
2. A car fitted with a device which transmits sound 60 times per minute. There is no wind and speed
of sound in still air is 345 m/s. If you hear the sound 68 times per minute when you are moving
towards the car with a speed of 12 m/s, the speed of the car must be nearly
a) 20.0 ms/ towards you b) 30.0 m/s towards you

c) 10.0 m/s away from you d) 10.0 m/s towards you
Sol. Original frequency of the car : n = 60 per min

Frequency received by the observer : na = 68 per min
Apparent frequency when source and observer are moving towards each other :
𝑣+𝑣 345+12
na = ( 𝑣−𝑣𝑜 ) n = ( 345−𝑣 ) 60 = 68
𝑠 𝑠
345 – vs = 315  vs = 30 m/s
3. A 43 m long rope of mass 5 kg joins two rock climbers. One climber strikes the rope and the
second one feels the effect 1.4 sec later. What is the tension in the rope?
a) 110 N b) 301 N c) 215 N d) 154 N
Sol. Length of the rope: l = 43 m / mass of the rope: m = 5 kg

𝑚 5
Linear density of the rope:  = 𝑙
= 43 kg/m
𝑙 43
Speed of the wave pulse: v = 𝑡 = 1.4 = 30.7 m/s
𝑇 𝑇 𝑇
Speed of the wave pulse: v = √𝜇  30.7 = √0.116  942.49 = 0.116  T = 110 N
4. Two cats in a house mew at each other with sound intensities 5 x 10-9 W/m2 and 9 x 10-6 W/m2.
By how many decibels is the louder sound above the other?
a) ~ 13 dB b) ~ 23 dB c) ~ 33 dB d) ~ 43 dB

Sol. Intensity of first sound : I1 = 5 x 10-9 W/m2

Intensity of second sound : I2 = 9 x 10-6 W/m2
𝐼1 5 x 10−9
sound level of first sound : 1 = 10 log = 10 log
𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜
𝐼 9 x 10−6
Sound level of second sound : 2 = 10 log 𝐼2 = 10 log 𝐼𝑜
𝑜
Difference in loudness of the two sounds :
9 x 10−6 9
2 - 1 = 10 log (5 x 10−9 ) = 30 log 10 + 10 log ( ) = 30 + 2.5 = 32.5 ≈ 33 dB
5
5. An electron orbiting a nucleus has angular momentum L. The magnetic field produced by the
electron at the centre of the orbit can be expressed as
a) 𝜇𝑜 𝑒 b) 𝝁𝒐 𝒆 c) 𝜇𝑜 𝑒 d) 𝑒
𝐿 𝑳 𝐿 𝐿
8𝜋𝑚𝑟 3 𝟒𝝅𝒎𝒓𝟑 𝜋𝑚𝑟 3 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑚𝑟 3
Sol. Angular momentum of particle in circular path : L = mvr = mr2

𝑞 𝑒 𝑒𝜔 𝑒 𝐿
Current in the orbit due to electron movement : i = 𝑇 = 2𝜋 = 2𝜋 = 2𝜋 𝑚𝑟2
𝜔
𝜇𝑜 𝑖 𝜇𝑜 𝑒 𝐿 𝝁𝒐 𝒆
Magnetic field at the centre of the circle : = = 𝑳
2𝑟 2𝑟 2𝜋 𝑚𝑟 2 𝟒𝝅𝒎𝒓𝟑
6. Suppose a radioactive nucleus A disintegrates at origin into a nucleus B with the emission of a
positron e+ and a neutrino  such that the positron and the neutrino move at right angles to each
other and carry momentum 2 x 10-22 kg m/s (+ve Y axis) and 5 x 10-23 kg m/s ( +ve X axis)
respectively. Then the nucleus
a) A recoils with a momentum 2.86 x 10-22 kg m/s at angle 14.030 w.r.to +ve X axis.
b) A recoils with a momentum 2.06 x 10-22 kg m/s at angle 14.030 w.r.to –ve X axis
c) B recoils with a momentum 2.86 x 10-22 kg m/s at angle 14.030 w.r.to +ve X axis
d) B recoils with a momentum 2.06 x 10-22 kg m/s at angle 14.030 w.r.to –ve axis
Sol. Initial momentum of the radioactive nucleus : Pi = 0

Final momentum of the fragments: Pf: PB + Pe + P = PB + 2 x 10-22 𝑗̂ + 5 x 10-23 𝑖̂
Conservation of linear momentum: Pi = Pf: 0 = PB + 2 x 10-22 𝑗̂ + 5 x 10-23 𝑖̂
PB = −(2 x 10 − 22 𝑗̂ + 5 x 10 − 23 𝑖̂)  PB = 2.06 x 10-22 kg m/s
2 x 10−22
Angle with – ve X axis: 90 – tan−1 0.5 𝑥 10−22 = 90 – 75.96 = 14.030
7. Two identical strings with fixed ends separated by height h have their other ends tied to a body P of
2𝑔
mass m as shown in figure. When the body rotates with uniform angular speed 2 √ in a
ℎ
𝑇
horizontal plane about the vertical axis, the ratio of tensions 𝑇1 in the string is
2
a) 3 b) 𝟓 c) 2 d) 5
5 𝟑 5 2

Sol. For vertical direction: T1 cos  = T2 cos  + mg  (T1 – T2) cos  = mg

For horizontal direction: T1 sin  + T2 sin  = mr2  (T1 + T2) sin  = mr2
2𝑔
𝑇1 +𝑇2 𝑚𝑟𝜔2 𝑚𝑟 𝑥 4 𝑥 8𝑟
Take the ratio of the tw expressions: tan  = = ℎ
=
𝑇1 −𝑇2 𝑚𝑔 𝑚𝑔 ℎ
𝑇1 +𝑇2 2𝑟 8𝑟 𝑇1 +𝑇2 4 𝑻𝟏 𝟓
=  =  = (by componendo & dividendo)
𝑇1 −𝑇2 ℎ ℎ 𝑇1 −𝑇2 1 𝑻𝟐 𝟑
8. Two identical bodies M2 and M3 each of 4 kg are tied to a massless inextensible string which is
made to pass around pulleys P1 and P2 as shown in figure. Angle ABC = 370. The coefficient of
friction between the bodies and the surface on which they slide is 0.25. If the body M1 moves down
with uniform speed, neglecting the masses and friction of pulleys. M1 =
a) 36.8 kg b) 9.8 kg c) 4.2 kg d) 2.1 kg
Sol. For the hanging block: M1g – T = M1a = M1(0) = 0  T = M1g

For the block on horizontal surface:
T1 – f = M3 (0)  T1 = f = M3g = 0.25 x 4 x 9.8 = 9.8 N
For the block on inclined plane: T – T1 – M2g sin 37 - f = M2 (0) = 0
3 4
T = T1 + 5 M2g + 5  M2g
3 4
M1g = 9.8 + 5 x 4 x 9.8 + 5 x 0.25 x 4 x 9.8
𝟒𝟏.𝟏𝟔
M1g = 9.8 + 23.52 + 7.84 = 41.16 → M1 = = 4.2 kg
𝟗.𝟖
9. A particle of mass 0.2 kg moves along a path given by the relation: 𝑟̅ = 2 cos t 𝑖̂ + 3 sin t 𝑗̂.
Then the torque on the particle about the origin is
a) √13 𝑘̂ Nm b) 2 c) 3 d) ̂ Nm
0𝒌
√ 𝑘̂ Nm √ 𝑘̂ Nm
3 2
Sol. Position vector of the particle : 𝑟̅ = 2 cos t 𝑖̂ + 3 sin t 𝑗̂

Velocity of the particle : 𝑣̅ = − 2 sin t 𝑖̂ + 3 cos t 𝑗̂
Acceleration of the particle : 𝑎̅ = −2𝜔2 cos 𝜔𝑡 𝑖̂ − 3𝜔2 sin t 𝑗̂
Force on the particle : 𝐹̅ = m 𝑎̅ = 0.2 (−2𝜔2 cos 𝜔𝑡 𝑖̂ − 3𝜔2 sin t 𝑗̂)

𝑖̂ 𝑗̂ 𝑘̂
Torque about origin : 𝜏̅ = 𝑟̅ x 𝐹̅ = | 2 cos t 3 sin t 0|
−0.4𝜔2 cos 𝜔𝑡 2
−0.6𝜔 sin t 0
̂ Nm
𝜏̅ = 𝑘̂ (−1.2𝜔2 sin 𝜔𝑡 cos 𝜔𝑡 + 1.2𝜔2 sin 𝜔𝑡 cos 𝜔𝑡) = 0 𝒌
10. A bead of mass 5 g can move without friction on a piece of wire bent in the
form of a semicircular ring of radius 0.10 m as shown in fig. This ring can
freely rotate about the vertical axis OY. At what height will the bead stay
above the ground level OX, if the semicircular wire revolves with angular
velocity 10.63 rad/s?
a) 0.013 m b) 0.087 m c) 0.027 m d) 0.073 m
Sol. For equilibrium of the bead: N cos  = mg and N sin  = mr2

Divide the two expressions:
mr r R sin   1 R
tan  = mg
= g =
g
 cos 𝜃 = g
𝑔 𝑅−ℎ 𝑔 𝑔 𝑔
cos  = 𝑅𝜔2  𝑅 = 𝑅𝜔2  h = R (1 − 𝑅𝜔2 ) = R - 𝜔2
9.8
h= 0.1 - = 0.013 m
10.632
11. One of the flat surfaces of a cylinder (radius r and length 𝑙) and the
flat surface of hemisphere are cemented together. The cylinder and
the hemisphere are made of the same material. The combined mass
of the system is M. The moment of inertia of the system about an
axis coinciding with the axis of cylinder is
a) 1 b) 𝟏 𝟏𝟓𝒍 + 𝟖𝒓 c) 1 3𝑙 +4𝑟 d) 1 5𝑟 3 𝑙+4 𝑙 2 𝑟 2

10
M [5r2 + 4l2] Mr2 Mr2 M 5𝑟+4𝑙
𝟏𝟎 𝟑𝒍+𝟐𝒓 10 3𝑙+2𝑟 10
Sol. 𝑚𝑟 2 𝑟2
Moment of inertia of the cylinder : Ic = 2
= r 2
l 2
2 2 2
Moment of inertia of hemisphere : Ihs = 5 (M – m) r = 5 r2
2
(3 𝜋𝑟 3 𝜌)
𝑚𝑟 2 2
Total moment of inertia : I = Ic + Ihs = + (M – m) r2
2 5
𝑟2 2 2 𝑙 4𝑟 𝑀 𝑙 4𝑟 𝟏 𝟏𝟓𝒍 + 𝟖𝒓
I = r2l + r2 ( 𝜋𝑟 3 𝜌) = r4 ( + ) = r4 ( 2 ) (2 + 15) = 𝟏𝟎 Mr2
2 5 3 2 15 𝜋𝑟 2 𝑙 + 𝜋𝑟 3 𝟑𝒍+𝟐𝒓
3
12. The radius of cross section of a long pipe varies gradually as r = r0 e-x where x is the distance from
the pipe and  = 0.4 m-1 is a constant. Then the ratio of Reynolds's number for the cross sections
separated by a distance 8 m is
a) 24.5 b) 28.5 c) 2.45 d) 2.85

Sol. Radius of cross section of the long pipe : r = r0 e-x

𝜌𝑣𝑟
Reynolds's number : Re = 𝜇
here  is coefficient of dynamic viscosity
𝜌𝑣𝑟 𝜌𝑣𝑟 𝜋𝑟 𝜌𝑣 𝜋𝑟 2 𝜌𝐴𝑣

Re = 𝜇
= 𝜇 𝜋𝑟
= 𝜇𝜋𝑟
= 𝜇𝜋𝑟 (Av is volume flux which is constant)
1 𝑅𝑒1 𝑟2 𝑅𝑒1 𝑟0 𝑒 −𝛼𝑥1 𝑅𝑒1

Re ∝  = → = = 𝑒 𝛼(𝑥2 −𝑥1 ) → = 𝑒 0.4 𝑥 8 = 𝑒 3.2 = 24.5
𝑟 𝑅𝑒2 𝑟1 𝑅𝑒2 𝑟0 𝑒 −𝛼𝑥2 𝑅𝑒2
13. The Pitot tube shown in fig. is used to measure fluid velocity in a pipe of cross sectional area S. It
was invented by a French engineer Henri Pitot in the early 18th century. The volume of the gas
flowing across the section of the pipe per unit time is
(the difference in the liquid columns is h, 0 and  are the densities of liquid and the gas
respectively)
a) ∆ℎ𝜌𝑜 𝑔 b) 𝟐∆𝒉𝝆𝒐 𝒈 c) ∆ℎ𝜌𝑜 𝑔 d) 2∆ℎ𝜌𝑜 𝑔

Q = 2S √ 𝜌
Q=S√ Q=S√ 𝜌
Q=S√ 𝜌
𝝆
Sol. Difference in pressure: p = 0gh

1
Kinetic energy per unit volume: v2
2
1 2 𝟐∆𝒉𝝆 𝒈
2
v = 0gh  v = √ 𝝆𝒐
Volume of gas flowing across the section of pipe per unit time:
𝟐∆𝒉𝝆𝒐 𝒈
Volume rate of flow : Q = vS = S √ 𝝆
14. A thin ring has a radius R, density  and Young’s modulus Y. The ring is rotated in its own plane
about an axis passing through its centre with angular velocity . Then the small increase in its
radius is
a) 𝝆𝝎𝟐 𝑹𝟑 b) 3𝜌𝜔2 𝑅3 c) 6𝜌𝜔2 𝑅3 d) 𝜌𝜔2 𝑅 3

dR = dR = 𝑌
dR = 𝑌
dR = 2𝑌
𝒀
Sol. Consider a small section of the ring : 𝑑𝑙 = R d

Mass of the elemental ring : dm =  dV =  A𝑑𝑙 =  AR d
𝑑𝜃 𝑑𝜃
Centripetal force : dm R2 = 2T sin = 2T = T d
2 2
ρAR d R2 = T d  T =  AR22
𝐹𝐿 𝐹(2𝑝𝑅) 𝑇𝑅
Young’s modulus: Y = 𝐴 ∆𝐿 = 𝐴 (2𝑝∆𝑅) = 𝐴 ∆𝑅
𝑇𝑅 A𝑅3 2 𝝆𝝎𝟐 𝑹𝟑
R = 𝐴 𝑌 = 𝐴𝑌
= 𝒀

15. A uniform metal wire is clamped by chuck nuts at the two ends as shown in fig. The wire has cross
sectional area A, length 𝑙 and density 𝜌. A weight W is suspended from the midpoint of the wire.
Then the vertical displacement 𝛿 through which the midpoint moves down is given by
a) 𝑙 𝑊 1/2 b) 𝒍 𝑾 𝟏/𝟑 c) 𝑙 𝑊 1/2 d) 𝑙 𝑊 1/3

𝛿 = 2 (𝐴𝑌) 𝜹 = 𝟐 (𝑨𝒀) 𝛿 = 3 (𝐴𝑌) 𝛿 = 4 (𝐴𝑌)
Sol. 2
√( 𝑙 ) +𝛿2
𝑙 𝑙 𝑙 𝑙 2
Increase in length of the wire: l = cosec  - = (cosec  - 1) = ( 𝑙 − 1)
2 2 2 2
2
2
√( 𝑙 ) +𝛿2
𝑊 𝑊 2
For equilibrium of the weight: 2T cos  = W  T = 2
sec  = 2 𝛿
2
√( 𝑙 ) +𝛿2 2 1/2
𝑊 2 𝛿
𝐹𝑙 𝑇𝑙 𝑙 𝑊𝑙 (1+(𝑙/2) ) 𝑊𝑙 𝑙2 𝛿2 𝑊𝑙 𝑙2 𝑊𝑙 3
Y= 𝐴 ∆𝑙
= 𝐴 ∆𝑙
= 2 𝛿
= 2𝛿𝐴 1/2 = 2𝛿𝐴 4𝛿 2 (1 + 2 𝑙2 ) = 2𝛿𝐴 4𝛿 2 = 8𝐴𝛿 3
2 𝛿 2
√( 𝑙 ) +𝛿2 (1+( ) ) −1
𝑙 2 𝑙/2
𝐴 𝑙 −1
2
2
( )
𝒍 𝑾 𝟏/𝟑
= 𝟐
(𝑨𝒀)
16. Two bodies of masses M1 and M2 are kept separated by a distance d. The potential at the point
where the gravitational field produced by them is zero is
𝑮 𝐺
a) − 𝒅 (M1 + M2 + 2 √𝑴𝟏 𝑴𝟐) b) − 𝑑 (M1 M2 + 2 √𝑀1 + 𝑀2 )
𝐺 𝐺
c) − 𝑑 (M1 - M2 + 2 √𝑀1 𝑀2 ) d) − 𝑑 (M1M2 - 2 √𝑀1 +𝑀2)
Sol. 𝑑
Location of null point from M1: x = 𝑀
1+√ 2
𝑀1
𝐺𝑀
Gravitational potential due to point mass: Vg = − 𝑟
Gravitational potential due to two point charges:
𝐺𝑀1 𝐺𝑀 𝐺𝑀1 𝐺𝑀2 𝐺 𝑀 𝑀2
Vg = − 𝑥
− 𝑑−𝑥2 = − 𝑑 − 𝑀
= − 𝑑 (1 + √𝑀2 ) (𝑀1 + 𝑀
)
𝑑√ 2 1 𝑑√ 2
𝑀 𝑀1
1+√ 2 𝑀1
𝑀1 𝑀
1+√ 2
𝑀1
𝑮
Vg = − 𝒅 (M1 + M2 + 2 √𝑴𝟏 𝑴𝟐 )

17. A ball dropped on ground from a height of 1 m rises to a height of 75 cm on rebounce. When
thrown down from the same height with a velocity of 2 m/s, it would rise to (take g = 10 m/s2)
a) 80 cm b) 90 cm c) 85 cm d) 95 cm
Sol. ℎ 75 3
Coefficient of restitution: e = √𝐻 = √100 = √4
Velocity of the body before striking the ground: v = √𝑢2 + 2𝑔ℎ = √4 + 2 𝑥 10 𝑥 1 = √24 m/s
𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑉−0 𝑉
Coefficient of restitution: e = 𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑎𝑐ℎ
= 𝑣−0 = 𝑣
3
V = ev = √4 x √24 = √18 m/s
𝑉2 18
Maximum height attained by the ball: h = 2𝑔 = 20 = 0.9 m = 90 cm
18. A metal body of density 8000 kg/m3 has a cavity inside. A spring balance shows its mass to be 10
kg in air and 7.5 kg when immersed in water. The ratio of the volume of the cavity to the volume
of the material of the body is
a) 2 b) 𝟏 c) 1 d) 3
5 𝟐 4
Sol. Density of the metal body:  = 8000 kg

Mass of the metal body in air: m = 10 kg
10 10 1
(𝑣 − 𝑣𝑐 )  = 10  𝑣 − 𝑣𝑐 = = 8000 = 800
𝜌
Mass of the metal body in water: mw = 7.5 kg
Buoyancy force on the metal body: FB = (10 – 7.5) g = 2.5 x 10 = 25 N
1
FB = vwg = 25  v x 1000 x 10 = 25  v =
400
𝑣−𝑣𝑐 1 𝑣𝑐 1 𝒗𝒄 𝟏
Take the ratio of the two expressions: 𝑣
= 2
 1- 𝑣
=2 𝒗
=𝟐
19. In a steel factory, it is found that to maintain M kg of iron in the molten state at its melting point,
an input power P watt is required. When the power source is turned off, the sample completely
solidifies in time t sec. The latent heat of fusion of iron is
a) 2𝑃𝑡 b) 𝑃𝑡 c) 𝑷𝒕 d) 𝑃𝑀
𝑀 2𝑀 𝑴 𝑡
Sol.
Mass of the iron : M kg
Input power required to maintain the iron in molten state: P
Time taken for the iron to solidify: t
𝑄 𝑷𝒕
Latent heat of iron : L = 𝑀  Q = ML  Pt = ML  L = 𝑴

20. A LASER source of heat of power 1.2 W is placed very close to one end of a rod of cross sectional
area 3 cm2 and thermal conductivity 400 W/mK. Then length of the rod L required to maintain a
temperature difference of 100 C across its ends is
(assume that all the power emitted by the source falls on the rod)
a) 1.5 m b) 2.2 m c) 1.8 m d) 1m
Sol. Power of the LASER source: 1.2 W

Area of cross-section: A = 3 x 10-4 m2
Coefficient of thermal conductivity: k = 400 W/mK
Temperature difference:  = 10 0C
𝑑𝑄 𝐾𝐴 𝜃∆ 400 𝑥 3 𝑥 10−4 𝑥 10
For conduction of heat: 𝑑𝑡
= 𝐿
 1.2 = 𝐿
L=1m
21. The temperature at which average de Broglie wavelength of helium atom becomes 0.5 nm is
a) 6.6 K b) 7.1 K c) 279.6 K d) 280. 1 K

ℎ ℎ ℎ ℎ
Sol. de Broglie wavelength of a particle :  = 𝑃 = 2𝑚𝑘
= =
√ 3
√2𝑚 𝑘𝐵 𝑇 √3𝑚𝑘𝐵 𝑇
2
h : Planck’s constant : 6.63 x 10-34 Js
kB : Boltzmann’s constant : 1.38 x 10-23 J/K
m : Mass of helium atom : 6.64 x 10-27 kg
Given :  = 0.5 nm = 5 x 10-10 m
6.63 𝑥 10−34 43.9569 𝑥 10−68
5 x 10-10 =  25 x 10-20 = 27.4896 𝑥 10−50 𝑇  T = 6.6 K
√3 𝑥 6.64 𝑥 10−27 𝑥 1.38 𝑥 10−23 𝑥 𝑇
22. A dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of a capacitor. If the charge on the capacitor is q
and the magnitude of the induced charge on the dielectric surface is q1 then
a) q1 < q (always) b) q1 > q (always) c) q1 = q (always) d) q1 = 0
Sol. 1
Induced charge on the surface of dielectric : q1 = q (1 − )
𝐾
Here K is dielectric constant of the dielectric slab.

K is a positive number, so q1 < q (always)
If the dielectric slab is replaced with metal slab, then q1 = q
Since for metals K is infinity
23. When two ends of a spring are pulled apart increasing its length, it produces force equal to kx at its
1
ends. At a point 4 of its length from one end the force is
a) 0.25 kx b) 0.75 kx c) 1.0 kx d) 0.5 kx
Sol.

Mass of the spring is not mentioned.

So, it is to be taken as massless (ideal).
In the case of an ideal spring (string), tension developed anywhere
in the spring is transmitted throughout without any change.
1
So, the force at a point of its length from one end is 1.0 kx
4
24. Two semicircular wires of radius 20 cm and 10 cm have a common centre at the origin O as shown
in figure. Assume that both the wires are uniformly charged and have an equal charge of 0.7 nC
each. The magnitude of electric field at the common center of curvature O of the system is
a) 100 V/m b) 301 V/m c) 401 V/m d) 501 V/m
Sol. Electric field intensity due to semi-circle:

1  1 𝑞 1 𝑞 2𝑞 1 2𝑞
E = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑟
= 2𝜋𝜀 𝑟𝑥𝑙
= 2𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2
= 4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2
= 9 x 109 x 𝑟2
𝑜 𝑜 𝑜 𝑜
The field is directed away from the centre as the charge is + ve.
2𝑞
Field due to larger semi-circle: E1 = 9 x 109 x (right)
𝑅 2
2𝑞
Field due to smaller semi-circle: E2 = 9 x 109 x 𝑟2 (left)
2𝑞 1 1 1 1
Net field : 9 x 109 x

(𝑟2 − 𝑅2 ) = 4.01 x 104 (100 − 400)
E = 300.96 ≈ 301 V/m
25. An electron has its path unchanged when it is passing through a region of electric field
(E = 3.4 x 104 V/m) and a magnetic field (B = 2 x 10-3 wb/m2) both perpendicular to each other.
However, on switching off the electric field, the electrons move along a circular path. What is the
radius of the circular path?
a) 4.82 m b) 4.82 x 10-3 m c) 4.82 x 10-2 m d) none

𝑞
Sol. Specific charge of the electron : 𝑚 = 1.76 x 1011 C/kg
𝐸 3.4 𝑥 104
Speed of the electron in the crossed field : v = 𝐵 = 2 𝑥 10−3
= 1.7 x 107 m/s
Radius of the circular path followed by a charged particle in transverse magnetic field :
𝑚𝑣 𝑣 1.7 𝑥 107 17
r= = 𝑞 = 2 𝑥 10−3 𝑥 1.76 𝑥 1011 = 3.52 x 102 = 4.82 x 102 m
𝐵𝑞 𝐵
𝑚

26. A 1000 F capacitor fully charged to 250 V discharges through a resistance wire embedded in a
thermally insulated block of specific heat 2.5 x 102 J kg-1 K-1 and mass of 0.01 kg. How much is the
increase in the temperature of the block?
a) 12.5 K b) 8.5 K c) 7.0 K d) 15.5 K
Sol. 1 1
Energy stored in the capacitor : U = 2 CV2 = 2 x 1000 x 10-6 x 2502 = 31.25 J
Specific heat of the block : s = 2.5 x 102 J kg-1K-1

Mass of the block : m = 0.01 kg
Conservation of energy : electrostatic potential energy in the capacitor gets converted into heat
energy in the resistor which in turn heats the block
𝑄 31.25
For increase in temperature: Q = ms    = 𝑚𝑠 = 0.01 𝑥 2.5 𝑥 102 = 12.5 K
27. Two bodies A and B hanging in air are tied to the ends of a string which passes over a frictionless
pulley. The masses of the string and the pulley are negligible and the masses of two bodies are 2 kg
and 3 kg respectively. Body A moves upwards under a force equal to (g = 10 m/s2)
a) 30 N b) 24 N c) 10 N d) 4N
Sol. Common acceleration of the system:

𝑚 −𝑚 3−2
a = (𝑚𝐵 +𝑚𝐴 )g = ( ) 10 = 2 m/s2
𝐵 𝐴 3+2
2𝑚1 𝑚2 2𝑥2𝑥3
Tension in the string: T = 𝑚 g= x 10 = 24 N
1 +𝑚2 2+3
Object A is moving up with an acceleration: 2 m/s2

Resultant force on A: Fnet = T – mg = 24 – 2 x 10 = 4 N
28. An object placed at a distance of 10 cm from a co-axial combination of two lenses A and B. The
combination forms a real image three times the size of the object. If lens B is concave with a focal
length 30 cm, then the focal length of lens A is
a) 10 cm b) 7.5 cm c) 6 cm d) – 6 cm
1 1 1
Sol. Effective focal length of the combination : = +
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2
𝐼 𝑣
Magnification of the image : m = 𝑂 = 𝑢 = 3  v = 3u
1 1 1 1 1 1 3𝑢 3 𝑥 10
Lens formula : − =  + = F= = = 7.5 cm
𝑣 𝑢 𝐹 3𝑢 𝑢 𝐹 4 4
Focal length of the lens B : f2 = - 30 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1
Focal length of the lens A : = +  = -  f1 = 6 cm
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2 7.5 𝑓1 30

29. Two concave refracting surfaces of equal radii of curvature face each other in air as shown in fig.
A point object O is placed midway between the centre and one of the poles. Then the separation
between the images of O formed by each refracting surface is
a) 11.4 R b) 1.14 R c) 0.114 R d) 0.0114 R
Sol. First surface: u = R/2, n2 = 1.5, n1 = 1

𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 −𝑛
Refraction at spherical surface 1: 𝑣2 − 1 = 2 1
𝑢 𝑅
1.5 2 1.5−1 1.5 2 1 1.5 5 3𝑅
+ =  = − −  = − v=−
𝑣 𝑅 −𝑅 𝑣 𝑅 2𝑅 𝑣 2𝑅 5
For the second surface: u = 3R/2, n2 = 1.5, n1 = 1
𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 −𝑛
Refraction at spherical surface 2: 𝑣2 − 𝑢1 = 2 𝑅 1
1.5 2 1.5−1 1.5 2 1 7 9𝑅
𝑣
+ 3𝑅 = −𝑅
 𝑣
= − 3𝑅 − 2𝑅 = − 6𝑅  v = − 7
3𝑅 9𝑅
Separation between the images: 2R – ( + ) = 0.114R
5 7
30. A ray of white light falls on an isosceles prism such that the red light leaves the prism
perpendicular to the other face of the prism. Find the angle of deviation if the refractive index of
the prism for red light is 1.37 and refracting angle of prism is 450
a) 200 37’ b) 280 37’ c) 350 37’ d) 300 37’
Sol. Apply Snell’s law at the point of incidence:

n1 sin 1 = n2 sin 2  1 x sin i = 1.37 x sin 45
sin i = 0.968  i = sin-1 (0.968) = 75.610
Angle of deviation:  = i + e – A = 75.61 + 0 – 45 = 30.610 = 300 37’
31. The voltage between the terminals of a battery is 6 V. when a wire is connected across its terminals
it falls to 5.6 V. If one more identical wire is connected between the terminals, then it falls to
a) 4.8 V b) 5.15 V c) 5.25 V d) 5.8 V
Sol. 𝑣 𝐸−𝑣
Emf of the discharging cell : E = v + ir  E – v = 𝑅r  r = ( 𝑣
)R
Internal resistance of the cell remains constant in all situations.

6−5.6
r= 5.6
R (when one wire is connected to the cell)
6−𝑣 𝑅
r= 𝑣 2
(when both wires are connected to the cell)
4 6−𝑣 𝑅
From the above equations: R=  v = 5.25 volt
56 𝑣 2

33. The impedance of RL circuit given in the adjacent figure is expressed by the relation Z2 = A2 + B2.
Then the dimensions of AB are
a) [M1 L2 I-2 T-3] b) [M2 L4 I-4 T-6] c) [M1 L-1 I-2 T-3] d) [M-1 L-2 I2 T4]
Sol.
Impedance of the RL network : Z2 = A2 + B2  Z = √𝑅2 + 𝑋𝐿 2
𝑉
A : resistance : R = 𝐼 = [ML2T-3I-2]
𝑉
B : inductive reactance : XL = 𝐼 = [ML2T-3I-2]
The dimensions of AB : [ML2T-3I-2] x [ML2T-3I-2] = [M2 L4 I-4 T-6]
34. A micrometer screw gauge with pitch of 0.5 mm and 50 divisions on circular scale is used to
measure the diameter of a thin wire. Initially, when the gap is closed, the fourth division coincides
with the reference line. Three readings show 46th, 48th and 44th division coinciding with the
reference line which is beyond 0.5 mm of the main scale. The (best) measured value is
a) 0.46 mm b) 0.94 mm c) 0.92 mm d) 1 mm
Sol. 𝑝𝑖𝑡𝑐ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑤 0.5

Least count of the screw gauge: 𝑛𝑜. 𝑜𝑓 𝑑𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑒 = 50
= 0.01 mm
Main scale reading: 0.5 mm (PSR)
Zero error: +4 x 0.01 = + 0.04 mm
46+48+44
Circular scale reading: 3
= 46 (HSR)
Reading of the screw gauge: PSR+HSR (LC) - ZC
d = 0.5 + 46 x 0.01 – 0.04 = 0.5 + 0.46 – 0.04 = 0.92 mm
35. In a meter bridge experiment, the resistance to be measured is connected in the right gap and a
known resistance in the left gap has value of 50 ± 0.2  when the null point is judged to be at
60 ± 0.2 cm. The student notes that the ends of the bridge wire are not at 0.0 cm and 100.0 cm of
the scale and makes a guess that they may be somewhere within 0.2 cm beyond the scale ends. The
value of the unknown resistance should be expressed as
a) 33.33 ± 1  b) 75 ± 1  c) 75.0 ± 0.9  d) 33.4 ± 0.5 
Sol. Known resistance : R = 50 ± 0.2 

Null point from left end: 𝑙1 = 60 ± 0.2 cm and Null point from right end: 𝑙2 = 40 ± 0.2 cm
100−𝑙 40 100
Unknown resistance : x = R ( 𝑙
) = 50 x 60 = 3

𝑙
Unknown resistance x = R ( 2 )
𝑙1
Apply log on both sides and differentiate: log x = log R + log l2 – log l1
∆𝑥 ∆𝑅 ∆𝑙2 ∆𝑙1 0.2 0.2 0.2 100
= + +  x = x ( + + ) = (4 x 10-3 + 5 x 10-3+ 3.33 x 10-3) = 0.411
𝑥 𝑅 𝑙2 𝑙1 50 40 60 3
So, the unknown resistance: x ± x = 33.4 ± 0.5 

36. A body A revolves along a circular orbit close to the earth’s surface. Body B oscillates along an
imaginary straight tunnel drilled through the earth, whereas another body C through a similar
longest tunnel. Let TA, TB and TC be the corresponding periods of revolution or oscillation, then
a) TA > TB = TC b) TA > TC > TB c) TA = TB = TC d) TA < TB = TC
Sol. 𝑟3
Time period of revolution of a satellite: T = 2 √ (r = R + h)
𝐺𝑀
When the satellite is close to surface of the earth: r = R
𝑅3 𝑅 𝐺𝑀
Time period of revolution of the satellite: TA = 2 √𝐺𝑀 = 2√𝑔 (𝑔 = 𝑅2
)
when a body is dropped into a tunnel made along any part of the earth, it undergoes SHM with a
𝑅
time period: T = 2√
𝑔
37. The vibrations of a string of length 100 cm and fixed at both ends are represented by the equation:
𝜋𝑥
y = 2 sin 10 cos 50t. Then the equations of the component waves whose superposition gives that
above vibrations are
𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥
a) 2 sin ( + 50𝜋𝑡)+ 2 sin ( − 50𝜋𝑡) b) sin ( + 50𝜋𝑡) − 2 sin ( − 50𝜋𝑡)
10 10 10 10
𝝅𝒙 𝝅𝒙 𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥
c) sin (𝟏𝟎 + 𝟓𝟎𝝅𝒕) + sin (𝟏𝟎 − 𝟓𝟎𝝅𝒕) d) 2 sin ( 10 + 50𝜋𝑡) + 2 sin ( 10 + 50𝜋𝑡)
Sol. Equation of the stationary wave : y = 2A sin kx cos t

𝜋𝑥
Equation of the stationary wave : y = 2 sin 10 cos 50t
𝜋
Here k = 10 and  = 50
Amplitude of the wave : 2A = 2  A = 1 unit

y = 2A sin kx cos t = A sin (kx + t) + A sin (kx - t)
𝝅𝒙 𝝅𝒙
y = sin (𝟏𝟎 + 𝟓𝟎𝝅𝒕) + sin (𝟏𝟎 − 𝟓𝟎𝝅𝒕)
38. Hot coffee in a mug cools from 900 C to 700 C in 4.8 min. The room temperature is 200 C.
Applying Newton’s law of cooling, the time needed to cool it further by 100 C should be nearly
a) 4.2 min b) 3.8 min c) 3.2 min d) 2.4 min
𝑑𝜃
Sol. Newton’s law of cooling : 𝑑𝑡
= k (𝜃𝑎𝑣𝑔 − 𝜃0 )
90−70 90+70 20 1
4.8
=k( 2
− 20) = 60 k  4.8 = 60k  k = 14.4
70−60 70+60 10 1 𝟏𝟒𝟒
=k ( − 20) = 45 k  = 45k = 45 x  t= = 3.2 min
𝑡 2 𝑡 14.4 𝟒𝟓

39. A sinusoidal voltage of amplitude 15 V is connected between the input terminals of the circuit
shown in the figure. Assume that the diodes are ideal. In the output waveform
a) +ve peaks of the input will be clipped to +12 V and –ve peaks will be clipped to – 6 V
b) +ve peaks of the input will be clipped to +6 V and –ve peaks will be clipped to – 12 V
c) +ve peaks of the input will be clipped to +12 V and –ve peaks will be clipped to – 12 V
d) +ve peaks of the input will be clipped to +6 V and –ve peaks will be clipped to – 6 V
Sol. For +ve half cycle: D1 is forward biased, D2 is reverse biased.

12 V battery will be connected across the output.
For –ve half cycle: D1 is reverse biased, D2 is forward biased.
6 V battery will be connected across the output.
40. Correlate a physicist among P, Q, R to an appropriate physicist among L, M, N. Let us pay a

tribute to them.
P. Louis de Broglie L. Davisson & Germer

Q. Max Plank M. James Clerk Maxwell
R. Christian Huygens N. Arthur H Compton
a) P & N, Q & M, R & L b) P & L, Q & N, R & M

c) P & L, Q & M, R & N d) P & M, Q & L, R & N
Sol. Louis de Broglie/Davisson & Germer:

Wave nature of matter was proposed by de Broglie which was proved experimentally
(diffraction of electrons) by Davisson & Germer.
Max Planck/Arthur H Compton:

Planck proposed quantum (photon) nature of radiation which was experimentally demonstrated by
Compton (Compton effect)
Christian Huygens/James Clerk Maxwell:

Huygens developed wave nature (mechanical) of light which was later modified as
Electromagnetic wave theory by Maxwell.
41. In a circuit carrying an alternating current
a) Magnetic field around it oscillate with the frequency of the current

b) Heat is generated with double the frequency of the magnetic field
c) Voltage across the circuit is proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux around it
d) The current always lags in phase behind the applied voltage

Sol. Let the supply voltage be: v = v0 sin t = v0 sin (2ft)

Current through the circuit: i = I0 sin (t ± ) = I0 sin (2ft ± )
magnetic flux in the inductor: B = Li = L I0 sin (2ft ± )
Heat generated in the resistive part of the network :
H = i2Rt (I0 sin (2pft ± j))2 Rt = I02 Rt sin2 (2ft ± j)
1 1 𝟏 𝟏
H = I02Rt ( − 𝑐𝑜𝑠2(2𝜋𝑓𝑡 ± 𝜑)) = I02Rt ( − 𝒄𝒐𝒔(𝟐𝝅(𝟐𝒇)𝒕 ± 𝝋))
2 2 𝟐 𝟐
42. The stress exerted by vehicles on the central part of a bridge with convex curvature will
a) be more than that at the ends

b) same as that at the ends
c) be less than that at the ends
d) decrease in proportion to the square of the speed of the vehicle
Sol. From the free body diagram of the vehicle on convex road, we can write
𝑚𝑣 2 𝑚𝑣 2
𝑅
= mg cos  - N → N = mg cos  - 𝑅
Stress exerted by the vehicle on the road is nothing but N.
cos  is a decreasing function. As the vehicle approaches the central part
of the road,  decreases and cos  increases.
So the normal reaction (stress exerted by the vehicle) also increases.
43. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is connected by a narrow pipe at its bottom to another
identical empty vessel. Then
a) potential energy of water is proportional to the square of the height of its level
b) 3/4th of the potential energy is lost when the water flow stops
c) half of the potential energy is lost when the levels in both the vessels are same
d) loss in potential energy is equal to the rise in thermal energy
Sol. Consider two cylindrical vessels of area of cross section: A
a) Potential energy of the liquid : Ui

ℎ ℎ 𝐴𝜌𝑔
Ui = mgh = volume x density x g 2 = Ahg 2 = 2
h2
So, potential energy of water is proportional to square of the height.

c) Volume of the liquid remains same : Ah = Ah1 + Ah2  h = h1 + h2

Since both vessels are open to atmosphere, the liquid stands to the same height in both the vessels.
ℎ
h = 2h1  h1 = 2
𝑚 ℎ 𝑚 ℎ ℎ 𝐴𝜌𝑔
Final potential energy of the liquid : Uf = 2 g4 + 2 g4 = mg 4 = 4
h2
𝐴𝜌𝑔 𝐴𝜌𝑔 𝑨𝝆𝒈
Loss in potential energy: U = Ui – Uf = 2
h2 - 4
h2 = 𝟒
h2
So, half of the potential energy is lost when the levels in both the vessels are same
d) Conservation of energy:
Loss in potential energy should appear in some form of energy.
Since the liquid remains stationary in the vessel, it does not attain kinetic energy.
So, the loss in PE is equal to the rise in thermal energy.
44. The deviation produced by a prism depends upon
a) Angle of incidence on face of prism b) refracting angle of prism

c) refractive index of prism d) wavelength of light used
sin 𝑖
Sol. Angle of deviation is given by : δ= i + sin{μsin[A−sin-1 ( ) ]}−A
𝜇
So, angle of deviation depends on angle of incidence and refracting angle and refractive index
of the material.
𝐵
Cauchy’s formula for refractive index of material of a prism :  = A +
2
So, refractive index depends on wavelength of incident light.
45. Consider nine identical resistances arranged as shown in the figure. In this arrangement electric
current enters at node A and leaves from node D. Let VAD = 5 V and IBE = 3 mA. Therefore
a) IAB = 5 mA
𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎
b) each resistance is 𝟏𝟏

c) effective resistance between A and D is 500 

𝟏𝟎𝟎
d) power dissipation along the path BCD is 𝟏𝟏
mW
Sol. Given : current in BE : 3 mA

The currents in other branches are as shown.
Applying KVL along ABED:
VA – R (3+x) – R x 3 – R x 3 – VD = 0
VA – VD = (x + 9) R
(x + 9) R = 5 -------- (1)

Potential drop along BCD and BED is same: xR + 2xR = 3R + 3R  3xR = 6R  x = 2 mA

Current through AB: IAB = 3 + x = 3 + 2 = 5 mA
5 𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎
From eqn. (1): (x + 9) R = 5  (2 + 9) R = 5  R = = 
11 𝑥 10−3 𝟏𝟏
Total current entering/leaving the network: i = 3 + x + 3 + x = 6 + 2x = 6 + 2x2 = 10 mA = 10-2 A

Apply Ohm’s law: v = ir  5 = 10-2 r  r = 500 
5000 5000 𝟏𝟎𝟎
Power dissipation along BCD: x2R + 4x2R = 4 x 10-6 x + 4 x 4 x 10-6 x = mW
11 11 𝟏𝟏
46. Mark the correct statement (s) of the following
a) A convex mirror forms virtual images for all positions of the object
b) a concave mirror forms real images for all positions of the object
c) a concave mirror can form a virtual magnified image
d) the magnification produced by a convex mirror is always less than unity
Sol. a) A convex mirror is a diverging mirror. It diverges the incident rays coming from the object
and a virtual image is formed when the diverging light rays are extended backwards.
b) A concave mirror can form a virtual magnified image when the object is placed between
focal point and pole.
c) A concave mirror can form a virtual magnified image when the object is placed between
focal point and pole.
d) The image distance is always less than the object distance thus making the magnification
less than unity always.
47. A solid cylindrical conductor of radius a and charge q is co-axial with a

cylindrical shell of negligible thickness, radius b (>a) and charge –q.
The capacitance of this cylindrical capacitor per unit length is
proportional to
𝑏 𝑎 𝟏
a) log 𝑎 b) log c) [log (b/a)]-1 d)
𝑏
𝐥𝐨𝐠 𝒃 − 𝐥𝐨𝐠 𝒂
Sol. 1 
Electric field intensity at a distance r : E = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑟
𝑜
𝑣 𝑏 1 
Potential difference between the two surfaces : dv = - E dr  ∫𝑣 𝐵 𝑑𝑣 = ∫𝑎 − dr
𝐴 2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑟
 𝑏1  𝑏  𝑏
vB – vA = − 2𝜋𝜀 ∫𝑎 𝑟
𝑑𝑟 = − 2𝜋𝜀 ln 𝑎  v = vA – vB = 2𝜋𝜀 ln 𝑎
𝑜 𝑜 𝑜
 𝑏 𝟐𝝅𝜺𝒐 𝒍
Charge on a capacitor : q = C v  𝑙 = C ln C= 𝒃
2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑎 𝐥𝐧
𝒂
𝐶 2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝐶 1 𝟏
Capacitance per unit length : 𝑙 = 𝑏 𝑙∝ 𝑏 = 𝐥𝐧 𝒃 − 𝐥𝐧 𝒂
ln ln
𝑎 𝑎

48. Mark the correct statement (s) of the following:

a) In case of liquids, the boiling point increases with pressure for all liquids
b) In case of solids, the melting point decreases with pressure for all solids
c) In case of ice , the melting point decreases with pressure
d) In case of ice, the melting point increases with pressure
Sol. When the saturation vapor pressure becomes equal to external pressure, the liquid starts boiling.
The constant temperature at which boiling takes place is known as boiling point. As the pressure on
the surface of the liquid increases, its boiling point increases.
As water freezes to form ice, it expands due to the presence of hydrogen bonds. In the case of those
substances that expand on freezing, melting point decreases with increase in pressure.
49. The electric potential (in volt) in a region along the X axis varies with x according to the relation
V(x) = 5 + 4x2 where x is in m. Therefore
a) the pd between the points x = 1 and x = -3 is 32 V

b) force experienced by a charge of 1 C placed at x = - 1 is 8 N
c) force experienced by the above mentioned charge is along +ve X axis
d) a uniform electric field exists in this region along X axis
Sol. Electric potential: v (x) = 5 + 4x2  v = v (-3) – v (1) = 41 – 9 = 32 volt

𝑑𝑣 𝑑
Electric field intensity: E = − 𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑑𝑥 (5 + 4x2) = - 8x
Electrical force on the charged particle : F = Eq = - 8xq
Force on the charged particle at x = - 1: F (-1) = - 8 x -1 x 1 = 8 N
Force on a charged particle is in the direction of field for +ve charge.
50. A homogeneous bar of length L and mass M is situated

at a distance h from a particle of mass m as shown. The
gravitational force exerted by the bar on the particle
varies inversely as
a) (L – h)2 b) 𝐿
(h + 2) 2 c) h (h + L) d) h2 if L << h
Sol. Consider an elemental length dx of the bar at a distance x from the point mass.
𝑀
Mass of the element : dm =  dx = 𝐿
dx
𝑀
𝐺 𝑚 𝑑𝑚 𝐺𝑚 dx
𝐿
Force between point mass and mass element: dF = =
𝑥2 𝑥2
𝑀
ℎ+𝐿 𝐺 𝑚 𝐿 dx
Total force between point mass and the bar: F = ∫ 𝑑𝐹 = ∫ℎ
𝑥2
𝑀 ℎ+𝐿 1 𝐺𝑚𝑀 1 𝐺𝑚𝑀 1 1 𝐺𝑀𝑚 𝟏
F = 𝐺 𝑚 𝐿 ∫ℎ 𝑥 2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝐿 [− 𝑥] = 𝐿 [ℎ − ℎ+𝐿] = ℎ(ℎ+𝐿)  F ∝ 𝒉(𝒉+𝑳)
𝐺𝑀𝑚 𝐺𝑀𝑚 𝐺𝑀𝑚 𝟏

F = ℎ(ℎ+𝐿) = 𝐿 = ℎ2
 F ∝ 𝒉𝟐
ℎ 2 (1+ )
ℎ

51. A particle is moving in +ve X direction with its velocity varying as v =  √𝑥. Assume that at t = 0,
the particle was located at x = 0, determine
I. the time dependence of velocity

II. Acceleration
III. The mean velocity of the particle averaged over the time that the particle takes to cover the first
s meter of the path
𝑑𝑥 1
Sol. Velocity of the particle : v =  √𝑥  𝑑𝑡
=  √𝑥  dx =  dt
√𝑥
𝑥 1 𝑡 𝛼2𝑡 2
Displacement of the particle: ∫0 dx = ∫0 dt  2√𝑥 = t  x =
√𝑥 4
𝑑𝑥 𝛼 2 2𝑡 𝟏
Velocity of the particle: v = 𝑑𝑡 = 4 = 𝟐 2 t
𝑑𝑣 𝑑 1 𝟏
Acceleration of the particle: a = 𝑑𝑡 = 𝑑𝑡 (2 2t) = 𝟐
𝟐
Velocity of the particle: v =  √𝑥  vi =  √0 = 0 and vf =  √𝑠
𝑣𝑖 +𝑣𝑓 0 +√𝑠 √𝒔
Mean velocity over a distance s: vmean = 2
= =
2 𝟐
52. Two identical metal spheres of density  having equal and similar charges are supported from a
common point by means of a silk thread of length 𝑙 and negligible mass. The two threads make an
angle 21 with each other when in equilibrium in air. When the same system is immersed in a
dielectric liquid of density , then the angular separation changes to 22. Then find
I. the relative permittivity (𝜀𝑟 ) of the liquid in terms of , , 1, 2

II. In case of the angular separation remains unchanged even on immersing the system in dielectric
liquid, find the expression for 𝜀𝑟
Sol. For equilibrium of the particle :

1 𝑞2
Horizontal direction: T sin 1 = ; Vertical direction: T cos 1 = mg
4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑟2
1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2
tan 1 = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2 𝑚𝑔
= 4𝜋𝜀 2 2 → tan 1 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃1 = 4𝜋𝜀 2 = 4𝜋𝜀 4𝑙 2 𝑉𝑔
𝑜 𝑜 4𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃1 𝑚𝑔 𝑜 4𝑙 𝑚𝑔 𝑜
When the particle is immersed in liquid, for equilibrium

Vertical direction: T1 cos 2 = mg – FB = Vg - Vg = Vg ( - )
1 𝑞2
Horizontal direction: T1 sin 2 =
4𝜋𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝑅2
1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2
tan 2 = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑅2 𝑉𝑔(𝑟−𝑠)
= 4𝜋𝜀 2 2 → tan 2 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃2 = 4𝜋𝜀 4𝑙 2 𝑉(𝑟−𝑠)𝑔
𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 𝜀𝑜 4𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃2 𝑉(𝑟−𝑠)𝑔 𝑟 𝜀𝑜
1 𝑞2 1
tan 𝜃1 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃1 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 4𝑙2 𝑉𝑔 𝜌 𝜌−𝜎 𝜎
Take the ratio of the two expressions: = 𝑞2
= 1 1 = 𝜀𝑟 = 𝜀𝑟 (1 − )
tan 𝜃2 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃2 1 𝜌 𝜌
4𝜋𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 4𝑙2 𝑉(𝑟−𝑠)𝑔 𝜀𝑟 𝜌−𝜎
tan 𝜃 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃 𝜎 𝝆
If the angular separation remains same: 𝜃1 = 𝜃2 → tan 𝜃1 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃1 = 1 = 𝜀𝑟 (1 − 𝜌)  𝜺𝒓 = 𝝆−𝝈
2 2

53. The plane side of a thin Plano convex lens is silvered so that the lens acts as a
concave mirror of focal length 40 cm. The material of lens has refractive index
1.5. Determine of radius of curvature of the curved surface of the lens.
Sol. Refractive index of the material of the lens :  = 1.5

Focal length of the concave mirror : f = 40 cm
𝜇 𝜇
1 2( 2 ) 2( 2 −1)
𝜇1 𝜇1
Silvered lens formula : = 𝑓
-
𝑅2 𝑅1
Here : R1 is radius of curvature of un silvered surface
R2 is radius of curvature of silvered surface
1 is refractive index of surrounding medium
2 is refractive index of lens material
1 2(1.5−1) 1 1 1
𝑓
=0- 𝑅
= 40  𝑅 = − 40  R = −𝟒𝟎 cm
54. Light falls on one end of a cylindrical glass rod at an angle . Determine the smallest refractive
index that the glass may have so that the light after entering the rod does not leave it through its
curved surface, irrespective of the value of 
1
Sol. For total internal reflection at N :  =
sin 𝑐
Snell’s law at M:
1 x sin (90 - ) =  sin (90 – c)  cos  =  cos c
1
cos  =  √1 − 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝑐 =  √1 − = √𝜇2 − 1
𝜇2
cos  = √𝜇2 − 1   = √𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝛼 + 1

For minimum value of , cos 𝛼 should be minimum (−1)
So min = √(−1)2 + 12 = √𝟐
55. A cyclic process is indicated in the following PV diagram.

In the initial state A: temperature, pressure and volume of the system are 300 K, 1 atm and 1000 cc
In the first process AB : the adiabatic expansion increases the volume to 2000 cc.
This is followed by an isobaric compression to reduce the volume of the gas to 1000 cc.
The gas is brought to initial state by isobaric process. The system is 1 mole of monoatomic gas

a) find the pressure and temperature at state B and C

b) calculate the work done in adiabatic, isobaric processes
c) calculate the work done in cyclic process and amount of energy supplied to system
d) calculate the efficiency of the cyclic process
Sol. 1 mole of monoatomic ideal gas is taken

3 5 5
Cv = 2 R, CP = 2 R,  = 3 = 1.66
AB is adiabatic expansion : pv = constant

p1v1 = p2v2  1 x 1000 = p2 x 2000
1 1 1
p2 = 2 𝛾 = 5 = 3.17 = 0.32 atm
23
Temperature at A : 300 K
Temperature at B : TV-1 = constant
300 300
300 x 1000-1 = T2 x 2000-1  T2 = 2𝛾−1 = 20.66 = 190 K
𝑉 𝑇 2000 190
Temperature at C : 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑇𝐵  1000 = 𝑇𝐶
 TC = 95 K
𝐶 𝐶
𝑛𝑅
Work done in adiabatic process: wAB = 𝛾−1 (T1 – T2)
1 𝑥 8.314
wAB = 1.66−1
(300 – 190) = 1385.6 J
Work done in isobaric process :

wi = p ∆𝑣 = 0.32 x 1.013 x 105x (2000 – 1000) x 10-6 = 31.4 J
Work done in isochoric process : wCA = 0 J
Total work done in cyclic process: w = 1385.6 – 31.4 = 1354.2 J

3
Energy supplied to the system: QCA = nCvdT = 1 x R x 205 = 2556.5 J
2
𝑤 1354.2
Efficiency of the cycle:  = 𝑄 = 2556.5 x 100 = 53%
56. A 750 Hz, 20 V source is connected to a resistance of 100 , a capacitor of 1 F and an inductance
of 0.18 H in series. Calculate the following quantities
a) impedance of the circuit

b) draw an impedance diagram with suitable scale
c) power factor
d) the time in which the resistance will get heated by 100 C, provided that the thermal capacity of
resistance is 2 J / 0 C

Sol.
a) Impedance of the circuit :

z = √𝑅 2 + (𝑋𝐿 ~𝑋𝐶 )2 = √1002 + (848.2 − 212.2)2 = 643.8  = 644 
𝑅 100
c) Power factor of the circuit: cos  = 𝑍 = 643.8 = 0.155   = 810
d) Heat required to raise the temperature of resistor: Q = ms t = 2 x 10 = 20 J

𝑣 20
current through the resistor : i = = = 0.03 amp
𝑧 644
heat produced in the resistor : Q = i2Rt = 20  9 x 10-4 x 100 x t = 20

time taken: t = 207.4 sec

! !" #$% & ' $(
" )# # $*
+, - $ % " .
! " # $ %
!* $/0 !* !% % *
,
1
,
#, !
1 2 !
!0 -3 4 !0 $$ 0 40 $ 3 **35 33 % ! $ ! 5 % *6/ 3 5 5 /$ 0 !% % /$ ,
, 1 7 $ 1 2 1 !
, " # $%&" ' % ()*

!35 !
# $+ &" ' (% ,)* !5

!/ ' $ 3 $! & * &% + - .* / $00
., 1 $ - ! $ % !
$ ! (
!
8, $ !
9, ! ! -$ :$ '3
), '
,$ !
! "# $
# %& '( )) *#
(
*%' # !# + , (' # $ !# (*#% (!##
!* $/0 !* !% % * ;0 ! !/ %<
% $ % $
, ! * $ : $% !: = * 6/ * ! - - $( !5( 5 ' * ! '5 3 !35
=
- -/! >: 3,0 33 & ' $( ,
, = !*? $*4* 3/ !* = * 6/ * ! - - $ ? 33 ' & 3 '3 ! /$ ? '* @
$%
???, - , $:, ! '5 # 0 ' $( ,
#, !% A @
1 $#2 '34
&* 5 2 %)67
& *8 53 2 %67
& *8 ! 9 5' 2 %67
,: 5 2 %)67 # ; ;
< +)%=
,0 & * 8$3
!%
&???, - , $:, !* 0 ' $( , 3
3 : ' 3 5 3 /* 3
., 3 ' 4
3
8, > 2 # -=
Q.P. Code -P 160
!" # $ !% &
'
( ( )
) *) ' +,# - - !# ! # . / 0 ! + !%)
1. If the threshold of hearing is assumed to be the reference (0 dB), then the threshold of
pain is taken to be 120 dB. Let the corresponding sound intensities be I0 and I
respectively. Then, is
(a) 120 (b) 1012 (c) 10"12 (d) 101.2
2. If E denotes the intensity of electric field, the dimensions of a quantity are those of
(a) current (b) current density (c) electric potential (d) electric flux
3. Two stars of masses m1 and m2 distance r apart revolve about their centre of mass. The
period of revolution is
(a) 2π (b) 2 (c) 2π (d) 2π
4. Let a body be placed at a point on the earth’s surface at a latitude λ where the radius of
the earth is R. Then, the body experiences an effective acceleration
"#
(a) − (b) + ! (c) − (d) −
$%& '
5. A particle moves in a plane with a constant speed along a path y = 2x2 + 3x – 4. When the
particle is at (0, – 4) the direction along which it is moving is inclined to the X axis at an
angle
(a) 630 (b) 720 (c) 270 (d) 00
6. Two particles A and B are moving in XY plane. Particle A moves along a line with
equation y = x while B moves along X axis such that their X coordinates are always
equal. If B moves with a uniform speed 3 m/s, the speed of A is
( )
(a) 3 m/s (b) ) m/s (c) 3√2 m/s (d) m/s
√
1
Q.P. Code -P 160
7. A uniform thin rod of length (4a + 2πa) and of mass (4m + 2πm) is bent and fabricated to
form a square surrounded by semicircles as shown in the figure. The moment of inertia of
this frame about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane is
, - , - , )- ) -
(a) ma2 (b) ma2 (c) ma2 (d) ma2
) )
8. A ball is dropped onto a horizontal surface from a height of 36 cm. After bouncing
several times it comes to rest covering a total distance of 100 cm measured in a vertical
direction. The percentage loss in its kinetic energy after its first impact is
(a) 36 (b) 64 (c) 53 (d) 96
9. A simple pendulum has a small disc shaped magnet as the bob whose magnetic moment
is along vertical. Just beneath the bob a current carrying coil is placed on a horizontal
table. The coil produces a uniform magnetic field. The dependence of the change in time
period |:T| on current i can be graphically shown as
(a) (b) (c) (d)
10. Two coupled simple pendulums have nearly the same period. One of them is excited
while the other is at rest. Now energy keeps on transferring from one pendulum to the
other alternately. This periodic transfer of energy continues almost indefinitely with a
time period of 10 s. Then the difference of frequencies between the two pendulums is
(a) zero Hz (b) 0.1 Hz (c) 0.01 Hz (d) infinite
2
Q.P. Code -P 160
11. A large cylindrical vessel contains water to a height of 10 m. It is found that the thrust
acting on the curved surface is equal to that at the bottom. If atmospheric pressure can
support a water column of 10 m, the radius of the vessel is
(a) 10 m (b) 15m (c) 5 m (d) 25 m
12. A thin annular metal disc of inner and outer radii R1 and R2respectively, is freely
suspended from a point on its outer circumference. The length of the corresponding
equivalent simple pendulum is
" " " )" )" " " )"
(a) (b) (c) (d)
" " " "
13. Two identical thin metal strips, one of aluminum and the other of iron are riveted together
to form a bimetallic strip. The temperature is raised by 50o C. If the central planes of the
two strips are separated by 2 mm and the coefficients of thermal expansion for aluminum
and iron are respectively 30 × 10"6 / 0C and 10 × 10"6 / 0C, the average radius of curvature
of the bimetallic strip is about
(a) 50 cm (b) 100 cm (c) 150 cm (d) 200 cm
14. Standing waves are generated on a string loaded with a cylindrical body. If the cylinder is
immersed in water, the length of the loops changes by a factor of 2.2. The specific gravity
of the material of the cylinder is
(a) 1.11 (b) 2.15 (c) 2.50 (d) 1.26
15. A curved road with radius of curvature 200 m is banked with an angle of banking equal
to tan"1 (0.2). Now, if the traffic is at double the speed for which the road is designed, the
minimum value of the frictional coefficient needed is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 0.52 (b) 0.35 (c) 0.94 (d) 0.80
16. A plastic pipe filled with iron wires forms a soft iron core. Two identical coils that can
just slide over the pipe are placed on this soft iron core. Initially the pipe is kept
horizontal and a current is passed through the coils connected in series. The fields are in
opposition and the coils remain stationary with a separation of 5 cm. The system is now
made vertical and the separation between the coils reduces to 4 cm. Then the coefficient
of friction between the coils and the pipe is
(a) 0.41 (b) 0.02 (c) 0.5 (d) 0.3
17. A long straight wire carries a charge with linear density λ. A particle of mass m and a
charge q is released at a distance r from the wire. The speed of the particle as it crosses a
point distance 2r is
.'ln .'ln .'ln .'ln
(a) - 12
(b) - 12
(c) - 12
(d) - 12
3
Q.P. Code -P 160
18. A uniform meter scale is supported from its 20 cm mark. A body suspended from 10 cm
mark keeps the scale horizontal. However, the scale gets unbalanced if the body is
completely immersed in water. To regain the balance the body is shifted to the 8 cm
mark. Therefore, the specific gravity of the material of the body is
(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 4
19. Temperature of 100 g of water in a thermoflask remains fixed for a pretty long time at
50oC. An equal mass of sand at 20oC is poured in the flask and shaken for some time so
that the temperature of the mixture is 40oC. Now the experiment is repeated with 100 g of
a liquid at 50oC and an equal amount of sand at 20oC when the temperature of the
mixture is found to be 30oC. The specific heat of the liquid (in kJ kg"1K"1) is
(a) 1.05 (b) 2.01 (c) 1.55 (d) 1.95
20. Let vavg, vp and vrms be respectively the average, the most probable and the root mean
square speeds of gas molecules according to Maxwell’s distribution. Then,
(a) vavg<vp<vrms (b) vp<vrms<vavg (c) vrms<vp<vavg (d) vp<vavg<vrms
21. A coal"based thermal power plant producing electricity operates between the
temperatures 27oC and 227oC. The plant works at 80% of its maximum theoretical
efficiency. Complete burning of 1 kg of coal yields 36000 kJ of heat. A house needs 10
units of electricity each day. Coal used for supplying the amount of energy for the house
in one year is
(a) 1141 kg (b) 580 kg (c) 605 kg (d) 765 kg
22. A copper"constantan thermocouple has thermoelectric power 40 µV/oC. One junction is

at 0oC while the other is at 50oC. The thermocouple is connected to a 30"0"30
galvanometer to produce a full scale deflection. If a 100 ohm resistance is connected in
series with the galvanometer, the galvanometer gives a deflection of 10 divisions. The
figure of merit of the galvanometer is
(a) 1.3 µA/div (b) 2.0 µA/div (c) 2.3 µA/div (d) 4.0 µA/div
23. A fresh dry cell of 1.5 volt and two resistors of 10 kH each are connected in series. An
analog voltmeter measures a voltage of 0.5 volt across each of the resistors. A 1000 µF
capacitor is fully charged using the same source. the same voltmeter is now used to
measure the voltage across it. The initial value of the current and the time in which the
voltmeter reading falls to 0.5 volt are respectively
(a) 60 µA, 11 s (b) 120 µA, 15 s (c) 150 µA, 15 s (d) 150 µA, 11 s
24. A charge of + 2 µC is situated off"centre of a hollow spherical metallic shell. Then,

(a) – 2µC charge gets uniformly distributed on the inner surface of the shell.
(b) + 2µC charge gets non"uniformly distributed on the outer surface of the shell.
(c) – 2µC charge gets non"uniformly distributed on the inner surface of the shell.
(d) no charge appears on the outer surface of the shell.
4
Q.P. Code -P 160
25. Two simple pendulums with heavy bobs – one using iron wire and the other aluminium
wire are excited simultaneously. It is found that when the first pendulum completes 1000
oscillations the other completes 1001. When the temperature is raised by toC, it is found
that the two pendulums now oscillate together. If the coefficients of thermal expansion of
iron and aluminium are 10 × 10"6 /oC and 30 × 10"6 /oC, the value of tis
(a) 77.2oC (b) 123.2oC (c) 100.1oC (d) 105.2oC
26. Consider a body moving through air at a speed greater than that of sound. Out of the
following terms that one which is NOT connected with this event is
(a) sonic boom (b) ultrasonic (c) Mach number (d) conical wavefront
27. A short bar magnet is placed along N"S direction with N pole pointing north. The neutral
points are located 20 cm away from the bar magnet. If BHis the horizontal component of
earth’s magnetic field, then the magnetic field due to the bar magnet at a distance of 40
cm along its axis is
45 45 45 45
(a) (b) (c) (d)
, 6 (7
28. A plane mirror coincides with a plane having equation x = 3. A particle is moving along a
line with direction ratios 3,4,5. If speed of the particle is √2 , the velocity of its image is
(a) 8 9̂ + 8 ;̂ + 8 <= (b) − 8 9̂ − 8 ;̂ − <= (c) 8 9̂ + 8 ;̂ − 8 <= (d) − 8 9̂ + 8 ;̂ + <=

) , ( ) , ) , ( ) ,
29. An unpolarized light is travelling along Z axis through three polarizing sheets. The
polarizing directions of the first and the third sheet are respectively parallel to X axis and
Y axis whereas that of the second one is at 60oto the Y axis. Then, the fraction of the
initial light intensity that emerges from the system is about
(a) zero (b) 0.093 (c) 0.031 (d) 0.28
30. One face of a glass (µ = 1.50) lens is coated with a thin film of magnesium fluoride MgF2
(µ = 1.38) to reduce reflection from the lens surface. Assuming the incident light to be
perpendicular to the lens surface, the least coating thickness that eliminates the reflection
at the centre of the visible spectrum (λ = 550 nm) is about
(a) 0.05 µm (b) 0.10 µm (c) 1.38 µm (d) 2.80 µm
31. Consider the analogy between an oscillating spring"body system and an oscillating LCR
circuit. Then, the correspondence between the two systems that is NOT correct is
(a) chargeq corresponds to displacement x of the body.
(b) inductanceL corresponds to mass m of the body.
(c) capacitanceC corresponds to spring constant k .
(d) magnetic energy corresponds to kinetic energy of the body.
5
Q.P. Code -P 160
32. A 50 Hz ac source is connected to a capacitor C in series with a resistance 1 kH. The rms
voltages measured across them are 5 volt and 2 volt respectively. Assume the capacitor to
be ideal. The peak value of the source voltage and the capacitance are respectively
(a) 7 V, 1.27 µF (b) 5.3 V, 2.3 µF (c) 7.62 V, 1.27 µF (d) 3 V, 2.3 µF
33. Refer to the circuit given below. Initially the switch S is in position 1 for 1.5 s. Then the
switch is changed to position 2. After a time t (measured from the change"over of the
switch) the voltage across 5 kH resistance is found to be about 1.226 volt. Then, t is
(a) 330 ms (b) 500 ms (c) 33 ms (d) data insufficient
34. A long straight wire of radius R carries a uniformly distributed current i. The variation of
magnetic field B from the axis of the wire is correctly represented by the graph
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
6
Q.P. Code -P 160
35. Two copper coils A and B are wound over a plastic pipe. Coil A is connected to a
sinusoidal voltage source of frequency 50 Hz so that a current of 100 mA passes through
it. The voltage across coil B is 5 volt. Now if coil B is short circuited, there is a change of
current of 2 mA in coil A. Then, the mutual inductance between the two coils and the
percentage change in the impedance of coil A are respectively
(a) 160 mH, 2% (b) 16 mH, 0% (c) 1.6 mH, 2% (d) 0.16 mH, 0%
36. A coil is wound on an iron rod and connected to an ac source as shown in the figure. Two
more coils AB and CD are also wound on the same rod. If ends B and C are joined, a
filament bulb connected between ends A and D glows well. However, if B and D are
joined and the bulb is connected between A and C, it glows feebly. This shows that
(a) coils AB and CD are in series in the first case while they are in parallel in the second
case.
(b) in the second case the two coils are in phase addition and they have unequal number
of turns.
(c) in the second case the two coils are in phase opposition and they have equal number
of turns.
(d) in the second case the two coils are in phase opposition and they have unequal
number of turns.
37. The age of an organic material is usually determined by measuring its 14C content (carbon
dating). The ratio of the number of stable isotope of 14C atoms present to the number of
radioactive 14C atoms in a certain material is found to be 3:1. If the half life of 14C atoms
is 5730 years, the age of the material under investigation is
(a) 7944 years (b) 17190 years (c) 11460 years (d) 13972 years
38. The arrangement of NAND gates shown below effectively works as
(a) AND gate (b) OR gate (c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate
7
Q.P. Code -P 160
39. A beam of 28 keV electrons strikes a target generating X rays. The minimum wave length
λmin (called cutoff wavelength) of the X rays generated is
(a) 4.4 nm (b) 44 nm (c) 0.044 nm (d) 0.44 nm
1. "2 3 4) #) 5 . 6 # % ! + 3 7 !/ 2 . /. 2+)
A potentiometer is made using a resistance wire about 5 m long and having a resistance
of 8 H/m. The diagram shows the arrangement on a wooden board. The wire is turned
round brass screws (P) used as pegs giving 5 parallel segments 1.0 m each. The wire
remains taut under moderate tension. It is held in place by strips 3 mm thick marked as S
and S'. The experimental circuit shows the labeled electrical components. L is Leclanche
cell (emfe1 = 1.40 volt) and D is Daniel cell (emfe2 = 1.08 volt).
40. It is required to decide the ratio (e1 / e2) by sum and difference method ALSO. Four cells
with different values of emfsE are available. One must use a cell with emfE equal to
(a) 1.40 volt (b) 2.0 volt (c) 4.50 volt (d) 1.08 volt
41. The best material for strips marked S and S' is

(a) plastic (b) aluminium (c) cast iron (d) plated brass
42. Assuming that due to stretching of wire while preparing the potentiometer, its resistance
has increased by 2% and a potential gradient of 0.6 mV/mm is needed, then R must be
(a) 13.5 ohm (b) 40.8 ohm (c) 20.4 ohm (d) 135 ohm
8
Q.P. Code -P 160
43. It is claimed that the strips S and S' serve two purposes – (I) to decide the end points of
the wire, and (II) to keep the wire in its place. Then,
(a) both (I) and (II) are important.
(b) (I) is more important than (II).
(c) (II) is more important than (I).
(d) both are unimportant.
44. The length of wire between the adjoining pegs carries current
(a) equal to that in the potentiometer wire.
(b) equal to half the current in the potentiometer wire.
(c) nearly zero.
(d) equal to zero.
45. Two new and different cells having emf’sv1 and v2 have their balance points P1 and P2
respectively. Then,
(a) v1 >v2 (b) v1 <v2 (c) v1 = v2 (d) information is not sufficient.
46. The ‘emf under test’ contains an arrangement as connected in the circuit.
It is observed that wherever the jockey is touched to wire the galvanometer shows full
scale deflection only on one side. The possible causes (considered one at a time) are (I) e
is D and e' is L, (II) e is L and e' is D, (III) key K is not inserted, (IV) value of R is much
larger than that set as per Q. No. 42, (V) value of R is very small. The possible causes are
(a) (I), (II) and (III) (b) (II), (III) and (IV)
(c) (I), (III) and (IV) (d) (II), (III) and (V)
47. If the jockey is touched at a point on the wire 1.0 cm away from the balance point, then
the galvanometer (G = 1 kH) will show a current equal to
(a) 2 µA (b) 4 µA (c) 6 µA (d) 8 µA
1. "2 3 4) #) 8 . 6 # % ! + 3 7 !/ 2 . /. 2+)
A large number of pendulums with identical bobs (mass m) but varying lengths are
suspended from a thick thread. Another pendulum of a heavier bob (mass M) is also
suspended from the same thread as shown.
9
Q.P. Code -P 160
This pendulum with the heavier bob is used as a ‘driver’ to drive the other pendulums
called as ‘driven’ pendulums. Assume that the amplitude of the driver is maintained
constant (by some suitable mechanism). Let the frequency of the driver be f0.
48. The time periods – hence the frequencies (f) and the amplitudes (A) of the driven
pendulums in steady state are measured. The variation of A with f is correctly shown by
the graph
(a) (b) (c) (d)
49. It is observed that

(a) all the pendulums except one are at rest.
(b) all the pendulums oscillate in phase with the ‘driver’.
(c) one of the pendulums oscillates with maximum amplitude.
(d) the pendulum with maximum amplitude oscillates in phase with the ‘driver’.
50. The frequency of the pendulum having maximum amplitude is

(a) f0 / 2 (b) f0 (c) 2 f0 (d) not related to f0
51. The pendulum in Q. No. 50 above is set into oscillation with an initial amplitude of 10.0
cm. Soon this pendulum comes to rest momentarily and the driver is seen to oscillate with
an amplitude of 8.16 cm. Then, mass M equals
(a) 1.5 m (b) 2 m (c) 2.5 m (d) 3 m
52. A simple pendulum of length L has a period T. If length is changed by :L, the change in
period :T is proportional to
( (
(a) T (b) T2 (c) (d)
> √>
10
Q.P. Code -P 160
53. The variation of amplitude A with respect to time t is shown as
(a) (b) (c) (d)
54. Which of the following will give a straight line graph?

(a) log A against t (b) log A against 1/t (c) A against t2 (d) A2 against t
55. If v is the velocity of the bob the force that is responsible for decrease of amplitude is
proportional to
( (
(a) v 2 (b) v (c) ? (d) ?
4) #) 9 9 . 6 # 0 % # /. "2 :" # !#)
56. An object is placed 30 cm away from a symmetric convex lens and an image two thirds
of the size of the object is produced. The object is moved by a distance of 20 cm so as to
get a magnified image. Now we get
(@
(a) a real image of magnification .
7
(b) a virtual image of magnification 5.
(c) a real image at a distance of 40 cm.
(d) a virtual image at a distance of 60 cm.
57. A symmetric concave lens of focal length 24 cm is now placed in contact with the convex
lens and the object is brought back to its original position. The image formed will be
(a) a real one with a magnification 4.

(b) a real one at a distance of 40 cm.
(c) a virtual one at a distance of 120 cm.
(d) a virtual one with a magnification 2.5.
11
Q.P. Code -P 160
58. The concave lens is moved away from the object through a distance of 10 cm. We get an
image that is
(a) virtual and at a distance of about 17 cm from the concave lens.
(b) real and at a distance of about 47 cm from the object.
(c) virtual, diminished and at a distance of 10 cm from the concave lens.
(d) real and at a distance of 57 cm from the object.
59. Now consider again the lenses to be in contact with each other but made of material of
refractive index 1.2. The system is immersed in a medium of refractive index µ and it is
found that the focal length of the system remains numerically the same as when in air.
Therefore, µ is
(a) less than 1.2 (b) between 1.2 and 1.5
(c) greater than 1.5 (d) equal to 1.5
)
60. The given convex lens (refractive index ) is made to rest on the surface of a lake such
,
that its upper surface is in air while the lower one is in water (refractive index ). Rays
)
from the sun overhead converge at a distance ‘a’ inside the water, while rays from a
luminescent anglerfish beneath at the bottom of the lake converge at a distance ‘b’ in air.
Therefore,
(a) a = 12 cm, b = 12 cm (b) a = 24 cm, b = 12 cm
(c) a = 18 cm, b = 12 cm (d) a = 24 cm, b = 18 cm
12
Q.P. Code -P 160
! 4) #) 9 5 !, !" 6 . 3 2 !# $ . .; . & , 6 - .. - ) " .

% ! 3, 3 + - .. - , / 9 .<#) 0 ! 3 ! !#7 . % ! 3 % # !- .. - .
! - .. - !#7 . # ## %= , " / > . .<#)
61. Four point masses are placed in a plane so that their centre of mass is at (1,1). Three of
them are of mass m each and are placed at (0,0), (2,0) and (0,2) respectively. The fourth
point of mass 2m is displaced from its initial position such that centre of mass of the
system moves to (2,1). Then, the displacement of the fourth point mass is
(a) parallel to X axis. (b) inclined at an angle 45o with X axis.
8
(c) of magnitude units. (d) of magnitude 5 units.
62. A block A of mass 2 kg rests on a horizontal surface. Another block B of mass 1 kg

moving at a speed of 1 m/s when at a distance of 16 cm from A, collides elastically with
A. The coefficient of friction between the horizontal surface and each of the blocks is 0.2.
Then, ( g = 10 m/s2 ),
(a) after collision block B rebounds.
(b) after collision block B comes to rest.
(c) final separation between the blocks is 3 cm.
(d) final separation between the blocks is 5 cm.
63. A uniform disc of mass M and radius R is lifted using a string as shown in the figure.
Then,
(a) its linear acceleration is g upward. (b) its linear acceleration is g downward.
B
(c) its angular acceleration is . (d) its rate of change of angular momentum is MgR.
"
13
Q.P. Code -P 160
64. Four thin straight long wires are all parallel to Z axis. They pass through the points
A(3,0,0), B(0,3,0), C("3,0,0) and D(0,"3,0). They all carry currents in <= direction of
magnitudes 0.3 A, 0.6 A, 0.3 A and 0.3 A respectively. The magnitude of magnetic field
at the origin O due to
(a) wires at A and C is zero. (b) wires at A and B is 2√2 × 10"8 T
(c) wires at A and D is 2√2 × 10"8 T (d) all wires is 2 × 10"8 T
65. In a drip irrigation system water flows at 0.4 m/s through a 25 mm diameter pipe. At each
of the plants in the field water is expected to be delivered at 0.02 m/s through a 2 mm
opening. The drip works for 2 hours a day. Then,
(a) the system feeds 2250 plants.

(b) a plant gets about 3.2 litres of water a day.
(c) the system feeds 3125 plants.
(d) a plant gets about 1.8 litres of water a day.
66. Refer to the circuit given below. Output voltage V0 is measured between points and6.
Then,
(a) the peak value of V0 is 2.5 volt above the minimum if the diode is assumed to be
ideal.
(b) the positive half cycle of the input is clipped.
(c) the circuit acts as a rectifier.
(d) the peak value of V0 is about 3.2 volt above the minimum if D is silicon diode (non"
ideal).
67. Two constant volume gas thermometers – one containing helium and the other containing
oxygen are used to measure the boiling point of liquid nitrogen. For calibrating the He
thermometer first it is dipped in boiling water and afterwards in boiling liquid nitrogen
and the pressure was found to change by a factor of 5. The process is repeated with
oxygen thermometer. Then, which of the following statement/s is/are true?
(a) According to He thermometer liquid nitrogen boils at 74.6 K.

(b) Oxygen gas thermometer also gives the same result.
(c) Oxygen gas thermometer cannot be used in this situation.
(d) Helium gas thermometer cannot give the linear variation of pressure with
temperature.
14
Q.P. Code -P 160
68. A hollow prism filled with hot water is used with usual arrangement to obtain a spectrum.
The water prism is set in minimum deviation position. It is observed that the spectrum
shifts so that deviation increases. Indicate the correct statement/s.
(a) Refractive index of water increases with decrease of temperature.
(b) Refractive index of water increases with increase of temperature.
(c) Speed of light decreases with decrease of temperature.
(d) Speed of light increases with decrease of temperature.
69. A vertical narrow wire is illuminated with laser. Alternate dark and bright bands are
formed on a graph paper pasted on a distant wall. Indicate the correct statement/s.
(a) Making appropriate measurements it is possible to determine the diameter of the wire.
(b) This phenomenon exhibits that light does not follow rectilinear paths.
(c) This is a case of Fraunhoffer diffraction.
(d) This is a case of interference of an infinitely large number of Huygens’ secondary
waves leading to a diffraction pattern.
70. Consider an element of a stretched string along which a wave travels. During its
transverse oscillatory motion, the element passes through a point at y = 0 and reaches its
maximum at y = ym. Then, the string element has its maximum
(a) kinetic energy at y = ym.
(b) elastic potential energy at y = ym.
(c) kinetic energy at y = 0.
(d) elastic potential energy at y = 0.
?????????
+,# - - !# ! # , " , ! %@
Charge on electron e = 1.6 × 10"19 C Mass of electron me = 9.1 × 10"31 kg
Universal gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10"11 Nm2/ kg2
Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10"12 C2/Nm2
Universal gas constant R = 8.31 J/mol K Planck constant h = 6.62 × 10"34Js
Stefan constant σ = 5.67 × 10"8 W/m2K4 Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10"23 J/K
Mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10"27 kg
Boiling point of nitrogen = 77.4 K Boiling point of oxygen = 90.19 K
Boiling point of hydrogen =20.3 KBoiling point of helium = 4.2 K
15
ANSWERS / SOLUTIONS
Q. P. Code 160
A1
1. (c) Use the definition of dB scale: 120 = 10 log10 , which gives = 10 -12.
2. (b) Use Gauss law where so that E= and .
3. (d) Let the distances of the stars with masses m1 and m2 from their centre of mass
be r1 and r2 respectively so that (r1 + r2) = r, say. The necessary centripetal force
is provided by the gravitational force between them, so that
. This gives . From this one
can write the expression for T.
4. (c) Effective acceleration is the vector sum of and acceleration due to
rotation of the earth r where r is the distance from the axis of rotation. Also
one can neglect r compared to g while determining the magnitude g'. Therefore,
. Also r can be written as where λ is the latitude.
5. (b) The direction along which the particle moves is the direction of velocity
which in turn, is the slope of the trajectory. This is and
hence the answer.
6. (c) If the particle A is at (x, y), particle B will be at (x, 0). The speed of B is given
to be m/s which is also the x component of the velocity of A. Since
for particle B, the equation of trajectory is y = x, = 3 m/s.
Therefore, speed of A is .
7. (c) Moment of inertia =
8. (c) One can write the series 100 = 36 + 2 giving
where e is the coefficient of restitution. Now, the percentage loss of
kinetic energy = . Note that the speed after impact is
e times the initial speed. This gives the percentage loss as 52.94 which is almost
53%.
9. (a) The magnetic force exerted and hence the corresponding acceleration is
proportional to the current. Consider the expression for the period of a simple
pendulum in which the effective acceleration due to gravity can be written as
where a is a constant. Then,
1
where T0 is the original period. Therefore, the
change in period |ΔT| is linearly proportional to the current i.
10. (b) The beat frequency is the difference in frequencies which is the reciprocal of
the beat period T which is given to be 10 s.
11. (b) Thrust on the curved surface whereas the thrust
on the bottom = . The atmospheric pressure in terms of
column of water is 10 m. equating the two thrusts gives R = 15 m.
12. (b) Moment of inertia of annular disc about the axis under consideration can be
written as . Comparing the expression for the periodic time
of this oscillating disc as a compound pendulum with that of a simple pendulum,
we get the equivalent length.
13. (d) For aluminum one can write where R2 is the radius
of the arc of aluminum strip and t is the temperature. Note that θ is the angular
width of the strips. A similar expression can be written for iron strip. The
difference between the radii, say d, for aluminum and iron is the distance between
the central planes of the two strips. The expression for d can be obtained from the
above two expressions as . Also (R1 + R2) can be approximated as
2i and the value of R can be determined.
14. (d) In this case is constant. If wavelength is λ (when the cylinder is in air), that
when the cylinder is immersed in water will be .
15. (a) As per road design, the rated speed is m/s. Now, the speed is
to be 40 m/s which will be helped by friction. With the help of free body diagram,
one can write and .
Simplifying this one gets . Using tanθ = 0.2, one gets
approximately.
16. (a) Each of the coils acts as a magnetic dipole. The force of interaction between
them varies inversely as the fourth power of the distance of separation. When the
coils are placed vertically only the weight mg of the coil balances this force.
However, when they are placed horizontally a force equal to µmg balances this
force. Thus, which is almost 0.41.
17. (b) The electric field at a distance x from the wire is so that the force
on a charge q would be . Writing the force as , the speed can be
determined by integrating the expression.
18. (b) Let w1 be the weight of the body in air and w2 be its weight in water. Using
law of moments, one gets w1 = 3mg and w2 = 2.5 mg where mg is the weight of
the meter scale. The specific gravity is then = 6.
19. (a) Let s1 be the specific heat of sand and s be that of the liquid. Using the
principle of calorimetry, one gets 4200 = 2 s1 and s1 = 2 s and hence the answer.
2
20. (d) Consider the expressions for the different speeds, ,
and , where symbols carry their usual meanings. Now determine their
inter-relation.
21. (a) Ideal efficiency is 40% whereas the actual efficiency is 40 × 0.8 = 32%. In a
year the number of units required is 10 × 365 = 3650 units. One unit corresponds
to 3600 kJ of energy, so that in a year the actual output is required to be 36000 ×
365 kJ, which is (equivalent of 1 kg of coal) × 365. With 32% efficiency this
gives the amount of coal required throughout a year is 1140.625 kg of coal.
22. (a) The thermoemf e = 40 (50 – 0) = 2000 µV. If G is the resistance of the
galvanometer, the current through it is µA which produces full scale
deflection of 30 divisions. Therefore, where is the figure of merit of
the galvanometer. After connecting 100 ohm resistance in series with the
galvanometer, the equation becomes . Solving these equations one
gets G = 50 ohm and µA/div.
23. (d) Let the resistance of the voltmeter be R (in kΩ, for convenience). Considering
the voltage drops, one gets R = 10 kΩ. Initial current is then obviously 150 µA.
The time required for the voltage across the capacitor to fall from V0 to V is given
by . Using this one gets t = 11 s.
24. (c) A charge – 2 µC is non-uniformly distributed on the inner surface of the
spherical shell whereas an equal positive charge is uniformly distributed on the
outer surface.
25. (c) If T1 and T2 are the periodic times of the two pendulums, and
hence the ratio of lengths is . This gives L1 = 1.002 L2. Now,

one can write the expressions for the increased lengths after the temperature is
raised by t0 C and equate the two. Solving this one gets the temperature t.
26. (b) Ultrasonic has to do with the frequency and not the speed.
27. (b) Clearly the neutral point is on the equator of the magnet and the magnetic
field at that point is . Writing a similar expression for the field at a
point on the axis, the ratio can be taken to give the answer.
28. (d) Knowing the direction ratios, one can write the unit vector in the direction in
which the object is moving. Therefore, the velocity of the object can be written as
. Since, the mirror is along the plane x = 3, the
velocity will have its x component only inverted.
29. (b) If I0 is the initial intensity of light entering the first polarizing sheet, the
intensity after this sheet is . The intensity of light after the second sheet is
and similarly that after the third sheet is .
Finally expressing I3 in terms of I0 one gets the result.
30. (b) Note that if the rays reflected from the two interfaces (air-film and film-glass)
interfere destructively, the reflection will be eliminated. For this the total path
3
difference must be an odd multiple of half the wavelength. If L is the film
thickness, where the wavelength in MgF2 is . Now
for L to be minimum n should be zero. Substituting the values one gets the result.
31. (c) The capacitance C corresponds to and NOT k.
32. (c) Current through the circuit is obviously 2 mA. Therefore, the capacitive
reactance is kΩ. From this the capacitance turns out to be 1.27 µF.
The peak value of the source voltage is times the net RMS voltage which is
volt.
33. (a) The charging time constant is 220 ms. Since the contact is more than five time
constants the capacitor gets fully charged, that is the voltage across the capacitor
is 10 volt. Now, the discharging time constant is 330 ms. Therefore, after 330 ms,
the voltage across the capacitor and hence across the two resistors together is
3.678 volt. Out of this the voltage across the 5 kΩ resistor is 1.226 volt.
34. (c) The variation of B with the distance is linear inside the wire.
35. (a) The voltage across coil B is where is the current in
coil A. This gives . Taking into account the rms values of
current and voltage, M comes out to be 159 mH. Initial current in coil A is, say I1
= 0.1 A. Therefore, if V is the voltage across it, the impedance of coil A is 10V.
After coil B is shorted, the current in coil A increases to 0.102 A, hence its
impedance is . Then the percentage change in impedance is
1.96% or about 2%.
36. (d) Due to the emf’s induced being in phase opposition the net current is small.
Also since the number of turns is not the same the current does not drop to zero
and hence the bulb glows feebly.
37. (c) Let N2 be the number of atoms of stable isotopes and N1 be that of radioactive
isotopes. If N0 is the initial number then, N2 = N0 – N1. Now, N1 = N0 e –λt = (N1 +
N2) e –λt. This gives . Writing one gets the answer.

38. (c) With the help of truth table for NAND gate write the output at every stage for
all possible cases of the input.
39. (c) The minimum wavelength λmin corresponds to νmax where all the energy carried
by the electron is totally transferred to X ray photon. Writing λmin = where E is
the energy of the electron, one gets the answer.
40. (c) Particularly when the cells assist each other (sum), the driving cell must have
an emf E greater than the sum of the emf’s [ > (1.40 + 1.08)] of the cells under
test.
41. (d) Electrical conductivity of brass is the greatest among the materials given. Due
to plating the strips are free from corrosion.
42. (c) Due to stretching the resistance of the potentiometer wire is 40 + 2% = 40.8
ohm. Potential gradient v can be written as where r is the resistance of
the wire and R is the resistance connected in the circuit. Solving for R gives the
answer.
4
43. (b) Determining the end point is more important than keeping the wire in place.
44. (c) The metal strip S has a very small resistance (close to zero, but NOT zero).
45. (b) Note that point P1 is closer to the common point (where the positive terminal
of E and that of the cell under test are connected) than the point P2 and the emf is
proportional to the balancing length.
46. (c) If e < e', the emf under test will be negative and the current will always pass
through the galvanometer. If key is open, current is only due to the emf under test
which never becomes zero. If R is too large, the potential difference across the
total length of wire may be smaller than the emf under test.
47. (c) The potential difference across 1 cm wire is 6mV and hence the current
through the galvanometer is 6 µA.
48. (b) Obviously the amplitude is a maximum for one particular frequency at which
a pendulum resonates with the driver pendulum.
49. (c) The pendulum which has the same natural frequency of oscillation as that of
the driver pendulum has maximum amplitude.
50. (b) The frequency of the resonating pendulum is obviously the same as f0 the
frequency of the driver pendulum.
51. (a) When one of the coupled pendulums stops, its energy is completely
transferred to the driver pendulum. If A and A' are respectively the amplitudes of
the coupled pendulum and the driver pendulum, . This
gives M = 1.5 m.
52. (c) Considering the expression for the periodic time T of a simple pendulum, ΔT
is proportional to
53. (b) The amplitude of a simple pendulum exponentially decreases with time.
54. (a) The graph of log A against t is a straight line as A varies exponentially with t.
55. (b) The decrease of amplitude is due to a damping force that is proportional to
velocity v.
56. (d) Considering the object distance u and the magnification m, the image distance
v comes out to be 20 cm and the focal length f to be 12 cm. Now, the object has to
be moved closer to the lens so as to get a magnified image. Taking u' = 10 cm,
image distance comes out to be 60 cm.
57. (a) Focal length of the combination is + 24 cm. With u = 30 cm, image distance is
120 cm and the magnification is 4, that is the image is real and magnified.
58. (d) Convex lens forms a real inverted image at 20 cm from the lens. This acts as
the virtual object for the concave lens forming a final image at or
approximately 17 cm from the concave lens. Note that this is a real image of the
virtual object formed by the concave lens. Therefore, from the object the final
image is at a distance of 57 cm.
59. (d) At first consider the convex lens made of material of refractive index 1.2 and
placed in air (µ = 1) and then immersed in a medium of refractive index µ = 1.5.
The focal length happens to be numerically 5k where k is a factor decided by the
radii of curvature. It is seen that the focal length numerically remains the same.
The same argument can be made for the concave lens. Therefore, when the two
lenses are in contact, the effective focal length remains numerically the same.
5
60. (d) Use the formula for refraction at a spherical surface. Since the media on the
two sides of the lens are different, consider the formation of image by one surface
at a time. Consider parallel rays from air and n1 = 1, n2 = , image distance by the
first surface is 36 cm. For the second surface n1 = and n2 = , final image is
formed at 24 cm. Thus, a = 24 cm. Using a similar procedure and considering
parallel rays incident from water, the final image is formed at b = 18 cm.
A2
61. (a), (c) After displacement of mass 2m, there is no change in y coordinate of
centre of mass. This indicates that the displacement is along X axis. Using the
expression for the X coordinate of centre of mass, initially the X coordinate of
mass 2m comes out to be 1.5 whereas it is 4 when the mass is displaced.
Therefore, the displacement is of magnitude 2.5 or units.
62. (a), (d) Deceleration due to the frictional force is 2 m/s2, so that block B collides
with a velocity of 0.6 m/s. Using conservation of momentum, 2v1 + v2 = 0.6 where
v1 and v2 are the velocities of blocks A and B after collision. Also since the
collision is elastic (coefficient of restitution = 1), v1 v2 = 0.6. This gives v1 = 0.4
m/s and v2 = 0.2 m/s. The negative sign for v2 indicates that block B rebounds.
Displacement of block A after collision is 4 cm to the right whereas that of block
B is 1 cm to the left, so that the final separation is 5 cm.
63. (a), (c), (d) The net force upward is Mg so that the acceleration is g upwards. The
net torque is anticlockwise and is of magnitude MgR which is also the same as the
rate of change of angular momentum. Since the moment of inertia is , the
angular acceleration is .
64. (a), (c), (d) Using the expression for the magnetic induction due to a long straight
wire and the right hand rule, the magnetic inductions at the origin due to the wires
at A, B, C and D are 2 × 10-8 T along OY', 4 × 10-8 T along OX, 2 × 10-8 T along
OY and 2 × 10-8 T along OX' respectively. Therefore, the inductions due to wires
at A and C cancel out. Using the vector addition, the induction due to wires at A
and D is T and that due to all wires is 2 × 10-8 T.
65. (c), (d) Using the equation of continuity, a relation can be written as
where n is the number of plants. This gives n = 3125.
Further the flow of water is 0.25 ml per second so that in 2 hours each plant gets
1.8 litre of water.
66. (a), (c), (d) During the positive half cycle, the diode remains open and the output
is the same as the input and hence 2.5 volt. Since the negative half cycle is
clipped, the circuit acts as a rectifier. If the diode happens to be non-ideal the
output is 2.5 + 0.7 = 3.2 volt above minimum.
67. (a), (c) At constant volume, pressure is directly proportional to temperature.
Using this the temperature at which liquid nitrogen boils comes out to be 74.6 K.
Also since at this temperature oxygen is not in gaseous state (boiling point of O2
is 90 K), it cannot be used in gas thermometer.
6
68. (a), (c) On cooling of water, deviation increases indicating that the refractive
index of water increases. Considering the expression for refractive index in terms
of speed of light, the speed of light decreases with decrease of temperature.
69. (a), (b), (c), (d) Knowing the wavelength diameter of wire can always be
determined. Obviously in experiments on diffraction light does not follow
rectilinear paths. This is a case of Fraunhoffer diffraction. Diffraction is
essentially a case of interference of a large number of wavelets.
70. (c), (d) The kinetic energy is obviously maximum when the element passes
through the mean position. In the mean position the string element happens to be
in its maximum stretched and hence its elastic potential energy is also maximum.
-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-
7
1. If the threshold of hearing is assumed to be the reference (0 dB), then the threshold of pain is taken
𝐼0
to be 120 dB. Let the corresponding sound intensities be I0 and I respectively. Then 𝐼
is
a) 120 b) 1012 c) 10-12 d) 101.2
Sol. Threshold of hearing: 0 dB (intensity: I0)

Threshold of pain: 120 dB (intensity: I)
𝐼 𝐼 𝐼 𝐼
Sound level:  = 10 log 𝐼 → 120 = 10 log 𝐼  log 𝐼 = 12  𝐼 = 1012
0 0 0 0
2. 𝑑𝐸
If E denotes the intensity of electric field, the dimensions of a quantity 𝜀𝑜 𝑑𝑡
are for
a) current b) current density c) electric potential d) electric flux
Sol. 𝑛𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛
E: electric field intensity: 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏
𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏2
𝜀𝑜 : permittivity of free space: 𝑛𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 2
𝑑𝐸 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 2 𝑛𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛
Given: 𝜀𝑜 𝑑𝑡
= 𝑛𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 2 x 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 𝑥 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒
𝑑𝐸 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝜀𝑜 𝑑𝑡
= 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑥 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 2 = 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎
= current density
3. Two stars of masses m1 and m2 distance r apart, revolve about their centre of mass. The period of
revolution is
a) 𝑟3 b) 𝑟 3 (𝑚1 +𝑚2 ) c) 2𝑟 3 d) 𝒓𝟑
2𝜋√ 2𝜋√ 2𝜋√ 2𝝅√
2𝐺(𝑚1 +𝑚2 ) 2𝐺(𝑚1 𝑚2 ) 𝐺(𝑚1 +𝑚2 ) 𝑮(𝒎𝟏 +𝒎𝟐 )
Sol. 𝐺𝑚1 𝑚2
Gravitational force between the stars: Fg = 𝑟2
Centripetal force for the stars: Fc = m1r12 = m2r22
Centre of mass divides the distance (r) between them in the inverse ratio of masses.
𝑚2 𝑚1
r1 = 𝑚 +𝑚 r and r2 = 𝑚 +𝑚 r
1 2 1 2
𝑚2
Fc = m1r12 = m1 𝑚 r 2
1 +𝑚2
Condition for circular motion:
𝐺𝑚1 𝑚2 𝑚2 𝐺(𝑚1 +𝑚2 ) 𝒓𝟑
Fg = Fc  = m1 r 2   = √  T = 2𝝅√
𝑟2 𝑚1 +𝑚2 𝑟3 𝑮(𝒎𝟏 +𝒎𝟐 )
4. Let a body be placed at a point on the earth’s surface at latitude  where the radius of the earth is
R. Then, the body experiences an effective acceleration
a) g - R2 – cos  b) g + R2 sin  c) g - R2 cos2  d) 𝑅𝜔2

g-
𝑐𝑜𝑠2 

Sol. Acceleration due to gravity at poles : g (remains constant)

Let the body of mass m be placed at point p at a latitude .
As the earth rotates, centrifugal force on the particle :
mr2 = m R cos  2
Gravitational force on the object acts along the radius, towards centre.
Resultant force on the particle : F
√(𝑚𝑔)2 + (m Rcos l w2)2 + 2(𝑚𝑔)(𝑚𝑅𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑙𝜔 2 cos(180 − 𝑙)
1 𝑅𝜔2 𝑐𝑜𝑠2  1 𝑅𝜔2 𝑐𝑜𝑠2 
F = mg (1 − 2 )  mg = mg (1 − 2 )
2 𝑔 2 𝑔
Acceleration due to gravity at a latitude  : g = g - R2 cos2 
5. A particle moves in a plane with a constant speed along a path y = 2x2 + 3x – 4. When the particle
is at (0, -4) the direction along which it is moving is inclined to the X axis at an angle
a) 630 b) 720 c) 270 d) 00
Sol. Trajectory of the particle y = 2x2 + 3x – 4

𝑑𝑦
Slope of the trajectory: 𝑑𝑥 = 4x + 3
Slope of the trajectory at (0, -4): 3
Slope of a curve: tan  = 3   = tan−1 3 = 720
6. Two particles A and B are moving in XY plane. Particle A moves along a line with equation y = x,
while B moves along X axis such that their x coordinates are always equal. If B moves with a
uniform speed of 3 m/s, the speed of A is
a) 3 m/s b) 1 c) d) 3
m/s 3√𝟐 m/s m/s
3 √2
Sol. Particle A is moving along the line : x = y

𝑑𝑥
Particle B is moving along X axis: vB = 𝑑𝑡 = 3 m/s
Speed of A along X axis: vAx = 3 m/s
Speed of A along Y axis: vAy = 3 m/s (since y = x)
Speed of A: vA = √vAx 2 + vAy 2 = 3√𝟐 m/s
7. A large cylindrical vessel contains water to a height of 10 m. It is found that the thrust acting on
the curved surface is equal to that at the bottom. If atmospheric pressure can support a water
column of 10 m, the radius of the vessel is
a) 10 m b) 15 m c) 5m d) 25 m
Sol. Given : 1 atm = 10 m of water column

Thrust acting on the bottom of the vessel: Fb = (P0 + h) (R2) = (10 + 10) R2
ℎ 10
Thrust acting on the curved surface: Fc = 2Rh (𝑃0 + ) = 2R x 10 (10 + ) = 20R (15)
2 2
Given : Fb = Fc  20 R2 = 300R  R = 15 m

8. A thin annular metal disc of inner and outer radii R1 and R2 respectively is freely suspended from a
point on its outer circumference. The length of the corresponding equivalent simple pendulum is
a) 𝑅1 2 + 𝑅2 2 b) 𝑹𝟏 𝟐 + 𝟑𝑹𝟐 𝟐 c) 3𝑅1 2 + 𝑅2 2 d) 𝑅1 2 + 3𝑅2 2

2𝑅2 𝟐𝑹𝟐 𝑅2 𝑅2
Sol. 𝐼
Time period of oscillation of physical pendulum: T = 2 √𝑚𝑔𝑑
𝐼
Equivalent length of simple pendulum : 𝑙 = 𝑚𝑑
I is moment of inertia about point of suspension
d is separation between point of suspension and centre of mass (d = R2)
𝑚 𝑅1 2 3R22 𝑚
I = I0 + mx2 = 2
(𝑅1 2 + 𝑅2 2 ) + m R22 = m ( 2
+ 2
) = 2
(𝑅1 2 + 3𝑅2 2 )
𝑚
𝐼 (𝑅1 2 +3𝑅2 2 ) 𝑹𝟏 𝟐 +𝟑𝑹𝟐 𝟐
𝑙= 𝑚𝑑
= 2
𝑚R2
= 𝟐𝑹𝟐
9. Two identical thin metal strips one of aluminium and the other of iron are riveted together to form
a bimetallic strip. The temperature is raised by 50 0C. If the central planes of the two strips are
separated by 2 mm and the coefficients of thermal expansions of aluminium and iron are
respectively 30 x 10-6 /0C and 10 x 10-6 /0C, the average radius of curvature of the bimetallic strips
is about
a) 50 cm b) 100 cm c) 150 cm d) 200 cm
Sol. Since aluminium has greater coefficient of expansion

it will expand more and forms the convex (outer) side.
𝑑
Radius of curvature : R = (𝛼 where
1 −𝛼 2 )∆𝑡
d is the separation between the central planes.

𝛼 1 coefficient of thermal expansion of outer strip
𝛼 2 coefficient of thermal expansion of inner strip
∆𝑡 increase in temperature
2 𝑥 10−3
R = (30 x 10−6−10 x 10−6) 𝑥 50 = 2 m = 200 cm
10. Standing waves are generated on string loaded with a cylindrical body. If the cylinder immersed in
water, the length of the loops changes by a factor of 2.2. The specific gravity of the material of the
cylinder is
a) 1.11 b) 2.15 c) 2.50 d) 1.26
Sol. 𝑣𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
Speed of mechanical wave : v = f  v ∝   = = 𝑎 = 2.2
𝑣𝑤 𝑤
2.2

Length of each loop in a stationary wave : 𝑙 = 2

𝑇
Speed of transverse wave : v = √  v ∝ √𝑇  v ∝ √𝑚
𝜇
When the cylinder is in air : va = k √𝑚

1
When the cylinder is in water : vw = k √𝑚 (1 − 𝑆𝐺 )
𝑣𝑎  k √𝑚 1 4.84
𝑣𝑤
= 𝑎 = = 2.2  1 = 4.84  SG = 3.84 = 1.26
𝑤 1
k √𝑚(1− ) 1−
𝑆𝐺
𝑆𝐺
11. A curved road with radius of curvature 200 m is banked with angle of banking equal to tan−1 0.2
Now, if the traffic is at double the speed for which the road is designed, the minimum value of the
frictional coefficient needed is (g = 10 m/s2)
a) 0.52 b) 0.35 c) 0.94 d) 0.80
Sol. 𝑣2 𝑣2
Angle of banking without friction: tan  = 𝑅𝑔  0.2 = 200 𝑥 10  v = 20 m/s
tan 𝜃+ 𝜇 𝑣2
Angle of banking with friction: 1−𝜇 tan 𝜃 = 𝑅𝑔
0.2+ 𝜇 1600 𝟔
= 200 𝑥 10 = 0.8  0.2 +  = 0.8 (1 – 0.2)   = 𝟏𝟏.𝟔 = 0.52
1−0.2𝜇
12. A plastic pipe filled with iron wires forms a soft iron core. Two identical
coils that can just slide over the pipe are placed on this soft iron core.
Initially the pipe is kept horizontal and a current is passed through the coils
connected in series. The fields are in opposition and the coils remain
stationary with a separation of 5 cm. The system is now made vertical and
the separation between the coils reduces to 4 cm. Then the coefficient of
friction between the coils and the pipe is
a) 0.41 b) 0.02 c) 0.94 d) 0.80
Sol. A current carrying coil acts as a bar magnet.

Magnetic force between two bar magnets is inversely proportional to fourth power of separation
𝑘
When the pipe is horizontal, frictional force balances the magnetic force of attraction: mg = 𝑟4
𝑘
When the pipe is vertical, weight of the coil balances the magnetic force of attraction: mg = 𝑅4
mg 𝑅 4 4 4
mg
= ( 𝑟 )   = (5) = 0.41
13. A long straight wire carries a charge with linear density . A particle of mass m and a charge q is
released at a distance r from the wire. The speed of the particle as it crosses a point distance 2r is
a) b) c) d)
𝑞 ln 𝑟 𝒒 𝒍𝒏 𝟐 𝑞 ln 2 𝑞 ln 𝑟
√ √ √ √
𝜋𝑚𝜀𝑜 𝝅𝒎𝜺𝒐 2𝜋𝑚𝜀𝑜 𝜋𝑚𝜀𝑜

Sol. 1 
Electric field intensity at a distance x: E =
2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑥
1 𝑞
Force on the charged particle: F = Eq = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑥
𝑜
𝐹 1 𝑞
Acceleration of the charged particle: a = 𝑚 = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑚 𝑥
𝑜
𝑑𝑣 𝑑𝑣 𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑣 1 𝑞 1 𝑞
a = 𝑑𝑡 = 𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑡 = v 𝑑𝑥 = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑚 𝑥  v dv = 2𝜋𝜀 𝑚 𝑥 dx
𝑜 𝑜
𝑣 2𝑟 1 𝑞 𝒒 𝒍𝒏 𝟐
Integrating on both sides: ∫0 𝑣 𝑑𝑣 = ∫𝑟 2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑚 𝑥
dx  v = √𝝅𝒎𝜺𝒐
14. A uniform meter scale is supported from its 20 cm mark. A body suspended from 10 cm mark
keeps the scale horizontal. However, the scale gets unbalanced if the body is completely immersed
in water. To regain the balance the body is shifted to the 8 cm mark. Therefore, the specific gravity
of the material of the body is
a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 4
Sol. For rotational equilibrium: mg x 10 = Mg x 30

Rotational equilibrium after immersing in water:
(mg – Fb) x 12 = Mg x 30
From the two expressions: 10 mg = 12 (mg – Fb)
10 mg = 12 mg – 12 Fb → 12 Fb = 2 mg
𝜌
6 vwg = vsg → 𝜌𝑠 = 6 (specific gravity)
𝑙
15. Temperature of 100 g of water in a thermo flask remains fixed for a pretty long time at 50 0 C. An
equal mass of sand at 200 C is poured in the flask and shaken for some time so that the temperature
of the mixture is 400 C. Now the experiment is repeated with 100 g of a liquid at 500 C and an
equal amount of sand at 200 C when the temperature of the mixture is found to be 300 C. The
specific heat of the liquid in kJ kg-1 K-1 is
a) 1.05 b) 2.01 c) 1.55 d) 1.95
Sol. Principle of calorimetry for water and sand:

mwswtw = msssts  100 x 1 x (50 – 40) = 100 x ss (40 – 20)  ss = 0.5 cal/g 0C
Principle of calorimetry for liquid and sand:
mlsltl= msssts  100 x s x (50 – 30) = 100 x 0.5 x (30 – 20)  0.25 cal/g 0C
s = 0.25 cal/g 0C = 0.25 x 4.2 = 1.05 kJ kg-1 K-1

16. Let vavg, vp and vrms be respectively the average, the most probable and the root mean square
speeds of gas molecules according to Maxwell’s distribution. Then
a) < vp < vrms b) vp < vrms < vavg c) vp < vrms < vavg d) vp < vavg < vrms
Sol. 8𝑅𝑇
Average velocity of gas molecules : vavg = √ 𝜋𝑀
2𝑅𝑇
Most probable velocity of gas molecules : vp = √ 𝑀
3𝑅𝑇
RMS velocity of gas molecules : vrms = √
𝑀
8
vavg : vp : vrms = √𝜋 : √2 : √3 = 1.595 : 1.414 : 1.732
17. A coal based thermal power plant producing electricity operates between the temperatures 270 C
and 2270 C. The plant works at 80 % of its maximum theoretical efficiency. Complete burning of
1 kg of coal yields 36000 kJ of heat. A house needs 10 units of electricity each day. Coal used for
supplying the amount of energy for the house in one year is
a) 1141 kg b) 580 kg c) 605 kg d) 765 kg
Sol. Electrical energy requirement of a house: 10 units = 10 kWhr = 10 x 3.6 x 106 J

Electrical energy requirement of the house per year: 365 x 3.6 x 107 = 1.314 x 107 kJ
𝑇𝑐 300
Thermal efficiency of the heat engine:  = 1 - =1- = 0.4
𝑇𝐻 500
Overall efficiency of the power plant: 0.4 x 0.8 = 0.32

Let the amount of coal required be n, then
1.314 𝑥 107
n x 0.32 x 36000 = 1.314 x 107  n = = 1140.625 ≈ 1141 kg
11520
18. A copper-constantan thermocouple has thermo-electric power 40 V/0C. One junction is 00 C

while the other is at 500 C. The thermocouple is connected to a 30-0-30 galvanometer to produce a
full scale deflection. If a 100  resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer, the
galvanometer gives a deflection of 10 divisions. The figure of merit of the galvanometer is
a) 1.3 A/div b) 2.0 A/div c) 2.3 A/div d) 4.0 A/div

𝑑𝐸
Sol. Thermoelectric power: 𝑑𝑇 = 40 V/0C
Thermo-emf of the thermocouple: E = 40 x 10-6 x (50 – 0) = 2 mV
Let the resistance of the galvanometer be G.
0.002 0.002
Full scale deflection current for the galvanometer: = 30x G= (x is figure of merit)
𝐺 30𝑥
𝐸 0.002 0.002
Current through the circuit: I = = = 10x  0.002 = 10x
𝑅 100+𝐺 100+
30𝑥
x = 1.3 x 10-6 = 1.3 A/div

19. A fresh dry cell of 1.5 V and two resistors of 10 k each are connected in series. An analog
voltmeter measures a voltage of 0.5 V across each of the resistors. A 1000 F capacitor is fully
charged using the same source. The same voltmeter is now used to measure the voltage across it.
The initial value of the current and the time in which the voltmeter reading falls to 0.5 V are
respectively
a) 60 A, 11 s b) 120 A, 15 s c) 150 A, 15 s d) 150 A, 11 s
Sol. Let the resistance of the voltmeter be R k

10 𝑅
Voltmeter reading: 0.5 V  10 + 𝑅

10 𝑅 x 1.5 = 0.5  R = 10 k
+10
10 + 𝑅
𝑉0 1.5
Initial current: I = 𝑅
= 10 𝑥 103 = 150 A
Voltage across the capacitor: v = v0 e-t/RC
1.5 1.5
0.5 = 1.5 e-t/10 = 𝑒 𝑡/10  et/10 = 0.5 = 3  t = 10 ln 3 = 11 sec
20. A charge of +2 C is situated off centre of a hollow spherical metallic shell. Then
a) -2 C charge gets uniformly distributed on the inner surface of the shell

b) +2 C charge gets non-uniformly distributed on the outer surface of the shell
c) -2 C charge gets non-uniformly distributed on the inner surface of the shell
d) no charge appears on the outer surface of the shell
Sol. Due to induction, the +ve charge gives rise to more −ve charge nearer to it.
As the sphere (uniform surface) is made of metal (conducting material) the
positive charge distributes uniformly over the surface.
21. Two simple pendulums with heavy bobs, one using iron wire and the other aluminium wire are
excited simultaneously. It is found that when the first pendulum completes 1000 oscillations, the
other completes 1001. When the temperature is raised by t0 C, it is found that the two pendulums
now oscillate together. If the coefficients of thermal expansion of iron and aluminium are
10 x 10-6 / 0C and 30 x 10-6 / 0C, the value of t is
a) 77.20 C b) 123.20 C c) 100.10 C d) 105.20 C
Sol. 𝑙 𝑇 𝑙
Time period of a simple pendulum : T = 2√𝑔  T ∝ √𝑙  𝑇1 = √𝑙1
2 2
1 2
𝑙1 𝑇2 𝑙
𝑙2
= 𝑇1 2  𝑙1 = ( 1000
1 ) = 1.002  𝑙1 = 1.002 𝑙2
2 2
1001
The final lengths of the pendulums are same as they have same time period after increasing the
temperature.
𝑙1𝑓 = 𝑙2𝑓  𝑙1 (1 + i t) = 𝑙2 (1 + alt) → 1.002(1 + i t) = 1 + alt  t = 100.1 0C

22. Consider a body moving through air at a speed greater than that of sound. Out of the following
terms the one which is not connected with this event is
a) sonic boom b) ultrasonic c) Mach number d) conical wave front
Sol. Ultrasonic refers to the frequency of Sound wave. If the

frequency exceeds 20 kHz, then it is known as ultrasonic.
Mach number is the number of times the speed of the
object is as compared to speed of sound.
23. A short bar magnet is placed along N-S direction with N pole pointing north. The neutral points
are located 20 cm away from the bar magnet. If BH is the horizontal component of earth’s
magnetic field, then the magnetic field due to the bar magnet at distance of 40 cm along its axis is
a) 𝐵𝐻 b) 𝑩𝑯 c) 𝐵𝐻 d) 𝐵𝐻
2 𝟒 8 16
Sol. When magnetic north is facing the geographic north, the null points are formed on equatorial line.
𝜇𝑜 𝑀 𝜇𝑜 𝑀
BH = =
4𝜋 𝑟 3 4𝜋 203
𝜇 2𝑀 𝜇 2𝑀 2 𝜇 𝑀 𝑩𝑯
Magnetic field on the axial line: Baxial = 4𝜋𝑜 𝑑3
= 4𝜋𝑜 403 = 23 4𝜋𝑜 203 = 𝟒
24. A plane mirror coincides with a plane having equation x = 3.

A particle is moving along a line with direction ratio 3, 4, 5.
If speed of the particle is √2, the velocity of the image is
3 4 1 3 4 3 4 1 𝟑 𝟒
a)
5
𝑖̂ + 5 𝑗̂+ 5 𝑘̂ b) − 5 𝑖̂ − 5 𝑗̂ − 𝑘̂ c)
5
𝑖̂ + 5 𝑗̂ − 5 𝑘̂ d) ̂
− 𝟓 𝒊̂ + 𝟓 𝒋̂+𝒌
Sol. Direction ratios: 3, 4, 5

3 4 5 3 4 5
Velocity of the particle: √2 (5 𝑖̂ + 5 2 𝑗̂ + 5 2 𝑘̂ ) = (5 𝑖̂ + 5 𝑗̂ + 5 𝑘̂ )
√2 √ √
The mirror is along the line x = 3 (parallel to y axis)
As the mirror is perpendicular to x axis, only x component of velocity gets reversed.
𝟑 𝟒
The velocity of the image: − 𝒊̂ + 𝒋̂+𝒌 ̂
𝟓 𝟓
25. An unpolarized light is travelling along z axis through three polarizers. The polarizing directions
of the first and third sheet are respectively parallel to X axis and Y axis while that of the second
one is at 600 to Y axis. Then, the fraction of initial light intensity that emerges from the system is
about
a) zero b) 0.093 c) 0.031 d) 0.28

Sol. Let the intensity of polarized light: I0

𝐼0
Intensity of light emerging from first polarizer: 2
𝐼0 𝐼0
Intensity of light emerging from second polarizer: 2
cos2 60 = 8
𝐼0 3𝐼0
Intensity of light emerging from third polarizer: 8
cos2 30 = 32
3
Fraction of initial light intensity that emerges from the system: = 0.093
32
26. One face of a glass ( = 1.50) lens is coated with a thin film of magnesium fluoride MgF2
( = 1.38) to reduce reflection from the lens surface. Assuming the incident light to be
perpendicular to the lens surface, the least coating thickness that eliminates the reflection at the
centre of the visible spectrum ( = 550 nm) is about
a) 0.05 m b) 0.10 m c) 1.38 m d) 2.80 m
Sol. Reflection will be eliminated when light rays reflected from (air, film) interface and (film, glass)
interface, interfere with each other destructively.
Let the thickness of the film: x

Condition for destructive interference: x = (2n+1) 2𝑚
 
2x = (2n+1) 2 = (2n+1) 2(1.38) (For minimum thickness, n = 0)
 550
2x = x= nm = 0.0996 m = 0.10 m
2(1.38) 4 𝑥 1.38
27. Consider the analogy between an oscillating spring-body system and an oscillating LCR circuit.
Then, the correspondence between the two systems that is not correct is
a) charge q corresponds to displacement x of the body

b) inductance L corresponds to mass m of the body
c) capacitance C corresponds to spring constant K
d) magnetic energy corresponds to kinetic energy of the body
Sol. 1 1
Instantaneous energy : E = kx2 + mv2
2 2
𝑑2𝑥 𝑘
Differential equation : 𝑑𝑡 2 + 2x = 0 here  = √𝑚
Displacement equation : x = A sin (t ± )
Speed of the block : v =  √𝐴2 − 𝑥 2
Acceleration of the block : a = −𝜔2 𝑥
𝑞2 1
Instantaneous energy : E = 2𝐶 + i2L
2
𝑑2𝑞 1
Differential equation : + 2q = 0 here  =
𝑑𝑡 2 √𝐿𝐶
Instantaneous charge : q = q0 sin (t ± )
Current in the circuit : i =  √𝑞0 2 − 𝑞 2
𝑑𝑖
Rate of change of current : 𝑑𝑡 = −𝜔2 𝑞

28. A 50 Hz ac source is connected to a capacitor C in series with a resistance 1 k. The rms voltages
measured across them are 5 V and 2 V respectively. Assume the capacitor to be ideal, the peak
value of the source voltage and the capacitance are respectively
a) 7 V, 1.27 F b) 5.3 V, 2.3 F c) 7.62 V, 1.27 F d) 3 V, 2.3 F
Sol. Rms voltage across the resistor : 2 V

𝑣𝑟𝑚𝑠 2
Rms current through the resistor : Irms = 𝑅
= 1 = 2 mA
Rms voltage across the capacitor :

1 1
vrms = Irms XC = 2 x 10-3 x  5 = 2 x 10-3 x  C = 1.27 F
2𝜋 𝑥 50 𝑥 𝐶 2𝜋 𝑥 50 𝑥 𝐶
Rms value of source voltage: v = √𝑣𝑐 2 + 𝑣𝑅 2 = √52 + 22 = √29

Peak value of source voltage: V = √2 v = √2 x √29 = √58 = 7.62 volt
29. Refer to the circuit given below. Initially the switch S is in position 1
for 1.5 s. Then the switch is changed to position 2. After a time t
(measured from the changeover of the switch) the voltage across 5
k resistance is found to be about 1.226 V. Then t is
a) 330 ms b) 500 ms c) 33 ms d) data insufficient
Sol. Charging time constant: RC = 10 x 103 x 22 x 10-6 = 0.22 sec

Discharging time constant: R1C = 15 x 103 x 22 x 10-6 = 0.33 s
As the given time (1.5 sec) is more than 5 time constants, the capacitor gets fully charged.
Charge on the capacitor: Q = CV = 22 x 10-6 x 10 = 220 C
During discharge, voltage across the capacitor and resistor is same.
5 1
Voltage across 5 k resistor: 15 𝑣𝑐 = 3 𝑣𝑐
𝑡 𝑡 𝑡
1
1.226 = 3 x 10 𝑒 −𝑅𝐶  0.3678 = 𝑒 −0.33  𝑒 0.33 = 2.72
t = 0.33 x ln (2.72) = 0.330 sec = 330 ms
30. A long straight wire of radius R carries a uniformly distributed current i. The variation of magnetic
field B from the axis of the wire is correctly represented by the graph

Sol. Consider a point outside the wire:

̅ = 𝜇𝑜 iin  B (2r) = 𝜇𝑜 i  B = 𝜇𝑜 𝑖 (hyperbola)
∫ 𝐵̅. 𝑑𝑙 2𝜋 𝑟
Consider a point inside the wire at a distance r:
𝑟2 𝜇 𝑖
̅ = 𝜇𝑜 iin  B (2r) = 𝜇𝑜
∫ 𝐵̅. 𝑑𝑙 i  B = 2𝜋𝑜 𝑅2 r
𝑅2
(st. line through origin) So the correct option is 3
31. Two copper coils A and B are wound over a plastic pipe. Coil A is connected to a sinusoidal
voltage source of frequency 50 Hz so that a current of 100 mA passes through it. The voltage
across coil B is 5 V. Now if coil B is short circuited, there is a change of current of 2 mA in coil A.
Then, the mutual inductance between the two coils and the percentage change in the impedance of
coil A are respectively
a) 160 mH, 2 % b) 16 mH, 0 % c) 1.6 mH, 2 % d) 0.16 mH, 0 %
Sol. 𝑑𝑖 𝑑
Induced emf across coil B: e = M 𝑑𝑡 = M 𝑑𝑡 (I0 sin t) = I0M cos t
emax = I0M  5 = 0.1 x 314 x M  M = 0.159 H = 159 mH ≈ 160 mH
Let V be the potential drop across coil A.
𝑉
Initial impedance of the coil: z1 = 0.1 = 10 V ohm
𝑉
Final impedance of the coil: z2 = 0.102 = 9.804 V ohm
10𝑉 −9.804𝑉
Percentage change in impedance: 10𝑉
𝑥100 = 1.96% ≈ 2%
32. A coil is wound on an iron rod and connected to an ac source as shown in fig. Two more coils AB
and CD are also wound on the same rod. If ends B and C are joined, a filament bulb connected
between ends A and D glows well. However, if B and D are joined and the bulb is connected
between A and C, it glows feebly. This shows that
a) coils AB and CD are in series in first case while they are in parallel in the second case
b) in the second case, the two coils are in phase addition and then have unequal turns
c) in the second case, the two coils are in phase opposition and they have equal turns
d) in the second case, two coils are in phase opposition and they have unequal turns
Sol. B, C are joined, and bulb is connected between A, D: current is flowing through both the coils in
the same direction. The two coils are in phase.
B, D are joined, and bulb is connected between A, C: current is flowing in opposite direction in the
coils. The two coils are in phase opposition. The current does not become zero as the number turns
are different causing different magnitudes of induced emf.

33. The age of an organic material is usually determined by measuring its C14 content (carbon dating).
The ratio of the number of stable isotope of C14 atoms present to the number of radioactive C14
atoms in a material is found to be 3 : 1. If the half-life of C14 atoms is 5730 years, the age of the
material under investigation is
a) 7944 years b) 17190 years c) 11460 years d) 13972 years
Sol. N0 : initial number of atoms available : N0 = N1 + N2

N1 : no. of radioactive nuclei present / N2 : no. of stable nuclei
No. of radioactive nuclei present : N1 = (N1 + N2) e-t
𝑁
et = 1 + 𝑁2 = 1 + 3 = 4
1
1.39 1.39 𝑇 1.39 𝑥 5730
t = ln 4 = 1.39  t = = = ≈ 11460 years
 0.693 0.693
34. The arrangement of NAND gates shown below effectively works as
a) AND gate b) OR gate c) NAND gate d) NOR gate
Sol. A = 0, B = 0 : gate 1: 1, gate 2: 1, gate 3: 1

A = 0, B = 1 : gate 1: 1, gate 2: 0, gate 3: 1
A = 1, B = 0 : gate 1: 0, gate 2: 1, gate 3: 1
A = 1, B = 1 : gate 1: 0, gate 2: 1, gate 3: 0
The final output of the logic circuit corresponds to NAND gate.
35. A uniform thin rod of length (4a + 2a) and of mass (4m + 2m) is bent and fabricated to form a
square surrounded by semi circles as shown in figure. The moment of inertia of this frame about an
axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane is
a) 4+2𝜋 b) 4+𝜋 c) 𝟒+𝟑𝝅 d) 3+𝜋

3
ma2 2
ma2 ma2 2
ma2
𝟑
Sol. Mass of each side of the square: m; Length of each side of the square: a
𝜋𝑚 𝑎
Mass of each semi-circle: ; Radius of each semi-circle:
2 2
𝑎2 𝑎24
Moment of inertia of the square part: Is = 4(m + m 4 ) = 3 ma2
12
𝜋𝑚 𝑎 2 𝜋𝑚 𝑎 2
Moment of inertia of the semicircular part: Isc : 4( + ) = ma2
2 4 2 4
4 𝟒+𝟑𝝅
Total moment of inertia : I = 3 ma2 + ma2 = 𝟑 ma2
36. A ball is dropped onto horizontal surface from a height of 36 cm. After bouncing several times it
comes to rest covering a total distance of 100 cm measured in a vertical direction. The percentage
loss in kinetic energy after its first impact is
a) 36 b) 64 c) 53 d) 96

Sol. 1+𝑒 2 1+𝑒 2 25 1+𝑒 2 8

Total distance travelled by the ball: L = (1−𝑒 2 ) h  100 = 36 (1−𝑒 2 )  9
= 1−𝑒 2  e = √17
Velocity before first impact: v1 = √2𝑔ℎ = √2 𝑥 10 𝑥 0.36 = 2.68 m/s
8
Velocity after first impact: v2 = e v1 = √17 x 2.68 = 1.84 m/s
∆𝑘 2.682 −1.842
Percentage loss in KE after first impact: x 100 = x 100 = 53%
𝑘 2.682
37. A simple pendulum has small disc shaped magnet as the bob whose magnetic moment is along
vertical. Just beneath the bob a current carrying coil is placed on a horizontal table. The coil
produces a uniform magnetic field. The dependence of the change in time period |∆𝑇| on current I
can be graphically shown as
Sol. 𝑙
Time period of a simple pendulum: T0 = 2𝜋√
𝑔
Magnetic field produced by the coil: B ∝ I

Effective acceleration of the bob: geff = g + kI (k is proportionality constant)
New time period of the simple pendulum:
1/2
𝑙 𝑙 𝑙 1 𝑙 𝑘 −1/2
T = 2𝜋√𝑔 = 2𝜋√g + kI = 2𝜋√𝑔 (( 𝑘 )) = 2𝜋√𝑔 (1 + 𝑔 𝐼)
𝑒𝑓𝑓 1+ 𝐼
𝑔
𝑘𝐼 𝑘𝐼 𝑘𝐼 𝑇0 𝑘
T = T0 (1 − 2𝑔) = T0 – T02𝑔  T – T0 = T02𝑔  T = 2𝑔
I  T ∝ I
38. Two coupled simple pendulums have nearly the same period. One of them is excited while the
other is at rest. Now energy keeps on transferring from one pendulum to the other alternately. This
periodic transfer of energy continues almost indefinitely with a time period of 10 s. Then the
difference of frequencies between the two pendulums is
a) zero b) 0.1 Hz c) 0.14 Hz d) infinite
Sol. As pendulums have nearly the same time period, they have a very small difference in frequency.
Time period of energy transfer between the pendulums: T = 10 sec
1 1
So, the difference in frequency: ∆𝑓 = 𝑇 = 10 = 0.1 Hz
39. A beam of 28 keV electrons strikes a target generating X rays. The minimum wavelength min
(called cut-off wavelength) of the X rays generated is
a) 4.4 nm b) 4 nm c) 0.044 nm d) 0.44 nm

Sol. Energy of the electron beam: 28 keV

hc = 1240 nm eV
ℎ𝑐 1240
Cut off wavelength of the x rays: min = 𝑒𝑉 = 28000 = 0.044 nm
A potentiometer is made using a resistance wire about 5 m long having a resistance of 8 /m. The
diagram shows the arrangement on a wooden board. The wire is turned round brass screws (P)
used as pegs giving 5 parallel segments 1.0 m each. The wire remains taut under moderate tension.
It is held in place by strips 3 mm thick marked as S and S1. The experimental circuit shows the
labeled electrical components. L is Leclanche cell (emf: e1 = 1.4 V) and D is Daniel cell
(emf: e2 = 1.08 V). Note that the answers obtained in any earlier question/s may be needed in
further questions and such answers should be used where ever needed.
40. It is required to decide the ratio (e1 / e2) by sum and difference method also. Four cells with
different values of emf E are available. One must use a cell of emf E equal to
a) 1.40 V b) 2.0 V c) 4.5 V d) 1.08 V
Sol. 𝑒 𝑙
Ratio of emfs : 𝑒1 = 𝑙1
2 2
𝑒 +𝑒 𝑙 𝑒 𝑙 +𝑙
Ratio of emfs by sum and difference method : 𝑒1 −𝑒2 = 𝑙1  𝑒1 = 𝑙1 −𝑙2
1 2 2 2 1 2
The emf of the cell used in the primary circuit should be greater than (e1 + e2)
E > (1.4 + 1.08)  E > 2.48 volt
41. The best material for strips marked S and S1 is
a) Plastic b) Aluminium c) Cast Iron d) Plated Brass
Sol. Brass is the best conducting material out of the available options.
As it offers minimum resistance, the readings will be close to actual values.
42. Assuming that due to stretching of wire while preparing the potentiometer, its resistance has
increased by 2 % and a potential gradient of 0.6 mV/mm is needed, then R must be
a) 13.5  b) 40.8  c) 20.4  d) 135 

Sol. Length of the potentiometer wire: L = 5 m

Resistance of the potentiometer wire: 5 x 8 = 40 
Final resistance of the potentiometer wire: 40 + 2 % (40) = 40.8 
𝐸
Current through the potentiometer wire: I =
𝑅+40.8
𝐼 𝑥 40.8 40.8 𝐸 40.8 4.5
Potential gradient: 𝐿
= 𝐿 𝑅+40.8
→ 0.6 = 5 𝑅+40.8
 R = 20.4 
43. It is claimed that the strips S and S1 serve two purposes

I. to decide the end points of the wire and II. To keep the wires in place, then
a) both I and II are important b) I is more important than II

c) II is more important than I d) both are equally important
Sol. When the end points of the wire are known accurately, the readings of the potentiometer will be
trustworthy. So, it is more important to decide the end points of the wire than to keep the wires in
place.
44. The length of wire between the adjoining pegs carries current
a) equal to that in the pot. wire b) equal to half the current in the pot. wire
c) nearly zero d) equal to zero
Sol. The coated brass strips carry almost zero resistance.

So, most of the current passes through the strips rather than the wire between the pegs.
Thus the current flowing through the wire between the pegs is nearly zero.
45. Two new and different cells having emf v1 and v2 have their balance points P1 and P2 respectively,
then
a) v1 > v2 b) v1 < v2 c) v1 = v2 d) insufficient data
Sol. Principle of potentiometer:

emf of the cell connected in secondary circuit of the potentiometer is directly proportional to the
balancing length of the potentiometer.
The balancing length is measured from that point where the positive terminal of the standard cell is
connected.
From the diagram, we can see that point P1 is closer to the starting point than the point P2
46. The emf under test contains an arrangement as connected in the circuit. It is observed that
wherever the jockey is touched to wire, the galvanometer shows full scale deflection only on one
side. The possible causes (considered one at a time) are
I. e is D and e1 is L II. E is L and e1 is D III. Key K is not inserted

IV. Value of R is much larger than that set as per Q. No. 42
V. value of R is very small.
a) I, II & III b) II, III & IV c) I, III & IV d) II, III & V

Sol. I. e is D and e1 is L
III. Key K is not inserted
IV. Value of R is much larger than that set as per Q. No. 42
47. If the jockey is touched at a point on the wire 1.0 cm away from the balance point, then the
galvanometer (G = 1 k) will show a current equal to
a) 2 A b) 4 A c) 6 A d) 8 A
Sol. Potential gradient across the wire: 0.6 mV/mm = 6 mV/cm

Potential difference across 1 cm length of the wire: 6 x 1 = 6 mV
Resistance of the galvanometer: 1 k
𝑣 6 𝑥 10−3
Current through the galvanometer: i = 𝐺 =
1 𝑥 10−3
= 6 x 10-6 = 6 A
A large number of pendulums with identical bobs (mass m) but varying lengths are suspended
from a thick thread. Another pendulum of heavier bob (mass M) is also suspended from the same
thread as shown.
This pendulum with the heavier bob is used as a driver to drive the other pendulums called driven
pendulums. Assume that the amplitude of the driver is maintained constant (by some suitable
mechanism). Let the frequency of the driver be fo
48. The time period (hence frequency f) and the amplitude A of the driven pendulums in steady state
are measured. The variation of A with f is correctly shown by the graph

Sol. As the frequency is changing, it is possible for the driven pendulums to attain resonance with the
driving pendulum at some point.
Under resonance, the amplitude of oscillation reaches maximum.
So the correct representation is (b).
49. It is observed that
a) All the pendulums except one are at rest
b) all the pendulums oscillate in phase with the driver
c) one of the pendulums oscillates with maximum amplitude
d) the pendulum with maximum amplitude oscillates in phase with the driver
Sol. The pendulum which is in resonance with the driving pendulum will oscillate with maximum
amplitude.
1 𝑔 1
Frequency of oscillation of a simple pendulum : f = 2𝜋 √ 𝑙  f ∝
√𝑙
One of the driven pendulums has length equal to that of driving pendulum.
So, this pendulum will be in resonance with the driving pendulum.
50. The frequency of the pendulum having maximum amplitude is
a) f0 / 2 b) f0 c) 2 f0 d) not related to f0
Sol. Frequency of the driver pendulum: f0 (given)

The driven pendulum having maximum amplitude is in resonance with the driving pendulum.
Resonance is achieved when the natural frequency of driven pendulum is equal to the frequency of
the driving pendulum.
So, the frequency of the pendulum having maximum amplitude is f0
51. The pendulum in Q. No. 50 is set into oscillation with amplitude of 10.0 cm. Soon this pendulum
comes to rest momentarily and the driver is seen to oscillate with amplitude of 8.16 cm. Then mass
M equal to
a) 1.5m b) 2m c) 2.5m d) 3m
Sol. Mass of the driving pendulum : M

Mass of the driven pendulum : m
Amplitude of oscillation of the driven pendulum : A = 10 cm
Amplitude of oscillation of the driving pendulum : a = 8.16 cm
When the driven pendulum stops oscillating, its energy is transferred to the driving pendulum.
1 1 𝐴2
Edriven = Edriving  2m2A2 = 2M2 a2  mA2 = Ma2  M = 𝑎2m = 1.5m

Now only one of the driven pendulums is oscillated. The driver and all other driven pendulums are
clamped.
52. A simple pendulum of length L has a period T. If length is changed by L, the change in period T
is proportional to
a) T b) T2 c) 𝟏 d) 1
𝑻 √𝑇
Sol. 𝐿
Initial time period of the simple pendulum : T = 2 √
𝑔
𝐿+∆𝐿 2𝜋
Final time period of the simple pendulum : T1 = 2  √ = (𝐿 + ∆𝐿)1/2
𝑔 √𝑔
2𝜋 ∆𝐿 1/2 𝐿 1 ∆𝐿 1 ∆𝐿 1 ∆𝐿
T1 = L1/2 (1 + ) = 2 √𝑔 (1 + 2 ) = T (1 + 2 ) =T+T2
√𝑔 𝐿 𝐿 𝐿 𝐿
1 ∆𝐿 ∆𝐿 𝑇 ∆𝐿 𝑇 4𝜋2 2𝜋2 ∆𝐿 1 𝟏
T1 – T = T 2 𝐿
 T = 2 𝐿
= 2 𝑇2𝑔
= 𝑔 𝑇
 T ∝ 𝑻
53. The variation of amplitude A with respect to time t is shown as
Sol. Ideal case: no damping: the amplitude remains constant. (third graph)
Practical case: damping is present: amplitude decreases exponentially.
Assuming the damping force is directly proportional to velocity of the bob.
𝑏𝑡
We can write the amplitude : A = A0 𝑒 −2𝑚
Here b is damping constant and m is mass of the pendulum bob.
So the correct option is (b)

54. Which of the following will give a straight line graph?
a) log A against t b) 1 c) A against t2 d) A2 against t

log A against 𝑡
𝑏𝑡
Sol.
Consider the damped oscillation : A = A0 𝑒 −2𝑚
𝑏
Apply ln on both sides : ln A = ln A0 - 2𝑚 t
The equation is in the form of y = - mx + c

This is a straight line with negative slope and positive y intercept. So the correct option is (a)
55. If v is the velocity of the bob, the force that is responsible for decrease of amplitude is proportional
to
a) v2 b) v c) 1 d) 1
𝑣 𝑣2
Sol. When the pendulum is oscillating in air, resistive force offered by air known as viscous drag.
The viscous drag acting on a spherical object is given by empirical relation.
Fv = 6vr  Fv ∝ v
Here : coefficient of viscosity (constant)
v : speed of the object
r : radius of the sphere
56. An object is placed 30 cm away from a symmetric convex lens and an image two thirds of the size
of the object is produced. The object is moved by a distance of 20 cm so as to get a magnified
image. Now we get
17
a) a real image of magnification 6
b) a virtual image of magnification 5
c) a real image at a distance of 40 cm d) a virtual image at a distance of 60 cm
2 2
Sol. Size of the image: 3 size of the object  v = 3 u
1 1 1 3 1 1 2𝑢 2 𝑥 30
Lens formula (real image): 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓  2𝑢 + 𝑢 = 𝑓  f = 5
= 5
= 12 cm
After moving the object by 20 cm, it is within the focus of the lens. So it forms a virtual image on
the same side as that of the object.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula (virtual image): − =  − + =  =  v= 60 cm
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 10 12 𝑣 60
57. A symmetric concave lens of focal length 24 cm is now placed in contact with the convex lens and
the object is brought back to its original position. The image formed will be
a) a real one with a magnification 4 b) a real one at a distance of 40 cm

c) a virtual one at a distance of 120 cm d) a virtual one with a magnification 2.5

Sol. Focal length of the convex lens: f1 = 12 cm

Focal length of the concave lens: f2 = 24 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Effective focal length of the combination: 𝐹 = 𝑓 + 𝑓  𝐹 = 12 − 24 = 24  F = 24 cm
1 2
Object distance: u = 30 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝐹  𝑣 + 30 = 24  𝑣 = 120  v = 120 cm
𝑣 120
Magnification: m = 𝑢 = =4
30
So, the image formed is real with a magnification of 4.
58. The concave lens is moved away from the object through a distance of 10 cm. We get an image
that is
a) virtual and at a distance of about 17 cm from the concave lens
b) real and at a distance of about 47 cm from the object
c) virtual, diminished and at a distance of 10 cm from the concave lens
d) real and at a distance of 57 cm from the object
1 1 1 1 1 1
Sol. For the convex lens : − =  + =  v = 20 cm (real image)
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 30 12
The real image formed by the convex lens acts as virtual object for concave lens.
1 1 1 1 1 1
For the concave lens : 𝑣 − =  - = −  v ≈ 17 cm (real image)
𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 10 24
So, the final image is at (30 + 10 + 17 = 57) cm from the object.
59. Now consider again the lenses to be in contact with each other but made of material of refractive
index 1.2. The system is immersed in a medium of refractive index  and it is found that the focal
length of the system remains numerically the same as when in air. Therefore,  is
a) < 1.2 b) 1.2 <  < 1.5 c) > 1.5 d) = 1.5

1
Sol. focal length of convex lens in air : 𝑓 = (1.2 – 1) k = 0.2k
1
1
Focal length of concave lens in air : = - (1.2 – 1) k1 = - 0.2k1
𝑓2
1 1 1
Effective focal length of the combination in air : 𝐹 = 𝑓 + 𝑓 = 0.2 (k – k1)
1 2
1 1.2
Focal length of convex lens in medium : = (𝜇 − 1) k
𝑓1𝑚
1 1.2
Focal length of concave lens in medium : 𝑓 = ( 𝜇 − 1) k1
2𝑚
1.2
Effective focal length of the combination in medium : ( 𝜇 − 1) (k – k1)
1.2 𝟏.𝟐
Given: 0.2 (k – k1) = - ( 𝜇 − 1) (k – k1)   = 𝟎.𝟖 = 1.5
60. 3
The given convex lens (refractive index 2) is made to rest on the surface of a lake such that its
4
upper surface is in air while the lower one is in water (refractive index ). Rays from the sun
3
overhead converge at a distance a inside water, while rays from a luminescent angler fish beneath
at the bottom of the lake converge at a distance b in air. Therefore
a) a = 12 cm, b = 12 cm b) a = 24 cm, b = 12 cm
c) a = 18 cm, b = 12 cm d) a = 24 cm, b = 18 cm
Sol. Since the two surfaces of the lens are in different media
(air and water) let us use refraction through curved surface:
Radius of curvature of the lens: R
1 2 1 2
= ( -1) 𝑅  12 = (1.5 – 1) 𝑅  R = 12 cm
𝑓
𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
a) For air-glass interface: − =
𝑣 𝑢 𝑅
1.5 1 1.5−1 1
−∞ = = 2𝑅  v = 3 x 12 = 36 cm
𝑣 𝑅
𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
For glass-water interface: 𝑣
− 𝑢
= 𝑅
4 3
4 3 − 4 1 1
3𝑣
− 2 𝑥 3𝑅 = 3𝑅 2  3𝑣 - 2𝑅 = − 6𝑅  v = 2R = 2 x 12 = 24 cm
𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
b) For water-glass interface: 𝑣
− 𝑢
= 𝑅
1.5 1.33 1.5 −1.33 1.5 1
𝑣
- ∞
= 12
 𝑣
= 72  v = 108 cm
𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
For glass-air interface: 𝑣
− 𝑢
= 𝑅
1 1.5 1−1.5 1 1 1 1
𝑣
− 108 = −12
 𝑣 = 72 + 24 = 18  v = 18 cm

61. Four point masses are placed in a plane so that their centre of mass is at (1,1). Three of them are of
mass m each and are placed at (0,0), (2,0) and (0,2) respectively. The fourth point of mass 2m is
displaced from its initial position such that centre of mass of the system moves to (2, 1). Then, the
displacement of the fourth point mass is
a) parallel to X axis b) inclined at an angle 450 with X axis

𝟓
c) of magnitude units d) of magnitude 5 units
𝟐
Sol. Initial position of the centre of mass: (1, 1)

Final position of the centre of mass: (2, 1)
Since the y co-ordinate remains same, the displacement of the fourth particle is along/parallel to
X axis.
𝑚 𝑥 0+𝑚 𝑥 2+𝑚 𝑥 0+2𝑚 𝑥 𝑥1
X co-ordinate of CM: initial: 5𝑚
= 1  𝑥1 = 1.5 units
𝑚 𝑥 0+𝑚 𝑥 2+𝑚 𝑥 0+2𝑚 𝑥 𝑥2
X co-ordinate of CM: final: 5𝑚
= 2  𝑥2 = 4 units
Shift in x co-ordinate of fourth particle: x2 – x1 = 4 – 1.5 = 2.5 units
62. A block A of mass 2 kg rests on a horizontal surface. Another block B of mass 1 kg moving at a
speed of 1 m/s when at a distance of 16 cm from A collides elastically with A. The coefficient of
friction between the horizontal surface and each of the blocks is 0.2
Then (g = 10 m/s2)
a) after collision block B rebounds b) after collision block B comes to rest

c) final separation between blocks is 3 cm d) final separation between blocks is 5 cm
Sol. Limiting friction between A and the surface: f = mg = 0.2 x 2 x 10 = 4 N

Speed of block B at the time of collision:
v2 – u2 = 2as  v2 – u2 = −2 g s  v2 = 1 – 2 x 0.2 x 10 x 0.16 = 0.36  v = 0.6 m/s
𝑚 −𝑚 1−2
a) Speed of block B after collision: vB = 𝑚𝐵 +𝑚𝐴 v = 1+2 x 0.6 = −𝟎. 𝟐 m/s
𝐵 𝐴
2𝑚𝐵 2𝑥1
d) Speed of block A after collision: vA = 𝑚𝐴 +𝑚𝐵
v=
2+1
x 0.6 = 0.4 m/s
𝑣𝐴 2
Distance moved by block A before coming to rest: sA = 2𝜇𝑔 = 4 cm
𝑣𝐵 2
Distance moved by block B before coming to rest: sB = 2𝜇𝑔 = 1 cm
Final separation between the blocks: sA + sB = 4 + 1 = 5 cm
63. A uniform disc of mass M and radius R is lifted using a string as shown in figure. Then
a) its linear acceleration is g upward

b) its linear acceleration is g downward
𝟐𝒈
c) its angular acceleration is 𝑹
d) its rate of change of angular momentum is MgR

𝑀𝑔 3𝑀𝑔
Sol. 𝐹𝑛𝑒𝑡 2
+
2
−𝑀𝑔
a) Linear acceleration: a = = =g
𝑀 𝑀
𝜏𝑛𝑒𝑡 𝑀𝑔𝑅 𝟐𝒈
c) Angular acceleration:  = 𝐼
= 𝑀 2 = 𝑹
𝑅
2
d) Rate of change in angular momentum: torque

3𝑀𝑔 𝑀𝑔
 = F r⊥ = 2
R- 2
R = MgR
64. Four thin straight long wires are all parallel to Z axis. They pass through the points A (3, 0, 0), B
(0, 3, 0), C (-3, 0, 0) and D (0, -3, 0). They all carry currents in 𝑘̂ direction of magnitudes 0.3 A,
0.6 A, 0.3 A and 0.3 A respectively. The magnitude of magnetic field at the origin O due to
a) wires at A and C is zero b) wires at A and B is 2√2 x 10-8 T

c) wires at A and D is 2√𝟐 x 10-8 T d) all wires is 2 x 10-8 T
Sol. From the dig: z axis is out of the paper.

𝜇𝑜 𝑖 𝜇𝑜 𝑖
a) Field due to wires A and C: B = - =0
2𝜋 3 2𝜋 3
𝜇𝑜 0.3
c) BA = BD = = 2 x 10-8 T
2𝜋 3
Field due to wires A and D: B = √𝐵𝐴 2 + 𝐵𝐷 2 = 2√𝟐 x 10-8 T
d) Fields due to A and C cancel each other. Fields due to B and

D are in opposite directions. So the resultant field :
𝜇𝑜 0.6−0.3
B= = 2 x 10-8 T
2𝜋 3
65. In a drip irrigation system, water flows at 0.4 m/s through a 25 mm diameter pipe. At each of the
plants in the field water is expected to be delivered at 0.02 m/s through a 2 mm opening. The drip
works for 2 hours a day. Then,
a) the system feeds 2250 plants b) a plant gets about 3.2 liter of water a day
c) the system feeds 3125 plants d) a plant gets about 1.8 liter of water a day
Sol. 𝐷2 𝑑2 𝐷2 𝑉 625 𝑥 0.4

Applying equation of continuity: AV = nav  𝜋 4
V=n𝜋 4
v  n = 𝑑2 𝑣 = 4 𝑥 0.02
= 3125
𝑑2
Volume flux at the plant: av = 𝜋 v = (3.14 x 4 x 10-6 x 0.02) / 4 = 62.8 x 10-6 lt/sec
4
Volume of water for each plant: volume flux x time = 62.8 x 10-6 x 2 x 3600 = 0.452 litre

66. Refer to the circuit given below. Output voltage Vo is measured between points a and b. Then,
a) the peak value of V0 is 2.5 V above the minimum if the diode is assumed to be ideal
b) the positive half cycle of the input is clipped
c) the circuit acts as a rectifier
d) the peak value V0 is about 3.2 V above the minimum if D is silicon diode (non-ideal)
Sol. The diode is reverse biased in the +ve half cycle.

The diode is forward biased in the –ve half cycle.
a) If the diode is ideal, if offers infinite resistance in reverse bias, thus the entire input
appears across the output. (2.5 V above the minimum)
c) Since the negative half cycle is clipped, the circuit acts as rectifier.
d) For a non-ideal silicon diode, threshold voltage is 0.7 V, so the output voltage will be
(0.7 + 2.5 = 3.2 V) above the minimum.
67. Two constant volume gas thermometers – one containing helium and the other containing oxygen
are used to measure the boiling point of liquid nitrogen. For calibrating the He thermometer first it
is dipped in boiling water and afterwards in boiling liquid nitrogen and the pressure was found to
change by a factor of 5. The process is repeated with oxygen thermometer. Then, which of the
following statement(s) is / are true?
a) according to He thermometer, liquid nitrogen boils at 74.6 K

b) oxygen gas thermometer also gives the same result
c) oxygen gas thermometer cannot be used in this situation
d) helium gas thermometer cannot give the linear variation of pressure with temperature
𝑃 𝑇 𝑃 𝑇
Sol. At constant volume : P ∝ T  𝑃1 = 𝑇1  5𝑃 = 373
𝑁
 TN = 74.6 K
2 2
Boiling point of oxygen : 90.19 K
So, oxygen gas thermometer cannot be used in this situation.
68. A hollow prism filled with hot water is used with usual arrangement to obtain a spectrum. The
water prism is set in minimum deviation position. As water cools down, it is observed that the
spectrum shifts so that deviation increases. Indicate the correct statement/s.
a) refractive index of water increases with decrease of temperature

b) refractive index of water increases with increase of temperature
c) speed of light decreases with decrease of temperature
d) speed of light increases with decrease of temperature

𝐴+𝐷
Sol. sin( )
Refractive index of a prism :  = 2
𝐴 here D is angle of minimum deviation
sin( )
2
Given: the spectrum shifts so that the deviation increases.
a) From the above formula as D increases,  also increases.
So, the refractive index of water increases with decrease in temperature.
𝑐 𝟏
c) Absolute refractive index:  =   ∝ (as refractive index increases, the speed of light
𝑣 𝒗
decreases)
69. A vertical narrow wire is illuminated with laser. Alternate dark and bright bands are formed on a
graph paper pasted on a distant wall. Indicate the correct statement/s.
a) making appropriate measurements, it is possible to determine the diameter of the wire

b) this phenomenon exhibits that light does not follow rectilinear paths
c) this is a case of Fraunhoffer diffraction
d) this is a case of interference of an infinitely large number of Huygens's secondary waves
leading to a diffraction pattern
Sol. The observation indicated in the question are due to diffraction of light. When an obstacle of
dimensions comparable to wavelength of light comes in the path of light, it bends around the
obstacle and travels forward.
During this process, the secondary wavelets interfere with each other to form a pattern of bright
(constructive) and dark (destructive) bands on a screen.
a) Condition for the formation of dark band : a sin  = m (here a is the dimensions of the
obstacle : diameter of the thread in this case)
b) Diffraction is a wave phenomenon. Diffraction pattern is observed on the screen when
light bends around an obstacle.
c) Diffraction can be studies in two ways:
1) Fraunhofer diffraction: The obstacle, the source and the screen are far away from each
other. Plane wave front approximation can be applied
2) Fresnel diffraction: The obstacle, the source and the screen are close to each other. Shape
of wave front depends on the type of source.
(spherical wave front for point source and cylindrical wave fronts for extended source)
d) Diffraction phenomenon inherently involves interference. Secondary wavelets from different

waves interfere with each other to form alternate bright and dark bands of varying intensity on the
screen.

70. Consider an element of a stretched string along which a wave travels. During its transverse
oscillatory motion, the element passes through a point at y = 0 and reaches its maximum at y = ym.
Then, the string element has its maximum
a) kinetic energy at y = ym b) elastic potential energy at y = ym

c) kinetic energy at y = 0 d) elastic potential energy at y = 0
Sol. Displacement of the elemental string: y = A sin (kx - t)

1 𝑑𝑦 2
Kinetic energy per unit volume: k = 2 ( )
𝑑𝑡
1
Kinetic energy per unit volume: k = 22A2 cos2 (kx - t)
1 1 1
k = 22A2 (1 – sin2 (kx - t)) = 22 (A2 – A2sin2 (kx - t)) = 22 (A2- y2)
𝟏
So, the kinetic energy becomes maximum at y = 0: kmax = 𝟐2A2
1 𝑑𝑦 2
Potential energy per unit volume: u = 2 v2 (𝑑𝑥 )
1 1 𝜔
u = v2k2A2 cos2 (kx - t) = 2A2 cos2 (kx - t) [v = ]
2 2 𝑘
The expression for PE per unit volume is same as that of KE per unit volume
1 1 1
u = 2A2 (1 – sin2 (kx - t)) = 2 (A2 – A2sin2 (kx - t)) = 2 (A2- y2)
2 2 2
𝟏
So, the potential energy becomes maximum at y = 0: umax= 2A2
𝟐
So, both potential and kinetic energies become maximum at mean position and zero at extreme
position.

Date of Examination: 22nd November, 2015
Time: 0930 to 1130 hrs
Q. Paper Code: P 136
Write the question paper code mentioned above on YOUR answer sheet (in the space
provided), otherwise your answer sheet will NOT be assessed.
Note that the same Q.P. Code appears on each page of the question paper.
Instructions to Candidates –
1. Use of mobile phones, smartphones, ipads during examination is STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
2. In addition to this question paper, you are given answer sheet along with Candidate’s copy.
3. On the answer sheet, make all the entries carefully in the space provided ONLY in BLOCK
CAPITALS as well as by properly darkening the appropriate bubbles.
Incomplete/incorrect/carelessly filled information may disqualify your candidature.
4. On the answer sheet, use only BLUE or BLACK BALL POINT PEN for making entries and
filling the bubbles.
5. Question paper has two parts. In part A1(Q. Nos. 1 to 60) each question has four
alternatives, out of which only one is correct. Choose the correct alternative and fill the
appropriate bubble, as shown.
Q. No. 22 a c d
In part A2 (Q. Nos. 61 to 70) each question has four alternatives out of which any number
of alternatives (1, 2, 3 or 4) may be correct. You have to choose ALL correct alternatives
and fill the appropriate bubbles, as shown.
Q. No. 64 a c
6. For Part A1, each correct answer gets 3 marks. A wrong one gets a penalty of 1 mark. Part
A2 full marks are 6 for each question, you get them when ALL correct answer are marked.
7. Any rough work should be done only in the space provided.
8. Use of non – programmable calculator is allowed.
9. No candidate should leave the examination hall before the completion of the examination.
10. After submitting your answerpaper, take away the Candidate’s copy for your reference.
Please DO NOT make any mark other than filling the appropriate bubbles
properly in the space provided on the answer sheet.
Answer sheets are evaluated using machine, hence CHANGE OF ENTRY IS NOT
ALLOWED.
Scratching or overwriting may result in a wrong score.
DO NOT WRITE ON THE BACK SIDE OF THE ANSWER SHEET.
FIITJEE Ltd., North West Delhi Centre, 31-32-33, Central Market, West Avenue Road, Punjabi Bagh (West), New Delhi - 110026, Ph: 011-45634000
Q. Paper Code: P 136
1. An expression containing certain physics quantities is 1273.43  51.7052  745   21 . After

evaluation the correct answer is:
(A) 41301.2208 (B) 4.1 10 4
(C) 41307 (D) 41000
2. A body of mass m and radius R rolling horizontally without slipping at a speed v climbs a
3v 2
ramp to a height . The rolling body can be
4g
(A) a sphere (B) a circular ring
(C) a spherical shell (D) a circular disc
3. A particle of mass 10 g starts from rest at t = 0 s from a point (0 m, 4 m) and gets

accelerated at 0.5 m/s2 along x  3y  4 3  0 in XY plane. The angular momentum of the
particle about the origin (in SI units) at t = 2 s is
(A) 0.01 3k (B) 0.02 3k
(C) zero (D) 20 3k
4. A body released from a height H hits elastically an inclined plane at a point P. After the
impact the body starts moving horizontally and hits the ground. The height at which point P
should be situated so as to have the total time of travel maximum is
(A) H (B) 2 H
H H
(C) (D)
4 2
5. A thin rod of length l in the shape of a semi circle is pivoted at one of its ends such that it is
free to oscillate in its own plane. The frequency f of small oscillations of the semicircular rod
is
(A)
1 g
(B)
1 g 2  4
(C)
1 g    2
(D)
1 g  1
2
 
2 21 2 2l 2 l 2 2l
6. Two air bubbles with radii r1 and r2 r2  r1  formed of the same liquid stick to each other to
form a common interface. Therefore, the radius of curvature of the common surface is
(A) r1 r2 (B) infinity
r2 2 2 r1 r2
(C) r2  r1 (D)
r1 r2  r1
7. A particle executes a periodic motion according to the relation x  4 cos2  50t  sin  500t  .
Therefore, the motion can be considered to be the superposition of n independent simple
harmonic motions, where n is
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 5
8. A car moving along a straight road at a speed of u m/s applies brakes at t = 0 second. The
ratio of distances travelled by the car during 3rd and 8th second is 15 : 13. The car covers a
distance of 0.25 m in the last second of its travel. Therefore, the acceleration a (in m/s2) and
the speed u (in m/s) of the car are respectively
(A) –0.1, 16 (B) –0.2, 12
(C) –0.5, 20 (D) –0.1, 16
FIITJEE Ltd., N-W Centre, 31, 32, 33, Central Market, West Avenue Road, Punjabi Bagh, New Delhi - 26, Ph: 011-45634000
9. Masses m1 and m2 are connected to a string passing over a
pulley as shown. Mass m1 starts from rest and falls through
a distance d in time t. Now, by interchanging the masses
the time required for m2 to fall through the same distance is
2 t. Therefore, the ratio of masses m1 : m2 is
2 3
(A) (B)
3 2
5 4
(C) (D)
2 3
10. The graph of specific heat of water (on Y axis) against temperature (on X axis) between 0o C
and 100o C
(A) is a straight line parallel to the temperature axis
 
(B) is a straight line passing through a point 15o C, 1 cal / g  o C and having a small positive
slope.
(C) has a minimum between 14.5o C and 15.5o C
(D) has a minimum at about 30o C
11. A particle diode (p – n junction) when forward biased in equivalent to

(A) a closed switch (B) a cell (potential difference)
(C) a small resistance (D) all the above in series
12. The circuit shown below is equivalent to

(A) OR gate
(B) NOR gate
(C) AND gate
(D) NAND gate
13. Which one of the following statements in connection with a semi conducting material is
NOT CORRECT?
(A) They have negative temperature coefficient of resistance
(B) They have a moderate forbidden energy gap.
(C) Current is carried by electrons and holes both.
(D) Every semi conducting material is a tetravalent element.
Group of Q. No. 14 to 21 is based on the following paragraph
Generally light emitted from a source contains several wavelengths. Similarly the electrical
voltage at the output of a sensor contains a mixture of dc and several ac components of
different amplitudes and different frequencies. Filter circuits are used to pass desired
frequencies and / or to eliminate undesired frequencies. The frequencies transmitted by the
filter form the pass band while the frequencies eliminated by the filter form the stop band or
rejection band.
We can think of four basic types of electrical filters – a low pass filter where frequencies
below a certain cutoff frequency  c are passed. Similarly one can think of a high pass filter,
band pass filter, band stop (or band rejection) filter. The cutoff frequency  c is the frequency
1
at which the output voltage falls to times its maximum value.
2
An inductor and/or a capacitor is an essential component of a filter. Generally a resistance is
included in a filter circuit to determine the time constant and hence the cutoff frequency.
14. Refer to the RC networks (1) and (2) shown below. Which of the following statements is true?
(A) Each of the two networks represents a low pass filter.

(B) Each of the two networks represents a high pass filter.
(C) Network (1) represents a low pass filter while network (2) a high pass filter.
(D) Network (1) represents a high pass filter while network (2) a low pass filter.
15. The input – output voltage relation for a certain high pass filter is given by
V0 CR

Vi 1  2C2R2
The cut off frequency   c  for this filter will be
1 2  1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2RC RC 2RC RC
16. The input – output voltage relation for a certain filter circuit is given by
V0 A

Vi
 
2
12  2  22
where  is the angular frequency of the input while 1 , A and  are constants. This relation
is meant for
(A) low pass filter (B) high pass filter
(C) band pass filter (D) band stop filter
17. Refer to the following schematic diagrams of different combinations of a low pass filter (LPF)
and a high pass filter (HPF). Assume f1  f2 . The combination that works as a band pass
filter is
(A) 
i (B) ii
(C) iii (D) iv
18. Refer to the schematic diagram in Q. No. (47). The combination that works as a band
elimination filter is
(A) 
i (B) ii
(C) iii (D) iv
19. An astrophysicist desires to study radiation at wavelengths higher than those for visible light
coming from a certain celestial body. He must use an optical filter that is
(A) high pass (B) low pass
(C) band pass (D) band rejection
20. Figure (A) below shows an acoustical filter that consists of a set of identical cavities
connected by narrow tubes and figure (B) shows its electrical analog. The acoustical filter
represented by figure (A) is
(A) low pass (B) high pass

(C) band pass (D) band rejection
21. Graphs I, II and III and IV shown below represent the frequency response of different types
of filter circuits. The correct order of these graphs corresponding to low pass, high pass band
pass and band top filter is
(A) I, II, III, IV (B) II, IV, III, I

(C) IV, II, III, I (D) IV, III, II, I
Group of Q. Nos. 22 to 30 is based on the following paragraph.
Equal volumes of two liquids (L1 and L2) are taken in two identical calorimeters. Both L1 and
L2 are initially at about 80oCC. Calorimeters are corked fitted with thermometers to record
the temperatures of the liquids. The temperatures are recorded every 30 s alternating
between the two liquids, that is the temperatures are recorded at an interval of 1 min for any
one liquid. The graphs of temperature  (oC) versus time t (min) for two liquids L1 and L2 are
as shown.
22. From the graphs it can be said that

(A) Newton’s law of cooling is not valid
(B) the specific heat of L2 is greater than that of L1
(C) the observation recorded are not consistent
(D) none of the above statements are correct
23. Equal volumes of the two liquids are necessary so that
(A) heat contents of the two liquids are equal
(B) the exposed surfaces are equal
(C) the calculations are simplified
(D) none of the above
24. The nature of the outer surfaces of the calorimeters

(A) should be blackened and rough
(B) should be silvered and rough
(C) should be silvered and polished / shining
(D) could be arbitrary
25. Which of the following arrangements would be the ideal environment for the
two calorimeters?
(A) A double walled box, both inner and outer space filled with water
(B) A double walled box with water in the inner box and empty outer box
(C) A double walled box with water in the outer box and empty inner box
(D)In air without any box.
26. The two curves will

(A) intersect at some later time
(B) merge after a long time
(C) remain separate at all times
(D) be parallel to the X axis but distinct after a long time
27. Given: mass of L1 = 50 g and mass of L2 = 62.5 g. If water equivalent of calorimeters is

s
assumed to be negligible, then 1 equals
s2
(A) 1.04 (B) 0.60
(C) 0.95 (D) 1.64
28. If 1 and 2 are the densities of L1 and L2 respectively then, identify the correct statement
(A) s1  s2 , 1   2 (B) s1  s2 , 1   2
(C) s1  s2 , 1   2 (D) s1  s2 , 1   2
29. If the experiment is carried out with equal masses of the two liquids, then
(A) L1 will cool faster
(B) L2 will cool faster
(C) both the liquids will cool at the same rate
(D) nothing can be said about the rates as data are insufficient
30. The entire experiment is repeated with other two liquids having nearly the same specific
heats. Then,
(A) the two curves will be coincident.
(B) the two curves will be parallel.
(C) the two curves will intersect at a point.
(D) nothing can be said about the two curves as data are insufficient.
31. When a light wave is incident at the interface between two media, the reflection coefficient is
 n  1
2
given by where n is the refractive index of the denser medium with respect to the
 n  1
2
rarer medium. Two stretched strings whose linear densities are 25 g/m and 9 g/m are
joined together. Assuming the law of optics holds goods here also, the reflection coefficient
for the pulse along the strings is
(A) 9/16 (B) 3/4 (C) 1/16 (D) 1/9
32. A certain perfect gas occupying 1 litre at 80 cm of Hg suddenly expands to 1190 cc while the
pressure falls to 60 cm of Hg. Therefore, the gas is
(A) polyatomic (B) diatomic
(C) monatomic (D) data inadequate
33. Two thin rods of lengths I1 and I2 at a certain temperature are joined to each other end to
end. The composite rod is then heated through a temperature . The coefficients of linear
expansion of the two rods are 1 and 2 respectively. Then, the effective coefficient of linear
expansion of the composite rod is
  2
(A) 1 (B) 1  2
2
I I  I I 
(C) 1 2 2 1 (D) 1 1 2 2
I1  I2 I1  I2
34. A yo-yo has a spool of mass m and radius R. A massless string is would around an axle of
radius b and of negligible mass. If the yo-yo released from rest has a downward acceleration
of g/9, the ratio R/b is
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 5
35. A pulley of negligible mass is suspended from a spring balance. Blocks weighing 5.0 kg and
3.0 kg are attached to the two end ends of a string passing over the pulley. The reading on
the spring balance will be
(A) 8.0 kg (B) 7.5 kg
(C) 2.0 kg (D) 4.0 kg
36. A uniform rod (ABCDAC) is bent in the shape of a kite as

shown. If a point X along AC is the centre of mass of the
structure, distance AX is
(A) 1.50m
(B) 1.08m
(C) 1.00m
(D) 1.10m
37. Two particles, each of mass m and charge q are attached at the ends of a light rod of length
2r. The rod is rotated at a constant angular speed  about an axis perpendicular to the rod
passing through its centre. The ratio of magnetic moment of the system to it angular
momentum
(A) q/m (B) q/2m
(C) 2q/m (D) q/4m
38. A jet of water of cross – sectional area A hits a plate normally with velocity v. The plate is
moving in the direction of the jet with velocity V. Therefore, the force exerted on the plate is
proportional to
(A) v (B) v2
(C) (v – V) (D) (v – V)2
39. A heavy cylindrical shaft (pile) of mall M is driven vertically through a distance s into the
ground by the blow of a pile – driver of mass m. The pile driver drops vertically through a
distance h into the head of the pile. The average resistance of the ground id
 m2 h   m2 h 
(A) g   2m (B) g   m  M 
M s    m  M s 
 M2 h   m2 h 
(C) g    m  M  (D) g   2  m  M 
m s    m  M s 
40. An optical fibre consists of a core (refractive index n1) surrounded by a cladding (refractive
index n2). A ray of light enters the fibre from air at and angle  with the fibre axis. The
maximum value of  for which the ray can propagate down the fibre is
n n
(A) sin1 1 (B) sin1 2
n2 n1
(C) sin1 n12  n22 (D) sin1 n12  n22
41. A wire ab of length 10 cm is fixed in the shape of

a sinusoidal curve as shown. The wire carries a

current of 1.2 A. In a uniform magnetic field B of
0.1 T, the wire experience a force whose magnitude
is
(A) 1.2 × 102N
(B) 4.8 × 103N
(C) zero
(D) insufficient data
42. A charge (2Q) is distributed uniformly on a spherical balloon of radius R. Another point
charge (+Q) is situated at the centre of the balloon. The balloon is now inflated to twice the
radius. Neglecting the elastic energy involved in the process, the change in total electric
energy of the system is
 Q2 Q2
(A) (B)
2 0 R 4  0 R
 Q2
(C) (D) zero
4  0 R
43. A rainbow is formed when a ray of sunlight passes through a spherical raindrop. Then the
total angle through which the ray deviates is (i and r denote the angles of incidence and of
refraction respectively)
(A) 2i – 4r (B)  + 2i – 4r
(C) 2(i – r) (D) 2( + i – 2r)
44. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source of frequency f and a voltage V.

At this frequency, reactance of the capacitor is 350 ohm while the resistance of the circuit is
180 ohm. Current in the circuit leads the voltage by 54° and power dissipated in the circuit is
140 watt. Therefore, voltage V is
(A) 250 volt (B) 260 volt
(C) 270 volt (D) 280 volt
45. A car has a rear view mirror of focal length 20 cm. A truck 2 m broad and 1.6 m in height is
overtaking the car with a relative speed of 15 km/hr. At the moment when the truck is 6 m
behind the car, the driver will see the image of the truck to be moving at a speed of
(A) 0.0043 m/s (B) 0.13 m/s
(C) 0.21 m/s (D) 4.17 m/s
46. In the circuit shown below the switch is closed at t = 0. For

0 < t < R (C1 + C2), the current I1 in the capacitor C1 in terms
of total current I is
C  C 
(A)  1  I (B)  2  I
 C2   C1 
 C1   C2 
(C)  I (D)  I
 C1  C2   C1  C2 
47. The earth is getting energy from the sum whose surface temperature is Ts and radius is R.
Let the radius of the earth be r and the distance from the sun be d. Assume the earth and
the sun both to behave as perfect black bodies and the earth is in thermal equilibrium at a
constant temperature Te. Therefore, the temperature Ts of the sun is xTe where x is
2d 2R 4d d
(A) (B) (C) (D)
R r r R
48. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double the mass as that
of an electron but the same charge. Apply Bohr theory to consider transitions of the
hypothetical particle to the ground state. Then, p the longest wavelength (in terms of
Rydberg constant for hydrogen atom) is
1 5 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2R 3R 3R 3R
49. The half life period of a radioactive element X is the same as the mean lifetime of another
radioactive element Y. Initially both of them have the same number of atoms. Then,
(A) X and Y have the same initial decay rate
(B) X and Y decay at the same rate always
(C) Y will decay at larger rate than X
(D) X will decay at larger rate than Y
50. A sodium atom emits a photon of wavelength 590 nm and recoils with velocity v equal to
(A) 0.029 m/s (B) 0.048 m/s
(C) 0.0023 m/s (D) data inadequate
51. Two coils wound ion the same magnetic core have inductances L1 and L2. When the two
coils are connected in series, the effective inductance is
(A) L1 + L2 (B) certainly greater than L1 + L2
(C) certainly less than L1 + L2 (D) none of the above
52. A particle of mass m and charge q moves along a diameter of a uniform spherical charge
distribution of radius R with total charge +Q. The angular frequency of the periodic motion
performed by the particle is
2 qQ 1 qQ 1 qQ 1 qQ
(A) (B) (C) (D)
0 mR 3
2 0 mR 3
0 mR 3
4 0 mR3
53. A spherical body of mass m1 moving with a speed u1 collides elastically with a lighter
spherical body of mass m2 initially at rest. The maximum angle through which the heavier
body gets deflected after collision depends upon
(A) m1 and u1 only (B) m2 and u1 only
(C) m1 and m2 only (D) m1, m2 and u1 all
54. A non-conducting spherical shell of radius R surrounds a point charge q. The electric flux
through a cap of the shell of half angle  is
2q q q  2  q
(A) (B) 1  cos   (C) (D)
0 2 0 4  0 2 0
55. In a Young’s double slit experiment the intensity at a point is I where the corresponding path
difference is one sixth of the wavelength of light used. If I0 denotes the maximum intensity,
I
the ratio is equal to
I0
1 1 3 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 2 2 4
56. A charge +q is placed at a distance of d from a point O. A conducting body surrounds point
O such that q remains outside. The electric field at O due to the induced charge is
(A) zero
1 q
(B) directed towards the charge q
4  0 d2
1 q
(C) directed away from the charge q
4  0 d2
(D) data insufficient
57. A coaxial cable consists of two thin cylindrical conducting shells of radii a and b (a < b). The
inductance per unit length of the cable is
 a  b  a  b  b
(A) 0 (B) 0 ln   (C) 0 ln   (D) 0 ln  
2 a 4  b  4  a  2  a 
58. Two coherent sources of light S1 and S2, equidistant from the
origin, are separated by a distance 2 as shown. They emit
light of wavelength . Interference is observed on a screen
placed along the circle of large radius R. Point P is seen to be
a point of constructive interference. Then, angle  (other than
0° and 90°) is
(A) 45°
(B) 30°
(C) 60°
(D) not possible in the first quadrant
59. If a current of 2 A passing through a certain electrolyte for t minutes librates 1 gram of
oxygen, then t is about
(A) 6000 (B) 100 (C) 50 (D) 25
60. A polarized light is incident on a Polaroid. Let I0 be the intensity of light transmitted by this
Polaroid. Now, a very large number (say N) of polaroids is placed in a row with their axes
displaced through a small angle  successively. If the last polarioid is crossed to the first one,
the intensity of light transmitted by the last Polaroid is about
l I
(A) zero (B) 0 (C) I0 (D) 0
2 N
61. Which of the following statement/s is/are correct in case of a resistance in a resistance box
used in a laboratory?
(A) The resistance is prepared using tungsten or nichrome wire
(B) The resistance is prepared using manganin wire
(C) Half of the length of the resistance wire is would clockwise and the remaining half
anticlockwise just to accommodate the whole length in a small space
(D) Half of the length of the resistance wire is wound clockwise and the remaining half
anticlockwise to make the inductive effect zero.
62. In a certain experiment density of the material of a small metallic cylindrical tube of a given
mass is to be determined. Its length is about 3 cm, outer diameter more than about 1 cm and
wall thickness about 2mm; the flat base being a little thicker than 2 mm. Which of the
following set/s of apparatus can be used to determine the volume of the tube accurately?
(A) Water and a measuring cylinder
(B) Water, a measuring cylinder and a micrometer screw gauge
(C) An overflow vessel, a measuring cylinder and water
(D) Only vernier callipers
63. An object and a screen are separated by a distance D. A convex lens of focal length f such
that 4f < D, is moved between the object and the screen to get two sharp images. If the two
positions of the lens are separated by a distance L, then
(A) L is equal to D D  4f 
(B) object distance in one position is numerically equal to image distance in the other
position
(C) the ratio of sizes of the two images is

D  L 
D  L 
D  L 
2
(D) the ratio of sizes of the two images is

D  L 
2
64. A transistor (pnp or npn) can be used as

(A) an amplifier (B) an oscillator
(C) a switch (D) a current source
65. Which of the following is/are the unit/s of magnetic field?

(A) tesla (B) Newton/ampere-meter
(C) weber/meter2 (D) volt-second/meter2
66. The inductance of a solenoid varies

(A) directly as the area of cross section
(B) directly as the square of the number of turns
(C) inversely as the length of the solenoid
(D) directly as the volume enclosed by the solenoid
67. Which of the following statement/s in case of a thermodynamic process is/are correct? (The
symbols carry their usual meaning
(A)  Eint =W indicates an adiabatic process (B)  Eint = Q suggests an isochoric process
(C)  Eint = 0 is true for a cyclic process (D)  Eint = – W indicates an adiabatic process
68. With a rise of temperature

(A) surface tension of water decreases (B) viscosity of water decreases
(C) viscosity of air decreases (D) viscosity of air increases
69. Which of the following statement/s are correct in case of a source of emf (such a primary
cell)?
(A) Inside the cell there always exist an electrostatic field and a non – electrostatic field of
equal magnitude directed opposite to it
(B) Potential difference is the work of an electrostatic field whereas electromotive force is the
work of a non –electrostatic field
(C) Under certain condition current can flow from positive terminal to negative terminal within
the cell
(D) When an external resistance is connected to the cell, the electrostatic field inside the cell
decreases in magnitude compared to the non – electrostatic field.
70. When photons each with energy 4.25 eV strike the surface of a metal A, the photoelectrons
given out have maximum kinetic energy TA and the corresponding de Broglie wave length is
A . When another metal surface B is irradiated with photons each with energy 4.70 eV, the
corresponding maximum kinetic energy TB is 1.50 eV less than TA. If the de Broglie wave
length B of these photoelectrons is twice that of A , then
(A) work function of metal A is 2.25 eV
(B) work function of metal A is 4.20 eV
(C) TA = 2.0 eV
(D) the radiation incident on metal A has a wavelength 292 nm.
PHYSICS 2015 ANSWER KEY
NSEP - 2015
P105 P136 P177 P198
Answer Answer Answer Answer
Q.No. Q.No Q.No Q.No
key key key key
1 B 1 B 1 B 1 B
2 D 2 D 2 D 2 D
3 B 3 B 3 B 3 B
4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D
5 B 5 B 5 B 5 B
6 D 6 D 6 D 6 D
7 B 7 B 7 B 7 B
8 C 8 C 8 C 8 C
9 B 9 B 9 B 9 B
10 D 10 D 10 D 10 D
11 C 11 D 11 B 11 D
12 C 12 B 12 D 12 D
13 D 13 D 13 B 13 C
14 C 14 D 14 C 14 B
15 B 15 A 15 A 15 D
16 B 16 C 16 C 16 B
17 B 17 B 17 A 17 D
18 D 18 deleted 18 D 18 C
19 B 19 B 19 C 19 B
20 D 20 A 20 A 20 A
21 D 21 C 21 D 21 C
NSEP - 2015
P105 P136 P177 P198
key key key key
22 D 22 D 22 B 22 C
23 C 23 B 23 D 23 D
24 B 24 D 24 D 24 C
25 D 25 D 25 A 25 B
26 B 26 B 26 C 26 B
27 D 27 D 27 B 27 B
28 C 28 B 28 deleted 28 D
29 B 29 D 29 B 29 B
30 A 30 D 30 A 30 D
31 B 31 C 31 C 31 D
32 D 32 C 32 D 32 B
33 B 33 D 33 B 33 D
34 C 34 C 34 D 34 D
35 A 35 B 35 D 35 A
36 C 36 B 36 B 36 C
37 A 37 B 37 D 37 B
38 D 38 D 38 B 38 deleted
39 C 39 B 39 D 39 B
40 A 40 D 40 D 40 A
41 D 41 B 41 C 41 C
42 B 42 D 42 C 42 D
NSEP - 2015
P105 P136 P177 P198
key key key key
43 D 43 B 43 D 43 B
44 D 44 C 44 C 44 D
45 A 45 A 45 B 45 D
46 C 46 C 46 B 46 B
47 B 47 A 47 B 47 D
48 deleted 48 D 48 D 48 B
49 B 49 C 49 B 49 D
50 A 50 A 50 D 50 D
51 C 51 D 51 D 51 B
52 D 52 D 52 D 52 D
53 B 53 C 53 C 53 B
54 D 54 B 54 B 54 C
55 D 55 D 55 D 55 A
56 B 56 B 56 B 56 C
57 D 57 D 57 D 57 A
58 B 58 C 58 C 58 D
59 D 59 B 59 B 59 C
60 D 60 A 60 A 60 A
61 ABCD 61 BD 61 ABCD 61 BD
62 ABC 62 BCD 62 ABC 62 BCD
63 BCD 63 ABD 63 BCD 63 ABD
NSEP - 2015
P105 P136 P177 P198
key key key key
64 ABD 64 ABCD 64 ABD 64 ABCD
65 BCD 65 ABCD 65 BCD 65 ABCD
66 BD 66 ABC 66 BD 66 ABC
67 BCD 67 BCD 67 BCD 67 BCD
68 ABD 68 ABD 68 ABD 68 ABD
69 ABCD 69 BCD 69 ABCD 69 BCD
70 ABCD 70 ABCD 70 ABCD 70 ABCD
All quires regarding the answer keys should be sent only to

iaptpune@gmail.com with in December 2nd 2015
1. An expression containing some physical quantities is (1273.43 – 51.7052 + 745) x 21

after evaluation, the correct answer is
a) 41301.2208 b) 4.1 x 104 c) 41307 d) 41000
Sol. Addition/subtraction is carried out in terms of no. of decimal places.

Procedure:
➢ Count the number of decimal places in all the numbers and note down the least value
(let it be n).
➢ Round off all the other numbers such that they contain n+1 decimal places.
➢ Carry out the algebraic operation, the final answer should contain n decimal places.
1273.430 – 51.705 = 1221.725
1221.7 + 745.0 = 1966.7
Multiplication/division is carried out in terms of no. of significant figures.
Rest of the procedure is same as above.
1.97 x 103 x 21 = 41.37 x 103 = 4.1 x 104
2. A body of mass m and radius R rolling horizontally without slipping at a speed v climbs a ramp to
3𝑣 2
a height 4𝑔
. The rolling body can be
a) a sphere b) a circular ring c) a spherical shell d) a circular disc
Sol. 1 𝐾2
Kinetic energy of the rolling body: kroll = 2 𝑚𝑣 2 (1 + 𝑅2 )
3𝑣 2
Potential energy of the body: U = mgh = mg 4𝑔
Conservation of mechanical energy: Ei = Ef  kroll = U
1 2 𝐾2 3𝑣 2 1 𝐾2 3 𝑲𝟐 𝟏
2
𝑚𝑣 (1 + 𝑅2
) = mg 4𝑔
 2 (1 + 𝑅2 ) = 4  𝑹𝟐 = 𝟐
3. A particle of mass 10 g starts from rest at t = 0 from a point (0, 4) and gets accelerated at 0.5 m/s2
along x - √3y + 4√3 = 0 in XY plane. The angular momentum of the particle about the origin
(in SI units) at t = 2 sec is
a) – 0.01 √3 𝑘̂ b) ̂
– 0.02 √𝟑 𝒌 c) zero d) – 20 √3 𝑘̂
Sol. Angular momentum: 𝐿̅ = m (𝑟̅ 𝑥 𝑣̅ )

Speed of the particle at t = 2 sec. : v = u + at  v = 0 + 0.5 x 2 = 1 m/s
Perpendicular distance of the line from origin:
𝑎𝑥1 +𝑏𝑦1 +𝑐 4√3
d= (x1 = 0, y1 = 0); d = = 2√3 m
√𝑎 2 +𝑏2 2
√12 +(√3)
̂
Angular momentum of the particle : mvr⊥ = 10 x 10-3 x 1 x 2 √3 = – 0.02 √𝟑 𝒌
Since the particle is moving in XY plane, L is along Z axis.

4. A body released from a height H hits elastically an inclined

plane at a point P. After the impact, the body starts moving
horizontally and hits the ground. The height at which point P
should be situated so as to have the total time of travel
maximum is
a) H b) 2H c) H/4 d) H/2
Sol. The body is freely falling up to point P. [ QUESTION DELETED]

2(𝐻−ℎ)
Time taken by the body to reach P : t1 = √ 𝑔
After striking P, the body acquires horizontal velocity.
So it is a horizontal projectile from point P.
2ℎ
Time taken by the body to reach ground : t2 =√ 𝑔
2(𝐻−ℎ) 2ℎ
Total time : T = t1 + t2 = √ 𝑔
+√𝑔
𝑑𝑇 𝐻
For time to be maximum/minimum : 𝑑ℎ = 0  h = 2
The second derivative should be negative for maximum.
𝑑2 𝑇 1 2 1 1
But in this case the second derivative 𝑑ℎ2 = 4 √𝑔 ((𝐻−ℎ)3/2 − ℎ3/2 ) comes out to be a +ve value.
5. A thin rod of length 𝑙 in the shape of a semi circle is pivoted at one of its ends such that it is free to
oscillate in its own plane. The frequency f of small oscillations of the semicircular rod is
a) 1 𝑔𝜋 b) c) 1 𝑔(𝜋+2) d) 1 𝑔(𝜋2 +1)

√𝒈√𝝅
𝟏 𝟐 +𝟒
2𝜋
√ 2𝑙 √ √
𝟐𝝅 𝟐𝒍 2𝜋 𝑙 2𝜋 2𝜋𝑙
Sol. 1 𝑚𝑔𝑑
The semicircular ring acts as physical pendulum : f = 2𝜋 √ 𝐼
I – moment of inertia about point of suspension O.
𝑙2
I = Io + mx2 = mR2 + mR2 = 2 mR2 = 2m 𝜋2
2𝑅 2 𝑅 𝑙
d = √𝑅 2 + 𝑥 2 = √𝑅 2 + ( 𝜋 ) = 𝜋 √𝜋 2 + 22 = 𝜋2 √𝜋 2 + 4
𝑙
1 𝑚𝑔𝑑 1 𝑚𝑔 2 √𝜋2 +4 𝟏 𝒈√𝝅𝟐 +𝟒
Frequency f : 2𝜋
√
𝐼
= 2𝜋
√ 𝜋
𝑙2
= 𝟐𝝅 √ 𝟐𝒍
2m 2
𝜋
6. Two air bubbles with radii r1 and r2 (r2 > r1) formed of the
same liquid stick to each other to form a common interface.
Therefore, the radius of curvature of the common surface is
𝑟2 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐
a) √𝑟1 𝑟2 b) infinity c)
𝑟1
√𝑟2 2 − 𝑟1 2 d)
𝒓𝟐 − 𝒓𝟏

Sol. Excess pressure in the first bubble : ∆P1 = 4𝑇 4𝑇 4𝑇

𝑟1
 P1 – Po = 𝑟1
 P1 = Po + 𝑟1
4𝑇 4𝑇 4𝑇
Excess pressure in the second bubble : P2 = 𝑟2
 P2 – Po = 𝑟2
 P2 = Po + 𝑟2
When the two bubbles stick to form an interface, Excess pressure at the interface :
4𝑇 4𝑇
P = P1 – P2 = Po + 𝑟1
- (Po + 𝑟2
)
4𝑇 1 1 1 1 1 𝒓 𝟏 𝒓𝟐
= 4T ( − )  = − r=
𝑟 𝑟1 𝑟2 𝑟 𝑟1 𝑟2 𝒓𝟐 −𝒓𝟏
7. A particle executes a periodic motion according to x = 4 cos2 (50t) sin (500t). The motion can be
considered to be the superposition of n independent SHMs where n is
a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5
Sol. Displacement of the particle : x = 4 cos2 (50t) sin (500t)

x = 4 sin (500t) (1+cos (100t)) / 2
x = 2 sin (500t) (1+cos (100t))
x = 2 sin 500t + 2 sin (500t) cos (100t)
x = 2 sin 500t + sin (500t+100t) + sin (500t-100t)
x = 2 sin 500t + sin (600t) + sin (400t)
Above equation contains three independent harmonic functions.
8. A car moving along a straight road at a speed of u m/s applies brakes at t = 0 sec. The ratio of
distances travelled by the car during 3rd and 8th seconds is 15 : 13. The car covers a distance of 0.25
m in the last second of its travel. Therefore, the acceleration a in m/s2 and the speed u in m/s of the
car respectively are
a) – 0.1, 16 b) – 0.2, 12 c) – 0.5, 20 d) – 0.1, 16
Sol. Speed of the car before applying brakes: u

Distance travelled in 3rd second: s3 = u – a (3 – 0.5) = u – 2.5a
Distance travelled in 8th second: s8 = u – a (8 – 0.5) = u – 7.5a
s3 u – 2.5a 15
Given: s8 = u – 7.5a
= 13  u = 40a
Time taken by the car to stop: v = u – at  0 = u – at  u = at  t = 40 sec.

Distance travelled in last second:
1 1
sn = u – a (n - 2)  0.25 = u – a (n - 2)  0.25 = 40a – a (40 – 0.5)  a = 0.5 m/s2
Initial speed of the particle: u = 40a = 40 x 0.5 = 20 m/s

9. Masses m1 and m2 are connected to a string passing over a pulley as shown. Mass m1 starts from
rest and falls through a distance d in time t. Now, by interchanging the masses the time required for
m2 to fall through the same distance is 2t. Therefore, the ratio of masses m1 : m2 is
a) 2/3 b) 3/2 c) 5/2 d) 4/3
Sol. 𝑚1 −𝑚2 sin 𝜃 𝑚1 −𝑚2 /2

Acceleration of the system : a1 = g ( 𝑚1 +𝑚2
) =g( 𝑚1 +𝑚2
)
1 1 𝑚1 −𝑚2 /2 2
Distance travelled : d = 𝑎t2 = g ( )t
2 2 𝑚1 +𝑚2
Acceleration of the system after interchanging the masses :

𝑚2 −𝑚1 sin 𝜃 𝑚2 −𝑚1 /2
a2 = g ( 𝑚1 +𝑚2
) =g( 𝑚1 +𝑚2
)
1 1 𝑚2 −𝑚1 /2
Distance travelled : d = 2 𝑎t2 = 2 g ( 𝑚1 +𝑚2
) 4t2
Equating both the equations: m1/m2 = 3/2
10. The graph of specific heat of water (on Y axis) against temperature (on X axis) between 0 0C and
100 0C
a) is a straight line parallel to the temperature axis

b) is a straight line passing through (15 0C, 1 cal/g 0C) and having a small +ve slope
c) has a minimum between 14.5 0C and 15.5 0C
d) has a minimum at about 30 0C
Sol.
11. When a light wave is incident at the interface between two media, the reflection coefficient is
(𝑛−1)2
given by (𝑛+1)2 where n is refractive index of the denser medium w.r.to rarer medium. Two
stretched strings whose linear densities are 25 g/m and 9 g/m are joined together. Assuming the
law of optics holds good here also, the reflection coefficient for the pulse along the string is
a) 9 b) 3 c) 𝟏 d) 1
4
16 𝟏𝟔 9

Sol. 𝑇
Speed of transverse wave in a string : v = √ (T is tension,  is linear density)
𝜇
𝑣 𝜇 25 5
Refractive index of denser medium w.r.to rarer medium : n = 𝑣𝑟 = √ 𝜇𝑑 = √ 9 = 3
𝑑 𝑟
5 2
(𝑛−1)2 ( −1) 𝟏
3
Reflection coefficient of the pulse : (𝑛+1)2 = 5 2 = 𝟏𝟔
( +1)
3
12. A certain perfect gas occupying 1 liter at 80 cm of Hg suddenly expands to 1190 cc while the
pressure falls to 60 cm of Hg. Therefore, the gas is
a) polyatomic b) diatomic c) monoatomic d) insufficient data
Sol. Sudden expansion : adiabatic process

Pressure – volume relation in adiabatic process : PV = constant
𝑃 𝑉 𝛾 80 1190 𝛾
P1V1 = P2V2  𝑃1 = ( 2 )  = ( )
2 𝑉 1 60 1000
4
3
= (1.19)𝛾  1.33 = (1.19)𝛾   = 1.66
So, the gas is mono atomic.
13. Two thin rods of lengths 𝑙1 and 𝑙2 at a certain temperature are joined to each other end to end. The
composite rod is then heated through a temperature . The coefficients of linear expansion of the
two rods are 1 and 2 respectively. Then, the effective coefficient of linear expansion of the
composite rod is
𝛼1 +𝛼2 𝑙1 𝛼2 + 𝑙2 𝛼1 𝒍𝟏 𝜶𝟏 + 𝒍𝟐 𝜶𝟐
a)
2
b) √𝛼1 𝛼2 c) d)
𝑙1 + 𝑙2 𝒍𝟏 + 𝒍𝟐
Sol. Increase in length of the first rod : l1 = 𝑙 1 t = 𝑙 1 

Increase in length of the second rod : l2 = 𝑙 2 t = 𝑙 2 
Total increase in length : l = l1 + l2 = 𝑙 11  + 𝑙 22  =  (1𝑙 1 + 2𝑙 2 )
𝟏𝒍𝟏 + 𝟐𝒍𝟐
 (𝑙1 + 𝑙2 ) =  (1𝑙 1 + 2𝑙 2) →  = 𝒍𝟏 +𝒍𝟐
14. A YO-YO has a spool of mass m and radius R. A massless string is wound around an axle of
radius b and of negligible mass. If the YO-YO released from rest has a downward acceleration of
g/9, the ratio R/b is
a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

𝑔 8
Sol. For translational motion : mg – T = ma  T = mg – m 9 = 9 mg
𝑚 𝑔
For rotational motion: = I  Tb = R2
2 9𝑏
𝑚𝑔 𝑅2 8 𝑚𝑔 𝑅2 𝑅2 𝑅
T= 2 9𝑏2
 9 mg = 2 9𝑏2
 𝑏2 = 16 𝑏 =4
15. A pulley of negligible mass is suspended from a spring balance. Blocks weighing 5 kg and 3 kg
are attached to the two ends of a string passing over the pulley. The reading on the spring balance
will be
a) 8 kg b) 7.5 kg c) 2 kg d) 4 kg
Sol. 2𝑚1 𝑚2 2𝑥5𝑥3 30

Tension in the string : T = g (𝑚 ) = g ( 5+3 ) =g
1 +𝑚2 8
30
Force on the spring : F = 2T = 2 x g 8 = 7.5 g
So, the reading of the spring balance: 7.5 kg
16. A uniform rod (ABCDAC) is bent in the shape of a kite as shown. If a point X along AC is the
centre of mass of the structure, distance AX is
a) 1.5 m b) 1.08 m c) 1m d) 1.1 m
Sol. Consider point A to be the origin and AC along X axis.

x co-ordinates of centre of mass of the components.
√3 3 1 7
AC: 1 m, AB & AD: 2
cos 30 = 4, BC & DC : 2 - 2 cos 60 = 4
3 7
𝑙𝐴𝐶 𝑥𝐴𝐶 +2𝑙𝐴𝐵 𝑥𝐴𝐵 +2𝑙𝐵𝐶 𝑥𝐵𝐶 2 𝑥 1 + 2√3 𝑥 +2 𝑥 1 𝑥
4 4
xcm = =
𝑙𝐴𝐶 +2𝑙𝐴𝐵 +2𝑙𝐵𝐶 2+2√3+2
𝟏𝟏+𝟑√𝟑
xcm = = 1.08 m
𝟖+𝟒√𝟑
17. Two particles each of mass m and charge q are attached at the ends of a light rod of length 2r. The
rod is rotated at a constant angular speed  about an axis perpendicular to the rod passing through
its centre. The ratio of magnetic moment of the system to its angular momentum is
a) 𝑞 b) 𝒒 c) 2𝑞 d) 𝑞
𝑚 𝟐𝒎 𝑚 4𝑚
Sol. Angular momentum of the particles : L = 2 x mr2

𝑞 𝑞
Magnetic moment of the particles: M = 2iA = 2 𝑇  r2 = 2 2𝜋   r2 = 𝑞r2
𝑀 𝑞𝑟 2  𝒒
Ratio of magnetic moment to angular momentum: 𝐿
= 2 x m𝑟2  = 𝟐𝒎
18. A jet of water of cross sectional area A hits a plate normally with velocity v. The plate is moving
in the direction of the jet with velocity V. Therefore, force exerted on the plate is proportional to
a) v b) v2 c) v–V d) (v – V)2

Sol. Force exerted by a water jet on stationary surface: F = Av2

Relative velocity of the jet w.r.to plate : v – V
Force exerted by water jet on the moving plate: F = A (v – V)2
19. A heavy cylindrical shaft (pile) of mass M is driven vertically through a distance ‘s’ into the
ground by the blow of a pile – driver of mass m . The pile driver drops vertically through a
distance h onto the head of the pile. The average resistance of the ground is
𝑚2 ℎ 𝒎𝟐 𝒉
a) 𝑔 [ + 2𝑚] b) 𝒈 [ + (𝒎 + 𝑴)]
𝑀 𝑠 (𝒎+𝑴) 𝒔
𝑀2 ℎ 𝑚2 ℎ
c) 𝑔 [ 𝑚 𝑠
+ (𝑚 + 𝑀)] d) 𝑔 [(𝑚+𝑀) 𝑠 + 2(𝑚 + 𝑀)]
Sol. Velocity of the pile driver as it hits the pile : v = √2𝑔ℎ

𝑚
Common velocity acquired by the system : mv = (M + m) V  V = v
𝑀+𝑚
Kinetic energy acquired by the system :
1 1 𝑚 2 1 𝑚2 𝑚2 𝑔ℎ
k = 2 (M + m) V2 = 2 (M + m) (𝑀+𝑚) v2 = 2 (2gh) =
𝑀+𝑚 𝑀+𝑚
Work energy theorem : wnet = k  wg + wr = k
𝑚2 𝑔ℎ 𝑚2 𝑔ℎ 𝒎𝟐 𝒉
(M + m)gs – Fr s = −  (M + m)gs + = Frs  Fr = 𝒈 [ + (𝒎 + 𝑴)]
𝑀+𝑚 𝑀+𝑚 (𝒎+𝑴) 𝒔
20. An optical fibre consists of a core (refractive index n1)

surrounded by a cladding (refractive index n2). A ray of light
enters the fibre from air at an angle  with the fibre axis. The
maximum value of  for which the ray can propagate down
the fiber is
a) 𝑛1 b)
sin−1 √
𝑛2 c) sin−1 √𝑛1 2 + 𝑛2 2 d) 𝒔𝒊𝒏−𝟏 √𝒏𝟏 𝟐 − 𝒏𝟐 𝟐
−1
sin √ 𝑛1
𝑛2
Sol. Apply Snell's law at air-fiber interface: 1 x sin  = n1 sin r = n1 sin (90 – c) = n1 cos c
𝑛
Apply Snell’s law at fiber-cladding interface: n1 x sin c = n2 sin 90 = n2  sin c = 𝑛2
1
𝑛 2 √𝑛 2 +𝑛 2
cos c = √1 − 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝑐 = √1 − (𝑛2 ) = 1𝑛 2
1 1
From the first equation: sin  = n1 cos c = n1( √𝑛1 2 − 𝑛2 2 )/ n1 = √𝑛1 2 − 𝑛2 2

 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧−𝟏 √𝒏𝟏 𝟐 − 𝒏𝟐 𝟐
21. Two coils wound on the same magnetic core have inductances L1 and L2. When the two coils are
connected in series, the effective inductance is
a) L1+L2 b) certainly greater than (L1+L2)

c) certainly less than (L1+L2) d) none of the above

Sol. Self-inductance of the first coil: L1

Self-inductance of the second coil: L2
Since the coils are wound on the same magnetic core, they will have mutual inductance: M
Total inductance of the arrangement: L = L1 + L2 ± 2M
If current in both the coils flows in same direction: L = L1 + L2 + 2M
If current in the coils flows in opposite directions: L = L1 + L2 − 2M
So, the effective inductance depends on the direction of current flow.
22. A particle of mass m and charge –q moves along a diameter of a uniform spherical charge
distribution of radius R with total charge +Q. The angular frequency of the periodic motion
performed by the particle is
a) b) c) d)
2𝜋 𝑞𝑄 1 𝑞𝑄 1 𝑞𝑄 𝟏 𝒒𝑸
√ √ √ √
𝜀𝑜 𝑚𝑅 3 2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑚𝑅 3 𝜀𝑜 𝑚𝑟 3 𝟒𝝅𝜺𝒐 𝒎𝑹𝟑
Sol. 𝑥3
Charge inside the sphere of radius x: Q
𝑅3
The force between –q and charge inside the sphere:
𝑥3
1 −𝑞 Q 𝑅3 1 −𝑞 𝑄 1 −𝑞 𝑄
F= 𝑥2
= 4𝜋𝜀 𝑅3
𝑥  ma = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑅3
𝑥
4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑜 𝑜
1 −𝑞 𝑄 𝟏 𝒒𝑸
a = 4𝜋𝜀 3𝑥  a ∝ −𝑥 (SHM) [a = - 2x]   = √𝟒𝝅𝜺 𝟑
𝑜 𝑚𝑅 𝒐 𝒎𝑹
24. A non-conducting spherical shell of radius R surrounds a point charge q. The electric flux through
a cap of the shell of half angle  is
2𝜋𝑞𝜃 𝒒 𝑞(2𝜃) 𝑞𝜃
a) b) (𝟏 − 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝜽) c) d)
𝟐𝜺𝒐
𝜀𝑜 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 2𝜋𝜀𝑜
𝑞
Sol. Flux through the entire surface of the sphere :  = 𝜀
𝑜
Relation between solid angle  and semi vertex angle  : = 2 (1 – cos )
Solid angle for the entire sphere: 4 steradian
 2p (1 – cos q) 𝑞 𝒒
Flux through the cap : 4𝑝  = = 𝟐𝜺 (𝟏 − 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝜽)
4𝑝 𝜀𝑜 𝒐

25. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity at a point is I where the corresponding path
difference is one sixth of the wavelength of light used. If Io denotes the maximum intensity, the
𝐼
ratio 𝐼 is equal to
𝑜
a) 1 b) 1 c) √3 d) 𝟑
4 2 2 𝟒
Sol. Resultant intensity at a given point on the screen in YDSE:

∆𝑥
I = Io cos2 (/2) = Io cos2 (𝜋 )

φ - phase difference between the waves

x – path difference between the waves
∆𝑥  𝜋 3 𝑰 𝟑
I = Io cos2 (𝜋 
) = Io cos2 (𝜋 6) = Io cos2 ( 6 ) = 4 Io  𝑰 = 𝟒
𝒐
26. A charge +q is placed at a distance of d from a point O. A conducting body surrounds point O such
that q remains outside. The electric field at O due to the induced charge is
𝟏 𝒒
a) zero b) 𝟒𝝅𝜺 directed towards charge q
𝒐 𝒅𝟐
1 𝑞
c) 4𝜋𝜀 directed away from charge q d) insufficient data
𝑜 𝑑2
Sol. Net electric field inside a conductor under electrostatic conditions is zero.
1 𝑞
Field at O due to point charge : E = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑑2
directed away from q (towards left)
𝑜
This field should be cancelled by induced charges so as to maintain zero field inside the conductor.
1 𝑞
Field at O due to induced charges : Ei = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑑2
directed towards q (right)
𝑜
27. A co-axial cable consists of two thin cylindrical conducting shells of radii a and b (a < b). The
inductance per unit length of the cable is
𝜇𝑜 (𝑎+𝑏) 𝜇𝑜 𝑎 𝜇𝑜 𝑏 𝝁𝒐 𝒃
a) b) ln c) ln d) 𝒍𝒏 𝒂
2𝜋 𝑎 4𝜋 𝑏 4𝜋 𝑎 𝟐𝝅
Sol. Consider 𝑙 length of the co-axial cable.

Consider an elemental cylinder of radius r, thickness dr.

𝜇 𝑖
Magnetic field : B = 2𝜋𝑜 𝑟
𝜇 𝑖
Flux through the given elemental cylinder : d = B dA = 2𝜋𝑜 𝑟 (𝑙 dr)
𝜇𝑜 𝑖𝑙 𝑏 1 𝜇𝑜 𝑖𝑙 𝑏
Total flux through the cable :  = ∫ 𝑑𝜑 = ∫ dr = ln ( )
2𝜋 𝑎 𝑟 2𝜋 𝑎
𝜑 𝜇𝑜 𝑙 𝑏
Inductance : L = 𝑖
= 2𝜋
ln (𝑎)
𝐿 𝝁 𝒃
Inductance per unit length : 𝑙 = 𝟐𝝅𝒐 𝒍𝒏 𝒂
28. Two coherent sources of light S1 and S2 equidistant from the origin are separated by a distance 2
as shown. They emit light of wavelength . Interference is observed on a screen placed along the
circle of large radius R. Point P is seen to be a point of constructive interference. Then the angle 
(other than 00 and 900) is
a) 450 b) 300 c) 600 d) not possible in first quadrant
Sol. Separation between the slits: d = 2

Path difference between the two waves:
x = d cos  = 2 cos 
For constructive superposition:
1
x = n  2 cos  = n  cos  = 2   = 600
29. If a current of 2 A passing through a certain electrolyte for t minutes liberates 1 g of oxygen, then t
is about
a) 6000 b) 100 c) 50 d) 25
Sol. [QUESTION DELETED]
30. A polarized light is incident on a polaroid. Let I0 be the intensity of light transmitted by this
polaroid. Now, a very large number (say N) of polaroids are placed in a row with their axes
displaced through a small angle  successively. If the last polaroid is crossed to the first one, the
intensity of light transmitted by the last polaroid is about
a) zero b) 𝐼𝑜 c) I0 d) 𝐼𝑜
2 𝑁
Sol. Intensity of light transmitted by first polaroid: I1 = I0

Intensity of light transmitted by the second polaroid:
I2 = I1 cos2  = I0 cos2  = I0 (1) = I0 [for small angles: cos  =1]
So, the intensity of light transmitted by the last polaroid is I0

31. A wire ab of length 10 cm is fixed in the shape of a sinusoidal curve as shown. The wire carries a
current of 1.2 A. In a uniform magnetic field 𝐵̅of 0.1 T, the wire experiences a force whose
magnitude is
a) 1.2 x 10-2 N b) 4.8 x 10-3 N c) zero d) insufficient data
Sol. Force acting on a current carrying conductor in a magnetic field:

FB = Bil sin
Force on the +ve part:
F1 = 0.1 x 1.2 x 2 x 10-2 x sin 90 = 2.4 x 10-3 N (down ward)
Force on the –ve part:
F2 = 0.1 x 1.2 x 2 x 10-2 x sin 90 = 2.4 x 10-3 N (down ward)
Total force on the wire: F = F1 + F2 = 2 x 2.4 x 10-3 = 4.8 x 10-3 N
32. A charge – 2Q is distributed uniformly on a spherical balloon of

radius R. Another point charge +Q is situated at the centre of the
balloon. The balloon is now inflated to twice the radius. Neglecting
the elastic energy involved in the process, the change in total electric
energy of the system is
a) −𝑄2 b) −𝑄2 c) +𝑄2 d) zero

2𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑅 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑅 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑅
Sol. Total Electrostatic energy of the system: initial

(−2𝑄)2 𝑄(−2𝑄) 𝑄2 𝑄2
E1 = self-energy + interaction energy = 8𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑅
+ 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑅
= 2𝜋𝜀 -
𝑅 2𝜋𝜀
=0
𝑜 𝑜𝑅
Total Electrostatic energy of the system: final
(−2𝑄)2 𝑄(−2𝑄) 𝑄2 𝑄2
E2 = self-energy + interaction energy = 8𝜋𝜀 +
2𝑅 4𝜋𝜀
= 4𝜋𝜀 - =0
𝑜 𝑜 2𝑅 𝑜 𝑅 4𝜋𝜀 𝑜𝑅
Change in electrostatic energy: zero
33. A rainbow is formed when a ray of sunlight passes through a spherical raindrop. Then the total
angle through which the ray deviates is (i and r denote the angles of incidence and of refraction
respectively)
a) 2i – 4r b)  + 2i – 4r c) 2(i – r) d) ( + I – 2r)
Sol. Refraction at A: angle of deviation: A = i – r

Total internal reflection at B : angle of deviation : B =  - 2r
Refraction at C: angle of deviation: C = i – r
Total deviation:  = A + B + C = i – r +  - 2r + i – r
 =  + 2i – 4r

34. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source of frequency f and a voltage V. At this
frequency, reactance of the capacitor is 350  while the resistance of the circuit is 180 . Current
in the circuit leads the voltage by 540 and power dissipated in the circuit is 140 W. Therefore,
voltage V is
a) 250 V b) 260 V c) 270 V d) 280 V

𝑅 𝑅
Sol. Power factor of the circuit: cos  = 𝑍  z = cos 𝜑
𝑉 𝑉2 𝑉2
Power dissipated in the circuit: P = VI cos  = V 𝑍 cos  = 𝑍
cos  = 𝑅
cos2 
√𝑃𝑅 √140 𝑥 180
V = cos 𝜑  V = cos 54
= 270 volt
35. A car has a rear view mirror of focal length 20 cm. A truck 2 m broad and 1.6 m in height is
overtaking the car with a relative speed of 15 kmph. At the moment when the truck is 6 m behind
the car, the car driver will see the image of the truck to be moving at a speed of
a) 0.0043 m/s b) 0.13 m/s c) 0.21 m/s d) 4.17 m/s

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6
Sol. Mirror formula: 𝑣 + 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑣 − 6 = 0.2  𝑣 = 0.2 + 6  v = 31 m
1 1 𝑣2
Differentiate the mirror formula w.r.to time: − 𝑣 2 dv − 𝑢2 𝑑𝑢 = 0  dv = − 𝑢2 du
36 5
dv = 961 𝑥 36 𝑥 (15 𝑥 18
) = 0.0043 m/s
36. In the circuit shown below, the switch is closed at t = 0. For 0 < t < R (C1 + C2), the current I1 in
the capacitor C1 in terms of total current I is
a) 𝐶 b) 𝐶 c) 𝑪𝟏 d) 𝐶2
(𝐶1 ) I (𝐶2 ) I (𝑪 )I (𝐶 )I
2 1 𝟐 +𝑪𝟏 2 +𝐶1
Sol. Since the capacitors are in parallel, pd across them is same.

𝑞 𝑞 𝐼 𝐼 𝑑𝑞
V1 = V2  𝐶1 = 𝐶2  𝐶1 = 𝐶2 here I = 𝑑𝑡
1 2 1 2
Kirchhoff’s current law: I = I1 + I2  I2 = I - I1

𝐶 𝐶 𝐶 𝐶
I1 = 𝐶1 𝐼2 = 𝐶1 (I – I1) = 𝐶1 I - 𝐶1 I1
2 2 2 2
𝐶1 𝐶1 𝑪𝟏
I1 (1 + ) = I  I1 = ( ) I
𝐶2 𝐶2 𝑪𝟐 +𝑪𝟏
37. The earth is getting energy from the sun whose surface temperature is Ts and radius R. Let the
radius of the earth be r and the distance from the sun be d. Assume the earth and the sun both to
behave as perfect black bodies and earth is in thermal equilibrium at a constant temperature Te.
Therefore, the temperature Ts of the sun is xTe where x is
a) 𝟐𝒅 b) 2𝑅 c) 4𝑑 d) 𝑑
√ √ √
𝑹 𝑟 𝑟 𝑅

Sol. Since the earth is in thermal equilibrium, power received = power radiated
power radiated : ATe4 =  4r2 Te4
𝑝𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑃 𝜎4𝜋𝑅2 𝑇𝑠 4 𝜎𝑅2 𝑇𝑠 4
Intensity of solar radiation: I =
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎
= 4𝜋𝑑 2
= 4𝜋𝑑 2
= 𝑑2
𝜎𝑅2 𝑇𝑠 4
Power received by the earth: I A = 𝑑2 r 2
𝜎𝑅2 𝑇𝑠 4
For thermal equilibrium:  4r2 Te4 = r2
𝑑2
1
𝑑2 4 𝟐𝒅
Ts = Te (4 𝑅2 ) = Te √ 𝑹
38. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double the mass as that of an
electron but the same charge. Apply Bohr theory to consider transitions of the hypothetical particle
to the ground state. Then the longest wavelength (in terms of Rydberg Constant for hydrogen
atom) is
a) 1 b) 5 c) 1 d) 𝟐
2𝑅 3𝑅 3𝑅 𝟑𝑹
Sol. Longest wavelength is obtained when the electron jumps from 2 to 1.

1 1 1 1 1 3

= R (𝑛 2 − 𝑛 2 ) = R (1 − 4) = R 4
𝑖 𝑓
𝑚𝑒 𝑒 4
Expression for Rydberg constant: R = 8𝜀 2 3  R ∝ me
𝑜 ℎ 𝐶
As the hypothetical particle is double the mass of electron, Rydberg constant is doubled.
1 3 3𝑅 𝟐

= 4 2R = 2
  = 𝟑𝑹
39. The half-life period of a radioactive element X is the same as the mean life of another radioactive
element Y. Initially both of them have the same number of atoms. Then,
a) X and Y have the same initial decay rate b) X and Y decay at same rate always
c) Y will decay at larger rate than X d) X will decay at larger rate than Y
Sol. 0.693
Half-life of a radioactive element: T = 𝑥
1
Mean life of a radioactive element:  = 
𝑦
Initially both the materials have same number of atoms: Nox = Noy
0.693 1 
Given: T =   𝑥
=   𝑥 = 0.693  𝑥 = 0.693 𝑦
𝑦 𝑦
Rate of decay R = N  R ∝ N
So, Y will decay at larger rate than X.
40. A sodium atom emits a photon of wavelength 590 nm and recoils with velocity v equal to
a) 0.029 m/s b) 0.048 m/s c) 0.0023 m/s d) insufficient data

Sol. Momentum of the photon emitted by the sodium atom:

ℎ 6.63 𝑥 10−34
P== 590 𝑥 10−9
= 1.12 x 10-27
23 𝑥 10−3
Mass of sodium atom: m = 23 g/mole = = 3.81 x 10-26 kg
6.023 𝑥 1023
Momentum of sodium atom: mv = 3.81 x 10-26 v
Conservation of momentum: P = mv
𝟎.𝟏𝟏𝟐
1.12 x 10-27 = 3.81 x 10-26 v  v = = 0.029 m/s
𝟑.𝟖𝟏
41. A practical diode (p-n junction) when forward biased is equivalent to
a) a closed switch b) a cell c) a small resistance d) all the above in series
Sol. An ideal diode offers zero resistance in forward bias and infinite resistance in reverse bias
A practical diode offers minimum resistance in forward bias & maximum resistance in reverse bias
In forward bias, majority charge carriers move from either side giving maximum current
(closed switch)
The potential barrier at the junction of the diode acts as a cell
42. The circuit shown below is equivalent to
a) OR gate b) NOR gate

c) AND gate d) NAND gate
Sol. The switch provides a zero resistance path. The two switches are connected in parallel to the bulb.
When either switch is closed, the current will flow through the closed switch.
So the bulb will glow only when both the switches are open.
For digital logic: closed switch: 1 and open switch: 0
When both the inputs are 0, output is 1. In all other cases, the output is 0
So, the circuit represents NOR gate.
43. Which one of the following statements in connection with a semiconducting material is not true?
a) they have negative temperature coefficient of resistance

b) they have moderate forbidden energy gap
c) current is carried by electrons and holes both
d) every semiconducting material is a tetravalent element
Sol. a) Semiconductors have –ve temperature coefficient of resistance : their resistance decreases
with increase in temperature
b) Forbidden gap for semi-conductors is less than that of insulators and more than that of
conductors.
c) Two type of charge carriers : electrons and holes (valence band)
d) Silicon and Germanium are tetravalent atoms. There are other semiconducting materials.
(elemental and compound semi-conductors)

Generally light emitted from a source contains several wavelengths. Similarly the electrical voltage
at the output of a sensor contains a mixture of dc and several ac components of different
amplitudes and different frequencies. Filter circuits are used to pass desired frequencies and /or to
eliminate undesired frequencies. The frequencies transmitted by the filter form the pass band while
the frequencies eliminated by the filter form the stop band or rejection band.
We can think of four basic types of electrical filters – a low pass filter where frequencies below a
certain cut-off frequency fc are passed. Similarly one can think of a high pass filter, band pass
filter, band stop (or band rejection) filter. The cut-off frequency fc is the frequency at which the
1
output voltage falls to times its maximum value.
√2
An inductor and / or a capacitor are essential components of a filter. Generally a resistance is

included in a filter circuit to determine the time constant and hence cut-off frequency
44. Refer to the RC networks 1 and 2 shown below. Which of the following statements is true?
a) each of the two networks represents a low pass filter
b) each of the two networks represents a high pass filter
c) network 1 represents a low pass filter while network 2 a high pass filter
d) network 1 represents a high pass filter while network 2 a low pass filter
Sol. High pass filter: allows high frequency signals and blocks low frequency signals.
Low pass filter: allows low frequency signals and blocks high frequency signals.
1
Reactance of the capacitor : Xc = 2𝜋𝑓𝑐
(inversely proportional to frequency of the supply)
𝑉 𝜔𝐶𝑅
45. The input-output voltage relation for a certain high pass filter is given by 𝑉𝑜 = the cut
𝑖 √1+𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅 2
off frequency fc for this filter will be
a) 𝟏 b) √2 c) 𝜋 d) 1
𝟐𝝅𝑹𝑪 𝜋𝑅𝐶 2𝑅𝐶 𝑅𝐶
Sol. 𝑅 𝑅
Output voltage : v0 = vi = 2
vi
√𝑅 2 +𝑋𝑐 2 √𝑅2 +( 1 )
𝜔𝑐
𝜔𝐶𝑅 𝑉 𝜔𝐶𝑅
v0 = vi  𝑉𝑜 =
√1+𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅2 𝑖 √1+𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅2

1 𝑣 2 1 2 1
At cut-off frequency: v0 = vi  ( 𝑣𝑜 ) = ( 2) = 2
√2 𝑖 √
1 (𝜔𝐶𝑅)2
2
= 1+𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅2  1 + 𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅2 = 2(𝜔𝐶𝑅)2
1 1
𝜔2 𝐶 2 𝑅2 = 1   = 𝑅𝐶  f = 𝟐𝝅𝑹𝑪
46. 𝑉𝑜 𝜔𝛽𝐴
The input-output voltage relation for a certain circuit is given by =
𝑉𝑖 √(𝜔1 2 −2 )2 𝛽2 +𝜔2 𝛽 2
where  is the angular frequency of the input while 1, A and  are constants. This relation is
meant for
a) low pass filter b) high pass filter c) band pass filter d) band stop filter
Sol. 𝑉 𝜔𝛽𝐴 𝜔𝛽𝐴 1 𝐴

Given : 𝑉𝑜 = = =
𝑖 √(𝜔1 2 −2 )2 𝛽 2 +𝜔2 𝛽 2 𝜔𝛽 𝜔2 𝜔2
√( 21 −1)+1 √( 21 −1)+1
𝜔 𝜔
The output V0 becomes maximum when  = 1

On either side of 1, the output decreases, indicating that the expression represents a band pass
filter.
47. Refer to the following schematic diagrams of different combinations of a low pass filter (LPF) and
a high pass filter (HPF). Assume f1 < f2 The combination that works as a band pass filter is
a) i b) ii c) iii d) iv
Sol.
Band pass filter allows certain range (band) of frequencies.

A series combination of LPF and HPF can be used as band pass filter.
Consider the second circuit: LPF allows all frequencies below f2
HPF allows all frequencies above f1
Effectively, the circuit allows frequencies between f1 and f2: f2 – f1.

48. Refer to the schematic diagrams (Q.No. 47) of different combinations of a low pass filter (LPF)
and a high pass filter (HPF). Assume f1 < f2 The combination that works as a band elimination
filter is
a) i b) ii c) iii d) iv
Sol. Band elimination (band rejection) filter allows frequencies that are on either side of a band.
A parallel combination of LPF and HPF acts as band rejection filter
Consider the third circuit: LPF allows all the frequencies below f1
HPF allows all the frequencies above f2
Effectively the circuit allows frequencies below f1 and above f2 and middle frequencies are
rejected.
49. An astrophysicist desires to study radiation at wavelengths higher than those for visible light
coming from a certain celestial body. He must use an optical filter that is
a) high pass b) low pass c) band pass d) band rejection
Sol. Speed of electromagnetic radiation: c = wavelength () x frequency (f)

1
Since speed is constant: wavelength () ∝
frequency (f)
The astrophysicist desires to study radiation at wavelengths higher than those for visible light.
So, the frequency should be less than that of visible radiation.
So, he should be using a low pass filter which allows frequencies less than certain cut-off
frequency.
50. Figure A below shows an acoustical filter that consists of a set of identical cavities connected by
narrow tubes and fig. B shows its electrical analog. The acoustical filter represented by figure A is
a) low pass b) high pass c) band pass d) band rejection

Sol.
1 1
Inductive reactance: XL = L = 2fL and Capacitive reactance: XC = =
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶
Inductor allows low frequency signals and Capacitor allows high frequency signals.
So, only low frequency signals are allowed to appear across the output.
So, the given circuit acts as low pass filter.

51. Graphs I, II, III and IV shown below represent the frequency response of different types of filter
circuits. The correct order of these graphs corresponding to low pass, high pass, band pass and
band stop filter is
a) I, II, III, IV b) II, IV, III, I c) IV, II, III, I d) IV, III, II, I
Sol. Low pass filter: IV, High pass filter: II, Band pass filter: III, Band stop filter: I
Equal volumes of two liquids (L1 and L2) are taken in

two identical calorimeters. Both L1 and L2 are initially at
about 80 0C. Calorimeters are corked, fitted with
thermometers to record the temperatures of the liquids.
The temperatures are recorded every 30 sec alternating
between the two liquids, that is the temperatures are
recorded at an interval of 1 min for any one liquid. The
graphs of temperature  0C versus time t (min) for two
liquids L1 and L2 are as shown.
52. From the graphs it can be said that
a) Newton’s law of cooling is not valid b) specific heat of L2 is greater than that of L1
c) the observations recorded are not consistent d) none of the above statements is correct
Sol. Newton’s law of cooling: 𝜃 = 𝜃0 + C e-kt here C and k are constants.

So the graph of temperature (𝜃) vs time (t) is an exponential decay curve.
𝑑𝜃
Newton’s law of cooling: 𝑑𝑡
= −𝑘(𝜃 − 𝜃0 )
1
For a given temperature difference, rate of cooling depends on k: k ∝ 𝑚𝑠
𝑘 1.9 𝑚 𝑠 1.9
from the graph: 𝑘1 = 2.5  𝑚2 𝑠2 = 2.5
2 1 1
so, without knowing the masses, we cannot determine the relation between s1 and s2
53. Equal volumes of the two liquids are necessary so that
a) heat contents of the two liquids are equal b) the exposed surfaces are equal
c) the calculations are simplified d) none of the above
Sol. The two calorimeters are identical. If the volume of the liquids is same, it offers equal surface area
for both the liquids.

54. The nature of outer surfaces of the calorimeters
a) Should be blackened and rough b) should be silvered and rough

c) should be silvered and polished d) could be arbitrary
Sol. The outer surface of the calorimeter should be silvered and polished to prevent loss of heat by
radiation.
55. Which of the following arrangements would be the ideal environment for the two calorimeters?
a) a double walled box, both inner and outer space filled with water
b) a double walled box with water in the inner box and empty outer box
c) a double walled box with water in the outer box and empty inner box
d) in air without any box
Sol. A double walled box with water in the outer box and empty
inner box is the ideal environment for the calorimeters. This
arrangement maintains constant temperature for the
surroundings.
Since the specific heat capacity of water is large

(4200 J/kg K), its temperature remains same throughout the
experiment. So 0 is maintained constant.
56. The two curves will
a) Intersect at some later time b) merge after a long time

c) remain separate at all times d) be parallel to X axis but distinct after a long time
Sol. The two liquids will attain same temperature (room temperature) after a long time. So the two
curves will merge after a long time
57. Given: mass of L1 = 50 g and mass of L2 = 62.5 g. If water equivalent of calorimeters is assumed
𝑠
to be negligible, then 𝑠1 equals
2
a) 1.04 b) 0.60 c) 0.95 d) 1.64
𝜃1 −𝜃2 𝜃1 +𝜃2
Sol. Newton’s law of cooling: 𝑡
=k( 2
− 𝜃0 )
𝜃1 −𝜃2 𝜃1 +𝜃2 𝜃1 −𝜃2 𝜃1 +𝜃2
2.5
= 𝑘1 ( 2
− 𝜃0 ) for L1 and 1.9
= 𝑘2 ( 2
− 𝜃0 ) for L2
𝑘1 1.9
Take the ratio of the two expressions: =
𝑘2 2.5
1
The proportionality constant: k ∝ 𝑚𝑠
𝑘1 𝑚 𝑠 62.5 𝑥 𝑠2 𝑠 2.5 62.5
𝑘2
= 𝑚2 𝑠2 = 50 𝑥 𝑠1
 𝑠1 = 1.9 x 50
= 1.64
1 1 2

58. If 1 and 2 are the densities of L1 and L2 respectively, then identify the correct statement
a) s1 > s2 and 1 > 2 b) s1 > s2 and 1 < 2

c) s1 < s2 and 1 > 2 d) s1 < s2 and 1 < 2
Sol. 𝑚2 𝑠2 1.9
From the previous question, we can write: =
𝑚1 𝑠1 2.5
𝑚2 𝑠2 𝑣𝜌 𝑠 𝜌 𝑠 1.9 1.9
𝑚1 𝑠1
= 𝑣𝜌2 𝑠2  𝜌2 = 𝑠1 x 2.5 = 1.64 x 2.5 = 1.24  1 < 2
1 1 1 2
59. If the experiment is carried out with equal masses of the two liquids, then
a) L1 will cool faster b) L2 will cool faster

c) both the liquids will cool at the same rate d) insufficient data
𝑑𝜃
Sol. Newton’s law of cooling : 𝑑𝑡
= −𝑘(𝜃 − 𝜃0 )
1
For a given temperature difference, rate of cooling depends on k: k ∝
𝑚𝑠
1
Given: mass of the two liquids is equal, So k ∝ 𝑠
s1 > s2 (from question no. 57) so k1 < k2 (L2 will cool faster)
60. The entire experiment is repeated with other two liquids having nearly same specific heats. Then
a) the two curves will be coincident b) the two curves will be parallel
c) the two curves will intersect at a point d) insufficient data
𝑑𝜃
Sol. Newton’s law of cooling: 𝑑𝑡
= −𝑘(𝜃 − 𝜃0 )
1
For a given temperature difference, rate of cooling depends on k and k ∝ 𝑚𝑠
Given: the two liquids have nearly same specific heats. Their densities will also be almost same.
Since equal volume of the two liquids is taken, the masses are going to be same.
So, k is same for both the liquids.
61. Which of the following is/are the unit(s) of magnetic field?
a) tesla b) newton / ampere-meter c) weber / m2 d) Volt-sec / m2
Sol. Magnetic field induction : the force acting per unit pole strength (B = F/m)
Magnetic field induction : magnetic flux per unit normal area (B = /A)
Option b : from first definition of magnetic field
Option c : from the second definition
Option a : weber/m2 is also taken as tesla (T) in the honor of Nikola Tesla
Option d : can be verified from dimensional analysis

62. The inductance of a solenoid varies
a) Directly as the area of cross section b) directly as the square of no. of turns
c) inversely as the length of solenoid d) directly as the volume enclosed by solenoid
Sol. 𝜇𝑜 𝑁2 𝑆
Self-inductance of a solenoid: L = 𝑙
= 𝜇𝑜 n2V
N is total no. of turns in the solenoid

S is area of cross section,
𝑙 is length of solenoid
n is no. of turns per unit length of the solenoid
V is volume enclosed by the solenoid
63. Which of the following statement(s) in case of a thermodynamic process is/are correct?
a) Eint = W indicates an adiabatic process b) Eint = Q indicates an isochoric process

c) Eint = 0 indicates a cyclic process d) Eint = − W indicates an adiabatic process
Sol. First law of thermodynamic: Q = Eint + W

Q – heat energy supplied to / removed from the system
W – work done by/on the system
Eint – change in internal energy of the system
Adiabatic process: Q = 0  Eint = - W
Isochoric process: V = 0  W = 0  Eint = Q
Cyclic process: Eint = 0 (internal energy is a state function)
64. With a rise of temperature
a) Surface tension of water decreases b) viscosity of water decreases

c) viscosity of air decreases d) viscosity of air increases
Sol. a) Surface tension is due to molecular (cohesive) forces of attraction. With increase in
temperature, these forces weaken thus reducing the surface tension.
b) Viscosity of liquids is also due to cohesive forces acting between different layers of liquid
as it is flowing. With increase in temperature, these forces weaken thus reducing the
viscosity
c) Viscosity of gases is due to transfer of momentum between gas molecules. With increase
in temperature, the speed of gas molecules increase thus increasing momentum which in
turn increases the viscosity of the gas

65. Which of the following statement(s) is/are true in case of a source of emf (such as a primary cell)?
a) inside the cell there always exist an electrostatic field and a non-electrostatic field of equal
magnitude directed opposite to it
b) potential difference is the work of an electrostatic field whereas electromotive force is the
work of a non-electrostatic field
c) under certain condition, current can flow from +ve terminal to –ve terminal within the cell
d) when an external resistance is connected to the cell, the electrostatic field inside the cell
decreases in magnitude compared to the non-electrostatic field
Sol. Non Electrostatic Field: created by the internal battery mechanism.

Electrostatic field: created due to charge accumulation on battery terminals.
Emf: work done on unit positive charge by non-electrostatic force of the battery is defined as emf.
Potential difference: work done on unit positive charge by electrostatic force of the battery is
defined as potential difference.
c) For a charging battery, the current flows into the
Positive terminal and for a discharging battery, the current flows out of positive terminal.
d) When an external resistance is connected to the cell, the free electrons in the wire move from
–ve terminal to +ve terminal. Due to this the magnitude of positive charge decreases on +ve
terminal and the magnitude of –ve charge decreases on the –ve terminal thus decreasing the
potential difference across the terminals.
66. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct in case of a resistance in a resistance box used in
a laboratory?
a) the resistance is prepared using tungsten or nichrome wire

b) the resistance is prepared using manganin wire
c) half of the length of the resistance wire is wound clockwise and the remaining half
anticlockwise just to accommodate the whole length in a small space
d) half of the length of the resistance wire is wound clockwise and the remaining half
anticlockwise to make the inductive effect zero
Sol. b) Manganin is an alloy whose temperature coefficient of resistance is very low. So the resistance
becomes almost independent of temperature.
d) When half of the wire is wound in clockwise and the other in anti-clockwise, the current in both
the parts flows in opposite directions. This will cancel the magnetic (inductance) effect created by
the flowing current, thus giving only resistance.

67. In a certain experiment, density of the material of a small metallic cylindrical tube of a given mass
is to be determined. Its length is about 3 cm, outer diameter more than about 1 cm and wall
thickness about 2 mm; the flat base being a little thicker than 2 mm. which of the following set(s)
of apparatus can be used to determine the volume of the tube accurately?
a) Water and measuring cylinder

b) water, a measuring cylinder and a micrometer screw gauge
c) an overflow vessel, a measuring cylinder and water
d) only vernier callipers.
Sol. [QUESTION DELETED]
68. An object and a screen are separated by a distance D. A convex

lens of focal length f such that 4f < D is moved between the
object and the screen to get two sharp images. If the two
positions of the lens are separated by a distance L, then
a) L is equal to √𝑫(𝑫 − 𝟒𝒇)

b) u in one position is numerically equal to v in the other
𝐷−𝐿
c) the ratio of sizes of the two images is 𝐷+𝐿
𝑫−𝑳 𝟐
d) the ratio of sizes of the two images is ( )
𝑫+𝑳
1 1 1 1 1 1
Sol. Lens formula: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑣 + 𝑢 = 𝑓 (first position)
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
𝑣
− 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑣 + 𝑢 = 𝑓 (second position)
2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ =  + =  𝑢2 − D𝑢 + 𝑓𝐷 = 0
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝐷−𝑢 𝑢 𝑓
𝐷±√𝐷2 −4𝐷𝑓 𝐷 √𝐷 2 −4𝐷𝑓 𝐷 √𝐷 2 −4𝐷𝑓
u= 2
u=2+ 2
or 2 − 2
𝐷 √𝐷2 −4𝐷𝑓 𝐷 √𝐷 2 −4𝐷𝑓 𝐷 √𝐷 2 −4𝐷𝑓
𝑣= D - 𝑢 = D - ( 2 + ) = − or 2 +
2 2 2 2
a) Separation between two positions of the lens: L

𝐷 √𝐷2 −4𝐷𝑓 𝐷 √𝐷 2 −4𝐷𝑓
𝑢2 − 𝑢1 = + − + = √𝐷 2 − 4𝐷𝑓 = √𝑫(𝑫 − 𝟒𝒇)
2 2 2 2
b) object distance in one position is numerically equal to image distance in the other position
𝑣 𝐼 𝑣
d) Magnification in first position of the lens : m1 = 𝑢1  𝑣1 = m1𝑢1  𝑣1 = 𝑂1 𝑢1  𝐼1 = 𝑢1 O
1 1
𝑣2 𝐼2 𝑣2
Magnification in second position of the lens : 𝑚2 = 𝑢2
 𝑣2 = m2𝑢2  𝑣2 = 𝑂
𝑢2  𝐼2 = 𝑢2
O
2
𝐷 𝐷√𝐷−4𝑓
𝐼1 𝑣1 𝑢2 − 𝑫−𝑳 𝟐
The ratio of sizes of the two images : 𝐼2
= 𝑣2 𝑢1
=(2 2
𝐷 𝐷√𝐷−4𝑓
) = (𝑫+𝑳)
+
2 2

69. A transistor (p n p or n p n) can be used as
a) An amplifier b) an oscillator c) a switch d) a current source
Sol. a) Amplifier: increases the strength of weak input signal

b) Oscillator: generates high frequency signal from (dc / low frequency) signal
c) Switch: closed switch in saturation region, open switch in cut off region
d) Current source: a transistor acts as constant current source
70. When photons each with energy 4.25 eV strike the surface of a metal A, the photoelectrons given
out have maximum KE TA and the corresponding de Broglie wave length is A. When another
metal surface B is irradiated with photons each with energy 4.7 eV, the corresponding maximum
KE TB is 1.5 eV less than TA. If the de Broglie wavelength B of these photoelectrons is twice that
of A, then
a) work function of metal A is 2.25 eV

b) work function of metal A is 4.2 eV
c) TA = 2.0 eV
d) the radiation incident on metal A has a wavelength 292 nm
Sol. Einstein’s photo electric equation: E =  + Kmax

ℎ
For metal A: 4.25 = A + TA (de Broglie wavelength: A = )
√2𝑚𝑇𝐴
ℎ
For metal B: 4.7 = B + TB = B + TA – 1.5  6.2 = B + TA (B =2 A = )
√2𝑚𝑇𝐵
From de Broglie wavelength relation we have TA = 4 TB
Given: TB = TA – 1.5  TB = 4TB – 1.5  TB = 0.5 eV  TA = 4 TB = 2 eV
Work function of metal A: A = 4.25 – 2 = 2.25 eV
Work function of metal B: B = 4.7 – 0.5 = 4.2 eV
1240
Wavelength of incident radiation on A: A = = 292 nm
4.25

Date of Examination: 27TH November, 2016
Time: 0830 to 1030 Hrs
Q. Paper Code: P162
Write the question paper code mentioned above on YOUR answer sheet (in the space
provided), otherwise you answer sheet will NOT be assessed. Note that the same Q.P.
Code appears on each page of the question paper.
Instruction to Candidates –
1. Use of mobile phones, smartphones, ipads during examination is STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

2. In addition to this question paper, you are given answer sheet along with Candidate’s copy.
3. On the answer sheet, make all the entries carefully in the space provided ONLY in BLOCK
CAPITALS as well as by properly darkening the appropriate bubbles.
Incomplete/incorrect/carelessly filled information may disqualify your candidature.
4. On the answer sheet, use only BLUE or BLACK BALL POINT PEN for making entries and
filling the bubbles.
5. The email Id and date birth entered in the answer sheet will be you login credentials for
accessing performance report. Please take care while entering.
6. Question paper has two parts. In part A1(Q. Nos. 1 to 60) each question has four
alternatives, out of which only one is correct. Choose the correct alternative and fill the
appropriate bubble, as shown.
Q. No. 22 a c d
In part A2 (Q. Nos. 61 to 70) each question has four alternatives out of which any number
of alternatives (1, 2, 3 or 4) may be correct. You have to choose ALL correct alternatives
and fill the appropriate bubbles, as shown.
Q. No. 64 a c
7. For Part A1, each correct answer gets 3 marks whereas 1 mark will be deducted for each
wrong answer. In Part A2, you get 6 marks if all the correct alternatives are marked.
No negative marks in this part.
8. Any rough work should be done only in the space provided.
9. Use of non – programmable calculator is allowed.
11. After submitting your answer paper, take away the Candidate’s copy for your reference.
Please DO NOT make any mark other than filling the appropriate bubbles properly in the space
provided on the answer sheet.
Answer sheets are evaluated using machine, hence CHANGE OF ENTRY IS NOT ALLOWED.
Scratching or overwriting may result in a wrong score.
DO NOT WRITE ON THE BACK SIDE OF THE ANSWER SHEET.
FIITJEE Ltd., Punjabi Bagh Delhi Centre, 31-32-33, Central Market, West Avenue Road, Punjabi Bagh (West), New Delhi - 110026, Ph: 011-45634000
Instructions to Candidates (continued) –
Read the following instructions after submitting the answer sheet.
12. Comments regarding this question paper, if any, may be sent by email only to
iapt.nse@gmail.com till 29th November, 2016.
13. The answers/solutons to this question paper will be available on out website –
www.iapt.org.in by 2nd December, 2016.
14. CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS –

Following certificates are awarded by the IAPT to students successful in NSEs
(i) Certificates to “centre Top 10%” students
(ii) Merit Certificates to “Statewise Top 1%” students
(iii) Merit Certificates and a book prize to “National Top 1%” students.
15. Result sheets can be downloaded from our website in the month of February. The “Centre
Top 10%” certificates will be dispatched to the prof-in-charge of the centre by February,
2017.
16. List of students (with centre number and roll number only) having score above MAS will be
displayed on our website (www.iapt.org.in) by 22nd December, 2016. See the Eligibility
Clause in the Student’s brochure on our website.
17. Students eligible for the INO Examination on the basis of selection criteria mentioned in
Student’s brochure will be informed accordingly.
Physical constants you may need …..
Magnitude of charge on electron e = 1.60 × 10–19 C Mass of electron me = 9.10 × 10–31 kg

–34
Universal gas constant R = 8.31 J/mol K Planck constant h = 6.62 × 10 Js
–8 2 4 –23
Stefan constant  = 5.67 × 10 W/m K Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10 J/K
–27
Mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10 kg Faraday constant = 96,500 C/mol
Boiling point of nitrogen = 77.4 K Boiling point of oxygen = 90.19 K
Boiling point of hydrogen = 20.3 K Boiling point of helium = 4.2 K
Universal gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10–11 Permittivity of free space 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2
Nm2/Kg2
Total Time: 120 minutes (A-1 and A-2)
A-1
ONLY ONE OUT OF FOUR OPTIONS IS CORRECT
1. The breakdown field for air is about 2 × 106 volt/m. Therefore, the maximum charge that can
be placed on a sphere of diameter 10 cm is
(A) 2.0 × 10–4 C (B) 5.6 × 10–7 C
–2
(C) 5.6 × 10 C (D) 2.0 × 102 C
2. A wire in the shape of square frame carries a current I and produces a magnetic field Bs at
its centre. Now the wire is bent in the shape of a circle and carries the same current. If Bc is
the magnetic field produced at the centre of the circular coil, then Bs/Bc is
(A) 82 (B) 82/ 2
(C) 8 2 / 2 (D) 8  2
3. A solid wooden block with a uniform cross section is floating in water (density w) with a
height h1 below water. Now a flat slab of stone is placed over the wooden block but the block
still flats with a height h2 below water. Afterwards the stone is removed from the top and
pasted at the bottom of the wooden block. The wooden block now floats with a height h3
under water. Therefore, the density of the stone is
h  h1 h  h3
(A) 2 w (B) 2 w
h3  h1 h2  h1
h  h1 h3
(C) 2 w (D) w
h2  h3 h2  h1
4. Two wires made of the same material, one thick and the other thin, are connected to form a
composite wire. The composite wire is subjected to some tension. A wave travelling along
the wire crosses the junction point. The characteristic that undergoes a change at the
junction point is
(A) Frequency only
(B) Speed of propagation only.
(C) Wavelength only.
(D) The speed of propagation as well as the wavelength.
5. Ultraviolet light of wavelength 300 nm and intensity 1 W/m2 falls on the surface of a
photosensitive material. If one percent of the incident photons produce photoelectrons then
the number of photoelectrons emitted per second from an area of 1 cm2 of the surface is
nearly
(A) 1.51 × 1013 (B) 1.51 × 1012
13
(C) 4.12 × 10 (D) 2.13 × 1011
6. At a certain height h above the surface of the earth the change in the value of acceleration
due to gravity (g) is the same as that at a depth x below the surface. Assuming h and x to be
enough small compared to the radius of the earth, x : h is
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4
7. Two point masses m1 and m2 are connected at the ends of a light rigid rod of length . The
moment of inertia of the system about n axis through their centre of mass and perpendicular
to the rod is
1  m1m2  2  m1m2  2
(A)   (B)  
2  m1  m2   m1  m2 
 m  m2  2
(C)  m1  m2   2 (D) [m12  m22 ]  1 
 m1m2 
8. Two particles of masses m and M are initially at rest and infinitely separated. At a later
instant when they are at a finite distance d from each other, their relative velocity of
approach is
1 1
 Gm  2  2G(m  M)  2
(A)   (B)  
 2d   d 
1 1
 G(m  M)  2  2GM  2
(C)   (D)  
 2d   d 
9. Two blocks of masses m and 2m are placed on a smooth

horizontal surface as shown. In the first case only a force
f1 is applied from left. Later on only a force f2 is applied
form right. If the force acting at the interface of the two
blocks in the two cases is the same, then f1 : f2 is
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2
(C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 3
10. A ball A of mass 1 kg moving at a speed of 5 m/s strikes tangentially another ball B initially at
rest. The ball A then moves at right angles to its initial direction at a speed of 4 m/s. If the
collision is elastic, the mass (in kg) of ball B and its momentum after collision (in kg-m/s)
respectively are (approximately)
(A) 1.2 and 1.8 (B) 2.2 and 3.3
(C) 4.6 and 6.4 (D) 6.2 and 9.1
Group of Q. Nos. 11 to 14 is based on the following paragraph.
A nichrome wire AB, 100 cm long and of uniform cross section is mounted on a meter scale,
the points a and B coinciding with 0 cm and 100 cm marks respectively. The wire has a
resistance S = 50 ohm. Any point C along this wire, between A and B is called a variable
point to which one end of an electrical element is connected. In the following questions this
arrangement will be referred to as ‘wire AB’.
11. The emf of a battery is determined using the

following circuit with ‘wire AB’. The galvanometer
shows zero deflection when one of its terminals is
connected to point C. If the internal resistance of the
battery is 4 ohm, its emf is
(A) 3.75 volt (B) 4.05 volt

(C) 2.50 volt (D) 9.0 volt
12. In the adjacent circuit arrangement it is found that
deflection in the galvanometer is 10 divisions. Also
the voltage across the ‘wire AB’ is equal to that
across the galvanometer. Therefore, the current
sensitivity of the galvanometer is about
(A) 0.050 div/A (B) 0.066 div/A
(C) 0.010 div/A (D) data insufficient
13. The ‘wire AB’ is now a part of the adjacent circuit.

With the resistors P = 50  and Q = 100 , the
null point is obtained at C where AC = 33 cm.
When the resistors are interchanged, the null
point is found at C with AC = 67 cm. The
systematic error in this experiment seems to be
due to non-coincidence of A and B with 0 cm
mark and 100 cm mark respectively. If these end
errors are equivalent to ‘a’ cm and ‘b’ cm
respectively, then they are
(A) 0 and 1 (B) 1 and 0
(C) 0.33 and 0.33 (D) 1 and 1
14. In the adjacent circuit a resistance R is used. Initially

with ‘wire AB’ not in the circuit, the galvanometer
shows a deflection of d divisions. Now, the ‘wire AB’
is connected parallel to the galvanometer and the
galvanometer shows a deflection nearly d/2 divisions.
Therefore
(A) R = G (B) R << G
SG
(C) R >> G (D) R 
SG
15. Consider a relation connecting three physical quantities A, B and C given by A = BnCm. The
dimensions of A, B and C are ‘LT], [L2T–1] and [LT2] respectively. Therefore, the exponents n
and m have values
(A) 2/3 and 1/3 (B) 2 and 3
(C) 4/5 and –1/5 (D) 1/5 and 3/5
16. Two identical rooms in a house are connected by an open doorway. The temperature in the
two rooms are maintained at two different values. Therefore,
(A) The room with higher temperature contains more amount of air.
(B) The room with lower temperature contains more amount of air.
(C) Both the rooms contain the same amount of air.
(D) The room with higher pressure contains more amount of air.
17. A vibrator of frequency f is placed near one of a long cylindrical tube. The tube is fitted with a
movable piston at the other end. An observer listens to the sound through a side opening.
As the piston is moved through 8.75 cm, the intensity of sound recorded by the observer
changes form a maximum to a minimum. If the speed of sound in air is 350 m/s, the
frequency f is
(A) 500 Hz (B) 1000 Hz
(C) 2000 Hz (D) 4000 Hz
18. A heavy metal block is dragged along a round horizontal surface at a constant speed of 20
km/hr. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is 0.6. The block is made
of a material whose specific heat is 0.1 cal/g-oC can absorbs 25% of heat generated due to
friction. If the block is dragged for 10 min, the rise in temperature of the block is about(g = 10
m/s2)
(A) 12oC (B) 50oC
o
(C) 210 C (D) data insufficient
19. A gas is made to undergo a change of state from an initial state to a final state along
different paths by adiabatic process only. Therefore
(A) the work done is different for different paths
(B) the work done is the same for all paths
(C) there is no work done as there is no transfer of energy
(D) the total internal energy of the system will not change
20. Vectors A, B, C lie in XY plane and their resultant is R. The magnitudes of A, B and R
are100, 200 and 200 respectively. The angles made by these vectors with the positive
direction of X axis are 60o, 150o and 90o respectively. Therefore, the magnitude and the
angle made by C with positive direction of X axis respectively are
(A) 75, 315o (B) 110, 45o
(C) 156, 240o (D) 124, 62o
21. Two particles A and B are situated 10 m apart along X axis, B being farther of A, at t = 0.
Particle A is moving at 0.75 m/s parallel to +Y axis while B at 1 m/s along –X axis. After a
time t they come closes to each other. Therefore, t is
(A) 4.8 s (B) 6.4 s
(C) 6.0 s (D) 3.2 s
22. Out of the following differential equations, on that correctly represents the motion of a
second’s pendulum is
d2 x x d2 x x
(A) 2   0 (B) 2  2  0
dt  dt 
2 2
d x d x
(C) 2  x  0 (D) 2  2 x  0
dt dt
23. A block of mass 2 kg drops vertically from a height of 0.4 m onto a spring whose force
constant K is 1960 N/m. Therefore, the maximum compression of the spring is
(A) 0.40 m (B) 0.25 m
(C) 0.80 m (D) 0.1 m
24. Two blocks of masses m1 = 8 kg and m2 = 7 kg are connected by a light string passing over
a light frictionless pulley. The mass m1 is at rest on the inclined plane and mass m2 hangs
vertically. The angle of inclination is 30o. Therefore, the force of friction acting on m1 is
(A) 30 N up the plane (B) 30 N down the plane
(C) 40 N up the plane (D) 40 N down the plane
25. Two factories are sounding their sirens at 400 Hz each. A man walks from one factor
towards the other at a speed of 2 m/s, the speed of sound is 320 m/s. The number of beats
heard per second by the man is
(A) 6 (B) 5
(C) 2.5 (D) 7.5
26. The adjacent figure shows I – V characteristics of a silicon
diode. In this connection three statements are made – (I) the
region OC corresponds to reverse bias of the diode, (II) the
voltage at point A is about 0.2 volt and (III) different scales
have been used along +ve and –ve directions of Y axis.
Therefore,
(A) only statement (I) is correct (B) only statements (I) and (II) are correct
(C) only statements (I) and (III) are correct (D) all statements (I), (II) and (III) are correct
27. Two identical lenses made of the same material of refractive index 1.5 have the focal length
12 cm. These lenses are kept in contact and immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.35.
The combination behaves as
(A) convex lens of focal length 27 cm (B) concave lens of focal length 6 cm
(C) convex lens of focal length 9 cm (D) convex lens of focal length 6 cm
28. A cup of water is placed in a car moving at a constant acceleration a to the left. Inside the
water is a small air bubble. This figure that correctly shows the shape of the water surface
and the direction of motion of the air bubble is:
(A) A (B) B
(C) C (D) D
29. A sphere of radius R made up of Styrofoam(light polystyrene material) has a cavity of radius
R/2. The centre of the cavity is situated at a distance of R/2 from the centre of the Styrofoam
sphere. The cavity is filled with a solid material of density five times that of Styrofoam. Now,
the centre of mass is seen to be located at a distance x from the centre of Styrofoam sphere,
therefore x is
(A) R/2 (B) R/3
(C) R/4 (D) R/6
30. A resistor R is connected to a parallel combination of two identical batteries each with emf E
and an internal resistance r. The potential drop across the resistance R is
2ER ER
(A) (B)
2R  r R  2r
ER 2ER
(C) (D)
2R  r R  2r
31. The critical angle between a certain transparent medium and air is . A ray of light traveling
through air enters the medium at an angle of incidence equal to its polarizing angle .
Therefore, the angle of refraction is
(A) tan–1 (sin) (B) tan–1 (sin)
(C) sin–1 (tan) (D) sin–1 (tan)
32. If a copper wire is stretched to make its radius decrease by 0.1%, the percentage change in
its resistance is approximately
(A) -0.4% (B) +0.8%
(C) +0.4% (D) +0.2%
33. Consider a manual camera with a lens having a focal length of 5 cm. It is focused at infinity.
For catching the picture of an object at a distance of 30 cm, one would
(A) move the lens out by about 1 cm (B) move the lens out by about 5 cm
(C) move the lens in by about 1 cm (D) find it impossible to catch the picture
34. Initially interference is observed with the entire experimental set up inside a chamber filled
with air. Now the chamber is evacuated. With the same source of light used, a careful
observer will find that
(A) the interference pattern is almost absent as it is very much diffused
(B) there is no change in the interference pattern
(C) the fringe width is slightly decreased
(D) the fringe width is slightly increased
35. Two identical loudspeakers, placed close to each other inside a room, are supplied with the
same sinusoidal voltage. One can imagine a pattern around the loudspeakers with areas of
increased and decreased sound intensity alternately located. Which of the following actions
will NOT change the locations of these areas?
(A) moving one of the speakers
(B) changing the amplitude of the signal voltage
(C) changing the frequency of the signal voltage
(D) replacing the air in the room with a different gas
36. A particle at rest explodes into two fragments of masses m1 and m2(m1 > m2) which move
apart with non zero velocities. If 1 and 2 are their de Broglie wavelengths respectively, then
(A) 1 > 2 (B) 1 < 2
(C) 1 = 2 (D) data insufficient
37. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 carry identical charges. Starting from rest they are
accelerated through the same potential difference. Then they enter into a region of uniform
magnetic field and move along circular paths of radii R1 and R2 respectively. Therefore, the
ratio of their masses m1 : m2 is
(A) R1 : R2 (B) R12 : R 22
(C) R22 : R12 (D) R1 : R2
38. A fixed horizontal wire M carries 200 A current. Another wire N running parallel to M carries
a current I and remains suspended in a vertical plane below M at a distance of 20 mm. Both
the wires have a linear mass density 10–2 kg/m. Therefore, the current I is
(A) 20 A (B) 4.9 A
(C) 49A (D) 200 A
39. An unpolarized light of intensity 32 W/m2 passes through three polarizers, such that the
transmission axis of last polarizer is crossed with that of the first. If the intensity of emergent
light is 3 W/m2, then the angle between the transmission axes of the first two polarizers is
(A) 30o (B) 19o
(C) 45o (D) 90o+
40. An electron is injected directly towards the centre of a large metal plate having a uniform
surface charge density of –2.0 x 10–6 C/m2. The initial kinetic energy of the election is
1.6 x 10–17 J. The electron is observed to stop as it just reaches the plate. Therefore, the
distance between the plate and the point from where the electron was injected is
(A) 4.4 x 10–4 m (B) 4.4 m
(C) 4.4 x 10–2 (D) data insufficient
41. Graphs (drawn with the same scale) showing the variation of pressure with volume for a
certain gas undergoing four different cyclic processes A, B, C and D are given below.
The cyclic process in which the gas performs the greatest amount of work is
(A) A (B) B
(C) C (D) D
42. A rectangular metal tank filled with a certain liquid is as

shown in the figure. The observer, whose eye is in level
with the top of the tank, can just see the corner E of the
tank. Therefore, the refractive index of the liquid is
(A) 1.67 (B) 1.50

(C) 1.33 (D) 1.25
43. As shown in the figure, a block of mass m is suspended from a

support with the help of a system of identical springs. The force
constant of each spring k. Therefore, the frequency of
oscillations of the block is
1 3k 1 2k
(A) (B)
2 2m 2 3m
1 5k 1 6k
(C) (D)
2 6m 2 5m
44. The impedance (Z) of three electrical components e1, e2, and e3
has frequency (f) dependence as shown by the following three
curves.
The three components e1, e2, e3 are respectively
(A) R, L, C (B) R, C, L
(C) L, R, C (D) C, R, L
45. The half life period of a radioactive element E1 is equal to the main lifetime of another
radioactive element E2. Initially both the elements have the same number of atoms.
Therefore.
(A) E2 will decay faster (B) E1 will decay faster
(C) E1 and E2 will decay at the same rate (D) Data insufficient
46. A simple pendulum has a bon of mass m and a light string of length I. The string is replaced
by a uniform rod of mass m and of the same length I. The time period of this pendulum is
(A) 2 I / g  (B) 2  8I/ 9g 
1/ 2 1/ 2
(C) 2  9I / 8g (D) 2  2 / 3g

1/2 1/ 2
47. A tennis ball is released from a height and allowed
to fall onto a hard surface. The adjacent graph
shows the variation of velocity of the ball with time
from the instant of release. The point of upward
maximum velocity of the ball is indicated by point
(A) A (B) B
(C) C (D) D
48. The diagram shows an oscillating block connected to

two identical springs. The frequency of oscillations can
be increased substantially by
(A) Increasing the amplitude of the oscillations
(B) Fixing an extra mass of the block
(C) Using softer pair of springs
(D) Using harder pair of springs
49. The variation of velocity with time of a toy car moving

along a straight line is an in adjacent figure. Which of the
following graphs correctly represents the variation of
acceleration with time for the toy car?
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
50. An ac source (sinusoidal source with frequency 50 Hz) is connected in series with a
rectifying diode, a 100 resistor, a 1000F capacitor and a milliammeter. After some time
the millimmater reads zero. The voltage measured across the capacitor with a dc voltmeter
is
(A) the peak voltage of the ac source
(B) rms voltage of the ac source.
(C) average voltage of the ac source over a half cycle.
(D) average voltage of the ac source over a full cycle.
51. The frequency of the sound produced by a siren increases from 400 Hz to 1200 Hz while its
amplitude remains the same. Therefore, the ratio of the intensity of the 1200 Hz wave to that
of the 400 Hz wave is
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 3 : 1
(C) 1 : 9 (D) 9 : 1
52. The fundamental frequency of the output of a bridge rectifier driven by ac mains is
(A) 50 Hz (B) zero
(C) 100 Hz (D) 25 Hz
53. The force of attraction between the positively charged nucleus and the electron in hydrogen
e2
atom is given by f  k 2 . Assume that the nucleus is fixed. The electron, initially moving in
r
an orbit of radius R1 jumps into an orbit of smaller radius R 2 . The decrease in the total
energy of the atom is
ke2  1 1  ke2  R1 R2 
(A)    (B)   
2  R1 R 2  2  R22 R12 
ke2  1 1 ke2  R2 R1 
(C)    (D)  2  2
2  R2 R1  2  R1 R2 
54. It is observed that some of the spectral lines in hydrogen spectrum have wavelengths almost
equal to those of the spectral lines in He ion. Out of the following the transitions in He that
will make this possible is
(A) n  3 to n  1 (B) n  6 to n  4
(C) n  5 to n  3 (D) n  3 to n  2
Group of Q. No. 55 to 60 is based on the following paragraph.
A wheel of a car is made up of two parts (1)

the central metal rim, and (2) the rubber tyre.
The width of the tyre W = 16.5 cm and height
h = 10.7 cm. The rim overlaps the tyre. The
total weight of the car is 1500 kg distributed
evenly. The tyres are inflated with air to a
pressure 2.0 kg/cm2. The density of air at
pressure of 1.0 kg/cm2 The density of air at
pressure of 1.0 kg/cm2 and at room
temperature equals 1.29 g/litre. The outer
diameter of the tyre is 55.4 cm and that of the
rim is 40 cm.
Ignore the thickness of rubber and use the dimensions given here.
Note that the units mentioned above are conventional units used in everyday life.
55. Consider the following two statements about a tyre of a car.

Statement A : ‘The horizontal road surface is exactly tangential to the tyre’
Statement B : ‘The tyre is inflated with excess pressure’
Which of the following alternative is correct?
(A) Statement A is the result of statement B
(B) Statement B cannot be true
(C) Statement A cannot be true
(D) Neither of the statements A and B is true
56. The left side front tyre was observed to be in contact with the road over a length L cm. The
value of L is
(A) 8.85 cm (B) 9.35 cm
(C) 11.36 cm (D) 10.35 cm
57. When five persons occupy the seats L increases by 2.5 cm. The average weight of a person
is
(A) 66 kg (B) 60 kg
(C) 62 kg (D) 64 kg
58. If five persons occupy the seats, the centre of the wheel is lowered by about
(A) 1 mm (B) 2 mm
(C) 3 mm (D) 4 mm
59. The mass of air in a tyre is about

(A) 24 g. (B) 49 g.
(C) 32 g. (D) 64 g.
60. The tyres of racing cars are very wide. Their width is nearly three times the above value.
This large width is for
(A) stability and acceleration (B) streamlining and acceleration
(C) streamlining and stability (D) streamlining, stability and acceleration.
A-2
In Q. No. 61 to 70 any number of options (1 or 2 or 3 or all 4) may be correct. You are to

identify all of them correctly to get 6 marks. Even if one answer identified is incorrect or one
correct answer is missed, you get zero marks.
61. Water is flowing through a vertical tube with varying

cross section as shown. The rate of flow is 52.5
ml/s. Given that speed of flow 1  0.35 m / s and
area of cross section A 2  0.5 cm2 . Which of the
following is/are true?
(A) A1  1.0 cm2 ,  2  0.70 m / s
(B) A1  1.5 cm2 ,  2  1.05 m / s
(C) h  5 cm
(D) h  10 cm
62. A simple laboratory power supply consists of a transformer, bridge rectifier and a filter
capacitor. It drives a suitable load. If due to some reason one of the diodes in the rectifier
circuit becomes open, then
(A) output voltage of power supply falls to zero.
(B) output voltage of power supply decreases to some nonzero value
(C) ac ripple in the output increases.
(D) ripple frequency decreases.
63. Circuit A is a series LCR circuit with C A  C and L A  L . Another circuit B has CB  2C and
LB  L / 2 . Both the circuits have the same resistance and the capacitor and the inductance
are assumed to be ideal components. Each of the circuits is connected to the same
sinusoidal voltage source. Therefore,
(A) both the circuits have the same resonant frequency
(B) both the circuits carry the same peak current
(C) resonance curve for circuit A is more sharp than that for circuit B.
(D) resonance curve for circuit B is more sharp than that for circuit A.
64. The variation of acceleration with time for a

particle performing simple harmonic motion
along straight line is as in adjacent figure.
Therefore,
(A) the particle has non – zero displacement
initially.
(B) the displacement of the particle at point 1
is negative
(C) the velocity of the particle at point 2 is
positive.
(D) the potential energy at point 3 is maximum
65. Which of the following physical quantities have dimensions identical to each other?
(A) the Young’s modulus Y.
(B) 0 E2 where E is the electric field intensity and 0 is the perimittivity of free space.
B2
(C) where B is the magnetic field and  0 is the permeability of free space.
0
(D) kT where k is Bolzmann’s constant and T is the absolute temperature.
66. A small ball bearing is released at the top of a long vertical column of glycerin of height 2h.
The ball bearing falls through a height h in time t1 and then the remaining height with the
terminal velocity in time t 2 . Let W1 and W2 be the work done against viscous drag over
these heights. Therefore,
(A) t1  t 2 (B) t1  t 2
(C) W1  W2 (D) W1  W2
67. A particle moves in XY plane according to the relations x  kt and y  kt 1  pt  where k

and p are positive constants and t is time. Therefore,
(A) the trajectory of the particle is a parabola
(B) the particle has a constant velocity along X axis.
(C) the force acting on the particle remains in the same direction even if both k and p are
negative constants.
(D) the particle has a constant acceleration along – Y axis.
68. A charge q is situated at the origin. Let EA ,EB and EC be the electric fields at the points.
A  2,  3,  1 , B  1,  2, 4  and C  2,  4, 1 . Therefore.
(A) EA  EB
(B) no work is done in moving a test charge q0 from B to C.
(C) 2 E A  3 EB
(D) EB  EC
69. A uniform spherical charge distribution of radius R produces electric fields E1 and E2 at two
points at distances r1 and r2 respectively from the centre of the distribution. Out of the
E
following the possible expression/s for 1 is/are
E2
2
r r 
(A) 2 (B)  1 
r1  r2 
R3 r r2
(C) (D) 1 23
r12 r2 R
70. A metallic wire of length l is held between two supports under some tension. The wire is
cooled through  ' . Let Y be the Young’s modulus,  the density and  the thermal
coefficient of linear expansion of the material of the wire. Therefore, the frequency of
oscillations of the wire varies as
(A) Y (B) z
1 
(C) (D)
l 
Q. Paper Code: P162
ANSWERS
1. B 2. C 3. C 4. D
5. B 6. B 7. B 8. B
9. C 10. C 11. B 12. B
13. D 14. C 15. D 16. B
17. B 18. A 19. A 20. D
21. B 22. D 23. D 24. B
25. B 26. C 27. A 28. D
29. D 30. A 31. B 32. C
33. A 34. D 35. B 36. C
37. B 38. C 39. A 40. A
41. D 42. D 43. D 44. D
45. A 46. B 47. B 48. D
49. D 50. A 51. D 52. C
53. C 54. B 55. C 56. C
57. A 58. C 59. B 60. A
61. BC 62. BD 63. AC 64. ABCD
65. ABC 66. BD 67. ABCD 68. ABC
69. CD 70. ABCD
1. Vectors A, B, C lie in XY plane and their resultant is R. The magnitudes of A, B and R are 100,
200 and 200 respectively. The angles made by these vectors with the positive direction of X axis
are 600, 1500 and 900 respectively. Therefore, the magnitude and the angle made by C with positive
direction of X axis respectively are
1) 75, 3150 2) 110, 450 3) 156, 2400 4) 124, 6.20
Sol. Let the vector c make  angle with x axis.

Resultant vector along x direction:
100 cos 60 – 200 cos 30 + c cos  = 0
1 √3
100 x 2 - 200 x 2
+ c cos  = 0  c cos  = 100 √3 − 50
Resultant vector along y direction:
100 sin 60 + 200 sin 30 + c sin  = 200  c sin  = 100 - 50√3
Solving these two equations: c = 124 and  = 6.20
2. Two particles A and B are situated 10 m apart along X axis, B being farther right of A, at t = 0.
Particle A is moving at 0.75 m/s parallel to +ve Y axis while B at 1 m/s along –ve X axis. After a
time t they come closest to each other. Therefore, t is
1) 4.8 s 2) 6.4 s 3) 6.0 s 4) 3.2 s
Sol. Velocity of B w.r.to A: 𝑣̅𝐵𝐴 = 𝑣̅𝐵 − 𝑣̅𝐴

5
vBA = √(0.75)2 + 12 = m/s
4
𝑣 0.75
From the dig: tan  = 𝑣𝐴 = = 0.75   = 370
𝐵 1
vBA can be taken as velocity of B with A at rest.

Distance of closest approach: AC = 10 sin 37 = 6 m
𝑩𝑪 𝟏𝟎 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝟑𝟕
Time taken to reach point C: t = = = 6.4 s
𝒗𝑩𝑨 𝟏.𝟐𝟓
3. Out of the following differential equations, one that correctly represents the motion of a second’s
pendulum is
1) 𝑑2 𝑥 𝑥 2) 𝑑2 𝑥 𝑥 3) 𝑑2 𝑥 4) 𝒅𝟐 𝒙
𝑑𝑡 2
+𝜋=0 𝑑𝑡 2
+ 𝜋2 = 0 𝑑𝑡 2
+ 𝜋𝑥 = 0
𝒅𝒕𝟐
+ 𝝅𝟐 𝒙 = 0
NSEP – 2016 [PHYSICS] Page 1

Sol. For a particle to be in SHM, it requires restoring force (acting always towards mean position)
So the acceleration is also towards mean position (opposite to displacement)
Condition for SHM : a ∝ − x  a = − 𝜔2 x  a + 𝜔2 x = 0
2𝜋 2𝜋
Seconds pendulum : time period : T = 2 sec   = 𝑇
= 2
=  rad/s
𝒅𝟐 𝒙
So the required equation : a + 𝜔2 x = 0  + 𝝅𝟐 𝒙 = 0
𝒅𝒕𝟐
4. A block of mass 2 kg drops vertically from a height of 0.4 m onto a spring whose force constant K
is 1960 N/m. Therefore, the maximum compression of the spring is
1) 0.4 m 2) 0.25 m 3) 0.80 m 4) 0.1 m
Sol. Let the compression in the spring: x

The effective height of fall of the block: h + x = 0.4 + x
Loss of potential energy of the block: mg (h + x) = 2 x 10 x (0.4 + x)
1 1
Gain in elastic potential energy of the spring: kx2 = (1960) x2 = 980 x2
2 2
Conservation of mechanical energy:
Loss in gravitational potential energy = gain in elastic potential energy
20 (0.4 + x) = 980 x2  980 x2 – 20 x – 8 = 0  x = 0.1 m
5. Two blocks of masses m1 = 8 kg and m2 = 7 kg are connected by a light string passing over a light
friction less pulley. The mass m1 is at rest on the inclined plane and mass m2 hangs vertically. The
angle of inclination is 300. Therefore, the force of friction acting on m1 is
1) 30 N up the plane 2) 30 N down the plane

3) 40 N up the plane 4) 40 N down the plane
Sol. For the hanging block : m2g – T = m2(0)  m2g = T

T = 7 x 10 = 70 N
For the block on inclined plane: T – m1g sin  - f = m1(0) = 0
T = m1g sin  + f → 70 = 8 x 10 x sin 30 + f
70 – 40 = f  f = 30 N
6. At a certain height h above the surface of the earth, the change in the value of acceleration due to
gravity (g) is the same as that at a depth x below the surface. Assuming h and x to be enough small
compared to the radius of the earth, x : h is
1) 1 : 1 2) 2:1 3) 1 : 2 4) 1:4
Sol. Acceleration due to gravity at height : gh = g (1 − 2ℎ)

𝑅
𝑥
Acceleration due to gravity at depth : gx = g (1 − 𝑅)
Given : gh = gx
2ℎ 𝑥 2ℎ 𝑥 2ℎ 𝑥 𝒙
g (1 − ) = g (1 − )  1 − = 1 −  =  = 2
𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝒉

7. Two point masses m1 and m2 are connected at the ends of a light rigid rod of length 𝑙
The moment of inertia of the system about an axis through their centre of mass and perpendicular
to the rod is
1) 1 𝑚 𝑚
(𝑚 1+𝑚2 ) 𝑙 2 2) 𝒎 𝒎
(𝒎 𝟏+𝒎𝟐 ) 𝒍𝟐 3) (𝑚1 + 𝑚2 ) 𝑙 2 4) 𝑚 𝑚
(𝑚 1+𝑚2 ) 𝑙 2 [m12 + m22]
2 1 2 𝟏 𝟐 1 2
Sol. Distance of centre of mass from m1: r1 = 𝑙 ( 𝑚2 )

𝑚 +𝑚 1 2
𝑚1
Distance of centre of mass from m2: r2 = 𝑙 ( )
𝑚1 +𝑚2
Moment of inertia of the two-particle system:

𝑚2 2 𝑚1 2 𝑚 𝑚 𝑚1 +𝑚2 𝒎 𝒎
I = m1r12 + m2r22 = m1𝑙 2 (𝑚 ) + m2𝑙 2 (𝑚 ) = 𝑙 2 𝑚 1+𝑚2 = (𝒎 𝟏+𝒎𝟐 ) 𝒍𝟐
1 +𝑚2 1 +𝑚2 1 2 𝑚 1 +𝑚2 𝟏 𝟐
8. Two particles of masses m and M are initially at rest and infinitely separated. At a later instant
when they are at a finite distance d from each other, their relative velocity of approach
1 𝟏 1 1
1) 𝐺𝑚 2 2) 𝟐𝑮(𝒎 + 𝑴) 𝟐 3) 𝐺(𝑚 + 𝑀) 2 4) 2𝐺𝑚 2
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2𝑑 𝒅 2𝑑 𝑑
Sol. Initial mechanical energy of the system is zero.

𝐺𝑚𝑀
For a separation d : potential energy : U = −
𝑑
1 1
Kinetic energy of the system : k = 2 m v1 + 2 M v22
2
1 1 𝐺𝑚𝑀
Conservation of mechanical energy : k + U = 0  2 m v12 + 2 M v22 = 𝑑
Conservation of linear momentum : Pi = Pf  0 = m v1 – M v2  m v1 = M v2
𝟏
𝟐𝑮(𝒎+𝑴) 𝟐
Solving the two equations, we get v1 + v2 = ( )
𝒅
9. Two blocks of masses m and 2m are placed on a smooth

horizontal surface as shown. In the first case, only a force f1
is applied from left. Later on, only a force f2 is applied from
right. If the force acting at the interface of the two blocks in
the two cases is the same, then f1 : f2 is
1) 1 : 1 2) 1:2 3) 2 : 1 4) 1:3
Sol. for the first force: f1 = 3m x a1  a1 = 𝑓1

3𝑚
𝑓1 2 1
For the block of mass 2m: f1 – F = 2m = f1  F = f1
3𝑚 3 3
𝑓
For the second force: f2 = 3m x a2  a2 = 3𝑚
2
𝑓2 1 2
For the block of mass m: f2 – F = m = f2  F = f2
3𝑚 3 3
1 2
from the two equations: 3 f1 = 3 f2  f1 : f2 = 2 : 1

10. A ball A of mass 1 kg moving at a speed of 5 m/s strikes tangentially another ball B, initially at
rest. The ball A then moves at right angles to its initial direction at a speed of 4 m/s. If the collision
is elastic, the mass (in kg) of ball B and its momentum after collision (in kg m/s) respectively are
(approximately)
1) 1.2 and 1.8 2) 2.2 and 3.3 3) 4.6 and 6.4 4) 6.2 and 9.1
Sol. Initial momentum of the system: Pi = m1u1 + m2u2 = 1 x 5 + m2 x 0 = 5 kg m/s

Momentum of the system after collision: Along x axis: Pfx = m2v2 cos 
Along y axis : Pfy = m1v1 – m2v2 sin  = 1 x 4 – m2v2 sin  = 4 – m2v2 sin 
Conservation of momentum along x axis: 5 = m2v2 cos 
Conservation of momentum along y axis: 0 = 4 – m2v2 sin   4 = m2v2 sin 
5 4
From the above equations: 4 = cot   sin  =  m2v2 = √41 = 6.4 kg m/s
√41
11. A simple pendulum has a bob of mass m and a light string of length 𝑙. The string is replaced by a
uniform rod of mass m and of the same length 𝑙. The time period of the pendulum is
1) 2𝜋 (𝑙/𝑔)1/2 2) 2𝝅 (𝟖𝒍/𝟗𝒈)𝟏/𝟐 3) 2𝜋 (9𝑙/8𝑔)1/2 4) 2𝜋 (2𝑙/3𝑔)1/2
Sol. 𝑙 𝐼
Time period of simple pendulum: T = 2 √ and Time period of physical pendulum: T1 = 2 √
𝑔 𝑀𝑔𝑑
4
Moment of inertia: I = ml2 + ml2/3 = 3 ml2 and Mass of the system: M = 2m
𝑚𝑙⁄2+𝑚𝑙 3𝑙
Distance of centre of mass from point of suspension: d = 𝑚+𝑚
= 4
4
ml2
Time period of the physical pendulum: T1 = 2 √ 3
3𝑙 = 2𝝅 (𝟖𝒍/𝟗𝒈)𝟏/𝟐
2𝑚 𝑔
4
12. A tennis ball is released from a height and allowed to fall onto a hard surface. The adjacent graph
shows the variation of velocity of the ball with time from the instant of release. The point of
upward maximum velocity of the ball is indicated by point
1) A 2) B 3) C 4) D
Sol. The ball will attain maximum upward velocity after first collision.
Point A indicates downward maximum velocity.
After collision, the particle starts moving upward.
So, point B indicates upward maximum velocity.

13. The diagram shows an oscillating block connected to two identical springs. The frequency of
oscillations can be increased substantially by
1) increasing the amplitude of the oscillations 2) fixing an extra mass to the block
3) using softer pair of springs 4) using harder pair of springs
Sol. 1 𝑘
Frequency of oscillation: f = 2𝜋 √𝑚
The springs are connected in parallel : kp = k1 + k2 = k + k = 2k
1 2𝑘
Frequency of oscillation: f = 2𝜋 √ 𝑚 → f ∝ √𝒌
So harder pair of springs should be used.
14. The variation of velocity with time of a toy car moving along a straight line is as shown below.
Which of the following graphs correctly represents the variation of acceleration with time for the
toy car?
1) 2)
3) 4)
Sol. Acceleration of a particle: a = rate of change of velocity

Mathematically: time differentiation of velocity
Graphically: slope of velocity – time curve
0 – 1 sec : slope is +ve and constant

1 – 1.5 sec : slope is zero
1.5 – above : slope is – ve and constant
So the correct answer is C.
15. Consider a relation connecting three physical quantities A, B and C given by A = Bn Cm. The
dimensions of A, B and C are [LT], [L2T-1] and [LT2] respectively. Therefore, the exponents n and
m have values
1) 2/3 and 1/3 2) 2 and 3 3) 4/5 and – 1/5 4) 1/5 and 3/5

Sol. Dimensional equation: A = Bn Cm

[LT] = [L2T-1]n[LT2]m  LT = L2n+m T-n+2m
Equating the powers of similar terms: 1 = 2n + m and 1 = - n + 2m
Solving the above equations: n = 1/5 and m = 3/5
16. Two identical rooms in a house are connected by an open door way. The temperatures in the two
rooms are maintained at two different values. Therefore,
1) the room with higher temperature contains more amount of air

2) the room with lower temperature contains more amount of air
3) both the rooms contain the same amount of air
4) the room with higher pressure contains more amount of air
Sol. Both the rooms are identical. (volume is same)

The rooms are connected by open door. (pressure is same)
Apply ideal gas equation : PV = nRT
𝟏
nT = constant  n1T1 = n2T2  n ∝ 𝑻
17. A vibrator of frequency f is placed near one end of a long cylindrical tube. The tube is fitted with a
movable piston at the other end. An observer listens to the sound through a side opening. As the
piston is moved through 8.75 cm, the intensity of sound recorded by the observer changes from a
maximum to minimum. If the speed of sound in air is 350 m/s, the frequency f is
1) 500 Hz 2) 1000 Hz 3) 2000 Hz 4) 4000 Hz

2
Sol. 1 𝑣(∆𝑃)
Intensity of sound wave: I = A22v = 𝑚
2 2𝐵
Maximum intensity occurs at displacement antinode (pressure node)
Minimum intensity occurs at displacement node (pressure anti node)

The separation between node and antinode: 4 = 8.75   = 35 cm
𝑣 350
Speed of sound wave: v = f  f = = = 1000 Hz
 0.35
18. A heavy metal block is dragged along a rough horizontal surface at a constant speed of 20 kmph.
The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is 0.6. The block is made of a material
whose specific heat is 0.1 cal / g 0C and absorbs 25 % of heat generated due to friction. If the block
is dragged for 10 min, the rise in temperature of the block is about ( g = 10 m/s2)
1) 12 0C 2) 50 0C 3) 210 0C 4) insufficient data
Sol. Speed of the block: v = 20 kmph = 20 x 5 = 50 m/s

18 9
Force of friction: f = mg = 0.6 x m x 10 = 6m N
50
Work done against friction: w = Pt = fvt = 6m x x 10 x 60 = 20000 m
9
Heat energy absorbed by the block: 25 % of 20000 m = 5000 m
Rise in temp. of the block: Q = ms  = m x 420 x  → 5000 m = m x 420 x    = 12 0C

19. A gas is made to undergo a change of state from an initial state to a final state along different paths
by adiabatic process only. Therefore,
1) the work done is different for different paths

2) the work done is the same for all paths
3) there is no work done as there is no transfer of energy
4) the total internal energy of the system will not change
Sol. Adiabatic process : heat content of the system remains constant (dQ = 0)
First law of thermodynamics : dQ = dU + dW  0 = dU + dW  dW = - dU
Work done is – ve change in internal energy. Internal energy is a state function. It depends only on
the initial and final states of the system but not on the path in which the system is taken from initial
to final state. So, work done is same for all the paths.
20. The critical angle between certain transparent medium and air is . A ray of light travelling through
air enters the medium at an angle of incidence equal to its polarizing angle . Therefore, the angle
of refraction is
1) tan−1 (sin 𝜃) 2) 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 (𝐬𝐢𝐧 ) 3) sin−1(tan 𝜃) 4) sin−1(tan )
Sol. Critical angle between the medium / air: 

1
refractive index: n =
sin 
Polarizing angle for the medium:   refractive index: n = tan 
1
From the above conditions: tan  =
sin 
From the diagram: + 90 + r = 180  r = 90 - 
tan r = tan (90 - )  tan r = cot  = sin 
Angle of refraction: r = tan -1 (sin )
21. If a copper wire is stretched to make its radius decrease by 0.1 %, the percentage change in its
resistance is approximately
1) – 0.4% 2) + 0.8 % 3) + 0.4 % 4) + 0.2 %
Sol. Resistance of a wire: R = 𝜌𝑙 = 𝜌𝑙 = 𝜌𝑙𝜋𝑟2 = 𝜌𝑉

𝐴 𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋2 𝑟 4
Apply log on both sides: log R = log 𝜌 + log V – log 𝜋 2 - log r4
𝑑𝑅 𝑑𝑟 𝑑𝑅 𝑑𝑟 𝑑𝑅 𝑑𝑟
Differentiate on both sides: 𝑅
=0+0–0–4 𝑟
 𝑅
=–4 𝑟
 𝑅
x 100 = – 4 𝑟
x 100
𝑑𝑅
𝑅
x 100 = – 4 x 0.1 = - 0.4 %
22. Consider a manual camera with a lens having a focal length of 5 cm. It is focused at infinity. For
catching the picture of an object at a distance of 30 cm, one would
1) move the lens out by about 1 cm 2) move the lens out by about 5 cm
3) move the lens in by about 1 cm 4) find it impossible to catch the picture

Sol. Distance of the screen: 1 − 1 = 1  1 + 1 = 1  v = 5 cm

𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 ∞ 5
For catching the image of an object on the screen:
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1
𝑣
− 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑣 + 30 = 5  𝑣 = 5 − 30 = 30 = 6  v = 6 cm
Since the screen (fixed) is 5 cm away from the lens, it has to be moved out by 1 cm
23. Initially the interference is observed with the entire experimental set up inside a chamber filled with
air. Now the chamber is evacuated. With the same source of light used, a careful observer will find
that
1) the interference pattern is almost absent at it is very much diffused.

2) there is no change in the interference pattern
3) the fringe width is slightly decreased
4) the fringe width is slightly increased
Sol. Fringe width of interference pattern :  = 𝐷   ∝ 

𝑑
𝑐  𝑜
Refractive index of the medium (air) : n = 𝑣 =  𝑜  m = 𝑛
𝑚
𝛽𝑚 𝑜 𝜷𝒎
𝛽𝑜
= 𝑚
= n  𝜷𝒐 = 𝒏
(Fringe width decreases slightly)
24. Two identical loudspeakers, placed close to each other inside a room are supplied with the same
sinusoidal voltage. One can imagine a pattern around the loudspeakers with areas of increased and
decreased sound intensity alternately located. Which of the following actions will not change the
locations of these areas?
1) moving one of the speakers

2) changing the amplitude of the signal voltage
3) changing the frequency of the signal voltage
4) replacing the air in the room with a different gas
Sol. Area of increased sound intensity : resultant amplitude is maximum : A1 + A2

area of decreased sound intensity : resultant amplitude is minimum : A1 ~ A2
Locations of these maxima and minima does not depend on A1 and A2
So, changing the amplitude of signal voltage will not change the locations of the areas of
maximum / minimum intensities.
25. A particle at rest explodes into two fragments of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) which move apart
with non-zero velocities. If 1 and 2 are their de Broglie wavelengths respectively, then
1) 1 > 2 2) 1 < 2 3) 1 = 2 4) insufficient data
Sol. Initial momentum of the system: Pi = 0

Momentum of the system after explosion: Pf = m1v1 – m2v2
Conservation of momentum: Pi = Pf  0 = m1v1 – m2v2  m1v1 = m2v2
𝒉 𝒉
de Broglie wavelength:  = 𝑷 = 𝒎𝒗
Since the momenta of both particles is same, their de Broglie wavelengths are also same

26. The breakdown field for air is about 2 x 106 V/m. Therefore, the maximum charge that can be
placed on a sphere of diameter 10 cm is
1) 2.0 x 10-4 C 2) 5.6 x 10-7 C 3) 5.6 x 10-2 C 4) 2.0 x 102 C
Sol. Break down field (dielectric strength): E = 2 x 106 V/m

Radius of the sphere: r = 5 cm = 5 x 10-2 m
1 𝑞 𝑞
Electric field intensity on surface of sphere: E = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2 = 9 x 109 x 25 𝑥 10−4
𝑜
𝑞
2 x 106 = 9 x 109 x 25 𝑥 10−4  q = 5.6 x 10-7 C
27. A wire in the shape of a square frame carries a current I and produces a magnetic field Bs at its
centre. Now the wire is bent in the shape of a circle and carries the same current. If Bc is the
magnetic field produced at the centre of the circular coil, then Bs / Bc is
1) 82 2) 82 / √2 3) 8√𝟐 / 2 4) 8 √2
Sol. Magnetic field produced by square frame: Bs = 4 𝜇𝑜 𝐼 (sin 𝛼 + sin 𝛽)

4𝜋 𝑑
𝜇 𝐼 𝜇𝑜 𝐼
Bs = 4 4𝜋𝑜 𝑎 (2 sin 45) = 2√2 𝜋𝑎
⁄2
Perimeter of the square frame = circumference of the circle
2𝑎
4a = 2𝜋𝑟  r = 𝜋
𝜇𝑜 𝐼 𝑜𝜇 𝐼𝜋 𝜇𝑜 𝐼𝜋
Magnetic field at the centre of the circle: Bc = 2𝑟
= 2𝑥2𝑎 = 4𝑎
𝜇𝑜 𝐼
2√2 𝜋𝑎⁄
Ratio of magnetic fields: Bs / Bc = 𝜇𝑜 𝐼𝜋 = 8√𝟐 / 2
4𝑎
28. A solid wooden block with a uniform cross section is floating in water (density w) with a height h1
below water. Now a flat slab of stone is placed over the wooden block but the block still floats with
a height h2 below water. Afterwards the stone is removed from the top and pasted at the bottom of
the wooden block. The wooden block now floats with a height h3 under water. Therefore, the
density of the stone is
1) ℎ2 − ℎ1 2) ℎ2 − 3 3) 𝒉𝟐 − 𝒉𝟏 4) ℎ3
𝜌 𝜌 𝝆 𝜌
ℎ3 − ℎ1 𝑤 ℎ2 − ℎ1 𝑤 𝒉𝟐 − 𝒉𝟑 𝒘 ℎ2 − ℎ1 𝑤
Sol. Let the cross section of the wooden block: A

𝜌
First case: weight of the block = buoyancy force  Ah g = Ah1(w) g  h1 = h
w
Second case: weight of block + weight of stone = buoyancy force
Ahg + w = Ah2 (w)g  Ah + Vs = Ah2 (w)
Third case: weight of block + weight of stone = buoyancy force
Ahg + Vs g = Ah3 (w) g+ V(w) g  Ah + Vs = [Ah3+ V] w
𝒉𝟐 −𝒉𝟏
Solving the equations, we get s = 𝝆
𝒉𝟐 −𝒉𝟑 𝒘

29. Two wires made of the same material, one thick and the other thin are connected to form a
composite wire. The composite wire is subjected to some tension. A wave travelling along the wire
crosses the junction point. The characteristic that undergoes a change at the junction point is
1) frequency only 2) speed of propagation only

3) wavelength only 4) speed as well as wavelength
Sol. The wave is travelling from thick wire to thin wire or vice versa.
As a wave travels from one medium to another, it is known as refraction. In refraction, frequency
remains constant.
As the wave is travelling to another medium, speed of the wave changes.
Speed = frequency x wavelength
As speed changes and frequency remains same, wavelength changes in proportion to speed.
30. Ultraviolet light of wavelength 300 nm and intensity 1 W/m2 falls on the surface of a photosensitive
material. If one percent of the incident photons produce photoelectrons then the number of
photoelectrons emitted per second from an area of 1 cm2 of the surface is nearly
1) 1.51 x 1013 2) 1.51 x 1012 3) 4.12 x 1013 4) 2.13 x 1011
Sol. Intensity of the incident radiation: I = 1 W/m2

Energy of the incident radiation: IAt = 1 x 10-4 x 1 = J
No. of photons in the incident radiation:
𝑛ℎ𝑐 𝐸 300 𝑥 10−9 𝑥 10−4
E= n= = = 1.51 x 1014
 ℎ𝑐 6.63 𝑥 10−34 𝑥 3 𝑥 108
𝑛
No. of photo electrons emitted: N = 1% of n = 100 = 1.51 x 1012
31. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 carry identical charges. Starting from rest they are accelerated
through the same potential difference. Then they enter into a region of uniform magnetic field and
move along circular paths of radii R1 and R2 respectively. Therefore, the ratio of masses m1 : m2 is
1) R1 : R2 2) R12 : R22 3) R22 : R12 4) √𝑅1 : √𝑅2
Sol. Radius of circular path followed by charged particle in magnetic field : R = 𝑚𝑣

𝐵𝑞
1 2𝑞𝑉
Speed acquired by the particle : 2 m v2 = qV  v = √ 𝑚
𝑅 𝑚 𝑣
Ratio of radii : 𝑅1 = 𝑚1 𝑣1 (same charge and same magnetic field)
2 2 2
𝑅1 𝑚1 𝑚2 𝑚1
𝑅2
= 𝑚2
√𝑚 = √𝑚 → m1 : m2 = R12 : R22
1 2
32. A fixed horizontal wire M carries 200 A current. Another wire N running parallel to M carries a
current I and remains suspended in a vertical plane below M at a distance of 20 mm. Both the wires
have linear mass density 10-2 kg/m. Therefore, the current I is
1) 20 A 2) 4.9 A 3) 49 A 4) 200 A

Sol. Weight of wire N is balanced by magnetic force of attraction between wires.

𝜇 𝑖1 𝑖2 4 𝑥 10−7 200 𝑥 𝐼
Magnetic force: Fm = 2𝜋𝑜 𝑟
𝑙= 2𝜋
x 20 𝑥 10−3 𝑙 = 2 x 10-3 I𝑙
Gravitational force (weight): Fg = mg = m x 9.8
𝑚
For equilibrium: Fm = Fg  2 x 10-3 I𝑙 = m x 9.8  2 x 10-3 I = 𝑙 x 9.8 = 9.8 x 10-2 = 49 A
33. An unpolarized light of intensity 32 W/m2 passes through three polarizers, such that the
transmission axis of last polarizer is crossed with that of the first. If the intensity of emergent light
is 3 W/m2, then the angle between the transmission axes of the first two polarizers is
1) 300 2) 190 3) 450 4) 900
Sol. Intensity of unpolarized light: Io = 32 W/m2

Angle between first and third polarizer: 900
𝐼𝑜 32
Intensity of light coming out of first polarizer: I1 = 2
= 2
= 16 W/m2
Intensity of light coming out of second polarizer: I2 = I1 cos2  = 16 cos2 
Intensity of light coming out of third polarizer: I3 = I2 cos2 (90 - ) = 16 cos2  sin2  = 4 sin2 2
√3
3 = 4 sin2 2  sin 2 =  2 = 60   = 300
2
34. An electron is injected directly towards the centre of a large metal plate having a uniform surface
charge density of – 2.0 x 10-6 C/m2. The initial kinetic energy of the electron is 1.6 x 10-17 J. The
electron is observed to stop as it just reaches the plate. Therefore, the distance between the plate
and the point from where the electron was injected is
1) 4.4 x 10-4 m 2) 4.4 m 3) 4.4 x 10-2 m 4) insufficient data
Sol. Electric field intensity due to large metal plate: E = 𝜎 = 2.0 x 10−6 = 2.26 x 105 V/m
𝜀 8.85 𝑥 10−12
𝑜
Loss in kinetic energy of the electron: k = ki – kf = ki – 0 = 1.6 x 10-17 J

Gain in potential energy of the electron – metal plate system:
U = F r = eE r = 1.6 x 10-19 x 2.26 x 105 x r = 3.6 x 10-14 r
Conservation of energy: k = U → 1.6 x 10-17 = 1.6 x 10-19 x 2.26 x 105 x r → r = 4.4 x 10-4 m

35. Graphs (drawn with the same scale) showing the variation of pressure with volume for a certain gas
undergoing four different cyclic processes. A, B, C and D are given below. The cyclic process in
which the gas performs the greatest amount of work is
1) 2)
3) 4)
Sol. All the four processes are cyclic.

Anti-clockwise cycle represents work done on the gas
Clockwise cycle represents work done by the gas (3rd and 4th options)
Work done is proportional to area included in the closed figure.
As the area in the fourth figure is more, work done by the gas in fourth process is more
36. A rectangular meta tank filled with certain liquid is as

shown in fig. The observer whose eye is in level with
the top of the tank, can just see the corner E of the tank.
Therefore, the refractive index of the liquid is
1) 1.67 2) 1.50 3) 1.33 4) 1.25
Sol. We can apply the principle of reversibility of light.

From the dig. Light from air strikes the bottom of the vessel at point E.
If the direction of light ray is reversed, it follows the same path striking the tank at point D and then
travels parallel to the surface of the liquid. So, the angle of incidence at D becomes critical angle.
1 1 5
Refractive index:  = sin 𝜃 = 4 = 4 = 1.25
𝑐
5
37. As shown in fig., a block of mass m is suspended from a support with the help of a system of
identical springs. The force constant of each spring is k. Therefore, the frequency of oscillations is
1) 1 3𝑘 2) 1 2𝑘 3) 1 5𝑘 4) 𝟏 𝟔𝒌
√ √ √ √
2𝜋 2𝑚 2𝜋 3𝑚 2𝜋 6𝑚 𝟐𝝅 𝟓𝒎

1 𝑘
Sol. Frequency of oscillation: f = 2𝜋 √𝑚
Top 3 springs are connected in parallel: k1 = 3k
Bottom 2 springs are connected in parallel: k2 = 2k
𝑘 𝑘 3𝑘 𝑥 2𝑘 6𝑘
Effective spring constant: ks = 𝑘 1+𝑘2 = 3𝑘+2𝑘
= 5
1 2
𝟏 𝟔𝒌
Frequency of oscillation: f = 𝟐𝝅 √𝟓𝒎
38. The impedance Z of three electrical components e1, e2 and e3 has frequency f dependence as shown
by the following three curves. The three components e1, e2, e3 are respectively
1) R, L, C 2) R, C, L 3) L, R, C 4) C, R, L
Sol. Resistor: independent of frequency of the supply.

e2 is constant (st. line parallel to f axis)
Inductor: xL = L = 2f L  xL ∝ f
e3 is directly proportional to frequency: St. line passing through origin
1 1 𝟏
Capacitor: xc = =  xc ∝
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶 𝑪
e1 is inversely proportional to frequency (rectangular hyperbola)
39. The half-life period of a radioactive element E1 is equal to the mean life time of another radioactive
element E2. Initially both the elements have the same number of atoms. Therefore,
1) E2 will decay faster 2) E1 will decay faster

3) E1 & E2 will decay at the same rate 4) insufficient data
Sol. Half-life of radioactive element E1 = T = 0.693

 1
1
Mean life of radioactive element E2 =  =
2
Initial no. of atoms is equal in both materials: No1 = No2
0.693 1
Given: T =   1
=   1 = 0.693 2
2
Half-life of first element: T1 = T
0.693 0.693 𝑥 0.693
Half-life of second element: T2 = = = 0.693 T1
2 1
Half-life of second element is less, so it will decay faster.
40. Two factories are sounding their sirens at 400 Hz each. A man walks from one factory towards the
other at a speed of 2 m/s. The speed of sound is 320 m/s. The number of beats heard per second by
the man is
1) 6 2) 5 3) 2.5 4) 7.5
Sol. The observer is going from one factory to another.

Frequency received by the observer from first factory:

𝑣−𝑣𝑜 320−2 318

n1 = n ( ) = 400 ( ) = 400 = 397.5 Hz
𝑣 320 320
Frequency received by the observer from second factory:
𝑣+𝑣𝑜 320+2 322
n2 = n ( 𝑣
) = 400 ( ) = 400 320 = 402.5 Hz
320
No. of beats heard by the observer: n = n2 – n1 = 402.5 – 397.5 = 5
41. The adjacent figure shows I-V characteristics of a silicon diode. In this connection three statements
are made
I the region OC corresponds to reverse bias of the diode
II the voltage at point A is about 0.2 V
III different scales have been used along +ve and –ve directions of Y axis.
1) only I is correct 2) only I and II are correct

3) only I and III are correct 4) all the statements are correct
Sol. I. The region OC represents reverse biased diode

II. The voltage at point A is known as threshold voltage where the majority
charge carriers start flowing.
III. Forward bias: current is due to majority charge carriers (milli ampere
range) while reverse biased diode: current is due to minority charge carriers
(micro ampere range).
42. Two identical lenses made of same material of refractive index 1.5 have the focal length 12 cm.
These lenses are kept in contact and immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.35. The combination
behaves as
1) convex lens of focal length 27 cm 2) concave lens of focal length 6 cm

3) convex lens of focal length 9 cm 4) convex lens of focal length 6 cm
Sol. Lens maker’s formula: 1 = ( - 1) 2  1 = (1.5 – 1) 2  r = 12 cm

𝑓 𝑟 12 𝑅
1 1 1 1 1 1
Focal length of combination of lenses in air: 𝐹 = 𝑓 + 𝑓 = 12 + 12
=6
1 2
1 2 1 2
Effective radius of curvature: 𝐹 = ( - 1) 𝑅  6 = (1.5 – 1) 𝑅  R = 6 cm
When the combination of lenses is immersed in liquid:
1 𝜇𝑙 2 1 1.5 2
=( − 1)  =( − 1)  Fl = 27 cm (convex lens)
𝐹𝑙 𝜇𝑚 𝑅 𝐹𝑙 1.35 6
43. A cup of water is placed in a car moving at a constant acceleration a to the left. Inside the water is a
small air bubble. The figure that correctly shows the shape of the water surface and the direction of
motion of the air bubble is

Sol. As the container is accelerating towards left, the water surface should be pushed towards right.
(water surface rises towards right)
The bubble is under two mutually perpendicular accelerations. Acceleration of the vessel (towards
left) and acceleration due to buoyance force (upwards).
The resultant acceleration is as shown in figure D.
44. A sphere of radius R made up of Styrofoam (light polystyrene material) has a cavity of radius R/2.
The centre of cavity is situated at a distance of R/2 from the centre of the Styrofoam sphere. The
cavity is filled with a solid material of density five times that of Styrofoam. Now, the centre of
mass is seen to be located at a distance x from the centre of Styrofoam sphere, therefore x is
1) R/2 2) R/3 3) R/4 4) R/6
Sol. Centre of mass of the original Styrofoam sphere: c (0,0)

𝑅
Centre of mass of the sphere with cavity: c1 (− 14 , 0)
Centre of mass of the solid sphere: C (R/2, 0)
Centre of mass of the system:
𝑅 𝑅 4 4 𝑅 3 𝑅 3𝑅 4 𝑅
𝑚1 𝑥1 +𝑚2 𝑥2 𝑣1 𝜌1 (− )+ 𝑣2 𝜌2 ( 𝜋𝑅3 − 𝜋( ) )𝜌(− )+( 𝜋( ) )5𝜌 𝑹
14 2 3 3 2 2 14 3 2
xcm = 𝑚1 +𝑚2
= 𝑣1 𝜌1 +𝑣2 𝜌2
= 4 4 𝑅 3 4 𝑅 3
=𝟔
3
( 𝜋𝑅 − 𝜋( ) )𝜌+( 𝜋( ) )5𝜌
3 3 2 3 2
45. A resistor R is connected to a parallel combination of two identical batteries each with emf E and
internal resistance r. The potential drop across the resistance R is
1) 𝟐𝑬𝑹 2) 𝐸𝑅 3) 𝐸𝑅 4) 2𝐸𝑅
𝟐𝑹 + 𝒓 𝑅 + 2𝑟 2𝑅 + 𝑟 𝑅 + 2𝑟
Sol. Effective emf of the combination: E

𝑟
Effective resistance of the circuit: R + 2
𝐸
Current flowing through the circuit: i = 𝑟
𝑅+
2
𝐸 𝟐𝑬𝑹
Potential drop across the resistance: V = i Reff = 𝑟 R = 𝟐𝑹+𝒓
𝑅+
2
46. An ac source (sinusoidal with frequency 50 Hz) is connected in series with a rectifying diode, a
100  resistor, a 1000 F capacitor and a milli ammeter. After some time, the milli ammeter reads
zero. The voltage measured across the capacitor with a dc voltmeter is
1) the peak voltage of ac source 2) rms voltage of the ac source

3) avg. voltage of ac source over half cycle 4) avg. voltage of ac source over full cycle
Sol. Once the capacitor is fully charged, it does not allow any current to
flow through it (acts as open circuit).
This is the condition under which the ammeter is reading zero current.
When a dc voltmeter is connected across the capacitor, it measures the
voltage across capacitor, which happens to be the peak (maximum)
voltage of ac source

47. The frequency of the sound produced by a siren increases from 400 Hz to 1200 Hz while its
amplitude remains same. Therefore, the ratio of the intensity of the 1200 Hz wave to that of 400 Hz
wave is
1) 1 : 1 2) 3:1 3) 1 : 9 4) 9:1
Sol. Intensity of sound waves: I = 1 2A2v = 1 (2f)2A2v

2 2
I ∝ f2 (given amplitude is constant)
𝐼1 𝑓 2 𝐼 400 2 1 𝑰
𝐼2
= (𝑓1 )  𝐼1 = (1200) = 9 → 𝑰𝟐 = 9
2 2 𝟏
48. The fundamental frequency of the output of a bridge rectifier driven by ac mains is
1) 50 Hz 2) zero 3) 100 Hz 4) 25 Hz
Sol. The frequency of ac supply in India : fi = 50 Hz

A bridge rectifier involves four diodes and acts like a full wave rectifier.
A full wave rectifier rectifies both half cycles of the input supply.
Thus, the fundamental frequency of the output: f0 = 100 Hz
49. The force of attraction between the positively charged nucleus and the electron in a hydrogen atom
𝑒2
is given by f = 𝑘 𝑟2 . Assume that the nucleus is fixed. The electron, initially moving in an orbit of
radius R1 jumps into an orbit of smaller radius R2. The decrease in the total energy of the atom is
1) 𝑘𝑒 2 1 1 2) 𝑘𝑒 2 𝑅1 𝑅2 3) 𝒌𝒆𝟐 𝟏 𝟏 4) 𝑘𝑒 2 𝑅2 𝑅1
( − ) ( − ) (𝑹 − 𝑹 ) ( − )
2 𝑅1 𝑅2 2 𝑅2 2 𝑅1 2 𝟐 𝟐 𝟏 2 𝑅1 2 𝑅2 2
Sol. Since the force is inverse square and the nucleus is fixed, total energy is − 𝑘𝑒 2
2𝑟
𝑘𝑒 2
Total energy in the initial orbit: E1 = − 2𝑅
1
𝑘𝑒 2
Total energy in the final orbit: E2 = − 2𝑅
2
𝒌𝒆𝟐 𝟏 𝟏
Decrease in total energy: E = E1 – E2 = 𝟐 (𝑹 − 𝑹 )
𝟐 𝟏
50. It is observed that some of the spectral lines in hydrogen spectrum have wavelengths almost equal
to those of the spectral lines in He+ ion. Out of the following transitions in He+ that will make this
possible is
1) n = 3 to n = 1 2) n = 6 to n = 4 3) n =5 to n = 3 4) n= 3 to n = 2

Sol. Wavelength of spectral lines in hydrogen atom: 1 = R ( 1 − 1 )

 𝑛 2 𝑛2 𝑓 𝑖
1 1 1
Wavelength of spectral lines in hydrogen like atom:  = R (𝑛 2 − 𝑛 2 ) z2
𝑓 𝑖
1 1 1
Wavelength of spectral lines in helium atom: = 4R ( 2 − 2)
 𝑛𝑓 𝑛𝑖
Transition from 6 to 4 in helium ion ≅ transition from 2 to 3 in hydrogen atom
Group of Q. Nos. 51 to 54 is based on the following paragraph
A nichrome wire AB, 100 cm long and of uniform cross section is mounted on metre scale, the
points A and B coinciding with 0 cm and 100 cm marks respectively. The wire has a resistance
S = 50 ohm. Any point C along this wire, between A and B is called a variable point to which one
end of an electrical element is connected. In the following questions this arrangement will be
referred to as wire AB.
51. The emf of a battery is determined using the following circuit with wire AB. The galvanometer
shows zero deflection when one of the terminals is connected to point C. If the internal resistance
of the battery is 4 , its emf is
1) 3.75 V 2) 4.05 V 3) 2.50 V 4) 9.0 V
Sol. Current through the wire AB : I = 𝜀 = 𝜀 = 𝜀

𝑟+𝑅 4+50 54
𝜀
𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝐼𝑅 𝑥 50 𝜀
Potential gradient : 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
= 𝑙
= 54100 = 108 V/cm
Potential difference VAB :
𝜀 40𝜀
potential gradient x length = x 40 =
108 108
40𝜀
VAB = 1.5 =  40𝜀 = 162  𝜺 = 4.05 V
108
52. In the adjacent circuit, it is found that deflection in the galvanometer is 10 divisions. Also the
voltage across the wire AB is equal to that across the galvanometer. Therefore, the current
sensitivity of the galvanometer is about
1) 0.050 div/A 2) 0.066 div/A 3) 0.010 div/A 4) insufficient data
Sol. Deflection in the galvanometer: 10 divisions

𝜀 1.5
Current through the circuit: I = = = 150 A
𝑅 10000
𝑛𝑜. 𝑜𝑓 𝑑𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 10
Current sensitivity: 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
= 150 = 0.066 div/A

53. The wire AB is now a part of the adjacent circuit. With the resistors P = 50  and Q = 100 , the
null point is obtained at C where AC = 33 cm. when the resistors are interchanged, the null point is
found at C with AC = 67 cm. The systematic error in this experiment seems to be due to non-
coincidence of A and B with the 0 cm and 100 cm mark respectively. If these end errors are
equivalent to ‘a’ cm and ‘b’ cm respectively, then they are
1) 0 and 1 2) 1 and 0 3) 0.33 and 0.33 4) 1 and 1
Sol. Apply the principle of meter bridge:

50 100
=  66 + 2a = 67 + b  2a – b = 1
33+𝑎 67+𝑏
After interchanging the resistors:
100 50
67+𝑎
= 33+𝑏  67 + a = 66 + 2b  -a + 2b = 1
Solving the above equations: a = 1; b = 1
54. In the adjacent circuit, a resistance R is used. Initially with wire AB not in the circuit, the
galvanometer shows a deflection of d divisions. Now, the wire AB is connected parallel to the
galvanometer and the galvanometer shows a deflection nearly d/2 divisions. Therefore
1) R = G 2) R << G 3) R >> G 4) 𝑆𝐺
R=
𝑆+𝐺
Sol. Galvanometer reading without the wire AB : d = 1.5
𝑅+𝐺
1.5
Current in the circuit after including the wire AB: i = 𝑆𝐺
+𝑅
𝑆+𝐺
𝑑 𝑠 1.5
Current through galvanometer: 2 = 𝑠+𝐺 x 𝑆𝐺
+𝑅
𝑆+𝐺
𝑠 1.5 1 1.5
𝑠+𝐺
x 𝑆𝐺 = 2 𝑅+𝐺
+𝑅
𝑆+𝐺
Above relation is true when R >> G
Q. No. 55 to 60 are based on the following paragraph:

A wheel of a car is made of two parts. The central metal rim and the
rubber tyre.
The width of the tyre w = 16.5 cm and height h = 10.7 cm.
The tyre overlaps the rim. The total weight of the car is 1500 kg
distributed evenly. The tyres are inflated with air to a pressure 2.0
kg/cm2. The density of air at pressure of 1 kg/cm2 and at room
temperature equals 1.29 g/lit. The outer diameter of the tyre is 55.4 cm
and that of the rim is 40 cm.
Ignore the thickness of rubber and use the dimensions given here. Note
that the units mentioned above are conventional units used in everyday
life.

55. Consider the following two statements about a tyre of a car
statement A: The horizontal road surface is exactly tangential to the tyre

statement B: The tyre is inflated with excess pressure
which of the following alternatives is correct?
1) A is the result of B 2) B cannot be true

3) A cannot be true 4) neither of A and B is true
Sol. If the tyre is inflated with excess pressure, the contact area of the
tyre with the road surface is almost zero.
Theoretically there is only a point of contact.
If there is a point of contact, the horizontal road surface will be
tangential to the tyre.
56. The left side of front tyre was observed to be in contact with the road over a length L cm. The value
of L is
1) 8.85 cm 2) 9.35 cm 3) 11.36 cm 4) 10.35 cm
Sol. Mass of the car: M = 1500 kg

weight of the car: 1500g N
Given: weight of the car is evenly distributed.
1500𝑔
Weight on each tyre: 4
N
Pressure of air in each tyre: 2 kg/cm2 = 2g N/cm2
1500𝑔
𝐹 1500
Pressure on each tyre: P = 𝐴  2g = 4
𝐿𝑊
 2 = 4 𝑥 16.5 𝑥 𝐿  L = 11.36 cm
57. When five persons occupy the seats L increases by 2.5 cm. The average weight of a person is
1) 66 kg 2) 60 kg 3) 62 kg 4) 64 kg
Sol. Let the mass of each person be m.

Total mass of the car: M + 5m = 1500 + 5m
Total weight of the car: (M + 5m) g = (1500 + 5m) g
This weight is distributed uniformly on the four wheels.
Pressure of air in each tyre: 2 kg/cm2 = 2g N/cm2
Applying the equilibrium condition of the previous problem.
(1500+5𝑚)𝑔
𝐹𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 (1500+5𝑚)
Pressure = → 2g = 4
 2 x 16.5 x 13.86 =  1829.52 = 1500 + 5m
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑤𝐿1 4
5m = 329.52  m = 65.9 ≈ 66 kg

58. If five persons occupy the seats, the centre of the wheel is lowered by about
1) 1 mm 2) 2 mm 3) 3 mm 4) 4 mm
Sol. When the car is empty: L = 11.36 cm and R0 = 27.7 cm

From the dig: apply Pythagoras thm:
𝐿2 11.362
𝑅0 2 = ℎ1 2 + 4
 27.72 = ℎ1 2 + 4
 h1 = 27.12 cm
When the car is filled with passengers: L = 11.36 + 2.5 = 13.86 cm
From the dig: apply Pythagoras thm:
(𝐿+∆𝐿)2 13.862
𝑅0 2 = ℎ2 2 + 4
 27.72 = ℎ2 2 + 4
 h2 = 26.82 cm
Decrease in height of the centre of the wheel:
h = h1 – h2 = 27.12 – 26.82 = 0.3 cm = 3 mm
59. The mass of air in a tyre is about
1) 24 g 2) 49 g 3) 32 g 4) 64 g
Sol. Volume of air in the tyre:

v = A (width) = 𝜋 (R2 – r2) (width) = 𝜋 (27.72 – 202) x 16.6 = 19.03 x 103 cm3
Density of air: 1.29 gm / litre @ 1 kg/cm2 pressure.
Density of air in the tyre: d = 2 x 1.29 = 2.58 gm / litre
(the tyre is at a pressure of 2 kg/cm2)
Mass of the air in the tyre: m = v x d = 19.03 x 103 x 10-3 x 2.58 = 49 gm
60. The tyre of racing cars is very wide. Their width is nearly three times the above value. This large
width is for
1) stability and acceleration 2) streamlining and acceleration

3) streamlining and stability 4) streamlining, stability and acceleration
Sol. Advantages of wider automobile tyre:

1. Wider tyres offer more surface area (area of contact with road) hence increase the stability
of the vehicle.
2. Tyre Patch: It is the total instantaneous area of rubber in contact with road surface. Wider
tyres offer more tyre patch thus increasing the rolling friction (acceleration / deceleration
(during braking)).
61. A particle moves in XY plane according to the relations x = kt and y = kt (1 – pt) where k and p are
positive constants and t is time. Therefore
1) the trajectory of the particle is a parabola

2) the particle has a constant velocity along X axis
3) the force acting on the particle remains in the same direction even if both k and p are –ve
constants.
4) the particle has a constant acceleration along –ve Y axis

Sol. Displacement of the particle along x axis : x = kt  vx = 𝑑𝑥 = k  ax = 𝑑𝑣𝑥 = 0

𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
Displacement of the particle along y axis :
𝑑𝑦 𝑑𝑣𝑦
y = kt (1 – pt) = kt – pkt2  vy = = k – 2pkt  ay = = 0 – 2pk = - 2pk
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑥 𝑥 𝑝𝑥 𝒑
a) y = kt (1 – pt) = k 𝑘 (1 – p 𝑘) = x (1 − 𝑘
) = x - 𝒌 x2 (parabola)
b) Velocity along x axis: vx = k (constant)
̅ = m𝒂
c) Force on the particle: 𝑭 ̅ = -2mpk 𝒋̂ (remains same even if p & k are –ve)
d) Acceleration along y axis: ay = - 2pk (constant and along – ve y axis)
62. 62) A charge q is situated at the origin. Let EA, EB and EC be the electric fields at the points
A (2, -3, -1), B (-1, -2, 4) and C (2, -4, 1). Therefore
1) EA ⊥ EB
2) no work is done in moving a test charge q0 from B to C
3) 2 |𝑬𝑨 | = 3 |𝑬𝑩 |
4) EB = - EC
Sol. Electric field intensity in vector form : 𝐸̅ = 𝑘𝑞 𝑟̅

𝑟3
𝑘𝑞 𝑘𝑞
Field intensity at point A : EA = 14 (2𝑖̂ − 3𝑗̂ − 1𝑗̂)  |𝑬𝑨 | =
√14 14
𝑘𝑞 𝑘𝑞
Field intensity at point B : EB = (−1𝑖̂ − 2𝑗̂ + 4𝑗̂)  |𝑬𝑩 |=
21√21 21
𝑘𝑞
Field intensity at point C : EC = (2𝑖̂ − 4𝑗̂ + 1𝑗̂)
21√21
Angle between EA and EB: (2𝑖̂ − 3𝑗̂ − 1𝑗̂) . (−1𝑖̂ − 2𝑗̂ + 4𝑗̂) = 0   = 900
From the magnitudes of EA and EB: 2 |𝑬𝑨 | = 3 |𝑬𝑩 |
𝑬𝑩 −𝑬𝒄
Potential difference between B and C: VBC = VB – VC = 𝒅
=0
So, no work is done in moving a test charge q0 from B to C
63. A uniform spherical charge distribution of radius R produces electric fields E1 and E2 at two points
at distances r1 and r2 respectively from the centre of the distribution. Out of the following the
𝐸
possible expression/s for 𝐸1 is/are
2
1) 𝑟2 2) 𝑟1 2 3) 𝑹𝟑 4) 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐 𝟐
𝑟1 ( )
𝑟2 𝒓𝟏 𝟐 𝒓𝟐 𝑹𝟑
Sol. Field intensity outside the charge distribution: E = 1 𝑄

4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2
𝑜
1 𝑄
Field intensity inside the charge distribution: E = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑅3 r
𝑜
𝐸1 𝑟2 2
Ratio of field intensity for outside points: = ( )
𝐸2 𝑟1
𝐸1 𝑟1
Ratio of field intensity for inside points: 𝐸 = 𝑟
2 2
𝑬 𝒓 𝒓 𝟐
Ratio of field intensity for inside and outside points: 𝑬𝟏 = 𝟏𝑹𝟑𝟐
𝟐
𝑬𝟏 𝑹𝟑
Ratio of field intensity for outside and inside points: = 𝟐
𝑬𝟐 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐

64. A metallic wire of length 𝑙 is held between two supports under some tension. The wire is cooled
through  0 Let Y be the Young’s modulus,  the density and  the thermal coefficient of linear
expansion of the material of the wire. Therefore, the frequency of oscillations of the wire varies as
1) √𝒀 𝟏
2) √𝜽 3) 4) √
𝜶
𝒍 𝝆
Sol. Thermal stress developed in the wire : Y

1 𝑇 1 𝑇 1 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠 1 𝑌
Frequency of oscillation of a wire : f = 2𝑙 √𝜇 = 2𝑙 √𝐴 = 2𝑙 √ 
= 2𝑙 √ 
𝟏 𝜶
f ∝ √𝒀  f ∝ √𝜽  f ∝  f ∝ √
𝒍 𝝆
65. Water is flowing through a vertical tube with varying cross section as shown. The rate of flow is
52.5 cm3/s. Given that speed of flow v1 = 0.35 m/s and area of cross section A2 = 0.5 cm2. Which of
the following is/are true?
1) A1 = 1.0 cm2, v2 = 0.70 m/s 2) A1 = 1.5 cm2, v2 = 1.05 m/s

3) h = 5 cm 4) h = 10 cm
Sol. Volume rate of flow: Q = Av

52.5 = A1v1  52.5 = A1(0.35)  A1 = 1.5 cm2
52.5 = A2v2  52.5 = 0.5 x v2  v2 = 1.05 m/s
Conservation of energy: Ei = Ef
1 1
2
mv12 + mgh = 2mv22  v12 + 2gh = v22
0.1225 + 20h = v22 → 0.1225 + 20h = 1.1025 → h = 4.9 cm
66. A simple laboratory power supply consists of a transformer, bridge rectifier and a filter capacitor.
It drives a suitable load. If due to some reason one of the diodes in the rectifier circuit becomes
open, then
1) output voltage of power supply falls to zero

2) output voltage of power supply decreases to some non-zero value
3) ac ripple in the output increases
4) ripple frequency decreases
Sol. +ve half cycle : D1, D2 conduct (series)

−ve half cycle : D3, D4 conduct (series)
If one of the diodes becomes open, corresponding series

diode also stops conducting
So, the circuit essentially behaves like a half wave rectifier.
Ripple frequency: half wave: input frequency

Ripple frequency: full wave: 2 x input frequency
Output voltage: half wave: Vdc = 0.318 Vmax
Output voltage: full wave: Vdc = 0.637 Vmax

67. Circuit A is a series LCR circuit with CA = C and LA = L. Another circuit B has CB = 2C and
LB = L/2. Both the circuits have the same resistance; the capacitor and the inductor are taken to be
ideal components. Each of the circuits is connected to the same sinusoidal voltage source.
Therefore,
1) both the circuits have the same resonant frequency

2) both the circuits carry the same peak current
3) resonance curve for circuit A is more sharp than that of circuit B
4) resonance curve for circuit B is more sharp than that of circuit A
Sol. a) Resonant frequency:

1 1 1 1
f0 = 2𝜋  f1 = 2𝜋 and f2 = = 2𝜋
√𝐿𝐶 √𝐿𝐶 𝐿 √𝐿𝐶
2𝜋√( )2𝐶
2
b) Peak current occurs at resonance.

Since resonant frequency is same for both circuits,
They have same resistance and supply voltage, both
Circuits carry same peak current.
68. The variation of acceleration with time for a particle performing SHM along a straight line is as
shown in fig. Therefore,
a) the particle has non-zero displacement initially

b) the displacement of the particle at point 1 is negative
c) the velocity of the particle at point 2 is positive
d) the potential energy at point 3 is maximum
Sol. Acceleration of the particle from the graph: a = A2 sin (t + )
Displacement of the particle from the graph: x = - A sin (t + )
Velocity of the particle from the graph: v = 𝐴𝜔 cos (t + )
a) From displacement equation: at t = 0; x = - A sin  (non-zero displacement)

b) From displacement equation: at point 1, displacement is – ve
c) Acceleration is zero at point 2: mean position: moving towards +ve extreme
d) From the acceleration graph: a is maximum at point 3 (extreme position):
Potential energy of SHO is maximum at extreme position.
69. Which of the following physical quantities have dimensions identical to each other
1) the Young’s modulus

2) oE2 where E is the electric field intensity and o is the permittivity of free space
𝑩𝟐
3) 𝝁 where B is the magnetic field and o is the permeability of free space
𝒐
4) kT where k is Boltzmann’s constant and T is absolute temperature

Sol. Young’s modulus: Y = 𝐹𝑙 = 𝑀𝐿𝑇 −2 𝐿 = [ML-1T-2]

𝐴 ∆𝑙 𝐿2 𝐿
1 𝑒𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝑀𝐿2 𝑇 −2
Electrical Energy density : 2 oE2 = 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 = 𝐿3
= [ML-1T-2]
1 𝐵2 𝑒𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝑀𝐿2 𝑇 −2
Magnetic Energy density: 2 𝜇 = 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 = 𝐿3
= [ML-1T-2]
𝑜
3
Average translational kinetic energy: 2 kT = energy = [ML2T-2]
70. A small ball bearing is released at the top of a long vertical column of glycerin of height 2h. The
ball bearing falls through a height h in a time t1 and then the remaining height with terminal
velocity in time t2. Let W1 and W2 be the work done against viscous drag over these heights.
Therefore,
1) t1 < t2 2) t1 > t2 3) W1 = W2 4) W1 < W2
Sol. For the first h height, the ball bearing is decelerating and for the next h height, it is moving with
uniform velocity. So time taken during deceleration is greater than that during motion with uniform
velocity. (t1 > t2)
Viscous force is directly proportional to speed. During the first half, the speed increases and then
decreases to come to a constant value before the starting of the second half.
So, work done against viscous drag is greater in the second half.

1. Consider two point masses m1 and m2 connected by a light rigid rod of length ro. The moment of
inertia of the system about an axis passing through their centre of mass and perpendicular to the
rigid rod is given by
𝑚1 𝑚2 𝒎𝟏 𝒎𝟐 2𝑚1 𝑚2 2 𝑚1 2 + 𝑚2 2 2
1) 𝑟2
2(𝑚1 +𝑚2 ) 𝑜
2) 𝒓 𝟐 3) 𝑟 4) 𝑟
𝒎𝟏 + 𝒎𝟐 𝒐 𝑚1 + 𝑚2 𝑜 𝑚1 + 𝑚2 𝑜
Sol. Distance of first particle from axis of rotation : r1 = 𝑚2 𝑟𝑜

𝑚 +𝑚 1 2
𝑚1
Distance of second particle from axis of rotation : r2 = 𝑟
𝑚1 +𝑚2 𝑜
𝑚 2
Moment of inertia of first particle : m1r12 = m1 ( 2 𝑟𝑜 )
𝑚1 +𝑚2
𝑚1 2
Moment of inertia of second particle : m2r22 = m2 (𝑚 +𝑚 𝑟𝑜 )
1 2
𝑚2 2 𝑚 2 𝒎 𝒎
Total moment of inertia : I = m1r1 + m2r2 = m1 (
2 2
𝑟𝑜 ) + m2 ( 1 𝑟𝑜 ) = 𝟏 𝟐 𝒓𝒐 𝟐
𝑚1 +𝑚2 𝑚1 +𝑚2 𝒎𝟏 +𝒎𝟐
2. Motion of a particle in a plane is described by the non-orthogonal set of co-ordinates (p, q) with
unit vectors (𝑝̂ , 𝑞̂) inclined at an angle  as shown in the diagram. If the mass of the particle is m,
𝑑𝑥
its kinetic energy is given by (𝑥̇ = 𝑑𝑡 )
1) 1 2) 1
𝑚(𝑝̇ 2 + 𝑞̇ 2 − 𝑝̇ 𝑞̇ (1 − 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ))
𝑚(𝑝̇ 2 + 𝑞̇ 2 + 𝑝̇ 𝑞̇ cos ) 2
2
3) 𝟏 4) 1
𝒎(𝒑̇ 𝟐 + 𝒒̇ 𝟐 + 𝟐𝒑̇ 𝒒̇ 𝒄𝒐𝒔 ) 𝑚(𝑝̇ 2 + 𝑞̇ 2 + 𝑝̇ 𝑞̇ co𝑡 )
𝟐 2
Sol. Position vector of the particle: 𝑟⃗ = p 𝑝̂ + q 𝑞̂

𝑑𝑟⃗ 𝑑𝑝 𝑑𝑞
Velocity vector of the particle: 𝑣⃗ = 𝑑𝑡 = 𝑑𝑡 𝑝̂ + 𝑑𝑡
𝑞̂
𝑑𝑝 𝑑𝑞 𝑑𝑝 𝑑𝑞
𝑣⃗.𝑣⃗ = ( 𝑑𝑡 𝑝̂ + 𝑞̂) . ( 𝑑𝑡 𝑝̂ + 𝑞̂)
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
1 1 1 𝑑𝑝2 𝑑𝑞2
Multiply throughout with 2m: 2mv2 = 2m [ 𝑑𝑡 + 𝑑𝑡 + 2𝑝𝑞 cos 𝜃]
𝟏
Kinetic energy: 𝟐 𝒎(𝒑̇ 𝟐 + 𝒒̇ 𝟐 + 𝟐𝒑̇ 𝒒̇ 𝒄𝒐𝒔 )
3. A man is going in a lift (open at the top) moving with a constant velocity 3 m/s. He throws a ball
up at 5 m/s relative to the lift when the lift is 50 m above the ground. Height of the lift when the
ball meets it during its downward journey is (g = 10 m/s2)
1) 53 m 2) 58 m 3) 63 m 4) 68 m
Sol. Velocity of the ball w.r.to lift: vbl = vb – vl = 5 m/s  vb = vl + 5 = 3 + 5 = 8 m/s

Time of ascent of the ball: vb/g = 8/10 = 0.8 sec
Maximum height reached by the ball: vb2 / 2g = 64 / 20 = 3.2 m
Distance travelled by the lift during upward journey of the ball: 3 x 0.8 = 2.4 m
The ball will meet the lift during its downward journey; the lift is still moving up
1
For time of contact: 3.2 – 2.4 = 0.8 = vlt + 2gt2  0.8 = 3t + 5t2  t = 0.2 sec
Distance travelled by lift during this time: 3 x 0.2 = 0.6 m
Total height of the lift: 50 + 2.4 + 0.6 = 53 m

4. When a body is suspended from a fixed point by a spring, the angular frequency of its vertical
oscillations is 1 . When a different spring is used, the angular frequency is 2 . The angular
frequency of vertical oscillations when both the springs are used together in series is given by
1)  = [1 2 + 2 2 ]1/2 2)  = [( 2 + 2 2 )/2]1/2

1
𝟏/𝟐 1/2
𝟏 𝟐 𝟐 𝟐 1 2 2 2
3)  = [ 𝟐 ] 4)  = [ ]
𝟏 + 𝟐 𝟐 2(1 2 + 2 2 )
Sol. 2𝑝 𝑘
Angular frequency of vertical oscillations of spring + block :  = =√
𝑇 𝑚
𝑘 𝑘
1 = √ 𝑚1  𝑘1 = 12 m AND 2 = √ 𝑚2  𝑘2 = 22 m
𝟏/𝟐
𝑘 𝑘1 𝑘2 𝜔 2 m 𝜔 2m  𝟐 𝟐
 = √ 𝑚𝑠  𝑘𝑠 = 2 m → 𝑘𝑠 = 𝑘1 +𝑘2
 2 m = 𝜔 12 m+𝜔2 2 m   = [ 𝟏𝟐 𝟐 𝟐]
1 2 + 𝟏 𝟐
5. A small pond of depth 0.5 m deep is exposed to a cold winter with outside temperature of 263 K.
Thermal conductivity of ice is K = 2.2 Wm-1 K-1 latent heat of ice L = 3.4 x 105 J kg-1 and density
 = 0.9 x 103 kg m-3 Take the temperature of the pond to be 273 K. The time taken for the whole
pond to freeze is about
1) 20 days 2) 25 days 3) 30 days 4) 35 days
Sol. Time taken to freeze the pond: t = 1 𝐿

y2 (y is thickness of the ice layer)
2 𝑘 𝐷𝑇
Given data: = 0.9 x 103 kg m-3 / L = 3.4 x 105 J kg-1 / K = 2.2 Wm-1 K-1 / y = 0.5 m
1 0.9 𝑥 103 𝑥3.4 x 105
Time taken to freeze the pond: t = x 0.52  t = 20 days
2 2.2 𝑥 10
6. A body of mass 4 kg moves under the action of force 𝐹̅ = (4𝑖̂ + 12t2 𝑗̂) N, where t is time in sec.
The initial velocity of the particle is (2 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ + 2 𝑘̂ ) m/s. If the force is applied for 1 s, work done is
1) 4 J 2) 8 J 3) 12 J 4) 16 J
Sol. Impulse by variable force: ∫1 𝐹 𝑑𝑡 = P = m (v – u)  ∫1(4𝑖̂ + 12t2 𝑗̂) 𝑑𝑡 = 4 (v – (2 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ + 2 𝑘̂ ))

0 0
𝑡3
[4t 𝑖̂ + 12 3
𝑗̂] = 4v - (8 𝑖̂ + 4𝑗̂ + 8𝑘̂ )  4𝑖̂ + 4 𝑗̂ = 4v - (8𝑖̂ + 4𝑗̂ + 8𝑘̂ )
4v = 12𝑖̂ + 8𝑗̂ + 8𝑘̂  v = 3𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂ + 2𝑘̂

1 1
Work energy thm: work done = change in KE = m (v2 – u2) = x 4 x (17 – 9) = 16 J
2 2
7. A racing car moves along a circular track of radius b. The car starts from rest and its speed
increases at a constant rate . Let the angle between the velocity and the acceleration be  at time t.
Then cos  is
1) 0 2) at2 /b 3) b/(b + at2 ) 4) bt/(b2 + 2t4 )1/2

Sol. As the car is moving along circular path, velocity is always tangential.
Rate of increase in speed: tangential acceleration: at = 
Speed of the particle at t sec. : v = u + at = 0 + at = t
𝑣2 2 𝑡 2
Centripetal acceleration: ac = 𝑏
= 𝑏
2 𝑡 2 2 𝛼4𝑡 4
Resultant acceleration: a = √𝑎𝑐 2 + 𝑎𝑡 2 = √( 𝑏
) + 𝛼2 = √ 𝑏2
+ 𝛼2
𝑣 𝛼𝑡
Angle between v and a: cos  = 𝑎 = 4 4
= bt/(b2 + 2t4 )1/2
√𝛼 2𝑡 +𝛼 2
𝑏
8. A small fish, 4 cm below the surface of a lake, is viewed through a thin convergent lens of focal
length 30 cm held 2 cm above the water surface. Refractive index of water is 1.33. The image of
the fish from the lens is at a distance of
1) 10 cm 2) 8 cm 3) 6 cm 4) 4 cm
Sol. Apparent depth of the fish: da = 𝑑 = 4 = 3 cm (object distance)

𝜇 4/3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula: 𝑣 - 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑣 + 5 = 30  𝑣 = 30 - 5 = − 6  v = −𝟔 cm
9. A horizontal ray of light passes through a prism of refractive index 1.5 and apex angle 40 and then
strikes a vertical plane mirror place to the right of the prism. If after reflection, the ray is to be
horizontal, then the mirror must be rotated through an angle
1) 10 clockwise 2) 10 anti-clockwise 3) 20 clockwise 4) 20 anti-clockwise
Sol. Deviation produced by the prism:  = ( - 1) A = (1.5 – 1) 4 = 20

This light ray falls on the plane mirror at an angle of incidence: 20
For the reflected ray to be horizontal, it has to deviate by 20.
So, the mirror is to be rotated clockwise by 10
10. An isolated metallic object is charged in vacuum to a potential V0 using a suitable source, its
electrostatic energy, being W0. It is then disconnected from the source and immersed in a large
volume of dielectric with dielectric constant K. The electrostatic energy of the sphere in the
dielectric is
1) K2 W0 2) KW0 3) W0 / K2 4) W0 / K
Sol. Electrostatic energy: W0 = 1 QV0

2
𝑉𝑜
When the charged object is placed in dielectric: new potential: V =
𝐾
Charge remains same as the object is disconnected from the source.
1 1 𝑉𝑜 1 1 𝑾𝒐
New electrostatic energy: W = 2 Q V = 2 Q 𝐾
= 𝐾 2 QV0 = 𝑲

11. Two identical coils each of self-inductance L are connected in series and are placed so close to each
other that all the flux from one coil links with the other. The total self-inductance of the system is
1) L 2) 2L 3) 3L 4) 4L
Sol. Series combination of inductors: L = L1 + L2 ± 2M

M is mutual induction: M = k √𝐿1 𝐿2 (k is coefficient of coupling)
Since all the flux from first coil links the second coil, k =1
L = L1 + L2 + 2 k √𝐿1 𝐿2 = L + L + 2L = 4L
12. A coil 2.0 cm in diameter has 300 turns. If the coil carries a current of 10 mA and lies in a magnetic
field 5 x 10-2 T, the maximum torque experienced by the coil is
1) 4.7 x 10-2 Nm 2) 4.7 x 10-4 Nm 3) 4.7 x 10-5 Nm 4) 4.7 x 10-8 Nm
Sol. Torque on current carrying coil :  = MB sin 

𝑑2
Maximum torque : max = MB = iAn B = i  4
nB
0.022
max = 10 x 10-3 x  x x 300 x 5 x 10-2 = 4.7 x 10-5 Nm
4
13. A particle performs simple harmonic motion at a frequency f. The frequency at which its kinetic
energy varies is
1) f 2) 2f 3) 4f 4) f/2
Sol. Frequency of oscillation of the particle: f

Displacement of a particle in SHM: x = A cos 𝜔𝑡 = A cos 2f t
𝑑𝑥
Velocity of the particle in SHM: v = = - A sin t = - A sin 2f t
𝑑𝑡
1 1
Kinetic energy of the particle in SHM: k = 2 m v2 = 2 m (− Asin 2pf t)2
1
k = 2 m 2 A2 sin2 (2ft) = kmax sin2 (2ft) = kmax (1 – cos 2(2ft))
Frequency of oscillation of the kinetic energy: 2f
14. In case of real images formed by a thin convex lens, the linear magnification is
(I) directly proportional to the image distance

(II) inversely proportional to the object distance
(III) directly proportional to the distance of the image from the nearest principal focus
(IV) inversely proportional to the distance of the object from the nearest focus
From these the correct statements are
1) (I) and (II) only 2) (III) and (IV) only

3) (I), (II), (III) and (IV) all 4) none of (I), (II), (III) and (IV)

Sol. For real image formed by convex lens: 1 − 1 = 1 (u – ve / v +ve)

𝑣 𝑢 𝑓
1 1 1 𝑣 𝑣 𝑣 𝑣 𝑣 𝑣−𝑓
+𝑢 =𝑓𝑣+𝑢 =𝑓 1+m=𝑓m= −1m=
𝑣 𝑓 𝑓
1 1 1 𝑢 𝑢 𝑢 1 𝑢 1 𝑢 𝑓
𝑣
+𝑢 =𝑓𝑣+𝑢 =𝑓 𝑚+1=𝑓𝑚=𝑓−1m= 𝑢−𝑓
Let the distance from focal length: x  u = f + x and v = f + x
𝑣−𝑓 𝑓+ 𝑥 −𝑓 𝒙 𝑓 𝑓 𝒇
m= 𝑓
= 𝑓
= 𝒇 and m = 𝑢−𝑓 = 𝑓+𝑥 −𝑓 = 𝒙
15. An infinitely long straight non-magnetic conducting wire of radius a carries a dc current I. The
magnetic field B, at a distance r (r < a) from axis of wire is
1) 𝑜 𝐼 / 2a 2) 𝒐 𝑰𝒓 / 2a2 3) 2𝑜 𝐼𝑟 / a2 4) 𝑜 𝐼r2 / 2a3
Sol. Figure shows the cross – sectional view of the conductor.
Ampere’s rule : magnetic field inside the conductor : r (r < a)
𝑟2
∫ 𝐵. ̅ = o i  B (2r) = o i  B (2r) = o
̅ 𝑑𝑙 I  B = 𝒐 𝑰𝒓 / 2a2
𝑎2
16. 𝑒2
A quantity  is defined as  = ℎ where e is electric charge, h is Planck’s constant and c is
4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑐
2𝜋
speed of light. The dimensions of  are
1) [𝑴𝟎 𝑳𝟎 𝑻𝟎 𝑰𝟎 ] 2) [𝑀1 𝐿−1 𝑇 2 𝐼 −2 ] 3) [𝑀2 𝐿1 𝑇 −1 𝐼 0 ] 4) [𝑀0 𝐿3 𝑇1 𝐼 −2 ]
Sol. Given : 𝑒2 𝑒 2 2𝜋 2𝜋 [𝑀𝐿𝑇 −2 𝐿2 ]

ℎ = = Fr2 = = [M0L0T0]
4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑐 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 ℎ𝑐 𝐸 [𝑀𝐿2 𝑇 −2 𝐿]
2𝜋
Dimensional formula of force: [MLT-2]

Dimensional formula of distance: [L]
Dimensional formula of energy: [ML2T-2]
Dimensional formula of wavelength: [L]
17. The earth’s magnetic field at a certain point is 7.0 x 10-5 T. This field is to be balanced by a
magnetic field at the centre of a circular current carrying coil of radius 5 cm by suitably orienting it.
If the coil has 100 turns then the required current is about
1) 28 mA 2) 56 mA 3) 100 mA 4) 560 mA
Sol. Earth’s magnetic field: Be = 7.0 x 10-5 T

𝜇𝑜 𝑖𝑛 4𝜋𝑥10−7 𝑖 100
Magnetic field at the centre of circular coil: B = 2𝑟
= 2 𝑥 0.05
= 4 x 10-4 i
Both the fields should balance each other: Be = B  7.0 x 10-5 = 4 x 10-4 i
0.7 700
i = 4𝜋 = 4𝜋
mA = 55.7 mA ≅ 56 mA

18. The equation correctly represented by the following graph is (a and b are constants)
1) x + y = b 2) ax2 + by2 = 0 3) x + y = ab 4) y = axb
Sol. The graphs is a straight line with positive slope and positive y intercept :
y = mx + c
log y = m log x + c (m is slope; c is y intercept)
𝑚 𝑚
y = 𝑒 (ln 𝑥 +𝑐)  y = 𝑒 ln 𝑥 𝑒 𝑐
y = xm𝑒 𝑐 (𝑒 𝑐 is constant; m is slope of straight line: constant)
19. Which one of the following devices does not respond to the intensity of light incident on it?
1) photoresistor (LDR) 2) photodiode 3) Light Emitting Diode 4) solar cell
Sol.
20. Consider a parallel plate capacitor. When half of the space between the plates is filled with some
dielectric material of dielectric constant K as shown in fig (1) below, the capacitance is C1.
However, if the same dielectric material fills half the space as shown in fig (2), the capacitance is
C2. Therefore, the ratio C1 : C2 is
1) 1 2) 2𝐾 3) 𝟒𝑲 4) 𝐾+1
𝐾+1 (𝑲 + 𝟏)𝟐 2
Sol. Case 1 : series combination Case 2 : parallel combination

1 1 1 1 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 1 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝐾𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝑐1
=𝐶 +𝐶 𝐶 = 2𝜀𝑜 𝐴
+ 2𝐾𝜀𝑜 𝐴
= 2𝜀𝑜 𝐴
(1 + 𝐾
) 𝐶2 = 𝐶𝑜 + 𝐶𝐾 = 2𝑑
+ 2𝑑
= 2𝑑
(1+K)
𝑜 𝐾 1
2𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝐾 𝟒𝑲
C1 = 𝑑 𝐾+1 Ratio of capacitances: C1 : C2 = (𝑲+𝟏)𝟐
21. A point source of light is viewed through a plate of glass of thickness t and refractive index 1.5.
The source appears
1) closer by a distance 2t/3 2) closer by a distance t/3

3) farther by a distance t/3 4) farther by a distance 2t/3
Sol. Apparent shift: t (1 − 1 ) = t (1 − 2) = 𝒕

𝜇 3 𝟑

22. The fraction of the original number of nuclei of a radioactive atom having a mean life of 10 days,
that decays during the 5th day is
1) 0.15 2) 0.30 3) 0.045 4) 0.064
Sol. Decay constant of the radioactive sample:  = 1 = 1

𝜏 10
2 1
Number of decays during 5th day: N(4) – N(5) = No e-4 - No e-5 = No (e-4 - e-5) = No (𝑒 −5 − 𝑒 −2 )
2 1
N(4) – N(5)
Fractional number of nuclei decayed in 5th day: 𝑁𝑜
= 𝑒 −5 − 𝑒 −2 = 0.064
23. The photoelectric threshold wavelength of tungsten is 230 nm. The energy of electrons ejected
from its surface by ultraviolet light of wavelength 180 nm is
1) 0.15 eV 2) 1.5 eV 3) 15 eV 4) 1.5 k eV
Sol. Threshold wavelength of tungsten: o = 230 nm

Wavelength of incident radiation:  = 180 nm
ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1 1
Einstein’s photoelectric equation: E =  + kmax  =  + kmax  hc ( −  ) = kmax
 𝑜 𝑜
1 1
1240 (( − ) = kmax  kmax = 1.5 eV
180 230
24. A slit of width a is illuminated by parallel monochromatic light of wavelength . The value of a at
which the first minimum of diffraction pattern will form at  = 300 is
1) /2 2)  3) 2 4) 3
Sol. Condition for diffraction minima: a sin  = m  a sin 30 = 1 x   a = 2
25. A whistle whose air column is open at both ends has a fundamental frequency 500 Hz. The whistle
is dipped in water such that half of it remains out of water. What will be the fundamental frequency
now? (speed of sound in air is 340 m/s)
1) 250 Hz 2) 125 Hz 3) 500 Hz 4) 1000 Hz
Sol. Fundamental frequency of open pipe: 𝑣 = 500 Hz

2𝑙
𝑙
When the pipe is dipped in water to half the depth: 𝑙𝑐 = 2
𝑣 𝑣 𝑣
Fundamental frequency of closed pipe: 4𝑙 = 𝑙 = 2𝑙 = 500 Hz
𝑐 4
2

26. The physical quantity that has unit volt-second is
1) energy 2) electric flux 3) magnetic flux 4) inductance
Sol. Dimensional formula of volt-second: 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑘 𝑥 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒 = [ML2T-2I-1]

𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑒
Dimensional formula of energy: work = [ML2T-2]

𝑞
Dimensional formula of electric flux 𝜑𝑒 : 𝜀 = [ML3T-3I-1]
𝑜
Dimensional formula of magnetic flux 𝜑𝐵 : BA = [ML2T-2I-1]

𝜑𝐵
Dimensional formula of inductance: L = 𝐼
= [ML2T-2I-2]
27. Consider different orientations of a bar magnet lying in a uniform magnetic field as shown below.
The potential energy is maximum in orientation
1) 2) 3) 4)
̅ . 𝐵̅ = −𝑀𝐵 cos 𝜃
Sol. Potential energy of a magnet in uniform magnetic field: U = −𝑀
Magnetic moment is directed from S pole to N pole
In figure:2, M and B are opposite to each other ( = 1800): Umax = −𝑀𝐵 cos 180 = 𝑀𝐵
28. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a common point by two light strings of length 𝑙, are
initially at a distance d (≪ 𝑙) apart due to their mutual repulsion. The charges begin to leak from
both the spheres at a constant rate. As a result, the spheres approach each other with a velocity v. If
x denotes the distance between the spheres, then v varies as
1) x-1 2) x1/2 3) x -1/2 4) x
Sol. For equilibrium of the charges:

Fx = Fe – T sin   Fe – T sin  = 0  Fe = T sin 
Fy = T cos  - mg  T cos  - mg = 0  mg = T cos 
𝐹 𝑥 𝑘𝑞2 2𝑙𝑘
tan  = 𝑚𝑔
𝑒
 2𝑙 = 𝑥 2 𝑚𝑔  𝑥 3 = 𝑚𝑔 𝑞 2  q = K1 x3/2
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑞
Differentiate w.r.to time: 3x2 𝑑𝑡
= K 2q 𝑑𝑡
2𝐾 𝑑𝑞 2𝐾 1 3/2 -2 𝑑𝑞 𝑑𝑞
v= 3
q x-2 𝑑𝑡
= 3
K x x 𝑑𝑡 = K11 x-1/2 𝑑𝑡  v ∝ x -1/2

29. A network of six identical capacitors, each of capacitance C is formed as shown below. The
equivalent capacitance between the point A and B is
1) 3C 2) 6C 3) 3C/2 4) 4C/3
Sol. Capacitance between A and D: 2C

Capacitance between E and B: 2C
2𝐶 2𝐶 4𝐶
Effective capacitance between A and B: Parallel combination: CAB = 3
+ 3
= 3
30. A cylinder on whose surfaces there is a vertical electric field of varying magnitude as shown. The
electric field is uniform on the top surface as well as on the bottom surface. Therefore, this cylinder
encloses
1) no net charge 2) net positive charge

3) net negative charge 4) there is not enough information to determine the charge
Sol. Gauss’ theorem : net = Enet A = (800 – 400) A = 400A

𝑞
net = 𝜀𝑖𝑛  qin = net 𝜀𝑜 = 400A𝜀𝑜
𝑜
So the net charge inside the closed surface : qin = 400A𝜺𝒐
31. Two identical solid blocks A and B are made of two different materials. Block A floats in a liquid
with half of its volume submerged. When block B is pasted over A, the combination is found to just
float in the liquid. The ratio of the densities of the liquid, material of A & material of B is given by
1) 1 : 2 : 3 2) 2 : 1 : 4 3) 2 : 1 : 3 4) 1:3:2
Sol. Floatation of A: mAg = FB  v dA g = 𝑣 dl g  dl = 2dA

2
Floatation of A & B: mA g + mB g = 2v dl g vg (dA + dB) = 2v dl g
dA + dB
d1 =  dB = 2dl – dA = 3dA
2
dl : dA : dB = 2dA : dA : 3dA = 2 : 1 : 3
32. In an X ray tube the electrons are expected to strike the target with a velocity that is 10 % of the
velocity of light. The applied voltage would be
1) 517.6 V 2) 1052 V 3) 2.559 kV 4) 5.680 kV

Sol. Speed of electrons : v = 10 % of c = 0.1 x 3 x 108 = 3 x 107 m/s

Electrons acquire this speed due to work done by electric field applied between cathode and anode.
1 1 1
Work energy them : wnet = k = kf – ki = 2m (v2 – u2) = 2m (v2 – 0) = 2mv2
Work done by electric field : w = qV = eV

1 𝑣2 (3 x 107)2
eV = 2mv2  V = 𝑒 = 2 𝑥 1.76 𝑥 1011
= 2.559 kV
2
𝑚
33. When observed from the earth the angular diameter of sun is 0.5 degree. The diameter of the image
of the sun when formed in a concave mirror of focal length 0.5 m will be about
1) 3.0 mm 2) 4.4 mm 3) 5.6 mm 4) 8.8 mm
Sol. Object distance : u = infinity (∞)

1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula : 𝑣 - =  + =  v = f
𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 ∞ 𝑓
𝐴𝐵
tan  = 𝑃𝐹 (for small angles tan  = )
𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒
θ= 𝑓𝑜𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
 diameter of image = f
𝜋
Diameter of image: 0.5 x x 500 = 4.4 mm
180
34. The decimal number that is represented by the binary number (100011.101)2 is
1) 23.350 2) 35.625 3) 39.245 4) 42.455
Sol. Binary number given : 100011.1012

Binary to decimal : 1 x 25 + 0 x 24 + 0 x 23 + 0 x 22 + 1 x 21 + 1 x 20 + 1 x 2-1 + 0 x 2-2 + 1 x 2-3
= 32 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 2 + 1 + 0.5 + 0 + 0.125 = 35.625
35. The excess pressure inside a soap bubble is equal to 2 mm of kerosene (density 0.8 g/cc). If the
diameter of the bubble is 3.0 cm, the surface tension of the soap solution is
1) 39.2 dyne/cm 2) 45.0 dyne/cm 3) 51.1 dyne/cm 4) 58.8 dyne/cm
Sol. Excess pressure in a soap bubble: p = 4𝑇

𝑟
Pressure due to liquid column: p = hg = 2 x 10-3 x 800 x 9.8 = 15.68 N/m2
4𝑇 15.68 𝑥 1.5 𝑥 10−2
Given: p = p → = 15.68  T = = 0.0588 N/m = 58.8 dyne/cm
𝑟 4
36. Let V and I be the readings of the voltmeter and ammeter respectively as shown in the figure. Let
RV and RA be their corresponding resistances. Therefore,
1) 𝑉 2) 𝑹 = 𝑽 3) 𝑅 = 𝑅𝑉 − 𝑅𝐴 4) 𝑉(𝑅 + 𝑅𝐴 )
𝑅= 𝑽 𝑅=
𝐼 𝑰−
𝑹𝑽 𝐼𝑅𝐴

Sol. Reading of the voltmeter: V = IReff

𝑅𝑅 𝑉 𝑅𝑅 𝐼 𝑅+𝑅𝑣 1 1 1 𝐼 1
V = I 𝑅+𝑅𝑣  𝐼 = 𝑅+𝑅𝑣  𝑉 = 𝑅𝑅𝑣
=𝑅+𝑅 𝑅=𝑉-𝑅
𝑣 𝑣 𝑣 𝑣
1 𝑽
R= 𝐼 1 (multiply and divide with V)  R = 𝑽
− 𝑰−
𝑉 𝑅𝑣 𝑹𝒗
37. A man stands at rest in front of large wall. A sound source of frequency 400 Hz is placed between
him and the wall. The source is now moved towards the wall a speed of 1 m/s. The number of beats
heard per second will be (speed of sound in air is 345 m/s)
1) 0.8 2) 0.58 3) 1.16 4) 2.32
Sol. Frequency received by the wall: n = 𝑣 n = 345 x 400 = 401.16 Hz

w
𝑣−𝑣 344 𝑠
𝑣+𝑣𝑜 346
Frequency received by the driver: nd = nw = x 401.16 = 402.3
𝑣 345
Number of beats heard by the driver: n = nd – n = 402.3 – 400 = 2.32
38. A hollow sphere of inner radius 9 cm and outer radius 10 cm floats half submerged in a liquid of
specific gravity 0.8. The density of the material of the sphere is
1) 0.84 g/cc 2) 1.48 g/cc 3) 1.84 g/cc 4) 1.24 g/cc
Sol. Let the density of the material: 

For the equilibrium of object: Gravitational force = buoyancy force
4 2
mg = vinlg   (𝑅 3 − 𝑟 3 )  = 𝜋 R3 l  542  = 1000 x 0.8
3 3
 = 1.48 g/cc
39. Rays from an object immersed in water ( = 1.33) traverse a spherical air bubble of radius R. If the
object is located far away from the bubble, its image as seen by the observer located on the other
side of the bubble will be
1) virtual, erect and diminished 2) real, inverted and magnified

3) virtual, erect and magnified 4) real, inverted and diminished
Sol. The air bubble in water acts as concave lens. The image formed is Virtual, erect and diminished.

40. A 10 ohm resistor is connected to a supply voltage alternating between +4V and -2V as shown in
figure. The average power dissipated in the resistor per cycle is
1) 1.0 W 2) 1.2 W 3) 1.4 W 4) 1.6 W
Sol. Average power : P = 1 𝑇 𝑝 𝑑𝑡 = 1 𝑇 𝑣𝑖 𝑑𝑡

avg ∫
𝑇 0
∫
𝑇 0
1 𝑇 𝑣2 1 𝑇
Pavg = 𝑇 ∫0 𝑅
𝑑𝑡 = 𝑇𝑅 ∫0 𝑣 2 𝑑𝑡
1 0.1 0.2
Pavg = 10 𝑥 0.2 [∫0 16 𝑑𝑡 + ∫0.1 4 𝑑𝑡]
1 1
Pavg = 2 [16(0.1 − 0) + 4(0.2 − 0.1)] = 2 (1.6 + 0.4) = 1 W
41. In the following arrangement the pulley is assumed to be light and strings inextensible. The
acceleration of the system can be determined by considering conservation of a certain physical
quantity. The physical quantity conserved and the acceleration respectively, are
1) energy and g/3 2) linear momentum and g/2

3) angular momentum and g/3 4) mass and g/2
Sol. Total mechanical energy is conserved.

Change in PE = change in KE
1
(3+1) gx – 2gx = 2 (3+1+2) v2  2gx = 3v2
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑣 𝒈
Differentiate w.r.to time: 2g 𝑑𝑡
= 3. 2v 𝑑𝑡  2gv = 6v a  a = 𝟑
42. Two cells each of emf E and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in series with
an external resistance R. The potential difference between the terminals of the first cell will be zero
when R is equal to
1) 𝑟1 +𝑟2 2) √𝑟 21 − 𝑟 2 2 3) 𝒓𝟏 − 𝒓𝟐 4) 𝑟1 𝑟2
2 𝑟1 + 𝑟2
Sol. Current through the circuit : I = 2𝐸

𝑅+𝑟 +𝑟 1 2
Potential difference across the terminals of first cell
v1 = E – Ir1  0 = E – Ir1  E = Ir1
2𝐸
E= r1  𝑅 + 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 = 2r1  R = r1 – r2
𝑅+𝑟1 +𝑟2
43. A student uses a convex lens to determine the width of a slit. For this he fixes the positions of the
object and the screen and moves the lens to get a real image on the screen. The images of the slit
width are found to be 2.1 cm and 0.48 cm wide respectively when the lens is moved through 15 cm.
Therefore, the slit width and the focal length of the lens respectively, are
1) 1 cm, 9.3 cm 2) 1 cm, 10.5 cm 3) 2 cm, 12.8 cm 4) 2 cm, 15.2 cm

Sol. Size of the object: O = √𝐼1 𝐼2 = √2.1 𝑥 0.48 = √1.008 = 1 cm

𝐼 2.1 𝑣1
For the first image: 𝑂1 = 1
= 2.1  𝑢
= 2.1  𝑣1 = 2.1𝑢
Given : 𝑣1 - u = 15  2.1u – u = 15  1.1u = 15  u = 13.6 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.1 2.1
Lens formula : 𝑣 − =  + 𝑢 = 𝑓  𝑢 (2.1 + 1) = 𝑓  f = 3.1 𝑢  f = 3.1 x 13.6 = 9.3 cm
𝑢 𝑓 2.1𝑢
44. A particle rests in equilibrium under two forces of repulsion whose centers are at distances of a and
b from the particle. The forces vary as the cube of the distance. The forces per unit mass are k and
k1 respectively. If the particle be slightly displaced towards one of them the motion is simple
harmonic with the time period equal to
1) 2 2) 2 3) 2 4) 2
𝑘 𝑘1 𝑘 𝑘1 𝑘 𝑘1 𝑘 𝑘1
√3 ( + ) √( + ) √( + ) √3 ( + )
𝑎3 𝑏 3 𝑎3 𝑏 3 𝑎4 𝑏 4 𝑎4 𝑏 4
Sol.
QUESTION DELETED
45. In the following circuit the current is in phase with the applied voltage. Therefore, the current in the
circuit and the frequency of the source voltage respectively, are
1) 𝑽𝒊 𝟏 2) zero and 1 3) 4)
and 𝟐 𝐶 2 4 𝐶 2
𝑹 √𝑳𝑪 √𝐿𝐶 √ 𝑉𝑖 and √ and
𝐿  √𝐿𝐶 𝐿𝑅2 √𝐿𝐶
Sol. Given : current is in phase with applied voltage

Phase difference:  = 0 (resonance condition)
Power factor: cos  = 1
Under resonance: LCR circuit behaves as pure resistive network.
𝑣
Current flowing through the circuit: I = 𝑖
𝑅
Resonant frequency: inductive reactance = capacitive reactance
1 1 1 1 𝟏
XL = XC  L =  2 = =  2f = f=
𝜔𝐶 𝐿𝐶 √𝐿𝐶 √𝐿𝐶 𝟐√𝑳𝑪
46. In an atom an electron excites to the fourth orbit. When it jumps back to the lower energy levels a
spectrum is formed. Total number of spectral lines in this spectrum would be
1) 3 2) 4 3) 5 4) 6
Sol. When an electron gets back to its original (ground) orbit, it can
do so in different ways as shown in figure.
No. of spectral lines = no. of ways of de excitation : n (n-1) / 2
Here, the electron goes to n = 4
The no. of spectral lines : 3 (there is only one atom)

47. The following figure shows the section ABC of an equilateral triangular prism. A ray of light enters
the prism along LM and emerges along QD. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is
1.6, angle LMN is
1) 35.60 2) 37.40 3) 39.40 4) 41.30
Sol. Snell’s law at Q : 1 x sin 90 =  sin   sin  = 1 = 1

  = 38.680
𝜇 1.6
From the triangle MBQ : 60+90 – r + 51.32 = 180  r = 21.320
Snell’ law at M : 1 x sin i =  sin r  sin i = 1.6 x sin 21.32 = 0.58
sin i = 0.58  i = sin−1 0.58 = 35.450
48. A ball of mass m hits directly another ball of mass M at rest and is brought to rest by the impact.
One third of the kinetic energy of the ball is lost due to collision. The coefficient of restitution is
1) 1/3 2) 1/2 3) 2/3 4) √2/3
Sol. Conservation of momentum : m1u1+m2u2 = m1v1+m2v2  mu = Mv  𝑣 = 𝑚

𝑢 𝑀
𝑝𝑖 2
(𝑚𝑢)2 𝑚𝑢2
Initial kinetic energy of the system: ki = 2𝑚
= 2𝑚 = 2
𝑝𝑓 2
(𝑀𝑣)2 𝑀𝑣 2
Final kinetic energy of the system: kf = 2𝑀 = 2𝑀 = 2
1 2 𝑀𝑣 2 2 𝑚𝑢2 𝑣 2 2𝑚 2𝑣 𝑣 2
Loss of kinetic energy: k = ki – kf = ki  kf = ki  = ( ) = =  =
3 3 2 3 2 𝑢 3𝑀 3𝑢 𝑢 3
𝑣−0 𝑣 𝟐
Coefficient of restitution: e = 𝑢−0 = 𝑢 =
𝟑
49. An object 1 cm long lies along the principal axis of a convex lens of focal length 15 cm, the center
of the object being at a distance of 20 cm from the lens. Therefore, the size of the image is
1) 0.3 cm 2) 3 cm 3) 9 cm 4) 12 cm
Sol. Lens formula : 1 − 1 1 1 1 1

= 𝑓  𝑣 + 20 = 15  𝑣 = 15 −
1 1 1 1
= 60  v = 60 cm
𝑣 𝑢 20
𝐼 𝑣
Transverse magnification : m = 𝑂 = 𝑢
𝑣2 602
Longitudinal magnification: m1 = 𝑢2 = 202 = 9 cm
Size of the image: I = m1 O = 9 x 1 = 9 cm

50. Acidified water from certain reservoir kept at a potential V falls in the form of small droplets each
of radius r through a hole into a hollow conducting sphere of radius a. The sphere is insulated and
is initially at zero potential. If the drops continue to fall until the sphere is half full, the potential
acquired by the sphere is
1) 𝒂𝟐 𝑽 2) 𝑎𝑉 3) 𝑎3 𝑉 4) 𝑎𝑉
√𝑟
𝟐𝒓𝟐 2 2𝑟 3 𝑟
Sol. Potential of each droplet: V = 1 𝑞

4𝜋𝜀 𝑜 𝑟
4 2 𝑎3
No. of droplets in the insulated sphere: n ( 𝜋𝑟 3 ) = 𝜋𝑎3  n =
3 3 2𝑟 3
1 𝑛𝑞 1 𝑞 𝑎3 𝑎2 1 𝑞 𝑎2 𝒂𝟐 𝑽
Potential acquired by the sphere: V1 = 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑎
= 4𝜋𝜀 3 = 2𝑟 2 4𝜋𝜀𝑜 𝑟
= 2𝑟2 V  V1 = 𝟐𝒓𝟐
𝑜 𝑎 2𝑟
The series combination of a variable resistance R, one 100  resistor and a moving coil
galvanometer is connected to a mobile phone charger having negligible internal resistance. The
zero of the galvanometer lies at the centre and the pointer can move 30 divisions full scale on either
side depending on the direction of current. The reading of the galvanometer is 10 div. and the
voltages across the galvanometer and 100  resistor are respectively 12 mV and 16 mV
51. The figure of merit of the galvanometer in A per division is
1) 16 2) 20 3) 32 4) 10
Sol. Potential drop across 100  resistor: 16 mV

V = iR  16 x 10-3 = i x 100  i = 16 x 10-5 A
𝑖 16 x 10−5
Figure of merit: 𝜃 = 10
= 16 x 10-6 A / div = 16 A / div
52. The resistance of the galvanometer in  is
1) 50 2) 25 3) 75 4) 100
Sol. Potential drop across the galvanometer: 12 mV

Current through the galvanometer: i = 16 x 10-5 A
𝑉𝐺 12 𝑥 10−3
Resistance of the galvanometer: RG = 𝑖
= 16 x 10−5 = 75 
53. The series combination of the galvanometer with a resistance of R is connected across an ideal
voltage supply of 12 V and this time the galvanometer shows full scale deflection of 30 divisions.
The value of R is nearly
1) 12.5 k 2) 25 k 3) 75 k 4) 100 k
Sol. Full scale deflection of the galvanometer: 30 div

Full scale deflection current: i = 3 x 16 x 10-5 = 48 x 10-5 A
𝑉 12 12
Current in the circuit: i = 𝑅 =
𝑅+75
 48 x 10-5 = 𝑅+75
𝑠
12
R + 75 = 48 x 105  R = 25000 – 75 = 25 k

54. A 24  resistance is connected to a 5 V battery with internal resistance of 1 . A 25 k

resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer and this combination is used to measure the
voltage across the 24  resistance. The number of divisions shown in the galvanometer is
1) 6 2) 8 3) 10 4) 12
Sol. Current through the resistance without galvanometer:

𝑉 5 5 1
i = 𝑅 = 24+1 = 25 = 5 = 0.2 A
Current flowing through the galvanometer:
𝑅 24
ig = = x 0.2 = 19.2 A
𝑅+𝑅𝑔 24+25000+75
19.2
No. of divisions shown in the galvanometer: n = 16
x 10 = 12
55. Now a 1000 F capacitor is charged using a 12 V supply and is discharged through the
galvanometer resistance combination used in the previous question. The current i at different time t
are recorded. A graph of ln i against t is plotted. The slope of the graph is
1) – 0.02 s-1 2) – 0.01 s-1 3) – 0.04 s-1 4) +0.04 s-1
Sol. Discharging capacitor : q = q0 e-t/RC

𝑑𝑞 1
differentiate w.r.to time : = )  i = ioe-t/RC
q0 e-t/RC (−
𝑑𝑡 𝑅𝐶
𝑡 1
Apply log on both sides : ln 𝑖 = ln 𝑖0 − 𝑅𝐶  ln 𝑖 = − 𝑅𝐶 t + ln i0 (y = - mx +c)
1 1
Slope of the graph : m = − 𝑅𝐶 = − 25000 𝑥 1000 𝑥 10−6 = – 0.04 s-1
56. In Newton’s inverse square law of gravitation has some dependence on radial distance other that r-2,
which one of Kepler’s three laws of planetary motion would remain unchanged?
1) first law on nature of orbits

2) Second law on constant areal velocity
3) third law on dependence of orbital time period on orbit’s semi major axis
4) none of the above.
Sol. First Law: planets revolve around sun in elliptical orbits. (shape of orbits)
Second law: areal velocity of a planet around sun is constant. It is a consequence of conservation
of angular momentum. L remains constant as the torque provided by gravitational force is zero.
Third law: square of time period ∝ cube of radius of the orbit.
Second law is not going to be affected by change in magnitude of force as gravitational force
provides zero torque (central force)

57. A neutral metal bar moves at a constant velocity v to the right through a region of uniform
magnetic field directed out of the page as shown. Therefore
1) +ve charge accumulates to the left side, -ve charge to the right side of the rod
2) –ve charge accumulates to the left side, +ve charge to the right side of the rod
3) +ve charge accumulates to the top end and –ve charge to the bottom end of the rod
4) –ve charge accumulates to the top end and +ve charge to the bottom end of the rod
Sol. Force acting on charged particle moving in magnetic field: 𝐹̅ = q (𝑣̅ x 𝐵̅)
Direction of force: direction of vector product: right hand rule:
Close the fingers of right hand from first vector 𝑣̅ to second vector 𝐵̅, thumb gives the direction of
force acting on + ve charge due to magnetic field.
So the electrons move to the top end of the rod.
58. Two moles of hydrogen are mixed with n moles of helium. The root mean square speed of gas
molecules in the mixture is √2 times the speed of sound in the mixture. Then n is
1) 3 2) 2 3) 1.5 4) 2.5
Sol. 3𝑅𝑇
Root mean square (rms) velocity of the gas molecules: v = √ 𝑀
𝑅𝑇
Speed of sound in gas: vs = √ 𝑀
𝑛1 𝑀1 +𝑛2 𝑀2 2𝑥2 + 𝑛𝑥4 4 + 4𝑛
Molecular mass of mixture: Mmix = 𝑛1 +𝑛2
= 2+𝑛 = 2 + 𝑛
𝑛 +𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 2+𝑛 2 𝑛
Effective  of the mixture: 1 𝛾 2 = 𝛾1 + 𝛾2  𝛾 = 7/5 + 5/3
1 2
3
Given: v = √2 vs  √3 = √2 √𝛾   = 2
2+𝑛 2 𝑛
3/2
= 7/5 + 5/3  n = 1.5
59. In the figure shown below masses of blocks A and B are 3 kg and 6 kg respectively. The force
constants of springs S1 and S2 are 160 N/m and 40 N/m respectively. Length of the light string
connecting the blocks is 8 m. The system is released from rest with the springs at their natural
lengths. The maximum elongation of spring S1 will be
1) 0.294 m 2) 0.490 m 3) 0.588 4) 0.882 m
Sol. Change in gravitational PE = change in elastic PE

1
(m2 – m1) g x = 2 (k1 + k2) x2
1
(6 – 3) 9.8 = (160 + 40) x
2
29.4 = 100 x  x = 0.294 m

60. Two particles A and B of equal masses have velocities 𝑣̅𝐴 = 2𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ and 𝑣̅𝐵 = -𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂. The particles
move with accelerations 𝑎̅𝐴 = -4𝑖̂ - 𝑗̂ and 𝑎̅𝐵 = -2𝑖̂ + 3𝑗̂ respectively. The centre of mass of the two
particles move along
1) straight line 2) parabola 3) circle 4) ellipse
Sol. Velocity of centre of mass : v = 𝑚1 𝑣1 +𝑚2 𝑣2 = 𝑣𝐴 +𝑣𝐵 = 2𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ +(−𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂ ) = 𝑖̂ + 3𝑗̂
cm
𝑚 +𝑚 2 1 22 2
𝑚 𝑎 +𝑚 𝑎 𝑎 +𝑎 −4𝑖̂ − 𝑗̂ +(−2𝑖̂ + 3𝑗̂ ) −6𝑖̂ +2𝑗̂
Acceleration of centre of mass : acm = 1𝑚1+𝑚2 2 = 𝐴 2 𝐵 = 2
= 2
= −3𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂
1 2
𝑖̂ + 3𝑗̂
The dot product of the two vectors: . (−3𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂) = 0
2
The two vectors are perpendicular to each other.
The centre of mass follows circular path as velocity and acceleration are perpendicular.
61. A ray is incident on a refracting surface of RI  at an angle of incidence i and the corresponding
angle of refraction is r. The deviation of the ray after refraction is given by  = i – r. Then, one may
conclude that
1) r increases with i 2)  increases with i

3)  decreases with i 𝟏
4) maximum value of  is 𝐜𝐨𝐬 −𝟏 
Sol. Snell’s law :  sin i =  sin r  1 x sin i =  sin r   = sin 𝑖

1 2 (r is proportional to i)
sin 𝑟
Deviation :  = i – r (i > r : so with increase in i, deviation increases)
As  increases with i, for max (i = 900)
sin 90 1 1 𝟏
When i = 900,  = sin 𝑟
 r = sin−1 𝜇  max = 90 - sin−1 𝜇 = 𝐜𝐨𝐬 −𝟏 𝝁
62. In a series RC circuit, the supply voltage V is kept constant at 2 V and the frequency of the
sinusoidal voltage is varied from 500 Hz to 2000 Hz. The voltage across the resistance R = 1000 
is measured each time as VR. For the determination of C, a student wants to draw a linear graph and
try to get C from the slope. Then she may draw the graph of
1) f2 against V2 2) 𝟏 𝑽𝟐 3) 𝟏 𝟏 4) 𝑽𝑹
against against f against
𝒇𝟐 𝑽𝑹 𝟐 𝒇𝟐 𝑽𝑹 𝟐
√𝑽𝟐 −𝑽𝑹 𝟐
𝑉 1 2 𝑉2
Sol. Voltage across resistor : vR = iR = R (
2
)  𝑅 2 + (2𝜋𝑓𝐶 ) = 𝑉 2 𝑅2
√𝑅2 +( 1 ) 𝑅
2𝜋𝑓𝐶
1 2 𝑉2 1 𝑉 2 −𝑉𝑅 2 𝑉𝑅 𝑽𝑹
(2𝜋𝑓𝐶 ) = 𝑉 2 𝑅 2 - 𝑅 2  2𝜋𝑓𝐶 = R √ 𝑉𝑅 2
 2𝜋𝑓𝐶R = f∝
𝑅 √𝑉 2 −𝑉𝑅 2 √𝑽𝟐 −𝑽𝑹 𝟐
1 1 𝟏 𝟏
From above equation : 4𝜋2 𝑓2 𝐶 2 = 𝑉 2 (𝑉 2 − 1)𝑅 2  = 𝟐 4𝜋𝐶 2 𝑅 2 (𝑉 2 − 1)
𝑅 𝒇𝟐 𝑽𝑹
1 𝑉2 𝟏 𝑉2
From above equation : 4𝜋2 𝑓2 𝐶 2 = 𝑉 2 𝑅 2 - 𝑅 2  𝒇𝟐 = 𝑉𝑅 2
4𝜋𝐶 2 𝑅2 - 4𝜋𝐶 2 𝑅 2
𝑅

63. Two balls A and B moving in the same direction collide. The mass of B is p times that of A. Before
the collision the velocity of A was q times that of B. After the collision, A comes to rest. If e be the
coefficient of restitution, then which of the following conclusion(s) is(are) correct?
𝒒
1) e = 𝒑+𝒒 2) e = 𝑝+𝑞 3) p ≥ 4) p≥1
𝒑𝒒−𝒑 𝑝𝑞+𝑝 𝒒−𝟐
Velocity of ball B before collision: u and Velocity of ball A before collision: qu

Sol.
Mass of ball A: m and mass of ball B: mp
(𝑝+𝑞)𝑢
Conservation of momentum : mAuA + mBuB = mAvA + mBvB  mqu + mpu = mpvf  vf = 𝑝
𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑎𝑓𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛
Coefficient of restitution : e = 𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑎𝑐ℎ 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛
(𝑝+𝑞)𝑢
𝑝+𝑞 𝑝+𝑞 𝒒
e= 𝑝
𝑞𝑢−𝑢
= 𝑝𝑞−𝑝  𝑝𝑞−𝑝 ≤ 1 (since e ≤ 1)  p ≥ 𝒒−𝟐
64. A convex lens and a concave lens are kept in contact and the combination is used for the formation
of image of a body by keeping it at different places on the principal axis. The image formed by this
combination of lenses can be
1) magnified, inverted and real 2) diminished, inverted and real

3) diminished, erect and virtual 4) magnified, erect and virtual
Sol. Effective focal length of the combination : 1 = 1 - 1  F = 𝑓1 𝑓2

𝐹 𝑓 𝑓 1 𝑓 −𝑓
2 2 1
based on relative magnitudes of f1 and f2, the combination can be convex / concave
Concave lens : diminished, erect & virtual (for any position of the object)
Convex lens : magnified, inverted & real (object between centre of curvature & focal point)
Convex lens : diminished, inverted & real (object between infinity & centre of curvature)
Convex lens : magnified, erect & virtual (object between focal point & optic centre)
65. In a bipolar junction transistor

1) The most heavily doped region is the emitter
2) the level of doping is the same in both the emitter and the collector
3) its base is the thinnest part
4) when connected in CE configuration a base current is generally of the order of A
Sol. Emitter: moderate thickness & heavy doping; Base: thinnest region & light doping
Collector: maximum thickness & moderate doping
As base is the thinnest region, very a smaller number of charge carriers are available.
So, base current is of the order of micro ampere (A)

66. A particle starting from rest at the highest point slides down the outside of a smooth vertical
circular track of radius 0.3 m. When it leaves the track its vertical fall is h and the linear velocity is
v. The angle made by the radius at that position of the particle with the vertical is . Now consider
the following observations: (g = 10 m/s2)
(I) h = 0.1 m and cos  = 2/3 (II) h = 0.2 m and cos  = 1/3 (III) v = √2 m/s
(IV) after leaving the circular track, the particle will describe a parabolic path
1) (I) and (III) both are correct 2) only (II) is incorrect

3) only (III) is correct 4) (IV) is correct
Sol. Conservation of mechanical energy at A and B : EA = EB

kA + UA = kB + UB
1 1
0 + 0 = 2 m v2 – mgh  mgh = 2 m v2  v = √2𝑔ℎ
𝑅−ℎ
From the dig : cos  = 𝑅
 h = R (1 – cos )
Force equation on the particle at B : mg cos  - N = mv2 / R
As the particle loses contact at B, N = 0
mg cos  = mv2 / R → cos  = v2 / Rg = 2gh / Rg = 2h / R
For h = 0.1, cos  = 2 x 0.1 / 0.3 = 2/3
Speed of the particle : v = √2𝑔ℎ = √2𝑥10𝑥0.1 = √2
67. A small bar magnet is suspended by a thread. A torque is applied and the magnet is found to
execute angular oscillations. The time period of oscillations
1) decreases with moment of the magnet

2) increases with increase in horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
3) will remain unchanged even if another magnet is kept at a distance
4) depends on mass of the magnet
Sol. 𝐼
Time period of oscillation of the bar magnet: T = 2 √
𝑀𝐵
𝑚
I – moment of inertia: 12 (l2 + b2) [m – mass; l – length; b – breadth] M – magnetic moment
B – magnetic field induction (Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field)
68. Two identical rods made of two different materials A and B with thermal conductivities KA and KB
respectively are joined end to end. The free end of A is kept at a temperature T1 while the free end
of B is kept at a temperature T2 (<T1). Therefore, in steady state
1) the temperature of the junction will be determined only by KA and KB

2) if the lengths of the rods are doubled the rate of heat flow will be halved.
3) if the temperatures at two free ends are interchanged, junction temperature will change.
𝟐𝑲𝑨 𝑲𝑩
4) the composite rod has an equivalent thermal conductivity of
𝑲𝑨 +𝑲𝑩

Sol. a) Series combination : same thermal current through both the rods
𝑇1 −𝑇 𝑇−𝑇2 𝒌𝑨 𝑻𝟏 +𝒌𝑩 𝑻𝟐
𝑙 = 𝑙  𝑘𝐴 (T1 – T) = kB (T – T2)  T = 𝒌𝑨 +𝒌𝑩
𝑘𝐴 𝐴 𝑘𝐵 𝐴
𝒅𝑸 ∆𝑻
b) Rate of heat flow: 𝒅𝒕
= 𝒍
𝒌𝑨
𝒌𝑨 𝑻𝟐 +𝒌𝑩 𝑻𝟏
c) When the temperature of free ends is interchanged, the interface temperature: T = 𝒌𝑨 +𝒌𝑩
d) Equivalent thermal conductivity of the system: series combination: R = R1 + R2
2𝑙 𝑙 𝑙 2 1 1 𝟐𝑲𝑨 𝑲𝑩
=𝑘 +𝑘 𝑘=𝑘 +𝑘 k=𝑲
𝑘𝐴 𝐴𝐴 𝐵𝐴 𝐴 𝐵 𝑨 +𝑲𝑩
69. If a system is made to undergo a change from an initial state to a final state by adiabatic process
only, then
1) the work done is different for different paths connecting the two states
2) there is no work done since there is no transfer of heat
3) the internal energy of the system will change
4) the work done is the same for all adiabatic paths
Sol. First law of thermodynamics : dQ = dU + dW

For adiabatic process : dQ = 0  0 = dU + dW  dW = - dU
So, in adiabatic process, work is done at the expense of internal energy.
Internal energy is a state function. It depends on the initial and final states of the system (gas) and
not on the process in which the gas is taken from initial state to final state.
Work done is same for all paths. Internal energy of the system decreases.
70. A body of mass 1.0 kg moves in XY plane under the influence of a conservative force. Its potential
energy is given by U = 2x + 3y where (x, y) denote the coordinates of the body. The body is at rest
at (2, -4) initially. All the quantities have SI units. Therefore, the body
1) moves along parabolic path 2) moves with a constant acceleration

3) never crosses the X axis 4) has a speed of 2√𝟏𝟑 m/s at t = 2 sec.
Sol. Potential energy of the particle : U = 2x + 3y

𝜕𝑈 𝜕𝑈
Force acting on the particle : 𝐹̅ = − 𝑖̂ − 𝑗̂ = -2𝑖̂ - 3𝑗̂
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
𝐹
Acceleration of the particle: 𝑎̅ = 𝑚
= - 2𝑖̂ - 3𝑗̂  a = √𝟏𝟑 m/s2 (constant)
Speed of the particle: v = u + at = 0 + √13 (2) = 2 √𝟏𝟑 m/s
𝑡 𝑡
Velocity of the particle: 𝑣̅ = ∫0 𝑎̅ 𝑑𝑡 = ∫0 (− 2𝑖̂ − 3𝑗̂)𝑑𝑡 = − 2t 𝑖̂ − 3t 𝑗̂
Displacement of the particle: along x axis:
𝑑𝑥 𝑥 𝑡
vx = 𝑑𝑡
 dx = vx dt  ∫2 𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 −2𝑡 dt  x – 2 = −𝑡 2  x = 2 – t2
Displacement of the particle : along y axis :

𝑑𝑦 𝑦 𝑡 3𝑡 2 3𝑡 2
vy = 𝑑𝑡
 dy = vy dt  ∫−4 𝑑𝑦 = ∫0 −3𝑡 dt  y + 4 = − 2
y=-4− 2
At y = 0, the particle crosses x axis.

3𝑡 2 8
0=-4− 2
 t = √− 3 (not possible)
Path followed by the particle:

3𝑡 2 3 3
y=-4− 2
= - 4 - 2 (2 – x) = - 4 – 3 + 2 x = - 7 + 1.5 x
y = 1.5 x – 7 (straight line with +ve slope and – ve y intercept)

1. The SI unit of permeability of free space is
a) weber b) ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦 c) 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎 d) 𝒘𝒆𝒃𝒆𝒓

𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒
ampere 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 − meter 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒆 − 𝐦𝐞𝐭𝐞𝐫
Sol Permeability of free space: 𝜇0

𝜇0 𝑖 2𝜋𝑟𝐵
Magnetic field due to straight current carrying infinitely long conductor: B = → 𝜇0 =
2𝜋 𝑟 𝑖
SI unit of magnetic field induction (flux density): B (weber/m2)
SI unit of current: i (ampere)
SI unit of distance: r (meter)
𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟
𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑥 𝒘𝒆𝒃𝒆𝒓
𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟2
So the SI unit of permeability of free space: =
𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒆 −𝐦𝐞𝐭𝐞𝐫
2. A uniform solid drum of radius R and mass M rolls without slipping down a plane inclined at a
angle 𝜃 Its acceleration along the plane is
a) 1 b) 1 c) 𝟐 d) 5
3
g sin 𝜃 2
g sin 𝜃 g sin 𝜽 g sin 𝜃
𝟑 7
Sol 𝑔 sin 𝜃
Acceleration of a rolling object down the inclined plane: a = 𝐾2
1+ 2
𝑅
𝐾2 1
For solid drum (solid cylinder): 𝑅2 = 2
𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝟐
a= 𝐾2
= 1 = 𝟑 g sin 𝜽
1+ 2 1+
𝑅 2
3. A particle moves according to the law x = at, y = at (1-𝛼𝑡) where a

and α are positive constants and t is time. The instant at which
𝜋
velocity makes an angle 4 with acceleration is
4 3 2 𝟏
a) 𝛼 b) 𝛼 c) 𝛼 d) 𝜶
Sol Instantaneous position of the particle along x axis: x = at

Instantaneous position of the particle along y axis: y = at1 - 𝛼t)
Velocity of the particle: 𝑣̅ = vx 𝑖̂ + vy 𝑗̂ = a 𝑖̂ − (a−2a𝛼𝑡) 𝑗̂
Acceleration of the particle: 𝑎̅ = ax 𝑖̂ + ay 𝑗̂ = 0 𝑖̂ − 2a𝛼 𝑗̂
Given: angle made by velocity vector with acceleration vector is 450
So, the angle made by velocity vector with X axis is also 450
𝑣 𝑎(1−2𝛼𝑡) 𝟏
tan (−45) = 𝑣𝑦 → −1 = 𝑎
→ −a = a (1 - 2𝛼𝑡) → 2𝛼𝑡 = 2 → t = 𝜶
𝑥
4. The potential energy of a mass m in a conservative force field can be expressed as U = αx - βy

where (x, y) denote the position coordinates of the body. The acceleration of the body is
a) 𝛼 −𝛽 b) 𝛼+𝛽 c) √𝛼 2 − 𝛽2 d) √𝜶𝟐 + 𝜷𝟐
𝑚 𝑚 𝑚 𝒎
NSEP – 2018 Page 1

Sol Potential energy of the particle: U = 𝛼𝑥 - 𝛽y

𝑑𝑈
force acting on the particle: F = − 𝑑𝑟 for a single variable function
𝜕𝑈 𝜕𝑈
Force acting on the particle: 𝐹̅ = − 𝜕𝑥 𝑖̂ − 𝜕𝑦 𝑗̂ = −𝛼 𝑖̂ + 𝛽 𝑗̂
𝐹̅ 1
Acceleration of the particle: 𝑎̅ = 𝑚 = (−𝛼 𝑖̂ + 𝛽 𝑗̂)
𝑚
√𝛂𝟐 +𝛃𝟐
Magnitude of acceleration: a = 𝐦
5. A constant force F applied to the lower block of mass 15 kg makes it slide between the upper block
of mass 5 kg and the table below, as shown. The coefficient of static (𝜇𝑠 ) and kinetic (𝜇𝑘 ) friction
between the lower block and the table are 0.5 and 0.4 respectively and those between the two
blocks are 0.3 and 0.1. The acceleration of the upper and the lower blocks are respectively
a) 1.96 m/𝑠 2 and 1.96 m/𝑠 2 b) 1.96 m/𝑠 2 and 3.92 m/𝑠 2
c) 0.98 m/𝑠 2 and 0.49 m/𝑠 2 d) 0.98 m/𝒔𝟐 and 1.96 m/𝒔𝟐
Sol Force required to slide the 15 kg block:

F = 𝜇𝑠1 mg + 𝜇𝑠2 (m +M) g = 0.3 x 5 x 9.8 + 0.5 x 20 x 9.8 = 112.7 N
For the 5 kg block: f1 = ma1 → 𝜇𝑘1 mg = ma1 → a1 = 𝜇𝑘1 g = 0.1 x 9.8 = 0.98 m/s2
For the 15 kg block: F - f1 - f2 = Ma2 → F - 𝜇𝑘1 mg - 𝜇𝑘2 (m + M) g = Ma2
112.7 - 0.1 x 5 x 9.8 - 0.4 x 20 x 9.8 = 15 a2 → 112.7 – 4.9 – 78.4 = 15 a2 → a2 = 1.96 m/s2
6. Two bodies of equal masses moving with equal speeds make a perfectly
inelastic collision If the speed after the collision is reduced to half, the
angle between their velocities of approach is
a) 30° b) 60° c) 90° d) 120°
Sol Masses of the two bodies are equal: m1 = m2 = m

Speeds of the two bodies before collision are equal: u1 = u2 = u
Let the angle between the velocities of approach be 𝜃
Initial momentum: Pi = √𝑃1 2 + 𝑃2 2 + 2𝑃1 𝑃2 cos 𝜃 = √(𝑚𝑢)2 + (𝑚𝑢)2 + 2(𝑚𝑢)(𝑚𝑢) cos 𝜃

𝑢
Final momentum of the system: Pf = 2m 2
Conservation of momentum: Pf = Pi → m2u2 = 2 m2u2 + 2 m2u2 cos 𝜃 → −m2u2 = 2 m2u2 cos 𝜃
1
cos 𝜃 = − 2 → 𝜽 = 1200

7. A student performs an experiment with a simple pendulum and records the time for 20 oscillations.
If he would have recorded time for 100 oscillation, the error in the measurement of time period
would have reduced by a factor of
a) 80 b) 20 c) 10 d) 5
Sol Let the measured values: a1, a2, a3 ----- an

𝑎1 +𝑎2 +𝑎3 +−−−−−−−𝑎𝑛
Mean value: amean =
𝑛
Absolute error in the measurement: ∆a1 = |𝑎1 − 𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 |
∆𝑎1 +∆𝑎2 +∆𝑎3 +−−−−−−−−∆𝑎𝑛
Mean absolute error: ∆amean = 𝑛
From the above expression, mean absolute error is inversely related to number of observations.
As the number of observations increased by a factor of 5, the error in the measurement of time
period would reduce by a factor of 5
8. A satellite is launched from a point close to the surface of the earth

(radius R) with velocity v = 𝑣0 √1.5, where 𝑣0 is the velocity in a
circular orbit. If the initial velocity imparted to the satellite is
horizontal, the maximum distance from the surface of the earth
during its revolutions is
a) R b) 2R c) 3R d) 4R
Sol 𝐺𝑀
Orbital velocity of a satellite: v0 = √ 𝑟
The satellite follows an elliptical path with center of the earth as one of focal points as shown.
𝑣0 √1.5𝑅
Conservation of angular momentum: Li = Lf → mvR = mVr → v0 √1.5 R = Vr → V = 𝑟
𝐺𝑀 1 𝐺𝑀 1
Conservation of energy: EA = EB → − 𝑅
+ 2m (1.5) v02 = − 𝑟 + 2mV2
1 𝐺𝑀 𝐺𝑀 3 𝐺𝑀 1 1 3𝑅
−4 𝑅
=− 𝑟
+4 𝑟2
R → − 4𝑅 = − 𝑟 + 4𝑟2 → r2 – 4Rr + 3R2 = 0 → r = R or 3R
The maximum distance of the satellite from the center of the earth is 3R
The maximum distance of the satellite from the surface of the earth is 2R
9. The aperture diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6 cm and its

thickness is 3 mm. If the speed of light through its material is
v = 2 x 108 m/s, the focal length of the lens is
a) 40 cm b) 35 cm c) 30 cm d) 20 cm
Sol Aperture diameter of the plano-convex lens: AB = 6 cm
Thickness of the plano-convex lens: 3 mm = 0.3 cm
Speed of light through the material of the lens: v = 2 x 108 m/s
𝑐 3 𝑥 108
Refractive index of the material: n = 𝑣 = 2 𝑥 108 = 1.5
From ∆le CAD: R2 = 9 + (R-0.3)2 → R = 15 cm
1 1 1 1 1
Lens maker’s formula: 𝑓 = (n – 1) 𝑅 → 𝑓 = (1.5 – 1) 15 = 30 → f = 30 cm

10. Under standard conditions of temperature and pressure a piece of ice melts completely on heating
it. obviously, the increase in internal energy of the system (ice and water) is
a) equal to the heat given b) more than the heat given

c) less than heat given d) zero
Sol first law of thermodynamics: dQ = dU + dW

dQ – heat energy: supplied to the system (+ve) and removed from the system (−ve)
dW – work done: by the system (+ve) and on the system (−ve)
dU – change in internal energy: increase (+ve) and decrease (−ve)
As ice melts, its volume decreases: dW = P dV = −P dV
dU = dQ – dW = dQ + P dV
So, the increase in internal energy of the system (ice + water) is more than the heat given.
11. Rocket fuel is capable of giving an exhaust velocity of 𝑣𝑟𝑒𝑙 = 2.4 km/s in the absence of any
external forces. The fuel required per kg of the payload to provide an exhaust velocity of 12 km/s to
the rocket is
a) 3670 kg b) 8000 kg c) 147.4 kg d) 478.4 kg

𝑚0
Sol Instantaneous speed of the rocket: v = vrel ln
𝑚
m0 – initial mass of rocket: payload (satellite) + fuel
m – instantaneous mass of the rocket: payload(satellite) + remaining fuel
𝑚 𝑚 𝑚
12 = 2.4 ln 0 → 5 = ln 0 → 0 = e5 → m0 = m e5
𝑚 𝑚 𝑚
Mass of the fuel required: m0 – m = me5 – m = m (e5 – 1) = 1 (148.4 – 1) = 147.4 kg
12. A vertical spring of length 𝑙0 and force constant k is stretched by l when a mass m is suspended
from its lower end. By pilling the mass down a little the system is left off to oscillate. The time
period of oscillation is
a) 𝒍 b) 𝑙 c) 1 𝑚 d) 𝑙+𝑙0
2𝝅 √𝒈 2𝜋 √ 0 √ 2𝜋 √
𝑔 2𝜋 𝑘 𝑔
𝑚𝑔
Sol Equilibrium condition: mg = k𝑙 → k =
𝑙
𝑚 𝑚 𝒍
Time period of spring block oscillations: T = 2𝜋 √ 𝑘 = 2𝜋 √𝑚𝑔 = 2𝝅 √𝒈
⁄𝑙
13. Let R be the radius of the earth. In general, the loss of gravitational potential energy of a body of
mass m falling from a height h to the earth surface is
a) mgh b) 𝑹 c) d)
mgh 𝑹+𝒉 𝑟+ℎ 𝑅
mgh √ mgh √𝑅+ℎ
𝑅

𝐺𝑀𝑚
Sol Potential energy of the object on the earth: U1 = − 𝑅
𝐺𝑀𝑚
Potential energy of the object at a height h: U2 = −
𝑅+ℎ
𝐺𝑀𝑚 𝐺𝑀𝑚 1 1
Loss of potential energy: ∆U = U2 – U1 = − 𝑅+ℎ + 𝑅 = GMm (𝑅 − 𝑅+ℎ)
ℎ 𝐺𝑀 𝑚ℎ 𝑚𝑔ℎ 𝑹
∆U = GMm 𝑅(𝑅+ℎ) = 𝑅2 ℎ = ℎ = mgh 𝑹+𝒉
1+ 1+
𝑅 𝑅
14. The velocity of a projectile at the highest point of its trajectory is √0.4 of its velocity at a point at
half its maximum height. The angle of projection is
a) 30° b) 45° c) 60° d) 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 (√0.4)
Sol Initial velocity of the projectile: u and Velocity at the highest point: u cos 𝜃
1
Velocity at half of maximum height: v = √(𝑢 cos 𝜃 )2 + 2 (𝑢 sin 𝜃)2
𝑢2 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃
Given: u2 cos2 𝜃 = (0.4) (𝑢2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 + )
2
0.6 u2 cos2 𝜃 = 0.2 u2 sin2 𝜃 → tan2 𝜃 = 3 → tan 𝜃 = √3 → 𝜽 = 600
15. The combination of a steel wire (length 80 cm, area of cross section 1 mm2 ) and an aluminium wire
(length 60 cm, area of cross section 3 mm2 ) joined end to end is stretched by a tension of
160 N. If the densities of steel and aluminum are 7.8 g/cc and 2.6 g/cc respectively then, the
minimum frequency of a tuning fork which can produce standing waves in the composite wire, with
the joint as a node, is
a) 170 Hz b) 358 Hz c) 88 Hz d) 118 Hz
Sol 𝑛 𝑇 𝑛 𝑇
Frequency of transverse vibrations of a stretched string: f = 2𝑙 √𝜇 = 2𝑙 √𝐴𝜌
𝑛𝑠𝑡 𝑇𝑠𝑡 𝑛𝑠𝑡 160 𝑛𝑠𝑡 160

Frequency of oscillation of steel wire: fst = √𝐴 = √ = √
2𝑙𝑠𝑡 𝑠𝑡 𝜌𝑠𝑡 2 𝑥 80 1 𝑥 7.8 160 7.8
𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑇𝑎𝑙 𝑛𝑎𝑙 160 𝑛𝑎𝑙 160

Frequency of oscillation of aluminum wire: fal = √𝐴 = √ = √
2𝑙𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑙 𝜌𝑎𝑙 2 𝑥 60 3 𝑥 2.6 120 7.8
𝑠𝑡 𝑛 𝑎𝑙 160 𝑛 160 𝑛 4
In order to have a node at the joint: fst = fal → 160 √
7.8
= 120 √
7.8
→ 𝑛𝑠𝑡 = 3
𝑎𝑙
4 160
So, frequency of the tuning fork: fst = 2 𝑥 0.8 √1 𝑥 10−6 𝑥 7.8 𝑥 103 = 2.5 x 143.23 = 358 Hz
16. In a stationary wave
a) all the medium particles vibrate in the same phase

b) all the particles between two consecutive nodes vibrate in
the same phase
c) any two consecutive nodes vibrate in the same phase
d) all the particles between two consecutive antinodes vibrate in
the same phase

Sol Node: the point of minimum (zero) displacement.

Antinode: the point of maximum displacement.
Once a stationary wave is formed between two fixed points, transfer of energy does not take place.
Energy is not transferred between one node and the other, instead it gets transformed between
kinetic energy and elastic potential energy.
At a given instant, all the particles between two nodes will be moving in same fashion with
same frequency, time period and phase so that the shape of the wave is sustained.
17. An empty earthen pitcher is kept under a water tap and starts
filling water as the tap is opened. The pitch of the sound
produced
a) goes on decreasing
b) goes on increasing
c) first increases and then decreases after the pitcher is half filled
d) does not change
Sol The empty earthen pitcher can be approximated to a closed organ pipe.
(𝟐𝒏+𝟏)𝒗
Frequency of oscillation of the air column: f = 𝟒𝒍
(only odd harmonics are present)
As water is filled into the pitcher, the length of the air column in it decreases, thus increasing the
frequency.
𝛼
18. The molar specific heat of an ideal gas in a certain thermodynamic process is where 𝛼 is a
𝑇
𝑐𝑝
constant. If the adiabatic exponent is 𝛾 = 𝑐 , the work done in heating the gas from 𝑇0 to n𝑇0 is
𝑣
1 𝒏−𝟏
a) In n b) 𝜶 In n - ( ) R𝑻𝟎
𝛼 𝜸−𝟏
𝑛−1
c) 𝛼 In n - (𝛾 − 1) R𝑇0 d) ( ) R𝑇0
𝛾−1
𝑛𝑇0 𝑛𝑇0 𝛼
Sol Heat supplied to the ideal gas: dQ = ∫𝑇 𝑐 𝑑𝑇 = ∫𝑇 𝑇
𝑑𝑇 = 𝛼 (ln 𝑛𝑇0 − ln 𝑇0 ) = 𝛼 ln 𝑛
0 0
𝑅 𝑛−1
Change in internal energy: dU = −dW = (nT0 – T0) = RT0 ( )
𝛾−1 𝛾−1
𝒏−𝟏
First law of thermodynamics: dQ = dU + dW → dW = dQ – dU = 𝜶 𝐥𝐧 𝒏 - RT0 (𝜸−𝟏)
19. An aircraft flies at a speed v from city A to city B and back in time 𝑡0 .
City B is to the east of city A at a distance d. The aircraft takes time 𝑡1
for the round trip if wind blows with speed w along AB and time 𝑡2 if
the wind blows with the same speed perpendicular to AB. Then,
a) 𝑡1 = 𝑡2 = 𝑡0 b) 𝒕𝟏 > 𝒕𝟐 > 𝒕𝟎 c) 𝑡1 < 𝑡2 < 𝑡0 d) 𝑡1 > 𝑡0 > 𝑡2

Sol Distance between the two cities: d

𝟐𝒅
Time taken by the aircraft for round trip: t0 = 𝒗
𝑑 𝑑 𝟐𝒗𝒅
Time taken by the aircraft for round trip when wind blows along AB: t1 = 𝑣+𝑤 + 𝑣−𝑤 = 𝒗𝟐−𝒘𝟐
Time taken by the air craft for round trip when wind blows perpendicular to AB:
2𝑑 2𝑑 𝟐𝒅
t2 = 𝑣 cos 𝜃 = √𝑣2 −𝑤2
=
√𝒗𝟐 −𝒘𝟐
𝑣
𝑣
20. The Hubble telescope in orbit above the earth has a 2.4 m circular aperture. The telescope has
equipment for detecting ultraviolet light. The minimum angular separation between two objects that
the telescope can resolve in ultraviolet light of wavelength 95 nm is
a) 4.83 × 1𝟎−𝟖 rad b) 4.03 × 10−8 rad c 2.41 × 10−8 d) 2.00 × 10−8 rad
) rad
Sol Circular aperture of the telescope: d = 2.4 m
Wavelength of the ultraviolet light: λ = 95 nm
1.22𝜆 1.22 𝑥 95 𝑥 10−9
The minimum angular separation between two objects: 𝑑
= 2.4
= 4.83 × 1𝟎−𝟖 rad
21. A projectile is field from ground with velocity u at an angle 𝜃 with

the horizontal. It would be moving perpendicular to its initial
direction of projection after a time t equal to
𝑢 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 2𝑢 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝒖 𝑢
a) b) c) d)
𝑔 𝑔 𝒈 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝜽 2𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
Sol Initial velocity of the projectile: 𝑢̅ = u cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + u sin 𝜃 𝑗̂

Velocity of the projectile at time t: 𝑣̅ = u cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + (u sin 𝜃 − 𝑔𝑡) 𝑗̂
Given: 𝑢̅. 𝑣̅ = 0 → (u cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + u sin 𝜃 𝑗̂). (u cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + (u sin 𝜃 − 𝑔𝑡) 𝑗̂) = 0
𝐮
u2 cos2 𝜃 + u2 sin2 𝜃 – u sin 𝜃 (gt) = 0 → u2 = u sin 𝜃 (gt) → t = 𝐠 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
22. The critical angle for light passing from glass to air is minimum for the light of wavelength
a) 0.7 𝜇m b) 0.6 𝜇m c) 0.5 𝜇m d) 0.4 𝝁m
Sol 1 𝜆
Critical angle for glass to air: sin c = 𝜇 = 𝜆
0
𝜆0 - wavelength of light in vacuum AND λ – wavelength of light in glass

𝜆
sin c = 𝜆 → sin c ∝ λ [The minimum value of wavelength from the given options: 0.4 𝝁m]
0

23. A thin hollow equiconvex lens, silvered at the back, converges a beam of light parallel to the
4
principal axis at a distance 0.2 m, when filled with water (𝜇 = ), the same beam will be
3
converged at a distance of
a) 0.4 m b) 0.20 m c) 0.12 m d) none the above
Sol Since the incoming beam of light is parallel to principal axis, it converges at focal point: f = 0.2 m
A thin hollow equiconvex lens, silvered at the back behaves like a concave mirror: R = 2f = 0.4 m
When water is filled, the focal length of the water lens:
1 2 1 4 2
= (nw – 1) → = ( − 1) → fw = 0.6 m
𝑓𝑤 𝑅 𝑓𝑤 3 0.4
1 2 1 2 1
Effective focal length of the system: 𝐹 = 𝑓 + 𝑓 = 0.6 + 0.2 → F = 0.12 m
𝑤
24. An air bubble is situated at a distance 2.0 cm from the Centre of a spherical glass paper-weight of
radius 5.0 cm and refractive index 1.5 The bubble is seen through the nearest surface. It appears at a
distance v from the Centre. Therefore, v is
a) 3.75 cm b) 3.25 cm c) 2.50 cm d) 3.80 cm

𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
Sol refraction of light at curved surface: − =
𝑣 𝑢 𝑅
n1 – RI of the medium in which incident ray is present = 1.5

n2 – RI of the medium in which refracted ray is present = 1
u = 3 cm; R = 5 cm;
1 1.5 1−1.5 1 1
𝑣
+ 3
= −5
→ 𝑣 = −0.5 + 0.1 = −0.4 → v = 0.4 = 2.5 cm (from the surface)
Distance of the image from the center: d = 5 – v = 5 – 2.5 = 2.5 cm
25. student while performing experiment with a sonometer with bridge separated by distance of 80 cm,
missed out some of the observations However, he claimed that the three resonant frequencies for a
given tuning fork were 84, 140 and 224 Hz. The speed transverse waves on the wire is
a) 33.30 m/s b) 330.0 m/s c) 44.80 m/s d) 448.0 m/s
Sol Separation between the bridges: 𝑙 = 80 cm = 0.8 m

Resonant frequencies of the tuning fork: 84, 140, 224
The given frequencies are in the ratio: 3: 5: 8
𝑛 𝑇 𝑛𝑣
Frequency of transverse wave on a stretched string: f = 2𝑙 √𝜇 = 2𝑙
3𝑣
84 = 2 𝑥 0.8 → v = 44.80 m/s

26. Which of the following curves represents spectral distribution of energy of black body radiation?
𝟖𝝅𝒉𝒄
Sol Planck’s black body radiation law: Eλ = 𝒉𝒄
𝝀𝟓 (𝒆𝝀𝒌𝑻 −𝟏)
Studies of black body radiation by Planck laid the foundation for

the concept of photon, which was later firmly established by Einstein
while explaining the observations of photo electric effect.
From the diagram, the correct option is (a)
27. sphere and a cube having equal surface area are made of the same material. The two are heated to
the same temperature and kept in identical surroundings. The ratio of their initial rates of cooling is
a) 1: 1 b) 𝜋 c) 𝜋 d) 𝝅
√2 : 1 √3 : 1 √𝟔 : 1
Sol 𝑟 3
Surface area of sphere = surface area of cube → 4𝜋r2 = 6a2 → 𝑎 = √2𝜋
The two objects are made of same material: density and specific heat capacity are same
𝑑𝑄
Newton’s law of cooling: 𝑑𝑡 = −𝑏 (T – T0)
𝑑𝑇 𝑑𝑇 𝑏 𝑏 𝑑𝑇 1
ms 𝑑𝑡
= −b (T – T0) → 𝑑𝑡
= − 𝑚𝑠 (T – T0) = − 𝑣𝜌𝑠 (T – T0) → 𝑑𝑡
∝𝑣
3
𝑣 𝑎3 3 𝑎 3 3 2𝜋 ⁄2 𝜋
Ratio of initial rates of cooling: 𝑣𝑐 = 4 = 4𝜋 ( 𝑟 ) = (
4𝜋 3
) =√ :1
𝑠 𝜋𝑟 3 6
3
28. Consider the diffraction pattern due to a single slit. The first maximum for a certain monochromatic
light coincides with the first minimum for red light of wavelength 660 nm. The wavelength of the
monochromatic light is
a) 660 nm b) 550 nm c) 440 nm d) 330 nm
Sol Condition for diffraction minima:

𝑦 𝐷
a sin 𝜃 = nλ → a 𝐷 = λr → y = 𝑎 λr ---- (1)
(a: slit width, n is order of the minima, sin 𝜃 = y/D)

Condition for diffraction maxima:
1 𝑦 3 3𝐷
a sin 𝜃 = (𝑛 + 2) λ → a 𝐷 = 2 λ → y = 2 𝑎 λ ---- (2)
𝐷 3𝐷 2 2
From (1) and (2): 𝑎 λr = 2 𝑎 λ → λ = 3 λr = 3 x 660 = 440 nm

29. A concave lens of focal length f produces an image (1/n) times the size of the object. The distance
of the object from the lens is
a) (n+1) f b) (𝑛 − 1) c) (𝑛 + 1) d) (n-1) f
𝑓 𝑓
𝑛 𝑛
Sol 1 1 ℎ𝑖 1
Size of the image = size of the object → hi = h0 → = =m
𝑛 𝑛 ℎ0 𝑛
𝑣 1 𝑣 𝑢
Magnification in terms of distances: m = 𝑢 → 𝑛 = 𝑢 → v = 𝑛
For a concave lens: u, v and f are –ve
1 1 1 1 1 1 𝑛 1 1 𝑛−1 1
Lens formula: − = → − + = − → − + = − → = → u = (n-1) f
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑓
30. The sun having radius R and surface temperature T, emits radiation as a perfect emitter. The
distance of the earth from the sun is r and the radius of the earth is Re. The total radiant power
incident on the earth is
a) 𝑅𝑒 2 𝑅2 𝜎𝑇 4 b) 𝑅𝑒 2 𝑅2 𝜎𝑇 4 c) 4𝜋𝑅𝑒 2 𝑅2 𝜎𝑇 4 d) 𝝅𝑹𝒆 𝟐 𝑹𝟐 𝝈𝑻𝟒

4𝜋𝑟 2 𝑟2 𝑟2 𝒓𝟐
Sol Intensity of radiation emitted by sun: Is = 𝜎T4

Surface area of sun: As = 4𝜋R2
Power radiated by sun: Ps = IsAs = 𝜎T4 (4𝜋R2)
Projected area of earth facing sun: 𝜋Re2
𝐴𝑒 𝜋𝑅 2 𝝅𝑹𝒆 𝟐 𝑹𝟐 𝝈𝑻𝟒
Power received by earth: Pe = Ps = 4𝜋𝑟𝑒2 𝜎T4 (4𝜋R2) =
𝐴 𝒓𝟐
31. cylinder containing water (refractive index 4/3) is covered by an equiconvex glass (refractive index
3/2) lens of focal length 25 cm. At the mid-day when the sun is just overhead, the image of the sun
will be seen at a distance of
a) 100 cm b) 50 cm c) 37.5 cm d) 25 cm
Sol Lens maker’s formula for equi-convex lens:

1 2 1 2
𝑓
= (n – 1) 𝑅 → 25 = (1.5 – 1) 𝑅 → R = 25 cm
Modified form of lens maker’s formula for different media on either side
3 4 3
1 1 𝑛2 −𝑛1 𝑛3 −𝑛2 1 3 −1 −
=𝑛 [ + ] → 𝑓 = 4 [225 + 3 2 ] → f = 50 cm
𝑓 3 𝑅1 𝑅2 −25
32. A rectangular loop carrying a current is placed in a uniform magnetic field. The net force acting on
the loop
a) depends on the direction and magnitude of the current

b) depends on the direction and magnitude of the magnetic field
c) depends on the area of the loop
d) is zero

Sol Let the magnetic field induction: B

Force on the conductor AB: FAB = Bil (left)
Force on the conductor BC: FBC = Bib (up)
Force on the conductor CD: FCD = Bil (right)
Force on the conductor DA: FDA = Bib (down)
So, the net force on the rectangular loop: F = FAB – FCD + FBC – FDA = 0
33. The capacitor in the circuit shown below carries a charge of 30 𝜇C at a certain time instant. The rate
at which energy is being dissipated in the 3 kΩ resistor at that instant is
a) 4 mW b) 9 mW c) 27 mW d) 48 mW
Sol Instantaneous charge on capacitor:

𝑡 𝑡
4
q = q0 (1 − 𝑒 −𝑅𝐶 ) → 30 = 10 x 12 (1 − 𝑒 −0.03 ) → t = 0.03 𝑙𝑛 3
Current flowing through the circuit:
4 4
𝑡 0.03 𝑙𝑛 0.03 𝑙𝑛
𝑑𝑞 12 3 3 3
i = 𝑑𝑡 = I0 𝑒 −𝑅𝐶 = 𝑒− 𝑅𝐶 = 4 x 10-3 𝑒 − 0.03 = 4 x 10-3 x 4 = 3 Ma
3000
Power dissipated through the resistor:
P = i2R = 9 x 10-6 x 3 x 103 = 27 x 10-3 = 27 mW
34. A hollow conducting sphere of radius 15 cm has a uniform surface charge density +3.2 𝜇C/m2.
When a point charge q is placed at the center of the sphere, the electric field at 25 cm from the
center just reverses in direction keeping the magnitude the same. Therefore, q is
a) +0.91 𝜇C b) −0.91 𝜇C c) +1.81 𝜇C d) −1.81 𝝁C
Sol 1 𝑞 𝜎 𝑅 2
Field intensity due to charged spherical shell at a point outside: E1 = 4𝜋𝜀 2 = 𝜀 ( 𝑟 ) (+ve)
0𝑟 0
1 𝑞
Field intensity due to point charge: E2 = 4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 2
(-ve)
Given: the field gets reversed with same magnitude: the point charge should be negative.
Given: E = −E1 → −E2 + E1 = −E1 → E2 = −2E1
1 𝑞 𝜎 𝑅 2
4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 2
= −2 𝜀 ( 𝑟 ) → q =− 8𝜋𝜎R2 = 8 x 3.14 x 3.2 x 10-6 x 225 x 10-4 = −1.81 𝝁C
0
35. An electron (e) and a proton (p) are situated on the straight line as shown below. The directions of
the electric field at the points 1, 2 and 3 respectively, are shown as
a) →←→ b) ←→← c) ←→→ d) → ← ←

Sol Electric field at a point is directed away from +ve charge and towards – ve charge.
Point 1: field due to proton is strong and left, field due to electron is weak and right.
Point 2: field due to proton is weak and right, field due to electron is strong and right
Point 3: field due to proton is weak and right, field due to electron is strong and left
36. In the circuit shown R1 ≠ R2. The reading in the galvanometer is the same
with switch S open or closed. Then,
a) I1 = IG
b) I2 = IG
c) I3 = IG
d) I4 = IG
Sol When the switch is open, current through R2 and G is same: I2 = IG

When the switch is open, current through R1 and R3 is same: I1 = I3
When the switch is closed, it is given that the reading of the galvanometer remains same.
37. A thin wire of length 1 m is placed perpendicular to the XY plane. If it is moved with velocity
𝑣̅ = 4𝑖̂ − 𝑗̂ m/s in the region of magnetic induction 𝐵̅ = 𝑖̂ + 4𝑗̂ wb/m2. The potential difference
developed between the ends of the wire is
a) zero b) 3V c) 15 V d) 17 V
Sol Length of the wire: 𝑙 ̅ = 1 𝑘̂

Velocity of the wire: 𝑣̅ = 4𝑖̂ − 𝑗̂ m/s
Magnetic field induction: 𝐵̅ = 𝑖̂ + 4𝑗̂ wb/m2
Potential difference developed between the ends of the wire: ∆𝑉 = (𝑣̅ x 𝐵̅). 𝑙 ̅
∆𝑉 = 17 𝑘̂ . 1 𝑘̂ = 17 volt
38. A steel cooking pan has copper coating at its bottom. The thickness of copper coating is half the
thickness of steel bottom. The conductivity of copper is three times that of steel. If the temperature
of blue flame is 119 0C and that of the interior of the cooking pan is 91 0C, then the temperature at
the interface between the steel bottom and the copper coating in steady state is
a) 98 0C b) 103 0C c) 115 0C d) 108 0C

1 1
Sol Thickness of copper coating = 2 thickness of steel → 𝑙𝑐𝑢 = 2 𝑙𝑠𝑡
Conductivity of copper = 3 conductivity of steel → Kcu = 3 Kst
Temperature at copper surface: 119 0C
Temperature at steel surface: 91 0C
Temperature at the interface: 𝜃
𝑑𝑄 𝑑𝑄 𝐾𝐴∆𝜃
For steady state heat transfer: is constant: =
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑙
𝐾𝑐𝑢 𝐴𝑐𝑢 (119−𝜃) 𝐾𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑠𝑡 (𝜃−91) 3𝐾𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑐𝑢 (119−𝜃) 𝐾𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑠𝑡 (𝜃−91)
𝑙𝑐𝑢
= 𝑙𝑠𝑡
→ 0.5𝑙𝑠𝑡
= 𝑙𝑠𝑡
→ 6 (119 - 𝜃) = (𝜃 − 91) → 𝜽 = 115 0C

39. The total capacitance between points A and B in the

arrangement shown below is
34
a) 28 𝜇𝐹 b) 7
𝜇𝐹
𝟑𝟒
b) 23 𝜇𝐹 d) 𝟑
𝝁𝑭
Sol ABCD forms a balanced Wheatstone’s bridge.

2𝑥4 3𝑥6 4 10
Effective capacitance of the bridge: + = +2 = 𝜇F
2+4 3+6 3 3
10 34
Effective capacitance between A & B: + 7 + 1 = 𝜇𝐹
3 3
40. A fiber sheet of thickness 1 mm and a mica sheet of thickness 2 mm are

introduced between two metallic parallel plates to form a capacitor. Given
that the dielectric strength of fiber is 6400 kV/m and the dielectric constants
of fiber and mica are 2.5 and 8 respectively, the electric field inside the mica
sheet just at the breakdown of the fiber will be
a) 2000 kV/m b) 2048 kV/m c) 3200 kV/m d) 6400 kV/m
Sol Let 𝜎 be the surface charge density.

𝜎
Electric field intensity inside fiber sheet: Ef = 𝐾 𝜀 ---- (1)
𝑓 0
𝜎
Electric field intensity inside mica sheet: Em = 𝐾 ---- (2)
𝑚 𝜀0
𝐸𝑓 𝐾𝑚 8 𝐸𝑓 6400
From (1) and (2): 𝐸 = 𝐾𝑓
= 2.5 = 3.2 → Em = 3.2
= 3.2 = 2000 kV/m
𝑚
41. The position vector of a point mass is expressed as 𝑟̅ = at 𝑖̂ +bt2 𝑗̂. The trajectory of the particle is
a) a straight line b) a parabola c) a hyperbola d) none of the above
Sol Position vector of the point mass: 𝑟̅ = at 𝑖̂ +bt2 𝑗̂

Position vector of a point mass: 𝑟̅ = x 𝑖̂ + y 𝑗̂
X component of the position vector: x = at
Y component of the position vector: y = bt2
𝒙 𝟐 𝒃
Eliminating t from both the components: y = b ( ) = 𝟐 𝒙𝟐 (y = kx2: equation of parabola)
𝒂 𝒂
42. In a series LCR circuit fed with an alternating emf E = E0 sin 𝜔t,
a) the voltage across L is in phase with the applied emf E

b) the voltage across C is in phase with the applied emf E
c) the voltage across R is in phase with the applied emf E
d) the voltages across L, C and R are all in phase with the applied emf E

Sol Supply voltage: E = E0 sin 𝜔𝑡

𝑣
Current through the circuit: i = 𝑧 = I0 sin (𝜔t ± ∅)
If XL > XC current lags the applied emf: i = I0 sin (𝜔𝑡 − ∅)
If XL < XC current leads the applied emf: i = I0 sin (𝜔𝑡 + ∅)
If XL = XC (resonance) current is in phase with the applied emf.
Voltage across resistor is in phase with current
Voltage across inductor leads the current by 900
Voltage across capacitor lags the current by 900
Voltage across resistor is in phase with the applied emf at resonance.
43. A conducting wire is bent in the form of a n sided regular polygon enclosed by a circle of radius R.
The magnetic field produced at its center by a current i flowing through the wire is
𝜋 𝜋 𝝅 𝜋
a) 𝜇0 𝑖 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑛 b) 𝜇0 𝑖 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑛 c) 𝝁𝟎 𝒊 𝒕𝒂𝒏 𝒏 d) 𝜇0 𝑖 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛
𝜋 𝜋 𝝅 𝜋
2𝑅 2𝑅 𝟐𝑹 2𝑅
𝑛 𝑛 𝒏 𝑛
𝜋
Sol Perpendicular distance of point O from the line AB: d = R cos
𝑛
0 𝜇 𝑖 𝜇0 𝑖 𝜋
Magnetic field due to AB at point O: BAB = 4𝜋𝑑 (sin 𝛼 + sin 𝛽) = 𝜋 (2 sin 𝑛)
4𝜋 𝑅 cos
𝑛
Magnetic field due to the entire polygon at point O: B = n BAB
𝝅
𝜇0 𝑖 𝜋 𝝁𝟎 𝒊 𝒕𝒂𝒏 𝒏
B=n 𝜋 (2 sin ) = 𝝅
4𝜋 𝑅 cos 𝑛 𝟐𝑹
𝑛 𝒏
44. Th effective resistance between points A and B in the circuit arrangement shown below is
a) 14 Ω b) 15 Ω c) 30 Ω d) none of the above
Sol Apply KVL through ACB: vA – 10i1 – 20i2 – vB = 0 → vA – vB = 10i1 + 20i2 ----- (1)
Apply KVL through ACDB: vA – 10i1 – 10 (i1 – i2) – 10i1 = 0 → vA – vB = 30i1 – 10i2 ---- (2)
From (1) & (2): 10i1 + 20i2 = 30i1 – 10i2 → 2i1 = 3i2
𝑣
Effective resistance of the network between A & B: R = 𝐴𝐵
𝑖
10𝑖1 +20𝑖2 10 𝑥 1.5𝑖2 +20 𝑖2 350
R= = = = 14 Ω
𝑖1 +𝑖2 1.5 𝑖2 + 𝑖2 25

45. The magnetic dipole moment of an electron in the S state of hydrogen atom revolving in a circular
orbit of radius 0.0527 nm with a speed 2.2 x 106 m/s is (in Am2)
a) 4.64 x 10-24 b) 9.28 x 10-24 c) 18.56 x 10-24 d) 2.32 x 10-24

𝑞 𝑞𝑣 𝑞𝑣𝑟
Sol Magnetic dipole moment of a charged particle: M = iA = 𝑇 𝜋r2 = 2𝜋𝑟 𝜋r2 = 2
1.6 𝑥 10−19 𝑥 2.2 𝑥 106 𝑥 0.0527 𝑥 10−9
M= 2
= 9.28 x 10-24 Am2
46. A steel cable hanging vertically can support a maximum load W. The cable is cut to exactly half of
its original length, the maximum load that it can support now is
a) W b) 𝑊 c) 2W d) 𝑊
more than but less than W
2 2
𝐹𝑙 𝑊𝑙
Sol Young’s modulus: Y = 𝐴𝑒 = 𝐴𝑒
Maximum load supported by a cable is decided by the breaking stress of the cable.
𝐹𝑚𝑎𝑥
Breaking stress: 𝐴
→ Fmax = Breaking stress (A)
Fmax ∝ A → maximum load is independent of length of the cable.
47. The strings AB and AC each of length 40 cm, connect a ball of mass 200 g to a vertical shaft as
shown. When the shaft rotates at a constant angular speed 𝜔, the ball travels in a horizontal circle
with the strings inclined at 𝛾 = 300 to the shaft. If the tension in the string AC is 4 N, that in the
string AB and the angular speed 𝜔 respectively are
a) 6.26 N and 11.32 rad/s b) 7.92 N and 14.32 rad/s

c) 7.92 N and 11.32 rad/s d) 6.26 N and 14.32 rad/s
Sol Lengths of the strings AB & AC: 40 cm = 0.4 m

Mass of the ball: m = 200 g = 0.2 kg
𝑟 𝑟
Radius of the circular path: sin 𝛾 = 𝑙 → sin 30 = 0.4 → r = 0.2 m
For vertical equilibrium:

√3
T1 sin 60 = mg + T2 sin 60 → 2
T1 = 1.96 + 2√3 → T1 = 6.26 N
For horizontal equilibrium: (T1 + T2) cos 60 = mr𝜔2

(6.26 + 4) 0.5 = 0.2 x 0.2 x 𝜔2 → 𝜔2 = 128.25 → 𝝎 = 11.32 rad/s

48. tightly wound long solenoid carries a current 5 A. An electron shot perpendicular to the solenoid
axis inside it revolves at a frequency 108 rev/s. The number of turns per meter length of the solenoid
a) 57 b) 176 c) 569 d) 352
Sol Current carried by the solenoid: i = 5 A

Angular frequency of the electron: 108 rev/s = 2𝜋 x 108 rad/s
Magnetic field of a solenoid: B = 𝜇0 𝑖𝑛
Since the electron is projected perpendicular to the field, it will follow circular path.
The centripetal force required for circular path is provided by magnetic force: Fm = Bev = 𝜇0 𝑖𝑛ev
𝑚𝑣 2 𝑚𝑣 𝜔
Centripetal force: Fc = = 𝜇0 𝑖𝑛ev → n = 𝜇 = 𝑒
𝑟 0 𝑖𝑒𝑟 𝜇0 𝑖
𝑚
2𝜋 𝑥 108
n= = ≅ 569
4𝜋 𝑥 10−7 𝑥 5 𝑥 1.76 𝑥 1011
49. The same alternating voltage v = V0 sin (𝜔𝑡) is applied in both the
LCR circuits shown below. The current through the resistance R at
resonance is
a) maximum in fig. (1) and maximum in fig. (2)
b) minimum in fig. (1) and maximum in fig. (2)
c) maximum in fig. (1) and minimum in fig. (2)
d) minimum in fig. (1) and minimum in fig. (2)
Sol Alternating voltage supplied to the circuit: v = V0 sin (𝜔𝑡)

Impedance of series RLC network: z = √𝑅 2 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 )2
Series resonance: Impedance of the circuit is minimum (z = R),

hence current is maximum (XL = XC)
1
Impedance of parallel LC network: z =
2 2
√( 1 ) +( 1 − 1 )
𝑅 𝑋𝐿 𝑋𝐶
Parallel resonance: Impedance of the circuit is maximum, hence current is minimum.
50. The switch S in the circuit shown is closed for a long time and then
opened at time t = 0. The current in the 100 kΩ resistance at t = 3 s is
a) zero b) 10 𝜇A c) 35.5 𝜇A d) 16 𝜇A
Sol 𝑉
Steady state current through the battery: I0 = mA
250
Steady state charge attained by the capacitor:
𝑉 𝑉
q0 = CVAB → q0 = 100 x 10-6 x x 10-3 x 100 x 103 = mC
250 25
When the switch is opened, the capacitor discharges through 100 kΩ resistor.
The battery voltage is required to get a numerical answer.

51. In the network shown below the voltage V0 is nearly
a) 10 volt b) 11volt c) 12 volt d) Zero
Sol Threshold voltage: the forward voltage at which the current in the diode increases exponentially.
For silicon: vsi = 0.7 volt
For Germanium: vGe = 0.3 volt
Applying KVL between input and output: 11 – 0.7 – 0.3 – V0 = 0 → V0 = 10 volt
52. The energy of the characteristic X ray photon in a Coolidge tube comes from
a) the kinetic energy of striking electron

b) the kinetic energy of the free electrons of the target
c) the kinetic energy of the ions of the target
d) the electronic transition of the target atom
Sol Characteristic X rays are formed when a fastmoving

electron from the cathode dislodges an inner electron
from the target atom and an electron in the higher
energy levels of the target atom jumps down to fill the
gap. So, the energy of characteristic X ray photon is
nothing, but the transition energy released in the target
atom.
53. The maximum wavelength that can ionize a hydrogen atom initially in the ground state is
a) 660.0 nm b) 364.5 nm c) 121.9 nm d) 91.4 nm
Sol Energy of the hydrogen in ground state: E = 13.6 eV

ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1240 𝑒𝑉 𝑛𝑚
Wavelength of the radiation: E = 𝜆
→λ= 𝐸
= 13.6 𝑒𝑉
= 91.4 nm
54. The wavelength of the waves associated with a proton and a photon are the same. Therefore, the
two have equal
a) mass b) velocity c) momentum d) kinetic energy
ℎ
Sol Wavelength associated with a moving proton: λpr = 𝑃
𝑝𝑟
ℎ
Wavelength associated with a photon: λph = 𝑃𝑝ℎ
ℎ ℎ
Given: λpr = λph → = → 𝑷𝒑𝒓 = 𝑷𝒑𝒉
𝑃𝑝𝑟 𝑃𝑝ℎ
55. Which of the following sources emits light having highest degree of coherence?
a) LED b) LASER diode c) neon lamp d) incandescent lamp

Sol LASER: Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

Monochromacy: The wavelength range of LASER is very low. So, we obtain almost single color
(monochromatic) light.
Directionality: LASER travels very long distances without much deviation from its original
direction (path).
High Coherence: High degree of coherence is possible for LASER as it is produced by stimulated
emission.
High Intensity: It is possible to concentrate high energy on a small area using LASER beams.
56. An alpha particle with kinetic energy K approaches a stationary nucleus having atomic number z.
The distance of closest approach is b. Therefore, the distance of closest approach for a nucleus of
atomic number 2z is
a) b/2 b) √2b c) 2b d) 4b
Sol Initial kinetic energy of the alpha particle: K

Atomic number of the stationary nucleus: z
Conservation of energy: initial KE = final PE
1 (2𝑒)(𝑧𝑒)
K = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑏
here b is distance of closest approach at which the alpha particle stops.
0
1 (2𝑒)(2𝑧𝑒)
K= here B is the distance of closest approach at which the alpha particle stops.
4𝜋𝜀0 𝐵
Comparing both the expressions: B = 2b
57. In a photodiode the reverse current increases when exposed to light of wavelength 620 nm or less.
The band gap of the semiconductor used is
a) 0.67 eV b) 1.12 eV c) 2.00 eV d) 2.42 eV
Sol Wavelength required to increase the reverse current: 𝜆 = 620 nm

ℎ𝑐 1240
Band gap of the semiconductor: EG = 𝜆
= 620
= 2.00 eV
58. An electron in hydrogen atom jumps from a level n = 4 to n = 1. The momentum of the recoiled
atom is
a) 6.8 x 10-27 kg-m/s b) 12.75 x 10-19 kg-m/s

c) 13.6 x 10-19 kg-m/s d) zero
Sol Transition of the electron in hydrogen atom: n = 4 to n = 1

1 1
Energy released during this transition: E = −13.6 (𝑛 2 − 𝑛 2 )
𝑖 𝑓
1 15
E = 13.6 (1 − 16
) = 13.6 x 16
= 12.75 eV = 12.75 x 1.6 x 10-19 = 20.4 x 10-19 J
𝐸 20.4 𝑥 10−19
Momentum of the electron: P = = = 6.8 x 10-27 kg m/s
𝑐 3 𝑥 108

59. For the Boolean equation Y = AB + A (B +C) + B (B + C) + 𝐵̅, which of the following statements
is correct?
a) Y does not depend on A but depends on B b) Y does not depend on B but depends on A
c) Y does not depend on B d) Y depends only on C
Sol Given Boolean equation: Y = AB + A (B + C) + B (B + C) + 𝐵̅

Y = AB + AB + AC + BB + BC + 𝐵̅
Y = AB + AC + BC + 1
Irrespective of the values of A, B and C, the output is always 1.
So, the output is independent of all the three input variables.
60. Refer to the common emitter amplifier circuit shown below,

using a transistor with 𝛽 = 80 and VBE = 0.7 V. The value of
resistance RB is
a) 330 Ω b) 330 k Ω c) 220 Ω d) 220 k Ω
Sol Apply KVL to first loop: 4 – iBRB – VBE = 0 → iBRB = 3.3 volt ---- (1)
3
Apply KVL to second loop: −iCRC – 6 + VCE = 0 → iCRC = 3 → iC = 2.5 𝑥 103 = 1.2 mA
𝑖 1.2
Current amplification factor: 𝛽 = 𝑖 𝑐 → 80 = 𝑖𝐵
→ 𝑖𝐵 = 15 𝜇A
𝐵
From (1): iBRB = 3.3 → 15 x 10-6 RB = 3.3 → RB = 220 kΩ
61. A horizontal insulated cylinder of volume V is divided into four identical compartments by
stationary semi-permeable thin partitions as shown. The four compartments from left are initially
filled with 28 g helium, 160 g oxygen, 28 g nitrogen and 20 g hydrogen respectively. The left
partition lets through hydrogen, nitrogen and helium while the right partition lets through hydrogen
only. The middle partition les through hydrogen and nitrogen both. The temperature T inside the
entire cylinder is maintained constant. After the system is set in equilibrium
𝟏𝟒𝑹𝑻 𝟐𝟎𝑹𝑻
a) pressure of helium is 𝑽
b) pressure of oxygen is 𝑽
𝟒𝑹𝑻 𝟏𝟎𝑹𝑻
c) pressure of nitrogen is 𝟑𝑽 d) pressure of hydrogen is 𝑽
Sol Volume of each part of the container: V/4

𝑛𝐻𝑒 𝑅𝑇 𝟏𝟒𝑹𝑻
Pressure of helium: PHe = 𝑉⁄ =
2 𝑽
𝑛𝑂 𝑅𝑇 𝟐𝟎𝑹𝑻
Pressure of oxygen: PO = 𝑉 =
⁄4 𝑽
𝑛𝑁 𝑅𝑇 𝟒𝑹𝑻
Pressure of nitrogen: PN = 3𝑉 = 𝟑𝑽
⁄4
𝑛𝐻 𝑅𝑇 𝟏𝟎𝑹𝑻
Pressure of hydrogen: PH = 𝑉 = 𝑽

62. After charging a capacitor C to a potential V, it is connected across an ideal inductor L. The
capacitor starts discharging simple harmonically at time t = 0. The charge on the capacitor at a later
time instant is q and the periodic time of simple harmonic oscillations is T. Therefore
a) q = CV sin (𝜔t) b) q = CV cos (𝝎t) c 1 d) T = 2𝝅 √𝑳𝑪

) T = 2𝜋 √𝐿𝐶
Sol Initially, the capacitor is charged.

𝑞 𝑑𝑖
Apply KVL: − 𝐶 − 𝐿 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑞 𝑑2 𝑞 𝑑2 𝑞 𝑞
− −𝐿 2 =0→ 2 + = 0 (a + 𝜔2x = 0)
𝐶 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝐿𝐶
1 2𝜋 1
𝜔= → = → T = 2𝝅 √𝑳𝑪
√𝐿𝐶 𝑇 √𝐿𝐶
The solution of the second order differential equation

is of the form
q = q0 cos (𝜔t) = CV cos (𝝎t)
63. In the circuit arrangement shown two cells supply a current I to a

load resistance R = 9 Ω. One cell has an emf E1 = 9 V and internal
resistance r1 = 1 Ω and the other cell has an emf E2 = 6 V and
internal resistance r2 = 3 Ω. The currents are as shown. Then,
a) I1 = 0.9 A and I2 = 0.5 A

b) I ≅ 0.85 A
c) if the cell of emf E1 is removed, current I will be smaller
d) if the cell of emf E2 is removed, current I will be smaller
𝐸1 𝐸2 9 6
Sol ∑(𝐸⁄𝑟 ) +
𝑟1 𝑟2 + 33
Effective emf of the parallel combination of the cells: e = ∑(1⁄𝑟)
= 1 1 = 11 3
1 = 4
volt
+ +
𝑟1 𝑟2 1 3
𝑟1 𝑟2 1𝑥3 39
Effective resistance of the circuit: r = R + =9+ = Ω
𝑟1 +𝑟2 1+3 4
𝒆 𝟑𝟑⁄
Current through the external resistor: I = = 𝟑𝟗 𝟒 ≅ 0.85 A
𝒓 ⁄𝟒
𝑬𝟐 𝟔
When the cell of emf E1 is removed: I = = = 0.5 A
𝑹+𝒓𝟐 𝟗 +𝟑
𝐸 9
When the cell of emf E2 is removed: I = 𝑅+1𝑟 = 9+1 = 0.9 A
1
64. A transparent cylindrical rod of length 𝑙 = 50 cm, radius R = 10 cm and refractive index 𝜇 = √3 lies
onto a horizontal plane surface. A ray of light moving perpendicular to its length is incident on the
rod horizontally at a height h above the plane surface such that this ray emerges out of the rod at a
height 10 cm above the plane surface. Therefore, h is
a) 1.34 cm b) 1.73 cm c) 10.0 cm d) 18.66 cm

Sol From the dig: i = 2r

(external angle in ACD = sum of opposite internal angles)
Snell’s law at A: n1 sin 𝜃1 = n2 sin 𝜃2 → 1 x sin i = √3 sin r
sin 2r = √3 sin r → r = 300 and i = 600
𝐴𝐸 𝑌 √3
From ∆le ACE: sin i = 𝐴𝐶 → sin 60 = 𝑅 → Y = 10 x 2
= 5√3 cm
Height of point A: 10 - 5 √3 = 1.34 cm
Height of point B: 10 + 5√3 = 18.66 cm
65. Two-point charges +1 𝜇C and −1 𝜇C are placed at points (0, −0.1 m) and
(0, +0.1 m) respectively in XY plane. Then, choose the correct statement/s
from the following
a) The electric field at all points on the Y axis has the same direction
b) The dipole moment of 0.2 𝜇C – m along +ve X direction
c) No work has to be done in bringing a test charge from infinity to the origin
d) Electric field at all points on the X axis is along +ve Y axis
Sol The given arrangement forms an electric dipole.

Electric field is directed away from +ve charge and towards –ve charge.
𝑘𝑞 𝑘𝑞
Potential due to the dipole at the midpoint: v0 = 𝑟
− 𝑟
=0
So, the work done in bringing a test charge from infinity to the origin: w = v0q = 0
𝑘𝑞
Electric field at any point on the x axis: E+ = E- = 𝑎2
Since the two fields (vectors) are equal in magnitude, their resultant is angular bisector.
So, the electric field at all points on the X axis is along +ve Y direction
66. An inductance L, a resistance R and a battery B are connected in series

with a switch S. The voltages across L and R are VL and VR respectively.
Just after closing the switch S,
a) VL will be greater than VR

b) VL will be less than VR
c) VL will be same as VR
d) VL will decrease while VR will increase as time progresses
𝑡
Current through series RL network: i = I0 (1 − 𝑒 −𝜏 )
Sol
𝑡 𝒕
Voltage across resistor: VR = iR = I0R (1 − 𝑒 −𝜏 ) = V0 (𝟏 − 𝒆−𝝉 )
𝒕
Voltage across inductor: VL = V0 – VR = V0 𝒆−𝝉
Just after closing the switch: t = 0; VR = 0 and VL = V0
As the time passes, VL will decrease while VR will increase.

67. A string of length 𝑙, tied to the top of a pole, carries a ball at its other end as
shown. On giving the ball a single hand blow perpendicular to the string, it
acquires an initial velocity v0 in the horizontal plane and moves in a spiral of
decreasing radius by curling itself around the pole. Therefore,
a) the instantaneous center of revolution of the ball is the point of contact of the string with
the pole at that instant
b) the instantaneous center of revolution of the ball will be fixed at the point where the string was
initially fixed
c) the angular momentum of the system will not be conserved
d) the angular momentum of the system will be conserved
Sol (a) The point of contact of the string with the pole is at rest at any point of time. So, the
instantaneous center of revolution of the ball is the point of contact of the string with the
pole at that instant.
(c) Weight of the ball (gravitational force = mg) acts vertically downward. The torque
provided by
this force about the pole is non-zero. So, the angular momentum of the system is not conserved
68. A circular loop of conducting wire of radius 1 cm is cut at a point A on its circumference. It is then
folded along a diameter through A such that two semicircular loops lie in two mutually
perpendicular planes. In this region a uniform magnetic field B of magnitude 100 mT is directed
perpendicular to the diameter through A and makes angles 300 and 600 with the planes of the two
semicircles. The magnetic field reduces at a uniform rate from 100 mT to zero in a time interval of
4.28 ms. Therefore,
a) instantaneous emfs in the two loops are in the ratio √2 : 1

b) instantaneous emfs in the two loops are in the ratio √𝟑 : 1
c) the total emf between free ends at point A is 5 mV
d) the total emf between free ends at point A is 1.4 mV
Sol Flux of magnetic field through a coil: 𝜑 = BA cos 𝜃

𝑑𝜑 𝑑𝐵
Magnitude of induced emf in the coil: e = = A cos 𝜃 → e ∝ cos 𝜃
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑒 cos 𝜃1 cos 30
Ratio of emf induced in the semicircular coils: 𝑒1 = = cos 60 = √𝟑
2 cos 𝜃2
𝑑𝐵
Total emf between the free ends at point A: e = e1 − e2 = A 𝑑𝑡
(cos 𝜃1 + cos 𝜃2)
𝜋(0.01)2 100 √3 1 25𝜋
e= ( − ) = x 0.732 x 10-4 = 1.4 mV
2 4.28 2 2 4.28
69. A converging lens of focal length 40 cm is fixed at 40 cm in front of a screen. An object placed
120 cm from the fixed lens is required to be focused on the screen by introducing another identical
lens in between. The second lens should be placed at a distance x from the object where x is
a) 40 cm b) 50 cm c) 140 cm d) 150 cm

Sol Let the second lens is placed to the left of first lens.
Screen is placed at the focus of the 1st lens. To catch the img. on the screen, obj. should be at
infinity.
Image formed by 2nd lens acts as object for 1st lens. So, the 2nd lens should form image at infinity.
1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓 → ∞ + 𝑥 = 40 → x = 40 cm
Let the second lens be placed to the right of first lens.
1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula for first lens: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓 → 𝑣 + 120 = 40 → v = 60 cm
Let the second lens be placed at a distance y from the screen.
1 1 1 1 1 1
Lens formula for second lens: 𝑣 − 𝑢 = 𝑓 → 𝑦 − 𝑦 + 20 = 40 → y = 20 cm
So, the distance of second lens from the object: x = 120 + 40 – 20 = 140 cm
70. Mysteriously, a charged particle moving with velocity 𝑣̅ = v0 𝑖̂ entered the tube of Thomson’s
apparatus where the parallel metallic plates of length 5 cm along X axis are separated by 2 cm.
Under the influence of a magnetic field 𝐵̅ = 4.57 x 10-2 𝑘̂ T, the particle is found to deflect by an
angle of 5.70. When a potential of 2000 V is applied between the two plates, the particle is found to
move straight to the screen without any deflection. Then
a) the velocity v0 = 2.19 x 106 m/s

b) the charge to mass ratio of the particle is 9.58 x 107 C/kg
c) radius of the circular path in the magnetic field is 50 cm
d) the particle is identified as a proton
Sol 𝐸 ∆𝑉 2000
Velocity of the particle: v0 = = = = 2.19 x 106 m/s
𝐵 𝑑(𝐵) 0.02 𝑥 4.57 𝑥 10−2
𝑙 5
Deviation in the path of the particle: sin 𝜃 = → r = = 50 cm
𝑟 0.1
Radius of the circular path followed by charged particle in transverse magnetic field:
𝑚𝑣 𝑣 𝑞 𝑣 2.19 𝑥 106
r= = 𝑞 → = = = 9.58 x 107 C/kg
𝐵𝑞 𝐵 𝑚 𝐵𝑟 4.57 𝑥 10−2 𝑥 0.5
𝑚
𝑞 1.6 𝑥 10−19
𝑚
= 9.58 x 107 → 𝑚
= 9.58 x 107 → m = 1.67 x 10-27 kg (proton)

National Standard Examination / Physics
FINAL NATIONAL STANDARD EXAMINATION - 2019
(Held On Sunday 24th November, 2019)
PHYSIC S TEST PAPER WITH SOLUTION
1. A pendulum is made by using a thread of length 300 cm and a small spherical bob of mass 100 g.
It is suspended from a point S. The bob is pulled from its position of rest at O to the point A so that
the linear amplitude is 25 cm. The angular amplitude in radian and the potential energy of the bob
in joule at A are respectively
(a) 0.10 and 0.10 (b) 0.083 and 0.01 (c) 0.251 and 2.94 (d) 0.083 and 0.24
Ans. (b)
25
Sol. Angular amplitude , q0 =
300
q0 = .083 rad q0
N
300cm
potential energy, U = mgl (1 – cosq)
A
U = 2mgl sin2 (q/2)
25cm
q2
Þ U ~ mgl
E 2
æ1 ö 1
= 0.1 × 10 × 3 × ç ÷ ´
è 12 ø 2
2
LL
= 0.01 J
2. Consider the following physical expressions
(I) rv2 (r : density, v : velocity)
YDL
(II) (Y : Young's modulus, L : length)
L
A
s2
(III) e (s : surface density of charge)
0
(IV) hrrg (h : rise of a liquid in a capillary tube of radius r)

(a) I and II only (b) II and III only (c) II, III and IV only (d) I, II and III only
Ans. (d)
Sol. [rv2] = [ML–3] [L2T–2]
= ML–1T–2
-2
é DL ù [F] MLT
Y =
êë L úû [A] = = ML-1 T -2
L2
é s2 ù
ê ú = [Pressure] = ML–1T–2
ë Î0 û
[hrrg] = [ML–1T–2] [L] = MT–2
National Standard Examination/Physics/Held on Sunday 24 th November, 2019
1
3. Two simple pendulums of lengths 1.44 m and 1.0 m start swinging together in the same phase. The
two will be in phase again after a time of
(a) 6 second (b) 9 second (c) 12 second (d) 25 second
Ans. (c)
1.44 1
Sol. T1 = 2 p T2 = 2 p
10 10
T1 = 1.2 T0 , T2 = T0
Let after minimum time t, both will again be in phase,
n1T1 = n2T2 = t
n2 6
Þ n1 × 1.2 = n2 Þ =
n1 5
N
minimum value of n1 = 5 & n2 = 6
2p
\t=6× ~ 12 second
10
A home aquarium partly filled with water slides down an inclined plane of inclination angle q with
4.
E
respect to the horizontal. The surface of water in the aquarium
(a) remains horizontal
LL
(b) remains parallel to the plane of the incline
(c) forms an angle a with the horizon where 0 < a < q
(d) forms an angle a with the horizon, where q < a < 90
Ans. (b or c)
Sol. Considering friction is absent
A
)
ce
q or
is n o f
g d
nq m seu
g si (p
q q q mg
in c
gs os
q
m
mg
F.B.D. of a particle in frame of aquarium.

From FBD it can be said that net force (including pseudo force)
act perpendicular to inclined plane therefore liquid surface will be parallel to incline plane
If friction is present then pseudo force will be less than mgsinq, therefore 0 < a < q.
2 National Standard Examination/Physics/Held on Sunday 24 th November, 2019

5. A sound source of constant frequency travels with a constant velocity past an observer. When it crosses
the observer the sound frequency sensed by the observer changes from 449 Hz to 422 Hz. If the velocity
of sound in 340 m/s, the velocity of the source of sound is
(a) 8.5 m/s (b) 10.5 m/s (c) 12.5 m/s (d) 14.5 m/s
Ans. (b)
S v
Sol. O
frequency heard by observer when source is approaching observer
é v ù
f1 = ê v - v ú f0 = 449 ....(1)
ë s û
frequency heard by observer when source is receding from observer

é v ù
f2 = ê v + v ú f0 = 422 ...(2)
ë s û
from eq. (1) & (2)

v - v s 422 v 27
= Þ s =
N
v + vs 449 v 871
27
Þ vs = ´ 340 = 10.5m / s
871
6. Identify the rank in order from the dimmest to the brightest when all the identical bulbs are connected
E
in the circuit as shown below .
D
LL
C
A B
+ –
(a) A = B > C = D (b) A = B = C = D (c) A > C > B > D (d) A = B < C = D
Ans. (d)
A
Sol.
A B
V
2
V V2
PA = , PB =
4R 4R
V2 V2
PD = , PC =
R R
\ PA = PB < PD = PC

3
7. The unit of magnetizing field is
(a) tesla (b) newton (c) ampere (d) ampere turn/meter
Ans. (d)
8. A star undergoes a supernova explosion. Just after the explosion, the material left behind forms a uniform
sphere of radius 8000 km with a rotation period of 15 hours. This remaining material eventually collapses
into a neutron star of radius 4 km with a period of rotation.
(a) 14 s (b) 3.8 h (c) 0.021 s (d) 0.0135 s
Ans. (d)
Sol. According to angular momentum conservation
I1w1 = I2w2
2 æ 2p ö 2 æ 2p ö
Þ 5 mR1 ç T ÷ = 5 mR 2 ç T ÷
2 2
è 1ø è 2ø
N
2
(8000)2 (4) 2 æ 1 ö
Þ = Þ T2 = 15 ç ÷ hr
15 T2 è 2000 ø
Þ T2 = 0.0135 sec
9. A number of identical absorbing plates are arranged in between a source of light and a photo cell.
E
When there is no plate in between, the photo current is maximum. Under the circumstances let us
focus on the two statements -
(1) The photo current decreases with the increase in number of absorbing plates.
LL
(2) The stopping potential increases with the increase in number of absorbing plates.
(a) Statement (1) and (2) are both true and (1) is the cause of (2)
(b) Statement (1) and (2) are both true but (1) and (2) are independent
(c) Statement (1) is true while (2) is not true and (1) and (2) are independent
(d) Statement (1) is true while (2) is not true and (2) is the effect of (1)
A
Ans. (c)
Sol. due to absorbing plates, intensity of light decreases, but frequency remain same
therefore photo current decreases but stopping potential remain same
10. In a nuclear reaction, two photons each of energy 0.51 MeV are produced by electron-positron
annihilation. The wavelength associated with each photon is
(a) 2.44 × 10–12 m (b) 2.44 × 10–8 m
(c) 1.46 × 10–12 m (d) 3.44 × 10–10 m
Ans. (a)
hc
Sol. = 0.51 MeV = 0.51 × 106 eV
l
hC 1242
l= = nm
5.1 ´ 10 5
5.1 ´ 10 5
l = 2.44 × 10–12 m

11. In the circuit shown if an ideal ammeter is connected between A and B then the direction of current
and the current reading would be (assume Is remains unchanged)
Is
4R 2R
4R 2R
A B
2R 4R
Is
(a) B to A and Is/2 (b) A to B and Is/4
(c) B to A and Is/9 (d) B to A and Is/3
Ans. (c)
N
IS E i1
i1
4R IS – i1 1
2R
C A D
Sol. 2R
i1
E
6R 2i1 – IS IS – i1
4R
F
LL
On applying Kirchhoff's law
in 1 loop
–2i1R – 6R(2i1 – IS)
+ 4R(IS – i1) = 0
–2i1 – 12i1 + 6IS + 4IS – 4i1 = 0

A
–18i1 + 10IS = 0
5
i1 = I
9 S
current through ammeter = 2i1 – IS
æ 10 ö
= ç - 1÷ IS
è 9 ø
IS
= from B to A
9

5
12. A rectangular slab of glass of refractive index 1.5 immersed in water of refractive index 1.33 such
that the top surface of the slab remains parallel to water level. Light from a point source in air is incident
on the surface of water at an angle a such that the light reflected from the glass slab is plane polarised,
the angle a is :-
(a) 84.4º (b) 48.4º (c) 56.3º (d) 53.1º
Ans. (a)
a
iB
Sol.
N
iB = Brewster angle
4 3
\
3 2
9
E
sin i B = sin(90 - i B )
4
9
145
\ tan i B = Þ sin a = sin i B

8 3 iB
LL
4 9 12 8
Þ sin a = ´ =
3 145 145
1
13. In a spectrometer the smallest main scale division is of a degree. The total number of divisions
3
on the vernier scale attached to the main scale is 60 which coincide with the 59 divisions of the main
A
circular scale. The least count of the spectrometer is :-

(a) 20' (b) 20" (c) 30" (d) 30'
Ans. (b)
Sol. \ 60 VSD = 59 MSD
59
\ 1 VSD = MSD
60
\ 1 least count
= 1 MSD – 1 VSD
1
= MSD
60
1 æ 1° ö
= ç ÷ = 20"
60 è 3 ø

14. White light is used to illuminate two slits in Young's double slit experiment. Separation between the
two slits is b and the screen is at a distance D(>>b) from the plane of slits. The wavelength missing
at a point on the screen directly in front of one of the slits is :-
2b 2 2b 2 b2 b2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3D D 3D 2D
Ans. (c)
b2
Sol. Path difference in front of one slit =
2D
Let l is the wavelength, whose minima coincides with this point, then
l b2
( 2n + 1) =
2 2D
N
b2
l=
D ( 2n + 1)
15. In an ink-jet printer, an droplet of mass m is given a negative charge q by a computer-controlled charging
E
unit. The charged droplet then enters the region between two deflecting parallel plates of length L
separated by distance d (see figure below) with a speed v. All over this region there exists a unifrom
downward electric field E (in the plane of paper). Neglecting the gravitational force on the droplet,
LL
the maximum charge that can be given to this droplet, so that it does not hit any of the plates, is
q
E
d
v
L
A
mv 2 L mv 2 d md mv 2 L2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Ed 2 EL2 Ev 2 L2 Ed
Ans. (b)
y
x
v d
Sol.
L
d
In limiting case drop will travel L distance along x axis while along y axis.
2

7
1 æ qE ö d
\ ç ÷ t2 = ... (i)
2è m ø 2
& L = vt ... (ii)
qE L2
\ × 2 =d
m v
dmv2
q=
EL2
16. A converging beam of light is pointing to P. Two observations are made with (i) a convex lens of
focal length 20 cm and, (ii) a concave lens of focal length 16 cm placed in the path of the convergent
beam at a distance 12 cm before the point P. It is observed that
(a) in both cases the images are real
N
(b) in both cases the images are virtual
(c) for (i) the image is real and for (ii) the image is virtual
(d) for (i) the image is virtual and for (ii) the image is real
Ans. (a)
E
12cm
LL
Sol. P
f = 20cm
1 1 1
- =
A
(i)
v 12 20
v>0
12cm
f = –16cm
1 1 1
(ii) - =-
v 12 16
v> 0
\ both images are real
17. The log-log graph for a non-linear oscillator is shown below. Assuming the constants to have appropriate
dimensions the relationship between time period (T) and the amplitude (A) can be expressed as :-
8
log(T)
4
2
0 2
1 log (A)
(a) T = 1000 A2 (b) T = 4A1/2 (c) T = 4A2 + B (d) T = 8A3

Ans. (a)
N
Sol. According to graph
æ 7-3ö
log ( T ) = ç ÷ log ( A ) + 3
è 2 ø
E
log ( T ) = 2 log A + 3
log ( T ) = log A 2 + log1000

LL
T = (1000 A2)
18. In many situations the point source emitting a wave strats moving, through the medium, with velocity
V greater than the wave velocity in that medium. In such a case when source velocity (V) > wave
velocity (v), the wave front changes
A
(a) from spherical to plane (b) from spherical to conical
(c) from plane to spherical (d) from cylindrical to spherical
Ans. (b)
Sol. Theoretical
19. If the average mass of a smoke particle in an Indian kitchen is 3 × 10–17kg, the rms speed of the smoke
particles at 27ºC is approximately :
(a) 2 cm/sec (b) 2 m/sec (c) 2 km/sec (d) none of these
Ans. (a)
3RT
Sol. v rms = = 2 cm/s
M

9
20. Two wires, made of same material, one thick and the other thin are joined to form one composite
wire. The composite wire is subjected to the same tension throughout. A wave travels along the wire
and passes the point where the two wires are joined. The quantity which changes at the joint are
(a) frequency only (b) propagation speed only
(c) wavelength only (d) both propagation speed and wavelength
Ans. (d)
Sol. Frequency is the property of material.
21. The frequency of the third overtone of a closed end organ pipe equals the frequency of the fifth harmonic
of an open end organ pipe. Ignoring end correction, the ratio of their lengths lopen : lclose is
(a) 10 : 7 (b) 10 : 9 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 7 : 10
N
Ans. (a)
7v 5v
Sol. =
4l close 2l open E
l open 10
=
l close 7
LL
22. Light of wavelength 640 nm falls on a plane diffraction grating with 12000 lines per inch. In the diffraction
pattern on a screen kept at a distance of 12 cm from the grating, the distance of the second order maximum
from the central maximum is
(a) 1.81 cm (b) 2.41 cm (c) 3.62 cm (d) 7.25 cm
Ans. (d)
A
1 inch 2.54cm
Sol. l = 640, d = =
12000 12000
for 2nd order maxima

d sin q = 2l
y 2Dl
d = 2l Þ y =
D d
2 ´ 12 ´ 10 -2 ´ 640 ´ 10 -9 ´ 12000
y=
2.54 ´ 10 -2
= 7.25 cm

23. If the force acting on a body is inversely proportional to its speed, the kinetic energy of the body varies
with time t as
(a) t0 (b) t1 (c) t2 (d) t–1
Ans. (b)
1 k k¶t
Sol. Fµ Þ F = =
v v ¶x
ò Fdx Þ ò kdt Þ W = kt
KE µ t
N
24. As shown in the figure, a block of mass m is hung from the ceiling by the system of springs consisting
of two layers. The force constant of each of the springs is k. The frequency of vertical oscillations
of the block is E
LL
k k k
k k
m
A
1 k 1 4k 1 5k 1 6k
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2p 5m 2p 5m 2p 6m 2p 5m
Ans. (d)
1 1 1 6
Sol. = + Þ k eq = k
K eq 3k 2k 5
5m 1 6k
T = 2p Þf =
6k 2 p 5m

11
a
25. Two simple harmonic motions are given by x1 = a sin wt + a cos wt and x2 = a sin wt + cos wt.
3
The ratio of the amplitudes of the first to the second and the phase difference between them respectively
are
3 p 3 p 2 p 3 p
(a) and (b) and (c) and (d) and
2 12 2 12 3 12 2 6
Ans. (a)
Sol. x1 = a sin wt + a cos wt
æ 1 1 ö
= 2a ç sin wt + cos wt ÷
è 2 2ø
N
= 2a sin ( wt + p / 4 )
a
x2 = a sin wt + cos wt
3
=
2a æ 3
ç
3è 2
1
2
E ö
sin wt + cos wt ÷
ø
LL
2a æ pö
= sin ç wt + ÷
3 è 6ø
A1 2a 3 3
= =
A2 2a 2
p
A
and f1 – f2 =
12
26. A particle is projected from the ground with a velocity vr = (3iˆ + 10 ˆj)ms-1 . The maximum height attained
and the range of the particle are respectively given by (use g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 5m and 6m (b) 3m and 10m (c) 6m and 5m (d) 3m and 5m
Ans. (a)
u 2y 20 2
Sol. mm = =- = 5m
2g 20
2u y 2 ´ 10
R = ux = 3´ = 6m
g 10

27. A 20 cm long capillary tube stands vertically with lower end just in water. Water rises up to 5 cm.
If the entire system is now kept on a freely falling platform, the length of the water column in the
capillary tube will be
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm (c) Zero (d) 20 cm
Ans. (d)
2T cos q
Sol. h = rg r
eff
goff = 0 so h ® ¥ but water can't come out of tube, so h = length of tube = 20 cm

28. Position-time graph of a particle moving in a potential field is shown beside. If the mass of the particle
is 1 kg its total energy is approximately
N
15
10
5
x(cm) 0
–5
–10
E –15
0 2 4
t(s)
6 8 10
LL
(a) 15.45 × 10–4 J (b) 30.78 × 10–4 J (c) 7.71 × 10–4 J (d) 3.85 × 10–4 J
Ans. (c)
æ 2p ö
Sol. x = (5cm) sin ç t÷
è 8 ø
A
1 1
TE = kA 2 = mw2 A 2
2 2
1 p2
= ´ 1 ´ ´ 25 ´ 10 -4
2 16
= 7.71 × 10–4 J
29. An observer stands on the platform at the front edge of the first bogie of a stationary train. The train
starts moving with uniform acceleration and the first bogie takes 5 seconds to cross the observer. If
all the bogies of the train are of equal length and the gap between them is negligible, the time taken
by the tenth bogie to cross the observer is
(a) 1.07 s (b) 0.98 s (c) 0.91 s (d) 0.81 s
Ans. (d)

13
Sol. Let length of first boggie is l.

1 25
l = 0 + at 2 = a
2 2
So length of 10 boggies = 125 a
and length of 9 bogies = 25 × 4.5 a
So time taken by 10th boggie to cross the man
2 ´ 125a 2 ´ 4.5 ´ 25a

= -
a a
= 250 - 225
= 0.81 sec
30. The resistive force on an aeroplane flying in a horizontal plane is given by Ff = kv2, where k is constant
and v is the speed of the aeroplane. When the power output from the engine is P0, the plane flies
N
at a speed v0. If the power output of the engine is doubled the aeroplane will fly at a speed of
(a) 1.12 v0 (b) 1.26 v0 (c) 1.41 v0 (d) 2.82 v0
Ans. (b)
Sol. P = (kv2)·v
P
v
if
= kv3
µ P1/3
E
P becomes double, v becomes 21/3 times i.e. v = 21/3v0.
= 1.26 v0
LL
31. A 3.0 cm thick layer of oil (density roil = 800 kg/m3) floats on water (density rw = 1000 kg/m3) in
1
a transparent glass beaker. A solid cylinder is observed floating vertically with of it in water and
3
1
in the oil. Oil is gently poured into the beaker until the cylinder floats in oil only. The fraction
3
of the solid cylinder in oil now is
A
3 2 3 8
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 3 4 9
Ans. (c)
h/3
h/3
h/3
Sol.

mg = B
Ahrwg Ahr0g
AhrSg = +
3 3
rw rS
rS = + = 600
3 3
Now
mg = B
AhrSg = Axr0g x
rS x
=
r0 h
x 600 3
= =
h 800 4
N
32. A wedge of mass M rests on a horizontal frictionless surface. A block of mass m starts sliding down
the rough inclined surface of the wedge to its bottom. During the course of motion, the centre of mass
of the block and the wedge system
E
(a) does not move at all (b) moves horizontally with constant speed
(c) moves horizontally with increasing speed (d) moves vertically with increasing speed
LL
Ans. (d)
Sol. SFext = 0 in horizontal
and SFext ¹ 0 in vertical
33. A uniform circular disc rotating at a fixed angular velocity w about an axis normal to its plane and
passing through its centre has kinetic energy E. If the same disc rotates with an angular velocity 2w
about a parallel axis passing through the edge, its kinetic energy will be
A
(a) 2 E (b) 4 E (c) 10 E (d) 12 E

Ans. (d)
1 2 mR 2
Sol. E = Iw where I =
2 2
1æ3 ö
mR 2 ÷ ( 2w)
2
Now k' = ç
2è2 ø
1 æ mR 2 ö 2
= w ( 3 ´ 4)
2 çè 2 ÷ø
= 12 E

15
34. Avalanche breakdown in a p-n junction primarily depends on the phenomenon of

(a) doping (b) collision (c) recombination (d) ionization
Ans. (b)
Sol. Conceptual
35. A source emits photons of energy 5 eV which are incident on a metallic sphere of work function
3.0 eV. The radius of the sphere is r = 8 × 10–3m. It is observed that after some time emission of
photoelectrons from the metallic sphere is stopped. Charge on the sphere when the photoemission stops
is.
(a) 1.77 × 10–16 C (b) 1.77 × 10–12 C
(c) 1.11 × 10–12 C (d) 1.11 × 10–10 C
Ans. (b)
N
Sol. Photoelectric effect stops when
V5 = V
æ hn - f ö kq
çè e ÷ø = r
5eV - 3eV kq
e
=
r
E
LL
kq 2 ´ 8 ´ 10 -3
2= Þq= = 1.77 ´ 10 -12
r 9 ´ 10 9
36. The dc component of current in the output of a half - wave rectifier with peak value I0 is
I0 I0 2I 0
(a) zero (b) (c) (d)
p 2p p
A
Ans. (b)
i
i0
t
Sol. T/2 T 5T/2 2T
T/2 T
iavg = ò
0
i0 sin wtdt + ò 0dt
T/2
i0
=
p

37. In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of straight line graph between the stopping potential
and the frequency of incident radiation gives.
(a) Electron charge(e) (b) Planck constant (h)
h
(c) (d) Work function (W)
e
Ans. (c)
hn f
Sol. VS = -
e e
h
Slope =
e
N
38. According to Bohr's theory the ionization energy of H atom is 13.6 eV. The energy needed to remove
an electron from Helium ion (He+) is
(a) 13.6 eV E (b) 16.8 eV (c) 27.2 eV (d) 54.4 eV
Ans. (d)
Sol. IE for Hc+ = Z2(IEH) = 4 × 13.6
= 54.4 eV
39. The phenomenon inverse to photo electric effect is
LL
(a) Compton effect (b) Pair production
(c) Raman effect (d) Production of X-rays in Coolidge tube
Ans. (d)
Sol. Conceptual
40. A stationary hydrogen atom emits a photon of wavelength 1025Å. Its angular momentum changes
A
by
h 2h h 3h
(a) (b) (c) (d)
p p 2p 2p
Ans. (a)
Sol. l is in U–V region so
1 2æ 1 1 ö
= R (1) ç 2 - 2 ÷
l è1 n ø
1 æ 1ö
= 1.09 ´ 10 7 ç 1 - 2 ÷
1025 ´ 10 -10
è n ø

17
10 3 1
=1- 2
1025 ´ 1.09 n
1 103
= 1 - = 0.11
n2 1025 ´ 1.09
n=3
So e– makes transition from n = 3 to n = 1
h h
DL = ( 3 - 1) =
2p p
41. A spherical capacitor is formed by two concentric metallic spherical shells. The capacitor is then charged
so that the outer shell carries a positive charge and the inner shell carries an equal but negative charge
Even if the capacitor is not connected to any circuit, the charge will eventually leak away due to a
N
small electrical conductivity of the material between the shells. What is the character of the magnetic
field produced by this leakage current ?
(a) Radially outwards from the inner shell to the outer shell
E
(b) Radially inwards from the outer shell to the inner shell
(c) Circular field lines between the shells and perpendicular to the radial direction.
(d) No magnetic field will be produced.
LL
Ans. (d)
Sol.
A
Current will flow from outer sphere to inner sphere.

No magnetic field will be produced.
42. If a cell of constant emf produces the same amount of heat during the same time in two independent
resistors R1 and R2 when they are separately connected across the terminals of the cell, one after the
other. The internal resistance of the cell is
R + R2 R1 ~ R 2 R12 + R 22
(a) 1 (b) (c) (d) R1R 2
2 2 2
Ans. (d)

Sol. Let e.m.f. of cell is e & its internal resistance is r.
Rate of heat produced in R1,

2
æ e ö
P1 = ç ÷ R1
è r + R1 ø
Rate of heat produced in R2,
2
æ e ö
P2 = ç ÷ R2
è r + R2 ø
Given, P1 = P2
N
2 2
æ e ö æ e ö
ç ÷ R1 = ç ÷ R2
è r + R1 ø è r + R1 ø
R1(r + R2)2 = R2(r + R1)2
R1 (r + R2) =
E R 2 (r + R1)
r ( )
R1 - R 2 = R1 R 2 - R 2 R1
LL
R1 R 2 - R 2 R1 æ R1 - R 2 ö
r= = R1R 2 ç ÷ = R1R 2
R1 - R 2 ç R - R ÷
è 1 2 ø
43. In the circuit shown beside the charge on each capacitor is
C1
A
E1 E2
C2
(b) C + C ( E1 + E 2 )
C1C2
(a) (C1 + C2)(E1 – E2)
1 2
(c) C + C ( E1 - E 2 )
C1C2
(d) (C1 – C2)(E1 + E2)
1 2
Ans. (c)

19
–q +q
D C
q q
C1
E1 E2
Sol. q C2 q
A B
+q –q
Applying KVL in loop ABCDA
q q
- -E2 - + E1 = 0
C2 C1
æ 1 1 ö
qç + ÷ = E1 - E2
N
è C 2 C1 ø
æ CC ö
q = (E1 - E2 ) ç 1 2 ÷
è C1 + C2 ø
44.
E
A stationary hydrogen atom emits photon corresponding to the first line (highest wave length) of Lyman
series. If R is the Rydberg constant and M is the mass of the atom, the recoil velocity of the atom
LL
is
Rh 3Rh 3Rh Rh
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4M M 4M M
Ans. (c)
1 é1 1ù
= RZ 2 ê 2 - 2 ú
A
Sol.
l ë n1 n 2 û
for first line of Lyman series

n1 = 1 & n2 = 2
1 é1 1 ù
= R(1)2 ê 2 - 2 ú
l ë1 2 û
1 3R
=
l 4
h 3Rh
Momentum of photon, P1 = =
l 4

P2
P1
M
v
Photon
By momentum conservation
P2 = P1
3Rh
Mv =
4
3Rh
v=
4M
45. Heat is absorbed or evolved when current flows in a conductor having a temperature gradient. This
N
phenomenon is known as
(a) Joule effect (b) Peltier effect
(c) Seeback effect (d) Thomson effect
Ans. (d)
Sol. It is Thomson effect
E
46. A concave mirror has a radius of curvature R and forms the image of an object placed at a distance
LL
1.5R from the pole of the mirror. An opaque disc of diameter half the aperture of the mirror is placed
with the pole at the centre. As a result :
(a) the position of the image will be the same but its central half will disappear.
(b) the position of the image will be the same but its outer half will disappear.
(c) the complete image will be seen at the same position and it will be exactly identical with the initial
A
image.
(d) the complete image will be seen at the same position but it will not be identical in all respect with
the initial image.
Ans. (d)
disc
Sol. O
1.5 R
Disc will block few of the incident rays on the mirror. So intensity of image will decrease.

21
47. A ray of white light is made incident on the refracting surface of a prism such that after refraction
at this surface, the green component falls on the second surface at its critical angle. The colours present
in the emergent beam will be :
(a) violet, indigo and blue (b) violet, indigo, blue, yellow, orange and red
(c) yellow, orange and red (d) all colours
Ans. (c)
White
light VIGBYOR
Red
qC
N
Orange l increases
Yellow
Sol. µ increases
Blue qC decreases
Indigo
E
Violet
Green
LL
1
sinqC =
m
B
Cauchy's relation µ= A+
l2
The colours present in the emergent beam will be yellow, orange & red.
A
48. In a compound microscope, having tube-length 30 cm, the power of the objective and the eye-piece
are 100 D and 10D respectively. Then the magnification produced by the microscope when the final
image is at the least distance of distinct vision (25 cm) will be :
(a) 55 (b) 64 (c) 77 (d) 90
Ans. (c)
100
Sol. f0 = cm
P
= 1 cm
fe = 10 cm
For eye piece

1 1 1
= -
fe v e - u e
1 1 1
= +
fe -25 u e
1 1 1
= +
10 -25 u e
1 1 1 5+ 2
= + =
u e 10 25 50
50
ue =-
N
7
L = v0 + ue
50
30 = v 0 +
v 0 = 30 -
7
=
E
50 210 - 50
Þ v0 =
160
7 7 7
LL
for objective
1 1 1
- =
v 0 - u 0 f0
1 7 153 160
= 1- = Þ u0 =
A
u0 160 160 153
v0 æ D ö
mD = 1+
u 0 çè fe ÷ø
160
æ 25 ö
= 7 ç1 + ÷
160 è 10 ø
153
153 æ 35 ö
= ç ÷
7 è 10 ø
mD » 77

23
49. Parallel rays are incident on a glass sphere of diameter 10 cm and having refractive index 1.5. The
sphere converges these rays at a certain point. The distance of this point from the centre of the sphere
will be :
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5 cm (c) 7.5 cm (d) 12.5 cm
Ans. (c)
15 cm
I II
P
Sol.
2.5 cm
for refraction at I surface :
N
1.5 1 1.5 - 1
- =
v -¥ 5
v = 15 cm E
for refraction of II surface :
1 1.5 1 - 1.5
- =
v2 5 -5
LL
v2 = 2.5 cm
Distance of point P from centre
= 5 + 2.5
= 7.5 cm
50. A jet of water from 15 cm diameter nozzle of a fire hose can reach the maximum height of 25 m.
The force exerted by the water jet on the hose is :
A
(a) 4.24 kN (b) 17.32 kN (c) 2.17 kN (d) 8.66 kN

Ans. (d)
ép
( )
2ù
Sol. F = rAv 2 = 10 ´ ê ´ (15 ´ 10 ) ú ´
2
-2
3
2 ´ 9.8 ´ 25
ë4 û
= 8659 N
= 8.66 kN
51. In an electromagnetic wave the phase difference between electric vector and magnetic vector is
p 3p
(a) Zero (b) (c) p (d)
2 2
Ans. (a)
Sol. Phase difference = 0

52. Plots of intensity (I) of radiation emitted by a black body versus wavelength (l) at three different
temperatures T1, T2 and T3 respectively are shown in figure. Choose the correct statement.
(a) T1 > T2 > T3 necessarily (b) T3 > T2 > T1 necessarily
(c) T2 = (T1 + T3) / 2 necessarily (d) T22 = T1T3 necessarily
Ans. (a)
N
Sol. Wein's law l mT = b
1
ÞTµ
lm E
from graph l1 < l2 < l3
So, T1 > T2 > T3
53. Consider a composite slab consisting of two different materials having equal thickness and equal area
LL
of cross section. The thermal conductivities are K and 2K respectively. The equivalent thermal
conductivity of the composite slab is :
2K 4K
(a) (b) 2K (c) 3K (d)
3 3
Ans. (d)
A
l l 2l
Keq
A K 2K A A A
Sol. req
r1 r2
req = r1 + r2
2l l l
= +
K eq A KA 2KA
4K
Keq =
3
25
54. A large horizontal uniform disc can rotate freely about a rigid vertical axis passing through its centre O.
A man stands at rest the edge of the disc at a point A. The mass of the disc is 22 times the mass
of the man. The man starts moving along the edge of the disc. When he reaches A, after completing
one rotation relative to the disc, the disc has turned through :
(a) 30° (b) 90° (c) 60° (d) 45°
Ans. (a)
Sol. Conserving angular momentum, we have
I1q1 = I2q2
( 22m ) R 2
mR2(2p – q) = (q)
2
N
Where q is the angular displacement of the disc.
2p – q = 11 q
p
q= = 30°
55.
6
E
Two factories are sounding their sirens at 400 Hz each. A man walks from one factory towards the
other at a speed of 2 m/s. The velocity of sound is 320 m/s. The number of beats heard by the person
LL
in one second will be
(a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 4 (d) 2.5
Ans. (b)
æ v - v0 ö æ v + v0 ö
Sol. f1 = 400 ç ÷ and f2 = 400 ç ÷
A
è v ø è v ø
Number of beats heard per sec,

Df = f2 – f1
400
é( v + v 0 ) - ( v - v 0 ) ùû
v ë
=
400
=
v
[2v 0 ]
400
Df =
320
[2 ´ 2 ] = 5

56. The temperature of an isolated black body falls from T1 to T2 in time t. Then, t = Cx where x is :
æ 1 1ö æ 1 1 ö æ 1 1 ö æ 1 1 ö
(a) ç T - T ÷ (b) ç T 2 - T 2 ÷ (c) ç T3 - T3 ÷ (d) ç T 4 - T 4 ÷
è 2 1ø è 2 1 ø è 2 1 ø è 2 1 ø
Ans. (c)
Sol. Radiant power, P µ T4
dT
Þ Rate of fall in temperature = µ T4
dt
dT
- = kT 4
dt
T2
t
ó dT = k dt
–ô
õ T4 ò0
T1
N
1é 1 1 ù
ê 3 - 3 ú = kt
3 ë T2 T1 û
1 é1 1 ù é1 1 ù
57.
ë 2 1 û ë 2
E
t = 3k ê T 3 - T3 ú Þ t = C ê T3 - T3 ú
1 û
Two charges –q and –q are placed at points (0, d) and (0, –d). A charge +q, free to move along X
axis, will oscillate with a force proportional to
LL
1 1 x 1
(a) x 2 + d 2 (b) (c) 3 (d)
x2
(d 2 + x ) 2 2 x + d2
2
Ans. (c)
Sol.
–q 0, d
A
2 2
d +x
d F
q
O q
x m(q)
F
–q
(0, –d)
Net force towards origin is
2kqq x
Fnet = 2Fcosq =
( )
2
d 2 + x2 d + x2
2
x
Fµ
(d )
3/2
2
+ x2
27
58. The average translational kinetic energy of oxygen (M = 32) molecules at a certain temperature is
0.048 eV. The translational kinetic energy of nitrogen (M = 28) molecules at the same temperarture
is (consider the two gases to be ideal) :
(a) 0.0015 eV (b) 0.042 eV (c) 0.048 eV (d) 0.768 eV
Ans. (c)
3
Sol. Average translational kinetic energy of a molecule = kT.
2
It is same for all gases at same temperature.
59. In the following figures the velocity-time graphs for three particles 1, 2 and 3 are shown -
N
+4 +4 +4
velocity (m/s)
velocity (m/s)
velocity (m/s)
+2 +2 +2
0 0 0
–2 –2 –2
0 2
E 4 6 8
time (s)
Particle 1
10 0 2 4 6 8
time (s)
Particle 2
10 0 2 4 6 8
time (s)
Particle 3
10
The magnitude of average acceleration of the three particles, over 10 s, bear the relationship
LL
(a) a1 > a2 > a3 (b) a2 > a1 > a3 (c) a3 > a2 > a1 (d) a1 = a2 = a3
Ans. (d)
Sol. Average acc,
Dv
A
aavg =
Dt
-2 - 0 1
a1 = = m / s2
10 5
0 -2 1
a2 = = m / s2
10 5
2-0 1
a3 = = m / s2
10 5
Hence a1 = a2 = a3

60. The potential energy (U) of a particle moving in a potential field varies with its displacement (x) as
shown below -
U(J)
–5
–10
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
x(m)
The variation of force F(x) acting on the particle as a function of x can be represented by
N
2 2
F(N)
F(N)
1 1
0 0
–1 –1
–2 –2
–15 –10 –5
E 0
x(m)
(Fig i)
5 10 15 –15 –10 –5 0
x(m)
(Fig ii)
5 10 15
LL
2 2
F(N)
F(N)
1 1
0 0
–1 –1
–2 –2
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15 –15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
x(m) x(m)
A
(Fig iii) (Fig iv)
(a) Fig (i) (b) Fig (ii) (c) Fig (iii) (d) Fig (iv)
Ans. (d)
¶u
Sol. Force F = -
¶x
= – slope of given graph
So, graph in fig(iv) is correct

29
61. A block of mass m = 10 kg is hanging over a frictionless light fixed pulley by an inextensible light
rope. Initially the block is held at rest. The other end of the rope is now pulled by a constant force
F in the vertically downward direction. The linear momentum of the block is seen to increase by
2 kgm/s in 1s (in the first second). Therefore,
F
m
(a) the tension in the rope is F

(b) the tension in the rope is 3N
N
(c) the work done by the tension on the block, in first second, is = 19.8 J
(d) the work done against the force of gravity, in first second, is = 9.8 J
Ans. (a,d)
Sol. (b) F – mg = ma
\ a = 0.2
F = 98 + 2 = 100 N
E
LL
1
(c) WD = Fl = 100 ´ ´ 0.2 ´ 1 = 10J
2
1
(d) WDa-g = mgl = 98 ´ ´ 0.2 ´ 1
2
2
= 9.8 J
A
62. A ball of mass m1 travels horizontally along the x-axis in the positive direction with an initial speed
of v0. It collides with another ball of mass m2 that is originally at rest. After the collision, the ball
of mass m1 has velocity (v1x î + v1y ˆj) and the ball of mass m2 has velocity (v 2x î + v 2y ˆj) . Identify the
correct relationship(s)
(a) 0 = m1v1x + m2v2x (b) m1v0 = m1v1y + m2v2y
(c) 0 = m1v1y + m2v2y (d) m1v0 = m1v1x + m2v2x
Ans. (c,d)
rest
Sol. v0
m1 m2
Y : 0 = m1v1y + m2v2y
X : m1v0 = m1v1x + m2v2x
63. In a real gas
(a) the force of attraction between the molecules depends upon intermolecular distance.
(b) internal energy depends only upon temperature
(c) internal energy is a function of both temperature and volume
(d) internal energy is a function of both temperature and pressure
Ans. (a,c,d )
Sol. E is function of P,V & T ; but on substituting V from
æ an 2 ö
çè P + ( V - nb) = nRT ; we get E dependent on P, V & T.
V 2 ÷ø
64. A particle of mass m is thrown vertically up with velocity u. Air exerts an opposing force of a constant
magnitude F. The particle returns back to the point of projection with velocity v after attaining maximum
height h, then
N
æ Fö æ Fö
u2 v2 çg - ÷ çg + ÷
è ø
(d) v = u è mø
m
(a) h = (b) h = (c) v = u
æ Fö æ Fö æ Fö æ Fö
2ç g + ÷ 2ç g - ÷ çg + ÷ çg - ÷
Ans. (a,b,c)
è mø
E è mø è mø è mø
LL
F
u slope = g+
m
v
g–F/m
t
Sol. u
g–F/m
v
A
slope = g– F
m
1 u2 1 v2
h= =
2 g+ F 2 g- F
m m
65. A pin of small length 'a' is placed along the axis of a concave mirror of focal length f, at the distance
u (>f ) from its pole. The length of its image is 'b'. If the same object is placed perpendicular to its
axis at the same distance u and the length of its image is now 'c', then :-
f2 u -f a 2f 3
(a) b = a (b) c = ab (c) c = b (d) bc =
(u - f ) (u - f )
2 3
f
Ans. (a,b,c,d)

31
Sol.
/ ///
/ ////
///////////////////////////
a
F
u
/////
f
//
2
æ f ö
b=m a=ç 2
è u - f ÷ø
a
f
c = ma = ×a
u-f
b b
N
=mÞc=
c m
66. A thin rod of length 10 cm is placed along the axis of a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm in
such a way that one end of the image coincides with one end of the object. The length of the image
may be :-
(a) 7.5 cm
Ans. (a,c)
E
(b) 12 cm (c) 15 cm (d) 10 cm
LL
////
////
Sol. 70cm 60cm

/////
//////
60cm
/////////////////////////
////////////////////////
2F F 2F
50cm
////
////
Case no. I Case no. II

A
Two cases are possible

(a) object is placed beyond 2F and one end touches the F.
(b) object is placed rightward 2F and one end touches 2F.
case no I. U1 = –70
F1 = –30
UF 70 ´ 30 -2100
V= = = = -52.5cm
U-F -70 + 30 40
length of image = 60 –52.5 = 7.5 cm
case no II. U1 = –50
F1 = –30
50 ´ 30 -1500
V= = = -75cm
-50 + 30 20
length of image = 75 – 60 = 15 cm

67. The mass of an electron can be expressed as :-
(a) 0.512 MeV (b) 8.19 × 10–14 J/c2 (c) 9.1 × 10–31 kg (d) 0.00055 amu
where c is speed of light in vacuum
Ans. (b,c,d)
Sol. (a) option is dimensionally incorrect for mass.
(c) mass of e– = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
c2
(b) mass of e– = 9.1 × 10–31 kg ×
c2
(3 ´ 108 ) 2 2 2
= 9.1 × 10–31 kg × m /s
C2
kg m 2
= 9.1 × 10–31 × 9 × 1016 s2 c 2
N
= 8.19 × 10–14 J/C2
8.19 ´ 10 -14
(d) mass of e– = eV / c 2
E1.6 ´ 10 -19
=
8.19 eV 931.5 ´ 10 6
´ 10 5 2 ´
1.6 c 931.5 ´ 10 6
LL
8.19 ´ 10 5 eV
= 6 ×
931.5 ´ 10 6 2
1.6 ´ 931.5 ´ 10 c
8.19 ´ 10 5
= amu
1.6 ´ 931.5 ´ 10 6
= 0.00055 amu
A
68. Select the correct statement(s), out of the following, about diffraction at N parallel slits :-
(a) There are (N-1) minima between each pair of principal maxima.
(b) There are (N-2) secondary maxima between each pair of principal maxima.
(c) Width of principal maximum is proportional to 1/N.
(d) The intensity at the principal maxima varies as N2.
Ans. (a,b,c,d)
Sol. Conceptual
69. An electric dipole placed in a non-uniform electric field may experience :-
(a) no net force, no torque (b) a net force, but no torque.
(c) no net force, but a torque (d) a net force and a torque.
Ans. (a,b,c,d)

33
Sol. All four cases are possible it will depend on orientation of dipole in electric field and variation of electric
field in space.
r –q +q
Example E = E 0 xjˆ F2 p F1
Þ F1 ¹ F2 Þ FNet ¹ 0 +q
r r r
T = 0 because p and E are parallel
F1 = F2 Þ Fnet = 0
r r r –q
T ¹ 0 because p and E are ^ to each other
70. Two long parallel wires carry currents of equal magnitude (I) but in opposite directions. These wires
are suspended from fixed rod PQ by four chords of equal length L as shown. The mass per unit length
of each wire is l, the value of angle q substended by two chords OA and OB, assuming it to be
N
small, is :-
y P
E L
O Q
I q C
LL
I B
A
z
x
A
m0 l
(a) q = I
4p gL
(b) q = I m0 1
p lgL
m0 g
(c) q = I
4 p lL
(d) q = I m 0 lg
p L
Ans. (b)

Sol. Drawing FBD of d length of each wire and taking side view.
L L
q/2 q/2
2T
F between wires
L sin q L sin q
2 2
Mg
m0 I I
´d
2T sin(q / 2) 2p(2L sin q / 2)
=
2T cos(q / 2) (ld).g
N
q m0 I2
tan =
2 æ qö
4pL sin ç ÷ lg
è 2ø
E
sin(q / 2) tan(q / 2) =
m 0I2
4 pLlg
LL
q2 m I2
= 0 Q q is small sin q ~ tan q ~ q
4 4pLlg
m0 I2 m0
Þ q= =I
pLlg pLlg
A

35
DATE : 24/11/2019 Paper Code : 62
Regd. Office : Aakash Tower, 8, Pusa Road, New Delhi-110005, Ph.: 011-47623456
Time : 120 Minutes Answers & Solutions Max. Marks : 240
for
NATIONAL STANDARD EXAMINATION
IN PHYSICS (NSEP) 2019-20
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES :
(i) There is 70 questions in this paper.
(ii) Question paper has two parts. In part A1 (Q. No. 1 to 60) each question has four alternatives, out of
which only one is correct. Choose the correct alternative and fill the appropriate bubble, as shown.
Q. No. 22 a c d
In part A2 (Q. No. 61 to 70) each question has four alternatives, out of which any number of alternative
(1, 2, 3 or 4) may be correct. You have to choose ALL correct alternatives and fill the appropriate
bubbles, as shown.
Q. No. 64 a c
(iii) For Part A1, each correct answer carries 3 marks whereas 1 mark will be deducted for each wrong
answer. In Part A2, you get 6 marks if all the correct alternatives are marked. No negative marks in
this part.
Part : A-1
Only one out of four options is correct
Arc
1. A pendulum is made by using a thread of length Sol. Angular displacement  (in radian) 
radius
300 cm and a small spherical bob of mass 100 g. It is
suspended from a point S. The bob is pulled from its 25 1
  rad = 0.083 rad
position of rest at O to the point A so that the linear 300 12
amplitude is 25 cm. The angular amplitude in radian
S
and the potential energy of the bob in joule at A are

respectively
(a) 0.10 and 0.10 300 cm
(b) 0.083 and 0.01
(c) 0.251 and 2.94
(d) 0.083 and 0.24 A
h
m
Answer (b) O 25 c
1
NSEP 2019-20
Potential energy 4. A home aquarium partly filled with water slides down
= mgh an inclined plane of inclination angle  with respect
to the horizontal. The surface of water in the
= mgℓ(1 – cos) aquarium
= 0.1 × 10 × 3 (1 – cos 4.77°) (a) remains horizontal
= 3 × 0.003463 (b) remains parallel to the plane of the incline
= 0.01 joule (c) forms an angle  with the horizon where 0 <  < 
2. Consider the following physical expressions (d) forms an angle  with horizon, where  <  < 90
(I) v2 ( : density, v : velocity) Answer (b)
Y L
(II) (Y : Young's modulus, L : length) Sol.
L
2
(III) ( : surface density of charge)
0
(IV) hrg (h : rise of a liquid in a capillary tube of
radius r)
The expressions having same dimensional formula
are
As aquarium slides down with acceleration gsin
(a) I and II only (b) II and III only
then water in aquarium experience pseudo force
(c) II, III and IV only (d) I, II and III only mgsin in backward direction parallel to incline. So
Answer (a) net force parallel to incline is zero.
Sol. v2  [ML–3] [M0L2T–2] = [ML–1T–2] Hence to make surface perpendicular to resultant
force (w.r.t. surface) mgcos, surface of liquid
Y L [ML1 T 2 ][L] becomes parallel to inclined plane.
  [ML1 T 2 ]
L [L]
5. A sound source of constant frequency travels with a
3. Two simple pendulums of lengths 1.44 m and 1.0 m constant velocity past an observer. When it crosses
start swinging together in the same phase. The two the observer the sound frequency sensed by the
will be in phase again after a time of observer changes from 449 Hz to 422 Hz. If the
(a) 6 second (b) 9 second velocity of sound is 340 m/s, the velocity of the
source of sound is
(c) 12 second (d) 25 second
(a) 8.5 m/s (b) 10.5 m/s
Answer (c)
(c) 12.5 m/s (d) 14.5 m/s
1.44
Sol. Time period of first pendulum T1  2 Answer (b)
9.8
Sol. Apparent frequency when source approaches
1.0
Time period of second pendulum T2  2  v 
9.8 observer, n1  n  
T1 1.44  v  vs 
  1.2
T2 1 Apparent frequency just after crossing the
T1 = 1.2T2  v 
observer n2  n  
Particles will again comes in phase after n  v  vs 
oscillations of longer pendulum and (n + 1)
n1 v  v s
oscillations of smaller pendulum. 
n2 v  v s
nT1 = (n + 1)T2
449 v  v s
n  1.2T2  (n  1)T2 
422 v  v s
0.2n = 1
449v – 449vs = 422v + 422vs
n=5
27v = 871 vs
1.44 5  2  3.14  1.2
Total time t  nT1  5  2  27  340
9.8 3.14 vs   10.5 m/s
= 12 s 871
2
NSEP 2019-20
6. Plots of intensity (I) of radiation emitted by a black d1  d 2

body versus wavelength () at three different K eff 
d1 d 2
temepratures T1, T2 and T3 respectively are shown 
in figure. Choose the correct statement K1 K 2
T1
d d 2d
 
T2 d d d  1
 1
T3 K 2K K  2 
I
2  2K

3

(a) T1 > T2 > T3 necessarily 4K

(b) T3 > T2 > T1 necessarily 3
(c) T2 = (T1 + T3)/2 necessarily 8. A large horizontal uniform disc can rotate freely
about a rigid vertical axis passing through its
(d) T22 = T1 T3 necessarily
centre O. A man stands at rest at the edge of the
Answer (a) disc at a point A. The mass of the disc is 22 times
Sol. I the mass of the man. The man starts moving along
T1 T2 the edge of the disc. When he reaches A, after
completing one rotation relative to the disc, the disc
T3 has turned through
(a) 30°
(b) 90°
(c) 60°
(d) 45°
1m 2m 3m 
According to Wien's displacement law, Answer (a)
mT = b Sol. Mass of disc = 22M
Mass of man = M
T  1
m From conservation of angular momentum,
1m < 2m < 3m IM m  ID D  0

Hence, T1 > T2 > T3
7. Consider a composite slab consisting of two different MR 2 m   1 22MR 2 D (M is mass of man)
2
materials having equal thickness and equal area of
cross-section. The thermal conductivities are K and rel + D = –11D
2K respectively. The equivalent thermal conductivity rel = –12D
of the composite slab is
2K rel
(a) (b) 2K D  
3 12
4K
(c) 3K (d) rel
3 D     360  30
Answer (d) 12 12
Sol. In steady state, heat current will be same in series, So, disc turns through 30° in the opposite sense of
so motion of man.
9. Two factories are sounding their sirens at 400 Hz
each. A man walks from one factory towards the
other at a speed of 2 m/s. The velocity of sound is
320 m/s. The number of beats heard by the person
in one second will be
(a) 6 (b) 5
(c) 4 (d) 2.5
Answer (b)
3
NSEP 2019-20
Sol. Factory 1 f = 400 Hz 2 m/s

f = 400 Hz
Factory 2
11. Tow charges – q and – q are placed at points (0, d)
and (0, –d). A charge +q, free to move along X axis,
will oscillate with a force proportional to
Observer 1 1
(a) (b)
Apparent frequency received by observer from factory x2  d 2 x2
1 is
x 1

 400 320  2 
3
(c) (d)
fa (d 
2
x 2 )2 x  d2
2
1 320
318 Answer (c)
 400 
320 Sol. Let us take a point P on x-axis at a distance x from
Apparent frequency received by observer from origin
factory 2 is Y
2

fa  400 320  2
320  –q (0, d)
A y
 400  322
320  P
x X
O
Therefore, frequency of beat heard by observer will be
B
fb  | fa  fa |  400  (322  318)  5 Hz –q
1 2 320 (0, –d)
10. The temperature of an isolated blackbody falls from
E1[due to –q (0, d)]
T1 to T2 in time t. Then, t = Cx where x is
kq


 1  1  (along PA)
 1 1
(a)  T  T 
2
(b)  T 2 T 2  y
 2 1  2 1 
kq
E2 

2
(along PB )
 1  1   1  1  y
(c)  T 3 T 3  (d)  T 4 T 4 
 2 1   2 1   | Enet |  | E1  E2 |

Answer (c)
= 2E cos  [∵ sine component
Sol. According to Stefan law the energy of thermal cancel each other]
radiation emitted per unit time by a black body of
kq
surface area A is given by  2 x
2 [∵ y  ( x 2  d 2 )1/2 ]
y y
dQ
  AT 4
dt 2kqx

( x 2  d 2 )3/2
 mc 
dt  
dT  AT 4
 force on a charge placed at point P will be
| F |  q | Enet |

(m is mass, c is specific heat capacity)
q 2kqx
T2
mc dT
t 
( x 2  d 2 )3/2
   A T 4   dt
T 0 x
 2kq 2
1
( x  d 2 )3/2
2
T2
mc dT  t x
  A  T4  F
( x 2  d 2 )3/2
T1
12. The average translational kinetic energy of oxygen
mc  T2 (M = 32) molecules at a certain temperature is
 t T 3 T1
3A 0.048 eV. The tranlational kinetic energy of nitrogen
(M = 28) molecules at the same temeprature is
(consider the two gases to be ideal)
t  C  13  13 
T 
 2 T1  (a) 0.0015 eV (b) 0.042 eV
where C is a positive constant. (c) 0.048 eV (d) 0.768 eV
4
NSEP 2019-20
Answer (c)  Cred > Cgreen > Cviolet (Θ red < green < violet)
Sol. Average translational kinetic energy per molecule of Dispersion takes place at first refracting place.
an ideal gas of molecular mass m is Using Snell’s law,
K  1 mv rms
2
sin r1 
sin i
2 
2
 3k T  3 So, (r1)red > (r1)green > (r1)violet
 1 m B
  kBT
2  m  2 (Θ red < green < violet)
Hence, average translational kinetic energy K is Now, angle of incidence at second suface,
proportional to absolute temperature and independent
of molecular mass of the gas. r2 = A – r1
Therefore, average translational kinetic energy of both So, (r2)violet > (r2)green > (r2)red
the gases are same at the same temperature. If (r2)green = Cgreen, then (r2)red < Cred
 K = 0.048 eV (r2)orange < Corange and (r2)yellow < Cyellow
13. A concave mirror has a radius of curvature R and So, violet, indigo and blue will suffer total internal
forms the image of an object placed at a distance reflection and yellow, orange and red colours will be
1.5 R from the pole of the mirror. An opaque disc of present in the emergent beam.
diameter half the aperture of the mirror is placed with
15. In a compound microscope, having tube-length
the pole at the centre. As a result
30 cm, the power of the objective and the eye-piece
(a) The position of the image will be the same but are 100D and 10D respectively. Then the
its central half will disappear magnification produced by the microscope when the
(b) The position of the image will be the same but final image is at the least distance of distinct vision
its outer half will disappear (25 cm) will be
(c) The complete image will be seen at the same (a) 55
position and it will be exactly identical with the (b) 64
initial image
(c) 77
(d) The complete image will be seen at the same
(d) 90
position but it will not be identical in all respect
with the initial image Answer (c)
Answer (d) Sol. f = 1 cm f = 10 cm
Sol. Since half part is covered with opaque disc, the

u
image will be less brighter but the size and position
of image will remain same.
u1
14. A ray of white light is made incident on the refracting v1
surface of a prism such that after refraction at this
surface, the green component falls on the second 30 cm
surface at its critical angle. The colours present in
the emergent beam will be  h
D
(a) Violet, indigo and blue. 11 1
(b) Violet, indigo, blue, yellow, orange and red. v u 10
v = –25 cm
(c) Yellow, orange and red.
(d) All colours v1  160 cm
7
Answer (c)
Sol. u1  160 cm
153
A
h
Red  D (v1 /u1 ) (v /u )
i Green 
 h /D
i te
Wh Violet
 153  25  7
7 50
sinc = 1
 m  77
5
NSEP 2019-20
16. Parallel rays are incident on a glass sphere of 18. In an electromagnetic wave the phase difference
diameter 10 cm and having refractive index 1.5. The between electric vector and magnetic vector is
sphere converges these rays at a certain point. The
distance of this point from the centre of the sphere (a) Zero (b) 
will be 2
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5 cm

(c)  (d) 3
(c) 7.5 cm (d) 12.5 cm 2
Answer (c) Answer (a)
Sol. Sol. In an electromagnetic wave, electric field vector and

magnetic field vector are perpendicular to each other
but are in same phase. Hence phase difference
P1
C
P2 between them is zero.
5 cm
19. A spherical capacitor is formed by two concentric
metallic spherical shells. The capacitor is then
R = 5 cm  = 3/2 charged so that the outer shell carries a positive
Applying the refraction formula at first refracting charge and the inner shell carries an equal but
surface negative charge. Even if the capacitor is not
  1,   32 
2 1 2  1 connected to any circuit, the charge will eventually
  1 2 leak away due to a small electrical conductivity of
v u R
the material between the shells. What is the
3/2  1
 3/2  (∵u   ) character of the magnetic field produced by this
v1 5
leakage current?
 3  1 v1  15 cm
2 v1 10
 (a) Radially outwards from the inner shell to the
outer shell.
For second refracting surface
(b) Radially inwards form the outer shell to the inner
1  3 , 2  1 shell.
2
u2 = +5 cm (c) Circular field lines between the shells and
perpendicular to the radial direction.
2 1  2  1
  (d) No magnetic field will be produced
v u R
1  3  1  3/2  1  1  3  v  2.5 cm Answer (d)
v 2(5) 5 v 10 10 Sol. As the current will be spherically diverging from the
Distance from centre of the sphere central sphere, we do not any consistent argument
for the direction of magnetic field for any one of the
= (2.5 + 5.0) = 7.5 cm
elemental current. Because same argument will be
17. A jet of water from 15 cm diameter nozzle of a fire valid for other possible direction of magnetic field.
hose can reach the maximum height of 25 m. The
force exerted by the water jet on the hose is But if at all magnetic exist then it must have unique
direction. So by argument of symmetry the magnetic
(a) 4.24 kN (b) 17.32 kN
field is zero.
(c) 2.17 kN (d) 8.66 kN
20. If a cell of constant emf produces the same amount
Answer (d) of heat during the same time in two independent
v 2 resistors R 1 and R 2 when they are seperately
Sol. hmax  v connected across the terminals of the cell, one after
2g
the other. The internal resistance of the cell is
25 × 19.6 = v2
R1  R2 R1 ∼ R2
 v2 = 490 (a) (b)
2 2
Force exerted by water jet on the hose is
F = Av2 R12  R22
(c) (d) R1R2
2
15  15
= 103     10 4  490  8.66 kN
4 Answer (d)
6
NSEP 2019-20
Sol. For any cell Sol. Let charge on each capacitor is 'q'
Applying KVL
R
–q +q
C1
E1 E2
 r
Heat developed in time (t) through a resistor R = H

C2
2
 E 
H  I 2Rt    Rt
+q –q
R  r 
q q
Given, H1 = H2  E2   E1  0
C2 C1
E2 E2 q q
R t  R2  t    E1  E2
 R1  r  2 1
 R2  r  2
C2 C1
C1C2
  R2  r  R1   R1  r  R2
2 2
q   E1  E2 
C1  C2

 R22  r 2  2R2r  R1  R12  r 2  2R1r R2  22. A stationary hydrogen atom emits photon
corresponding to the first line (highest wavelength) of
Lyman series. If R is the Rydberg constant and M is
 R1R22  R1r 2  2R2R1r  R12R2  R2r 2  2R1R2r
the mass of the atom, the recoil velocity of the atom
is
 r 2  R1  R2   R1R2  R1  R2 
Rh
(a)
 r  R1R2
2
4M
3Rh
r  R1R2 (b)
M
21. In the circuit shown beside the charge on each 3Rh
capacitor is (c)
4M
C1 Rh
(d)
M
Answer (c)
Sol. For first line of Lyman series
E1 E2
1 1 1 4
R 2  2  
 1 2  3R
Now for recoil velocity of atom
C2 Photon
v M
(a) (C1 + C2)(E1 – E2)
Pphoton = Patom
C1C2
(b) C  C  E1  E2  h
 Mv
1 2 
C1C2 h h  3R 
(c) C  C  E1  E2 
v  
1 2
M M4
(d) (C1 – C2)(E1 + E2) 3Rh

Hence v 
Answer (c) 4M
7
NSEP 2019-20
23. Heat is absorbed or evolved when current flows in a 

1
2 0 peak
conductor having a temperature gradient. This Sol. IDC  I sin(t ) dt
phenomenon is known as
(a) Joule effect (b) Peltier effect Ipeak I0
IDC  
(c) Seeback effect (d) Thomson effect  
Answer (d) 27. In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of
Sol. The phenomenon of absorption or evolution of heat straight line graph between the stopping potential and
along the length of a conductor on passing current the frequency of incident radiation gives
through it when its two ends are kept at a different (a) Electron charge (e) (b) Planck constant (h)
temperature is known as Thomson's effect.
h
24. Avalanche breakdown in a p-n junction primarily (c) (d) Work function (W)
depends on the phenomenon of e
(a) Doping (b) Collision Answer (c)

(c) Recombination (d) Ionization Sol. If incident radiation has frequency , and the work
function of metal is  and the stopping potential is V,
Answer (d) then
Sol. The avalanche breakdown in a p-n junction diode h=+ eV
primarily depends on the phenomenon called Impact
ionization.  eV = h–
25. A source emits photons of energy 5 eV which are  h 
incident on a metallic sphere of work function V    
 e e
3.0 eV. The radius of the sphere is r = 8 × 10–3 m. It
is observed that after some time emission of
h
photoelectrons from the metallic sphere is stopped.  is the slope of the mentioned graph.
Charge on the sphere when the photoemission stops e
is 28. According to Bohr's theory, the ionization energy of
(a) 1.77 × 10–16 C (b) 1.77 × 10–12 C H atom is 13.6 eV. The energy needed to remove an
electron from Helium ion (He+) is
(c) 1.11 × 10–12 C (d) 1.11 × 10–10 C
(a) 13.6 eV (b) 16.8 eV
Answer (b)
(c) 27.2 eV (d) 54.4 eV
Sol. Energy of photons = h = 5 eV
Answer (d)
Work function = = 3 eV
So, maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons 2
Sol. E  13.6 Z eV
= (5 – 3) eV = 2 eV n
n2
Potential on the surface of sphere (when charge q is Now, for He+ Z = 2, and for ground state n = 1
1 q Z2 22
attained)  E1  13.6   13.6   54.4 eV
40 r n2 1
Photoemission ceases when, So, ionization energy = 54.4 eV
29. The phenomenon inverse to photo electric effect is
1 q
 2 (a) Compton effect
40 r
2  8  103 (b) Pair production
 q  2  r  40   1.77  1012 C
9  109 (c) Raman effect
26. The dc component of current in the output of a half- (d) Production of X-rays in Coolidge tube
wave rectifier with peak value l0 is Answer (d)
l0 Sol. In a photoelectric emission, electrons are emitted by
(a) Zero (b) incidence of photons, while in production of

X-rays in coolidge tube, photons are emitted using
l0 2l0 incidence of high energy electrons. Thus production
(c) (d)
2  of X-rays in coolidge tube is also termed as inverse
Answer (b) photoelectric effect
8
NSEP 2019-20
30. A stationary hydrogen atom emits a photon of Sol. P = Fv

wavelength 1025 Å. Its angular momentum changes
by  P0  Kv 03
h 2h 2P0 = Kv3
(a) (b)
  3
v 
h 3h  v   2
(c) (d)  0
2 2
1
Answer (a)
 v  v 2 3  1.26 v
0 0
Sol. Let the electron transitions from n = 1 to n = n in
the atom 33. A 3.0 cm thick layer of oil (density oil = 800 kg/m3)
floats on water (density  w = 1000 kg/m 3) in a
1  1
 109677 cm1 1  2  transparent glass beaker. A solid cylinder is
  n  1
observed floating vertically with of it in water and
1  1 3
  109677 1  2 
1025  108  n  1
in the oil. Oil is gently poured into the beaker
on solving, n 3 3
until the cylinder floats in oil only. The fraction of the
h h h solid cylinder in oil now is
Now change in angular momentum  3  
2 2 
3 2
31. An observer stands on the platform at the front edge (a) (b)
of the first bogie of a stationary train. The train starts 5 3
moving with uniform acceleration and the first bogie 8
3
takes 5 seconds to cross the observer. If all the (c) (d)
4 9
bogies of the train are of equal length and the gap
between them is negligible, the time taken by the Answer (c)
tenth bogie to cross the observer is
L L
(a) 1.07 s (b) 0.98 s Sol. Ls A   A  w A
3 0 3
(c) 0.91 s (d) 0.81 s
0  w
Answer (d)  s   600 kg/m3
3
1 25a LsA = L'0A
Sol. a 52  L   L (i)
2 2
L' s 600 3
v12  2a 9L, v 22  2a 10L    
L 0 800 4
 20 aL  18 aL  at 34. A wedge of mass M rests on a horizontal frictionless

surface. A block of mass m starts sliding down the
rough inclined surface of the wedge to its bottom.
20 L 18 L 25 18  25
 t   20   During the course of motion, the centre of mass of
a a 2 2 the block and the wedge system
 5  10  3 (a) Does not move at all

(b) Moves horizontally with constant speed
= 0.81 s
(c) Moves horizontally with increasing speed
32. The resistive force on an aeroplane flying in a
horizontal plane is given by Ff = kv2, where k is (d) Moves vertically with increasing speed
constant and v is the speed of the aeroplane. When Answer (d)
the power output from the engine is P0, the plane
Sol. The external force acting on the system of the
flies at a speed v0 . If the power output of the engine
wedge and the block is resultant of (M + m)g
is doubled the aeroplane will fly at a speed of
downward and normal force on the wedge by the
(a) 1.12 v0 (b) 1.26 v0 horizontal surface, which is also vertical.
(c) 1.41 v0 (d) 2.82 v0  centre of mass moves vertically downward with
Answer (b) increasing speed (in general).
9
NSEP 2019-20
35. A uniform circular disc rotating at a fixed angular 38. As shown in the figure, a block of mass m is hung
velocity  about an axis normal to its plane and from the ceiling by the system of springs consisting
passing through its centre has kinetic energy E. If of two layers. The force constant of each of the
the same disc rotates with an angular velocity 2 springs is k. The frequency of the vertical
about a parallel axis passing through the edge, its oscillations of the block is
kinetic energy will be
(a) 2E (b) 4E
k k k
(c) 10E (d) 12E
Answer (d)
k k
1 MR 2 2 MR 2 2
Sol. E    (i)
2 2 4 m
MR 2 3 1 k 1 4k
l   MR 2   MR 2 (a) (b)
2 2 2 5 m 2 5 m
1 3
E   MR 2  (2)2  3 MR 2 2 (ii) (c)
1 5k
(d)
1 6k
2 2 2 6 m 2 5 m
 E = 12 E Answer (d)
36. Light of wavelength 640 nm falls on a plane diffraction Sol. For top 3 springs, k1 = 3k
grating with 12000 lines per inch. In the diffraction
pattern on a screen kept at a distance of 12 cm from For bottom 2 spings, k2 = 2k
the grating, the distance of the second order k1k2 6k 2 6k
maximum from the central maximum is keff   
k1  k2 5k 5
(a) 1.81 cm (b) 2.41 cm
(c) 3.62 cm (d) 7.25 cm 1 6k
f 
Answer (*) 2 5 m
39. Two simple harmonic motions are given by x1 = a sin
2.54  10 2
Sol. d  a
12,000 t + acost and x2 = asin t  cos t. The ratio
3
dsin = 2 of the amplitudes of the first to the second and the
phase difference between them respectively are
3
sin  
5 3  3 
(a) and (b) and
Y 2 12 2 12
tan  
D 2  3 
Y = 9 cm (c) and (d) and
3 12 2 6
(* None of the options is correct)
Answer (a)
37. If the force acting on a body in inversely proportional
to its speed, the kinetic energy of the body varies  
Sol. x1 = asint + a cos t  a 2 sin  t  
with time t as  4
(a) t 0 (b) t 1 a 2a  
x2  a sin t  cot t  sin  t  
(c) t2 (d) t –1 3 3  6
Answer (b) A1 a 2 3 3
Now,   
m dv A A2 2a 2 2
Sol. F   [where A = constant] 3
dt v
 
  m vdv   Adt Also, phase difference   1  2  
4 6
1 
 mv 2  At 
2 12
10
NSEP 2019-20
40. A particle is projected from the ground with a velocity (a) 15.45 × 10–4 J (b) 30.78 × 10–4 J
v   3iˆ  10 ˆj  m s –1 . The maximum height attained

(c) 7.71 × 10–4 J (d) 3.85 × 10–4 J
and the range of the particle are respectively given Answer (c)
by (use g = 10 m/s2)
Sol. x(cm)
(a) 5 m and 6 m (b) 3 m and 10 m
(c) 6 m and 5 m (d) 3 m and 5 m 5
Answer (a)
0
Sol. 2 4 6 8 10 t(s)
uy u
–5
H
g From the graph, equation of position in function of

ux
R
2
time is given as x  (5  102 )sin   t
Given u  (3iˆ  10 ˆj ) m/s  8 

i.e. ux = 3 m/s 2  
i.e. x  (5  10 )sin  t 
uy = 10 m/s 4 
Also g = 10 m/s2 Now total energy of the particle will be
u y2 1 1 
2
m2 A2   1     5  102 
2
Maximum height H  E
2g 2 2 4
102 E = 7.71 × 10–4 J
 5m
2  10 43. The log-log graph for a non-linear oscillator is shown
2  10  3
2u y below. Assuming the constants to have appropriate
Range   ux  =6m dimensions the relationship between time period (T)
g 10
and the amplitude (A) can be expressed as
41. A 20 cm long capillary tube stands vertically with
lower end just in water. Water rises up to 5 cm. If
8
the entire system is now kept on a freely falling
platform, the length of the water column in the
capillary tube will be
6
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm
log (T)
(c) Zero (d) 20 cm

Answer (d) 4
Sol. When capillary is placed inside a system falling

freely, then geff will be zero i.e. there is no force to
2
balance surface tension, hence water will rise in 0 1 2
column up to full length. log (A)
Hence h = 20 cm
(a) T = 1000A2 (b) T = 4A1/2
42. Position-time graph of a particle moving in a potential
field is shown below. If the mass of the particle is (c) T = 4A2 + B (d) T = 8A3
1 kg its total energy is approximately Answer (a)
15
logT 5  3
10 Sol. From the given graph, slope log A  1  0  2
5
0 Now from equation (y – y0) = m(x – x0)
x(cm)
–5 log(T) – 3 = 2[log(A)]
–10
logT = log(A2) + log(1000)
–15
0
 logT = log(1000A2)
2 4 6 8 10
t(s)  T = 1000A2
11
NSEP 2019-20
44. In many situations the point source emitting a wave Sol. Wave speed depend on the inertia and elastic
starts moving, through the medium, with velocity V property and frequency remains unchanged even if
greater than the wave velocity in that medium. In the wave passes from one medium to other medium.
such a case when source velocity (V) > wave So wavelength and speed will change.
velocity (v), the wave front changes
47. The frequency of the third overtone of a closed end
(a) From spherical to plane organ pipe equals the frequency of the fifth harmonic
(b) From spherical to conical of an open end organ pipe. Ignoring end correction,
(c) From plane to spherical the ratio of their lengths lopen : lclose is
(d) From cylindrical to spherical (a) 10 : 7 (b) 10 : 9
Answer (b) (c) 2 : 1 (d) 7 : 10
Sol. For vsource > v, Answer (a)

Sol. L
For closed organ pipe

S
7v
Here, f 
4Lclosed
5v
And for open organ pipe fifth harmonic is f 
2Lopen
The spherical wavefronts i.e. originated at various 5v 7v
positions of the source extends in three dimensions So 2L 
4Lclosed
and becomes conical in shape. open
45. If the average mass of a smoke particle in an Indian 5  4 Lopen

 
kitchen is 3 × 10–17 kg, the rms speed of the smoke 2  7 Lclosed
particles at 27°C is approximately 10 Lopen
 
(a) 2 cm/s (b) 2 m/s 7 Lclosed
(c) 2 km/s (d) None of these 48. A rectangular slab of glass of refractive index 1.5 is
Answer (a) immersed in water of refractive index 1.33 such that
the top surface of the slab remains parallel to water
Sol. r.m.s speed of smoke particles is given by level. Light from a point source in air is incident on
the surface of water at an angle  such that the light
3kBT 3  1.38  1023  300 reflected from the glass slab is plane polarised, the
v rms  
m 3  10 17 angle  is
(a) 84.4° (b) 48.4°
6
 414  10 m/s (c) 56.3° (d) 53.1°
Answer (a)
 4.14  102 m/s
Sol. 1 = 1
vrms  2 cm/s 
4
46. Two wires, made of same material, one thick and the 2 
3 
other thin are joined to form one composite wire. The
composite wire is subjected to the same tension
3
throughout. A wave travels along the wire and passes 3 
2
the point where the two wires are joined. The quantity
which changes at the joint are For air-water interface
(a) Frequency only 4
 sin   sin 
(b) Propagation speed only 3
sin 
(c) Wavelength only  sin  
4
(d) Both propagation speed and wavelength
3
Answer (d)
12
NSEP 2019-20
50. White light is used to illuminate two slits in Young’s

4 double slit experiment. Separation between the two
3 slits is b and the screen is at a distance D (>>b)
 sin
from the plane of slits. The wavelength missing at a
 point on the screen directly in front of one of the
2 slits is
4
   sin 
2
3 2b2 2b2
(a) (b)
3D D
But for water glass interface reflected light is
completely polarized b2 b2
(c) (d)
3D 2D
3 3  3 9
 tan     Answer (c)
2 2  4 8
Sol.
9 sin 
  P b
8 2
4 2
   sin 
2
3
81  16 
   sin2    sin2 
64  9  1
 144 
Path difference    b 2  D 2  2 D
 sin   
2
 145   1 b2 
 x  D 1  D
2 
 sin 84.4°  2 D 
49. In a spectrometer the smallest main scale division is b2
 x 
2D
1
of a degree. The total number of divisions on the 
3 if x  (2n  1) then  will be missing
2
vernier scale attached to the main scale is 60 which
b2 
coincide with the 59 divisions of the main circular   (2n  1)
2D 2
scale. The least count of the spectrometer is
b2
(a) 20   
D  (odd positive integer)
(b) 20 b2
 missing 
(c) 30 3D
(d) 30 51. In an ink-jet printer, an ink droplet of mass m is
given a negative charge q by a computer-controlled
Answer (b) charging unit. The charged droplet then enters the
region between two deflecting parallel plates of length

 1 L separated by distance d (see figure below) with a
Sol. 1 unit of main scale is  
3 speed v. All over this region there exists a uniform
downward electric field E (in the plane of paper).
 59  Neglecting the gravitational force on the droplet, the
Now 1 unit of vernier scale    unit of main maximum charge that can be given to this droplet,
 60 
so that is does not hit any of the plates, is
scale
E q
 v d
 59   1 
 Least count of spectometer =  1    
 60   3 
L
 2
1  1 mv L mv 2d
=   (a) 2 (b)
60  3  Ed EL2
md mv 2L2
 1 1 (c) (d)
=     60  60 = 20 Ev 2 L2 Ed
 60 3  Answer (b)
13
NSEP 2019-20
L Sol. 'C' and 'D' are subjected to same potential difference
Sol. t    in x-direction V(let) so they are equally bright. 'A' and 'B' are both
v 
y V
d subjected to same potential difference of
2 v 2
x
So A = B < C = D
L 54. The unit of magnetizing field is
Eq (a) tesla
In y-direction a
m (b) newton
And for max. charge on drop
(c) ampere
2
d 1 Eq  L  (d) ampere turn/meter
  
2 2 m v 
Answer (d)
EqL2
 d Sol. Magnetizing field 'H' is related with magnetic field B
mv 2 as
mv 2d
q
EL2 B
H
52. A converging beam of light is pointing to P. Two
∵ 0
observations are made with (i) a convex lens of
focal length 20 cm and (ii) a concave lens of focal 0 n.i
length 16 cm placed in the path of the convergent And B 
2d
beam at a distance 12 cm before the point P. It is
observed that (B )(length)
So 0 
(a) In both cases the images are real (Ampere  turn)
(b) In both cases the images are virtual
B(Ampere turn)
(c) For (i) the image is real and for (ii) the image is  H
virtual (B )(length)
(d) For (i) the image is virtual and for (ii) the imge  unit of H is ampere turn/meter
is real
55. A star undergoes a supernova explosion. Just after
Answer (a) the explosion, the material left behind forms a
Sol. For concave lens if the virtual object would have uniform sphere of radius 8000 km with a rotation
been at a distance greater than 16 cm, then only period of 15 hours. This remaining material
it will make the virtual image. So concave lens will eventually collapses into a neutron star of radius 4
make the real image. km with a period of rotation
And convex lens will make the real image for virtual (a) 14 s
object. (b) 3.8 h
53. Identify the rank in order from dimmest to the (c) 0.021 s
brightest when all the identical bulbs are connected
in the circuit as shown below. (d) 0.0135 s
Answer (d)
D Sol. Let the mass be M0.
2 2
C  M0R12  1  M0R22  2
5 5
2 2
 (8000)  (15 hour)  (4  4)  T
2
A B 2
_
+
16  (15 hour)
(a) A = B > C = D (b) A = B = C = D  T2 
(8000)2
(c) A > C > B > D (d) A = B < C = D
Answer (d)  T2 = 0.0135 (seconds)
14
NSEP 2019-20
56. A number of identical absorbing plates are arranged Is

in between a source of light and a photo cell. When (a) B to A and
2
there is no plate in between, the photo current is
maximum. Under the circumstances let us focus on Is
(b) A to B and
the two statements 4
(1) The photo current decreases with the increase Is
(c) B to A and
in number of absorbing plates. 9
(2) The stopping potential increases with the Is
(d) B to A and
increase in number of absorbing plates. 3
(a) Statements (1) and (2) are both true and (1) is Answer (c)
the cause of (2)
(b) Statements (1) and (2) are both true but (1) and Is I1
Sol.
(2) are independent
4R Is–I1 2I1–Is 2R
(c) Statement (1) is true while (2) is not true and (1)
and (2) are independent A B
4R 2R
2R 4R
(d) Statement (1) is true while (2) is not true and (2) I1
is the effect of (1)
Is Is–I1
Answer (c)
Sol. Number of absorbing plate will reduce the intensity  – 2RI1 – 6R(2I1 – Is) + 4R(Is – I1) = 0
so photocurrent will decrease on increasing the  4Is – 4I1 = 2I1 + 12I1 – 6Is
number of plates.  10Is = 18I1
But stopping potential will be depending on the
maximum energy of photon. 5
 I1  Is
9
57. In a nuclear reaction, two photons each of energy
0.51 MeV are produced by electron-positron 10Is I
annihilation. The wavelength associated with each So the current in ammeter is I    Is  s
9 9
photon is
from B to A
(a) 2.44 × 10–12 m
59. In the following figures the velocity-time graphs for
(b) 2.44 × 10–8 m three particles 1, 2 and 3 are shown.
(c) 1.46 × 10–12 m
+4
(d) 3.44 × 10–10 m
Velocity (m/s)
Answer (a) +2
0
Sol. hc  E

–2
E  
   hc  2.43  10 12 m  2.44  10 12 m 0 2 4 6 8 10
time (s)
58. In the circuit shown if an ideal ammeter is connected Particle 1
between A and B then the direction of current and
the current reading would be (assume Is remains +4
unchanged)
Velocity (m/s)
+2
Is
0
4R 2R
4R 2R
A –2
A B
2R 4R 0 2 4 6 8 10
time (s)
Is
Particle 2
15
NSEP 2019-20
+4
Velocity (m/s)
2
+2
1
F (N)
0
0
–2 –1
–2
0 2 4 6 8 10
time (s) –15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
Particle 3 x (m)
The magnitude of average acceleration of the three

particles, over 10 s, bear the relationship (Fig ii)
(a) a1 > a2 > a3 (b) a2 > a1 > a3
(c) a3 > a2 > a1 (d) a1 = a2 = a3
2
Answer (d)
1
F (N)
v  2

Sol. For particle (1), | a1 |  0

t 10
–1
v  2

For particle (2), | a2 | 
–2
t 10
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
x (m)


v  2
For particle (3), | a3 | 

t 10
Clearly, | a1 |  | a2 |  | a3 |
(Fig iii)
60. The potential energy (U) of a particle moving in a

potential field varies with its displacement (x) as
2
shown below.
1
F (N)
0
0
–1
U (J)
–5 –2
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
x (m)
–10
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15 (Fig iv)
x (m)
(a) Fig (i)
The variation of force F(x) acting on the particle as a
(b) Fig (ii)
function of x can be represented by
(c) Fig (iii)
2 (d) Fig (iv)
1 Answer (d)
F (N)
0
du
–1 Sol. F  
dx
–2
 Force is of magnitude 1 N
–15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15
x (m) And force is (+ve) for x = – 10 to x = 0
(Fig i) And force is (–ve) for x = 0 to x = 10.
16
NSEP 2019-20
Part : A-2
Any number of options (4), (3), (2) or (1) may be correct
61. A pin of small length 'a' is placed along the axis of 63. The mass of an electron can be expressed as
a concave mirror of focal length f, at the distance (a) 0.512 MeV (b) 8.19 × 10–14 J/c2
u(>f) from its pole. The length of its image is 'b'. If
the same object is placed perpendicular to its axis (c) 9.1 × 10–31 kg (d) 0.00055 amu
at the same distance u and the length of its image where c is speed of light in vacuum
is now 'c', then
Answer ( a, b, c, d)
2
f 1
(a) b  a (b) c  ab Sol. me  amu  0.00055 amu
(u  f )2 1840
u f a2f 3 me  9.1 1031 kg

(c) c  b (d) bc 
f (u  f ) 3
me  931  0.00055  0.512 MeV
Answer (a, b, c, d)
1 1 1 me  9.1 1031  9  1016 J/c 2
Sol.  
v u f  8.19  1014 J/c 2
uf 64. Select the correct statement(s), out of the following,

v about diffraction at N parallel slits.
u f
(a) There are (N – 1) minima between each pair of
af 2 principal maxima
b
(u  f )2 (b) There are (N – 2) secondary maxima between
each pair of principal maxima
af
c (c) Width of principal maximum is proportional to
u f
1/N
Substituting value of b, c in option we get all the
(d) The intensity at the principal maxima varies as
options.
N2
62. A thin rod of length 10 cm is placed along the axis of
Answer (a, b, c, d)
a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm in such a way
that one end of the image coincides with one end of Sol. (a) There use to be (N – 1) minima between each
the object. The length of the image may be pair of principal maxima.
(a) 7.5 cm (b) 12 cm (b) There would be (N – 2) secondary maxima
between each pair of principal maxima.
(c) 15 cm (d) 10 cm
(c) For mth order and dsinm = m
Answer (a, c)
Sol. Case I : One of the ends is at centre and other in 
 Am 
between centre and infinity Nd cos m
1 1 1 1
  width is proportional to
V 70 30 N
1 1 1 sin2 
  (d) l  N2l0  l  N2
V 30 70 2
65. An electric dipole placed in a non-uniform electric
1 40
 ,V  52.5 cm field may experience
V 2100
(a) No net force, no torque
l = 7.5 cm
(b) A net force, but not torque
Case - II one of ends is at centre and other is
between centre and pole (c) No net force, but a torque
(d) A net force and a torque
1 1 1
   ,V  75 cm Answer (a, b, c, d)
V 50 30
l = 15 cm Sol. All the cases are possible.
17
NSEP 2019-20
66. Two long parallel wires carry currents of equal 67. A block of mass m = 10 kg is hanging over a
magnitude (I) but in opposite directions. These wires frictionless light fixed pulley by an inextensible light
are suspended from fixed rod PQ by four chords of rope. Initially the block is held at rest. The other end
equal length L as shown. The mass per unit length of the rope is now pulled by a constant force F in the
of each wire is , the value of angle  subtended by vertically downward direction. The linear momentum
two chords OA and OB, assuming it to be small, is of the block is seen to increase by 2 kg m/s in 1 s
P
(in the first second). Therefore,
y O Q
L
I  C
B
I
A
z x F
m
0  0 1
(a)   I (b)   I
4 gL  gL
(a) The tension in the rope is F
0 g  0 g (b) The tension in the rope is 3 N
(c)   I (d)   I
4  L  L (c) The work done by the tension on the block, in
Answer (b) first second, is = 19.8 J
Sol. (d) The work done against the force of gravity, in first
second, is = 9.8 J
L L Answer (a, d)

2 T Sol. V = 0.2 m/s
Fm a = 0.2 m/s2
Fg
S
 0.2 2  0.1 m
2  0.2
0I 2
Fm (per unit length)  mg – F = ±ma
   
2 2L sin    F  10  g  a 
  2 
Wg = (10 g × 0.1)
Fg (per unit length)  g
= 9.8 J
68. A ball of mass m1 travels horizontallly along the
 
T cos    g x-axis in the positive direction with an initial speed of
 2
v0. It collides with another ball of mass m2 that is
originally at rest. After the collision, the ball of mass
  0l 2 m1 has velocity (v1xi + v1y j) and the ball of mass m2
T sin   
 2     has velocity (v 2x i + v 2y j). Identify the correct
2  2L sin    relationship(s)
  2 
(a) 0 = m1v1x + m2v2x
  (b) m1v0 = m1v1y + m2v2y

∵ for small 2  (c) 0 = m1v1y + m2 v2y
 0l 2   
 cos  1  (d) m1v0 = m1v1x + m2v2x
2 2Lg  2 
sin    
Answer (c, d)
 2 2  Sol. Momentum of the system remains conserved in
absence of any external force
0 1 m1v1y + m2v2y = 0
l
 gL m1v1x + m2v2x = m1v0
18
NSEP 2019-20
69. In a real gas  F 

(a) The force of attraction between the molecules g – m 
 
depends upon intermolecular distance (c) v  u
 F 
g  m 
(b) Internal energy depends only upon temperature  
(c) Internal energy is a function of both temperature
 F
and volume g  m 
 
(d) Internal energy is a function of both temperature (d) v = u  F
and pressure g – m 
 
Answer (a, c, d)
Answer (a, b, c)
Sol. Variation of intermolecular forces as a function of
intermolecular distance Sol. During upward journey,
force  mg  F 
a   
 m 
F
 F
 g   mg
 m 
r
 F
So, 02  u 2  2  g   h
 m
Internal energy of a real gas depends not just only
temperature but also on volume and pressure as u2
h
well.  F 
2g 
70. A particle of mass m is thrown vertically up with  m 
velocity u. Air exerts an opposing force of a constant
During downward journey
magnitude F. The particle returns back to the point
of projection with velocity v after attaining maximum mg  F  F F
height h, then a2   g  
m  m
u2  F
(a) h  So, v 2  02  2  g   h
 F  m 
mg
2 g  
 m
 F
v2 g  m 
(b) h  v u  
 F  F
g  m 
2 g – 
 m   

19
*02161
Time: 9:00 AM to 10:00 AM

Question Paper Code: 61
Student's
Roll No:
Write the question paper code mentioned above on YOUR OMR Answer Sheet (in the space provided),
otherwise your Answer Sheet will NOT be evaluated. Note that the same Question Paper Code
appears on each page of the question paper.
Instructions to Candidates:
1. Use of mobile phone, smart watch, and iPad during examination is STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
2. In addition to this question paper, you are given OMR Answer Sheet along with candidate's copy.
3. On the OMR sheet, make all the entries carefully in the space provided ONLY in BLOCK CAPITALS as
well as by properly darkening the appropriate bubbles.
Incomplete/ incorrect/ carelessly filled information may disqualify your candidature.
4. On the OMR Answer Sheet, use only BLUE or BLACK BALL POINT PEN for making entries and filling
the bubbles.
5. Your fourteen-digit roll number and date of birth entered on the OMR Answer Sheet shall remain your
login credentials means login id and password respectively for accessing your performance / result in Indian
Olympiad Qualifier in Physics 2020-21 (Part I).
6. Question paper has two parts. In part A1 (Q. No.1 to 24) each question has four alternatives, out of which only
one is correct. Choose the correct alternative and fill the appropriate bubble, as shown.
Q.No. 12 a c d
In part A2 (Q. No. 25 to 32) each question has four alternatives out of which any number of alternative(s) (1, 2,
3, or 4) may be correct. You have to choose all correct alternative(s) and fill the appropriate bubble(s), as shown
Q.No. 30 a c d
7. For Part A1, each correct answer carries 3 marks whereas 1 mark will be deducted for each wrong answer.
In Part A2, you get 6 marks if all the correct alternatives are marked and no incorrect. No negative marks in
this part.
8. Rough work should be done only in the space provided. There are 08 printed pages in this paper.
9. Use of non- programmable scientific calculator is allowed.
11. After submitting answer paper, take away the question paper and candidate's copy of OMR for your reference
Please DO NOT make any mark other than filling the appropriate bubbles properly in the
space provided on the OMR answer sheet.
OMR answer sheets are evaluated using machine, hence CHANGE OF ENTRY IS NOT
ALLOWED. Scratching or overwriting may result in a wrong score.
DO NOT WRITE ON THE BACK SIDE OF THE OMR ANSWER SHEET.
1
61
Instructions to Candidates (Continued) :
You may read the following instructions after submitting the answer sheet.
12. Comments/Inquiries/Grievances regarding this question paper, if any, can be shared on the
Inquiry/Grievance column on www.iaptexam.in on the specified format till February 12,
2021.
13. The answers/solutions to this question paper will be available on the website: www.iapt.org.in
by February 13, 2021.
14. CERTIFICATES and AWARDS:
Following certificates are awarded by IAPT to students, successful in the Indian Olympiad Qualifier
in Physics 2020-21 (Part I)
(i) “CENTRE TOP 10 %”
(ii) “STATE TOP 1 %”
(iii) “NATIONAL TOP 1 %”
(iv) “GOLD MEDAL & MERIT CERTIFICATE” to all students who attend OCSC-2021 at HBCSE
Mumbai
15. All these certificates (except gold medal) will be downloadable from IAPT website :
www.iapt.org.in after March 15, 2020-21.
16. List of students (with centre number and roll number only) having score above MAS will be
displayed on the website: www.iapt.org.in by February 25, 2021. See the Minimum Admissible
score Clause on the Student's brochure on the web.
17. List of Students eligible for evaluation of IOQP 2020-21 (Part II) shall be displayed on
www.iapt.org.in by March 1, 2021.
Physical constants you may need….
Mass of electron me = 9.10´ 10 kg Magnitude of charge on electron e = 1.60´ 10 C

-31 -19
Mass of proton mp = 1.67´ 10 kg Permittivity of free space e 0 =8.85´ 10 C N m

-27 -12 2 -1 -2
Acceleration due to gravity g = 9.8 ms Permeability of free space m 0 = 4p ´ 10 Hm

-2 -7 -1
Universal gravitational constant G = 6.67´ 10 Nm Kg Planck's constant h = 6.625 ´ 10 Js

-11 2 -2 -34
Universal gas constant R = 8.31 Jmol K Faraday constant = 96,500 Cmol

-1 -1 -1
Boltzmann constant k = 1.38´ 10 JK Rydberg constant R = 1.097 ´ 107 m-1

-23 -1
Stefan's constant s = 5.67´ 10-8 Wm-2K-4 Speed of light in free space c = 3 ´ 108 ms-1
Avogadro's constant NA = 6.023 ´ 10 mol

23 -1
2
61
Question Paper Code: 61
Time: 60 Minute Max. Marks: 120

Attempt All Thirty Two Questions
A-1
ONLY ONE OUT OF FOUR OPTIONS IS CORRECT. BUBBLE THE CORRECT OPTION.
1. If speed of light c, Planck's constant h and gravitational constant G are chosen as fundamental
quantities, dimensions of time in this system of units is
(a) ch3/2 G–3/2 (b) c–2 G1/2 h (c) c2 G1/2 h5/2 (d) c–5/2 G1/2 h1/2
2. A solid hemisphere is cemented on the flat surface of a solid cylinder of same radius R and same
material. The composite body is rotating about the axis of the cylinder of length l with angular
speed w. The radius of gyration K is
2  15R  8l  1  15l  8R R

(a) R   (b) R  
5  3R  2l  10  3l  2R

3  15R  8l  1  3l  2R 
(c) R   (d) R  
10  3R  2l  10  15l  8R R
3. The shortest period of rotation of a planet (considered to be a sphere of uniform density r) about its
own axis, such that any mass m kept on its equator is just to fly off the surface, is
5  3 5
(a) T  (b) T  (c) T  (d) T 
G 3 G G 3 G
4. A body of mass 10 kg at rest explodes into two fragments of masses 3 kg and 7 kg. If the total
kinetic energy of two pieces after explosion is 1680 J, the magnitude of their relative velocity
in m/s after explosion is:
(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) 70 (d) 80
5. A shot is fired at an angle a to the horizontal up a hill (Considered to be a long straight incline
plane) of inclination b to the horizontal. It will strike the hill horizontally if
(a) tan a = 2 tan b (b) sin a = sin 2 b (c) sin a = 2 sin b (d) tan a = 4 tan b
3
61
2
6. A particle is executing Simple Harmonic Motion of time period T  4 in a straight line. Starting
from rest, it travels a distance 'a' in the first second and distance 'b' in the next second travelling in
the same direction. The amplitude of SHM is
2a2 3a2 2a2
(a) (b) (c) (d) none of these
3ab 3a2b 2ab
7. The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a circle of radius R depends upon the distance
covered 's' as KE = as2 where a is a constant. The magnitude of the force acting on the particle as a
function of 's' is
2
2as2 2as2 s
(a) (b) (c) 2as (d) 2as 1  
R m R
8. The flow of water in a horizontal pipe is stream line flow. Along the pipe, at a point, where cross -
sectional area is 10 cm2, the velocity of water flow is 1.00 ms-1 and the pressure is 2000 Pa. The
pressure of water at another point where cross - sectional area is 5 cm2 is
(a) 2000 Pa (b) 1500 Pa (c) 3500 Pa (d) 500 Pa
9. Three containers A, B and C are filled with water at different temperature. When 1 litre of water
from A is mixed with 2 litre of water from B, the resulting temperature of mixture is 520 C.
When 1 litre of water from B is mixed with 2 litre of water from C, the resulting temperature of
mixture is 400 C. Similarly when 1 litre of water from C is mixed with 2 litre of water from A, the
resulting temperature of mixture is 340 C. Temperature of mixture when one litre of water from
each container is mixed (neglect the water equivalent of container) is
(a) 400 C (b) 420 C (c) 380 C (d) 450 C
10. Point charge q is kept at each corner of a cube of edge length l . The resultant force of repulsion on
any one of the charges due to all others is expressed as q q
 1 1  2  1 1  2 q
(a)  1   q (b)  1 q
q
 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 3
 0 l 2  0 l 2
q
q
(c) 10.1775 q 2 (d) none of these q q

2
 0 l
11. In an experiment with potentiometer, the balancing length is 250 cm for a cell. When the cell is
shunted by a resistance of 7.5 W, balancing point is shifted by 25 cm. If the cell is shunted by a
resistance of 20 W, the balancing length will be nearly
(a) 240 cm (b) 236 cm (c) 232 cm (d) 230 cm
4
61
5 7
12. One mole of a gas with   is mixed with two moles of another non-interacting gas with  
3 5
CP
The ratio of specific heats   of mixture is approximately
CV
(a) 1.50 (b) 1.46 (c) 1.49 (d) 1.53
13. An ideal gas is expanding such that PT3 = constant. The coefficient of volume expansion of the
gas is
1 2 3 4
(a) T (b) T (c) T (d) T
14. What is the magnetic induction B at the centre O of the semicircular arc if a current carrying wire
has shape of an hair pin as shown in figure? The radius of the curved part of the wire is R, the linear
parts are assumed to be very long.
0 I 0 I
(a) B  2    (b) B  2    I
4 R 4R R
O
3 I  2I
(c) B  0 2    (d) B  0
4R 4 R
15. A thin semi-circular metal ring of radius R has a positive charge q distributed uniformly over its
curved length. The resultant electric field E at the center O is j
q q
(a)  j (b) + j
2  0 R2
2
2  0 R2
2
q q
(c) + j 2 (d)  j
4  0 R2 4  0 R2
2 i
16. An Alternating Current is expressed as i = i1 cos wt + i2 sin wt. The RMS value of current is
i1  i2  i1 i2 i1 i2 
2
i12  i22
2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 2 2
17. A charge + q is placed at each of the points x = x0, x = 3x0, x = 5x0, x = 7x0 ..............¥ on the x-axis
and a charge -q is placed at each of the points x = 2x0, x = 4x0, x = 6x0, x = 8x0 .......¥ here x0 is a
positive constant. Take the electric potential at a point due to a charge q at a distance r from it to be
1 q
V . The electric potential at the origin due to the above system of charges is
40 r
1 q 1 q
(a) zero (b) ln 2 (c) (d) infinite
40 x0 40 x0 2ln 2
5
61
23
18. The Nucleus 10 Ne decays by b - emission through the reaction
23 23
10 Ne  Na  10    energy The atomic masses are 10
11
23
Ne  22.994466 u and
0
23
11 Na  22.989770 u, 1
 = 0.000549 u. The maximum kinetic energy that the emitted electron
can ever have is
(a) 4.374 MeV (b) 3.862 MeV (c) 2.187 MeV (d) 1.931 MeV
19. The distance between two slits in Young's double slits experiment is d = 2.5 mm and the distance
of the screen from the plane of slits is D = 120 cm. The slits are illuminated with coherent beam of
light of wavelength  = 600 nm. The minimum distance (from the central maximum) of a point
where the intensity reduces to 25% of maximum intensity is
(a) 24 µm (b) 48 µm (c) 96 µm (d) 120 µm
20. What amount of heat will be generated in a coil of resistance R (ohm) due to a total charge Q
(coulomb) passing through it if the current in the coil decreases down to zero halving its value
every Dt second?
2 2
(a) 1 Q R (d) 1 Q R
2
(c) 1 Q R ln2
2
(b) Q R ln2
2 t t 2 t 4 t
21. In the L R circuit shown in figure, switch S is closed at time t = 0, the charge that passes through the
battery of emf E in one time constant is (e being the base of natural logarithm).
(a) EL (b) EL
eR2 eR
(d) EL
2
(c) eER E s
L R
22. Natural Uranium is a mixture of 238
92 U
and 235
92 U
with a relative mass abundance of 140 : 1. The ratio
of radioactivity contributed by the two isotopes of natural uranium, if their half-lives are 4.5 ´ 109
years and 7.0 ´ 108 years respectively is
(a) 99.3 : 0.7 (b) 50.3 : 49.7 (c) 95.6 : 04.4 (d) cannot be estimated
23. A cylinder of length l > 1m filled with water ( = 43 ) up to the brim, kept on a horizontal table is
covered at its top by an equiconvex glass ( = 1.5) lens of focal length 25 cm when in air. At mid
day, 12.00 noon, Sun is just overhead and light rays comes parallel to the principal axis of the lens.
The sun rays will be focused
(a) 25 cm behind the lens in the water (b) 37.5 cm behind the lens in the water
(c) 50 cm behind the lens in the water (d) 100 cm behind the lens in the water
24. Even the radiation of highest wave length in the ultraviolet region of hydrogen spectrum is just
able to eject photoelectrons from a metal. The value of threshold frequency for the given metal is
(a) 3.83 ´ 1015 Hz (b) 4.33 ´ 1014 Hz (c) 2.46 ´ 1015 Hz (d) 7.83 ´ 1014 Hz
6
61
A-2
ANY NUMBER OF OPTIONS 4, 3, 2 or 1 MAY BE CORRECT
MARKS WILL BE AWARDED ONLY IF ALL CORRECT OPTIONS ARE BUBBLED AND NO WRONG OPTION
25. A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate separation d is charged to potential V. Then the
battery is disconnected. A slab of dielectric constant k is then inserted between the plates of the
capacitor so as to fill the space between the plates completely. If Q, E and W denote respectively,
the magnitude of charge on each plate, the electric field between the plates (after the slab is
inserted) and work done on the system, in question, in the process of inserting the slab, then
 kAV V  AV 2 1
(a) Q  k 0 AE (b) Q  0 (c) E  (d) W  0 (1  )
d kd 2d k
26. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at distances r1 and r2 from the centre of a uniform solid
sphere of radius R and mass M are F (r1) and F (r2) respectively. Such that
F r1  r1
(a)  if r1  R and r2  R
F r2  r2
F r1  r22
(b)  if r1 R and r2 R
F r2  r12
F r1  r1
(c)  if r1 R and r2 R
F r2  r2
F r1  r12
(d)  if r1  R and r2  R
F r2  r22
27. The intensity of sound at a point P is I0, when the sounds reach this point directly and in same phase
from two identical sources S1 and S2. The power of S1 is now reduced by 64 % and the phase
difference (f) between S1 and S2 is varied continuously. The maximum and minimum intensities
recorded at P are now Imax and Imin such that
I 16
(a) Imax = 0.64 I0 (b) I min  0.36 I 0 (c) I max = 16 (d) max 
I min I min 9
28. An ideal monatomic gas is confined within a cylinder by a spring loaded piston of cross-sectional
area 4 ´10-3 m2. Initially the gas is at 400 K and occupies a volume 2 ´10-3 m3 and the spring is in
its relaxed position. The gas is heated by an electric heater for some time. During this time the gas
expands and the piston moves out by a distance 0.1 m. The spring connected to the rigid wall is
massless and frictionless. The force constant of the spring is 2000 Nm-1 and atmospheric pressure
is 105 Nm-2 then
T=400K
(a) The final temperature of the gas is 720 K.
(b) The work done by gas in expanding is 50 J
(c) The heat supplied by heater is 190 J
(d) The heat supplied by heater is 290 J
7
61
29. A particle of mass m is located in a one dimensional potential field U (x) = U0 (1 - cos ax);
U0 and a are constants. Which of the following statement/s is/are correct?
(a) The particle will execute Simple Harmonic Motion for small displacements.
(b) The stable equilibrium condition is x = 0
2 m
(c) The time period of small oscillations is
a U0
U0
(d) The angular frequency for small oscillations is   a
m
30. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral prism made of flint glass (refractive index 1.6) placed in
air.
(a) The ray suffers a minimum deviation if it is incident at angle 530.
(b) The minimum angle of deviation suffered by the ray is 460.
(c) If prism is immersed in water (  4
3 ) the minimum deviation produced by the prism is 14 .
0
(d) The minimum deviation produced by the prism is 23.60 if it is immersed in a liquid of refractive
index  = 1.2
31. In a p-n junction diode, the current (i) varies with applied biasing voltage (V) and can be expressed
as i  i0 e qV/kT  1 where i0 = 5 x 10-12 A is reverse saturation current, k is Boltzmann constant
and q is the charge on the electron
At Absolute Temperature T = 300K
(a) The forward current is approximately 59.5 mA for a forward bias of 0.6 volt
(b) The current increases approximately by 2.75A if the biasing voltage changes from 0.6 V to 0.7 V
(c) The dynamic resistance of p-n junction is approximately 435 m  at the biasing voltage of 0.6 V
(d) The change in reverse bias current when biasing voltage change from -1 volt to -2 volt happens
to be practically zero.
32. A charged oil (density 880 kg m-3) drop is held stationary between two parallel horizontal metal
plates 6.0 mm apart when a potential difference of V = 103 volt is applied between the two plates.
When the electric field is switched off, the drop falls. At a certain time the drop is seen to fall a
distance of 2.0 mm in 35.7 s and next 1.2 mm in 21.4 s. (The upper plate in the experiment is at
higher potential).
Given that the viscosity of air = 1.80×10-5 Nsm-2 and density of air = 1.29 kg m-3
(a) The radius of the drop is a = 7.25 × 10-7m
(b) The charge on the drop is q = 8.0 × 10 C
-19
(c) The terminal velocity of the oil drop, under its free fall, is 5.6 × 10-5 ms-1
(d) The oil drop carries 5 excess electrons
8
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
INDIAN OLYMPIAD QUALIFIER IN PHYSICS (IOQP) 2020-21

(Held On Sunday 07th FEBRUARY, 2021)
Time allowed : 60 Minutes Max. Marks : 120
TEST PAPER WITH ANSWER & SOLUTION (PART-1)
Attempt All The Thirty Two Questions
A-1
w ONLY ONE OUT OF FOUR OPTIONS IS CORRECT BUBBLE THE CORRECT OPTION.
1. If speed of light c, Planck’s constant h and gravitational constant G are chosen as fundamental quantities,
dimensions of time in this system of units is :-
(a) ch3/2 G–3/2 (b) c–2 G1/2 h (c) c2 G1/2 h5/2 (d) c–5/2 G1/2 h 1/2
Ans. (d)
Sol. t µ cxhyGz
M0L0 T1 = [LT–1 ]x [ML 2T–1]y [M–1 L3T–2]z
M0 L0 T1 = My–zLx+2y+3zT–x–y-2z
y–z=0Þy=z
x +2y + 3z = 0 Þ x + 5z = 0 Þ x = –5z
–x – y – 2z = 1 Þ 5z – z – 2z = 1
EN
1 1
Þ z= , y = , x = –5/2
2 2
So t µ c–5/2G1/2h1/2
2. A solid hemisphere is cemented on the flat surface of a solid cylinder of same radius R and same
LL
material. The composite body is rotating about the axis of the cylinder of length l with angular speed
w. The radius of gyration K is :-
R
A
2 æ 15R + 8l ö 1 æ 15l + 8R ö 3 æ 15R + 8l ö 1 æ 3l + 2R ö

(a) R ç ÷ (b) R ç ÷ (c) R ç ÷ (d) R ç ÷
5 è 3R + 2l ø 10 è 3l + 2R ø 10 è 3R + 2l ø 10 è 15l + 8R ø
Ans. (b)
Sol. I = Icy + Ihemisphere
M1R2 2
I= + M2 R2
2 5
2 3
M1 = rpR2l, M2 = r pR
3
1
INDIAN OLYMPIAD QUALIFIER IN PHYSICS (IOQP)-2020-21 / 07-02-2021
é pR 2l 2 2 3 ù
I = rR2 ê + pR ú
ë 2 53 û
4 él 4 3ù
(M1 + M2)K2 = I = prR ê + R ú
ë 2 15 û
é 2 ù él 4 ù
K 2rpR 2 êl + R ú = rpR4 ê + Rú
ë 3 û ë 2 15 û
(15l + 8R)(1)
K=R
(3l + 2R)(10)
3. The shortest period of rotation of a planet (considered to be a sphere of uniform density r) about its
own axis, such that any mass m kept on its equator is just to fly off the surface, is :-
5p p 3p 5p
(a) T = (b) T = (c) T = (d) T =
rG 3rG rG 3rG
Ans. (c)
Sol. mg – N = mw2R
N=0
EN w
g
w=
R
mg
N
GM
g=
LL
R2
G 4 4GrpR
g= 2
´ r ´ pR3 =
R 3 3
2p 3R 3p
So T = = 2p =
w 4GrpR Gr
A
4. A body of mass 10 kg at rest explodes into two fragments of masses 3kg and 7kg. If the total kinetic
energy of two pieces after explosion is 1680 J, the magnitude of their relative velocity in m/s after
explosion is :-
(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) 70 (d) 80
Ans. (a)
m1 m2
Sol.
v1 v2
From momentum conservation

0 = m1v1 – m2v2
3v1 = 7v2 .....(i)
2
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
1 1
1680 = m1 v12 + m2 v 22
2 2
3360 = 3v12 + 7v22 ....(ii)
2
æ 7v 2 ö
÷ + 7v 2
2
3360 = 3 ç
è 3 ø
49v 22
3360 = + 7v 22
3
10080 = (49 + 21)v2 2
10080 = 70 v2 2
v2 = 12 m/s
v1 = 7/3 v2 = 7/3 × 12 = 28 m/s
relative velocity : v12 = v1 + v2 = 40 m/s
5. A shot is fired at an angle a to the horizontal up a hill (Considered to be a long straight incline plane)
of inclination b to the horizontal. It will strike the hill horizontally if :-
(a) tan a = 2 tan b (B) sin a = sin 2b
EN (c) sin a = 2 sin b (d) tan a = 4 tan b
Ans. (a)
Sol. It will hit horizontally if at A vertical velocity is zero.
R
\ OB =
2 A ucosa
and AB = Hmax
AB H max u
tan b = =
LL
OB R Hmax
2 a
b
O
u sin a
2 2 B
2g
tan b =
1 æ u sin 2a ö
2
ç ÷÷
2 çè g ø
A
sin 2 a tan a
Þ tan b = =
sin 2a 2
Þ tana = 2tanb
\ correct option is (a)
6. A particle is executing Simple harmonic Motion of time period T = 4p2 in a straight line. Starting from
rest, it travels a distance ‘a’ in the first second and distance ‘b’ in the next second travelling in the
same direction. The amplitude of SHM is :-
2a 2 3a 2 2a 2
(a) (b) (c) (d) none of these
3a - b 3a - 2b 2a - b
Ans. (a)
2p
Sol. T = 4 p2 =
w
1
Þw= rad / sec
2p
3
x = A sin (wt + f)
1 p
w= ,f = (as it starts from extreme position)
2p 2
æ t pö
\ x = Asin ç + ÷
è 2p 2 ø
æ 1 ö
Þ x = A cos (wt) ç w = 2p ÷
è ø
Displacement in ‘t’ time = A – A cos wt
For t = 1 A – Acosw = a ... (1)
For t = 2 A – Acos 2w = a + b ... (2)
1 - cos w a
=
1 - cos2w a + b
1 - cos w a
Þ =
(
1 - 2 cos2 w - 1 ) a+b
1 - cos w
2 - 2 cos w
1 - cos w
2
=
=
2a
a
a+b
EN
1 - cos w2 a+b
1 - cos w 2a
=
(1 - cos w)(1 + cos w) a + b
LL
1 2a
=
(1 + cos w) a + b
a + b = 2a + 2a cos w
b-a
= cos w
2a
A
as, A – A cos w = a
a a
\ A= =
1 - cos w æ b-aö
1-ç ÷
è 2a ø
2a 2 2a 2
\ A= =
2a - b + a 3a - b
\ correct option is (A)
7. The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a circle of radius R depends upon the distance covered
‘s’ as KE = as2 where a is a constant. The magnitude of the force acting on the particle as a function of
‘s’ is :-
2
2as2 2as2 æsö
(a) (b) (c) 2as (d) 2as 1 + ç ÷
R m èRø
Ans. (d)
4
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
Sol. Given, kinetic energy = as2

1
mv 2 = as2
2
2a
Þv= s
m
dv vdv æ 2a öæ 2a ö 2as
at = = = sç =
dt ds ç m ÷ç
÷ç m ÷÷ m
è øè ø
Þ Ft = mat = 2as
mv2 2as2
Fc = ma c = =
R R
Fnet = Fc2 + Ft2
2
æ 2as2 ö EN
ç R ÷÷ ( )
2
= ç + 2as
è ø
2
æsö
= 2as 1 + ç ÷
èRø
\ correct answer is (d)
LL
8. The flow of water in a horizontal pipe is stream line flow. Along the pipe, at a point, where cross
sectional area is 10 cm 2 , the velocity of water flow is 1.00 ms–1 and the pressure is 2000 Pa. The
pressure of water at another point where cross-sectional area is 5 cm 2 is :-
(a) 2000 Pa (b) 1500 Pa (C) 3500 Pa (d) 500 Pa
Ans. (d)
Sol. A1V1 = A2V2
A
A1 = 10cm2, V1 = 1m/s
A2 = 5 cm2, V2 = ?
A1V1
V2 = = 2m / s
A2
Now applying Bernoullie
1 1
P1 + rV12 = P2 + rV2
2 2
1 1
2000 + (1000) (1)2 = P2 + (1000) (2)2
2 2
Þ P2 = 500 Pa
\ correct option is (d)
5
9. Three containers A, B and C are filled with water at different temperature. When 1 litre of water from
A is mixed with 2 litre of water from B, the resulting temperature of mixture is 52°C. When 1 litre of
water from B is mixed with 2 litre of water from C, the resulting temperature of mixture is 40°C.
Similarly when 1 litre of water from C is mixed with 2 litre of water from A, the resulting temperature
of mixture is 34°C. Temperature of mixture when one litre of water from each container is mixed
(neglect the water equivalent of container) is :-
(a) 40°C (b) 42°C (c) 38°C (d) 45°C
Ans. (b)
Sol. Case-1 : 1 (T1 – 52) + 2 (T2 – 52) = 0
Case-2 : 1 (T2 – 40) + 2 (T3 – 40) = 0
Case-3 : 2 (T1 – 34) + 1 (T3 – 34) = 0
Solving case-1, 2 & 3
T2 = 60
T3 = 30
T1 = 36
Case-4 : (36 – T) + (30 – T) + (60 – T) = 0 EN
\ T = 42°C
10. Point charge q is kept at each corner of a cube of edge length l. The resultant force of repulsion on any
one of the charges due to all others is expressed as :-
q q
q q
LL
q
q
q q
æ 1 1 ö 2 æ 1 1 ö 2
A
ç1 + + ÷q ç -1 + ÷q
(a) è 2 2 3 3 ø (b) è 2 2 3 3 ø
pe0l2 pe0 l2
(1 - 0.1775) q2
(c) (d) none of these
pe0l2
Ans. (c)
r kq 2
Sol. (
F = 2 î + ˆj + kˆ
l
)
kq 2 ˆ ˆ ˆ
2l2
(
i + j+ k )
3
kq 2
3l2
( î + ˆj + kˆ ) =
l2
(
kq 2 ˆ ˆ ˆ
i + j+ k ) éêë1 + 1
2
+
1 ù
ú
3 3û
6
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
11. In an experiment with potentiometer, the balancing length is 250 cm for a cell. When the cell is
shunted by a resistance of 7.5 W, balancing point is shifted by 25 cm. If the cell is shunted by a
resistance of 20 W, the balancing length will be nearly :-
(a) 240 cm (b) 236 cm (c) 232 cm (d) 230 cm
Ans. (a)
250
Sol. E = E 0 ... (1)
l
E ( 7.5) 225
= E0 ... (2)
7.5 + r l
1 + r 7.5 + r 250 50 10
= = = =
7.5 7.5 225 45 9
7.5 15 5
Þr= = = W
9 18 6
E ( 20 ) x'
= E0
5 l ... (3)
20 + EN
6
5
20 +
6 = 250
20 x'
250 ´ 20 20
x' = = 250 ´ ´6
5 125
20 +
LL
6
= 240 cm
5 7
12. One mole of a gas with g = is mixed with two moles of another non-interacting gas with g = . The
3 5
CP
ratio of specific heats g = of mixture is approximately
Cv
A
(a) 1.50 (b) 1.46 (c) 1.49 (d) 1.53

Ans. (b)
5 7
1´ + 2 ´
n1C P1 + n 2 C P2 2 2
g= =
Sol. n1C V1 + n 2 C V2 3 5
1´ + 2 ´
2 2
5
5 gR 5 R 3
For g = : C P = = 3 = , CV = =
3 g -1 5 2 g -1 2
-1
3
7
7 7 1 5
For g = : C P = 5 = , C V = =
5 2 2 7 2
-1
5 5
7
13. An ideal gas is expanding such that PT3 = constant. The coefficient of volume expansion of the gas is:
(a) 1/T (b) 2/T (c) 3/T (d) 4/T
Ans. (d)
Sol. PT3 = K
nRT 3 dV
T = K Þ V = CT4 Þ = 4CT3
V dT
dV
vol. exp. coeff. = g =
VdT
4CT3 4
g= =
CT 4 T
14. What is the magnetic induction B at the centre O of the semicircular arc if a current carrying wire has
shape of an hair pin as shown in figure? The radius of the curved part of the wire is R, the linear parts
are assumed to be very long.
I
R
o
(a) B =
Ans. (a)
m0 I
4 pR
(2 + p) (b) B =
EN
m0 I
4R
(2 + p) (c) B =
3m 0 I
4R
(2 + p) (d) B =
m0 2I
4p R
R
o
LL
Sol.
The wire has 2 long straight parts & one semicircular part
Bnet = 2 B(straight) + B(semicircle)
m0 I m0 I
=2 +
A
4 pR 4R
15. A thin semi-circular metal ring of radius R has a positive charge q distributed uniformly over its
r
curved length. The resultant electric field E at the centre O is :
j
++++++
++ +
+ +
+
++
+
++
+++
++
O i
q q q q
(a) - ĵ (b) + ĵ (c) + ĵ (d) - ĵ
2p e0 R2
2
2p e 0 R 2
2
4 p e 0 R2
2
4 p e0 R2
2
Ans. (a)
8
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
Sol. E.F. at centre due to semicircle

2kl
E=
R
q
Ql=
pR
2q
E=
4 pe0 pR 2
r q
E = -ˆj
2 p e0 R 2
2
16. An alternating current is expressed as i = i1 coswt + i2sinwt. The RMS value of current is
(i1 + i 2 )2 i1i 2 (i12 + i 22 ) (i1 + i 2 )2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 2 2
Ans. (c)
I1 I
Sol.
EN
I2
æp ö
i = i1sin ç + wt ÷ + i2sinwt
è2 ø
LL
adding by phasor
I= I12 + I22
I I12 + I22
irms = =
2 2
A charge +q is placed at each of the points x = x0, x = 3x0, x = 5x0, x = 7x0 .......... ¥ on the x-axis and
A
17.
a charge –q is placed at each of the points x = 2x0, x = 4x0, x = 6x0 , x = 8x0 .......... ¥ here x0 is a
positive constant. Take the electric potential at a point due to charge q at a distance r from it to be
1 q
V=
4 pe0 r . The electric potential at the origin due to the above system of charges is :
1 q 1 q
(a) zero (b) 4pe x ln 2 (c) 4pe x 2 ln 2 (d) infinite
0 0 0 0
Ans. (b)
0 q –q q –q q –q q ........ ¥
Sol.
x0 2x0 3x0 4x0 5x0 6x0 7x0 ........ ¥
Potential due to above system at origin will be :
kq kq kq kq
ÞV= - + - ......¥ ... (1)
x0 2x 0 3x 0 4x 0
and,
9
we know that
é 1 1 1 1 ù
Þ ln2 = ê1 - + - + ......¥ ú ... (2)
ë 2 3 4 5 û
Þ From (1) and (2)
q
Þ V = 4 pe x ( ln2 )
0 0
Correction answer is (b)
18. The Nucleus 23
10 Ne decays by b –emission through the reaction 23
10 Ne ® 11
23
Na + -01b + n + energy . The
atomic masses are 23

10 Ne = 22.994466u and 23
11 Na = 22.989770u, 0
-1 b = 0.000549u. The maximum
kinetic energy that the emitted electron can ever have is :
(a) 4.374 MeV (b) 3.862 MeV (c) 2.187 MeV (d) 1.931 MeV
Ans. (a)
Sol. 23
10 Ne ®11
23
Na + 0-1 b + n + Energy
Þ Maximum kinetic energy of e
-
( b)
0
-1 will be kmax = Dmc2 ... (1)
Þ Dm = 22.994466
– 22.989770
= 0.004696 µ
Þ We know that
EN... (2)
(1 amu) c2 = 931.5 MeV ... (3)

Þ kmax = Dmc = 4.374 MeV
2
Correct answer is (a)

19. The distance between two slits in Young’s double slits experiment is d = 2.5 mm and the distance of
LL
the screen from the plane of slits is D = 120 cm. The slits are illuminated with coherent beam of light
of wavelength l = 600 nm. The minimum distance (from the central maximum) of a point where the
intensity reduce to 25% of maximum intensity is :
(a) 24 µm (b) 48 µm (c) 96 µm (d) 120 µm
Ans. (c)
A
P
I0/4
y
Sol. d I0
D O
l = 600 nm
Þ We know that at O the intensity will be maximum.
I0
Þ Intensity at P (let’s say) is .
4
Þ So, we solve to find “y” [The minimum value of it].
I0 æ Df ö
Þ = I 0 cos2 ç ÷ ... (1)
4 è 2 ø
10
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
æ 2p ö æ dy ö 1 æ pdy ö
Þ Df = ç ÷ × ç ÷ Þ = cos ç ÷
è l ø èDø 2 è lD ø
Þ For minimum value,
pdy p
=
lD 3
lD
Þ y= = 96mm
3d
20. What amount of heat will be generated in a coil of resistance R (ohm) due to a total charge Q (coulomb)
passing through it if the current in the coil decreases down to zero halving its value every Dt second?
1 Q2 R Q2 R 1 Q2 R 1 Q2R
(a) (b) ln 2 (c) ln 2 (d)
2 Dt Dt 2 Dt 4 Dt
Ans. (c)
Sol. Obviously the current through the coil is given by
t / Dt
æ1ö
i = i0 ç ÷
è2ø
¥
Then charge q = ò idt = ò i0 2
qln2
0 0
¥
- t / Dt
EN i Dt
dt = 0
ln2
So, i0 =
Dt
And hence, heat generated in the circuit in the time interval t [0, ¥]
¥ ¥ 2
é qln2 - t / Dt ù 2
H = ò i2 R dt = ò êë Dt 2 úû R dt = - q2lDn2
LL
R
0 0 t
21. In the LR circuit shown in figure, switch S is closed at time t = 0, the charge that passes through the
battery of emf E in one time constant is (e being the base of natural logarithm).
L R
A
E S
EL EL eER 2 EL
(a) (b) (c) (d)
eR2 eR L R
Ans. (a)
Eæ - ö
t
Sol. i= ç1 - e ÷
t
Rè ø
q= ò idt
t
E éæ - ö ù
t t
Eæ - ö Eé - ù
t t
÷ - ( 0 + t ) ú = éë te-1 ùû = ´
E E L EL
= òRç - + t t + t
t t t
1 e ÷ dt = ê t e ú = êç e = 2
0 è ø R ë û0 R êë è ø úû R R Re R e
11
238 235
22. Natural Uranium is a mixture of 92 U and 92 U with a relative mass abundance of 140 : 1. The ratio
of radioactivity contributed by the two isotopes of natural uranium, if their half-lives are 4.5 × 109
years and 7.0 × 108 years respectively is :
(a) 99.3 : 0.7 (b) 50.3 : 49.7 (c) 95.6 : 04.4 (d) cannot be estimated
Ans. (c)
Sol. Let’s mass of U238 = m1
& mass of U235 = m2
& total mass m
m1 140
=
m2 1
140 1
m1 = m & m2 = m
141 141
m1 m2
N1 = N A & N2 = NA
238 235
A1 l1 N1 T2 N1 é ln2 ù
= = l= EN
ê
A 2 l 2 N 2 T1 N 2 ë T úû
7 ´ 108 m 235 7 235 95.6
= ´ 1´ ´ ´ 140 = 21.50 »
4.5 ´ 10 m2 238 = 4.5 ´ 10 238
9
4.4
æ 4ö
23. A cylinder of length l >1m filled with water ç m = ÷ up to the brim, kept on a horizontal table is
è 3ø
covered at its top by an equiconvex glass (µ = 1.5) lens of focal length 25 cm when in air. At mid day,
LL
12.00 noon, Sun is just overhead and light rays comes parallel to the principal axis of the lens. Thus
sun rays will be focused
(a) 25 cm behind the lens in the water (b) 37.5 cm behind the lens in the water
(c) 50 cm behind the lens in the water (d) 100 cm behind the lens in the water
Ans. (c)
Sol. For lens
A
1 æ2ö
= (m - 1) ç ÷
f èRø
1 æ 1 öæ 2 ö
=
25 çè 2 ÷ø çè R ÷ø 1.5
Þ R = 25 cm
At 1st surface
4/3
1.5 1 1.5 - 1
- =
v1 ¥ 25
Þ v1 = 75 cm
At 2nd surface
4 3
-
4 1.5 3 2
- =
3v 2 75 -25
Þ v2 = 50 cm
12
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
24. Even the radiation of highest wave length in the ultraviolet region of hydrogen spectrum is just able to
eject photoelectrons from a metal. The value of threshold frequency for the given metal is :
(a) 3.83 × 1015 Hz (b) 4.33 × 1014 Hz (c) 2.46 × 1015 Hz (d) 7.83 × 1014 Hz
Ans. (c)
Sol. Lyman series ® UV region
highest l Þ n = 2 ® n = 1
E2 – E1 = 10.2 eV
kmax = 10.2 eV – f
0 = 10.2 eV – f (just able to eject)
f 10.2eV
nth = = = 2.46 × 1015 Hz
h h
ANY NUMBER OF OPTIONS d,c,b or a MAY BE CORRECT.
MARKS WILL BE AWARDED ONLY IF ALL CORRECT OPTIONS ARE BUBBLED AND NO
WRONG OPTION.
25. A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate separation d is charged to potential V. Then the
EN
battery is disconnected. A slab of dielectric constant k is then inserted between the plates of the
capacitor so as to fill the space between the plates completely. If Q, E and W denote respectively, the
magnitude of charge on each plate, the electric field between the plates (after the slab is inserted) and
work done on the system, in question, in the process of inserting the slab, then
e 0 kAV V e0 AV2 æ 1ö
(a) Q = ke0AE (b) Q = (c) E = (d) W = ç1 - ÷
d kd 2d è kø
LL
ALLEN Ans.(a,c)
NSEP Ans. is (a, c, d)
+ –
empty
æe Aö
A
+Q –Q Q = CV = ç 0 ÷ V
Sol.
è d ø
Battery is diconnected
Þ Q charge = constant
Now dielectric is inserted
+ K –
E
+Q –Q Q V
E= =
kAe0 kd
Work done = DU = Uf – Ui
13
2
æ e0 A ö
V÷
æ ö çè d
2 2 2
Q Q 2 2
Q 1
= - =
Q
-
Q
= çk - 1 ÷ = ø æ 1 -1ö
2Cf 2Ci 2kC 2C 2C è ø e A çè k ÷
ø
2 0
d
e0 A 2 æ 1 ö
w= V ç -1÷
2d èk ø
26. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at distance r1 and r2 from the centre of a uniform solid sphere
of radius R and mass M are F (r1) and F (r2) respectively. Such that :
F ( r1 ) r1 F ( r1 ) r22
= =
( 2)
(a) F r r2 if r1 £ R and r2 £ R ( 2)
(b) F r
r12
if r1 ³ R and r2 ³ R
F ( r1 ) r1 F ( r1 ) r12
(c) F r = r if r1 ³ R and r2 ³ R (d) F r = 2 if r1 £ R and r2 £ R
( 2) 2 ( 2 ) r2
Ans. (a, b)
Sol. For r £ R EN
æ GM ö
F = ç 3 r÷ µ r
è R ø
For r ³ R
GM 1
F= µ 2
R3 r
27. The intensity of sound at a point P is I0, when the sounds reach this point directly and in same phase
LL
from two identical sources S1 and S2. The power of S1 is now reduced by 64% and the phase difference
(f) between S1 and S2 is varied continuously. The maximum and minimum intensities recorded at P
are now Imax and Imin such that
I max I max 16
(a) Imax = 0.64 I0 (b) Imin = 0.36 I0 (c) I = 16 (d) I =
min min 9
A
Ans. (a, c)
Sol. Let the initial intensities for both sources be I each.
So, maximum intensity I0 = 4I
Now, I1 = (0.36)I & I2 = I
(reduced by 64%)
Imax = ( I1 + I2 )2
= (0.6 +1)2I
= (2.56)I = (0.64)I0
Imin = ( I1 - I2 )2
= (0.6 –1)2I
= (0.16)I = (0.04)I0
Imax 16
=
Imin 1
14
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
28. An ideal monatomic gas is confined within a cylinder by a spring loaded piston of cross-sectional area
4 × 10–3 m2. Initially the gas is at 400 K and occupies a volume 2 × 10–3 m3 and the spring is in its
relaxed position. The gas is heated by an electric heater for some time. During this time the gas
expands and the piston moves out by a distance 0.1 m. The spring connected to the rigid wall is
massless and frictionless. The force constant of the spring is 2000 Nm–1 and atmospheric pressure is
105 Nm–2 then
T = 400K
(a) The final temperature of the gas is 720 K

(b) The work done by gas in expanding is 50 J
(c) The heat supplied by heater is 190 J
(d) The heat supplied by heater is 290 J
Ans. (a,b,d)
piston.
Pi = Patm = 105 N/m2
finally spring is compressed by
EN
Sol. Initially spring is relaxed hence, pressure of gas inside is equal to atmospheric pressure outside the
x = 0.1m,
So for equilibrium of piston (again).
Pressure of gas inside
LL
kx
Pf = Patm +
A
(2000)(0.1)
Pf = 105 +
4 ´ 10-3
Pf = 1.50 × 105 N/m2
initial volume Vi = 2 × 10–3 m3
A
& initial length of gas = Vi/A
2 ´ 10 -3
= = 0.5 m
4 ´ 10 -3
final length of gas = 0.5 + 0.1
(when pistion shifts by 0.1m) = 0.6 m
final volume of gas
= (0.6) (4 × 10–3)
= 2.4 × 10–3m3
Pi Vi Pf Vf
= Conservation of moles.
Ti Tf
(105 )(2 ´ 10-3 ) (1.5 ´ 105 )(2.4 ´ 10 -3 )
=
400 Tf
Tf = 720 K
15
Work done by gas = ò PdV

æ kx ö
= ò ç Patm + ÷ dV
è A ø
= Patm ò dV + k ò x dx
kx 2
= Patm ( DV) +
2
2000
= (105)(0.4 × 10–3) + (0.1)2 = 50J
2
Change in internal energy
f 3
DU = nRDT = (Pf Vf - Pi Vi )
2 2
3
= [(1.50 × 105)(2.4 × 10–3) – (105)(2 × 10–3)] = 240 J
2
So, heat supplied by heater
DQ = DU + W
= 240 + 50
EN
= 290 J
29. A particle of mass m is located in a one dimensional potential field U (x) = U0 (1 – cos ax) ; U0 and a
are constants. Which of the following statement/s is/are correct ?
LL
(a) The particle will execute Simple Harmonic Motion for small displacements.
(b) The stable equilibrium condition is x = 0
2p m
(c) The time period of small oscillations is a U
0
U0
(d) The angular frequency for small oscillations is w = a
A
m
Ans. (a,b,c,d)
Sol. Given, U = U0(1 – cos ax)
¶U
F= - = -U0a sin ax
¶x
For equilibrium, F = 0
\ equilibrium position is at x = 0
For small displacement,
F = –U0a2x [sinax » ax]
U 0a 2 U0
\ w= =a
m m
2p m
\T= a U
0
16
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
30. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral prism made of flint glass (refractive index 1.6) placed in air.
(a) The ray suffers a minimum deviation if it is incident at angle 53°
(b) The minimum angle of deviation suffered by the ray is 46°.
4
(c) If prism is immersed in water ( m =
) the minimum deviation produced by the prism is 14°.
3
(d) The minimum deviation produced by the prism is 23.6° if it is immersed in a liquid of refractive
index µ = 1.2
Ans. (a, b, c, d)
A
Sol. For minimum deviation, r1 = r2 = = 30°
2
i r1 r2
1.6 = µ EN
\ Applying snell’s law,
1 4
1 sin i = 1.6 sin r Þ sin i = 1.6 × = 0.8 =
2 5
\ i = 53°
dmin = 2i – A = (2 × 53 – 60) = 46°
LL
when prism is immersed in water,
4 1 3
sin i ' = 1.6 × Þ sin i ' = Þ i ' = 37°
3 2 5
dmin = 2i – A = (2 × 37° – 60°) = 14°
If dmin = 23.6° Þ i = 41.8°
\ µsini = 1.6 sin r
A
1.6 ´ 0.5
Þ µ= » 1.2
0.67
31. In a p-n junction diode, the current (i) varies with applied biasing voltage (V) and can be expressed as
( )
i = i0 eqV / kT - 1 where i0 = 5 × 10–12 A is reverse saturation current, k is Boltzmann constant and q is
the charge on the electron.

At Absolute Temperature T = 300 K
(a) The forward current is approximately 59.5 mA for a forward bias of 0.6 volt
(b) The current increases approximately by 2.75 A if the biasing voltage changes from 0.6 V to 0.7V
(c) The dynamic resistance of p-n junction is approximately 435 mW at the biasing voltage of 0.6V
(d) The change in reverse bias current when biasing voltage change from –1 volt to –2 volt happens
to be practically zero.
ALLEN Ans. (b, c, d)
NSEP Ans. is (a, b, c, d)
17
Sol. Given,
æ qV ö
i = 0 ç e - 1÷
kT
i
è ø
\ when V = 0.6 volt,
æ 1.6´10 -23´0.6 ö
-19
i = 5 × 10–12 ç e1.38´10 ´300 - 1 ÷ » 58.8 mA

ç ÷
è ø
when V = 0.7 volt,

i = 2.8 mA
dV
R=
di
-19
1.6´10 ´0.6
5 ´ 10 -12 ´ 1.6 ´ 10 -19 1.38´10-23 ´300
qV
di i 0q RT EN
\ = e = e » 2.27
dV kT 1.38 ´ 10 -23 ´ 300
\ R » 435 mW
Current at V = –1 » Current at V = –2 » 0
Note :- Option A its coming out to be 58.8 mA
32. A charged oil (density 880 kg m–3) drop is held stationary between two parallel horizontal metal plates
LL
6.0 mm apart when a potential difference of V = 103 volt is applied between the two plates. When the
electric field is switched off, the drop falls. At a certain time the drop is seen to fall a distance of 0.2
mm in 35.7 s and next 1.2 mm in 21.4 s. (The upper plate in the experiment is at higher potential).
Given that the viscosity of air = 1.80 × 10–5 Nsm–2 and density of air = 1.29 kg m–3
(a) The radius of the drop is a = 7.25 × 10–7 m
A
(b) The charge on the drop is q = 8.0 × 10–19 C

(c) The terminal velocity of the oil drop, under its free fall, is 5.6 × 10–5 ms–1
(d) The oil drop carries 5 excess electrons
Ans. (a, c, d)
+++ +++++
qE DV = Ed
E DV 103
Sol. E= =
mg d 6 × 10–3
– – – – – – –
As qE is upwards so charge on drop should be negative.

As rair is very less so it can be neglected while writing Buoyant force
18
PART-1/PAPER/07-02-2021
When electric field is switched off
FV
v mg
for terminal velocity

FV = mg
4 3
6phrv = r pr g
3
2 rgr 2
v= ...(1)
9 h
distance
Now, we have speed, v =
time
v=
35.7
= 5.60 ´ 10 -5 m / s
EN
(Note : since speed calculated from both interval is same hence terminal speed)
2 ´ 10 -3
Put v in equation (1) to get r

on solving we get r = 7.254 × 10–7 m
LL
we have
mg = qE, in equilibrium
4
r. pr3g = qE
3
on solving, q = 8 × 10–19C
A
so charge = –8 × 10–19 C, so option (b) is wrong

as charge is negative
q = ne Þ n = 5
\ correct option is a,c,d
19
Indian Olympiad Qualifier in Physics (IOQP) 2020-2021
conducted jointly by
Homi Bhabha Centre for Science Education (HBCSE-TIFR)
and
Indian Association of Physics Teachers (IAPT)
Part II: Indian National Physics Olympiad (INPhO)

Homi Bhabha Centre for Science Education (HBCSE-TIFR)
Date: 07 February 2021

Time: 10:15-12:15 (2 hours) Maximum Marks: 50
Instructions
1. This booklet consists of 10 pages and total of 5 questions. Write roll number at the top wherever
asked.
2. Booklet to write the answers is provided separately. Instructions to write the answers are on the
Answer Booklet.
3. Marks will be awarded on the basis of what you write on both the Summary Answer Sheet and
the Detailed Answer Sheets in the Answer Booklet. Simple short answers and plots may be
directly entered in the Summary Answer Sheet. Marks may be deducted for absence of detailed
work in questions involving longer calculations.
4. Strike out any rough work that you do not want to be considered for evaluation. You may also
use the space on the Question Paper for rough work – this will NOT be evaluated.
5. Non-programmable scientific calculators are allowed. Mobile phones cannot be used as calcula-
tors.
6. Last page of the question paper can be used for rough work.
7. Please submit the Answer Booklet at the end of the examination. You may retain the
Question Paper.
Table of Constants
Speed of light in vacuum c 3.00 × 108 m·s−1
Planck’s constant h 6.63 × 10−34 J·s
Magnitude of electron charge e 1.60 × 10−19 C
Rest mass of electron me 9.11 × 10−31 kg
Value of 1/4πϵ0 9.00 × 109 N·m2 ·C−2
Acceleration due to gravity g 9.81 m·s−2
Please note that alternate/equivalent methods and different way of expressing

final solutions may exist. A correct method will be suitably awarded.
Page 2 Code 65 Questions Last six digits of Roll No.:
1. The ammeter-voltmeter method is widely used for measuring electrical resistances in the physics
laboratory. In this method, the resistance R is always derived from the readings V and I from a
voltmeter and an ammeter respectively, using Ohm’s law: R = V /I. While using this method, it
is assumed that the ammeter and voltmeter used in the setup are ideal. In this problem, we will
find the pitfalls of this assumption and devise a new setup with a better performance.
The standard ammeter-voltmeter setup consists of a DC voltage source (ε) maintained at a con-
stant voltage, a protection resistance (Rp ), an ammeter (A), and a voltmeter (V). The unknown in-
ternal resistances of the ammeter and the voltmeter are RA and RV , respectively. Also, RV ≫ RA .
We aim to measure the true value R of an unknown resistor.
We consider a two commonly used circuit configurations (1) and (2)

indicated by the two possible positions of the switch in the circuit
diagram shown below. Let the measured values of the resistance
R be Rm1 and Rm2 in the setups (1) and (2), respectively. The
relative error, ∆, is defined as the ratio of the absolute error of the
measurement to the actual value: ∆ = (Rm − R)/R.
(a) [2 marks] Obtain the relative errors in the measurements (∆1 and ∆2 ) for each of the above
configurations.
Solution:
Setup (1):
Current through the ammeter
V1 V1
I1 = +
R RV
whereas the voltage corresponds to the voltage across the voltmeter-resistance combina-
tion. Thus the measured resistance
V1 R
Rm1 = = (1.1)
I1 1 + RRV
1
∆1 = − (1.2)
1 + RRV
Setup (2):
Current through the ammeter
V2
I2 =
R + RA
Thus
V2
Rm2 = = R + RA (1.3)
I2
RA
∆2 = (1.4)
R
(b) [4 marks] Using exactly the same circuit elements, can you suggest a step by step procedure,
with the necessary circuit diagram(s), to measure the true value of the resistance R, regardless
of the values of the internal resistances of the ammeter and the voltmeter? You may use the
measurements made in part (a).
Solution:
1. We use the configuration shown below. When the switch is in position 1, ammeter
and voltmeter are in parallel and we calculate RA = V /I.
Page 3 Code 65 Questions
2. When we use the switch in position 2, the configuration is same as position 2 of

part (a).
R = Rm2 − RA
This will give the true value of the resistance.
2. [8 marks] Prof. Saha gave the following problem to four students.

In this problem work done by a system on its surroundings is taken as positive. A non-ideal gas
follows the Van der Waals equation of state
n2 a

P+ (V − nb) = nRT
V2
where P , V , and T denote the pressure, volume, and temperature, respectively; n is the number of
moles; R is the universal gas constant and a, b are dimensional positive constants. This gas expands
adiabatically from an initial temperature Ti and volume Vi to a final temperature Tf and volume
Vf . The adiabatic process is described by an equation of the form f (P, V ; n, a, b, α) = constant,
where α is a dimensionless number which is greater than 1. It is given that α → γ in the ideal gas
limit, where γ is the adiabatic exponent. What is the work (W ) done by the gas in the process?
The four students solved the problem independently and gave four different answers. Their answers
were:
nR nR
(a) W = 2 −1
(Ti − Tf ) + n a(Vf − Vi ) −1 (c) W = (Ti − Tf ) + n2 a(Vfα−1 − Viα−1 )
α−1 α − 1 " α−1 #
nR nR V f − nb
(b) W = (Tf − Ti ) + n2 a(Vf−1 − Vi−1 ) (d) W = (Ti − Tf ) 1 −
α−1 α−1 Vi − nb
Now, Prof. Saha had actually provided the exact expression of f (P, V ; n, a, b, α) to the students,
but could not remember it during evaluation. Still, he could determine that some or all of the
four answers above must be incorrect, based on general physical arguments alone.
Consider each of the four answers and give at least one reason for each of them showing why it is
wrong, or possibly correct. Note that you are not required to give a correct expression for W or a
detailed derivation for it in this question.
Solution:
(a) For adiabatic expansion, Tf < Ti , and Vf > Vi . Even though the first term is positive
and the second term is negative, it is possible to have W > 0, which is true for adiabatic
expansion. Also, in the ideal gas limit (α → γ and a → 0), this gives the correct expression.
So this may be the correct expression.
(b) For adiabatic expansion, Tf < Ti and Vf > Vi . Therefore, in this case W < 0, which is
incorrect.
(c) From Van der Waals equation, a/V has dimensions of energy. So aV α−1 cannot have
dimensions of energy, making this expression incorrect.
(d) Since Tf < Ti and Vf > Vi , here W < 0 making this incorrect.
3. Consider an electron (mass m, magnitude of charge e) moving initially around a nucleus of charge
2e in a circular orbit of radius 10−10 m. In this problem we use SI units throughout and neglect
all relativistic effects.
(a) [2 marks] Obtain the expression for the frequency, f , of the electron in the circular orbit
(numerical value is not required).
Solution:
The centripetal force for the circular motion of the electron is provided by the Coulomb
attraction of the nucleus. Let r be the radius of the circular orbit, and v the speed of the
electron in this orbit, then
mv 2 2e2
= (3.1)
r 4πϵ0 r2
1/2
v 2 e
f= = (3.2)
2πr 4πϵ0 m 2πr3/2
From classical electrodynamics, we know that an accelerated electron radiates energy. The expres-
sion for the power P of this radiation is given by
P = Kϵw x y z
0e a c
where a is the acceleration, c is the speed of light, ϵ0 is the permittivity of free space, and K is a
dimensionless constant.
(b) [2 marks] Obtain {w, x, y, z} using dimensional analysis.
Solution: w = −1, x = 2, y = 2, z = −3
Due to the loss of energy through radiation, the electron does not remain in the circular orbit,
and gradually spirals into the nucleus. Take the constant K to be 5.31 × 10−2 .
(c) [5 marks] Let T be the time it takes for the electron to reach the nucleus. Calculate T if
the radius of the nucleus is 10−14 m.
Solution:
The total energy of an electron in the orbit is
1 e2
E(r) = − (3.3)
4πϵ0 r
1 e2 ṙ
−Ė(r) = − (3.4)
4πϵ0 r2
the acceleration is
v2 1 2e2
a= = (3.5)
r 4πϵ0 mr2
We use Eq. (3.5) in the power radiated, which yields the energy loss rate
1 4e6
−Ė(r) = −K (3.6)
(4πϵ0 )2 ϵ0 c3 m2 r4
Here negative sign indicates that the energy of the electron is decreasing. Combining
Eqs. (3.4) and (3.6)

K4e4
r2 dr = − dt (3.7)
(4πϵ0 )ϵ0 c3 m2
Integrating the equation
10−14 T
K4e4
Z Z
2
r dr = − dt (3.8)
10−10 (4πϵ0 )ϵ0 c3 m2 0
which yields
10−30 (4πϵ0 )2 c3 m2
T ∼ ∼ 5.26 × 10−11 s. (3.9)
48π Ke4
4. [12 marks] Three thin convex lenses L1 , L2 , and L3 with focal lengths f1 , f2 , and f3 , respectively,
are arranged in order (L1 followed by L2 , followed by L3 from left to right) with their principal
axes coincident. The distance d12 between L1 and L2 , and the distance d23 between L2 and L3 are
such that d12 + d23 ≥ f1 + 4f2 + f3 . If a parallel beam of light incident on L1 at a small angle to
the principal axis remains parallel to itself when leaving the system after passing through L2 and
L3 , draw the appropriate ray diagram and determine d12 and d23 in terms of f1 , f2 , and f3 .
Solution:
An incoming parallel beam falling on the thin lens L1 will converge to a certain point A on
the focal plane of L1 . The point A serves as the point source for L2 whose image is formed
on the other side of L2 at a certain point B. The line AB must intersect the principal axis at
the pole O2 of L2 . For a parallel beam to emerge from L3 , B must lie in the focal plane of L3 .
The necessary ray diagram is drawn below.
Since α ≈ 0, we make the approximations

AA1 = f1 tan α ≈ f1 α
BB1 = f2 tan α ≈ f2 α
From magnification formula for lens L2 ,
BB1 f3 α v2 d23 − f3
= = =
AA1 f1 α −u2 d12 − f1
d12 d23
=⇒ = = k(say)
f1 f3
=⇒ d12 = kf1 and d23 = kf3
From the lens equation for lens L2 ,

1 1 1
− =
v 2 u2 f2
1 1 1
− =
(d23 − f3 ) −(d12 − f1 ) f2
1 1 1
+ =
f3 (k − 1) f1 (k − 1) f2
f 2 f2
=⇒ k =1+ +
f 1 f3
Then,
f1 f2
d12 = f1 + f2 +
f3
f2 f3
d23 = f2 + f3 +
f1
5. Two friends, Amina (A) and Beena (B), are sitting at diametrically opposite points of a merry-
go-round (taken as a circular disk in the horizontal plane) of radius R that is rotating at constant
angular speed ω in the anticlockwise direction, when viewed from the top (see figure below).
D
When Amina is at the position A (as shown in the figure), C
ω
she throws a ball with velocity ⃗u (relative to the merry-
go-round) in such a manner that Beena catches it when
she reaches the position C (∠BAC = α). Here ⃗u makes 90◦
α
an angle θ with respect to the horizontal, and ϕ is the A B
R O
angle made by the horizontal projection of ⃗u with respect
to the line AB. Neglect air resistance, friction, and the
effect of throwing or catching the ball on the speed of
the merry-go-round.
Top view
(a) [6 marks] Determine u, θ and ϕ, in terms of R, ω, α, and other relevant quantities.
Solution:
Point of throwing: A; Point of catching: C
Position of C at instant of projection: B
We take the point A as the origin and the x-axis along the diameter AB. The y-axis is in
the horizontal plane, perpendicular to AB. The z-axis is taken along vertical direction.
y
C z
ω
u u
R
ϕ α β A θ y
A x
R O P B
ϕ
x
Given, ω = angular speed of rotation; ⃗u = velocity of throwing

θ = Projection angle with respect to horizontal

ϕ = Projection angle with respect to diameter AB (x-axis)
α = ∠BAC =⇒ β = ∠BOC = 2α
Rβ Rβ 2α
Time of flight = time taken for B to reach C = T = = =
vs Rω ω
Equations of motion along three directions:
x: ux · T = AP
2α
=⇒ (u cos θ cos ϕ) · = R + R cos β = R(1 + cos 2α) = 2R cos2 α
ω
Rω
=⇒ u cos θ cos ϕ = cos2 α (5.1)
α
y : (uy − Rω) · T = CP
2α
=⇒ (u cos θ sin ϕ − Rω) · = R sin β = 2R sin α cos α
ω
Rω Rω
=⇒ u cos θ sin ϕ = sin α cos α + Rω = [sin α cos α + α] (5.2)
α α
1
z : uz · T − gT 2 = 0
2
gT gα
=⇒ u sin θ = = (5.3)
2 ω
Dividing eq. (5.2) by eq. (5.1),
sin α cos α + α
tan ϕ = = tan α + α sec2 α
cos2 α
=⇒ ϕ = tan−1 (tan α + α sec2 α) (5.4)
Squaring eqs. (5.1), (5.2), (5.3) and adding,
Rω 2 4

gα 2
u2 cos2 θ + u2 sin2 θ = cos α + sin2 α cos2 α + α2 + 2α sin α cos α +
α ω
2
Rω 2 gα 2

=⇒ u2 = cos α + 2α sin α cos α + α2 +

(5.5)
α ω
" #1/2
gα 2 Rω 2
cos2 α + 2α sin α cos α + α2

=⇒ u = + (5.6)
ω α
From (5.3) and (5.6),

 " #−1/2 
gα gα 2 Rω 2
cos2 α + 2α sin α cos α + α2

θ = sin−1  +  (5.7)
ω ω α
(b) [3 marks] If Amina throws the ball with ϕ = 60°, and appropriate values of θ and u such
that Beena can catch it, what is the magnitude of the displacement, s, of the ball when it is
caught by Beena? For this part only, take R = 1.5 m, and it is enough to state your answer
within a range of 0.5 m.
Solution:
The displacement of the ball is the length of AC = s = 2R cos α.
Thus we need to determine α when ϕ = 60°. Equation (5.4) can be used for this. Note
that values of θ and u are not needed.
Putting ϕ = 60° in equation (5.4), we have
√
f (α) = tan α + α sec2 α = tan 60° = 3
This equation cannot be solved analytically. We use trial values of α to find the solution
by interpolation.
2 2 √

1 π
f (π/6) = √ + √ = 1.275 < 3
3 6 3
π √ 2 √
f (π/4) = 1 + ( 2) = 2.571 > 3
4
Thus
π π
<α<
6
√ 4
3 1
=⇒ > cos α > √
2 2
√
3 1
=⇒ 2R > 2R cos α > 2R √
2 2
√ √
=⇒ 3R > s > 2R
Putting R = 1.5 m,
2.1 metre < s < 2.6 metre
Any answer that encloses the actual value of 2.4 m and has a range ≤ 0.5 m is acceptable.
(c) [0.5 marks] Determine the speed of throwing uD if Beena catches the ball at the point D
(∠BOD = 90◦ ), instead of C.
Solution:
π
This is a special case of the above, where α = . Using the above results,
4
gπ 2 4Rω 2 1 π π 2 1/2
" #
uD = + + + (5.8)
4ω π 2 4 16
(d) [3 marks] What should be the angular speed ωm of the merry-go-round for which the speed
of throwing uD will be minimum for Beena to catch the ball at the position D? What is this
minimum speed of throwing um ?
Solution:
This can be determined by finding the minimum of uD , or equivalently, u2D . From (5.8),
gπ 2 4Rω 2 1 π π 2
2
uD = + + +
4ω π 2 4 16
d(u2D ) (gπ)2 32R2 ωm 1 π π 2

∴ = 0 =⇒ − 3
+ + + =0
dω ωm 8ωm π2 2 4 16
4 g2π4
=⇒ ωm =
1 π π2

256R 2 + +
2 4 16
−1/4 r
π 1 π π2

g
=⇒ ωm = + +
4 2 4 16 R
Also,
d2 (u2D ) 3(gπ)2 32R2 1 π π 2

= + + + > 0.
dω 2 ωm
4
8ωm π2 2 4 16
implying u2D is minimum at ω = ωm .
1/2 1/2
1 π π2 1 π π2

∴ u2m = gR + + + gR + +
2 4 16 2 4 16
1/4
1 π π2

p
=⇒ um = + + 2gR
2 4 16
Alternative solution without calculus

Observe that
λ
u2D = 2 + µω 2
ω
2
1 π π2
gπ 2
4R
where λ = > 0, µ = + + > 0.
4 π 2 4 16
We can write √ !2
λ √ p
u2D = − ω µ + 2 λµ.
ω
The first term can be made zero by the choice of
1/4
λ
ω = ωm =
µ
√
leading to the minimum value of u2D as u2m = 2 λµ. Upon substituting the values of λ
and µ the desired expressions are obtained.
(e) [2.5 marks] Consider the case when Amina throws the ball when she is at A, and catches it
herself when she reaches the point B (Beena
p is not involved in this case). Take the angular
speed of the merry-go-round to be ω = g/R. Find u, θ and ϕ in this case.
Solution:
This case is NOT a special case of the above.
τ π
Now T = = .
2 pω
Further, ω = g/R.
The equations of motion are:
π 2Rω 2p
x : ux · T = AB =⇒ (u cos θ cos ϕ) · = 2R =⇒ u cos θ cos ϕ = = gR
ω π π
(5.9)
p
y : (uy − Rω) · T = 0 =⇒ u cos θ sin ϕ = Rω = gR (5.10)
1 gT πg π p
z : uz T − gT 2 = 0 =⇒ u sin θ = = = gR (5.11)
2 2 2ω 2
Dividing eq. (5.10) by eq. (5.9),
π π
tan ϕ = =⇒ ϕ = tan−1 = 57.52◦
2 2
Squaring eqs. (5.10) and (5.9), and adding,

2 2 4
u cos θ = gR 2 + 1
π
2 1/2
p π 4 p
=⇒ u = gR + 2 +1 = 1.97 gR (5.12)
4 π
Using eqs. (5.11) and (5.12),
−1/2
π π2

4
sin θ = + 2 +1 =⇒ θ = sin−1 (0.80) = 52.96◦
2 4 π
**** END OF THE QUESTION PAPER ****

Space for rough work — will NOT be submitted for evaluation

Dazuna Nsep Pyq

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dazuna Nsep Pyq

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSEP Questions and Solutions

INDIAN ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICS TEACHERS

Q.13 Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve around a

Sol. [B] Q.18 A long thin rod AB is charged uniformly. The

Q.29 Two identical thin planoconvex lenses of

Sol. [C] Sol. [C]

Q.49 Two card A and B are moving in the same m

Y Q.56 A metal rod of length 1 m is clamped at two

Sol. Refer to the ray diagram and write sin i1 = r/R

INDIAN ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICS TEACHERS

Q.6 A block of mass m is placed on a inclined plane cylinder

Sol. [A] Q.32 A sounding body emitting a frequency of 200

Q.31 A body in the form of a right circular cone of

Note that (λX/λY) = 2/3. To have equal Sol. [A,B ,C]

Sol. [B, C] Q.47 A concave lens is placed in the path of a

INDIAN ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICS TEACHERS

Q.1 The Schrodinger equation for a free electron of Sol. [B]

Sol. [C] Sol. [B]

Sol. [B] Q.12 A metal ball B1 (density 3.2 g / cc) is dropped

Q.15 Volume of a monatomic gas varies with its Sol. [B]

Sol. [D] Q.22 A convex lens forms a real image with

Q.35 An unpolarized light beam is incident on a Sol. [D]

Sol. [C, D] Q.48 In cyclotron (particle accelerator) an ion is

INDIAN ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICS TEACHERS

120° 120° Q.4 Identical point masses are placed at (n – 1)

Sol. [B] Sol. [D]

Sol. [A] Q.13 In the circuit shown, the potential differences

Q.11 A planet of mass m moves around the sun of C1 500 Ω

Sol. [D] Q.29 A photon of wavelength λ (less than threshold

Q.32 The voltage over a cycle varies as Sol. [B]

Q.33 Young's double slit experiment is first × × v × ×

Sol. [B] r Sol. []

Q.44 A transistor is connected in common emitter Sol. [A, B, C]

(A) increasing the thermal conductivity of outer PART B Marks : 60

coefficient De are respectively

Sol. Principle of dimensional homogeneity : eneEx is current density

n – charge carrier concentration (m-3)

3. A vibratory motion is represented by

National Standard Exam in Physics – 2011 Page 1

Sol. Amplitudes of individual components :

a) s2/3 b) s1/2 c) s5/3 d) s0

Sol. Force acting on the body : F = k𝑠 −1/3

Power delivered to the body: p = Fv = k 𝑠 −1/3 {𝑘 s1/3} = s0

5. Bamboo strips are hinged to form three rhombi as shown. Point A0

a) 2:3 b) 3:5 c) 3:2 d) 5:2

Sol. From the properties of the rhombus:

National Standard Exam in Physics – 2011 Page 2

Sol. Initial momentum of the particle : pi = mv

p = √(𝑚𝑣)2 + (𝑚𝑣)2 − (𝑚𝑣)2 = mv

a) 𝑚1 𝑝1 + 𝑚2 𝑝2 b) 𝑚1 𝑝2 + 𝑚2 𝑝1 c) 𝑚1 𝑝2 (𝑝1 + 𝑝2 ) d) (𝒎𝟏 + 𝒎𝟐 )𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟐

Sol. Number of moles of the gas remains constant : n1 + n2 = n

Sol. 2 𝑟 2 𝑔(𝜌𝑜 −𝜌𝑚 )

Radius of each drop : r

9. An elevator of mass M is accelerated upwards by applying a force F. A mass m is initially situated

National Standard Exam in Physics – 2011 Page 3

Sol. Acceleration of the freely falling body: g m/s2

a) 3.75 nm b) 0.0375 nm c) 0.750 nm d) 0.375 nm

Sol. Potential energy of the material : E (r) = - Ar-6 + Br-12

a) 1:1 b) 9:8 c) 8:9 d) zero

National Standard Exam in Physics – 2011 Page 4

a) 23.5  b) 38.0  c) 19.0  d) 25.0 

a) 0.60 s b) 0.33 s c) 3.3 s d) 1.2 s

Sol. Net force acting on the block : Fnet = ma